Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Mon, 27 Nov 2023 20:58:16 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 Outdoor Gear | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/outdoor-gear/ 32 32 Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off https://www.popsci.com/gear/solar-generator-deals-anker-jackery-amazon-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 20 Nov 2023 21:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590790
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Some of the best solar generators on the market are currently at their cheapest prices ever for Black Friday at Amazon.

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A solar generator is a sizable investment, but can really save you in a pinch. These portable power stations store enough juice in their built-in batteries to keep your devices, appliances, and anything else that requires electricity going when the grid isn’t an option. Cyber Monday has brought some of the deepest discounts we’ve ever seen on brands like Bluetti, Jackery, Anker, and Ecoflow, so we’ve collected the best Black Friday deals on solar generators we’ve seen so far.

Anker SOLIX C1000 Portable Power Station, 1800W Solar Generator $649 (was $999)

Anker Solix solar generator sitting on an angle on a plain background

Anker

SEE IT

This is Anker’s newest portable power station, and it’s cheaper than we’ve ever seen it for Black Friday. The super-fast battery charges to 100 percent from zero in just under an hour so that it can be ready on short notice. It offers six full-sized outlets (with ground), two USB-C ports, and two USB-A ports for powering devices. That’s more than you’ll find on many similar models. Plus, the internal battery has enough juice to charge an iPhone nearly 100 times or keep a camp light going for up to 60 hours.

Jackery solar generator deals

Ecoflow solar generator deals

Bluetti solar generator deals

Ugreen solar generator deals

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers https://www.popsci.com/gear/jbl-sony-bose-bluetooth-speaker-amazon-deal-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592368
The best Bluetooth speaker Cyber Monday deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These deals include speakers of every size and shape to deliver beats at prices you can't beat

The post The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best Bluetooth speaker Cyber Monday deals
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cyber Monday is officially here, and you can save big on everything from smart home tech and soundbars to sought-after Bluetooth speakers—essential for anyone who wants to listen to music with friends and family this holiday season. Many of the deals we’ve found are discounts on Bluetooth speakers that have found themselves in our buyer’s guides. If your current Bluetooth speaker is on the fritz, or you’d like to treat yourself (or someone you know) to an audio upgrade they can appreciate on the go (or with a wireless turntable), don’t miss these limited-time deals.

Sony SRS-XE200 $97.95 (Was $129.99)

Sony SRS-XE200

Sony

SEE IT

Sony SRS-XE200 is an excellent mid-sized Bluetooth speaker whose Cyber Monday discount brings it down to its lowest price ever. The speaker has a pair of drivers and passive radiators for well-balanced sound, a battery that lasts up to 16 hours per charge, and an IP67 durability rating, which means it’s dustproof and can be completely submerged under water. The SRS-XE200 can also take advantage of Sony’s Wireless Party Connect feature, allowing you to sync up to 100 speakers. A built-in strap makes the speaker easy to carry or hang outdoors. This Bluetooth speaker even has a microphone, so you can use it as a speakerphone.

Sony Bluetooth speaker deals

Sonos Bluetooth speaker deals

JBL Bluetooth speaker deals

Bose Bluetooth speaker deals

Ultimate Ears Bluetooth speaker deals

Bang & Olufsen Bluetooth speaker deals

Marshall Bluetooth speaker deals

TREBLAB Bluetooth speaker deals

Tribit Bluetooth speaker deals

Soundcore Bluetooth speaker deals

The post The best Cyber Monday deals on expert-approved Bluetooth speakers appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/govee-smart-lights-amazon-deal-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 11:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592187
Govee smart LED strip lights lit up in different colors with the control app in the foreground
Govee

Govee smart lights add tons of illumination options to the inside and outside of your home. They're all on sale for Cyber Monday at Amazon.

The post Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Govee smart LED strip lights lit up in different colors with the control app in the foreground
Govee

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Holiday lights are fun, but keeping them up all year round can bring about the judgy comments from friends and visitors. Govee smart lights, however, allow you to keep festive illumination around your space all year with no fear of judgment. They make everything from behind-the-TV lights to improve your binge-watching experience to outdoor illumination and simple LED light strips. Right now, Amazon has Govee smart lights up to 44 percent off for Cyber Monday. Fight off those winter blues with some saucy red lights.

Govee Smart Outdoor String Lights $57 (was $99)

Govee smart lights lit up with colors next to the app and the packaging on a plain background

Govee

SEE IT

This ample kit gets you 96 total feet of RGB bulbs that you can program to show up to 16 million colors in 47 different program modes. So, decorate the outside space at your home for the holidays with red and green bulbs. Then, once the holidays are over, switch them over to white (or whatever color you want). They’re IP65-rated against the elements, so you can leave them up in the weather without worrying about them. This is a great, easy, and now affordable way to upgrade your outdoor space.

More Govee smart lighting deals

The post Our favorite smart lighting from Govee is up to 44% off for Cyber Monday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-solar-generator-amazon-deals-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 10:28:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592145
Jackery 2000 plus solar generator sitting on a paved driveway
Stan Horaczek

Whether you need a small portable power station or a massive solar generator, these Cyber Monday deals on Jackery products will save lots of cash.

The post These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery 2000 plus solar generator sitting on a paved driveway
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We’re huge fans of solar generators around here. Yes, they’re an investment, but they can really come in handy when the power goes out or you head out into the wilderness. Jackery regularly tops our lists of the best solar generators and portable power stations because the company builds sturdy, powerful, reliable products that excel in our hands-on tests. Amazon has a bunch of fantastic Jackery deals for Cyber Monday right now, but they’ll only last as long as they’re in stock, so grab one to ensure your back-up power will last.

Jackery Explorer 1500 Pro Portable Power Station $899 (was $1,699)

Home photo

Jackery

SEE IT

While Cyber Monday is notorious for fake deals that only offer a discount on jacked-up prices, that’s not the case here. This 1800W charger typically actually sells for more than $1,600, which makes this nearly half-off the regular price. It offers a total of eight outputs, including three typical outlets, two USB-A, two USB-C, and a 12V DC port for RV travelers. With this much power stored up, it can charge an iPhone more than 60 times. Plus, it can run a TV for up to 17 hours, and power all sorts of tools if you’re using it on a work site. It’s super-versatile and weighs less than 40 pounds, which makes it very easy to lug around thanks to the super-sturdy built-in handle.

More Jackery portable power station and solar generator deals

The post These limited Cyber Monday deals have Jackery generators at their lowest prices of the year appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow pants for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-pants/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 21:05:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snow-pants/
A lineup of the best snow pants on a white background.
Amanda Reed

What’s the best way to combat winter weather? Buy the right gear.

The post The best snow pants for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best snow pants on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiing A person wearing an orange pair of Outdoor Research Men's Snowcrew pants Outdoor Research Men's Snowcrew Pants
SEE IT

These pants are maximally waterproof, so you can spend all day on the mountain without worrying whether or not you’ll stay dry.
Best for women A person wearing Stio women's snow pants in front of a tree with snow on the ground Stio Women's Doublecharge Insulated Pant
SEE IT

This design is both comfortable and stretchy for ample range of motion.
Best budget A person wearing Arctix Mens Snow Sports Cargo Pants on a plain background Arctix Men's Snow Sports Cargo Pants
SEE IT

ThermaTech insulation keeps you warm in temperatures as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit.

Snow pants are the ultimate winter weather accessory: They keep you warm, don’t encumber movement, and fit right on top of the clothes you’re already wearing (meaning, if you live in a snowy area, you’d be remiss not to own a pair). Whether you’re backcountry skiing, flying down the slopes on a snowboard, or walking the kids to school in a blizzard (uphill … both ways), insulated pants are the way to go to prepare for the inevitable frigid days. Owning the right winter gear can make the outdoors bearable in icy temperatures, so you don’t need to sit inside all season long. While you might be imagining the vibrantly colored snow gear popularized in the ’60s and ’70s, there have been some serious strides in snow pants design, with breathability, insulation, and style innovations. But that also means it’s easy to become overwhelmed with choice, and it’s often unclear which pair will be best for you. The best snow pants are designed with waterproofing and warmth and comfortable wandering in mind.

How we chose the best snow pants

The best snow pants should keep you warm with enough space to move around for action-packed activities (or just breaking out a snow blower or snow shovel). With that in mind, we looked at critical reviews, peer recommendations, performed user testing, and conducted heavy research to narrow down our options.

The best snow pants: Reviews & Recommendations

When it comes to finding the best pair of snow pants for you this winter, it’s important to consider a few specific factors: fit, versatility, breathability, and price. With those categories in mind, we’ve pinpointed the best snow pants for skiing, snowboarding, snowshoes, and various other outdoor activities available today.

Best overall: The North Face Freedom Snow Pants

A person wearing the North Face Men’s Freedom Snow Pants on a plain background

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Breathable and waterproof, these insulated snow pants will keep you warm through snowball fights to shredding gnar.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-2XL
  • Inseam: Short (30″), Regular (32″), Long (34″)
  • Pockets: Hook and loop cargo pocket, zip hand pockets, side-entry zip pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Gaiters keep snow out of boots
  • Lots of storage
  • Breathable, waterproof fabric

Cons

  • The short inseam is long at 30 inches

With waterproof fabric and plenty of storage (and air vents), these North Face insulated snow pants are the perfect fit for any winter activity. Recycled insulated lining keeps you warm even if you fall in wet snow, and gaiters with tough elastic keep snow out of your boots and pant legs.

Best for skiing: Outdoor Research Men’s Snowcrew Pants

A person wearing an orange pair of Outdoor Research Men's Snowcrew pants

Outdoor Research

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Windproofing and seam taping mean you’ll stay warm as you zip down the mountain.

Specs

  • Size range: S-3XL
  • Inseam: 29.5 inches (short); 30 inches (regular); 33.5 inches (tall)
  • Pockets: Zip hand pockets
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Durable
  • Inner thigh vents for temperature control
  • Reinforced scuff guards

Cons

  • Zippers prone to snagging when closing pockets

Whether it’s a sunny winter’s day or the snow is coming down hard, these ski snow pants will get through a full day on the mountain, with no adjustments required. Waterproof fabric, combined with a breathable shell, makes them both reliable and comfortable. Stretch gaiters stop the snow from sneaking in, and reinforced scuff guards provide additional durability. A beacon pocket is designed specifically to include an avalanche beacon for peak safety. These pants prove you don’t have to sacrifice mobility and range of motion for style and durability.

Best for snowboarding: Burton Men’s Insulated Covert Ski/Snowboarding Pant

A brown-gray pair of Burton Men's Insulated Covert Ski/Snowboarding Pant on a plain background

Burton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A “just right” fit and a jacket-to-pant attachment system keep snow out for more time outdoors.

Specs

  • Size range: 2XS-3XL
  • Inseam: 30.5-34.5 inches
  • Pockets: Zippered hand warmer pockets, zippered thigh pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Tapered seams
  • Not too tight, not too baggy
  • Vents for breathability

Cons

  • Waist runs small
  • Reviews note that the crotch is tight

These men’s snowboarding pants are not kidding around: created for those of us who like to leave it all on the field (or, more accurately, on the slopes), the Burton Men’s Insulated Covert Ski/Snowboarding Pant are meant to maximize performance, no matter the weather. They’re also designed to be more fitted and stylish for men who want to look fly while flying down the slopes. Breathable, mesh-lined fabric cut to provide an excellent fit makes for an unencumbered ride, while fully tapered seams keep the chill out.

Best for women: Stio Women’s Doublecharge Insulated Pant

A person wearing Stio women's snow pants in front of a tree with snow on the ground

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fitted, flexible, and GORE-TEX 2L insulation allows these pants to outlast every snow bro on the mountain.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-XL
  • Inseam: 32 inches
  • Pockets: Hand pockets, zippered cargo pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • No-snag inner thigh vents
  • Fitted and flexible
  • Snow-proof gaiters

Cons

  • Limited size range

These women’s snowboarding pants do everything the men’s pants do and then some. Toeing the line between fitted and flexible, they’re also waterproof and boast hidden inner thigh vents, articulated knees, and expandable snow-proof gaiters. Combined with the Smartwool Women’s Classic Thermal Merino Base Layer Bottom, these pants proved up to the task of keeping these legs warm even during a January jaunt in Jackson Hole, Wyoming. However, if you don’t like a low-waisted fit, these might not be the right pants for you.

Best for mountaineering: Arc’Teryx Alpha SV Men’s Bib

A black Arc'Teryx Alpha SV Men's Bib on a plain background

Arc’Teryx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You’ll be warm sans puff when you splurge on these sporty snow pants.

Specs

  • Size range: S-XL
  • Inseam: 31.5-33 inches
  • Pockets: Two zippered thigh pockets
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Made for severe weather conditions
  • Easy to move in
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Limited size range
  • Expensive

If you’re looking for something that’s built for hardcore outdoor activities like ice climbing and alpine exploring, there’s no better place to look than Arc’Teryx. The company’s Alpha SV Men’s Bib is made of durable GORE-TEX for extreme waterproofing and windproofing while maintaining breathability. Locking severe weather out without locking sweat in, the bib is built for climbing and alpine-focused systems with a warm base layer, which also means you won’t have to figure out how to get into a harness with your gear on. An articulated fit moves with you as you traverse up the mountain, removable knee pads provide impact protection, and an embedded RECCO reflector could aid in search and rescue if that movement is curtailed (our editor has an Alpha jacket he swears by, and while he really doesn’t want to get caught in an avalanche, he likes feeling prepared). It’s a splurge, but something for this level of technical performance is worth the dough.

Best ski bib: Stio Men’s Environ Bib

The Stio Men's Environ ski bib on a plain background

Stio

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This ski bib is machine washable and breathable, making your snow days less of a headache.

Specs

  • Size range: S-2XL
  • Inseam: 30-34 inches
  • Pockets: Zippered handwarmer pockets, zippered thigh pocket
  • Waterproof: Yes

Pros

  • Outseam vents
  • Moisture wicking
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

This high-waisted, suspender-snappin’ Stio bib works for snowboarding and skiing, so if you’re just dipping your toes into the world of bibs, this is a great place to start. Its high-tech fabric actually repels moisture for all-day warmth, and if you work up a sweat, outseam venting allow for extra breathability.

Best for kids: Arctix Kids Insulated Snow Bib Overalls

A pair if Arctix children's snow pants on a white and blue gradient background

Arctix

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Reinforcements on ankles, scruff guards, and hems prevent wear and tear for seasons of use.

Specs

  • Size range: XS-XL
  • Inseam: 21-30
  • Pockets: Zippered hand warmer pocket
  • Waterproof: Water-resistant

Pros

  • Husky sizes included
  • Machine washable
  • Lightweight and low-bulk

Cons

  • Not completely waterproof

Kids are notorious for growing quickly and bulldozing through clothes. A range of sizes and inseams means there’s something that will fit your child, and its wallet-friendly price point means it won’t cost a fortune to replace. However, this affordable ski bib is reinforced on the ankles, scruff guards, and hems to prevent tears and rips. An O-ring helps hold important items like gloves and keys, and ThermaTech insulation keeps them warm sans bulk. A variety of colors means your kid can be the most stylish child on the ski lift.

Best budget: Arctix Men’s Snow Sports Cargo Pants

A person wearing Arctix Mens Snow Sports Cargo Pants on a plain background

Arctix

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need to break the bank to find a quality pair of warm, durable snow pants.

Specs

  • Size range: S-4XL
  • Inseam: Short (30 inches), regular (32 inches), long (34 inches)
  • Pockets: Cargo pockets, zippered hand warmer pockets
  • Waterproof: Water-resistant

Pros

  • Wide size range
  • Machine washable
  • Adjustable waist

Cons

  • Not completely waterproof

Available in both men’s and women’s styles, these incredibly budget-friendly snow pants keep you warm in temperatures down to -20 degrees Fahrenheit, thanks to 85 grams of ThermaTech insulation. Articulated knees allow for the full range of motion, plus boot zippers and gaiters seal out snow.

What to consider when buying the best snow pants

At this point, you might wonder: Is there a difference between snow pants and ski pants? While both will work on the slopes, there are important differences when it comes to fit—namely, ski pants are more fitted, while snow pants are baggier, and thus allow for more movement. With that in mind, we’ve curated the best snow pants money can buy (and if you’re wondering what else to wear to keep warm, check out our guides to the best heated vests, best heated insoles, and best heated socks). Here’s what else to look for in your search for the best snow pants:

You’ll want a pair fit for backcountry skiing

When you’re shopping for snow pants, it’s important to take note of reputable, trustworthy brands, and that’s because they’ve done the work to establish a legacy of clothing design backed by research and reviews. Case in point: Outdoor Research, founded in 1981 by bonafide outdoorsman Ron Gregg. For this winter sport, you’ll want to prioritize protection, comfort, and durability, so that you can focus on skiing and rely on your snow gear sans stress.

What if you partake in more than one winter sport?

We get it: Not everyone is born on one side of the skiing versus snowboarding debate and, regardless, some people want to dip their toes in both sports (to which we say, the more, the merrier). Obviously, there is ideal winter gear for each sport, but that doesn’t mean that more versatile outdoor apparel doesn’t exist. On the contrary, there are plenty of brands that offer snow pants for the avid generalist—but, sometimes, that means you’ll be shelling out for the perfect pair.

How to measure your body for snow pants

It’s like finding the perfect pair of jeans: the waist and hip measurements are key, and when your performance depends, in part, on the shape and material of your gear, you want it all to fit just right.

When to consider a ski bib instead of snow pants

We know what you’re thinking: Are snow bibs actually better than snow pants? The answer is, of course, that everyone has their preference—and there is no end-all-be-all answer to this conundrum. So, if you’re feeling indecisive about this all-important gear decision, just know that you’re not alone. The basic difference is this: ski bibs are like overalls (they definitely won’t fall down, but they might hamper movement) while snow pants are, well, pants (they totally could fall down if they don’t fit correctly). You’ve likely tried on both types of garments in your lifetime, so use that prior knowledge to decide and leave the tags on until you’re sure. Et voila! Crisis averted.

Budget

You know as well as we do: not everyone wants to spend $500 on a pair of pants, even if they have the means to do so. Of course, like most purchases, you get what you pay for when it comes to winter clothing—and when you want a good deal, you might miss out on things like high-tech performance fabric, or extra features like thigh vents and hidden pockets. Luckily, that won’t really deter you on the slopes—but it could mean that some snow is able to sneak in, and your gear isn’t as waterproof as it could be. That said, it feels really good to save upwards of $300, right?

FAQs

Q: Is there a difference between snow pants and ski pants?

Ski pants are designed to have a snugger fit, though not snow leggings snug, while snow pants are looser and more flexible in sizing—meaning that for the former, you’ll want to find a pair that fits really well. No one wants to go down the mountain in too-tight pants.

Q: How much do snow pants cost?

Like most clothing made from technical fabric(s), snow pants generally cost in the $100-$200 range. There are budget options available for less than 100 bucks, however, that still offer insulation and durability.

Q: What are some other top ski brands to buy snow pants from?

While we listed quite a few brands above, you’ll see plenty more on the slopes. If you don’t find a perfect match from the likes of Patagonia, The North Face, or Arc’teryx, consider Helly Hansen, Flylow, Stio, or Fawk.

Q: Are snow bibs better than snow pants?

As we’ve already said, it all comes down to personal taste: do you prefer the flexibility of pants or the security of overalls? If you’ve got a jacket in mind, too, consider buying a matching set, where the top latches onto the bottoms. Or maybe you want more variety with the bib, which will fit under basically anything you wear up top. It’s up to you!

Q: Can you put snow pants in the washing machine?

Generally, yes. The washing instructions will most likely instruct you to wash them in cold water on the delicate cycle and hang dry. Double-check the laundry tag inside the pants or the manufacturer’s website for complete washing and drying instructions.

Q: What should I layer underneath my snow pants?

We recommend putting something thin and warm under your snow pants. That can be a merino wool base layer or your favorite pair of leggings. We’ve done both, and we prefer the wool base layer thanks to merino wool’s natural temperature-regulating properties.

Q: Should I choose insulated or uninsulated pants?

It depends on the temperature of the mountain. Our ethos is that it’s easier and more comfortable to vent your pants than to try and squeeze into your pants with an extra layer. Go for uninsulated if you’re using the pants for shoveling the driveway; reach for insulated if you’ve already bought your season-long ski pass and are waiting for the first fall of snow.

Q: How important is waterproofing for my snow pants?

How much do you like a soggy bum? In all seriousness, waterproofed pants mean rogue snow won’t get in your boots (thanks to the gaiters) and you’ll stay warm and comfortable as you go up and down the slopes. No one wants to cut their ski day short because they’re a sad, soppy mess from pants that are snowproofed.

Final thoughts on the best snow pants

Snow pants, like the best snow boots, are an essential piece of winter gear if you’re headed to the slopes, and they also come in handy around the neighborhood when a big storm hits (think: you’re sledding down the hill or walking the dog in 2 feet of snow, and you don’t want to get soaked). When you’re shopping for the best snow pants, it’s important to consider your options and figure out what features matter most to you, like fit or material. Find a pair that you love enough, and you might actually be sad to say goodbye to winter. You never know!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow pants for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best RV generators in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-rv-generators/ Fri, 17 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589748
The best RV Generators
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

These highly portable, highly reliable generators will keep the juice flowing no matter where you roam.

The post The best RV generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best RV Generators
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator
SEE IT

Super portable, quiet, and durable with solid specs for most RVs, this offers pretty much everything you could want while camping.
Best portable Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000 Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000
SEE IT

Big expandable capacity, fast charging, and comparatively silent operation make it ideal for RVs.
Best budget GENMAX Portable Inverter Generator Genmax Portable Inverter Generator
SEE IT

Portable, decently powerful, and easy to use, it delivers a lot at a low cost.

RV generators have become increasingly essential as RVs themselves have become increasingly power-hungry. From larger TVs and refrigerators to more powerful air conditioners to an ever-expanding array of devices, today’s RVs use more electricity than ever, and a generator is the best way to meet that demand whether you’re heading off for a weekend jaunt or hitting the open road for many days or even weeks on end. But there are countless generators on the market, many of which are not well suited for RVs for one reason or another. To help navigate and narrow down the many options, below you’ll find tested recommendations for the best RV generators to suit a variety of situations.  

How we chose the best RV generators

I’ve spent some 40 years camping in just about every manner imaginable, and that has involved using dozens of combinations of RVs, van conversions, and portable power stations across a variety of scenarios. Accordingly, I know all too well which generators will suit which purposes and which aren’t up to the task in the first place. I’ve used this experience in testing home generators, power banks for camping, and other gear for publications like Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. In some cases, I looked to reviews from other experts, as well as real-world buyers on sites like Amazon, to verify that these picks truly are excellent generators for RVs.

The best RV generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Power generators can be essential to charging all the other electricity-hungry items you might take with you and your RV, like laptops, drones, ebikes, etc. The generators below represent a wide range of needs, formates, budgets, and power demands. As you’ll be transporting them, all are at least relatively portable, though some are more portable than others. Each, however, will deliver outstanding performance in a specific realm and certainly rank among the best RV generators in 2023.

Best overall: Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator

Honda EU2200IC Companion Portable Generator

Honda

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs

Pros

  • Very portable
  • Very durable
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Very expensive

We named the Honda EU2200i Companion our best portable generator overall, and it tops our list here, too, because it offers pretty much everything you could want from an RV generator, albeit at a high price. Compact and clocking in just over 45 pounds, it’s about as easy to lug along camping as can be. It’s one of the quietest generators on the market, which is an essential consideration while enjoying the great outdoors. And it’s built with Honda’s famed craftsmanship, meaning it will last through many years of overland adventure.

True, its output isn’t the highest on the list. But its 1,800W running wattage is more than enough for most typical RV needs, providing plenty of juice for an AC, lighting, and a smattering of devices and small appliances. And thanks to its 30 amp receptacle, if you need a bit of added oomph, it can be chained to another generator and run in parallel. It’s also highly efficient, with its 1.1-gallon tank lasting between 3.2-8 hours depending on power demands. 

No other generator offers such a perfect balance of portability, performance, and durability. While you’re certainly paying for all this capability, this is the standard bearer for RV generator greatness. 

Best dual-fuel: Wen DF475T Dual-Fuel Generator

Wen DF475T Dual Fuel Generator

Wen

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: Gas – 4,750 peak / 3,800 running; Propane – 4,350 peak / 3,500 running
  • Power source: Gas or propane
  • Weight: 105.8 lbs.

Pros

  • Affordable dual fuel
  • Decent specs
  • Relatively portable

Cons

  • Still somewhat heavy

Dual-fuel generators running on both gas and propane are an excellent option for RVs as they can hook directly to your RV propane tank in a pinch (so don’t use it all for the grill). This is not only highly convenient, but propane runs a bit quieter and produces less emissions than gas, helping to preserve the natural setting. And the Wen DF475T is not only dual-fuel, it’s dual-fuel at a budget price, which is exceedingly hard to find. It also delivers solid specs. Its 3,500W running output is more than enough for just about any RV. 

While it’s just shy of 100-pound weight and isn’t exactly feather-light, it’s still reasonably movable, especially thanks to its sturdy handles and wheels. And for a generator this affordable, it scores surprisingly high in the lifespan category, with many owners reporting that theirs has held up through long and hard use.

Best portable: Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000

Goal Zero 4000

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 7,200 peak / 3,600 running 
  • Power source: Solar or wall outlet
  • Weight: 115.7 lbs

Pros

  • Solid electrical performance
  • Lots of ports
  • Expandable capacity

Cons

  • Pricey

These days portable power stations are an increasingly popular alternative to loud, polluting gas generators, and the Goal Zero Yeti PRO 4000 is among the most RV-ready around. With its massive 3,993Wh capacity, it will keep a full-sized fridge going for 51 hours, and its 3,600W output is plenty to power pretty much anything you could want to run in an RV, though an air conditioner would drain it fairly fast. However, add on between one and four of Goal Zero’s 4,000W expansion batteries, and its capacity becomes enormous. 

While it’s a bit heavy, it’s surprisingly movable thanks to a retractable handle and wheels that are hidden in the base. All in all, if you’re looking for a big, portable box of power, this is about as big yet portable as they come.

Best solar: Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus Solar Generator+Manual Transfer Switch

Jackery 2000 Plus

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 6,000 peak / 3,000 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall outlet
  • Weight: 140.36 lbs

Pros

  • Solid electrical performance
  • Very portable
  • Expandable

Cons

  • Deploying solar panels takes some trial and error

For a full solar array that delivers plenty of power while somehow still remaining extremely portable, check out the Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus. The full solar generator package includes not only the 2000 Plus power station itself, but also two 200W solar panels and a 2000Wh expansion battery—everything you need to keep your RV charged wherever the sun shines.

Its solid 4,000Wh capacity and 3,000W output are solid numbers for a solid generator, and thanks to its rapid recharge rate, it tops off fast over the course of a moderately to majorly sunny day. And while its weight might seem heavy when read off the page, keep in mind that its weight is distributed across four separate components, each of which is easy to lift. So it offers plenty of power in a plenty portable package.  

Best lightweight: Generac 7128 GP3500iO 3,500W Generator

Generac 7128 GP3500iO

Generac

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 3,500 peak / 3,000 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 74.3 lbs

Pros

  • Solid performance specs
  • Light for a full-sized generator
  • Quiet

Cons

  • Wheels would be a nice addition

Look far and wide, and you’ll be hard-pressed to find a generator that offers such great wattage output in such a lightweight package. While the Generac 7128 GP3500iO churns out a solid 3,000W—more than enough to power pretty much all and everything in an RV—it also weighs in at just over 74 pounds, which is light enough for a single person to carry. While wheels would boost movability a bit, it’s still very carriable, especially considering its specs.

It’s also considerably quieter than most generators of its wattage, producing roughly the same volume as a vacuum cleaner. And according to reviewers, it holds up strong under long hours and high power loads. In other words, it offers pretty much everything you could want from any generator, yet it’s lighter than the competition to boot.

Best budget: Genmax Portable Inverter Generator

GENMAX Portable Inverter Generator

GENMAX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,000 peak / 1,600 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 34 lbs

Pros

  • Good wattage for an RV
  • Very portable
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Limited plugs

It’s pretty difficult to find a well-built generator with the specs to power an RV for less than $400, but the Genmax Portable Inverter Generator delivers. Its 1,600W output is enough to keep all the essentials going in your RV, And if the need for more power does arise, it’s parallel ready for chaining to a second generator. 

At just 34 pounds, it’s also about as light as a generator can be. All told, if you’re searching for decent specs and great portability on a budget, look no further.

What to consider when shopping for the best RV generators

An RV generator is obviously an investment, but also in terms of your comfort and safety when you’re relying on it to keep the lights on. With this in mind, here are a few key considerations when choosing which is right for you.

Power output

If it’s not powerful enough to suit your needs, what’s the point? A generator’s “rated” or “running” wattage indicates how much it is capable of producing under normal conditions, with the “peak” or “surge” wattage indicating the extent to which it can max out in order to provide for the momentary usage spikes that occur when starting an appliance, power tool, or air conditioner. Be sure that these numbers will deliver on your power needs. 

With an RV generator, you generally need something that will produce a minimum of 1,500W to power the air conditioner plus a few other essentials, or the entire RV without the air conditioner. With that as your floor, you typically won’t need more than 3,500-4,000W unless you have a particularly power-thirsty RV.

Fuel type 

All of the generators on this list run on either gas, propane, or solar/electrical power. Gas is dependable and accessible but produces the most noise and emissions. A dual-fuel generator can also operate on propane, which is a bit quieter and produces slightly less emissions. Solar generators and power stations can be charged either by wall socket or solar panel, and while they are the eco-friendly, basically silent option, they can only be recharged if you have access to sun or electricity. 

Starter type

All of the gas generators on this list include both traditional recoil cord starters plus electric starters. The former is reliable under all circumstances but can be very physically demanding, while the latter is effortless but requires that you keep the starter battery charged. The solar and power station options are as easy as can be as they are essentially plug-and-play.

Operating noise

A major consideration when RVing—whether out in nature or in a crowded campground—involves noise. Gas is the loudest with propane running slightly quieter, while solar is the winner in terms of keeping the peace. The smaller the generator the less volume, and some brands have equipped their products with thick shielding to reduce noise, though they tend to cost a bit more. Consider how much noise is tolerable, then make compromises in power and price accordingly.

Plugs

While it’s always nice to have plenty of plug options on your generator, when it comes to RVs in particular, your main priority should be to find one with a 30 amp plug capable of powering your rig. All of the inclusions on this list feature 30A ports except for the Jackery and Genmax, which are, however, compatible with a 20A to 30A adapter.

FAQs

Q: How long can you run an RV generator continuously?

This depends on the fuel capacity and model specifications, but generally you can expect them to run anywhere between 6-16 hours. Be sure to adhere to all manufacturer recommendations, and never refill the fuel tank while the generator is running. 

Q: How often should you start an RV generator while in storage?

A well-maintained generator can be stored without much worry, but to ensure that fuel resting in the components doesn’t muck up the works, it’s a good idea to fire it up at least once a month. 

Q: Can a generator operate in the rain or snow?

Running a wet generator can pose risks to both you and the generator. Keep the generator out of the rain or snow, especially while running. Many brands offer covers to protect their products from the elements. 

Q: Can a generator operate in the rain or snow?

If your generator is getting unusually loud and struggling to keep up with the power demands, it’s likely that it is overloaded. This can cause damage to both the generator itself and the electronics it is powering. To avoid this, stay without your generator’s output capacity by prioritizing essential devices and appliances. 

Final thoughts on the best RV generators

A quality RV generator will be a great companion through many years of camping. Be sure to get one that suits your power needs, maintain it properly, and it can easily last for a decade or more. While there are a lot of great models out there, those we’ve recommended above are picks you can depend on. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best RV generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best water bottles for the gym in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-water-bottles-for-the-gym/ Fri, 17 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589682
A lineup of the best water bottles for the gym
Amanda Reed

Stay hydrated while working on your gains with these fun, colorful water bottles.

The post The best water bottles for the gym in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best water bottles for the gym
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A person holding a green and pink Owala FreeSip water bottle in front of a brick wall. Owala FreeSip Insulated Stainless Steel Water Bottle
SEE IT

Sip two ways with this stylish, colorful bottle.
Best tumbler A person standing against a brick wall holding a green Pelican Porter Pelican Hydration Pelican Porter
SEE IT

Water stays cold all day in this trendy cup.
Best budget A person holding three Nalgene water bottles and standing against a brick wall. Nalgene Sustain Tritan BPA-Free Water Bottle
SEE IT

A cheap classic that gets the job done.

A water bottle is a gym must-have. Cacti can survive on small amounts of water, sure, but you’re no succulent; you are a meaty flesh bag whose body is 60% H2O. If flowers wilt when they’re not watered, you surely will, too. Staying hydrated is incredibly important for all levels of activity, from a leisurely stroll on the treadmill to an intense leg day. Plus, you don’t need to hit up the water fountain for small, unsatisfactory sips (and potentially communal germs) when you have an entire receptacle filled with water from your house. Depending on your gym, the water fountain might have a low flow rate and a thin layer of lime build-up on the spout—both unideal and a little grody. Your best bet is to BYOGWB (Bring Your Own Gym Water Bottle) and hope the gym has a WFwaBF (Water Fountain with a Bottle Filler). The best water bottles for the gym crush thirst, just like how you crush your PRs, you *strong* meaty flesh bag.

How we chose the best water bottles for the gym

It is a joke in my household that Wednesdays are off-limits for social activities, as it’s Barre Wednesday: the one day I week that I travel to my Pure Barre location of choice and take an evening Classic class with my favorite instructor, Amanda. Instructor Amanda kicks my ass in a way that keeps Writer Amanda from biting her handlers in a fit of rage. (They would need a rabies shot series if she gets chomp in.)

I’ve Burpee’d my way through the occasional HIIT class, mastered the Stairmaster, and even tried Bikram yoga. And although the hot yoga was a one-time deal, an insulated water bottle was a constant companion in my journey to sweaty, definitely not-culty enlightenment.

I made a few criteria based on my own gym/workout class experience. Each bottle is at least 32 ounces because 16-24 ounces is simply insufficient water for a 45-minute cardio or strength workout. Each bottle needed to have a handle or carry loop for convenience. A built-in straw and a wide mouth were minor considerations since both are nice to have but not necessities. Many bottles made the brave journey to barre class for on-the-ground testing, but only a few made the final cut.

The best water bottles for the gym: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’re headed to the gym for your hot girl walk, or you lost your last trusty gym water bottle and need to bring in a new recruit, one of our con-sip-erations should make you feel like you’ve found gold at the bottom of the well.

Best overall: Owala FreeSip Insulated Stainless Steel Water Bottle

A person holding a green and pink Owala FreeSip water bottle in front of a brick wall.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Hand-wash cup; dishwasher safe-lif
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24 hours cold

Pros

  • Lightweight when filled
  • Spout doesn’t touch sweaty hands
  • Really fun to use

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

Like most products, I first heard of the Owala FreeSip water bottle on TikTok. Account after account raved about the bottle’s FreeSip spout, which lets you sip upright through a built-in straw or tilt it back for a classic swig. After testing it myself, I concluded it’s worth the hype.

The temperature retention is fabulous. Water stays cold all day, and ice cubes aren’t melted away after a few hours. The wide mouth easily accommodates a handful of ice cubes and makes cleaning seem like less of a chore. A push-to-open lid protects the spout from your own germy, sweaty hands, and the carrying loop doubles as a lock, so you don’t have accidental spills if you throw it into your gym bag like I do.

The FreeSip cap is the crown jewel of this canteen. The outer rim doesn’t hit your nose when swigging, and the cap doesn’t get in your face if you decide to take a long chug. I was also expecting a face full of water from the spout design, but the sip portion does not seem to affect the spout. The sip portion is seamless to drink out of—there’s no weird tugging like other sports bottles with straws. Using the bottle is just plain fun. The “click” of the lid opening and the design of the FreeSip spout tickle my brain in a way that makes me drink more water.

Although it’s not completely dishwasher safe—it’s recommended you hand-wash the bottle portion to maintain the finish—its inherent fun and ease of use easily outshines this minor downside.

Best for running: Nathan Quick Squeeze Insulated Water Bottle

A person holding a Nathan QuickSqueeze Insulated Water bottle against a brick wall.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Double-wall insulated plastic
  • Dishwasher safe: No
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: Unknown

Pros

  • Ergonomic grip
  • Extra storage
  • No slip grip

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

If you prefer running on the indoor track instead of on a treadmill, a handheld running water bottle helps keep hydration at arm’s length—literally. This one from Nathan is made to fit ergonomically in your hand, and it’s easy to squeeze to get that sweet, sweet water out of the nozzle and into your thirsty gullet. Double-wall insulation keeps your water/electrolyte drink cool, and a zippered front pocket holds your smartphone, cards, keys, and a good-luck trinket. It’s not dishwasher-safe, which is a bummer considering all of the nooks and crannies in the lid.

Best tumbler: Pelican Hydration Pelican Porter

A person standing against a brick wall holding a green Pelican Porter

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 Stainless steel; copper lining
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 16 hours cold

Pros

  • Great temperature retention
  • Fits in car cup holders
  • Easy-to-hold handle

Cons

  • Not spill proof

Testing the Pelican Porter made me understand the Stanley Quencher hype. Although the Quencher is a great tumbler, the Pelican Porter edges it out. It will keep drinks cold for 16 hours, compared to the Quencher’s 11-hour chill rate. This longevity is thanks to a copper lining that works with double-wall vacuum insulation to prevent thermal loss. It’s not completely spill-proof—one accidental kick from a passerby will lead to a certain disaster—but a splash-resistant lid prevents any waterworks on the drive to the gym. You can sip from the strong Tritan plastic drinking straw or rotate the lid for some chug action, although I prefer the straw. Something primal and childlike awoke deep in me as soon as I grabbed the Pelican Porter’s handle. I hope it also makes you feel like a big hydrated adult baby.

Best insulated: Hydro Flask Wide Mouth Bottle

A person holding a blue Hydro Flask wide mouth bottle and standing in front of a brick wall.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24 hours cold

Pros

  • Lightweight when filled up
  • Moveable handle
  • Lid comes apart for easy cleaning

Cons

  • Dents easily

It’s a close race between the Hydro Flask Wide Mouth Bottle with Flex Straw Lid and the Yeti Rambler with Straw Lid for the title of best insulated water bottle for the gym. The Hydro Flask ranks superior thanks to its lid, which comes apart completely—no more moldy, nasty caps—and is dishwasher-safe. It’s also lightweight when filled up, and the moveable handle on the lid makes it better to carry from leg press to rowing machine to exercise bike, etc. It has a wide mouth to make it easy to clean and fill with ice, and the cap is leakproof when closed. A plastic ledge-like protrusion helps you flip the straw up without having to touch the mouthpiece, earning brownie points in the sanitary category. It is the water bottle I personally reach most for when I’m doing barre, since I can flip the straw up and carry it around while going from barre to floor to mat.

Best gallon water bottle: Yeti Gallon Jug

Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug is the best gallon water bottle overall.

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: 18/8 stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 24+ hours cold

Pros

  • Study handle
  • Clever lid to store spout cap
  • Double-wall vacuum insulation

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy when filled

If you’re a person who drinks a gallon of water a day, the Yeti Gallon Jug is one of the nicest gallon water bottles you can find. It will keep your water cold all day, even if the bottle has sat in your hot car. It’s made of durable stainless steel and features vacuum insulation so that it will keep liquids hot or cold for several hours. It also keeps your bottle from sweating, so gym floors are safe from condensation.

The Gallon Jug’s lid features a sturdy metal handle with soft grip padding. The lid also contains a neat magnetic design, so users can store the cap when the spout is open. You can also screw the entire lid off for easy cleaning and refills, although some reviews note it’s hard to remove because of the lid’s large diameter.

Like all Yeti’s other stainless steel bottles, the Gallon Jug is BPA-free and dishwasher safe. It weighs 4.5 pounds before putting water in it, or over 12 pounds full. This is not the weight you intend to lift while at the gym. Still, it is far and away the nicest water bottle of this size.

Best self-cleaning: LARQ Movement PureVis

A Larq Movement PureVis bottle on a plain background

LARQ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Dishwasher safe: Bottle is dishwasher safe; cap it not
  • BPA free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: N/A

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Self-cleaning
  • Lightweight compared to other water bottles

Cons

  • Non-insulated
  • No wide mouth
  • Expensive

I tested and reviewed the insulated LARQ PureVis bottle and was impressed at its ability to keep water cold and make a noticeable difference in how it tasted after hitting it with the PureVis UV-C light. If the LARQ insulated PureVis bottle is the nerdy, well-read smartypants of the family, then the uninsulated PureVis Movement bottle is the sporty one who will get a scholarship playing D1 field hockey and eventually join the U.S. Olympic team. It’s called the Movement bottle since it’s uninsulated, making it even lighter than the insulated version. Both bottles use the same technology in the cap. Simply press a button to activate the PureVis tech, which eliminates 99% of bio-contaminants like E.coli. If you’re bad at remembering to drink water, the LARQ, unfortunately, doesn’t have a built-in water tracker or sip reminder. However, it automatically cleans itself every two hours, and one charge powers the bottle for a month, giving you at least two fewer things to think about.

Best budget: Nalgene Sustain Tritan BPA-Free Water Bottle

A person holding three Nalgene water bottles and standing against a brick wall.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Tritan plastic
  • Dishwasher safe: Top rack safe
  • BPA-free: Yes
  • Temperature retention: N/A

Pros

  • Completely leakproof
  • No frills
  • Incredibly lightweight

Cons

  • Non-insulated
  • Wide mouth leads to a faceful of water

The Nalgene water bottle is a classic for a reason. Nalgene bottles have carried me from field hockey games to marching band practice when I was in high school, and they still have a place in my cupboard despite the objectively fancier options I have. They’re impact-resistant, leakproof, and are top-rack safe. Plus, Tritan plastic is BPA/BPS free if you’re cutting back on microplastics.

If you choose a wide-mouth Nalgene, I highly recommend getting an Easy Sipper. It’s a circular disk with a small hole that sits right inside the bottle to prevent getting a faceful of water when taking a sip. Although buying an accessory when you could buy a narrow-mouth bottle from the jump seems silly, wide-mouth bottles are easier to fill at bottle-filling stations. Being able to add ice is also a major perk. I’ve even filled mine and frozen them overnight so I’d have icy water after school. If you do that, just make sure to leave some room at the top since ice expands.

What to consider when buying the best water bottles for the gym

You may not need to drink 8 cups of water a day, but staying hydrated is a must while working out. Here is what you should keep in mind before adding to your water bottle collection:

Durability

Water bottles get dropped by sweaty hands, kicked by walkers deep in their favorite podcast and not paying attention, or fall over due to the mysterious forces of gravity.

Stainless steel can get dented and scratched, but it’s pretty resilient. Stainless steel can also handle sudden temperature changes. However, you should not freeze them since low freezer temperatures can damage the surface of the water bottle.

Tritan plastic water bottles are generally more scratch-resistant and won’t ding, but are by no means indestructible. Both materials are generally resistant to the wear and tear of everyday life.

Material

Speaking of material, you’ll want bottles made of stainless steel or Tritan plastic. You’ll want to skip glass entirely since broken shards and people lifting in their socks don’t mix.

Stainless steel water bottles are popular because they’re light and durable. They’re usually made from 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its 18% chromium and 8% nickel elemental composition. Many stainless steel bottles are vacuum-insulated to create a sealed buffer between the liquid in the container and the environment outside the bottle, which reduces conduction and keeps liquids cold for several hours. If you’re looking for even more thermal retention, consider a bottle with copper lining.

Reusable plastic water bottles give you a balance of durability and affordability. High-quality plastic bottles can be more resistant to superficial wear and tear and generally lack insulation.

When buying plastic, make sure to get a plastic water bottle that’s made from BPA-free Tritan plastic, which is light and ultra-durable. Some studies suggest that containers made from plastics with bisphenol A, or BPA, can seep into what’s stored in the container and cause adverse health effects.

FAQs

Q: How much water is healthy to consume per day?

You’ve probably heard “eight cups a day” as the default water consumption recommendation. However, it varies from person to person. Optimal water intake depends on environmental and personal factors like height, weight, activity level, and current temperature. Keep a bottle at your desk or side table and take a sip when you’re thirsty.

Q: What material keeps water cold the longest?

Vacuum-insulated stainless steel keeps water cold the longest. You can keep your cold drinks cold all day, and iced drinks can even stay cool for days.

Q: How often should I clean a water bottle for the gym?

You should clean them often. The frequency ranges from once a day to a few times a week. If your bottle is filled with an electrolyte drink, stick to washing it every day. Bottles filled with plain ole water don’t need as much maintenance. However, since gyms are prone to germs, we recommend more frequent cleaning (at least five times a week).

Final thoughts on the best water bottles for the gym

You can bring any water bottle into the gym, but why not bring one that inspires you and #sparksjoy? Find one in your favorite color with handy features like a carry loop, vacuum insulation, and a touch-free cap for more sanitary sipping. The most important thing is making sure to stay hydrated while pumping iron, putting in rounds with the heavy bag, etc. You should sip some water from your new bottle and get some reps in.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best water bottles for the gym in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best action cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-action-cameras/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587877
Four of the best action cameras are sliced together.
Abby Ferguson

Whether you’re shooting down the slopes or catching a wave, an action camera can record the most exciting moments.

The post The best action cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best action cameras are sliced together.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The GoPro Hero 12 Black action camera is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. GoPro Hero 12 Black
SEE IT

The Hero 12 offers class-leading stabilization with exceptional video quality and durability.
Best for vlogging The DJI Osmo Action 4 action camera is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. DJI Osmo Action 4
SEE IT

The Osmo Action 4 offers excellent low-light performance and dual touchscreens for easy use.
Best for 360-degree video The camera, selfie stick, lens cover, and memory card from the Insta360 X3 Get-Set Kit are displayed against a white background with a grey gradient. Insta360 X3
SEE IT

The Insta360 X3 provides immersive 360-degree footage of your adventures.

Action cameras are a high-speed ticket to capturing the most immersive and engaging footage possible. They bring viewers as close to your experiences as they can be without actually being there. These video cameras excel in environments where stability and durability are key to attaining the highest caliber of footage, so they are popular amongst surfers, bikers, climbers, and other athletes. Plus, vloggers, video production teams, and hobbyists of all kinds can benefit from the compact and easy-to-handle design. From travel photography to underwater photography, the best action cameras provide a totally unparalleled video production experience to users of every interest and passion.

How we chose the best action cameras

Some writers and editors at Popular Science are also writers and editors at Popular Photography and have decades of experience with just about every camera brand and genre out there, including action cameras. As an adventure-lover and active individual, I have found myself in my fair share of situations ideal for action cameras. We chose the cameras included here through a mix of hands-on experience, user and editorial reviews, and brand knowledge. 

When selecting the best action cameras, we focused on a variety of features and specifications. They should foremost be compact and offer easy mounting solutions, making them easy to use without obstructing the action. Action cameras should also be durable and able to withstand epic adventures, including water trips. Lastly, we looked at video and photo quality, stabilization, and other camera-specific features. 

The best action cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether climbing, mountain biking, surfing, or simply wanting to document your travels, these action cameras will help you capture your best (or sometimes worst) moments. 

Best overall: GoPro Hero 12 Black

The GoPro Hero 12 Black sits on green grass.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.3K at 60 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 2.7K
  • Photo resolution: 27 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.8 x 2 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 5.4 ounces

Pros

  • Improved photo performance
  • Longer run times with the Enduro battery
  • Award-winning stabilization
  • Vertical video support

Cons

  • Not much of an upgrade over the Hero 11
  • Low-light performance is still mediocre

The GoPro Hero 12 Black is among the most well-known models of action cameras thanks to its durable and full-featured reputation. This latest model features the same sensor as the Hero 11, which is the largest sensor in a GoPro yet. The large sensor makes it possible to crop video to vertical orientation without losing out on most of the scene so that you can share your epic adventures on social media. And it allows you to change digital lenses for different perspectives. 

The camera specs of the Hero 12 remain largely the same as the Hero 11. It’s capable of stunning 5.3K video recording at up to 60 fps, though now you can record HDR video at this highest quality. Or, you can get up to 240 fps at 2.7k if you want dramatic slow-motion. The photo quality remains at 27 megapixels, and you’ll still have access to time-lapse and night modes, including star trails and light painting.

What is new is the Bluetooth audio connectivity options. Now you can connect a wireless mic for better audio quality. Or you can connect wireless headphones to monitor audio levels and help with voice commands in noisy settings. The Hero 12 also offers improved battery life, which was a pain point in past versions. Combined with the Enduro battery, you can get twice the battery life of the Hero 11. That means you can record continuous 5.3K 60p video for up to 70 minutes. And a standard tripod thread on the underside of the camera opens up mounting possibilities even more.

GoPro improved its already impressive stabilization in the Hero 12 with HyperSmooth 6.0. Even videos of the most rugged activities will be smooth. The new AutoBoost option will automatically reduce cropping, keeping your framing as you saw it while shooting. It’s waterproof to 33 feet without a case, and GoPro built it with improved cold weather performance, so you can use it for capturing your winter sports. The Hero 11 is a well-rounded, impressive action camera ready for anything you throw at it. 

Best for vlogging: DJI Osmo Action 4

The DJI Osmo Action 4 action camera is placed against a white background with a gray gradient.

DJI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 4K at 120 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 1080p
  • Photo resolution: 10 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 59 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.8 x 1.7 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 5.1 ounces

Pros

  • Image quality has been improved
  • Waterproof down to 52 feet
  • Front and rear touchscreen
  • High-capacity battery for long recording sessions

Cons

  • Video quality tops out at 4K
  • Limited photo quality

DJI built plenty of upgrades into the fourth iteration of its action camera, and it is ready for seriously epic adventures. It’s waterproof down to 59 feet without special housing and features a color temperature sensor to automatically adjust the color of your video even if you are deep below the surface while scuba diving. Should you want to go even deeper, with a waterproof case, the camera can go to 210 feet. 

For activities on land, the camera can function as cold as -4 degrees Fahrenheit. You’ll be able to document even your freezing-cold ski trips. It utilizes a unique magnetic quick-release plate that is convenient and easy to use. And you can mount the camera vertically, meaning no cropping is required in order to create social-media-ready video. For vloggers, the live stream support at multiple resolutions is a huge benefit. 

The DJI Osmo Action 4 is capable of image-stabilized 4K video up to 120 fps. DJI claims that there are no recording limits other than the promised 2.6-hour battery life when recording 4K 60p video, so long, single takes are possible. It offers the equivalent of an 11mm full-frame lens, so you can catch all of the action. The RockSteady stabilization does a great job of smoothing out video. And the HorizonSteady mode keeps your shots level and adjusts for any horizontal rotation. Unfortunately, photo resolution is limited to 10 megapixels, but if your focus is vlogging, that likely won’t matter as much anyway.

Best for 360-degree video: Insta360 X3

A hand holds the Insta360 X3 action camera in front of green grass.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.7K 360-degree, 4K single-lens
  • Max framerate: 60 fps at 4K
  • Photo resolution: 72-megapixel 360-degree, 18-megapixel single-lens
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 1.8 x 1.3 inches
  • Weight: 6.3 ounces

Pros

  • Impressive stabilization
  • 360-degree video is highly immersive
  • Lots of editing options
  • Excellent photo and video quality

Cons

  • App is a little confusing to use

If you want truly immersive videos of your action adventures, you can’t beat the Insta360 X3. This camera can record 360-degree video at up to 5.7K and 30 fps. Then, you can use either the Insta360 mobile or desktop apps to edit your video and reframe your shots how you want to showcase the best parts of each moment or show off the full 360-degree view at once. 

This action camera is highly versatile, thanks to the ability to use a single lens along with the dual lenses used for recording 360-degree video. You can either record selfie content with the rear lens or show off what’s in front of you with the front-facing lens. And it features a handful of shooting modes, such as up to 8K 360-degree timelapse and 4K slow-motion. The 2.29-inch touchscreen makes it easy to adjust settings and see what you are recording. 

The X3 is a durable camera and is waterproof down to 33 feet without a separate housing. It features a 6-axis gyroscope and uses Insta360’s FlowState stabilization for smooth video, even with activities like mountain biking. And the Horizon Lock mode keeps the shot level even as you move and rotate. 

A man sits in a convertible on a track with a blue sky around him.
This is a 360 snapshot that I took from a 360-degree video of an autocross event. Abby Ferguson

Best small: GoPro Hero 11 Black Mini

GoPro Hero11 Mini Black action camera on a tilt

GoPro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 5.3K at 60 fps
  • Max framerate: 240 fps at 2.7K
  • Photo resolution: 24.7 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 33 feet
  • Dimensions: 2.1 x 2 x 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 4.7 ounces

Pros

  • Tiny form factor is less intrusive 
  • Award-winning stabilization
  • Excellent video quality
  • Two mounting points

Cons

  • No display for framing
  • No dedicated photo mode

For those who are extra concerned about wind resistance and drag, the GoPro Hero 11 Black Mini is the way to go. This camera is 13 percent smaller than the Hero 11 Black, making it more suitable for mounting on a motorcycle helmet, surfboard, or airplane. It also features mounting feet on the bottom and back of the camera, opening up more options for how you mount it. 

Despite the smaller size, the Hero 11 Mini gets many of the same features and specs as its big brother. It uses the same larger sensor, allowing for vertical videos, and is still capable of 5.3K 60p video with class-leading stabilization. Unfortunately, there is no photo mode on the Mini version. Instead, you’ll have to rely on grabbing 24-megapixel stills from videos. 

Another difference between the Mini and regular-sized Hero 11 is the lack of a screen on the Mini. That means you’ll need to rely on the Quik app for camera setup and framing help, but it’s one less thing to break on the camera, which is nice. It also features a built-in battery, so you won’t be able to swap batteries out when one dies. But GoPro promises 73 minutes of battery life when recording 5.3K 30p, which is plenty for most situations. 

Best for beginners: Insta360 GO 3

white Insta360 GO 3 action camera with a screen

Insta360

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 2.7K at 30 fps
  • Max framerate: 120 fps at 1080p
  • Photo resolution: 6.6 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: 16 feet
  • Dimensions: ​​2.1 x 1 x 0.9 inches
  • Weight: 1.3 ounces

Pros

  • Stabilized video
  • Unique magnetic mounting options
  • Versatile modular design with the Action Pod
  • Tiny size is very convenient

Cons

  • Photos are only INSP or DNG
  • Built-in memory is limiting

If the GoPro Hero 11 Mini isn’t small enough for you, the Insta360 GO 3 is the smallest form factor that action cameras come in. It weighs just 1.3 ounces, which is light enough to put on your hat and barely notice. The tiny size makes it feasible to put in locations that you otherwise couldn’t. This modular camera utilizes a unique magnetic mounting system that is fast and simple to use. And it comes with a few different mountain devices right in the box to get you started, including a magnet pendant and Easy Clip for wearing the camera on your person. 

The GO 3 tops out at 2.7K 30p video, which is the main disadvantage of this camera. But if you just want to capture memories or share your action adventures on social media, 2.7K is more than enough. And there are no recording limits at that resolution, so you can record long takes. It also allows for 120fps when backing off the resolution to 1080p, offering up slow-motion footage. And you’ll have access to Insta360’s impressive stabilization for smooth video.

This tiny action camera is waterproof to 16 feet on its own. It comes with the new Action Pod, which, although it adds bulk, extends the battery life from 45 minutes to 170 minutes. It also adds a 2.2-inch flip touchscreen, which is very convenient and adds versatility to the camera. And it’s all very easy to use with simple controls and AI editing tools to take most of the work out of your hands. 

Best budget: AKASO Brave 7 LE

AKASO Brave 7 LE action camera with a surfer on the screen

AKASO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max video resolution: 4K at 30 fps
  • Max framerate: 120 fps at 720p
  • Photo resolution: 20 megapixels
  • Waterproofing: IPX7, 131 feet with included case
  • Dimensions: ‎2.44 x 1.61 x 1.26 inches
  • Weight: 4.64 ounces

Pros

  • Comes with waterproof housing
  • Front and rear-facing screen 
  • Stabilization is fairly effective
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Photo and video quality are lacking
  • Image stabilization results in heavy crop

Most action cameras are quite expensive and come with extensive lists of features. Not everyone needs the latest and greatest camera, though. If you just want a durable, basic action camera to document your travels, the AKASO Brave 7 LE is a great choice. This isn’t the latest Akaso model (that would be the Brave 8), but the balance of features and price make it worth the purchase. The camera itself is IPX7 rated, but it comes with a case that makes it waterproof to 131 feet. The case also makes it more rugged and durable, allowing you to worry less about dings and falls. 

The Brave 7 LE is capable of 4K 30p video or 720p at 120 fps for slow motion. It offers 6-axis electronic stabilization, which is pretty good considering the price of the camera. It does result in a significant crop in your footage, though. For still photos, it can take up to 20-megapixel images. 

This budget action cam features a front and rear screen, which makes it easier to frame your shots no matter which way you point the camera.  It comes with two batteries, a remote, waterproof housing, and multifunction mounting kits, so you have everything you need to get recording right away. And it supports a WiFi connection, making transferring your photos and videos easier. 

Things to consider when looking for the best action cameras

The best action camera for your needs will depend on the nature of the filming environment and your ultimate use of the footage. Considering the size, waterproofing, video quality, and budget is essential whether you’re traveling, vlogging, or just starting out on your action camera journey.

Stabilization

One of the most important aspects of any action camera is how effective its image stabilization is. Action sports typically result in jarring movements, making footage unwatchable if it isn’t stabilized effectively. That said, if you’re primarily using an action camera for casual use on your travels, you may be able to get away with less stabilization than others. And you can make some adjustments in editing if you would like. But, if you are a mountain biker, trail runner, or recording any type of activity with lots of movement, you will want to look for a camera with the best possible stabilization. 

Mounting options

An action camera won’t do you much good if you can’t mount it in a way that enables you to actually record your activity without holding it. For example, you may want a way to mount the camera to a helmet or the end of a surfboard, which are two very different mounts. So, before purchasing a camera, be sure that the company makes a mount specifically for the activity you want to record.

Waterproofing and build-quality

Action cameras should be durable since they are meant to be used for, well, action. Most are ruggedly built and able to withstand lots of abuse. That said, depending on what type of sports or activities you plan on using the camera for, you may want to invest in more protection for the lens or camera as a whole. If so, be sure to check what accessories are available prior to purchasing. 

For those who want to take their camera underwater, knowing the waterproofing is key. Most cameras these days are waterproof to fairly deep without any additional case. For example, the GoPro can be submerged down to 33 feet. But if you want to use the camera for scuba diving, you’ll need to invest in a case to take it deeper than that. We always recommend purchasing waterproof housing directly from the company that made the camera to ensure proper fit, as you don’t want to risk the case flooding with water.

Photo and video quality 

What photo and video quality you need from your action camera depends on how you intend to use the footage. If you are just wanting the camera to document your travels and adventures for the sake of memories or maybe to share on social media, you don’t necessarily need 4K video quality. But, if you want to create YouTube videos of your content, or maybe even have grander plans than that, then you will want to go with the highest quality possible. 

Likewise, if you primarily want to record videos, you don’t necessarily need to pay attention to photo specs. But, if you want more flexibility, be sure to check what the camera can produce in terms of still photos as well.

Size

While all action cameras are compact, some are smaller than others. If you partake in sports or activities where drag and wind resistance is critical, such as surfing, motorcycle or automotive sports, or flying an airplane, the smaller the camera, the better. Smaller cameras also allow for more unique mounting opportunities, as they can be placed in locations that larger cameras cannot. Of course, there are usually sacrifices with smaller cameras, including lower video and photo quality and shorter battery life. It’s simply a matter of deciding what is most important to you.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose an action camera?

Most models of action cameras include similar features across different brands, but the key factors to consider are the intended environment of use, the resolution required, and the desired weight and size of the camera. When in doubt, a 4K camera with a highly durable casing should fare well in a large majority of situations.

Q: What is the best alternative to a GoPro?

The DJI Osmo Action 3 is one of the best alternatives to a GoPro, thanks to its durable construction and mounting flexibility. This class of action camera is set apart by being compatible with a large range of proprietary accessories, which enables them to excel in almost any environment.

Q: Can action cameras be used for photography?

Yes. Action cameras are used for photography all the time—the high-megapixel sensors that help an action camera excel at capturing high-resolution video are the same that allow units to take high-quality still photos. Many units include such a photography mode by default, but double-check before buying if it’s a must-have feature on your list.

Final thoughts on the best action cameras

The main traits found in all the best action cameras on the market are high resolution, high-speed video capture, and compact durability. Whether you’re looking for a camera for beginners, a waterproof camera, a vlogging camera, or some combination of all three, consider the main activities and the environment that you plan to film to help you make your final choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best action cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best flashlights in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-flashlights/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587899
Four of the best flashlights on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Don’t get caught out in the dark without a flashlight that illuminates the way.

The post The best flashlights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best flashlights on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Fenix PD36R Tactical Flashlight, box, and batteries Fenix PD36R 1600 Lumen USB Rechargeable LED Tactical Flashlight
SEE IT

Rugged enough for outdoor use but still delivering ample brightness and surprisingly easy to handle, with a compact size of just 5.3 inches long and about an inch in diameter.
Best for worksites A green and black Greenworks 24V Cordless LED Flashlight outside at night on a table Greenworks 24V Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit
SEE IT

Powered by a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that provides up to 23 hours of light on a single charge and ergonomically designed, so it’s comfortable and convenient on a worksite no matter how long the job.
Brightest black Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight
SEE IT

A worthy choice if you’re looking for the brightest flashlights you can buy and are willing to pay for them.

Descending into a dark basement to flip a breaker or finding the keys you dropped in your car is a lot easier with the help of a flashlight. That little light in your smartphone isn’t bright enough, and you can save your phone’s battery for making phone calls, texting friends, and updating your Instagram. Gone are the days of large clunky flashlights with weak incandescent bulbs. Today’s models come with rechargeable batteries and bright LED lights capable of illuminating objects hundreds of feet away. Unlike the flashlights of yesteryear, modern flashlights are small enough to fit in your pocket and weigh next to nothing. The best flashlights will illuminate your search so you can choose the model that will light up the darkness when you need it.

How we chose the best flashlights

As an avid camper and one who lives in a rural area prone to power outages, I find myself traipsing around the dark quite often, so I know a thing or two about flashlights. I considered a few important criteria in researching more than a dozen flashlights for this article. Brightness, of course, is key.

However, I didn’t just consider flashlights with exceptional brightness. While a 1,000-plus lumen output is great when searching for a missing person or pet, it’s too bright for close-quarters use inside a house or tent. With that in mind, I chose models that offered multiple modes that would allow them to be used both indoors and outdoors. 

They should be able to endure a fair amount of abuse, so I chose models with rugged anodized aluminum construction and waterproof ratings. For rechargeable models that come equipped with batteries, I chose those with at least 3,000 mAh (milliamp per hour) batteries that can last for many hours on moderate light settings. While cost was not a major factor, I did include lights for those budget-conscious users, as well as expensive high-end models. 

The best flashlights: Reviews & Recommendations

For many people, your smartphone is the only flashlight you might think you need. But you should probably conserve phone battery if you’re in the kind of situation where you really need to use a flashlight (and you don’t want to drop that expensive phone trying to fish it out of your pocket in the dark, cracking the screen). From late-night dog walks to trips to the basement breaker when the electricity goes out, a flashlight can keep you seeing clearly. One of our choices should rescue you from stumbling over your own feet.

Best overall: Fenix PD36R 1600 Lumen USB Rechargeable LED Tactical Flashlight

Fenix PD36R Tactical Flashlight, box, and batteries

Fenix

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 1,600
  • Dimensions: 5.33 inches in diameter and 1.04 inches long
  • Weight: 3 ounces

Pros

  • Ample 1,600 lumens of brightness
  • Rugged IP68 rating
  • Long run time

Cons

  • Expensive
  • May be overkill for some

Sure, the PD36 is one of the pricier flashlights on the market, but if you’re serious about having a good flashlight, it’s worth it. The PD36’s runtime is nothing short of phenomenal. Expect more than four days’ worth of battery life on a single charge at the light’s lowest setting, which is still a very usable 30 lumens. That means you can get hours and hours out of this flashlight before needing to charge it. We also like the fact that the flashlight is rechargeable via USB-C, which can add five hours of battery life to the flashlight with just 10 minutes of charge time.

There’s also a broad range of modes with the flashlight, ranging from its energy-saving 30-lumen mode all the way up to a headlight-like 1,600 lumens, which is bright enough to light up objects more than 900 feet away. While using the PD36R at max brightness will drain the battery fairly quickly, you can still get three hours at that level. 

The flashlight is also rugged enough for outdoor use, thanks to an IP68 rating that allows it to withstand being submerged in up to 6.5 feet of water for 30 minutes without suffering damage. Despite its ample brightness, it is still surprisingly easy to handle, with a compact size of just 5.3 inches long and about an inch in diameter.

Best for worksites: Greenworks 24V Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit

A green and black Greenworks 24V Cordless LED Flashlight outside at night on a table

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 200
  • Dimensions: ‎3.21 inches by 2.61 inches by 4.17 inches
  • Weight: 15.6 ounces

Pros

  • Provides up to 23 hours of power
  • Pivoting head adjusts to where you need light
  • Energy efficient
  • Ergonomically designed

Cons

  • Doesn’t provide bright light
  • Not waterproof

Low light is handy when fixing a tire or checking a fusebox—just enough to illuminate what you need across a wide field without being blinding. Greenworks’ Cordless High-Intensity LED Flashlight Kit provides up to 200 lumens of light when needed. The 24-volt flashlight is powered by a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that provides up to 23 hours of light on a single charge. It’s also ergonomically designed, so it’s comfortable to hold when you’re on a worksite. On your off hours, this flashlight is also great for hiking.

Brightest: Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight

black Olight Warrior X Pro Tactical Flashlight

Olight

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 2,100
  • Dimensions: 1.5 inches in diameter by 5.9 inches long
  • Weight: 8.4 ounces

Pros

  • Can project up to 500 meters
  • Compact size and lightweight make it suitable for camping
  • Rugged waterproof construction

Cons

  • Minimum brightness of 300 lumens is high
  • Too bright for everyday use

With its 2,100-lumen output and ability to throw a beam 500 meters away, the Olight is probably overkill for most people not part of a search-and-rescue team. That said, the Warrior is a worthy choice if you’re looking for the brightest flashlights you can buy and are willing to pay for them. 

Despite that extraordinary brightness, the Olight manages to stay surprisingly compact. It measures just 1.5 inches in diameter at the business end and a hair under 6 inches long with a weight of fewer than 9 ounces. That small size, coupled with an IP68 rating, makes the Olight Warrior a worthy companion for hunting trips or backwoods camping adventures. 

Just keep in mind that all that brightness significantly strains the Warrior’s 5,000-mAh rechargeable battery. Don’t expect to get more than a couple of hours at 2,100 lumens. With a minimum brightness of 300 lumens, the Warrior is simply too bright for applications that require dimmer lighting, such as illuminating the inside of a tent or the area under a car hood. Regardless, keep this flashlight topped up with the best power banks.

Best EDC: Wuben Tactical EDC Flashlight

black Wuben Tactical EDC Flashlight

Wuben

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 1,200
  • Dimensions: 1.7 inches in diameter by 6.9 inches long
    Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Compact size suitable for carrying in a pocket
  • Anodized aluminum construction
  • Fast USB-C charging

Cons

  • Uses smaller capacity batteries than other flashlights
  • Easy to misplace

For a flashlight to qualify as an EDC (everyday-carry flashlight), it’s got to be compact enough to fit into a pocket comfortably. Measuring less than 5 inches long and just an inch in diameter, Wuben’s EDC option fits the mold. And for those whose pockets are occupied, it also comes with a lanyard and pocket clip.

Some EDC flashlights are compact but don’t produce enough brightness to make them worth carrying. Wuben has no problems in this department, producing an impressive 1,200 lumens despite its small size. It comes with five light modes, including four light levels, along with a strobe and SOS mode. We also like the USB-C charging port on this flashlight, which allows it to charge from zero to full power in less than an hour. A handy indicator lets you know when the battery drops below 15 percent. 

A flashlight banging around in a pants pocket or backpack all day long every day should be sturdy, and this one is, with its anodized aircraft-grade aluminum body and waterproof construction. 

Best pen: Streamlight Stylus Pro Pen Light

black Streamlight Stylus Pro Pen Light flashlight

Streamlight

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 100
  • Dimensions: 0.6 inches in diameter by 5.3 inches long
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Compact size suitable for carrying in a pocket
  • Durable aluminum construction
  • Multiple color options

Cons

  • Expensive for a penlight
  • Not super high-power

Pen flashlights are built for convenience with a small profile that makes them easy to slide into a pants pocket or even a breast pocket on a button-down shirt. Though this design makes them convenient to carry, these flashlights usually put out wimpy brightness. That’s not the case with the Streamlight Stylus Pro. Despite having a diameter of about 1/2 inch and a total length of 5.3 inches—about the size of a marker—it produces 100 lumens. 

This small light is also surprisingly tough, thanks to its anodized aluminum housing and unbreakable polycarbonate lens. This construction makes the flashlight water-resistant and capable of absorbing impacts of up to 2 meters without taking damage. It also has a convenient tail cap switch that makes it easy to operate while pointing the flashlight at the subject. The Stylus Pro gets a respectable eight hours of battery life from its 2 AAA batteries and comes in six color options.

Best headlamp: BioLite HeadLamp 325

A blue BioLite HeadLamp 325 rests on a white deck railing.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: ‎325 Lumen
  • Dimensions: ‎2.05 x 1.97 x 8.27 inches
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Sits flat and is stable on the head
  • Charges via microUSB
  • Material is moisture-wicking

Cons

  • Hard to open the charger

If heavy headlamps make night hikes a headache, consider the BioLite HeadLamp 325, a lightweight light in the dark. It only weighs 1.7 ounces and doesn’t bounce around while running or doing a cartwheel. The headlamp charges via microUSB—an incredibly common charger you likely already have around the house. A rear reflective strip alerts those behind you that you’re there, and an articulating front bezel allows you to angle the light where you need it with just one hand. 

We recently took it on a trip to Arizona and were pleased with how its moisture-wicking fabric kept our forehead comfortable during nighttime jaunts to the bathroom or campfire. Plus, it laid flat to our heads—something we can’t say with other headlamps we’ve tried.

We named its beefier cousin, the BioLite HeadLamp 800 Pro, as the best headlamp for hiking. If you’re more of a casual wanderer or just need something to illuminate the way to take out the trash, the HeadLamp 325 packs a powerful, portable punch.

Best budget: ThruNite Archer LED Flashlight

black ThruNite Archer LED Flashlight

ThruNite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Max lumens: 500
  • Dimensions: 1.7 inches in diameter by 6.9 inches long
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces

Pros

  • More affordable than high-end tactical flashlights
  • Waterproof construction
  • Enough brightness for most needs

Cons

  • Does not use a rechargeable battery
  • Not ideal for professional use

When assessing flashlights, we tend to get hung up on lumens and battery life. The fact is most people don’t need a flashlight that approaches car headlight levels of brightness. The ThruNite Archer’s 500 lumens are enough to cast a beam of light the length of a football field or light up a small room, more than enough for most people’s needs. Three light levels, along with firefly mode and strobe, add versatility. And while you won’t be able to go off-grid for weeks and weeks with this flashlight, its max runtime of 15 days on two AA batteries suits most applications. 

In terms of construction, it’s compact at less than 7 inches long and 1.7 inches in diameter and weighs just 1.7 ounces. It’s also waterproof up to one meter and ruggedly constructed of anodized steel to resist impacts. Most importantly, the Archer is a quarter of the cost of other tactical flashlights, making it a great option for those looking for a more affordable option.

What to consider when buying the best flashlights

Here is what you should know before buying the best flashlights:

Brightness

Lumens measure how bright a flashlight is. The higher the number of lumens, the brighter the flashlight will be, although the shape of the reflector and lens will determine just how far that light will be cast. Flashlight brightness usually ranges from around 100 lumens for small penlights up to 2,000 or more lumens for the brightest flashlights. As few as 200 lumens is plenty of light for illuminating the dark space under a kitchen sink or even a fuse box, but you’ll need a minimum of 1,000 lumens if you want to illuminate large open spaces such as a campsite. 

Battery life

Whether your flashlight is rechargeable or takes disposable batteries, it won’t stay lit forever. At some point, you’ll need to recharge it or load new batteries. Battery capacity is measured in milliamp hours (mAh). A good mAh for batteries is 3,000, which is enough to keep the light running all night long. Some rechargeable batteries offer 5,000 mAh, which is ideal for higher-lumen flashlights that use more power.

Size

Flashlights come in a variety of sizes, but most measure around 6 inches long and 2 inches in diameter. Smaller EDC (every day carry) flashlights are smaller, allowing the user to wear them on their person throughout the day. These flashlights are typically more compact than a standard tactical flashlight.

Weather protection

Since flashlights are often used outdoors, they need to have some protection from the elements. Flashlights come with an Ingress Protection (IP) rating, which indicates how impervious they are to dust and water. The IP rating is typically followed by two numbers, one that indicates its ability to resist water and the other its ability to resist dust. An IP rating of 68 indicates the flashlight is impervious to dust and can be submerged in water.

FAQs

Q: What brand of flashlight is best?

With a line of flashlights that are constructed from durable anodized aluminum and high-lumen output, Fenix makes some of the best flashlights you can buy. The company’s products range from basic flashlights to high-performance tactical models.

Q: What is the brightest LED flashlight available?

The brightest flashlight you can buy is the Imalent M18, which produces up to 100,000 lumens, which is enough to illuminate objects up to 1,350 meters away.

Q: What is the highest-rated flashlight?

One of the highest-rated flashlights you can buy is the Fenix PD36R, which produces 1,600 lumens and has a 5000mAh rechargeable battery that will last up to 100 hours.

Q: How bright is a 2,500-lumen flashlight?

A 2,500-lumen flashlight is very bright and capable of casting a beam several hundred meters long depending on the shape of the reflector and lens. This amount of brightness is more than enough to suit any outdoor application.

Q: What flashlights do the military use?

The military uses mainly tactical flashlights that produce a lot of lumens and have anodized aluminum construction that’s waterproof and resistant to impacts. Many military flashlights also have a red-light option, which creates visibility while allowing the operator to maintain their night vision.

Q: How many lumens should a good flashlight have?

The average flashlight puts out about 100 lumens, which is suitable mainly for in-home use. A tactical flashlight designed to improve visibility at night for hiking or search and rescue should produce 1,000 lumens.

Final thoughts on the best flashlights

Given the broad price differences in flashlights, it’s important to consider how you plan to use the light before shopping for one. If you need one to use around the house in the event of a power outage or popped breaker, then an affordable model that produces a few 100 lumens is adequate. Those planning to use a flashlight to illuminate the outdoors at night for camping, hiking, or hunting, should consider investing in a more expensive flashlight with an IP86 weather rating and at least a 1,000-lumen output.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best flashlights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-motion-sensor-lights/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586281
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Security is worth every penny you pay for it. So is convenience.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall white LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light on a white background LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light
SEE IT

Easy to install with good waterproofing at a really strong price point, you can get all you need from the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.
Best value HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED on a white background HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED
SEE IT

A solar-powered model at a super reasonable price, these lights don’t offer must customization in terms of where they points but do offer great detection within 26 feet.
Best smart Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor and box on a white background Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor
SEE IT

This smart device-compatible motion sensor can interface with Alexa, Google, or Apple HomeKit, giving you tons of customizability and control to existing light fixtures.

Nothing lights your way better than a motion sensor light. Plus, these lights are huge deterrents for home dangers. Coming home to a dark driveway or path to the front door can be sad and somewhat dangerous, with it easy to miss a step and take a tumble. Plus, not only will prowlers or burglars be put off by motion sensor lights, but local wildlife will be less likely to stick around if their movements are met with a bright flash of light. If the area around your domicile can get easily dark, you will want an outdoor motion sensor light. There are tons of them on the market, so which one should you choose? Don’t worry; like the gentle glow of your new light, we’re here to guide you on the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

How we chose the best outdoor motion sensor lights

We’ve looked at a wide variety of reviews from real-world users, as well as in-the-field experts. We consulted colleagues and friends who have used these brands around their own homes. We then took the general consensus and distilled it down into categories to give you a better sense of what might be a good choice for your personal use. The difference in quality between any of our choices is quite small. So, if there are particular features you’re looking for, it may be the best choice not to go for our “best overall” model. Instead, look for something more specific to your needs, like a smart sensor or one with a camera. All of them equally can be considered the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

The best outdoor motion sensor lights: Reviews & Recommendations

There are a wide variety of motion sensor lights on the market, making it hard to sort through. Which brands are reliable? What ones produce a strong and consistent glow? Which have cool smart features or cameras that increase security even further? We’ve researched from the lawn to the landings so we can let you know and lead you to the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Best overall: LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light

white LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light on a white background

LEONLITE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.07 inches long x 7.48 inches wide by 5.9 inches high
  • Range: 70 feet
  • Detection angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 20

Pros

  • Strong range
  • Reasonable price
  • IP65 waterproofing
  • 50,000-hour lifespan
  • Easy installation

Cons

  • Lights can block sensor if not properly adjusted
  • Look doesn’t really blend with most homes
  • Gasket seals are lowest-quality part

Offering a lot of features and easy installation at a low price, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is appropriate for a lot of situations, even if its styling leaves something to be desired. One of the nicest features is the ability to adjust the motion sensor’s range out to about 70 feet. However, if your area of worry is closer, you can slide a dial to shorten that range. That way, your neighbor’s dog cavorting in the backyard won’t set it off. There are additional modes, including just turning the light on all the time, and having it automatically come on at night and turn off during the day.

Being an LED light, the low-wattage bulbs produce just as much light without using as much energy as traditional bulbs. If you’re purchasing your motion sensor light with the intention of lowering your power consumption, the LEONLITE LED is a good choice. Even if you live in an area with a lot of rain or other inclement weather, the light’s IP65 waterproofing and solid aluminum construction can hold up to a lot of punishment from the elements. The fixture has a lifespan of 50,000 hours, meaning you’ll be using it for years to come.

The main drawback of the LEONLITE LED is its rather industrial styling. It’s not a particularly fashionable light. It comes in black and white, but as of writing, the black model is more expensive than the white one. The included gaskets, which seal the bulbs in their casings, are a bit weak, so don’t screw too tight when installing. You can find replacement parts made of sturdier metal at any hardware store if needed. Speaking of installing, the LEONLITE LED installs very easily. Just make sure you adjust the lamps so that they don’t cover any of the spots you want to be monitored with the motion sensor.

For its reasonable price and many features, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is our best overall outdoor motion sensor light.

Best smart: Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor

Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor and box on a white background

Philips Hue

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 2.5 inches long by 3 inches wide by 3 inches high
  • Range: 39 feet
  • Detection angle: 160 degree horizontal / 80 degree vertical
  • Watts: n/a

Pros

  • Can integrate existing fixtures if you use specialized bulbs
  • Small and unobtrusive
  • Smart features allow you to control lights from your phone or smart device
  • Can change the color of the Philips Hue bulbs
  • Lots of other smart light devices that can work alongside it

Cons

  • Expensive to fully kit out
  • Specialized bulb are expensive to replace
  • Smaller range than dedicated motion detection lights

If you’re into connecting your home’s electronic devices to a smart hub like Amazon’s Alexa, Google’s Google Assistant, or Apple’s HomeKit, Philips—a longtime trusted name in home electronics (and smart light bulbs)—has an excellent line of bulbs, fixtures and, most importantly, a motion sensor.

This Philips Hue motion sensor doesn’t include any built-in lighting. But you can purchase compatible lighting devices or special Philips Hue bulbs to connect your existing fixtures to your motion sensor and your smart-home network. However, this all requires the additional purchase of a Hue Bridge. So make sure you buy everything you need if you’re going to go smart, or you might end up with a useless device.

Once you connect and set up your network of smart bulbs and motion detector(s), you’re going to have more options than you ever expected. You can change the color of your bulbs, creating ambient light or different lighting for different functions. That includes softer light when you arrive home at night and stronger light when you’re asleep to deter animals and criminals. You can use a phone app to adjust your settings, or turn your lights on or off at any time.

The motion detector device is easy to install and doesn’t have to be anywhere near the light fixture that it’s connected to. It offers tons of flexibility in terms of the area of coverage. It’s also small enough and innocuous enough that it doesn’t drastically change the look of your home area. It may even be hard to spot unless you’re quite close to it. This can be good or bad. Your home won’t have an eyesore on it, but criminals may not sit it and decide that it’s not worth trying to case your place (though the lights turning on as they get close hopefully will do the trick).

Choosing the Philips Hue means you’re going to have more options than ever before, but it also requires wading into an expensive and extensive world of smart devices. If you’re already a smart home devotee, it makes sense to have your motion sensor work with it, but if you’re not, think long and hard before committing. However, once you decide to go smart, the Philips Hue Outdoor Sensor is the best smart outdoor motion sensor (once you add a) light.

Best LED: LEPOWER LED Security Light

white LEPOWER LED Security Light over a gradient background

LEPOWER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.05 inches long x 5.38 inches wide x 8.24 inches high
  • Range: 72 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees 
  • Watts: 38

Pros

  • Each of the three lights is independently adjustable
  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Light time adjustable from 10 seconds to 10 minutes
  • Relatively easy to install
  • Very bright

Cons

  • No overnight feature
  • No solar power
  • Larger power consumption than our best overall

If you’re looking for brightness, our best LED outdoor motion sensor light is the LEPOWER LED Security Light. This large, three-part motion sensor light has a range of up to 72 feet, though it works better within 24 at a height of 7.5 to 10 feet.  Like our best overall model, it’s IP65 Waterproof and aluminum, but the lights are built-in with a different style of bulb that is not replaceable. It uses almost twice the power of our best overall, but you get that power in the light. This thing is BRIGHT, maybe too bright if you’re close to your neighbors. That strength makes this perfect for larger-lot homes and garages.

You’re not going to get an overnight feature, meaning you can’t use it dusk-to-dawn, but you can set the duration of the motion sensor light from 10 seconds all the way to 10 minutes, or simply turn it on. Each of the three lights is independently adjustable, as is the motion sensor unit. You can either bend all three of the light areas to focus on one spot, or widen them out to cover the most area possible. This unit is relatively easy to install, no more so than expected with an outdoor light fixture.

While it doesn’t have all the features of some of our higher-rated units, the LEPOWER LED Security Light lives up to the POWER in its name, making it the best LES outdoor motion sensor light.

Best solar-powered: Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light

Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light and solar panel on a white background

Sunforce

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.9 inches long x 6.7 inches wide x 9 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 1.8 

Pros

  • No wiring or power needed
  • Solar powered
  • Small and compact
  • Three adjustable light panels
  • Includes rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Low light output and short maximum duration
  • Short range
  • Needs direct sunlight to fully charge

If you want an outdoor motion sensor light that doesn’t require you to wire it into your home’s electrical system, you want a solar-powered light. The best we found is the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light. It’s a relatively small three-panel flood light with an attached solar-powered panel that can be mounted separately, up to 15 feet away, in order to gather the maximum amount of light during the day.

These are all excellent and convenient features, but this light does come with some drawbacks. It’s simply not as powerful as other models due to it running not on electricity but on batteries that are recharged with the solar panel. (The batteries are included, which is nice.) The range is much lower than other models, less than half, and the maximum time the light will stay on is lower too. Therefore, this model is better for tighter lots or convenience rather than crime deterrence. However, the price is reasonable, so you can also simply set up more than one of the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light.

While there are some drawbacks, there are also a lot of benefits to the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light, making it the best solar-powered outdoor motion sensor light on the market.

Best with camera: Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro

Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro on a house

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.82 inches long x 7.77 inches wide x 8.5 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 270 lights, 140 degrees camera
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Tons of features
  • Camera can follow motion
  • Wide motion sensor range for lights
  • Connectivity to Alexa
  • HD images

Cons

  • No compatibility with Google Assistant or Apple HomeKit
  • Relatively short range
  • expensive

If you want to step your security up, you’ll want to pair a camera with your lights, so when they’re triggered, you can know what happened to cause it. If you use Alexa in your smart home, the best option is Amazon-owned company Ring’s Floodlight Cam Wired Pro, a good light paired with an incredible security camera. 

As a light, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro isn’t quite as powerful as a dedicated outdoor motion sensor light. The lights only have a range of about 30 feet, though the camera can see and follow motion beyond that in daylight. However, the motion sensor itself has a great radius, more than 180 degrees, which is better than many other models.

The camera is excellent. It outputs 1080p HD video, which is really clear. The camera can identify if motion is human, animal, or mechanical and be set to only record in the event of the kind of motion you’re interested in. Integrating with Alexa, you can have the camera trigger other smart devices, like locks or alarms. Night videos are clearer in black and white than in color. All the footage is available on the Ring app.

However, you must subscribe to the Ring’s service to use all these features. Multiple plans determine how much footage you can store for later viewing, starting at $3 a month. There’s also a built-in alarm, which means if your camera catches a prowler or robber about to attempt to enter your home, you can hopefully scare them away.

While it costs a pretty penny both initially and over time, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro offers an incredible amount of features that can really add to your peace of mind, or simply help you monitor what’s happening around you. That makes it the best outdoor motion sensor light with a camera. You can learn even more in our full review.

Best value: HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED

HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED on a white background

HMCITY

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.23 inches long x 6.06 inches wide x 4.02 inches high
  • Range: 26 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: 4.5

Pros

  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Solar Powered
  • Two-pack
  • Excellent price

Cons

  • Short range
  • Limited detection angle

Our best value proposition for outdoor motion sensor lights is a double deal: you get two for one price. The HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED are two wide-angled light panels that are self-contained and solar-powered. You can install them anywhere because you do not need wires (we’re big fans of on a deck, maybe one with some nice furniture). The housing contains the solar cells, though, so make sure wherever you place them gets adequate sunlight during the day. There’s even a dusk-to-dawn mode that turns the lights on all night.

The HMCITY Solar Lights are better as ambient and night-use home lights than they are as security lights, but they can do the job. You can either set the lights to be off until they sense motion or to have low light until they sense motion and then get brighter. The lights themselves have a wide angle that they cast: 270 degrees. Even though the light itself isn’t powerful, it fills an area well.

Some of the drawbacks of the HMCITY Solar Lights are standard to solar-powered lights. They simply don’t produce as much light as wired lights can, and they tend to have sensors that can’t detect quite as far out. The HMCITY Solar Lights have a maximum range of 26 feet for detection, so it’s better on a smaller lot. They do have standard IP65 waterproofing, though the casing itself can collect a bit of moisture on the top, so it may be better to install it under an eave if possible.

The price is excellent, with two lights retailing for around $30 without a sale or coupon. For that price, the HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED gives you a convenient and useful package to add ambient light to your backyard, convenient light to approach to your door, or deter criminals and wildlife from getting near your property. That’s what makes it the best-value outdoor motion sensor light.

Best budget: Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight

Black Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight over a white background

Beams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.5 inches long x 3.5 inches wide x 4.42 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Excellent price
  • No wired connection needed
  • Small and easy to install

Cons

  • Batteries need replacing every year
  • Low light output
  • Narrow angle of motion sensing

If you don’t need a lot of light and don’t want to worry about wires, Beams offers a battery-powered motion-sensing spotlight that does a good job for a small price. At only $20, the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight can be installed anywhere, no need to worry about patching into your house’s electrical system. Instead, the Beams Spotlight runs on 3 D-cell batteries (not included). You’ll get about a year of use out of each set.

The light’s motion sensor is a bit limited, which is typical of battery-powered motion sensor lights, offering only 120 degrees. The range is surprisingly strong, besting our best value model by 4 feet. The spotlight is quite small, meaning it’s excellent for side doors, pet areas, or as a supplemental light when the main light is turned off.

The weatherproofing is about the same as other models, hitting IPX6, though it doesn’t have a rating for contact or dustproofing. The aesthetic is actually a bit nicer than more powerful models, with it blending in better than the large multi-panel floodlights.

While there are not a lot of options with the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight, and some of its benefits (small size, install anywhere) come with drawbacks (weaker light, need for batteries), the $20 price and overall good performance makes it the best budget outdoor motion sensor light.

What to consider when choosing outdoor motion sensor lights

The first thing you should consider is the range and angle that you’ll need for your property—and your property only! It’ll be highly annoying for your neighbors if they can easily trip your motion sensor lights from their yard or, even worse, from their home! So, if you live on tighter lots, a shorter range might actually be better, while if you live on a large piece of property, you’ll want something that extends a long way out.

You’ll also need to consider the angle of detection for the motion detector. If you’re putting your lights flush against a wall of your home and want detection on all sides, you’re going to want 180 degrees, while if you’re affixing it in a corner, you may not need to worry so much about having such a wide angle.

You’ll want to consider the power source. Some of these lights are solar powered and store up their batteries during the day so that they may be used at night, but that also requires they be placed on the side of your house that gets a lot of sunshine to be most effective.

Lastly, consider any additional accessories or features you want alongside your lights. Do you want a camera? Do you want smart home features that let you control the lights from your phone or with your voice from a connected device? Not every light is going to feature those.

FAQs

Q: What is the best motion sensor light for outside?

Every light from our list is in some way the “best,” but our overall favorite light was the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.

Q: What is the disadvantage of outdoor motion sensor lights?

The biggest disadvantage is these lights are made to throw a lot of light quickly, which can be annoying to neighbors if they get tripped late at night (either by a late-arriving member of your household, a pet or other animal, or anyone else). You can inadvertently create conflict when installing one of these, so consult with your neighbor on the side where you plan to place it, and if possible, adjust the way the light is pointed so as to put the least possible light pollution into your neighbor’s property. Also, keep in mind that motion sensor lights are not going to be warm and inviting like a porch light. They click on and off in a pretty aggressive way, even when you are the person who triggers them. They can actually be quite stressful to encounter, even when you’re expecting them.

Q: What is the lifespan of a motion sensor light?

A good motion sensor with built-in lights should last 10-15 years. If you use a separate smart sensor to make your existing fixtures motion sensor lights, you’ll simply have to replace the bulbs when they burn out.

Q: How many lumens should a motion sensor light be?

Individual motion sensor lights should be between 300 and 700 lumens for soft, porch-like light. Floodlights should be 1000 or more.

Q: Are motion sensor lights a good idea?

In terms of being used as a practical light, motion sensor lights have the ability to save you money and conserve energy compared to an always-on porch light. They are also known deterrents for criminals and wildlife, and when paired with a camera, can get you a sense of what happened in the event of an accident or incident at night. In this regard, they’re a smart purchase.

Q: How does a motion sensor light work?

Motion sensors use passive infrared sensors, which monitor any infrared energy changes, turning on an associated electrical switch when they are engaged. The electrical switch is attached to the light, which then illuminates. Infrared sensors can be tripped by any individual, animal, or object that has a heat signature at a certain level but can be interfered with if you have a heat vent or other heat source near the sensor. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor motion sensor lights

You should probably get an outdoor motion sensor light if you’re considering them. You’ll feel more secure, they’ll give convenient, energy-saving light, and you might even have a lower power bill. Which of our recommended units you buy will depend entirely on your needs, but all can confidently be called the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gifts-for-cyclists/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588094
Three rows of the best gifts for cyclists, with the Wahoo indoor trainer on top, followed by a Garmin bike light, and a Kryptonite bike lock.

Switching gears to holiday shopping and not sure what to get the cyclist in your life? Cruise through our spin on the best bike-centric gifts.

The post The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Three rows of the best gifts for cyclists, with the Wahoo indoor trainer on top, followed by a Garmin bike light, and a Kryptonite bike lock.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best bike computer A black Garmin Edge 1040 Solar GPS Bike Computer displaying the distance, time, route, and more of a bike ride. Garmin Edge 1040 Solar
SEE IT

This computer provides nutrition and hydration alerts, ride-specific maps, turn-by-turn directions,  group ride features, and more.
Best headphones A pair of Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones rest on their case on an end table. Shokz OpenRun Pro
SEE IT

These comfortable, lightweight headphones allow cyclists to stay aware of their surroundings while listening to their favorite tunes.
Best multi-tool A gray metal Multitool 19 device for cyclists. Crankbrothers M19 Multi-Tool
SEE IT

Lightweight and encased in durable aluminum, this gadget features 19 tools that should help cyclists fix all kinds of bike emergencies.

Whether the cyclist in your life commutes to work on a bike or trains for triathlons, having the right gear is important. But it can get expensive. In the United States, households collectively spent about $8 billion a month on bicycles and accessories, according to the U.S. Bureau of Transportation Statistics. In the interest of cutting down on waste and gear that never gets pulled out of the closet, we’ve rounded up the best devices and accessories available to help cyclists ride safely, track performance and health metrics, and still have fun. Here’s some of what your favorite cyclist might be hoping they get to unwrap before their next century.

Best bike computer: Garmin Edge 1040 Solar

A black Garmin Edge 1040 Solar GPS Bike Computer displaying the distance, time, route, and more of a bike ride.

Garmin

SEE IT

Even if the cyclist in your life isn’t focused on collecting data from their rides, a bike computer is still an important and worthwhile tool. The Edge 1040 provides nutrition and hydration alerts, a range of ride type-specific maps, turn-by-turn directions, incident detection, bike alarm functionality, and group ride features. It will help keep your rider safe, fueled up, and on course. The Garmin Edge 1040 also accurately tracks distance, provides training tools and recommendations, syncs training plans, and measures cycling dynamics. The large display is easy to see at a glance, and the solar display adds to the already impressive battery life that can last up to 45 hours in demanding use cases. If you like the idea of picking up a bike computer but want a more budget-friendly option, the Edge 530 is also a fantastic device.

Best power meter pedal: Garmin Rally RS100 or Rally RS200

A black Garmin Rally RS100 power meter pedal for cyclists.

Garmin

SEE IT

Power meters are a must if the cyclist in your life is data-obsessed or serious about their performance. These devices measure the force on the bike pedals using strain gauges and convert that to power, measured in watts. The Garmin Rally series provides extremely accurate data, and lots of it. It can provide insight into power, cadence, left and right balance, pedal smoothness, and time spent standing or sitting. The Rally is very easy to swap between pedal bodies using a conversion kit, making it the best choice for those who may have a bike for mountain biking and one for road rides. It pairs seamlessly with Garmin’s bike computers as well.

You can purchase a single pedal (RS100) to save some money or a dual-sensing version (RS200) for even more precise data. Also, Garmin makes different versions of the Rally that are compatible with different types of cleats. The RK line works with Look Keo cleats, the RS line is for Shimano SPD-SL cleats, and the XC line is made for Shimano SPD cleats. Functionally, they are all the same, but the cleat compatibility differs.

Best heart rate monitor: Polar H10 Heart Rate Monitor

A black Polar H10 Heart Rate Monitor with the word "Polar" on the front attached to a black strap.

Polar

SEE IT

The Polar H10 Heart Rate Monitor works with many different sports watches and fitness apps, including Garmin, Apple, Strava, and Nike. It can support iOS mobile devices with iOS 13 or later, BS Android mobile devices with Bluetooth 4.0 capability, and Android 7 or later. That versatility makes this chest strap one of the best heart rate monitors for cycling. But it excels as one of the best monitors for Peloton and cycling in general, as its accurate reader and comfortable fit don’t falter at high speeds thanks to silicone dots that help it stay firmly in place. — Andrew Waite

Best indoor trainer: Wahoo KICKR Smart Trainer V6

A black under-desk bicycle with the word Wahoo on the top.

Wahoo

SEE IT

For most of us, there are, unfortunately, days when getting outside on the bike isn’t feasible. Whether it’s because of a gnarly ice storm or nonstop rain, riding inside can unlock new training opportunities. The Wahoo KICKR Smart Trainer V6 is among the best trainers, thanks to its accurate speed, distance, cadence, and power data. It’s easy to set up and provides a smooth, realistic, yet silent ride, so your cyclist can easily watch a movie during their ride without turning the volume way up. The built-in WiFi also makes this direct drive trainer stand out from the competition, as it allows for faster data transfer and easier firmware updates.

Best indoor bike with classes: Peloton Bike Plus Indoor Stationary Bike

A black Peloton Bike Plus with a seat, handlebars, and a 24-inch touchscreen.

Peloton

SEE IT

If the cyclist in your life is motivated by live instruction and competition, the Peloton Bike provides an unrivaled experience. Purchase of the bike and a $44 monthly membership provides access to thousands of classes, including live sessions, bike boot camps, boxing, and yoga. The 21.5-inch HD touchscreen lets you feel like you’re right in the studio, and the two stereo speakers help complete the immersive experience. With a 4-foot by 2-foot footprint, this bike can fit in a range of spaces. Peloton also tracks your heart rate, output, and cadence in real-time and you can measure your progress against other members.

Best electric bike: Ride1Up Rift

Ride1UP Electric Bicycle

Ride1UP

SEE IT

Think your favorite cyclist would appreciate a new electric bike? Consider the Ride1UP Rift for those leisurely days when they want to stretch their legs, but their calves and quads need a little rest and recovery. Almost ready to go out of the box, it provides a stupendously smooth ride whether they’re upgrading from a different electric bicycle or have always ridden an analog bike. It strikes the right balance between easy assembly, ease of use, comfort, and overall design. Learn more about our picks for the best electric bikes. — Brandt Ranj

Best phone mount: Peak Design Out Front Bike Mount

A square black phone mount made attached to a black metal bar made by Peak Design.

Peak Design

SEE IT

The Out Front Bike Mount easily installs onto bike handlebars, putting the phone front and center at an optimal viewing angle. Your cyclist will be able to quickly see their maps or keep an eye on the time. The mount also flips up so that they can film their ride. They will need either the Mobile Universal Mount Adapter or a Peak Design phone case, as the bike mount utilizes the company’s magnetic locking system, called SlimLink. This magnetic system is ultra secure, so they won’t need to worry about their phone falling off when they hit some bumps on the road. And it makes their phone compatible with all sorts of other Peak Design accessories like the phone tripod, wallet, and more.

Best bike bag: Rapha Bar Bag

A black polyester bike bag with straps and the word "Rapha" in white letters on the front against a plain background.

Rapha

SEE IT

Having a space to stow essentials like your phone, keys, and maybe a snack is important on a commute or long ride. Rapha’s sleek bike bag is made of waterproof polyester, so essentials will stay dry during an unexpected downpour. It provides a roomy 2 liters of space and comes with two durable straps cyclists can attach either to their handlebars or the frame. The buckles are quick-release, and once the rider arrives at their destination, this versatile bag easily converts into an over-the-shoulder bag.

Best multi-tool: Crankbrothers M19 Multi-Tool

A gray metal Multitool 19 device for cyclists.

Crankbrothers

SEE IT

A bike multi-tool is a must for every cyclist, both on rides and in a home tool kit. This Crankbrothers tool includes a range of hex wrenches, spoke wrenches, multiple screwdriver types, a t-25 drive, and a universal chain tool. All in all, there are 19 different tools in this one device. Whether you’re fixing your bike or adjusting your cleats, this multi-tool likely has the right option. Everything is encased in lightweight aluminum and only weighs 6.2 ounces. And the 3.5-inch length means that it will easily fit in a small saddle pack for rides.

Best headphones: Shokz OpenRun Pro

A pair of Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones rest on their case on an end table.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Bone conduction headphones are great for cyclists because they allow you to hear your music and podcasts while still staying alert to the world around you. The Shokz OpenRun Pro headphones offer a secure, lightweight fit under your helmet that’s comfortable even for long rides. They produce clear, high-quality sound with plenty of volume, even when you’re near traffic. They also feature a mic so that you can call your cyclist when they are out. And the 10 hours of battery life will keep them from needing to charge their headphones constantly.

Best tail light: Garmin Varia RTL515

The Garmin Varia RTL515 is placed against a white background with a gray gradient.

Garmin

SEE IT

A quality tail light is a crucial safety item for road cyclists, whether riding day or night. It alerts drivers to your presence long before they would otherwise see your bike. The Garmin Vari RTL515 is a bit of a splurge, but it is the best out there, thanks to the built-in radar. This light pairs with your phone, Garmin Edge bike computer, or other Garmin wearables and alerts you with both visual and audio queues that cars are approaching from up to 153 yards away. It’s super bright, providing daylight visibility up to one mile away. There are multiple modes, including a low-intensity light for group rides. And it offers up to 16 hours of battery life in day flash mode to last for your longest rides.

If you want the utmost safety for your rider, you can bundle the front light below with the Varia RTL515. Or, if the Garmin is too much of a splurge, the Bontrager Flare RT is also a great rear light with a budget-friendly price, albeit without the radar.

Best bike light: Garmin Varia UT 800 Smart Headlight

A cyndrical black Garmin Varia UT Smart Headlight against a plain background.

Garmin

SEE IT

When the days are shorter, your favorite cyclist is likely getting some miles in when it’s dark. A reliable bike light is essential for safety. Garmin’s Varia UT 800 Smart Headlight is visible up to a mile away. It provides 800 lumens of light for up to 1.5 hours—about the same amount as a traditional 60-watt incandescent bulb. Cyclists can switch between five light modes: high, medium, low, night flash, and day flash. This bike light can also sync with compatible Garmin Edge computers, which can detect the ambient light to control brightness. And it’s available in versions that attach either to the handlebars or to a helmet.

Best bike lock: Kryptonite Combo Bike U-Lock 

A steel U-shaped bike lock with a combination on the front from Kryptonite.

Kryptonite

SEE IT

As much fun as biking can be, theft is unfortunately common. More than 200,000 bikes are stolen in the United States each year, according to the FBI. That’s why a reliable bike lock is important. Kryptonite’s Combo Bike U-Lock is designed with a 12mm steel shackle that protects against wire cutters. The U shape makes it easy to attach the lock to a variety of locations, from bike racks to fences. It features a combination lock that you register with the company website, so you don’t have to worry about lost keys. And weighing in at just a pound, it’s lighter and more affordable than many of the other bike locks on the market.

Best bib shorts: Pearl Izumi Pro Bib Shorts

A pair of cycling shorts with a bib attached by Pearl Izumi against a plain background.

Pearl Izumi

SEE IT

A quality pair of bibs can make a surprising difference in the comfort of your bike ride. After trying numerous brands, Pearl Izumi’s bibs, including the Pro version, have firmly landed the spot as my favorite thanks to the material the company uses. It is incredibly soft, smooth, and stretchy, unlike anything from other brands. It breathes well and easily wicks away sweat, keeping me comfortable even on the hottest, most humid days. The seamless design means that there’s less chance of chafing even on long rides. And the chamois offers just enough padding in all the right places without being overly thick. They come in both men’s and women’s and are available in a handful of colors and designs.

Best water bottle: Camelbak Podium Chill

A clear plastic insulated water bottle by Camelbak with a a black cover.

Camelbak

SEE IT

Most of us can’t have too many water bottles. They have a tendency to get scuffed and dented, start leaking, get lost, or stay filled up for far too long and start molding, needing replacement. However, weight has to be considered when it comes to a ride. The Camelbak Podium Chill is an insulated bottle that keeps drinks cool even on hot rides. It is designed to fit securely in most bottle cages and is easy to squeeze to get water out efficiently. The cap is self-sealing, so it won’t leak when it inevitably gets thrown in the backseat of the car. And it’s available in a range of colors, so you can pick something up that matches the color scheme of your cyclist’s bike.

The post The best gifts for cyclists from Garmin, Wahoo, Peloton, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-gravel-driveways/ Fri, 19 Aug 2022 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=463653
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

Cut through the snow, not your driveway.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for gravel driveways sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Honda Power Equipment HSS928AATD is the best overall snow blower for gravel driveways. Honda Power Equipment HSS724AAWD
SEE IT

With an easy electric start and adjustable auger height, this beast of a blower will carve a path through frozen precipitation in no time.
Best Electric EGO SNT2400 is the best electric snow blower for gravel driveways. EGO SNT2400
SEE IT

More eco-friendly, as well as noise pollution negligible, than gas-powered blowers, this electric option is still highly efficient.
Best for Long Driveways Ariens 30-inch snow blower for long driveways Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower
SEE IT

It can cut a 30-inch path through more than 18 inches of snow, which means fewer passes and shorter clearing times.

You might be avoiding snow blowers for gravel driveways because you’ve heard they’ll kick up rocks and damage your property. At the same time, shoveling out your entire driveway probably sounds like a horrid chore. The answer is a two-stage or three-stage snow blower, capable of skimming across the top of your driveway, removing the majority of snow while leaving your driveway intact. If you feel like picking the right machine for the job has you between a bunch of rocks and a hard place, we’ve made it easier with our list of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

How we selected the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Selecting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is a bit different than choosing the best snow blowers to use in a general sense. The main issue is that you cannot safely use a 1-stage snow blower on gravel driveways because they have no way to prevent rocks from making it out through the chute. Wheels and treads are another worthwhile consideration. In any event, we had to go beyond the top-rated snow blowers and look at each machine to make sure it would remove your snow and not the ground, without having to resort to snow shovels. We considered critical reviews and user impressions to help us narrow down our list to the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The best snow blowers for gravel driveways: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers are all adequate choices for gravel driveways. While the typical choice is going to be a gas-powered 2-stage snow blower, we’ve also got some variety for you. Within this list, you’ll be able to find anything you would want from the category, from heavy-duty snow blowers to the best electric snow blower. In the end, all of the following choices will make for a good snow blower for gravel driveway clearing.

Best overall: Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower

Honda Power Equipment HSS928AATD is the best overall snow blower for gravel driveways.

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty snow blower by Honda has the power to get big jobs done.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: Fits in 60 x 44 x 30 inches pre-assembly
  • Weight: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Easy electric start
  • Adjustable auger height
  • Clears 24-inches wide
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive

The top of our list belongs to Honda Power Equipment for its sheer power. This beast of a machine can handle 1,500 pounds of snow a minute, with a 24-inch wide clearing opening. Keeping on your gravel driveway should be relatively easy with the tank-like treads on the back two wheels. Be sure to install skid shoes on the bottom of the front section to give your snow blower some lift, but also be aware that the height of the Honda Power Equipment’s auger (the part that gets rid of the snow) is adjustable.

You can also take advantage of the offered expert assembly, which will be especially useful since the Honda Power Equipment snow blower weighs over 220 pounds. The weight, alongside the hefty cost, is going to turn some heads, but the overall efficacy of the Honda Power Equipment and advanced height adjustment earns it its slot at the top of the best snow blowers for gravel driveways.

Best electric: EGO SNT2400

EGO SNT2400 is the best electric snow blower for gravel driveways.

EGO Power+

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The EGO SNT2400 is one of the few fully electric stage-2 snow blowers that can compete with a gas-powered snow blower.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stages
  • Size: 49 x 26 x 45 inches
  • Weight: 154.7 pounds

Pros

  • Much quieter than gas-powered models
  • Headlights
  • Eco friendly
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • No provided batteries/charger

Our best electric snow blower for gravel driveways comes in the form of the EGO SNT2400. This product really outshines its gas-powered competitors in that it isn’t churning out noxious fumes into the air while also staying quiet in the mornings to not wake up the kids and neighbors.

The EGO SNT2400 uses arc lithium batteries to deliver the power of gas without all of the environmental downsides. The batteries also give you the chance for a completely electric but also cordless snow blower-for-gravel-driveways experience.

Unfortunately, the EGO SNT2400 does not come with the batteries and charger. This does, however, give you some choice and flexibility in what you’re getting, as well as save you some money if you’re an electric fan that already has the needed batteries for other EGO Outdoor Power Equipment. For this model, EGO recommends using two of the 56V ARC Lithium batteries, with the 7.5 Ah model being able to clear an 18-car driveway in a single charge.

Best 3-stage: CRAFTSMAN SB650 28-in Three-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Craftsman three-stage snow blower

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The extra turbo mode kicks when when you have to chop through super-heavy snow or ice.

Specs

  • Stages: 3-stage
  • Size: 53 x 28 x 43 inches
  • Weight: 283 pounds

Pros

  • Extra power when you need it
  • Extremely burly wheels
  • Self-propulsion
  • 357cc engine
  • Six forward speeds and two reverse speeds

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When things get rough, such as when you get refrozen snow regularly, it becomes time for a 3-stage snow blower. These hardy snow blowers have an accelerator that pushes through into the heaviest and wettest of snows, giving you the power to get the job done. This 357cc model is one of the most powerful currently available.

It cuts a 28-inch swath through the accumulated snow up to 18-inches hight. That means you can wait until the storm is over (most of the time) and then quickly clear the driveway all in one shot instead of having to do multiple passes. The self-propulsion system offers six forward speeds and two reverse speeds. You’ll need that help from the self-propulsion system since this blower weighs in at a very hefty 283 pounds.

It can throw snow for up to 30 feet and the versatile blade design makes it right at home on paved surfaces or un-paved surfaces. That’s great if you’re clearing a big property with mixed terrain.

If you typically just get fluffy snow that blows around in the wind, then this model might be overkill. But, if you get heavy, icy snow that tends to choke your regular blower, than this is absolutely worth the upgrade.

Best for long driveways: Ariens Deluxe 30-in Two-stage Self-propelled Gas Snow Blower

Ariens 30-inch snow blower for long driveways

Ariens

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You want two things when clearing a long driveway: a wide clearing area and self-propulsion. This has both.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 58 x 32 x 45
  • Weight: 275 pounds

Pros

  • Super-wide 30-inch clearing area
  • Powerful engine
  • Long throw
  • Self-propulsion
  • Push-button electric start

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

When you have a long driveway, you want to clear as much snow as possible with each pass. This powerful snow mover cuts a 30-inch wide path through the accumulation. That drastically cuts down on how long it takes to cover a large area. It’s also capable of chewing through up to 18 inches of snow, so no need to go out and do multiple sessions.

This machine offers variable-speed self-propulsion, which is all-but-mandatory since it weighs a very hefty 275 pounds. Still, it’s relatively easy to maneuver thanks to the powerful self-drive mechanism and burly back tires. The auger can throw snow up to 50 feet, so it’s good for wide driveways as well. Plus, the chute rotates up to 200 degrees so you can be surgical when it comes to placing the blown snow. This is a beast of a machine, but if you have a long driveway, it can drastically decrease time spent clearing snow.

Best budget: PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc

PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc is the best snow blower for gravel driveways for the budget.

PowerSmart

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: PowerSmart has provided us with a fully powered 2-stage snow blower for under $800.

Specs

  • Stages: 2-stage
  • Size: 32.3 x 24.8 x 22 inches
  • Weight: 143 pounds

Pros

  • Great power for the price
  • Relatively lightweight
  • Expert assembly available

Cons

  • Jiggly chute

Finally, we have a 2-stage snow blower from PowerSmart. Despite its relatively affordable price, the PowerSmart is tough enough to get through difficult storms thanks to a clearing height of up to 21 inches at full 2-foot width. It uses a 212cc standard gas engine with a corded electric start.

What the PowerSmart lacks in premium features, such as headlights or heated handles, it makes up for by being a solid unit that won’t break the bank. You’ll also notice that sticking to the essentials gives makes the PowerSmart comparatively lightweight at only 143 pounds. Where most units are considerably heavier than me, there’s a lot of comfort in working with a machine in the slippery snow that is more comparable in weight.

The PowerSmart features a 180-degree rotatable chute. While, in theory, this rotation should be under your control, consumer reports mention that the chute can have a mind of its own from time to time and change its aim. This is particularly noticeable in bumpy terrain. Still, you should be able to get it back under control quickly if you are attentive.

Things to consider before buying snow blowers for gravel driveways

While the number of stages is the most important thing to consider when buying a snow blower for gravel driveways compared to one for other use cases, there are other important things to consider before buying such a large, complicated piece of equipment. Then chuck on your best heated gloves and your best heated jacket and get to work.

Stages

At its most simple, we can describe the stage amount as the number of steps and parts used to chuck snow elsewhere. The most important distinction for users wanting to blow snow off the tops of gravel driveways is separating 1-stage and higher-stage snow blowers.

A 1-stage snow blower, also known as a “snow thrower,” has a more open build and no shielding to protect the ground. The result is snow—and gravel—thrown everywhere. These 1-stage snow blowers are not suitable snow blowers for gravel driveways.

The 2-stage and 3-stage snow blowers, meanwhile, are made for gravel driveways. A large part of this is the addition in most models of skid shoes, which force the machine slightly off the ground. The result is a skimming-off-the-top effect, leaving just a thin layer of snow atop your undisturbed gravel. The main bonus of a 3-stage over a 2-stage is the addition of an accelerator that can help with harder, refrozen snow.

Please note that other terminology works for these products, as well. For example, 2-stage, dual-stage, and two-stage all work interchangeably. When looking for the best snow blowers for gravel driveways avoid snow throwers, 1-stage snow blowers, single-stage snow blowers, and one-stage snow blowers.

Expert assembly options

Regardless of how handy you are, a bit of help putting together a several-hundred-pound machine can be quite useful. This assembly can also ensure that the skid shoes—the part of the snow blower that raises the machine up to not eat your gravel—are attached properly. As a bonus, the cost of getting expert assembly is typically quite cheap. For example, the EGO SNT2400 has an expert assembly option that adds less than 5% to the overall cost of the machine. That being said, be sure to discuss the details with the service provider, as there is usually a clause that allows for an updated estimate based on the complexity of the machine.

Size & weight

Picturing your heavy-duty snow blower tossing snow out of your path sounds great as the season approaches, but will you be happy with a large and ultra-heavy machine sitting in your garage all year? Be careful and imagine setting a box with the weight and dimensions of your new product in your shed for a full year. Are you going to be using it enough during the viable season to make it worth having it from spring to fall as well or is it going to be weighing you down more than the full utility that it provides? The heaviest snow blowers can weigh nearly 300 pounds. Once weights get up above 150 pounds or so, you want to make sure to have self-propulsion. Also, heavier models benefit from reverse gears to help you go backwards without doing a World’s Strongest Man event.

FAQs

Q: How much does a snow blower for gravel driveways cost?

A snow blower for gravel driveways can cost anywhere from below $800 to over $3,000. More complex models and, oftentimes, 3-stage snow blowers are likely to cost more than the rest. It is really important to evaluate how often you are really going to be using a snow blower when buying one for gravel driveways due to their high cost. Alternatively, consider budget models like the PowerSmart Snow Blower 212cc, which can pay for themselves after just a dozen or so uses.

Q: Can any snow blower be used on gravel driveways?

Any snow blower that doesn’t lift the snow from the surface directly can be used on gravel driveways. One-stage snow blowers take the snow from the surface and, in one step (or “stage”) directly displace it. In the case of gravel driveways, 1-stage snow blowers will also remove gravel on the surface as well. As a result, 1-stage snow blowers should not be used for gravel driveways.

Q: Two-stage vs three-stage snow blowers: what’s better for gravel?

The 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blowers, unlike the 1-stage snow blowers discussed in the question above, are both suitable for gravel. Instead, the debate on getting a 2-stage vs 3-stage snow blower comes down to how much power you need. Typical consumers will be fine with a two-stage snow blower, but some might appreciate the third stage (acceleration) that can be found in 3-stage snow blowers such as the Cub Cadet 3X 28.”

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for gravel driveways

Getting the best snow blowers for gravel driveways is easy once you’ve figured out the need to have a 2-stage or 3-stage snow blower at a minimum. The snow blowers presented on this list should appeal to anyone wishing to get something to make the winter more bearable, with the Honda 660780 Two Stage Snow Blower being a particularly strong choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for gravel driveways of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow blowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-blower/ Fri, 25 Feb 2022 15:59:49 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-snow-blower/
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

Snow piling up? Dig in here so you can dig out in a hurry with a snow blower to clear your driveway in no time.

The post The best snow blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers header sliced
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The PowerSmart Two Stage Snow Blower is the best two-stage PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower
SEE IT

A reliable and heavy-duty pick to handle serious winter conditions.
Best electric Snow Joe SJ623E Electric Single Stage Snow Thrower Snow Joe Electric Blower
SEE IT

Skip the hassle of maintenance and choose sustainably with this electric, yet high-powered option.
Best budget Home photo Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower
SEE IT

Save your money while still clearing snow effectively.

When the weather is nice, a snow blower sounds like a luxury. When there’s a foot of snow covering your driveway and you have to be at work soon, you’ll be truly glad you invested in some mechanical help for clearing all that pesky white stuff. While your small walkway or porch might only need a quick shovel (as long as you do it safely), in some places the task of hauling snow over your shoulder can be nothing short of back-breaking (or heart-killing). With the right snow blower, you can clear your driveway, street, or sidewalk in a matter of minutes without much more effort than pressing a button or pulling a cord. However, picking the right one can feel a little overwhelming. Luckily, we’re here to take the guesswork out of snow removal.

How we chose the best snow blowers

When selecting the best snow blowers to make winter storms a whole lot more bearable, we reviewed each unit’s cost, power source, reviews, and displacement to select only the best products. We considered over 40 products and 10 brands to ultimately narrow it down to this list of the best six. Our final range includes blowers designed for different climates—as those who only need to clear a few inches won’t need the same kind of power as those who get hit with more serious snowfall. Whether you’re on a budget or want a high-end option with plenty of bells and whistles, we’ve included a product pick for you.

The best snow blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Snow blowers aren’t just for locations with frequent blizzards. These machines can assist in clearing everything from a dusting to a blizzard. It all depends on what you need and how much you want to spend.

Best overall: PowerSmart PSSAM24 Snow Blower

Why it made the cut: This powerful two-stage pick offers chute control, multiple speed settings, and a four-cycle engine to get through any storm.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 212 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Steel auger cuts through snow
  • 8 total speeds
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

This snow blower is a reliable, durable, and powerful machine equipped to clear most snowfalls. The gas-powered, two-stage blower beats electric and one-stage models when it comes to forcing, and the steel auger slices through even heavy or icy snow buildup to provide a 24-inch wide, 20-inch deep clearing capacity. The PowerSmart has an energetic 212cc engine, 13-inch-height tires to dig deep into terrain, 180 degrees of chute control (with a 40-foot throw), and eight total speeds (six forward, two reverse), giving you a range of options to choose from when clearing your unique driveway, sidewalk, or street.

Best gas-powered: Ariens Deluxe 30-inch Two-Stage Snow Blower

Ariens Deluxe 28-in 254-cc Two-Stage Self-Propelled Gas Snow Blower with Push-Button Electric Start;

Lowes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This gas-powered pick can cut through even the most abominable snow buildup with snow blows of up to 50 feet.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 306 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: 50 feet

Pros

  • Dual belts for more power
  • Auto-turn steering
  • All steel frame for durability

Cons

  • If not maintained well the steel can rust

Save yourself the hassle of making pass after pass after pass with this powerful Ariens snow blower. Capable of clearing a 30-inch-wide path and cutting through 21 inches of piled-up snow, this two-stage snow blower will make quick work of even the most sprawling driveways. Auto-turn steering also means no tricky levers or triggers to manipulate—just press the electric push button and start carving. The dual belt system also allows your engine to output more power where it matters, so clearing even heavy snowfall can be a breeze.

Best full-sized electric: EGO Power+ SNT2112 21-Inch 56-Volt Lithium-Ion Cordless Snow Blower

The EGO Power SNT2112 21-inch 56-volt lithium ion cordless snow blower

EGO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power source: Battery
  • Throw distance: 40 feet

Pros

  • Strong steel auger
  • Comes with extra batteries
  • Quieter than many gas-powered models
  • Low vibration
  • Extremely easy to start

Cons

  • Not self-propelled

Electric snow blowers used to be wimpy machines that could barely handle a dusting. That’s no longer true and EGO’s powerful snow moving machine is proof. It comes with a pair of batteries and a dual-outlet charger so you can keep them both ready to go for when the snow falls. It’s electric, so it starts very quickly and easily with no cord to pull. Once it’s running, it’s noticeably quieter than its gas-powered pals.

Up front, a steel auger chops through snow and ice with aplomb. It measures 21 inches wide, which is wide enough to make quick work of a full-sized driveway, but still nimble enough to clear narrow walkways and other paths. Two charged batteries provide enough power to clear a 12-car driveway of eight inches of snow. If you want a simple, effective way to move snow without a ton of maintenance or effort, this is a great option. It’s not self-propelled, so you’ll have to push it, but the auger is so good at its job that it won’t be a heavy lift.

Best compact electric: Snow Joe SJ627E Electric Walk-Behind Snow Blower

Snow Joe 21 in. Single Stage Electric Snow Blower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Simply charge up and get snow blowing with this eco-friendly-meets-affordable pick, which clears an impressive amount of snow despite its lightweight and compact design.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Engine displacement: 840 lbs/min
  • Throw distance: 25 feet

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Sustainable
  • Lightweight design

Cons

  • Not suited for large driveways

Powered with a rechargeable 100-volt, 5.0 Ah lithium-ion battery, this electric snow blower can clear a path that’s 22 inches wide and 13 inches high. This model comes with a battery and charger, but you can add an additional battery (sold separately) if thirty minutes of run time isn’t enough. And with dual 5-Watt LED lights, you’ll be able to see where you’re going even when the sun is down. Unlike gas models, the Snow Joe requires no maintenance, so your snow blower won’t malfunction if it goes untouched for months in the garage. Despite its more compact size, this pick can also move 840 pounds of snow per minute, making it a workhorse worthy of a try.

rounded option.

Best compact: Ariens 18S 18-in Single-stage Push with Auger Assistance Gas Snow Blower

Ariens compact snow blower

Ariens

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: There aren’t many compact gas-powered snow blowers out there, but this is a very solid option.

Specs

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 99cc
  • Throw distance: 10 feet

Pros

  • One of just a few gas-powered compact models
  • Clever blade design gets all the way to the driveway
  • Easy to start with one or two pulls
  • High-visibility color

Cons

  • Heavier than electric models
  • Max snow clearing height of six inches so not for heavy storms

You won’t find many gas-powered compact snow blowers out there anymore with so many electric models to choose from. But, if you’re keeping a snow clearing machine at a camp or area with inconsistent access to electricity, then a petrol-powered machine may be the way to go. This 18-inch wide machine has a 99cc engine inside and a 12-inch intake height. It’s only meant to clear six inches of a snow at a time, so you’ll have to go out and clear regularly if you get a storm with more accumulation than that. But, this machine starts easily, runs relatively quietly (at least compared to other gas-powered blowers), and maneuvers deftly. Its clever auger blade design allows it to get all the way down to the bare driveway without leaving scrapes or marks or getting damaged if it hits an errant rock.

The chute turns a full 210 degrees, so you can throw snow wherever you want it as you move along. That comes in handy if you have a driveway with a lot of vehicles or picky neighbors who don’t allow your snow to touch their precious lawn.

Best two-stage: Briggs & Stratton Dual-Stage Snow Blower

The Briggs & Stratton Dual-Stage snow blower and a

Briggs & Stratton

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-quality option has a powerful motor and two-stage design to tackle the heaviest snowfalls.

Specs:

  • Power source: Gas
  • Engine displacement: 208 cubic centimeters
  • Throw distance: Up to 40 feet

Pros

  • Easy electric push start
  • Heated hand grips
  • Non-slip treaded tires

Cons

  • Heavier design

This powerful gas two-stage snow blower can easily tackle snowfalls that are up to 20 inches and move 208 cubic cm of snow, making it one of the best machines to clear areas hit with serious snowfall. While considerably more expensive than the other options in the article, this gas snow blower will cut through just about anything you put in its way and you give total control over where it ends up. The dual-trigger steering also allows you to cut tight turns and clear snow precisely, which ultimately makes for a faster process overall.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Greenworks 13 Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Thrower

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Snowblowers tend to be quite the investment, but you don’t have to spend a ton to save time clearing drifts—this Greenworks pick has quite the power, despite its more compact size and affordable pricing.

Specs:

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • Clearing depth: 10 inches
  • Throw distance: 20 feet

Pros

  • Affordable pick
  • Lightweight design
  • Easy electric start

Cons

  • Requires extension cord

If you live somewhere that only sees light, sporadic snowfall, there’s absolutely no reason to shell out big money on a snow blower with features you don’t need. This Greenworks electric snow blower will clear a path that’s 20 inches wide and 10 inches deep. Since it’s AC-powered, you’ll never run out of juice as long as you can reach an outlet. Convenient to store and easy to start, this is a great snow thrower if you don’t want to spend too much money. It’s also a great model to buy for any elderly people you may help care for since it’s light enough to handle without too much effort.

What to consider when buying the best snow blowers

They say that every snowflake is unique, and snow blowers are no different. Depending on your individual needs, you may want a fairly no-frills device or the latest technology. Check out these five things to consider before buying the best snow blower, and then let the snowfall where it may. And while you’re outfitting yourself to tackle those drifts, check out our roundups of the best snow boots, heated socks, heated insoles, heated vests, and winter hats to help you get the job done more comfortably (and when you get back inside, grab your heated slippers).

For long driveways and big clean-ups, power your snow blower with gas

Generally speaking, gas-powered snow blowers tend to be more powerful than even the best electric models. So, if you have to clean up a long driveway or city block, you’ll probably want your snow blower to run on gas.

Gas models do have their downsides: for example, you’ll need to change the oil from time to time and make sure that you’re using the right type of gasoline. Other upkeep will include changing or cleaning the filters as needed and occasionally replacing a burnt-out spark plug. However, when the inches start piling up, the maintenance a gas-powered snow blower requires will be more than worth it.

For convenience and ease of use, there’s no beating an electric snow blower

In addition to being more environmentally friendly than their gas-powered counterparts, electric snow blowers are easier to use and require less upkeep. Depending on the model, all you’ll need to do is plug them in (or charge the battery) and you’ll be ready to go.

Unfortunately, electric snow blowers tend to be less powerful than gas-powered ones, so if you have a huge amount of snow to clear, you might find yourself making multiple passes or cursing when the battery runs out. “Less powerful” doesn’t mean “not powerful,” though, and a well-made electric model might be exactly what you’re looking for provided the conditions you’ll be using it in aren’t terribly inclement. There are truly burly electric models on the market, but expect to fork over a pretty penny for them. Some cost $2,000 and up.

A two-stage snow blower is the best choice for clearing large areas and really deep snow

If you live in an area that gets pummeled with snow, a one-stage snow blower just isn’t going to cut it. The difference between a one-stage and two-stage snow blower comes down to how much heavy lifting the “auger” (the part that sucks up the snow) is being asked to do—and in a one-stage model, it’s being asked to do everything.

Put simply, in a one-stage model, the auger sucks up the snow and spits it out, while in a two-stage model, the auger only has to suck it up while another part (the “impeller”) is responsible for blowing it somewhere else. If you’re looking to clear more than 8 inches of snow, a two-stage model is the only type that will get the job done. Electric models are all one-stage, so if you live in a place that gets lots of snow, a gas-powered, two-stage model is a must.

The best snow blowers will come with a few bells and whistles

Not all snow blowers are built equally and picking one with some extra features can save you a lot of time and frustration. For example, if you can’t wait for the sun to come out to clear a path to your car, you’ll definitely want to consider a snow blower with a built-in light. Want more control over where the snow you throw lands? Some models come equipped with remote chute control, so you don’t make another mess cleaning up the first one.

FAQs

Q: How long should a snow blower last?

Depending on the brand, style, use time, how they’re stored, and how well you care for the machine, snow blowers can last between 10-30 years. This means that, in order to get more winters out of your snow blower, you will need to give it some love and care in the off-season with some maintenance. This includes draining the gas, replacing sparkplugs, oiling the wheels, and cleaning it. A basic parts inspection every 20 hours of use is a good rule of thumb to follow.

Q: Do you need hearing protection when using a snow blower?

You don’t need to wear hearing protection when using a snow blower, but you should, as they can be loud. For example, gas snow blowers can reach up to 85 decibels. Eight hours of exposure to that decibel level is considered safe. However, at 100 decibels, the safe exposure time drops to 15 minutes. Although snow on the ground isn’t permanent, hearing loss is. If you’re looking for hearing protection that you can use year-round, check out our best earplugs for concerts. You can rock them under your hat when you’re outside using your brand new snow blower, and rock out with them when seeing your favorite band in town.

Q: Do snow blowers work on heavy snow?

It depends on the kind of snow blower you buy. Single-stage and two-stage blowers can handle up to a foot of snow. Three-stage snow blowers can handle 16 inches. Two- and three-stage snow blowers also remove a wider swath of snow in a pass compared to single-stage snow blowers. If you get frequent, heavy snows, a two- or three-stage snow blower is worth the investment since it will be easier—and less time-consuming—to clear your driveway.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers

The best snow blowers vary widely in price, power, and performance. Depending on your needs, features like LED lighting and remote chute control can be extremely helpful or totally superfluous. Bottom line: the best snow blower is the one that’s suited to your area’s weather conditions and the amount of area you’ll need to clear. Think gas-powered and two-stage models for blizzard-prone climates, and smaller electric units for more fair-weather locales.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-shovels-for-seniors/ Sat, 24 Sep 2022 13:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=472327
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

Nobody wants to shovel snow, but you do want access to your driveway so always be prepared.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover is the best overall snow shovel for seniors. True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover
SEE IT

True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.
Best with wheels Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel on a plain background Snowcaster 36-inch Wheeled Snow Shovel
SEE IT

A wide blade affixed to a pair of sturdy wheels make this handy tool a manual snow plow.
Best ergonomic Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
SEE IT

With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

If you live in a region that gets any amount of snow in the winter, then you need a good snow shovel. While shoveling snow is hard work, particularly for senior citizens and people with chronic joint or muscle pain, it is the best (and most affordable) means of digging out after a snowstorm. Frankly, there are health risks associated with shoveling, and we’d advise older homeowners with underlying health concerns to hand the responsibility to someone else. If you have to, though, the best snow shovels for seniors will minimize the pain as you safely clear your walkways and driveways.

Before you buy: The health risks of shoveling snow

Shoveling snow is strenuous labor. If you aren’t regularly working out or at least working around the house, it should not be the one physically taxing chore you do every year. With poor form, poor fitness, or poor equipment, you can hurt your back and put yourself at an increased risk of a heart attack. 

In our guide to the best snow blowers for elderly people, we spoke to Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, who warned that clearing snow is always risky for older people with physical limitations, and that same advice applies here.

Colder temperatures and the intense physical exertion of shoveling snow can push your cardiovascular system, specifically your heart, potentially leading to a cardiac event. It is even more dangerous if you have a pre-existing condition like coronary disease, according to the American Heart Association.

The cardiovascular demands of snow shoveling are akin to an intense workout. As you raise and lower your arms, your blood pressure will increase and put more strain on your heart. The cold air you inhale may also contribute to the problem by constricting blood vessels, including your coronary arteries.

We highly recommend that anyone with muscle, joint, or coronary health issues consider hiring professionals to clear the snow from their homes. If that isn’t an option, buy a snow blower and use it as much as possible before picking up a snow shovel. As any homeowner will tell you, though, a snow blower can’t clear every nook and cranny of your outdoor space, so using a shovel may be necessary from time to time. If you have to shovel, take precautions before stepping outside: Stretch before you begin to warm your body up and take frequent breaks.

How we chose the best snow shovel for seniors

I’ve been writing about gear for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best snow blowers to the best energy-efficient air conditioners. To put this guide together, I drew on PopSci’s past research and personal insight for recommending the best snow blowers for elderly people and the best snow shovels in general. I also considered recent reviews from experts and users to ensure our recommendations for what to keep in the storage shed are current as we get closer to the snow season.

The best snow shovels for seniors: Reviews & Recommendations

The snow shovel isn’t a complicated tool, but it’s worth buying the right one. Above all, keep safety in mind, and choose a shovel that will make things easier on your body. The best snow shovels for seniors come in a surprising variety of shapes and sizes, which we hope will help you have an easier winter season.

Best overall: True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover

True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover is the best overall snow shovel for seniors.

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, an ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.

Specs

  • Weight: 3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Handle length: 37.4 inches
  • Blade width: 18 inches

Pros

  • Comfortable design
  • Lightweight
  • Strong, wide blade

Cons 

  • We wish a second grip on the handle came standard

The True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover features a durable design, a curved aluminum handle, and an 18-inch-wide plastic blade. It’s light for its size—just 3 pounds—and the wide combo-style blade makes it a versatile option for clearing small patios and long walkways. The oversized grip is big enough to accommodate hands wearing big winter gloves, and it works with a handle attachment, providing users with improved leverage when scooping snow. The blade even features a plastic wear strip, which will extend its lifespan and keep it from gouging your hardwood deck.

Best ergonomic: Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Handle length: 50 inches
  • Blade width: 20 inches

Pros

  • Second handle
  • Combo blade
  • Lightweight and durable

Cons 

  • Metal wear strip isn’t suitable for wood or stone surfaces

The Snow Joe Shovelution is the most novel snow shovel we’ve seen in a long time. It’s a 20-inch combo-style shovel with a secondary “spring-assist” handle for your lead hand. This allows you to lift a shovel full of snow while only barely bending your back. When you pull the snow free, the bendable front handle snaps back to position, flinging the snow forward without any effort. The Shovelution is very lightweight and suited for tackling all kinds of jobs.

It isn’t perfect for every situation: The hard edge will scuff up wood and tile. The snow-flinging action forces you to pile snow in front of you, which may impact how you shovel. Still, the Snow Joe Shovelution is far and away the most interesting snow shovel we’ve looked at.

Best pusher: The Snowplow 36-inch Wide Model

The Snowplow 36-inch Wide Model is the best pusher snow shovel for seniors.

The Snowplow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Snowplow’s 36-inch blade makes it a breeze to uncover wide surfaces.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.84 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, fiberglass
  • Handle length: 47 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Wide blade
  • Works well on various surfaces
  • Great for breaking up ice

Cons 

  • Expensive

The ultrawide Snowplow shovel is ideal for cutting paths in unpacked snowfall on sidewalks and driveways. It features a 36-inch plastic blade, allowing users to create a huge path in a single pass. It also features a sharp edge when flipped over that you can use to scrape and break up clumps of ice. 

It’s worth noting that you will need to assemble the Snowplow before using it, and some reviewers have noted the bolts on the shovel can come loose if not installed correctly. If you don’t mind doing a little prep, though, it can make clearing paths a whole lot easier.

Best with wheels: Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel

Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel on a plain background

Snowcaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The snow pusher’s wide blade and contractor-grade construction make it ideal for clearing light to medium amounts of snow in a hurry.

Specs:

  • Weight: 11.21 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 45 – 50 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Heavy duty design
  • Large tires
  • Adjustable handle

Cons 

  • Expensive

If you’re willing to clear snow more regularly rather than letting it pile up, then a wheeled shovel may be a great option for you. This pusher boasts a blade that’s 36 inches wide. That’s considerably wider than a typical shovel. A pair of sturdy wheels on the back of the blade allow you to simply push it along a hard surface while it scrapes the snow off. The technique is nearly identical to how a snow plow would move. It’s not meant to clear feet of snow at a time, but if you’re clearing a couple of inches, it’s as simple as pushing it back and forth along the driveway. That saves you from having to lift the snow, which is how many injuries happen. The steel handle and thick plastic blade are built for contractor use. That gives it a relatively high price tag, but it also means it will last for years and years, even with heavy use. And even though it has a very wide blade, it’s still relatively light. At just over 11 pounds, it’s a solid pound lighter than most of its competition. That results in easier pushing and less grumbling when it’s time to go clear the driveway.

Best budget: True Temper 16-inch Poly Snow Shovel

True Temper 16-inch Poly Snow Shovel is the best budget snow shovel for seniors.

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s affordable snow shovel is simple but effective.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.14 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 36 inches
  • Blade width: 16 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Lightweight
  • Good for shoveling and pushing

Cons: 

  • Straight handle isn’t great for your back

True Temper, the company behind our top pick, also makes a basic but solid combo-style snow shovel. As the name suggests, this model features a 16-inch plastic blade suited for shoveling and pushing snow. The plastic blade won’t scratch your deck or patio, and its steel grip is made for gloved hands. This shovel’s best asset is its weight: At only 2.14 pounds, it’s easy to maneuver. This shovel is smaller than many of our other picks, and it lacks a curved handle, so it isn’t exactly ideal. That said, it’s close enough that we’d recommend it over picking up the first thing you can find at a store.

What to look for when picking the best snow shovels for seniors

A snow shovel should be light, durable, and offer an ergonomic design that puts less strain on your back. Everything from the material to the shape of the handle and the scoop will significantly impact the overall experience. You shouldn’t just grab the first one you can find at the hardware store the day before a blizzard. Take your time, and keep these things in mind while shopping for a new snow shovel.

Blade type

You’ll come across three main types of snow shovels, which are mostly designed by the shape of their blades, or the part you use for scooping, pushing, and lifting the snow. Some shovels are designed to lift snow, others to push it. Some aren’t actually designed for snow removal at all.

A corn scoop shovel, or grain shovel, features a straight handle and a flat blade in the shape of a spade. While they’re often heavy enough to cut through heavy, ice-covered snow, they’re rarely the best choice for shoveling. The flat, narrow blade can’t hold very much snow and isn’t designed for pushing it around.

A snow pusher shovel is, as the name implies, designed to push snow out of the way rather than scooping it up. The wide, curved blade is excellent for moving light, unpacked snow, especially from long walkways and driveways. A pusher blade takes less effort to use, especially in drier snow, but they’re not as easy to maneuver on narrow paths and stairs.

A combo shovel splits the difference between a corn scoop design and a pusher. They generally feature a bent or curved handle and a wide blade with a deep well that can scoop and push dense snow. Thanks to the ergonomic handle, you can scoop more snow without straining your back.

Realistically, we’d recommend anyone who gets snow multiple times a year have a combo shovel and a pusher. The combo shovel is the best universal option—it can handle all kinds of snow well. Depending on the layout of your home, you may be able to use a pusher to clear some pathways without lifting much snow, which is both easier and safer.

Handle design

The handle design of a snow shovel is also essential. Many basic shovels have a traditional, straight handle, which allows you to dig deep into a snowbank. But you don’t want a straight handle: It forces you to bend over more, putting strain on your back and making the act of shoveling harder.

Instead, look for a shovel with a curved handle. An ergonomic curve in the handle positions your leading hand higher, guiding you to better posture and less back pain. They’re just as stable and durable as any other shovel, so there’s no downside here.

Some snow shovels offer a more pronounced bend close to the blade, which does come with a tradeoff. The deep-bend handle makes things even easier on your back, but the more pronounced bend requires more effort for users to lift snow and toss it aside.

Materials

Manufacturers will make shovel blades from all kinds of materials, including plastic, steel, and aluminum. For the average homeowner, a lighter shovel is almost always better, so plastic is the way to go. It’s lightweight yet still offers excellent durability when scooping and pushing. Shovel blades made of steel or aluminum are better for breaking down icy snow, but they’re much heavier, so you’re more likely to hurt yourself. Metal shovels may also scratch or damage delicate surfaces like wood patios or stone tiles.

Extras

Most of us think of the snow shovel as a very simple piece of equipment, but there are some bells and whistles that you may find on a more expensive model. Some shovels feature a wear strip, which is a small plastic or metal strip that protects the end of the blade. If possible, we recommend looking for a plastic wear strip with a rounded edge. 

There are also useful third-party accessories: If you buy a shovel with a straight handle, you can get an attachable front-hand grip for about $10, which can improve your posture just like a curved handle.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow shovels cost?

Snow shovel prices vary depending on the blade type, materials, and additional features. That said, they aren’t especially expensive. Our best overall pick costs just under $30. Some more expensive options, like the Orientools Heavy Duty Rolling Snow Pusher costs as much as $70, while our budget pick costs only $12. Snow shovels are very durable, so all of them should last many years.

Q: Is a plastic or metal snow shovel better?

As we explained, plastic snow shovels are lighter, easier to use, and won’t damage delicate surfaces. That said, metal shovels can help you push deeper into frozen snowbanks, and break up solid ice. We recommend a plastic snow shovel for seniors with back, joint, or heart problems who should minimize their effort as much as possible.

Q: How can you keep snow from sticking to the snow shovel?

According to AccuWeather, coating your shovel blade in a lubricant like vegetable oil or cooking spray can keep snow from sticking to your shovel.

Q: How do you make snow shoveling easier?

Beyond buying the right snow shovel, we recommend making a plan before you start shoveling, so you spend less time working out in the cold. We also recommend stretching before shoveling: It won’t make the work “easier,” but you’re less likely to get hurt or feel aches and pains afterward. Lastly, if you’re using a shovel with a straight handle, consider buying a front handle attachment. Having a better, more ergonomic grip on your shovel will ease the strain on your back.

Q: Should you shovel while it is still snowing?

If you’re expecting a light snowfall, you might want to consider shoveling while it’s still coming down. It may sound counterintuitive, but the snow may freeze if you let it sit, especially if snow falls overnight. That said, shoveling multiple times per day may be too exhausting for some people. Use your best judgment and only shovel if you feel up to the task. In heavy snowstorms, it’s better to wait until the sky clears.

Q: At what age should you stop shoveling snow?

There’s no specific age for when you should stop shoveling snow. If you have chronic health conditions, particularly any issues with your heart, you should not shovel snow. Likewise, if you have muscle or joint pain, you should avoid shoveling snow. If you’re unsure, talk to your doctor before picking up your shovel.

Final thoughts on the best snow shovel for seniors

If you’re unsure if your body can handle the stress and strain of a hard workout, you should think twice about shoveling snow. For seniors with chronic health issues, it can be a serious health risk if you push yourself too hard. If you have the option, consider hiring someone to shovel for you. We know that’s not practical for everyone, though. If you have to do it yourself, buying one of the best snow shovels for seniors will make things at least a little bit easier on you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best ice picks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-ice-pick/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 19:10:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-ice-pick/
A line-up of ice picks on a white background
Amanda Reed

From ice fishing to bartending, these useful tools are perfect for getting a leg up on blocks of ice and frozen surfaces.

The post The best ice picks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A line-up of ice picks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Cuda SS Ice Pick Cuda Stainless Steel Ice Pick
SEE IT

This no-frills pick powers through the most stubborn ice.
Best for climbing Petzl Glacier Ice Pick PETZL Glacier Ice Axe
SEE IT

This lightweight and compact pick is perfect for any expedition.
Best budget Norpro Ice Pick Norpro, Brown Wooden Handle Ice Pick
SEE IT

This affordable pick can power through solid ice in no time.

Whether it’s floating in our beverages to keep them cool in summer or providing footing on top of a wintry lake, ice is something that requires a specific kind of tool: a pick. Finding the right pick to work with ice successfully means first considering the size of the job. The most basic form of ice pick is a small tool for single-handed use with one to three sharp prongs at the end. These are best for use in bars and kitchens, but if they’re large enough, they can work to break down chunks of ice in driveways, parking spots, and other low-stakes situations. For heavy-duty uses like fishing, hiking, camping, and climbing that involve extended time outdoors, a larger ice pick with a thick handle and blade should be used for maximum reliability and efficiency. Below, we’ve broken down a few of our favorite tools and key considerations to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for your next task.

How we chose the best ice picks

A dull ice pick makes climbing or cubing ice a hassle—and dangerous. To find the best ice picks, we looked at reviews and recommendations, tested them ourselves in our at-home bar areas and during other everyday tasks (we got a lot of old ice lining the sides of our freezers), and conducted heavy research.

The best ice picks: Reviews & Recommendations

From sharp ice picks that cut through ice cubes like a hot knife through butter to sporty tools that can help you clear the way for your next adventure, here is what we found in our quest for the best ice picks. So slip on some heated clothing and start chippin’ away at whatever’s in your way.

Best overall: Cuda SS Ice Pick

Cuda SS Ice Pick

Cuda Sports

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .22 lbs.
  • Blade length: 5-½ inches
  • Handle material: Stainless steel

Pros

  • Tip protector
  • Lanyard hole
  • Easy to hold

Cons

  • Doesn’t float

The SS option from Cuda sports a simple and sturdy construction with a durable stainless steel finish to prevent corrosion during use. It’s one of the best ice picks available for all-around use thanks to its 5-½-inch blade that runs through the length of the handle for superior control and strength. A scale pattern on the handle allows users to maneuver this pick to their liking, making it a flexible choice that excels outdoors. Be careful if using this near water—it will sink.

Best for climbing: Petzl Glacier Ice Pick

Petzl Glacier Ice Pick

Petzl

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .77 lbs.
  • Blade length: 12 inches
  • Handle material: Aluminum

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Great mountaineering axe for price
  • Portable

Cons

  • Extreme climbers might want something heftier

The Glacier is a super lightweight ice pick from Petzl that’s designed for anchoring and cutting steps in hard ice and snow with ease. It weighs under a pound and has a length of just over 1.5 feet, so it’s incredibly portable and durable. The steel head and spike are connected in the center by a rust-resistant anodized aluminum handle. More extreme climbers may want a heftier pick, but for most outdoor winter excursions, the Glacier is equipped to punch way above its weight class.

Best for backpacking trips: Rhino USA Folding Survival Shovel and Pick

Rhino USA Folding Survival Shovel and Pick

Rhino USA

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Coated carbon steel
  • Weight: 2 lbs.
  • Blade length: 6 inches
  • Handle material: Coated carbon steel

Pros

  • Foldable
  • Has multiple uses
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Locking mechanism hard to loosen, per reviews

This multitool from Rhino USA is one of the best for backpacking trips thanks to its portable, lightweight form factor and the inclusion of a shovelhead as well as a cutting edge for dealing with wood and other debris. Because it’s foldable, this unit is perfect for stowing in a bag and pulling out to assist in clearing trails or preparing areas for camp. It’s made of powder-coated carbon steel and extends to around 23 inches long when fully opened.

Best for bartenders: Barfame Wood Ice Pick

Barfame Wood Ice Pick

Barfame

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .5 lbs.
  • Blade length: Around 3 inches
  • Handle material: Wood

Pros

  • Food-safe
  • Combo pick hammer and spike

Cons

  • Tool not dishwasher safe due to wood handle

This wood-handled option from Barfame is a great choice for bartender and kitchen duties thanks to its simple shape and dual-prong construction. A pick hammer sits at the top of the handle to allow users to break ice with a tapping motion, while the spike at the bottom offers more traditional stabbing functionality. The food-safe steel ensures that the pick is easy to clean and stays free of rust, making this a good ice pick for bartenders facing high-volume tasks.

Best for home: Fortune Candy Ice Chipper

Fortune Candy Ice Chipper

Fortune Candy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: Around one pound
  • Blade length: Around 1 inch
  • Handle material: Stainless steel and silicone

Pros

  • Silicon grip for support and control
  • Made of food-grade materials
  • Sturdy

Cons

  • Heavy compared to other food-grade items on our list

This one from Fortune Candy is constructed from thick stainless steel and features three prongs for ice chipping and a durable food-grade silicone grip for added support and control. Extra weight and hefty construction assist users in maintaining a grip in the hand through even the most demanding motions.

Best budget: Norpro Ice Pick

Norpro Ice Pick

Norpro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Blade material: Stainless steel
  • Weight: .21 lbs.
  • Blade length: 7 ¼ inches
  • Handle material: Wood

Pros

  • Easy-to-grip handle
  • Included sheath for protection
  • Great value

Cons

  • Only good for light use

This basic ice pick from Norpro is one of the best cheap ice picks available, thanks to its sturdy stainless steel spike and easy-to-grip wooden handle. It measures 7 ¼ inches in length and includes a wooden sheath for easy storage and protection. For light use, this ice pick is an incredibly good value, but you may want to look elsewhere if durability and longevity are your main concerns. Still, the price point is accessible enough to make this a great choice for stocking up on backups.

What to consider when buying the best ice picks

The best ice pick for your needs depends on whether you want to use it in the kitchen or the great outdoors. There are some design overlaps between these varieties, but the most flexible ice picks are the ones that excel primarily as either a bar tool or as a climbing tool. Regardless of how you’ll use your pick, sturdy construction and thoughtful design are the key elements to keep an eye on.

They can be great bar accessories or a useful pieces of backpacking gear … or both

Ice picks are not particularly cost-prohibitive or bulky, but if versatility is your main concern, choose an all-around model that can excel at breaking down the most common ice-related tasks. When selecting the best ice pick overall, choose a model that offers an easy-to-grip handle that can be maneuvered from both the top and the side. This construction will ensure that you can retain control of the pick during even the most forceful motions.

Another key consideration to look for is a cutting element made of a hard, durable material that extends deep into the handle rather than being simply fastened to the end. This design ensures that torque and leverage are maintained while reinforcing the strength of the handle itself.

For outdoor adventures, look for an ice axe and ice spikes

Ice climbing is a popular and fun outdoor activity with many specific considerations and safety requirements to keep in mind. Because of the potentially severe and demanding nature of ice climbing, it’s crucial to select a pick specifically designed to withstand the rigors of the activity.

When selecting the best pick for climbing, look for a design that offers an easy-to-grip handle and a durable head made of steel or other tough materials. Lightweight construction with included carabiner holes or other fastening design elements ensures that the ice pick is within reach at a moment’s notice without adding extra bulk, which is critical for maintaining mobility. If you’re looking to streamline your climbing gear setup even more, look for a pick that includes a spiked end to add stability on flat surfaces.

A compact ice chisel should always be a part of your backpacking gear

The best ice pick for backpacking trips should have a foldable, portable design or be part of a set of foldable tools that are both durable and lightweight. By integrating the design of the pick into a form factor that includes a shovel, spade, axe, or other related backpacking gear, you can cut down on the space used in your bag while maximizing your preparedness for encounters with environmental variables.

Common backpacking circumstances warrant a dedicated pick, including the need to clear and traverse snowy trails in snow shoes, prepare backcountry campsites, and remove ice from hard surfaces, including wood, rock, and asphalt. As with other types of ice picks, it’s important to pick a harder material like steel to ensure effectiveness and prevent breakage. Because sturdier metals are likely to be heavy, a foldable and compact form factor are essential features to keep in mind when choosing the best ice pick for backpacking trips.

There’s no fancier tool to add to your cocktail kit than a pick for breaking up ice blocks

Any serious bartender knows that the quality of ice used in a cocktail directly affects the overall quality and taste of the drink itself. The best ice pick for bartender use allows professionals and amateurs alike to carve ice chips and shaped chunks from larger ice blocks, a technique that allows the formation of cocktail-friendly cube shapes. By having precise control over the shape and quality of ice, bartenders can use one to form chips for frothy drinks, sculpted cubes for serving liquor straight, and everything in between without having to rely on the cookie-cutter approach of an ice machine or freezer delivering uniform and generic ice cube shapes. Carving custom cubes and ice shapes from a dedicated larger block is a great way to ensure freshness, too, when ice is acquired for a specific event rather than stored over long periods of time. An ice pick is a key bartending accessory in your cocktail kit for its unparalleled flexibility, novelty, and class, and it can even break up cubes that have melted together in a pinch.

They can add a lovely vintage feel to your home bar tools

You don’t have to be a professional bartender to enjoy the benefits of a classy ice pick at home. Some of the best ice picks for home use are designed to add elegance and a unique flair to your personal bar—whether you’re staying in or entertaining guests. In a bar context, ice picks are perfect for shaving off small beverage-sized chunks of ice off of a larger main cube, which adds to the customizability of beverages and the overall freshness of the ice. Since larger blocks of ice take longer to melt, this system can safely be used over long periods during entertaining without added refrigeration. This mechanism applies equally to breaking up a mass of ice in the storage area of a home ice machine, which can melt and refreeze over time, fusing together.

When looking for the best ice pick for home use, you can’t go wrong with a durable and understated model that matches the rest of your bar tools. Steering away from branded accessories and opting for a generic metal or silver pick that features food-grade materials is key to ensuring longevity and sustained enjoyment.

FAQs

Q: How much do ice picks cost?

Ice picks dedicated to safety and stability in outdoor environments typically have a price tag corresponding to their critical application. In kitchen environments, however, you don’t need to spend much on an ice pick to get decent results. If you’re looking for the best cheap pick for low-impact applications, turn to a model under $10 with a spike longer than 5 inches to ensure adequate penetration of the ice block you’re breaking apart. It usually costs a little more to find a sturdy pick in this price category that has silicone grips, but wood is an adequate substitute.

Q: What’s the most durable material for an ice pick?

Steel is by far the most common material used for ice picks due to its sustained durability properties at a wide range of temperatures. In kitchen picks, food-safe stainless steel is the material of choice. Climbers’ picks and ice picks for backpacking often use aluminum in the handles to cut down on total weight and increase handleability.

Q: What other uses are there for ice picks besides chipping ice?

Ice picks have a few key uses besides chipping ice, most of which are within the realm of outdoor recreation. Climbers rely upon them to grant stability while moving across icy slopes, and ice fishers use them to cut holes through ice surfaces.

Q: Should I purchase an ice pick with a retractable blade?

A pick with a retractable blade can prevent accidental scratches and scrapes, but most smaller picks have their sheaths and covers for this purpose. In specific cases where you’re moving a lot or digging through a bag, a retractable pick can be beneficial, but in most kitchen and bar contexts, this isn’t necessary

Final thoughts on the best ice picks

Ice picks are unique tools that offer a variety of ways to harness the unique properties of ice both in the kitchen and out in the field. Fancy, compact picks are great for chipping away at ice blocks in bars and at home, while larger ice picks and foldable multi-tool picks are the way to go for hiking and backpacking. The best ice pick will allow users to gain control over, break apart, and distribute ice in any context, making it a welcome addition to any collection of kitchen or climbing gear.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best ice picks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best windshield snow covers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-windshield-snow-cover/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 21:08:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-windshield-snow-cover/
best windshield snow cover on a snowy street with cars
Le Duc via Unsplash

Ice, hail, snow, and other debris don’t belong on your windshield.

The post The best windshield snow covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best windshield snow cover on a snowy street with cars
Le Duc via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall FrostGuard Premium is the best Windshield Snow Cover overall FrostGuard Plus Winter Windshield Cover
SEE IT

This durable polyester and PVC lined cover can endure even the harshest winter conditions.
Best durable OxGord Windshield Snow Cover is the best durable pick OxGord Windshield Snow Cover
SEE IT

The anti-frost thermal shield design traps heat any time of day.
Best universal EcoNour Car Windshield Snow Cover best universal EcoNour Windshield Cover for Ice and Snow
SEE IT

This flexible design can protect your car from inclement conditions year round—whether it’s frost or extreme heat in the summer.

A windshield snow cover may not be the most exciting car accessory, but it’s one you’ll be happy to have on hand before the next storm. Rather than hurriedly trying to clear your windshield so you can make it to work or school in time, you can opt for a cover that will take the hassle out of winter weather. Get back to enjoying snowfall and be on your merry way (with the heat cranking, of course). In addition to making your windshield easier to clean and maintain, a windshield cover also cuts down on potential damage from falling ice and snow-covered debris, saving you the headache of cracks and chips, and the cost that comes with them. The best windshield snow covers can also prevent your wipers from freezing to your windshield and eliminate the need to raise them in cold weather. Below, we’ve listed some of the different types and styles of the best windshield snow covers available to guide you through your shopping experience.

How we chose the best windshield snow covers

The delight of a fresh blanket of snow in the morning quickly subsides when you realize that your car is effectively buried in a drift—and that you’ll likely spend the next hour using an ice scraper and digging your way out with a snow blower. To maintain your joy, you should find a windshield snow cover with the size, durability, and versatility that fit your vehicle, making these all factors that came into play when we made our choices. Along with this research, we took into consideration critical reviews and user recommendations.

The best windshield snow covers: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a windshield snow cover, the main considerations to keep in mind are the type of fastening used, the thickness required for your specific weather conditions, and the size of the windshield cover itself. Some users may also prefer a model that offers year-round protection. Ensuring that you’ve selected a model with a proper fit for your vehicle is key to enjoying all the benefits that the best windshield snow covers have to offer. (If you do need to scrape ice or remove leaves from your windshield, don’t forget we recommend bundling up in snow boots, heated clothing, snow pants, and a winter hat to fight off the icy temperatures.)

Best overall: FrostGuard Premium Windshield Snow Cover

FrostGuard Premium is the best Windshield Snow Cover overall

FrostGuard

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This cover provides comprehensive protection for most vehicles on the market, including UV protection for the warmer months.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester, PVC
  • Dimensions: Comes in XL ‎(68 inches inches L  x 48 inches H) and Standard (59 inches L x 41 inches H) 
  • UV protection? Yes

Pros

  • Fits a wide range of vehicles
  • Industrial strength
  • Covers mirrors as well

Cons

  • Not made from sustainable materials

The FrostGuard is one of the best windshield snow covers thanks to its heavy polyester construction and durable PVC lining. It uses industrial-strength wraps to attach securely to the vehicle’s side windows and includes two security panels to shut in each door. This kit also includes two drawstring mirror covers and a wiper blade cover to keep frost away from other critical areas.

Best durable: OxGord Windshield Snow Cover

OxGord Windshield Snow Cover is the best durable pick

OxGord

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heavy-duty windshield snow cover is made of a thick Oxford cloth with an durable inner lining that provides protection in all weather.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester 
  • Dimensions: 75 inches L x 42.25 inches H 
  • UV protection? Yes

Pros

  • Works for most vehicles
  • Provides protection all year long
  • Comes with anti-theft protection

Cons

  • Not made of sustainable materials
  • Doesn’t cover side mirrors

Users looking for the best durable windshield snow cover for their car will appreciate the OxGord’s tough 600D polyester construction and PVC backing. It attaches via two anti-theft flaps and two mirror elastic bands and is built to be resistant to water, snow, debris, and ultraviolet light. An included bag makes this cover easy to store when you’re driving around and easy to reinstall after you park.

Best universal: EcoNour Car Windshield Cover

EcoNour Car Windshield Snow Cover best universal

EcoNour

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This option comes in two sizes, with an insulated bottom layer and side straps for extra protection.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Dimensions: Comes in XL (‎74 inches L x 43 inches H) and Standard (65 inches L x 43 inches H)
  • UV protection: Yes

Pros

  • Fits windshields in a range of shapes
  • Durable design
  • Comes with anti-theft panels

Cons

  • More expensive than other options
  • Not made from sustainable material

The EcoNour windshield cover is perfect for car owners with odd-sized windshields, multiple vehicles, or as a gift. It comes in two universal sizes that are based on different classes of vehicles and are designed to cover the entire windshield area, including the wipers. Like other models on this list, it attaches using mirror elastics and anti-theft door panels, and it’s constructed out of durable 600D polyester for maximum longevity and protection.

Best budget: Gintenco Magnetic Windshield Snow Cover

Ice Shield Magnetic is the best Windshield Snow Cover on a budget

Ice Shield

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This affordable pick is designed with magnets for an extra secure fit.

Specs

  • Material: Made of Aluminum foil film, PP cotton, composite cotton and non-woven, thicker and durable fabric
  • Dimensions: Two sizes to pick from: L- 62*50”, S- 58*46′
  • UV protection? No

Pros

  • Edge magnets on the lower half provide extra secure fit
  • Great price
  • Fits range of vehicles

Cons

  • Not the most heavyweight option; frost can sneak under if not pulled tight

Offered in two sizes to fit a wide range of vehicles with a secure fit, the Gintenco is one of the best magnetic windshield snow covers thanks to its system of rare-earth magnets augmented by mirror ties and anti-theft door flaps. This is a great choice for users who park their vehicles in extremely windy areas due to the added strength that the magnets provide. It doesn’t come with a storage bag, which could be an issue in wetter climates, but it’s so secure that it’s still a great value for the price.

Things to consider when buying a windshield snow cover

Freezing temperatures combined with snow and ice can lead to accumulations of frost and hard material on your vehicle’s sensitive glass surfaces. It’s hard to understate the inconvenience caused by having to scrape away at ice on the smooth surface of your windshield in cold weather, especially when you’re short on time. By outfitting your car with a dedicated windshield cover, you can prevent the occurrence of this event altogether and replace the need to shovel and scrape with a simple lifting and removing motion. Not only will this save time in the long run, but it will protect your sensitive windshield from chips and cracks, and ensure that your vision is unobstructed while driving.

Materials

When considering the best windshield snow cover for your vehicle, go with a model that’s constructed out of stick-resistant materials like PVC and polyester to ensure easy removal and durable protection. Choosing a design that fastens to your car using reinforced straps is also a good move if you anticipate using the cover in windy weather, and this will add some extra peace of mind and insurance against snow and ice building up underneath the surface.

Durability

Car owners who park their vehicles in extra icy or snowy locations and are looking for the best protection available can benefit from a thicker-than-average windshield cover made of polyester or other tough materials to offset potential damage from hail, branches, icicles, and other cold-weather debris. Locations with higher occurrences of hail storms and ice storms can be treacherous for even the most durable windshields, so a snow cover that’s up to the task is key to preventing vehicular glass damage.

When shopping for the best durable windshield cover for snow, look for a design with polyester construction that is rated at 600D or better. 600D polyester is a water-resistant material that’s commonly found in luggage, backpacks, and other tough gear. An extra-thick polyester construction comes with the bonus benefit of being perfect for blocking out harmful ultraviolet rays from hitting your windshield and dashboard on sunny days too.

Shape

Windshield snow covers come in many shapes and sizes to match a wide variety of vehicle types, which ensures the snuggest and most accurate fit in critical weather applications. If you own multiple cars and want to use a single windshield cover for swapping between cars, or if you’re looking to buy a windshield snow cover as a gift and don’t know the exact measurements, a universal windshield snow cover may be the best option for you.

The best universal windshield covers for winter should include a fastening system that accounts for variable widths between models of cars. The most common design utilizes the front doors of the vehicle to secure the cover to the windshield. Doing so allows for the cover to be pulled taut against the front of the glass while also adding the benefit of extra-secure fastening that won’t easily come undone in windy weather. The only caveat is that the measurement from the top of the windshield down to the wipers can be less forgiving and potentially result in snow falling below the cover or part of the windshield remaining exposed. For this reason, universal snow cover models usually come in extra-large and standard sizes to accommodate the size gap between sedans and SUVs.

Magnets

Windshield snow covers use a variety of fastening systems to keep them snug against the surface of the windshield, and usually require being tied to the side mirrors or shut in the door to stay secure. Another popular variation uses magnets to fasten to the front of the car, which ensures a gapless connection to the vehicle and offers some extra insurance against high winds and potential ice formation.

When shopping for the best magnetic windshield cover for your vehicle, go with a model that uses some combination of magnetic fastening and tie fastening to make sure you have steadfast coverage throughout a variety of weather conditions. A design that features a combination of mirror, door, and magnetic fastenings covers every base. The best part is that the magnetic feature means you don’t have to rely solely on the door to keep the cover set; that means you won’t have to remove or reset your windshield cover every time you need to open the door.

Price

Windshield covers are simple tools that can get the job done at nearly every price point, but there are some variations to keep an eye on if you’re shopping on a budget. The best cheap windshield snow covers should be constructed from thick polyester to ensure maximum protection and durability, and they should include a number of dedicated fastening systems to keep the cover taut and secure. (You may have to compromise a bit on versatility, as it’s hard to find reversible windshield covers with true reflective backing on the cheap.) Magnets tend to come at a bump in cost, as well. A cheap windshield protector might be all you need if you live in a location with milder winters and light to moderate winds.

Related: The right—and wrong—ways to clear ice and snow from your car

FAQs

Q: How much does a windshield snow cover cost?

Windshield snow covers vary in price, depending on the size and material. But they are generally affordable, and the picks on this list range from about $10 to $35.

Q: How do I choose the right windshield snow cover size?

The most critical measurement when choosing the right windshield cover size is from the top of your windshield to the wipers. Many windshield covers are manufactured in universal sizes (if there’s extra width slack it can be tucked securely under your door). There are generally two classes of windshield cover: one for sedans and hatchbacks, and one for SUVs and trucks.

Q: Do snow covers work in extreme cold?

Windshield snow covers are designed specifically to work in extreme cold and deter the formation of ice and frost on your windshield. They’re made from polyester or PVC, which are naturally water-resistant and extremely durable, and they’re sometimes lined with cotton for extra temperature protection for your car.

Q: What’s the best windshield snow cover for trucks?

When searching for the best windshield snow cover for trucks, go with a universal model that offers enough surface area to clear the entirety of the truck’s windshield on both dimensions. If you can measure the truck’s windshield before making your purchase, you’ll be opened up to selecting a model that’s an even better fit than universal designs, which may render better protection results over the long term.

Final thoughts on the best windshield snow covers

The best windshield snow covers are available in many sizes to fit a variety of vehicle types. Some models offer year-round protection from UV rays and snow alike, and others are designed to be incredibly tough and durable for the most extreme weather conditions. If you’re in doubt about the measurements of your car or want to use a single cover for multiple vehicles, choosing a universal-fit windshield cover is a great way to get protection without breaking a sweat. No matter where you live or what you drive, a windshield snow cover is a useful exterior car accessory that’s easy to use and makes your vehicle easier to maintain.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best windshield snow covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gifts-for-runners/ Fri, 21 Oct 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=477976
Fitness & Exercise photo

Brave the elements with some help from gear that will keep you warm and dry.

The post The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Fitness & Exercise photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best sneakers The Nike Air Pegasus 37 sneakers are some of the best gifts for runners in cold weather. Nike Air Pegasus Shield 37 Running Shoes
SEE IT

These sneakers are designed specifically for cold weather, with water-repellent features and grooves to keep you from slipping.
Best smartwatch A woman wearing a Garmin Forerunner 965 with a green face on her wrist against the background of a hiking trail. Garmin Forerunner 965
SEE IT

Designed for serious athletes, the Garmin Forerunner 965 tracks advanced performance metrics and provides up to 23 days of battery life in smartwatch mode.
Best hydration vest A red Saloman Adv Skin 12 Running Vest against a plain background. Salomon Adv Skin 12
SEE IT

This well-fitting vest features two soft flasks, and extra bladder for water, and plenty of pockets for snacks and other essentials.

Running seems simple enough: Put one foot in front of the other in a semi-speedy fashion. It’s free, it’s safe, and dare we say, it’s fun. The equipment, too, seems appealingly uncomplicated. All you need are clothes and running shoes, right? While that’s technically true, some specialized running gear can make jogging a whole lot more pleasant. Plus, when you feel good, you run good. It’s simple science. Here’s our list of some of the best gifts for runners:

Best all-weather running gear

Best smartwatch: Garmin Forerunner 965

A woman wearing a Garmin Forerunner 965 with a green face on her wrist against the background of a hiking trail.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

While you don’t need a watch for running, it certainly helps if you are aiming to track your progress and work toward goals. Garmin’s smartwatches are some of the best around for all types of physical activity, but that’s especially true for running. Its Forerunner lineup is the company’s dedicated running line, with the Forerunner 965 sitting at the top. 

The Forerunner 965 features a vibrant AMOLED touchscreen display with up to 31 hours of battery life in GPS mode and up to 23 days in smartwatch mode. As with any Garmin watch, it offers advanced training metrics and tools, including VO2 max, performance condition, training effect, wrist-based running power, load ratio, and more. You can plan your race strategies and receive daily suggested workouts right on your wrist. It also offers built-in mapping, music storage, Garmin Pay, and safety features. It’s a watch built for serious athletes and adventurers, so if you know a newer or more casual runner, the 265 would be a cheaper, smaller, more approachable option.

Best heart rate monitor: Garmin HRM-Pro

A black and yellow Garmin HRM Pro Chest Heart Rate Monitor sitting on an ottoman above a pair of hiking boots.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Most running watches provide wrist-based heart rate measurements, but the accuracy of those tools still doesn’t match what you can get with a chest-based monitor. The Garmin HRM-Pro is a premium heart rate monitor with dual ANT and Bluetooth Low Energy technology. It easily pairs with Garmin devices, online training apps like Zwift, or compatible gym equipment. Beyond heart rate, this monitor also gathers running dynamics, including vertical oscillation, ground contact time, stride length, vertical ratio, and more. It can even store data when your watch is out of range, such as during a swim. And it’s comfortable to wear; I barely notice it, even on long runs or bike rides.

Best headphones: Shokz OpenRun Pro

A pair of black Shokz OpenRun Pro Bone Conduction Headphones sitting on top of a black mesh case.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Most people prefer to run with music or podcasts, but traditional in-ear headphones can pose some safety concerns. Bone conduction headphones are a fantastic option for runners because they allow you to hear your music while still staying alert to the world around you. The Shokz OpenRun Pro headphones offer a secure, lightweight fit that is comfortable even for long runs. They produce clear, high-quality sound with plenty of volume, even when running near traffic. It also features a mic so that you can call your runner when they are out. And the 10 hours of battery life will keep them from needing to charge their headphones constantly.

Best treadmill: NordicTrack T Series

A woman in a gray jogging bra and leggings running on a NordicTrack T Series Treadmill.

NordicTrack

SEE IT

Whether it’s a blizzard or extreme heat, there are times when it’s not safe to run outside. That’s why it can be helpful to invest in a treadmill. We recommend NordicTrack’s T series. There’s a reason why NordicTrack treadmills are considered some of the best treadmills on the market: they’re reliable, durable, long-lasting, and come with several luxe features to mirror gym-quality workouts. 

This model comes with incline controls up to 15 percent, a 10-inch interactive HD coaching touchscreen, and 30 days free iFit membership, which comes with several on-demand and live workouts with automatic trainer control. also easily folds up and can be stored away for more space-saving. While it’s more expensive than other models, we believe it’s the best if you’re serious about running, want to invest in a higher-end product for the long haul, and are looking for a piece of equipment that mimics what you’d find in a high-end gym.

Best massage gun: Turonic GM5 Massage Gun

A gray and black Turonic GM5 Massage Gun with accessories in a gray fabric case.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Recovery is key for runners. A massage gun can help relieve those tired leg muscles to promote recovery after runs, preventing injuries and keeping your runner active even during busy training schedules. The Turonic GM5 is a relatively affordable massage gun that still packs a punch. It comes with a range of attachments for different parts of the body and a handy case to keep it all organized even during travel. It offers variable intensity between 1200 and 3200 rpm, so they can fine-tune how intense their massage is. And it’s quiet, so they can even massage their muscles while you watch a movie.

Best cold-weather running gear

Best cold-weather sneakers: Nike Air Pegasus Shield 37 Running Shoes

The Nike Air Pegasus 37 sneakers are some of the best gifts for runners in cold weather.

Nike

SEE IT

Let’s get started with the basics: sneakers. There’s nothing worse than missing a carefully calculated step and landing right into a puddle on a cold and rainy day. To avoid this mishap, Nike took one of its most popular running shoes, the Pegasus, and winterized it with a water-repellent upper material and an outsole with wet weather traction to keep you from slipping on the slick pavement. The outsole’s micro grooves feature multidirectional shapes that displace the water when the shoe makes contact with the pavement, so your feet can leave and arrive home dry and warm.

Best outerwear: Arc’teryx Squamish Hoody

The Arc'teryx Squamish Hoodie is one of the best gifts for runners.

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Layers are essential when it comes to cold-weather running. Arc’teryx’s sleek Squamish hoodie provides plenty of assistance, keeping you warm without slowing you down. The lightweight shell is windproof yet protects you against rain and snow. It’s also made from nylon that is moisture-wicking and allows sweat to escape, helping to keep your body temperature steady during frigid runs. Plus, this minimalist option is a cinch to roll up into a backpack or carry-on. It’s available in men’s and women’s styles.

Best underlayer: Ibex Men’s Woolies Tech Long-Sleeve Shirt

The Ibex Men's Woolies Tech Shirt is one of the best cold weather gifts for runners.

Ibex

SEE IT

Speaking of layering, a merino wool base is the way to go for those frigid days. This long-sleeve base layer has a nylon lining that will help keep you warm and dry all day. The company’s Pro Tech fabric is comfy and lightweight, but still wicks moisture away and keeps odor under control. They’re available in four matte colors (Deepest Red, Deep Ocean, Black, and Ginger Bisquite), you can pair the zippered top with the Woolies Tech Bottoms for full-body coverage.

Best safety gear: Brooks’ Run Visible Collection

Brooks' Run Visible Collection has some of the best gifts for runners.

Brooks

SEE IT

Some of the best gifts for runners aren’t only about keeping warm—they’re about keeping people safe. When North America is experiencing the shortest days of the year—with the sun rising around 7 a.m. and setting by 5 p.m.— that means if they’re trying to squeeze in a run before or after work, they’re probably going to be doing at least some of those miles in the dark. Brooks Running’s Run Visible collection features clothing—from hats to windbreakers and leggings—that all come equipped with 3M Scotchlite Carbon Black Stretch Reflective material with neon colors. The material and coloring (which covers the most visible part of the light spectrum in low-light conditions) are strategically placed in so-called motion zones. That includes the joints that move the most while you’re jogging, like elbows, wrists, and ankles, so they can run safely no matter when they’re able to get that jog in.

Best running vest: Nike Aeroloft Women’s Running Vest

The Nike Aeroflot Women's Running Vest is one of the best gifts for runners.

Nike

SEE IT

In addition to keeping hands and feet from freezing, maintaining a warm core will keep the rest of your body toasty without adding too much bulk that could make you overheat mid-run. When looking for the best gifts for runners (or yourself), Nike’s Aeroloft running vest provides necessary warmth where you need it most. It also has pockets to store your keys, cell phone, or anything else you might need mid-run.

Best running tights: Reebok Women’s Puremove Leggings

Reebok Women's Puremove Leggings are one of the best gifts for runners.

Reebok

SEE IT

Many runners have a love-and-hate relationship with running tights. You need a pair that fits in just the right places for them to work well and feel comfortable. To make that happen, Reebok used its Motion Sense Technology (that the company originally designed for sports bras) to fill its tights with a material that stays liquid-like when in stasis and becomes more solid upon impact. This gives you a full range of movement on a run, while adding support precisely

Best gloves: Arc’teryx Venta Gloves

Arc'Teryx's Venta gloves are one of the best gifts for runners.

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Running in the cold sometimes feels like a tease. When you first step outside, the frigid temperatures can be startling, making you want to bundle up with extra pant and shirt layers. But as you ease into the miles, you can quickly overheat with all those clothes. Instead, wear lighter layers (unless the conditions are truly frigid) and focus on making sure your core and extremities are well-protected. Arc’teryx’s Venta glove uses Gore-tex’s Infinium material, which protects from water and wind and is extremely thin and light. Plus the mitten design allows your body heat to keep all your fingers tight and warm.

Best socks: Smartwool Run Cold Weather Crew Socks

Smartwool's Run Cold Weather Targeted Cushion Crew Socks are one of the best gifts for runners.

Smartwool

SEE IT

In addition to keeping their hands warm, snuggly and comfy feet also make for a happy run. Smartwool’s Run Cold Weather Socks are made of sweat-wicking wool that also provides comfort and durability. The mid-crew length hits that perfect sweet spot of not too short to let wind in but not too long to cause overheating. Lastly, the socks have the company’s Light Elite cushioning that provides targeted support in the ball and heel of the foot. Otherwise, too much layering between your feet and shoes can restrict blood flow.

Best hat: TrailHeads Fleece Ponytail Hat

Trailheads' Fleece Ponytail Hat is one of the best gifts for runners.

TrailHeads

SEE IT

When cold weather hits, a good hat is essential. But for those with longer hair, stuffing your long locks into a hat can be annoying at a minimum and cause a headache at the worst. Trailheads’ ponytail hat features an opening in the back to fit your hair through so it doesn’t get trapped, tangled, or bungled in your hat as you run. The piece is also made of quick-drying polyester fleece and flaps so your head and ears can stay warm for the duration of your run.

Best face covering: Nike Therma Sphere Hood 3.0

A gray face, neck, and head covering that's the Nike Therma Sphere Hood.

Nike

SEE IT

When the wind is howling and moisture from your eyes is starting to freeze on your face, it’s time to call in the reinforcements. Nike’s Therma Sphere Hood is a balaclava-style head covering that’s made with Therma-Sphere fabric that helps wick moisture away. It’s designed to be comfortable and customizable, with a foldover design you can adjust to cover more or less of your face and neck as the day warms up.

Best compression sleeves: Hyperice Normatec Go

A black Hyperice Normatec Go, a battery-powered device that runners can use to help their muscles recover.

Hyperice

SEE IT

Colder weather can cause arteries to tighten and restrict blood flow. Runners can recover better from workouts with Hyperice’s Normatec Go. These wearables are designed to be strapped to the runner’s calves and provide a symmetrical massage to increase circulation and reduce pain in the lower body. The Bluetooth-enabled controls and associated app allow the runner to choose between seven levels of compression for a better recovery and the battery lasts up to three hours.

Best warm-weather running gear

Best hydration vest: Salomon Adv Skin 12

A red Saloman Adv Skin 12 Running Vest against a plain background.

Salomon

SEE IT

For those who enjoy long runs or running in all sorts of weather, a hydration vest is a critical tool. The Salomon Adv Skin 12 comes with two soft flasks that fit snuggly on the chest straps, providing quick and easy access to hydration without stopping. It can also hold a hydration bladder for hot days that call for extra water. Additionally, the pack offers plenty of pockets to hold a jacket, snacks for fueling your run, and attachment points for stashing poles. It fits snugly and comfortably without jiggling around on runs, and the pockets are easily accessible so as not to slow you down. It will keep the runner in your life prepared when hitting the trails.

Best T-shirt for trail running: Arc’teryx Cormac Crew SS Shirt

A gray Arc'teryx Cormac Crew SS Shirt for running against a plain background.

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

When the warm weather comes and a runner is out everyday in the sun, it’s great to have a trusted T-shirt to rely upon. Arc’teryx’s Cormac Crew SS Shirt is designed for trail running and hiking. Made with recycled fabric, this T-shirt is designed to wick moisture away and is odor-resistant. Should the gift recipient get caught in a shower, this shirt also repels water. When the sun is out, this T-shirt provides 50+ UPF protection. And it’s available in five colors.

Best running shorts for women: Kari Traa Nora 2.0

Lavender Kari Traa Nora 2 running shorts for women with a black waistband against a plain background.

Kari Traa

SEE IT

Good running shorts can be hard to find, but the Nora 2.0 shorts from Kari Traa are a fantastic choice and have been my favorite pair since discovering them. They feature a loose fit with no liner to keep airflow going. The material is very lightweight and effectively wicks away sweat. They feel dry even when running in the Florida heat and humidity, which is very impressive. The elastic waistband offers a drawstring, and there’s a small zippered pocket at the back to store keys or a gel. They are definitely the most comfortable running shorts I’ve used in a long time.

Best running skort: Outdoor Voices The Exercise 3″ Skort

A woman wearing a green Outdoor Voices 3-inch Running Skort.

Outdoor Voices

SEE IT

Running skorts are a great alternative to shorts in part because they feature built-in compression shorts to help prevent chafing. The skirt design also means that you won’t be constantly adjusting the legs of your shorts while running. Outdoor Voices’ The Exercise is one of the best skorts for running that I’ve tried for many reasons. The compression shorts are made with sticky grippers at the bottom hem to keep them in place, and they are long enough to prevent chafing successfully. The liner also offers pockets to hold a phone, and there’s a zippered side pocket on the skirt for keys or snacks. The material of the skirt is very flexible and sweat-wicking to keep you moving freely and dry on runs.

Best sunglasses: Tifosi Sunglasses

Tifosi Optics Swank Sunglasses are one of the best gifts for runners.

Tifosi

SEE IT

If you haven’t heard, Tifosi Sunglasses makes some of the most brilliantly colored UVA-/UVB-protected sunglasses on the market. With frames that come in enough colorways to match nearly any aesthetic, the Swank and Swick lines (and more), offer bright polarized lenses that will keep your eyes safe even on the snow or sand. These sunglasses are one of the best gifts for runners, as well as people who like extreme sports, desert hikers, and skiers alike.

The post The best gifts for runners who put in the miles all year round appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best walking shoes for men in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-walking-shoes-for-men/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284453
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We’ve done the legwork and selected the walking shoes that go the distance.

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best walking shoes for men
Raphael Renter, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for flat feet Blue and gray walking shoes for men for flat feet with hook-and-loop straps for laces OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe
SEE IT

Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud with these shoes.
Best for high arches Black Skechers walking shoes for men Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker
SEE IT

These lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays
Best budget Black walking shoes for men with laces Saucony Men's VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe
SEE IT

These shoes do excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners.

Equipping your feet with the best shoes for walking is the first step to enjoyable, pain-free activities. Though it may sound obvious, taking a walk each day is one of the most beneficial things you can do, yet many don’t because of discomfort. When it comes to these aches, everything from knee soreness to back stiffness can often be traced to improper walking shoes. All muscles and nerves point to your feet during a walk and a lack of arch or ankle support will lead to pains. The best walking shoes for men address this by being well-constructed, high-quality footgear designed for their namesake activity. Shopping for them, however, can sometimes be so frustrating you want to sprint away.

In the shoe emporiums of olden days, polite salespeople accurately measured feet and offered sage advice. These days, many shoe stores at the mall lack helpful experts, and customers are left to their own devices to find the right fit. As for online shopping, trying to buy the most comfortable sneakers through the mail can lead to too many returns and much hassle. How can you tell what fits and what shoe will work best for walking? What types of shoes should you avoid for walking? What type of insole do you need? And what do you call those cold, metal measuring devices? (Answer: Those are called Brannock Devices.) All these considerations can seem intimidating, but consider the following tips and carefully curated suggestions when it comes to shopping time and you’ll find the best walking shoes for men. 

The best walking shoes for men: Reviews & Recommendations 

Best for flat feet: OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe

Blue and gray walking shoes for men for flat feet with hook-and-loop straps for laces

OrthoFeet

SEE IT

The lightweight, comfortable material of the OrthoFeet Sprint Tieless Walking Shoe makes it one of the best walking shoes for flat feet. Many stability and orthopedic shoes can feel heavy and clunky, but the Sprint is airy, yet still supportive. It is a great walking shoe for anyone with mild pronation. The included orthotic insole is a real arch-saver and the adjustable heel grip can be loosened and tightened as needed to give you a snug fit. And, as an added bonus, you only need to tie the walking shoe once thanks to a handy slip-on and go laces. Flat footers of the world will feel like they are walking on a straight, supportive cloud.

Best for standing all day: Brooks Addiction Suede Walker

Brooks walking shoes for men with white laces

Brooks

SEE IT

Brooks is an industry leader in walking shoes and Brooks walking shoes do for casual outdoor strolls what Nike shoes have done for basketball. Plus, they are the best walking shoes for standing at work all day. The high-quality material laughs in the face of everyday wear and tear. The non-slip tread keeps you upright, even on ice. And the insole offers the arch support that makes these the best comfortable work shoes needed by many hard-working walkers. Waiters, teachers, nurses—you can appreciate the complete and utter joy of finding good walking shoes, and Brooks shoes will become your new favorite coworker.

Best for high arches: Skechers Men’s GOwalk Arch Fit Idyllic Sneaker

Black Skechers walking shoes for men

Skechers

SEE IT

The GOwalk Arch Fit evens out the weight placed on your heel and ankle, making it one of the best Skechers shoes, or shoes in general, with arch support. It’s also great for any type of foot. The Skechers shoes’ heel is raised enough to take the force of a step and spread it out to the entire foot. It also has great cushioning across the entire shoe and there is plenty of room for toes to move. The lightweight men’s Skechers shoes hold up on long walks or long workdays and the mesh knit fabric keeps your foot cool and comfortable through any workout. 

Best for wide feet: New Balance Men’s 847 V4 Walking Shoe

Arctic fox and black walking shows for men

New Balance

SEE IT

Shopping for the best walking shoe is a multistep process. Measuring your foot is the easy part; now you have to actually find a pair of shoes wide enough to match. New Balance has been providing customers with a nice variety of widths to help get the best fit. And the 847 Walking Shoe is a wonderful, versatile walking shoe that can slip on just about any sized foot. New Balance widths are measured in Wide and X-Wide. According to their size chart, Wide is equivalent to a EE, X-Wide is 4E, and XX-Wide is 6E. The 847 is a stylish and comfortable shoe for walking and offers the benefits of durable, comfortable cushioning from toe to heel. 

Best budget: Saucony Men’s VERSAFOAM Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe

Black walking shoes for men with laces

Saucony

SEE IT

A walking shoe is just a running shoe that takes its time. While there are significant differences between most running shoes and walking shoes (namely heel drop, weight, and ankle support), the Cohesion 12 Road Running Shoe does excellent, affordable double duty for walkers and casual runners. The cloud-like heel is comfortable for high arches and the arch support adds some support for flat-footed walkers. While it won’t help much with overpronation, if you need a simple walking shoe that can handle most terrains and conditions, the Saucony Cohesion is one of the best men’s walking shoes you can find at that price.

What to consider when shopping for the best walking shoes for men

When shopping for the best walking shoes for men, you can get lost in options and materials. Some athletic shoe companies make bold claims about pressure points and their shoes with arch support. Others boast of high-tech gels and space-age toebox construction. But which of these things, you might wonder, actually makes for the most comfortable sneakers for men.

The answer is different for everyone. Some walking shoes are designed for those with high arches. Others are made for walkers with stability concerns. Therefore, the first step to buying any walking shoe is to take a long, hard look at your feet. 

Feet change as you age. What you thought was a narrow foot in your teens may have shifted to a wider foot in your 30s. Examine not only the length and width of your foot but also the arch. Place your wet foot on a paper bag or piece of cardboard and look at the footprint. If you see one long print, you have flat feet and may benefit from a walking shoe with stabilization. If you see only your toes and your heel, you have a high arch and you’ll need more cushion in the heel and toes to absorb impact.

Your arch can show signs of pronation and supination. These terms refer to how your foot “leans” when walking. Those with low arches often have pronation (leaning inwards), meaning the big toe and inside of the foot are doing most of the work when walking. Supination (leaning outwards) usually affects those with high arches and puts extra strain on the little toes and outside of the foot. Depending on the severity of pronation and supination, a specially made orthotic may be needed for walking. 

But there are over-the-counter walking shoes specifically designed to help moderate overpronation and supination. Stability shoes and motion control shoes can help those with overpronation. Walking shoes with greater flexibility can help those suffering from supination. Walk-in a straight line and take notice of how your foot, ankle, and shin line up. An inward bend is an overpronation. An outward bend is pronation. Armed with this knowledge, you can now begin the quest for your best shoes for walking.   

Related: These are athletic shoes that will give the best and the rest a run for their money.

Flat feet need significant arch support in a comfortable walking shoe

If you have flat feet, the shoe for walking is one that offers great arch support to compensate for overpronation. A stability walking shoe is designed to keep your foot facing front and center instead of rolling inwards. This is accomplished thanks to heavy-duty arch support that positions the foot and keeps it from bending off course. 

Stability shoes may be heavier than other walking shoes due to the beefy arch support and lack of flexibility, but there are still lightweight walking shoes that won’t tire you out. When trying on a stability shoe, pay attention to the arch: it should feel solid, not squishy. While extra soft walking shoes may be comfortable at the shoe store, they won’t help your flat feet and legs feel better after long walks. You want the extra rigidity, not a pillow. 

Motion-control shoes offer even more rigid support than stability shoes. These specialized shoes are used for severe overpronation. They will be heavy but greatly improve the quality of walking. Motion-control shoes will be specially made with insoles designed by your podiatrist. 

Keep in mind that mild pronation is common and many neutral walking shoes that don’t advertise explicit overpronation support will still have some level of arch support built-in.

Get great traction with comfortable shoes

Walking shoes, unlike hiking shoes, are made for the road most traveled. The tire-like tread of a great walking shoe prevents slipping on asphalt, concert, and even wet surfaces. And for active workers on their feet all day, a non-slip tread can be a literal lifesaver. 

A great walking shoe is also a great standing shoe. For standing and walking all day long, you want a shoe you won’t even notice. Heel pain, toe cramps, and more can be avoided by ditching flimsy, ultralight running shoes, and wearing a more supportive walking shoe. The bit of added weight from a walking shoe won’t exhaust feet; the right pair will make those feet happier. The best walking shoes for men are more than footwear: they are tools of the trade. 

For those on the clock, or those who need to get in their recommended 10,000 daily steps, a walking shoe must be durable and comfortable. Who cares if they look a little chunky? If they provide solid support and the feeling of walking in bedroom slippers, appearances can take a backseat. Still, you should be able to find great non-slip walking shoes that look better than two black boxes with string. 

Find soft, comfortable shoes for high arches

Many of the walking shoes on the market are aimed at those with flat feet who need a strong, stable shoe with significant arch support. But for those with high arches, the best walking shoes for men should have a few special features to keep you and your feet comfortable. 

High arches mean the weight and force of every step are concentrated at the heel, ankle, and toes. You may not feel pain in the arch of your foot, but after a walk or day of work, your feet and ankles will feel tired and sore all over. 

Because less of your foot is making contact with the ground, the walking shoe for high arches should have a high heel to strategically position your foot and help evenly distribute the weight. On any shoe, the angle of heel to toe is called the drop. Zero-drop walking shoes are flat, and not ideal for high arches. If the walking shoe doesn’t have a high enough heel, a heel insert can help give you the angle you need. 

You also want a roomy, comfortable toe box—the part of the shoe housing your toes, which needs to be spacious enough to let you move and flex. Crowded toes will make a short walk feel like an entity. And to keep your ankle happy, look for soft and strong support in the back of the shoe. Pinch the ankle of the shoe. If it folds easily and feels like a sock puppet, it won’t have the support high-arched walkers need. 

Why it’s so hard to measure the width of men’s walking shoes

The best walking shoe for men must have the best fit. But if you tried to decipher online width charts or read labels on shoe boxes, you know it’s not as easy as it seems to size. Part of the reason is that there’s no official, set-in-stone, absolute way all shoes are measured. Not only do women’s and men’s sizes not line up, but men’s widths can mean different things depending on the country and the shoe company. 

In America, a medium-width shoe will be labeled as D, M, or R…if it’s labeled at all. This is the shoe width you’ll most likely see on the shelves. Narrow shoes are harder to find and may be labeled S, A, B, N, or C.  A shoe with a 3A width will be narrower than a shoe with a 2A width. Confused? Hang in there. Wider shoe widths are easier to identify; they start at E for slightly wider feet: 2E is wider than E, 3E is wider than 2E, and so on. But some companies don’t use Es and will label wide shoes with a W, for wide, or XW, for extra-wide, just to add to the confusion. And this doesn’t include European shoes, which often don’t display width measurements at all. 

You can measure the width of your foot at home, even without a fancy Brannock Device. Simply trace your barefoot on a piece of paper and measure the distance across at the widest point. Then use an online chart to find your size and width encoded in the mysterious shoe size letter system. For best results, consult the specific brand’s website for sizing information. 

Here are the best men’s walking shoes you can get for less than $50

You don’t need to spend a lot to find a comfortable walking shoe. Even the big names in sneakers have affordable options. You can find a good pair of Nike walking shoes for around $60. And Asics sneakers can drop below the $40 mark. There are plenty of affordable options if you’re willing to sacrifice a few features: Namely style. 

Budget-priced walking shoes will look like a basic, plain shoe. There will be no bright flashes or fun accent colors. You may also be giving up some comfort. Lower-priced men’s walking shoes will be heavier and a little clunkier, without high-tech materials and streamlined edges. If they are on your feet all day, you will notice the added ounces of thick walking shoes.

Of course, cost-effective men’s walking shoes can also lean the other way and be as light as a feather. Except that’s not a good thing. These lightweight shoes are made of practically nothing—a few strands of mesh fabric over the thinnest sole imaginable. The ultra-lightweight sneakers are better for runners who aren’t looking for an all-day shoe. The flimsy materials won’t offer enough support and alignment for flat-footed walkers or enough heel cushion for high-arched walkers. 

You never want to go too cheap with your walking shoes. Anything below $40 can be made out of brittle rubber and fake leather that will crack after a few trips around the neighborhood (if the material is real leather, it will be labeled as such). And avoid any and all footwear sold at the grocery store.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a good walking shoe?

Choose good walking shoes by giving them two quick endurance tests: First, try to twist the walking shoe like wringing out a towel. It should be stiff. If it twists easily, it’s too flimsy and not good for walking. Then bend the toe up. If the bend on the bottom occurs where your toes would bend, that’s good. If it bends back in the arch area of the sole, that’s bad. Shoes should bend where toes bend. Try the shoes on at the end of the day because your feet change sizes as you walk. Don’t assume the shoes will “feel good” once you break them in. If they hurt now, they’ll hurt later. While leather shoes stretch a bit, synthetic materials won’t. And remember: Most people have feet that are two different sizes, so always try on both shoes before buying.

Q: What are the best lightweight walking shoes?

The best lightweight walking shoes have enough support to still be effective. Running shoes are much lighter than walking shoes because they lack the ankle support and arch support of walking shoes. It can be tempting to go for the lightest shoe available, but make sure it still keeps your feet in place. Stability shoes that help overpronation will need enough material and rigidity to keep the foot in place, so flimsy running shoes won’t help. If you want something lightweight, that still provides arch and ankle support, many of the best Brooks walking shoes can be running shoes that are strong yet nimble. 

Q: What is the best shoe for walking all day?

For walking all day, you want a walking shoe that’s able to tackle every condition. Sightseers and travelers need a durable walking shoe with a strong sole. It’s a good idea to pay for a higher-end shoe if you plan to use it constantly. The 1400 V1 Walking Shoe from New Balance is a hearty hightop that can take paved surfaces and rocky roads equally.

The final word on choosing the best walking shoes for men

The best walking shoes for men, or any athletic shoe, will be designed for your specific feet. Flat feet need more shoes with arch support than those with high arches. Some with high arches will need soft, impact-absorbent heels. If you don’t know how your foot bends and twists, ask a professional. You may need a specialized orthotic insole or custom-made option to achieve the most comfortable sneakers. Don’t take your feet for granted; they’re the foundation for your entire life. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best walking shoes for men in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow shovels of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snow-shovel/ Wed, 26 Jan 2022 09:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snow-shovel/
The best snow shovels lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

These trusty accessories help clear you a path to enjoy a snow day, not grumble about an icy pileup.

The post The best snow shovels of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best snow shovels lined up on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house Snow Joe SJ-SHLV01 Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
SEE IT

This pick is designed for comfort, with features like a D-shaped handle and ergonomic steel.
Best electric Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel
SEE IT

Take the hassle out of shoveling with this electric pick.
Best ergonomic This green Suncast snow shovel is the best ergonomic snow shovel Suncast SC3250 18-Inch Snow Shovel/Pusher Combo
SEE IT

This no-frills pick pushes snow out of the way with ease.

Don’t be that cranky neighbor who grumbles at the thought of bringing out their snow shovel. Freshly fallen snow is a beautiful sight, and your snow days should be enjoyed. And a fresh snow shovel is an equally beautiful sight, one that will allow you to get outside and enjoy the wintry landscape—or kick back inside by the fire, your choice—knowing you’ve gotten the job done right. While most of us don’t look forward to clearing out freshly fallen snow, the right shovel can make snow shoveling much easier, so you can get back to the winter activities you enjoy. Here, we’ve collected the best tools for shoveling snow, with arms that are long enough to prevent hunching, ergonomic designs to reduce back strain, and durable materials that can cut through any snowbank. An electric shovel can speed up the job, or you can just work with well-designed manual shovels. Either way, we’ve researched some of the best snow shovels currently on the market, so now you won’t dread those impending winter storms.

How we chose the best snow shovels

Shoveling your driveway is just one aspect of winter safety and preparedness. Thorough testing is especially important here—we don’t want to recommend a subpar model that leads to a broken spirit, sore back, and increased potential of senior neighbors getting hurt. To find the best snow shovels, we looked at reviews and recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research to clear out the skimpy, sad scoopers from the heavy-duty haulers.

The best snow shovels: Reviews & Recommendations

Between light dustings to heavy avalanches, these driveway clearing, sidewalk sweeping snow shovels can handle it all (and cost far less than the best snow blowers). Don’t forget to throw on your snow boots, heated clothing, and a winter hat to fight off the icy temperatures as you shovel. Here’s what we found:

Best overall: Snow Joe SJ-SHLV01 Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 50 x 18 x 3.9 inches
  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Weight: 3.7 lbs.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Assist handle
  • Highly rated
  • Different sizes available

Cons

  • Best at clearing fluffy, light snow

Not all shovels are made the same, and as could be expected, the majority of budget ones are usually made with lower-quality materials and use cost-cutting solutions for construction. Depending upon the frequency of use, these less expensive shovels will probably not last as long as a pricier model. However, if you live in an area that only sees occasional snow, a budget snow shovel might just be good enough for you. We found a highly rated cheap shovel that features a new take on shovel design—offering a second lower handle and short arm to act as a fulcrum and offset the energy required to throw the snow off the shovel blade. If stored properly and not used on the heaviest of icy snow, the Snow Joe shovel may work for you quite well.

Best ergonomic: Suncast SC3250 18-Inch Snow Shovel/Pusher Combo

This green Suncast snow shovel is the best ergonomic snow shovel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 18 x 51 x 2.42 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Weight: 1 lb.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Won’t damage wooden porches or deck
  • Ergonomic bent arm and handle
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Reviews note handles prone to breaking

A great choice to save space and time, this combination snow shovel is designed with a durable steel handle and a coated plastic resin blade. The shovel blade has an angled ribbed pattern, which helps prevent snow from sticking to the shovel. An ergonomic bent arm and S-shaped handle help ensure proper posture and reduce back strain. If you have a bad back, this shovel is a good choice for you.

Best snow pusher: The Snowplow “the Original Snow Pusher”

The Snowplow “the Original Snow Pusher”

Snowplow

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 47 x 6 x 9 inches
  • Material: Polyethylene, fiberglass
  • Weight: 5.84 lbs.
  • Blade size: 36 inches

Pros

  • Large blade size
  • Multiple sizes available
  • Cutting angle for ice

Cons

  • Bolts on shovel prone to coming loose

This snow plow shovel is available in multiple sizes and is constructed with polyethylene, which makes this safe for use on decks, pavers, and roofs. When you flip this shovel over, there is a cutting angle that can be used to chip away at stubborn ice. It’s like having your own acoustic option to plow snow.

Best electric: Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel

Greenworks 12-Inch 40V Cordless Snow Shovel

Greenworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 63.5 x 14.3 x 10.3 inches
  • Material: Polyethylene, metal, rubber
  • Weight: 14 lbs.
  • Blade size: 12 inches

Pros

  • Large throw distance and clearance rate
  • Adjustable auxiliary handle for comfort
  • Cordless

Cons

  • Only works on snowfall less than 6 inches

The Greenworks electric shovel is a great solution when you need to get rid of snow fast but you don’t have a lot of space to store your snow equipment. Our pick for best cordless, this rechargeable electric snow shovel works best to clear lighter snow up to 6 inches in height. Again, for best performance, make sure the battery is stored somewhere at room temperature.

Best for seniors: ORIENTOOLS Heavy Duty Rolling Snow Shovel

Orientools Heavy Duty Rolling Shovel on a white background

ORIENTOOLS

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28 x 16.5 x 5.5 inches
  • Material: Steel, plastic
  • Weight: 4.61 lbs.
  • Blade size: 25 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Padded, adjustable handle
  • Scratch and rust-resistant

Cons

  • Requires adequate storage

This reasonably priced, heavy-duty steel snow pusher is scratch- and rust-resistant, to last you many winters. The handle has an adjustable height of between 45 and 50 inches, which helps ensure better posture (one of the things that are best for seniors and juniors), and with the ability to clear 5 inches of snow in one pass, it’s a great choice for pushing snow off larger areas like decks and driveways. However, this shovel is larger than some others, so adequate storage would be required. Find more snow shovels for seniors here.

Best for cars: BIRDROCK HOME 34″ Folding Emergency Snow Shovel for Car

A red 34-inch folding emergency snow shovel for cars on a blue and white background

BIRDROCK HOME

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 34 x 9 x 2.4 inches
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Weight: 2 lbs.
  • Blade size: 9 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight but heavy-duty
  • Compact
  • Shovel shaft extends for more leverage

Cons

  • Not good for driveways

From umbrellas to bandages, it’s funny how you forget the thing you need in an emergency. Free your car from its snowy shackles while on the road with this compact shovel, which collapses to fit in your car. It’s even a great option when the snow melts and your nephews are begging you to bury them in the sand. It might be too small for your driveway, but it is just the right size to escape from the parking space you got trapped in.

Best battery-operated: Earthwise 40-Volt Cordless Electric Snow Shovel

A green Earthwise battery-operated shovel on a blue and white background

Earthwise

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 41 x 16 x 38 inches
  • Material: Metal, plastic
  • Weight: 19 lbs.
  • Blade size: 16 inches

Pros

  • Clears snow quickly
  • Cordless
  • Ergonomic handle

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

Don’t be tethered to a cord when the snow falls with this battery-operated snow shovel. The cordless snow shovel demolishes through snow 300 lbs of snow per minute. Its 16-inch clearing width gets through more snow with each pass, and it has a quiet brushless motor for earth-friendly power. An ergonomic handle, six-inch rear wheels, and dual-blade auger mean more time spent cozied on the couch and less struggle when clearing the driveway.

Best budget: True Temper Ergonomic Snow Shovel

True Temper Ergonomic Shovel on a white background

True Temper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 7.25 x 17.75 x 52 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Weight: 5 lbs.
  • Blade size: 18 inches

Pros

  • Ergonomic
  • Combination pusher and shovel
  • D-grip handle

Cons

  • Slippery steel might make snow fall off shovel

This ergonomic snow shovel is a great choice to help make you more comfortable while shoveling, as the durable steel body and curved neck make it easy to handle. The blade allows it to act as both a pusher or lifter and the extra-large D-Grip handle keeps hands comfortable and secure.

What to consider when buying the best snow shovels

Before deciding on the best snow shovel to buy this winter, consider the design, quality of materials, as well as the types of jobs your shovel is built to handle. If you don’t typically get a lot of snow, you may be able to handle the job with a simple combination or ergonomic shovel. For bigger jobs, you may want to purchase an electric shovel or a larger snow pusher with wheels. If conditions are right and you don’t need to opt for a snow blower, keep reading for our selections.

Ergonomics

Nobody could call shoveling easy, because it’s not. One of the precautions you can take to help make the difficult task of snow removal easier is to protect your back. Back strain and pulled muscles are very common due to the heavy, repetitive actions involved in the process.

Because of these common injuries, manufacturers have conducted research and designed ergonomic shovels with your comfort in mind. Shovels are considered ergonomic when they help you stand up straight, have comfortable handles, and are lighter in weight. Features that you will find to facilitate this back comfort are lightweight materials like aluminum and plastic, a longer slightly bent arm, and larger D-Grip handles. So, while the job still won’t be easy, an ergonomically designed shovel will help protect your back and make the job more comfortable.

Snow pushers vs. shovels

When you live in a climate that sees its fair share of snowstorms, you should consider adding a snow pusher to your snow removal arsenal. Pushers are increasingly popular choices because they are lightweight and help you remove snow without excessive lifting. With the right conditions, you can cover a large amount of ground very quickly with this tool.

The best snow pushers can help prevent back injuries because the act of pushing is inherently easier than lifting. Snow pushers are essentially smaller, hand-powered versions of the industrial plow. They are best used for pushing up to 4 inches of lighter snow off of flat surfaces. This makes them a smart choice for sidewalks and driveways. Materials found in snowplows include steel, aluminum, plastics, and fiberglass, as well as UHMW polyethylene. Plastic blades tend to be a better choice for shoveling more delicate surfaces like pavers. Keep in mind that snow pushers aren’t the best choice for excessive, heavy icy snow.

Get electric

When you’re looking to really speed up the shoveling process but don’t want to invest in an expensive, heavy snow blower, you may want to consider an electric shovel. Compared to snow blowers, electric shovels for snow are typically lightweight, reasonably priced, and relatively small—making them a good choice for navigating smaller spaces like narrow walkways or steps.

Electric snow blower shovels work similarly to traditional snow blowers. They utilize a rotating blade to remove snow from a surface and then propel it through a chute. These portable machines usually have to be manually pushed along your snow-clearing path. Their smaller size makes them easier to store when not in use, which is a bonus if your storage space is limited. Electric power is generated with a cord, or they can be cordless powered via a rechargeable battery. While it may vary between models, most batteries will last between 30 to 45 minutes on a single charge. Recharging will take about 30 minutes, so it might be necessary to purchase a backup battery if you’re clearing a larger area. It is also important to consider that most batteries should be stored inside a space that will not go below freezing.

Fatigue-reducing features

No matter how lightweight and brilliantly designed your shovel is, the act of physically lifting scoop after scoop of snow is tiresome. If you’re looking to reduce fatigue and speed up the process without turning to electric or gas-powered snow removal equipment, you may want to consider a snow shovel with wheels.

Pushing a heavy load with wheels offsets the amount of energy required to complete the task immensely. Ever pushed a handcart full of heavy boxes? Incorporating the simple science of the wheel into a shovel works particularly well with a pusher-style shovel. A snow pusher allows for fast removal of larger surfaces (like driveways, for example). When wheels are added the task becomes that much easier, reducing the force of friction. Wheeled shovels are a great choice for people with back issues or older homeowners. As with manual snow-pusher-style shovels, the wheeled snow pusher will work best on lightweight snow, while heavy ice and snow may need to be broken up before this can be used to clear the space.

Do you have limited space for your snow-clearing equipment?

When you need to clear snow, but don’t have a lot of storage space, consider a combination shovel. These shovels act as a two-in-one tool, offering the ability to push as well as lift snow. That means you only need one shovel to clear the snowfall from your deck, driveway, and even the top of your car. The best combination shovels will be durable, ergonomically designed, and lightweight enough to be used comfortably.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best snow shovels cost?

Depending on size, material, and battery power, the best snow shovels can cost between $40 and $300.

Q: How long should a snow shovel be?

It depends on what surface you’re shoveling, and the width of that surface. For example, if you’re clearing off a large, wide driveway, a wider shovel between 24-30 inches gets the job done efficiently and fast. However, they’re harder to lift. If you’re clearing a sidewalk, a narrower 18-inch shovel is perfect.

Q: How can you shovel snow fast?

In order to get your shoveling done fast, it’s important to follow a few rules of thumb. First, you want to get outside right when the snow stops. If you wait too long, you might run into issues like heavier snow, melted slush, and refrozen ice. Another trick is to make sure you have the right equipment—sometimes you might need a few different kinds of shovels to get the full job done faster. For example, when tackling a large space like your driveway, the fastest method is to start down the center using a plow shovel, and then work your way toward the outer edges, finally removing the snow with a traditional snow shovel. You can also consider an electric shovel to shorten the overall time to clear your space.

Q: How do you keep snow from sticking to the shovel?

One of the more frustrating issues that many people face when shoveling is having snow stick to the shovel. This creates extra weight and reduces the speed at which you can clear the snow. A trick you can easily do to help solve this problem is to add a lubricant to the shovel, which will cause the snow to roll off easily. You can use a general wax, inexpensive cooking oil, or even a cooking oil spray.

Q: Which snow shovels are better for your back?

A snow shovel with an ergonomic bent arm and S-shaped handle should be the first on your list if you have a bad back (or just don’t want one down the road). A rolling snow plow with an adjustable handle height can also be a comfortable, conscientious pick.

Q: What’s better: a metal or plastic snow shovel?

It depends on what surface you’re trying to clear: a metal snow shovel is perfect for hard snow and ice on driveways and sidewalks. However, snow tends to stick to them, they’re heavier, and you could potentially bend or warp the shovel. A plastic shovel is good for wood surfaces like decks, and are lighter. Plus, snow is less likely to stick to a plastic shovel.

Final thoughts on the best snow shovels

The best snow shovel will help make shoveling quicker and less of a physical strain. It’s worth considering ergonomic features, lightweight materials, and the right shape and size blade for the surfaces you will be clearing. They will help you enjoy the winter season and remain confident knowing you’ve got the tool to handle whatever storms Mother Nature throws your way.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow shovels of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best coolers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-cooler/ Wed, 26 May 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=367187
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

No matter where your adventures take you, cool down with the best coolers.

The post The best coolers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best coolers on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall YETI Tundra 35 Cooler YETI Tundra 35 Cooler
SEE IT
Best for short adventures blue IceMule Classic cooler bag IceMule Classic Cooler
SEE IT
Best for ice retention Grey Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler Grey Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler
SEE IT

Ever find yourself stretched out on a seaside dune in the blistering August sun, pining for the cool rejuvenation of a fresh mint tea? Whether your taste is sparkling waters or brewskies, sweltering deserts or music festivals, any prolonged occasion in the out-of-doors can benefit from the power of a cooler; with the best coolers, you’ll be sure to keep things ice-cold no matter where the adventure may take you. These coolers are ready for extended camping trips, multiple-day fishing trips, and anywhere else you need easy portability.

The best coolers come in different sizes and shapes. Hard-bodied coolers are usually made out of roto- or injection-molded plastics and feature thick, rigid sides containing layered insulation. Often latching and sometimes on wheels, some can retain ice for over a week. Soft-bodied coolers are designed to be lighter, usually using various polymer-constructed fabrics and often strapping to a user’s back or slinging over a shoulder. Here are our favorites:

How we chose the best coolers

For this article I examined a wide range of coolers, looking for the best coolers from multiple manufacturers. I stacked the specs against one another and accumulated as much info on each model as possible. I also used my experience from multiple cross-country US road trips and camping trips, when I lived out of a cooler for weeks. A few factors emerged as the most important in this search.

Ice retention varies dramatically from cooler to cooler. Some coolers will retain ice for an afternoon, and some boast ice retention of over a week. Great ice retention requires expensive components and heavier builds, so ice retention isn’t a be-all and end-all. However, if you’re looking for a cooler that can keep supplies cold in the back of your truck for a week, then it might be. Good ice retention was one of the most important factors I looked at.

Portability is an all-important metric for a good cooler (at least for most people). Even if you’re buying a cooler that will live in the back of your truck, it still needs to be mobile enough and have enough purchases to load it in and out. The most portable coolers are usually soft-bodied ones that will likely sacrifice some ice retention for a lightweight build. This list features a few highly portable coolers, and a few that focus elsewhere.

Ruggedness can be an important factor. Loaded coolers can be very heavy. That’s why I looked for models that are rugged enough to survive a drop or two, or repeat scraping against the sharp edges of a boat. For hard-bodied coolers, this often means roto-molded plastics rather than injection molds.

Price is always a factor with outdoor gear. Where coolers are concerned, long ice-retention times generally increase price dramatically. Thus this list highlights a few coolers that make a low price the prerogative, while simultaneously prioritizing expensive and impressive insulation in others.

The best coolers: Reviews & Recommendations

The best coolers can keep drinks and food cold for hours while you and your pals/loved ones romp around having a blast outdoors. Here’s what we found.

Best overall: YETI Tundra 35

YETI Tundra 35 Cooler

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 21.38 x 16.13 x 15.75 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 13.88 x 10.63 x 9.38 inches
  • Materials: Roto-molded polyurethane

Pros

  • Keeps ice for long stretches
  • Gasket seals lid
  • Rugged construction that’s even bear-resistant
  • Comes in multiple sizes

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

YETI is such a well-known name in coolers that I specifically looked for a cooler that could outrank it for the “best overall” category in this article, but with its long ice retention and rugged build, the YETI Tundra 35 is simply the clear choice. YETI hard-body coolers are designed with a roto-molded frame that provides greater structural integrity, drop resistance, and insulation than lesser injection-molded coolers. The lid seals with an industrial gasket, so it’s guaranteed to keep contents at the desired temperature, and it opens with easy-to-use rubber latches.

At 20 pounds, the YETI is heavy. However this is addressed in its design. Rope handles are attached to both sides, making carrying easy. The cooler is also designed to be tied down and is easily secured to your boat or truck with ropes. A removable metal dry basket also ships with the product. Further, the Tundra meets the Interagency Grizzly Bear Committee (IGBC) standards for grizzly bear (or black bear) resistance when locked with standard long-stem master locks. YETI sells these on their site.

When it comes to coolers, YETI is one of the undisputed industry leaders, and the Tundra is no isolated golden child. YETI makes a great cooler called the Tundra Haul, which is equipped with wheels for greater portability. If you’re looking for a soft-body cooler or a hard-bodied water cooler, their offerings are also worth a look. If you like Yeti’s insulated water bottles, you will love the Tundra 35 cooler.

Best portable: Igloo 7-Quart Hardsided Playmate

red and white Igloo 7-Quart Hardsided Playmate

Igloo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 2.2 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 10.63 x 8.27 x 11.81 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: Top: 9.06 x 6.31 x 8.38 inches
  • Materials: High-density polyethylene

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Keeps your drinks cold or your soup hot
  • Easy to carry

Cons

  • Some users have trouble with the latch breaking
  • Insulation doesn’t achieve long-term ice retention

Igloo’s 7-Quart Hardsided Playmate is one of those staples of job sites all over America. The design has stayed largely the same for over 30 years, and that’s because it does a great job as an affordable lunch-box cooler. Made out of high-density polyethylene, the Playmate features a high, tented design with a handle that swings open for access to the cooler space below. Igloo has capitalized on the Playmate’s fame by offering Playmates sporting splashes of color and featuring characters and logos, everything from the Grateful Dead to Rugrats.

Sadly, modern Playmates do have an issue with build quality. Unlike their older counterparts from the ’80s and ’90s, Playmates now latch from the handle. This latch isn’t as strong as old Playmates’. Some products ship with latches that soon break. However, the company does offer a one-year limited warranty, so you can still buy with relative peace of mind—if your latch is faulty, it will most likely show in a year. That said, the Playmate is still a strong product that works well for the majority of users.

Igloo also offers an exciting line of coolers made of recycled plastics. The Ecocool Playmate is a great post-consumer recycled resin alternative to the standard Playmate line. It also notably retains the original side button from the old-school Playmates, which means it shouldn’t suffer from the same latch trouble that mars some contemporary Playmates. This means that not only is the Ecocool version better for environmental sustainability, but it also offers better build quality.

Best ice retention: Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler

Grey Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler

Grizzly

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 33.13 x 17.75 x 18 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 27.5 x 12.63 x 13.75 inches
  • Materials: Roto-molded linear low-density polyethylene plastic with Ecomate polyurethane foam insulation

Pros

  • Extreme ice retention can last five days to over a week
  • Sealing gasket
  • IGBC-certified bear-resistant and includes placements for locks

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

For those among us who are looking for a cooler that can go and go, the Grizzly 75 Quart Cooler is about as rugged as its namesake. Manufacturing rugged coolers in Iowa, Grizzly is an American company that specializes in reliability. With ice retention that can last for well over a week in moderate conditions, and most of a week even in scorching desert settings, the Grizzly is a powerhouse. If you’re looking for an ice chest that will work for days angling on the Everglades, weeklong hunts in the mountains of Colorado, or months on the road in your van-life rig, this is the one.

Built of roto-molded plastic that is injected with a special non-VOC environmentally friendly polyurethane called Ecomate, the Grizzly is both more sustainably minded and more sustainably insulated than most of the competition. IGBC-certified grizzly resistant, the cooler is also remarkably rugged and closes with three latches; it also has padlock holes on each side (for real bear thwarting). A rubber gasket in the lid seals the deal.

Grizzly builds a cooler that really delivers longevity. It comes at an expensive price point, but for those looking for a truly fortified cooling system that’s ready for weeks in the field, it’s the best out there.

Best for short adventures: IceMule Classic

blue IceMule Classic cooler bag

IceMule

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 1.93 pounds
  • Outer Dimensions: 16.5 x 6 x 7 inches
  • Inner Dimensions: 15 liters
  • Materials: Fiberglass

Pros

  • This cooler floats and can even be towed behind a boat
  • Slings over the back easily
  • Easy to stuff with whatever you need
  • Can keep food cold for over 24 hours

Cons

  • Not the best ice retention out there
  • Material isn’t the most rugged and may tear on sharp or rough surfaces like unfinished metal boat parts

At the most portable end of the spectrum, the IceMule Classic is a soft-body roll-closed cooler that looks like a dry bag and slings over your shoulder. It also floats. If water sports and agile adventuring are your prerogative, the IceMule is ready.

While it doesn’t have the best ice retention of any cooler out there, the IceMule will still retain ice all day and keep your food and drinks cold for over 24 hours. Because of its roll-over design it doesn’t seal watertight, so liquids can get out if the cooler is held upside down. This also means that water can get in if you do take it floating in the water. It’s not a big enough issue to get in the way for most users, but it’s something to be aware of.

Another issue with the IceMule is that the fabric isn’t as rugged as it could be. With all-week use, your IceMule may crack or scratch, especially if it’s being used around rough or jagged materials, such as sharp metal edges on a boat.

Where the IceMule shines is on adventurous outdoor day trips in and out of water. The fact that it floats means you won’t have to worry about your lunch sinking if you take it out paddleboarding, and the shoulder strap makes it easy to pack fresh food or drinks on one- or two-night backpacking trips.

More coolers we love…

Best soft: Polar Bear Coolers 24 Pack

Black nylon soft cooler

Polar Bear Coolers

SEE IT

One of the greatest issues with soft coolers is sturdiness—but this is not even close to an issue with the Polar Bear Cooler. It features one of the toughest, puncture-resistant liners made of TPU double-coated nylon, which is consumer safe for perishable storage. Plus, it has beautiful stitching with double hemmed seams, a heavy-duty and weatherproofed zipper and a side zipper compartment that can be totally customized with your name or logo! 

Best backpack: TOURIT Cooler Backpack

Black TOURIT cooler backpack is one of the best coolers

TOURIT

SEE IT

This cooler bag comes in six colors, has a stylish design, and promises comfort on your back and shoulders with its padded and adjustable straps. This backpack keeps food and drinks chilled for up to 16 hours (freeze packs are needed, though), is durable and leak-resistant, and its ventilated exterior material ensures that your clothes won’t get wet by condensation during your adventure. It has multiple compartments perfect for organization: one main storage compartment for all your provisions, two front zipper pockets, two bottle holders, a mesh pocket on the strap, and even a bottle opener. 

Best with wheels: RovR Wheeled Camping Rolling Cooler

Orange cooler with wheels

ROVR PRODUCTS EST. 2016

SEE IT

This cooler’s 9-inch, puncture-resistant tires are able to spin fast over rough terrain, including deep sand. The ice cooler with wheels has tons of features like a removable dry bin for deep-freeze storage, a pop-up wagon bin to allow for fewer hauls, and a pull-beside dual handle. Its airtight gasket and high-density foam insulation allow for ice to stay cold for up to 10 whole days. 

Best budget: Coleman Xtreme 5 Cooler

Black Coleman cooler

Coleman

SEE IT

This Coleman cooler features Xtreme technology, including an insulated lid and extra wall insulation, and holds up to 100 cans. The closed lid features 4 slots to rest your drinks without spilling, and is perfect to squat down on—it holds up to 250 pounds! Its EZ-clean lid and comfortable handles make this a perfect choice for a no-frills ice chest that will get the job done without breaking the bank.

Things to consider before buying the best coolers

When you’re shopping for a new cooler, there are a few factors that are important to keep in mind.

Sustainability

The vast majority of coolers are made from plastics, but more environmentally friendly options are out there. Igloo makes a 100 percent biodegradable cooler called the Recool 16-Quart Cooler out of recycled paper and alkyl ketene dimer (a hydrophobic sizing agent). It’s an excellent budget alternative to the Styrofoam coolers of yesterday that’s biodegradable. Igloo’s post-consumer recycled resin coolers are also worth a look, especially the Parks Project Playmate line, which donates a portion of proceeds to the National Parks Conservation Association.

When buying any product, it’s important to consider its effects. When shopping for coolers, remember that there are more sustainable options out there that might biodegrade or use plastics that won’t leach harmful chemicals.

Portability

It’s important to strategize how you’ll use your cooler before you buy. If you need an ultraportable cooler that you can take in and out of the water, you’ll most likely want a soft-body cooler that can strap to your back. If you fish and like to head out for multiple-day excursions, you may want a cooler that will keep ice frozen (and fish fresh) for up to a week. Usually the best ice retention requires more weight to achieve. So ultimate portability and ultimate ice retention are mutually exclusive factors.

Performance

Unless you’re heading into the field for multiple-day camping trips, or driving across the country in a modified sprinter van, you may not really need multiple days of ice retention. If you’re looking for a solid cooler that will keep your drinks cold all afternoon at the beach, there are many cheaper options that could do the job fairly well

FAQs

Q: What is the best cooler I can buy?

For most people, the YETI Tundra 35 delivers the best balance between ice retention and ruggedness for the price. It’s an excellent cooler that’s ready for most anything you throw at it. On the other hand, the expensive Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler is the most rugged cooler out there with the best ice retention. 

Q: How do coolers work? 

The best coolers generally use hard or soft plastic exteriors with dense insulators that block heat transfer. Sometimes including a gasket that further insulates the seal on a coolers lid, coolers are (usually) waterproof boxes that prevent heat transfer.

Q: Which cooler keeps ice the longest?

Most coolers with updated insulation technology are able to keep ice for up to a few days. Depending on the temperature and if the ice chest is located in direct sunlight or not, the maximum days will vary. That said, however, the Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler is able to hold ice for 5-7 days.

Q: What cooler is comparable to YETI?

The Grizzly 75-Quart Cooler surpasses the YETI in terms of ice retention and ruggedness. It also offers bear protection, roto-molded plastic, and rugged latches.

Final thoughts on the best coolers

Every family, group of friends, or even an individual can benefit from having a trusty ice cooler to pull out for that next party or outdoors adventure. Especially with the summer months approaching, it’s time to make sure you’re ready for any situation by checking off the best cooler off of your to-buy list. There are so many options out there, but you certainly won’t go wrong with any one of these five recommended best coolers. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-bone-conduction-headphones/ Mon, 23 Aug 2021 13:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=389546
Four of the best bone-conduction headphones are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Bone-conduction headphones let you approach audio and activity with open ears and an open mind.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best bone-conduction headphones are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones are placed against a white background with a gray gradient. Shokz OpenRun Pro
SEE IT

Impressive battery life, water resistance, and reliable connectivity make these the best pair of bone-conduction headphones around.
Best for kids A pair of pink bone conduction headphones with a unicorn pattern on a blue and white background N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones
SEE IT

Give your kids a pair of headphones that will provide safe entertainment while they stay active.
Best waterproof A pair of blue bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background Shokz OpenSwim
SEE IT

A pair of open-ear headphones that’s waterproof, the OpenSwim suit doing laps in the pool swimmingly.

If you’ve got a bone to pick with the way traditional audio devices disconnect you from the world, there is another option: bone-conduction headphones. Headphones, in general, can play many valuable roles. No (or some) bones about it: they let you jam out to music, dive into podcasts, or dial into phone calls while blocking out environmental noise. This can help you concentrate on tasks, but there are some circumstances when being cut off from what’s around you isn’t optimal. The best bone-conduction headphones let you enjoy all your favorite listening experiences with your ear canal exposed so that you can drive, walk, run, bike, swim, etc.—all while remaining completely aware of your surroundings.

How we chose the best bone-conduction headphones

Bone-conduction headphones are still a relatively new product. But—after consulting academic articles, peer recommendations, real-world user impressions, and our own first-hand tests—we have identified certain models that stand out. Following extensive research, we selected pairs that address the specific needs of athletics, work environments, and age. We chose units that were easy to use, incorporated the features we love about traditional headphones, and prioritized sound quality.

The best bone-conduction headphones: Reviews & Recommendations

Sitting right outside the ear on the jaw, bone-conduction headphones are a different physical and acoustic experience than most people are used to. But different can be good. Here are our picks for the best bone-conduction headphones to help keep you in the hear and now.

Best overall: Shokz OpenRun Pro

A pair of Shokz OpenRun Pro bone-conduction headphones rest on their case on an end table.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Shokz is dedicated to producing top-tier bone-conducting headphones, and the OpenRun Pro is the company’s most advanced model, employing ninth-generation technology to boost sound quality.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Charge time: 1 hour
  • Water resistance: IP55
  • Microphone: Dual noise-canceling

Pros

  • Good sound quality
  • Impressive battery life and quick charging
  • Sweat-resistant for intense exercise

Cons

  • Hard to replace charging cable
  • Audio quality can’t hold up against traditional headphones

Without a doubt, Shokz has cornered the bone-conduction headphone market. The company produces thoughtfully engineered, top-quality products, creating an audio experience to complement the activities you enjoy. The OpenRun Pro is an excellent pair of bone-conduction headphones. They are ideal for just about any situation but are great headphones for running. Available in four colors and two band sizes, the OpenRun Pro fits gently, yet securely, around the back of the head, looping around the ears and resting against the temples.

The headphones employ patented ninth-generation bone-conduction technology. They are equipped with Bluetooth 5.1 (using the SBC codec) and feature PremiumPitch 2.0 signal processing, which prevents bleed, minimizes distortion, and produces a more dynamic bass with minimal vibrations. The battery lasts 10 hours, and you can get a full charge in an hour. Or, with a quick five-minute charge, you’ll get up to 1.5 hours of battery life. Each pair comes with a proprietary magnetic USB charging cable, which easily snaps onto the charging contacts on the headphones.

A dual noise-canceling mic will let you make clear calls. An IP55 rating means this pair can withstand dirt, dust, and sweat. A built-in moisture detector will let you know when it’s getting wet. Keep in mind that while the OpenRun Pro is water-resistant, it’s not designed to be fully submerged in the pool, and you won’t want to run in too heavy of rain with it either. If you would prefer more water resistance, the OpenRun offers many of the same features with an IP67 rating.

Best waterproof: Shokz OpenSwim

A pair of blue bone conduction headphones on a blue and white background

SHOKZ

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The OpenSwim have an IP68 rating, which means they can be fully submerged in water for up to two hours; you can swim with them without making terrible sacrifices regarding audio quality.

Specs:

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz 
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP68
  • Microphone: None

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Ample storage for songs and audiobooks
  • Comfortably fits under swim cap

Cons

  • Single-purpose headphones
  • No Bluetooth connection
  • Limited color options

Shokz designed the OpenSwim specifically to deliver your favorite music, audiobooks, and podcasts while swimming. These headphones feature an IP68 rating, fit comfortably under a swim cap, and you can swim as deep as 2 meters for up to two hours at a time. Unfortunately, they are not Bluetooth compatible. But they can store up to 1,200 songs (4 GB) of various file types, including MP3, WAV, AAC, and FLAC. The OpenSwim headphones feature the same command controls and PremiumPitch 2.0 technology as other Shokz open-ear headphones. So, while you won’t be able to stream, you can listen to your favorites with solid, satisfying sound quality. They even come with a noseclip and earplugs.

Best for calls: Shokz OpenComm2 UC

The Shokz OpenComm2 UC bone conduction headphones and USB-A adapter are placed against a white background.

Shokz

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A DSP noise-canceling microphone means the OpenComm2 headphones are able to isolate your voice while talking, drowning out any surrounding din but keeping you in tune with your environment.

Specs

  • Frequency response: 20Hz-20KHz
  • Battery life: 16 hours of talk time // 8 hours of listening time
  • Charge time: 1 hour
  • Water resistance: IP55
  • Microphone: DSP noise-canceling boom microphone

Pros

  • Comfortable for long wear
  • Extended battery life for long phone calls
  • Boom microphone enhances call quality

Cons

  • Shape is hard to store
  • Some sound bleed might limit private conversations

The OpenComm2 UC headphones prioritize clear communication using an adjustable DSP boom microphone. The boom mic suppresses background noise and highlights your voice when positioned near your mouth. Though the person on the other end of the line won’t pick up on your environment’s sounds, the open-ear headphones will ensure you can hear the person talking on the phone and the one right in front of you. The OpenComm2 are Zoom Certified, offering seamless software integration and Zoom controls on the dedicated headset buttons. They are a great pair of headphones for work, as a result.

The OpenComm2 system lets you bypass your car’s choppy stereo if you have to make a call on the road without cutting yourself off from the sound of traffic. You can also stay on the call when you’re at a job site or keep connected during a busy commute, all without losing situational awareness. You can get up to 16 hours of talk time or eight hours of listening time, and with Quick Charge, you’ll get a replenished two hours of battery life in just five minutes.

Best for multitasking: HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones

A female-presenting person standing in front of a brick wall wearing a pair of grey Haylou bone conduction headphones

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These waterproof, sweatproof headphones will hold up as you pump iron or just rearrange your living room.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 10-minute quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP67
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • IP67 rated
  • High sound quality
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Proprietary charger

Using your sweaty hands to remove your headphones because someone is asking to use the treadmill is common in the gym. So is taking your earbuds out or headphones off repeatedly while roommates/family/friends try to talk to you as you get chores done. Keep your headphones on while keeping your ears open with these sport-friendly HAYLOU PurFree Bone Conduction Headphones. They are IP67 rated, meaning sweat and water won’t get in the way of completing your reps—whether lifting weights or emptying the washer.

An eight-hour battery life gives you all-day tunes power, and 10-minute quick charging gives you two hours of power. The sound quality is superb compared to other bone-conduction headphones, with deep bass and a solid range of highs and lows thanks to a strong Bluetooth 5.2 connection. A noise-canceling microphone means you can take calls without the background bleeding into your conversation. However, a proprietary charger means you’ll be tuneless if you lose power on the go, so prep before you step.

Best for kids: N/0 Kids Bone Conduction Headphones

A pair of pink bone conduction headphones with a unicorn pattern on a blue and white background

N/0

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These headphones include a volume limit of 85 decibels, and the open-ear design means your child will always be able to hear the world around them and when you call for them.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Charge time: 1-hour quick charge
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Volume limiter keeps kids’ hearing safe
  • Adjustable band can grow with your child

Cons

  • Soundbeaming technology is difficult to grasp
  • Susceptible to water damage
  • No noise cancellation means they’re not great for travel

These open-ear headphones aren’t exactly the same as bone-conduction headphones, but the form factor and effect are similar. With soundbeaming speakers resting outside the ear on the cheekbones, these headphones ensure your active child can stay alert to their surroundings even when listening to their favorite songs. The adjustable band is suitable for children ages 4 to 15. With a volume limit of 85 decibels, these headphones go above and beyond to address any concerns you might have for their awareness or hearing. N/0 equipped these headphones with Bluetooth 5.0, eight hours of battery, and an automatic sensor to control playback. An IP54 rating means you won’t have to worry about a few spills or drops in the dirt. Whether skateboarding, biking, or just running around the backyard, your kids can enjoy music and mobility safely.

Best budget: Guudsoud Lite Bone Conduction Headphones

A pair of black Guudsoud Lite bone conduction headphones are placed against a white background.

Guudsoud

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If bone conduction is new to you, you might not be ready to shell out $100 or more. The Guudsoud headphones produce satisfying sound quality and suitable specs in a great intro pair.

Specs

  • Frequency response: Unknown
  • Battery life: 6-10 hours
  • Charge time: 2 hours
  • Water resistance: IP54
  • Microphone: Built-in wireless

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Useful, responsive multifunction button
  • Sound quality is good for the price point

Cons

  • Flimsy build
  • Sound quality could be improved
  • Battery life is just okay

If you want to try out bone conduction but are not ready to invest in a high-end pair, this cheap model from Guudsoud might be right for you. Available for less than $40, they are equipped with Bluetooth 5.0, a built-in microphone, multifunction buttons, and an adjustable band for comfort. The battery can last up to 10 hours, and a 15-minute quick charge provides one hour of playback. Each pair comes with a USB charging cable and a pair of earplugs so you can create custom noise cancellation.

What to consider when buying the best bone-conduction headphones

If your mom always warns you not to listen to your headphones while walking home at night, or you need to hear the traffic behind you as you pedal to work, try out the best bone-conduction headphones. To determine which pair will work best for your needs, you’ll want to consider where and when you’ll be using them the most. You’ll also want to ensure you understand how they work, especially if this is your first pair of bone-conduction headphones.

First of all, what is bone conduction, and how does it work?

Bone-conduction headphones allow you to experience audio sans any direct interaction with your ear canal or eardrum. While this may sound like some new-fangled, tech-heavy sorcery, there is evidence that bone conduction has been around for centuries. It is rumored that Beethoven relied on bone conduction to compose music after losing his hearing by attaching a metal rod to his piano and biting down on it as he played. But how does it work? 

Typically, sound waves travel through the air and are funneled through the ear canal to the eardrums. They are then decoded into vibrations and sent to the inner ear (or cochlea), which is connected to the auditory nerve. When the vibrations hit the inner ear fluid, tiny hair cells start to convulse, creating electrical pulses that travel up the auditory nerve to the brain. This process is called air conduction. Bone conduction completely avoids the eardrum, which is what’s targeted by the miniature speaker in traditional earbuds, and relies on a transducer of another sort to convert sound waves into vibrations and send those through the facial bones to be received by the inner ear. Essentially, the vibrations the cochlea receives are the same no matter how you receive them. They are simply sent via a different pathway. 

This concept has even been used in reverse. The Sony WF-1000XM4 earphones include a bone-conduction sensor that picks up the vibrations from your voice during calls to help enable clearer speech without picking up ambient sound.

Who should use bone-conduction headphones?

Medically, bone-conduction headphones benefit those experiencing conductive hearing loss, a condition that directly affects the transmission of sound through the eardrums. Conductive hearing loss is just one way the auditory system can be disrupted, so bone-conduction headphones won’t work for everyone with hearing difficulties. 

Bone-conduction headphones are also helpful for those who need to maintain situational awareness while they enjoy their music. These headphones provide an additional layer of safety for bikers, hikers, drivers, or anyone who needs to be aware of their surroundings. Active in dense urban environments? Bone conduction makes for great running headphones. Bone-conduction headphones are also particularly great for swimmers. Air conduction is heavily suppressed when we are underwater, but the vibrations created by bone conduction can still be transmitted. That means a pair of bone-conduction headphones with an Ingress Protection rating of IP68 (aka waterproof) can keep you connected to your workout playlist lap after lap. 

Now, bone conduction won’t make your entire face shake, rattle, and roll, so you don’t need to worry about experiencing discomfort while you listen. In fact, many report that these headphones are secure, comfortable, and easy to wear. However, if you are sensitive to pressure, there is a chance that you may experience dizziness or headaches after a long stretch of listening.

How’s the sound quality?

If you’re an audiophile searching for your next pair of headphones, chances are bone conduction isn’t going to be what you’re looking for. That being said, the overall audio quality of these headsets can certainly get you through a tough training session or walk to work. At high volumes, audio can start to distort or get crunchy and an expansive mix isn’t really possible. However, with a quality model, you will still get to experience impactful bass. You’ll feel the vibrations instead of highly pressurized waves from over-ear cans. 

Just remember that even the best bone-conduction headphones aren’t meant to fit or even necessarily sound like traditional headphones or earbuds. If you haven’t used bone-conduction headphones before, you might feel inclined to turn up the volume as loud as it can go in an attempt to recreate that natural, passive noise cancellation that every other type of headphone relies on. Remember that nothing is blocking your ear canal, which means that you will purposefully be able to hear your surroundings clearly. Maxing out the volume won’t affect that, but it could lead to hearing loss down the road.

Can bone-conduction headphones use Bluetooth?

There are wireless bone-conduction headphones that use Bluetooth 4.2 and higher to connect to devices such as cellphones and computers. Set up and pairing is no different with Bluetooth bone-conduction headphones than connecting any other type of Bluetooth headphones. Some may even have onboard controls like play, pause, and skip for your streaming services. Other models are more like a portable MP3 player, with the ability to store hours of songs internally. Remember the iPod shuffle? That’s what you’ll be getting. It’s an excellent option for folks who want to jam out to a curated playlist without their phone.

Can you take phone calls with bone-conduction headphones?

Many companies equip their bone-conduction headphones with a microphone so you can answer calls on the go. While the headphones themselves can’t employ any passive or active noise cancellation to enhance your listening experience, some models can use technology to make calls crisp and clear. The headphones with mic use various means to minimize outside sound—like wind, traffic, etc.—ensuring that the person you’re talking to can hear you without interruption. Just remember that bone-conduction headphones are subject to more sound bleed than traditional units, so you’ll want to be conscientious about volume when it comes to private calls.

FAQs

Q: How much do bone-conduction headphones cost?

Generally, the best bone-conduction headphones cost between $80 and $150. It’s important to go with a quality pair to ensure you’re investing in a safe and well-designed model. Though the history of bone-conduction technology is long, its application to commercial headphones is relatively new, which means you’ll have the most success with an established brand, like Shokz.

Q: Can bone-conduction headphones cause hearing loss?

Any long-term exposure to loud noise can cause damage, potentially leading to hearing loss; this includes listening to music at loud volumes with any headphones. At this time, there is no evidence to support the claim that bone-conduction headphones put you at significantly more risk for hearing loss than any other headphone type, including earbuds and over-the-ear models. It’s important to remember that bone-conduction headphones will not block out surrounding noise, so you should not try to block out additional sound by turning the volume up too loud.

Q: Can you wear glasses with Shokz?

Yes, you can wear your glasses while using Shokz headphones. The company recommends putting the headphones on first and then sliding your glasses into place for a more secure fit. You can also wear them underneath a helmet, and you can wear the waterproof model with a swim cap covering the tips of your ears.

Q: Do bone-conduction headphones sound good?

They say beauty is in the eye of the beholder, and the same goes for bone-conduction headphones. Imagine you’re holding a phone speaker up to your ear—that’s what it’s like to wear a pair of bone-conduction headphones. Will they perform the same as headphones with active noise cancellation? No. If hearing street sounds and skipping fully immersive earbuds is music to your ears, however, you’ll be happy going with bone conduction.

Final thoughts on the best bone-conduction headphones

Chances are you’re either an experienced bone-conduction headphones user or a novice looking to see if these air-conduction alternatives are right for you. Regardless of your familiarity, finding the right pair means homing in on when and where you’ll use them most. Think about your surroundings and consider your priorities regarding sound quality, microphone use, and waterproof rating, then shop accordingly. If you’re accustomed to traditional earphones or over-ear models, get ready to be surprised by the best bone-conduction headphones.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bone-conduction headphones in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best hot tubs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hot-tubs/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586348
Best hot tubs sliced header
Tony Ware

Soak in our hot tubs guide and relax, knowing you're not getting lukewarm choices. We've done the legwork so you can unwind your body.

The post The best hot tubs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best hot tubs sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall AquaRest AR-150 Select AquaRest AR-150 Select
SEE IT

Moderately priced, this model has all the basic features you want in an entry-level, but highly-rated, spa.
Best inflatable Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus
SEE IT

This is a basic, fairly inexpensive hot tub for when you either don’t want to dedicate the money or space to a permanent spa.
Best for parties Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX hot tub Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX
SEE IT

This seven-person spa is what you picture every time we talk about hot tubs and their legacy in pop culture.

Since the discovery of fire, humans have sought to relax their stressed-out, overworked, and underpaid bodies in a heated bucket of near-boiling water. We have achieved this effect with hot stones, burning charcoal, and straight-up fire. And then came electricity, which meant that we could build actual hot tubs that weren’t just bowls of what was, effectively, human soup. Modern hot tubs (or spas, depending on your preference) have advanced features like powerful jets massaging your back and lower body. They have filters to keep the water clean and devoid of as much human by-product as possible, a necessity since, unlike in the olden days, we often share space in a hot tub. The truth is that you’re tired. We’re all tired. We dream of coming home after a long day of trudging through society, kick off most of our clothes, and find ultimate relaxation in 104-degree water. So, to save your limbs and time, we’ve done the legwork and found you the best hot tubs of 2023.

How we chose the best hot tubs

There are three types of hot tubs: built-in (below ground, often part of a pool), above ground, and time machine. Since built-in hot tubs can be any shape or size, depending on multiple pool-construction-related variables, and hot tub time machines aren’t available to the public, we focused on above-ground hot tubs. There are plenty of retailers specifically selling hot tubs and hot tub supplies. So finding the best hot tubs comes down to sticking with popular, public-facing retailers (Wayfair, Walmart) and looking for the best-reviewed hot tubs that fit within predetermined categories. What we end up with is a list containing a few very popular hot tubs, with one or two unique hot tubs mixed in. 

The best hot tubs: Reviews & Recommendations

Since their inception, modern hot tubs have become iconic pop culture backyard appliances. From entire episodes of TV centered around a hot tub, to the implied cultural connotations of owning one in the 1970s, it’s been difficult to deny that hot tubs are, and always will be, a thing. While they did take a hit for a little while (recessions will do that), they have once again become a very popular lanai accessory, thanks to lower voltage requirements and semi-affordable pricing. 

What are you looking for in a hot tub? Are you looking for an all-around functional general hot tub with dozens of jets? Or perhaps something a bit more romantic. Perhaps it’s all about party time or just having something to inflate and toss on the lawn for impromptu soak sessions. Or maybe you just want to lounge and let the world’s troubles float away. Regardless, this list has the hot tub you’re looking for, with or without Roger and Virginia Klarvin.

Best overall: AquaRest AR-150 Select

AquaRest AR-150 Select

AquaRest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 156 gallons
  • Occupancy: 4-person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 12

Pros

  • Waterfall feature
  • Cup holders
  • Underwater LED lights

Cons

  • Can still feel a bit crowded
  • Takes a while to heat up

The AquaRest AR-150 is the spa you purchase when you don’t know anything about hot tubs and don’t want to spend a fortune. It’s moderately priced and has all the basic features you want in an entry-level, but highly-rated, spa. It has 12 jets, some built-in cup holders, LED lighting for setting the mood, and that half-boiling water your muscles need. But you might want to plan ahead for relaxation. As it runs off 120V (rather than 220V), it takes like a day to hit its maximum temp of 104°F. But while it’s heating up, take comfort in a 1.5hp customizable massage delivered through stainless steel jets.

It comes with a nice locking cover to keep out unsupervised toddlers and yard trash, but if you want steps, you’ll have to purchase them separately. It advertises that it can fit four people with little issue, but if y’all aren’t comfortable with innocent shoulder, hip, and toe touching, you might want to limit the capacity to three people. Regardless, with its patented Easy Kleen water filtration system, you don’t have to fret about dirty bits sullying the soup. AquaRest is one of the top online spa brands, and AquaRest AR-150 Select sits at the top of its offerings.

Best budget: Lifesmart Spas LS200

tan Lifesmart Spas LS200 hot tub

Lifesmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 220 gallon
  • Occupancy: 4 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 13

Pros

  • High water capacity
  • Includes water filter
  • It’s not square

Cons

  • Lacks fancy features
  • No ozone purification

Lifesmart Spas LS200 shaves off the corners of the classic square hot tub to make a space-saving round spa with 13 jets powered by a 1hp pump. Based on price comparisons, it appears that the shape of a spa is directly reflected in the cost. That is, circles cost a bit less than squares, so this spa is the best budget spa. It usually costs less than $3k (especially during near-constant sales events), and while it doesn’t come with stairs, you can just tip your body into the spa without worrying about hitting a squared edge. 

The only real downside to a circle spa, even if it does hold a few more gallons than other spas, is it doesn’t have room for ozone purification plumbing. Though, it should be noted that according to the official product page, the shape is oval. That might not be a circle, but it’s close enough in the world of spas. Actually, the oval shape creates more opportunities to put the spa wherever you want: on the porch, in the yard, in the living room. The Lifesmart Spas LS200 is a great entry-level spa for families looking to step up their water-based massage game.

Best for couples: USA Spas OH-SM

USA Spas OH-SM hot tub over a white background

USA Spas

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 190 gallons
  • Occupancy: 2 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 16

Pros

  • Includes ozonator
  • Acrylic instead of plastic
  • Well placed jets

Cons

  • Not good for families
  • Doesn’t come with steps

The USA Spas OH-SM is a spa built for two. There’s gonna be some touching, some twisting of limbs, and probably some other stuff that is best left to the imagination. Basically, leave your swimsuit on the shelf cause things are about to get freaky in this acrylic hot tub with 16 powerful jets placed in just the right places. Like, there are six jets right on your lower back, or if you’re sinking in a bit to get closer to your partner, they’ll hit your shoulders perfectly. If you are alone in the hot tub (which is perfectly acceptable), you have back and foot jets. 

This spa runs on 120V with a single 1.5hp pump. Its nice little oval shape will fit just about anywhere in or around your house. However, if you want a bit of privacy, we suggest purchasing a gazebo and some curtains. Your HOA might not approve of it sitting in your front yard, though. They are the worst. But what’s not the worst is crystal clear water, no matter the amount of flop sweat you are pumping into it. That’s provided by the built-in ozonator, which keeps that water nice and crisp. If it’s just the two of you, then the USA Spas OH-SM spa is perfect for everyday relaxation with your partner.

Best Inflatable: Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus

Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus

Intex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 210 gallons
  • Occupancy: 6 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Total jets: 170

Pros

  • Cheap
  • Built-in pump
  • 170 bubble jets

Cons

  • No ozonator
  • No fancy features
  • Questionable durability

How the inflatable Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus fits 170 bubble jets in such a moderately normal-sized spa is beyond us. But you gotta have some catch to market an inflatable hot tub properly. Because it’s an inflatable, it doesn’t have the insulation or structural integrity of a solid hot tub, and it takes a while to fill up with fresh water from the hose every time you want to chill out while heating up. It doesn’t have an ozonator but does have a hard water treatment system to keep the water gentle on your clothes and skin. 

This is a very basic, fairly inexpensive hot tub for when you either don’t want to spend the money on a stationary one or like blowing things up to sit in them. In some ways, it’s a kiddie pool for adults, with a bunch of body massaging jets. But for some of us, it’s the perfect hot tub for quick fun and if we have limited space. The Intex 28431E PureSpa Plus isn’t some luxury hot tub, but it’ll do the job and fit conveniently in the storage shed. 

Best lounge seat: Luxury Spas WS-595

Luxury Spas WS-595 hot tub over a background with a gradient

Luxury Spas

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 365 gallons
  • Occupancy: 3
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 47

Pros

  • 47 adjustable jets
  • Includes steps
  • Bluetooth sound system
  • Lounge seating
  • Cons
  • 3rd person seating is awkward
  • Expensive when not on sale

While the third-person seat is a bit awkward, the Luxury Spas WS-595 spa offers some of the best features in a modern hot tub. And since it’s a lounge-style hot tub, you don’t have to share with your weird neighbors peeking over the fence. Honestly, this is a two-person spa with room for a floating drink cooler. Pull out a fresh La Croix, put on some Sade over the built-in Bluetooth speakers, turn the LED lights to a soft purple, and let the 47 adjustable jets take the pain away. With a friend, partner, or your mom. Who are we to judge who you hot tub with? 

The filter runs continuously, even when not in use, to keep the water clean and sanitary, while the ozonator keeps the water crisp and clear. This is all made capable by the 240V of power running through the spa. And that power is what provides a powerful hydro-massage through, did we mention, 47 freaking jets? While it can get a bit expensive when not on sale, this is one of the most packed-with-features spas on the market. While not intended for families or large groups, you can take turns because the Luxury Spas WS-595 is worth it.

Best for parties: Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX

Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX hot tub

Lifesmart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Water capacity: 285 gallon
  • Occupancy: 7 person
  • LED lighting: Yes
  • Number of jets: 65

Pros

  • Waterfall feature
  • Multi-color LEDs
  • Digital control panel

Cons

  • Lacks additional features
  • Doesn’t include steps

Strangely, there are many multi-thousand-dollar spas that don’t include steps, but you’ll want to get some for the Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX because people will be in and out of it all night. Thankfully, the water will never get gross, no matter how much salsa is in play, thanks to a built-in filter and ozonator. This is the party spa that you picture every time we talk about hot tubs and their legacy in pop culture. It seats seven people fairly comfortably, without too much skin touching or legs crossing over. Unless that’s your intent. Then there’s plenty of room for that. 

The 65 jets include a 14-jet nozzle turbo blaster and four-foot jets. It runs on 220V and is super insulated to keep electricity costs down and the water hot. It does lack some additional features, like speakers, but has a waterfall feature, so that’s something at least. There is also a thermal locking cover so that you can heat up the tub, and it’ll maintain temp while you finish your chores and prepare that tasty seven-layer dip. The real selling point of this hot tub is its actual price point, which is right around $4,000. Within the spa market, this is quite fair for a seven-person hot tub, making the Lifesmart Coronado LS600DX the perfect addition to your party.

What to consider before buying the best hot tubs

If you are about to invest thousands in a hot tub, you will want to do your research. That is, read the product descriptions and customer reviews to suss out any consistent issues. Ignore the ones about delivery; we always have to cross our fingers there. So, when it comes down to purchasing a new hot tub for the patio, you’ll want to consider at least the type, its human capacity, and any additional features.

Type

There are two main types of hot tubs: standard and plug-and-play. Plug-and-play is named as such because you can literally set it up and plug it into a standard 110V outlet. Most come with shielded cables to extend the plug and prevent water and electricity mixing. Most plug-and-play hot tubs are constructed from some type of polyethylene and usually take a little while to heat up. 

Meanwhile, standard hot tubs have stronger jets, are constructed from acrylic, and run off 220V. So, if you don’t have a 220V outlet handy (the one you do have is probably occupied by your clothes dryer), an electrician can install one. It’s worth it because they heat up faster and are a bit more durable in the long run. However, these types of spa are generally more expensive. 

Capacity

How many people do you plan on accommodating with your hot tub? Is it for the family? For parties? For romantic soaks? The trouble is, some hot tubs intended for two can actually comfortably fit four, while some hot tubs intended for seven can only fit five without too much weird shoulder touching. The general rule of thumb is for any hot tub not intended for only two people subtract one from the max capacity. 

Features

From LED lighting to neat little waterfalls to the type of jet output and Bluetooth speakers, there are plenty of variable features to look for in a hot tub. Of course, the more features a hot tub has, the more electricity it uses and the higher the initial price. Also, check if the spa you’re buying has a locking cover (for safety and keeping the heat in) and stairs. You may have to buy stairs separately; it’s the easiest way to get in and out. 

FAQs

Q: What’s an ozonator?

An ozonator produces ozone gas. This water treatment process removes heavy chemicals and kills bacteria, fungus, and protozoa better than any other type of water treatment process. You can’t just spray Windex in your hot tub and expect it to get clean. While not all hot tubs have an ozonator, the ones that do produce crystal-clear water and bacteria-free environments, requiring less annual cleaning.

Q: How hot should my spa be?

Most hot tubs max out at 104°F. The safe range is between 100°F (38°C) and 104°F, but kids should be limited to a lower temp, especially if they are going to be in there for a while. It should be noted that the longer you sit in water hotter than your internal temperature, the more it affects your body. Spas are meant to be used in short bursts, as sitting in hot water for too long can cause light-headedness, overheating, and dehydration. 

Q: Can I move my hot tub once it’s in place?

If it’s inflatable, you can move it whenever you want (when it’s not filled). If it’s not, it’s several hundred pounds empty and will be quite a chore to move. It’s not impossible, just really difficult. Plus it should move to a flat, level foundation. So when you get your spa, be sure to pick just the right spot for it because it’s going to be there for a while. 

Final thoughts on the best hot tubs

Owning a hot tub is an experience. It’s a relaxing way to end any day, soaking in super hot water with jets pummelling your exhausted muscles. But it’s also an investment, one that requires planning and a moderate amount of thought. It also requires maintenance and cleaning. Regardless, there are few activities more entertaining in the home than hopping in the hot tub with some close friends and a case of something cool to drink. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hot tubs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best portable generators in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-generators/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585466
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

Portable generators come in many shapes and sizes, but we'll help you pick the best one for your specific power needs.

The post The best portable generators in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best portable generators composited into a header image with four images
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator on a plain background Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator
SEE IT

This 46-pound generator provides plenty of power and runs quietly.
Best high-capacity Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator on a plain background Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator
SEE IT

A five-gallon fuel tank gives it a nine-hour run time at half capacity.
Best solar Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator on a plain background Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator
SEE IT

A pair of solar panels make this an ideal solution for true off-grid experiences.

A portable generator is useful in a wide variety of situations. For camping, it can help keep your RV or van conversion fully juiced and your devices topped off. At home, it’s easy to move into place when the utility power goes out. It provides the electricity necessary to use power tools at off-grid worksites. And it’s generally essential whenever and wherever you need power but don’t have access to a plug. Portable generators come in various forms, ranging from very small to exceptionally large (yet still mobile), and they can be fueled by gas, propane, or solar energy. Whatever the case, the best portable generators are relatively easy to move, durable, and dependable, and we’ve tested a bunch of them to determine which are your top picks for various purposes.

How we chose the best portable generators

I am what is commonly referred to as a “gear junkie” in that I am borderline obsessive about testing a wide range of tech tools, particularly those relevant to the outdoors and varying home DIY projects. Portable power generators not only rank among those tech tools in and of themselves but have also been essential to charging all the other electricity-hungry items like phones, laptops, drones, power tools, ebikes, and my trusty van conversion, not to mention an RV or home when the lights go out. I’ve also written guides about the best solar generators and inverter generators for PopSci.

That being the case, I’ve had the opportunity to test out generators of every variety, and I’ve combined that experience with insight from other PopSci writers who have tried everything from small, straightforward power stations the size of a shoebox to big, feature-rich behemoths designed to power a small army. Accordingly, I know which generators provide plenty of juice and which fizzle out under a full power load. Armed with this knowledge, I have spent over a decade reviewing generators and other equipment for outlets like Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. Occasionally, I’ve arrived at split decisions for certain categories, so to break the tie, I’ve looked to input from my fellow experts as well as reviews from real-world buyers. 

The best portable generators: Reviews & Recommendations

The picks below span a range of sizes, intended uses, and budgets. Some are small and lightweight and designed for appropriately smaller power demands, while others are big on both size and output. All, however, are portable in some capacity, whether because they’re compact and easy to carry or equipped with mobility aids like wheels and handles. 

Best overall: Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator

Honda EU2200i Companion Portable Generator on a plain background

Honda

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Super portable, durable, and intuitive to use, this is an outstandingly versatile, go-anywhere generator. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 46.5 pounds

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Rugged durability
  • Very quiet

Cons

  • Only moderate power output

It shouldn’t come as much of a surprise that Honda has topped our list. The company has been making outstanding generators for a long time, and the EU2200i is the perfect representation of how the brand manages to do a little bit of everything just right. 

Compact, lightweight, and easy to carry thanks to its sturdy handle, this is about as portable as generators can get. While its 2,200W output isn’t exactly going to replace an electrical line, it’s still a solid amount to keep an RV air conditioner going, power the hungriest of power tools, or keep your fridge and a few other essentials going during a blackout. The 20- and 30-amp outlets allow you to use a typical AC plug or larger RV plug, and it’s equipped with an array of safety features to make sure nothing goes awry. 

It’s also incredibly durable. I’ve hauled mine along through many camping trips, and I’m not exactly gentle with my outdoor gear. And thanks to its quiet operation, you can enjoy electrification in peace. 

Best high-capacity: Generac 7706 GP18000EFI Portable Generator

Orange and grey Generac 18000EFI portable generator on wheels in a parking lot

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its exceptionally high wattage and reliable operation, it will handle whatever job you throw at it.

Specs

  • Wattage: 25,000 peak/18,000 running
  • Power source: Gas
  • Weight: 439 pounds

Pros

  • Super high power output
  • Reliable operation
  • Sturdy handle and wheels

Cons

  • Extremely heavy

When only the utmost power will suffice, look no further than the Generac 18000EFI. With its massive 18,000W running output, this monster will easily power a whole house, large-scale job worksite, or multiple RVs. Admittedly, its 439-pound heft takes a lot of liberty with the “portable” distinction, but its sturdy handle and wheels and well-balanced weight make it fairly easy to maneuver around. 

With its massive 5-gallon fuel tank, it will run for up to 9 hours on a 50 percent load, and an hour meter tracks usage and displays how much operating time it has left. Seven outlets spanning 20-50 amps provide plenty of high power port options, and it’s equipped with circuit breakers and other essential safety features. Powerful and reliable, this generator will deliver on pretty much any and all power needs. 

Best solar: Jackery 1000 Plus Solar Generator

Orange and grey rectangular Jackery 1000 Plus portable generator on a patio

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Great portability, solid capacity, and lightning-fast charging make this the best mid-sized solar generator on the market. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,000 peak/2,000 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall
  • Weight: 9.92 lbs

Pros

  • Supremely portable
  • Extremely fast charging
  • Plenty of ports

Cons

  • Not intended for rugged use

Solar power generators have become a big hit as of late with the van life crowd in particular, and we’re a fan of Jackery. The Jackery 1000 Plus is the best mid-sized option out there thanks to its perfect fusion of input/output capability, paramount portability, and generally well-considered design elements. With 1,264 watt-hour capacity and 2,000W output, it’s the perfect choice for packing along on a camping trip or placing at the heart of your van conversion. Capable of charging in under two hours via a wall outlet or solar panel array, it has one of the fastest charge speeds around.

A number of smart design choices elevates its portability. Lightweight, perfectly squared, with a fold-flat handle, it’s easy to move, store, or build into a van conversion. It’s also expandable thanks to Jackery’s new add-on batteries, which essentially means you can bring along as much or as little power as you need. Jackery has also added the ability to monitor and adjust settings via an app, which makes it easier to use in general. 

Best for RVs: Champion Power Equipment 200988 4500 Watt Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Champion Power Equipment 200988 4500 Watt Dual Fuel Portable Generator on a plain background

Champion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High portability, high power output, quiet operation, and dual fuel functionality make this a must for avid RVers. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 4,500 peak/3,150 running
  • Power source: Gas or propane
  • Weight: 97 pounds

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Higher-end wattage
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Somewhat heavy

The Champion 200988 hits the sweet spot for RV generators by pretty much every metric. It runs on both gas and propane, making it easy to find fuel when out in the wild. Its 4,500W output is more than enough to power almost any RV—even with the air conditioner turned on. It’s relatively quiet, so it won’t ruin the outdoorsy mood. And it offers straightforward, intuitive operation. 

What’s more, it’s exceedingly rare to find a generator that delivers so much wattage in such a portable package. Compact, squared off for easy packing, and equipped with sturdy handles and wheels, it’s easy to bring along in the RV. While its weight is just under 100 pounds, not exactly featherlight, it’s also not unmanageably heavy. And while I prefer the dual-fuel version, there are also single-fuel gas and propane options that feature a remote start, allowing you to switch it on or off without leaving the comfort of your camper.  

Best for home backup: Westinghouse 9500 Portable Generator

Westinghouse 9500 Portable Generator on a plain background

Westinghouse

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Powerful, remote starting, and relatively mobile, this is the perfect generator to wheel into place when the power goes out.

Specs

  • Wattage: 9,500 peak/7,500 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 196 pounds

Pros

  • High wattage
  • Remote starting
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Pretty heavy

When the lights go out at home, the Westinghouse 9500 is a solid backup in every way you could want it to be. It’s certainly not light, but its handles and wheels make it easy to maneuver into place—my 70-year-old mother carts hers around with no problems. Its above-average wattage is plenty strong for most household demands, and its 6.6-gallon tank allows for an admirable 11-hour runtime. A remote starter allows you to switch it on without braving the storm. And Westinghouse generators are built solid, typically lasting through many years of use without issue.

It’s also equipped with plenty of smart safety features. Circuit breakers, low-oil auto shutdown, and rubber covers over the plugs reduce the potential for various risks. A (sold separately) smart switch allows it to switch on automatically when utility power goes out. And it’s relatively quiet, producing roughly the same decibels as a vacuum cleaner. For all practical purposes, it’s exactly what you want from a home backup generator. 

Best budget: Craftsman C0010020 2,200 Watt Portable Generator

Craftsman C0010020 2,200 Watt Portable Generator on a plain background

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Good specs and great portability in a low-cost package make this an outstanding budget pick.

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,200 peak/1,700 running
  • Power source: Gas 
  • Weight: 46.3 pounds

Pros

  • Very portable
  • Parallel capable
  • Quiet operation

Cons

  • Not for high-power use

The great thing about the Craftsman C0010020 is that it does a little bit of everything right, and it does it without breaking the bank. While its modest wattage probably isn’t going to keep an entire house or RV going, it’s plenty to keep a few essentials like the fridge, lights, and key devices powered—or even a lower-draw air conditioner. It’s parallel capable, meaning you can chain it to a second generator to double the output when you need more juice. It’s also lightweight, quiet, and dependably built. 

There are other generators out there in the $500 neighborhood, but if they deliver on all the promises above, I haven’t seen them.

Best dual-fuel: DuroMax XP 13000HX Dual-Fuel Portable Generator

Black and Blue DuroMax HP13000HX dual-fuel generator running outdoors next to a house

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High power output, intuitive operation, and relative mobility translate into dual-fuel excellence.

Specs

  • Wattage: 13,000 peak/10,500 running on gas – 12,350 peak/9,975 running on propane
  • Power source: Gas and propane
  • Weight: 240 pounds

Pros

  • Dual fuel versatility
  • Very high power output
  • Helpful data display

Cons

  • Very heavy

The main benefit of a dual-fuel generator is in the name: the availability of two fuel options, which can be essential in an emergency situation. The DuroMax XP 13000HX delivers that versatility along with outstanding power output, intuitive operation, and reliable, long-lasting durability. I’m also a big fan of the data display, which provides useful information like voltage, hours of operation, and even a countdown to the recommended maintenance. A CO2 safety switch also detects carbon monoxide and then shuts the generator down if the levels become dangerous. 

This is definitely one of the heavier generators on the list, but it’s equipped with strong handles and smooth-rolling wheels that make it easy to move around. It also boasts a super-heavy duty 50 amp outlet, so in other words, this thing is a true beast. 

Most portable: Bluetti AC180 Portable Power Station

Grey square Bluetti AC180 portable power generator sitting in a garage

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: As portable as they come with great stats all around, this is the definition of go-anywhere power. 

Specs

  • Wattage: 2,700 peak/1,800 running
  • Power source: Solar or wall plug
  • Weight: 37.4 pounds

Pros

  • Extremely portable
  • Solid power stats
  • Plenty of outlets

Cons

  • Dual solar inputs would be nice

If you’re looking for an ultra-portable box of on-the-go power, the Bluetti AC180 is it. The lightest and most compact on our list, it still has solid power chops thanks to its 1,152Wh capacity and ability to temporarily crank up its power output as high as 2,700W via the brand’s app. That capacity can be expanded via Bluetti’s new add-on batteries, and it can be fully charged within an hour. 

While adding a second solar input wouldn’t hurt, if you’re looking for a reliable box of power that you can bring along pretty much anywhere with ease, you’ve found it.

What to consider when shopping for the best portable generators

A portable generator tends to be a pretty big investment not only financially but in that it’s a piece of equipment that you plan to rely on—potentially in emergency situations—for many years to come. This being the case, there are several key considerations to remember when choosing the right one for your needs: 

Power output

First and foremost, you need a generator that will meet your electricity needs. When shopping for generators, you’ll typically see output expressed via two numbers, both of which are measured in watts (W). “Running” or “rated” output is the typical amount of watts produced at any given time, while “Peak” output is the amount it can produce in momentary surges, while switching on a power tool or air conditioner, for example. Read the wattage requirements for the various things you expect to power, total them up, and then look for a generator that delivers the appropriate output. Generally speaking, if you’re just looking to keep a few devices charged, 2,000W is the most you’ll need. For power tools, RVs, or a refrigerator, you should aim toward 4,000W. If you expect to be powering a full home, however, you will want at least 7,500W.

Fuel type and capacity

Generators almost always run on either gas, solar power, or, in the case of dual-fuel models, a combination of gas and propane. Which is right for you depends on considerations like access and the environment. Gas is typically the most convenient option as it can be acquired pretty much anywhere, though it pollutes more and tends to deliver louder operation. Adding the propane option provides greater versatility, which can be helpful if you’re out in the wild or in the event of an emergency, and it also produces less harmful emissions. (We love it in our grills, so why not our generators?) Solar is an environmentally friendly, nearly silent fuel, but it relies on the availability of sunshine and can’t deliver the same level of wattage as fossil fuels.

Next you need to consider capacity. The larger the fuel tank or battery capacity, the longer a generator will provide power, but it also increases the weight. If you plan on using your generator at home, a larger model that can be wheeled around is a fine choice. If you’ll be packing your generator along on camping trips, however, you’ll probably need to compromise some capacity in favor of lighter portability. 

Starting type

With gas or propane-fueled generators, you’ll almost always have the option to use a recoil cord and an electric starter, as it’s fairly standard for generators to come with both these days. The cord requires a lot of physical effort but will allow you to start the generator under any condition, while the electric start fires things up at the push of a button, though it won’t work if the internal battery is drained. Some models offer remote starters that you can fire up from the comfort of your home or RV. This isn’t really a consideration with solar generators as they tend to be plug-and-play.

Operating noise

Generators can be extremely loud, so volume should be a consideration if you don’t want to bother the neighbors at home or disrupt the peace and quiet while camping. While there are exceptions, typically speaking, the larger and more powerful a generator is, the louder it gets. The best portable generators tend to boast heavy shielding to reduce noise, though this only helps up to a point. 

If noise isn’t much of a concern, then go big and go loud. But if you want to minimize the racket, choose a smaller model, a dual-fuel that uses propane (which is somewhat quieter than gas), or the near-silence of solar.

Plugs

If a particular model doesn’t have the plugs you need, then it’s not much use to you. Most mid-large-sized generators come with AC outlets of 20-amp and 30-amp ratings, which will allow you to plug in most devices and RVs. Smaller units, especially solar, frequently don’t include a 30 amp port, so they might not work for your RV needs. If you’re looking for true max power output, you’ll need one of the few and far between generators with a 50-amp plug. 

FAQs

Q: Can I use my portable generator indoors?

Absolutely not! This can kill anyone indoors with the generator very quickly. Carbon monoxide can build up even in partially enclosed areas like barns or garages, so be sure to run them outdoors and away from windows. Solar generators, however, do not pose this risk as they produce no harmful gasses. 

Q: Are portable generators a fire hazard?

As with anything involving gas or propane, fire and explosion are a risk. To prevent the danger of fire, ensure you never over-fill the tank, clean up any fuel that spills, and never fill a generator while it’s hot from running. Here again, solar generators avoid this danger. 

Q: Can a portable generator operate in the rain or snow?

A generator should not be run while wet, as it can lead to damage or electrocution. Be sure to position it out of the weather or protect it with a cover of some sort.

Q: What happens if I overload my generator?

Overloading can cause the generator to overheat and become damaged, leading to serious damage to the electronic equipment being powered. If your generator isn’t rated to power everything you want it to, prioritize your needs to stay within its limits or get a bigger generator.

Q: How long can a generator run continuously?

That depends on the specific model and its fuel capacity, though it can range anywhere from 5 to 15 hours. Read all manufacturer recommendations carefully to ensure you stay within its operating time and avoid the risk of damage. 

Final thoughts on the best portable generators

A good portable generator can not only be useful when camping or off-grid, but it can be vital and even life-saving in an emergency. While theoretically, you want as big a generator as possible, you also want one that’s actually portable, so get a model suited to your needs rather than the largest you can find. Bigger isn’t always better, especially when it comes to mobility. Try to strike the balance between the two appropriate to your circumstances. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable generators in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best rechargeable flashlights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-rechargeable-flashlights/ Mon, 06 Nov 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586163
Four of the best rechargeable flashlights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Light up your life without using disposable batteries.

The post The best rechargeable flashlights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best rechargeable flashlights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The black OLIGHT S2R II rechargeable flashlight is placed against a white background. OLIGHT S2R II
SEE IT

The S2R II is a bright light with up to 60 hours of runtime.
Best budget The RECHOO S3000L Flashlight and its box, battery, and charger placed against a white background. RECHOO S3000L Flashlight
SEE IT

This rechargeable flashlight won’t break the bank.
Best watch A tan and soft gold Garmin epix Pro Sapphire is place in front of a white background with a gray gradient. Garmin epix Pro (Gen 2)
SEE IT

This smartwatch offers a 200 lumen dimmable flashlight right on your wrist.

Rechargeable flashlights are extremely useful tools to keep on hand and are a great way to reduce your impact on the environment. Plus, you won’t need to make sure you have the right type of batteries on hand, saving space in your drawers. Many are even more powerful than battery-powered options. Like all flashlights, rechargeable ones come in all shapes and sizes suitable for different situations. If you’re looking to illuminate your life, the best rechargeable flashlights will be there to lend a hand. 

How we chose the best rechargeable flashlights

When selecting the best rechargeable flashlights included in this guide, we evaluated numerous brands and models to choose the best for a variety of situations. Brightness and battery life were two of the most important aspects of the lights we looked at, as a dim flashlight that doesn’t last very long isn’t useful to anyone. We also considered ease of charging, size, waterproofing, and durability. Finally, some flashlights offer extra features that set them apart, such as the ability to charge other devices, magnetic parts, clips, and different lighting modes. We made our decisions based on a mix of hands-on testing, editorial reviews, and user feedback. 

The best rechargeable flashlights of 2023: Reviews & Recommendations

For many people, your smartphone is the only rechargeable flashlight you might think you need. But you should probably conserve phone battery if you’re in the kind of situation where you really need to use a flashlight (and you don’t want to drop that expensive phone trying to fish it out of your pocket in the dark, cracking the screen). So dedicated rechargeable flashlights are ideal for a range of needs, from filling out emergency kits, adding light on camping trips, or illuminating your car while tinkering away. The options below are sure to add light to any situation. 

Best overall: OLIGHT S2R II

The black OLIGHT S2R II rechargeable flashlight is placed against a white background.

OLIGHT

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 1,150 Lumens
  • Charging method: Proprietary magnetic charger
  • Max run time: 60 hours
  • Weight: 3.4 ounces
  • Dimensions: ‎0.91 x 0.91 x 3.94 inches

Pros

  • Features a magnetic base and clip
  • Six lighting modes
  • Provides a max throw of 443 feet
  • IPX8 rated and drop tested to 4.9 feet

Cons

  • Controls aren’t intuitive
  • Pricey

The OLIGHT S2R II earns our top spot thanks to its superb brightness, long battery life, and rugged design. It offers up to 1,150 lumens with 4,600 candelas and a maximum throw of 443 feet. It’s an intensely bright light, and because of that, the brightest setting is best used exclusively outdoors. Luckily, you can select between turbo (the brightest setting), moonlight, and strobe mode for more control over your light. 

One feature that makes the S2R II stand out is the battery indicator. Not many rechargeable flashlights offer that. Green, yellow, and red lights tell you how much charge is left in the battery, so you aren’t guessing before heading out into the night. The light charges with the included MCC 1A charger, a magnetic charging system that snaps onto the end of the flashlight. 

The S2R II offers six different lighting modes, including turbo, moonlight, and strobe. The dimmest setting provides a run time of 60 days, while the brightest will last for just under four hours. It’s made of a textured aluminum alloy so that it won’t slip out of your hand. And if it does happen to fall, it’s drop-tested to 4.9 feet. It also features an IPX8 rating, so it will survive even if it falls in a puddle. 

Best budget: RECHOO S3000L Flashlight

The RECHOO S3000L Flashlight and its box, battery, and charger placed against a white background.

RECHOO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 1,500 Lumens
  • Charging method: USB-C
  • Max run time: 10 hours
  • Weight: 5.6 ounces
  • Dimensions: 5.45 x 1.05 x 5.45 inches

Pros

  • Charges via USB-C
  • IP65 rated
  • 5 lighting modes including a SOS mode
  • Affordable
  • Telescoping head to adjust the beam

Cons

  • Battery life isn’t as good as others

Most rechargeable flashlights are relatively expensive, but the RECHOO S3000L offers a more affordable alternative. Despite its $15 price, it still has plenty to offer, making it a worthy choice for emergency kits or daily use. It provides up to 1,500 lumens, which is plenty of brightness for most situations. Unfortunately, RECHOO doesn’t provide a max throw or candela, but it does feature a telescoping design that allows you to adjust the beam width depending on what you need. 

The S3000L offers five different lighting modes, which include three brightness levels and a one-click emergency mode. It is made of military-grade aluminum alloy and is built to be highly durable, with an IP65 rating. A clip on the side allows you to keep it secure in a pocket, and the textured metal keeps it from slipping from your hand.

One thing we really like about this light, besides its price, is that it charges via USB-C, which is what most devices use these days. That means you’ll likely always have one on hand. Unfortunately, you’ll be charging it more than other options. On the dimmest setting, it only offers around 10 hours of battery life, which is lower than other options on our list. But the price is hard to beat. 

Best compact: Goal Zero Lighthouse Micro Flash

The Goal Zero Lighthouse Micro Flash flashlight is placed against a white background.

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 120 Lumens in flashlight mode, 150 as a lantern
  • Charging method: USB
  • Max run time: Up to 7 days
  • Weight: 2.4 ounces
  • Dimensions: 3.66 x 1.5 inches

Pros

  • Functions as a flashlight or lantern
  • IPX6 rated
  • Very compact and lightweight
  • Built-in battery indicator 

Cons

  • Not very bright

If weight and size are key considerations for you, perhaps because you’re looking for a rechargeable flashlight for backpacking, the Goal Zero Lighthouse Micro Flash is the best option. It weighs just 2.4 ounces and is only 3.66 inches long, so it won’t take up hardly any space in your pack. It’s also IPX6-rated and built to last. 

One unique feature of this Goal Zero light is that it can work as a lantern or flashlight. A ring at the top allows you to hang it from your tent or backpack when you want broad, filling light. In lantern mode, it offers up to 150 lumens. You’ll get up to 120 lumens when using it as a flashlight. There are plenty of different modes to adjust the brightness as well.

Depending on what brightness setting you use, you’ll get anywhere from 7 to 170 hours of runtime. It charges via USB and can be fully charged within 3.5 hours. Should you need more battery life when in the backcountry, you can pick up the Nomad 5 solar panel, which will provide the same charge time as plugging into the wall if you have enough sun (and Goal Zero makes some of our favorite solar generators, so you can trust it works). Should you want a similar light that can also charge other devices, the Lighthouse Micro Charge offers the same light features but with the additional feature of serving as a battery pack.

Best watch: Garmin epix Pro (Gen 2) Smartwatch

A Garmin epix 2 Pro is worn on a wrist, with its flashlight shining.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: 200 Lumens
  • Charging method: Proprietary charger
  • Max run time: Up to 16 days
  • Weight: 2.22 ounces (42mm version)
  • Dimensions: 1.65 x 1.65 x 0.56 inches (42mm version)

Pros

  • Available in three sizes and three colors
  • Excellent battery life
  • Bright, colorful display
  • Battery life offers variable intensity, a strobe mode, and red safety light
  • Lots of performance and health tools

Cons

  • Expensive

It may seem odd to include a watch in a list of the best rechargeable flashlights. But this Garmin smartwatch features a built-in LED flashlight that is extremely useful. The light is built into the bezel of the watch on the top end so that it naturally points in a useful direction without needing to contort your wrist awkwardly. A quick double tap of a button turns it on, and you can select between four different intensity levels, a red mode, and a strobe function. 

I find myself using the flashlight on my epix Pro on a nearly daily basis. It’s perfect for early morning walks in the dark with my dog or trying to find things in the back of dark cabinets. At 200 lumens, it is surprisingly bright for how little it is, easily illuminating what I need. 

Beyond the flashlight, the epix Pro is an incredibly capable fitness watch. It features a long list of sensors to track and calculate a variety of health and performance metrics, including heart rate, sleep, VO2 max, and much more. It can even act as an ECG to detect irregular heart rhythms. The built-in adaptive training tools can help you keep your fitness progressing. You’ll have access to detailed maps with topographic information, weather overlays, and plenty of navigation tools. And it’s built to military standards for thermal, shock, and water resistance. If you want a flashlight that is so much more and can keep your hands free, the Garmin epix Pro is hard to ignore. 

Best headlamp: BioLite HeadLamp 325

A blue BioLite HeadLamp 325 rests on a white deck railing.

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Lumens: ‎325 Lumen
  • Candela: Not provided
  • Charging method: microUSB
  • Max run time: ‎40 hours
  • Weight: 1.7 ounces
  • Dimensions: ‎2.05 x 1.97 x 8.27 inches

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Sits flat and is stable on the head
  • Charges via microUSB
  • Material is moisture-wicking

Cons

  • Hard to open the charger

If bulky, heavy headlamps make night hikes a headache, consider the BioLite HeadLamp 325, a lightweight light in the dark. It only weighs 1.7 ounces, and it doesn’t bounce around while running or doing a cartwheel. The headlamp charges via microUSB—an incredibly common charger you most likely already have around the house. A rear reflective strip alerts those behind you that you’re there, and an articulating front bezel allows you to angle the light where you need it with just one hand. 

We recently took it on a trip to Arizona and were pleased with how its moisture-wicking fabric kept our forehead comfortable during nighttime jaunts to the bathroom or campfire. Plus, it laid flat to our heads—something we can’t say with other headlamps we’ve tried.

We named its beefier cousin, the BioLite HeadLamp 800 Pro, as the best headlamp for hiking. If you’re more of a casual wanderer or just need something to illuminate the way to take out the trash, the HeadLamp 325 packs a powerful, portable punch.

Things to consider when buying rechargeable flashlights

Rechargeable flashlights aren’t typically fancy pieces of equipment with endless options in regard to features. But different situations may call for a different type of light than others. Below are some of the most important things to look out for when choosing a rechargeable flashlight. 

Lumens & candela

A flashlight doesn’t do much good if it doesn’t illuminate well. But you don’t always need the face of the sun in your hand, either. There are a few different factors that impact how bright a flashlight appears: Lumens and candela. 

Lumens is likely a familiar term to most. The number of lumens a rechargeable flashlight has tells you the amount of light it produces. Broadly speaking, the more lumens, the brighter the light. However, this measurement is taken at the very front of the light source, so it doesn’t give you any indication of how far it shines or how wide of an area it covers. 

That’s where candelas come in. Candela refers to how focused and intense the light from a flashlight is. Candela measurements get a bit complicated, but put simply, a large candela number means the beam will be more focused, which is ideal for when you need to illuminate things in the distance. A low candela number refers to a broad beam of light, which is better for when you need light up close. 

Not many companies list candelas, but they may provide a beam distance measurement instead.

Size & weight

Rechargeable flashlights come in a range of shapes and sizes and thus weights. What you need a flashlight for will determine what size is best. For example, a large, heavy flashlight is fine for in your home in case the power goes out. But you won’t want to take that backpacking with you or hold it while working on your car. Size is more important for certain applications than others, but be sure to check the weight and dimensions prior to hitting that buy button. 

Light modes

Some rechargeable flashlights will offer various light modes and even different intensity levels. Dimming adds to the versatility of a torch since you’ll be able to adjust the brightness depending on the conditions. If you will be using your light when camping, in an emergency kit, or in similar situations, a strobe light or SOS setting may be valuable to have. If that’s the case, look closely at what light modes are available in the models you are considering. 

Battery life & charging

As with any electronic device, rechargeable flashlights will offer various levels of battery life. If you need a flashlight for emergency situations or when roughing it in the outdoors, long battery life is incredibly important. However, if you have access to a charger and know you’ll only need the light for short periods, a short battery life may be okay. 

Also worth considering is how you’ll charge your light. Some feature built-in USB ports that are easy to access. Others use rechargeable batteries that you will have to take out and charge with an adapter. Which is best is largely a matter of preference, though charging via a port is typically more convenient.

Additional features

Beyond the basics listed above, there are a handful of additional things to look out for when choosing a rechargeable flashlight. Waterproofing or IPX ratings may be essential if you need to use the light on a boat or in a hurricane preparedness box. A clip, magnet, or strap could be crucial if you are trying to use it hands-free. Some lights can also act as a battery for other devices, which is ideal for camping or emergency situations. 

FAQs

Q: How many lumens is enough for a flashlight?

Each situation will differ in terms of how many lumens are necessary. A light with 1,500 lumens will be way too much for use in a small interior space, while 100 lumens won’t be nearly enough to illuminate a forest. Broadly speaking, 200 lumens is ideal for small, compact lights. If you need more brightness, look for something with at least 1,000 lumens or more. 

Q: Can you use rechargeable batteries in flashlights?

Yes, you can use rechargeable batteries in flashlights. In fact, that can be a great way to turn the flashlight you likely already have into a rechargeable flashlight without purchasing an entirely new light. 

Q: How much do rechargeable flashlights cost?

The price of rechargeable flashlights depends on the light’s brightness, size, battery life, and any additional features it may offer. You can find lights as cheap as $15 or up to $150, depending on what you need. 

Final thoughts on the best rechargeable flashlights

Rechargeable flashlights are becoming more and more common, with options constantly expanding. What flashlight is best for you depends on how you intend to use it and your specific needs. Paying attention to a light’s brightness, throw distance, durability, battery life, and charging options will help you choose an option that best illuminates your life.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best rechargeable flashlights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best coolers with wheels in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coolers-with-wheels/ Fri, 03 Nov 2023 17:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585616
Four of the best coolers with wheels sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Keep your food and beverages from getting warm and your back from getting sore with these impressive wheeled coolers.

The post The best coolers with wheels in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best coolers with wheels sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A navy Yeti Tundra Haul wheeled cooler is placed against a white background. YETI Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler
SEE IT

The YETI Tundra Haul offers more features than we can list, including the ability to keep hot items hot.
Best compact A glacier blue RovR RollR 45 Wheeled Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. RovR RollR 45 Wheeled Cooler
SEE IT

Good things come in small packages with this sporty-looking space-saving wheeled cooler.
Best budget A blue Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler
SEE IT

You can’t beat this price for a wheeled cooler that can hold the equivalent of 42 cans.

Whether you’re entertaining at home, traveling, camping, or tailgating, a cooler with wheels is a game-changer. Having temperature-controlled beverages (and food) on hand can be the difference between joy and sadness. But lugging around a heavy cooler, that’s just pure misery. You want to work up a thirst from whatever fun activity you’re undertaking, not from roping in some poor friend or family member to carry the heavy cooler with you. The best coolers with wheels allow you to be self-sufficient without compromising quality.

How we chose the best coolers with wheels

As a freelance journalist for over 10 years, I’ve reviewed home and tech products for publications including Forbes, CNN Underscored, NBC News Select, Popular Mechanics, Architectural Digest, Tom’s Guide, The Daily Beast, USA Today’s Reviewed, TechRadar, Better Homes & Gardens, Bob Vila, and, of course, PopSci. My recommendations for the best-wheeled coolers are based on a mix of hands-on testing and research. I weighed the quality of build, size, features, and price.

The best coolers with wheels: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether your old cooler wore out, you need a larger or more advanced model with wheels, or you’re looking for your very first wheeled cooler, we’ve got you covered. One of these wheeled coolers will make it easier to entertain at home, tailgate, go camping, or bring beverages to the team.

Best overall: YETI Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler   

A navy Yeti Tundra Haul wheeled cooler is placed against a white background.

Yeti

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 28.25 x 18.62 x 19.5 inches
  • Weight: 23 pounds
  • Capacity: 82 cans or 64 pounds of ice

Pros

  • Puncture-resistant wheels
  • Includes dry goods basket
  • Keeps hot items hot
  • Bearproof design
  • Compatible with dry ice
  • Various colors to choose from

Cons

  • Expensive

YETI is well-known for its drinkware, coolers, and more. In fact, the YETI Hopper Flip 18 tops our list of the best cooler bags, and the YETI Gallon Jug is our best overall choice for best gallon water bottles. The company has been building coolers since 2006, but the Tundra Haul Wheeled Cooler was its first cooler with wheels—and it was worth the wait.

The YETI Tundra Wheeled Cooler features two inches of insulation combined with pressure-injected polyurethane, an interlock lid system, and a freezer-quality gasket. These components lock in cold temperatures and keep heat out. Unless you’re packing hot items, in which case the cooler works in reverse to keep the heat in. The wheeled cooler can also be used with dry ice (frozen carbon dioxide that provides more cooling power than regular ice).

The wheels are virtually indestructible, so the cooler can easily withstand rocks, gravel, and even splintered marine docks. The wheels can also handle sand, but it may be difficult to roll over such soft terrain. Also, the handle is made of welded aluminum and offers grips that are comfortable to handle.

The vortex drain system makes it easy to drain water from the cooler, and the bearproof design keeps your goods (if not you) safe from hungry carnivorous mammals. And the color choices are plentiful, including navy, canopy green, charcoal, cosmic lilac, camp green, Nordic purple, rescue red, tan, and white.

White Yeti Roadie cooler on wheels with its lid open sitting on a very green lawn in the sunshine.
Brandt Ranj

Need to haul a few dozen fewer cans but still want that legendary YETI build? We’re also big fans of the more recent Roadie line, including the Roadie 60 shown here.

Best compact: RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler 

A blue RovR RollR 45 Wheeled Cooler sits on a driveway.

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 22.5 x 218.9 x 19.3 inches
  • Weight: 39 pounds with land bin, 34 pounds without
  • Capacity: 60 cans or 10 pounds of ice

Pros

  • Sporty, space-saving design
  • 8-day ice retention
  • All-terrain wheels
  • DeepFreeze dry bin
  • Bearproof design
  • Plenty of color choices

Cons

  • Handle is slightly flimsy when fully extended

The sporty-looking RovR Roll R 45 Wheeled Cooler looks like a miniature version of my mid-engine MR2 Spyder—which, admittedly, looks like a miniature version of a full-size vehicle. It also happens to make our list of the best coolers. The 45-quart cooler is the perfect size for my two-seater car and is also ideal when space is either limited or you don’t need a giant cooler. (Note: Rover does make 60-quart and 80-quart wheeled coolers, and in addition to glacier and chili pepper, other color choices include desert, magic hour, midnight, powder, moss, and Gobi.)

The deep freeze-dry bin is deep enough to hold wine bottles upright, or it can also be used to store clean ice for beverages. The wheeled cooler also offers compartments to store various types of items (meat, veggies, etc.) separately—but also below food-safe temperatures recommended by the FDA. The latches are tight enough that it takes a minute to open them, and the drain plug makes it easy to channel the water out. Also, the custom rubber gasket seals the cold air inside, which allows the cooler to provide up to eight days of ice retention. 

In addition, the telescopic handle lets me find the right height for comfortably wheeling the cooler around. When the handle is fully extended, it feels rather flimsy, but at lower heights, it’s fine. The 9-inch all-terrain wheels are puncture-resistant and make the cooler easy to navigate.

There are also a lot of cool RovR Roll R 45 accessories that you can purchase separately and attach to the anchor points, like a prep board, double cup holder, umbrella/rod holder, collapsible bin, and bike trailer kit.

Most durable: ORCA 65 Quart Wheeled Cooler

A blue ORCA 65-Quart Insulated Rolling Cooler sits on the floor in front of some kitchen cabinets.

Terri Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 32 x 20 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 41 pounds
  • Capacity: 54 cans

Pros

  • Durable roto-molded construction
  • Large but lightweight wheels
  • Cargo net
  • Plenty of color choices

Cons

  • Bulky
  • Expensive

ORCA’s 65 Quart Wheeled Cooler is large enough for all of your needs. The generously sized cooler is certainly big. However, the large wheels are lightweight enough to make it relatively easy to transport, and the wheels are designed for any type of terrain. The pull handle is also large enough for up to two people to comfortably pull the cooler—although it can also easily be towed by one person as well.

The 41-pound cooler can hold up to 54 cans, or the equivalent amount in other types of foods and beverages. Its roto-molded construction makes it strong enough to serve as seating, and it’s also rugged enough to stand on.

The cooler can retain ice for eight days, and the molded drain channel drains quickly. In addition, it features a cargo net, which provides additional storage. The padlock fastening hole can accommodate a padlock to keep the cooler’s contents secure. Cooler color choices include blaze orange, charcoal, navy, seafoam, tan, and white.  

Best features: Igloo 70 Quart Premium Trailmate Wheeled Rolling Cooler  

An olive green Igloo Premium Trailmate Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient.

Igloo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 34.59 x 19.7 x 23.61 inches
  • Weight: 34.7 pounds
  • Capacity: 112 cans

Pros

  • Dry storage
  • Umbrella/fishing hook holders
  • Bottle opener
  • Butler tray
  • All-terrain wheels

Cons

  • May be too small for some people

At first glance, it looks like one of NASA’s cadre rovers or something on PopSci’s list of best dual-fuel generators, but the Igloo 70 Quart Premium Trailmate Wheeled Rolling Cooler is, indeed, a cooler. And it’s loaded with features, like a lockable storage compartment that’s water-resistant and can keep a phone, sunglasses, car keys, and other small items dry and secure. Underneath it is a storage pocket that can securely hold sunscreen and other items.

There’s also a food basket inside of the sporty-looking cooler to keep food items dry (such as a sandwich and some fruit). The removable butler tray can be mounted on the handle and has two built-in cup holders to hold cans or bottles, as well as space for other items. When not in use, the tray can be stored underneath the cooler’s lid. There are four self-draining cup holders, in addition to a bottle opener, and two accessory slots to hold umbrellas or fishing rods.

The oversized (10-inch) wheels can be used on any terrain, and the telescoping handle can adjust to the most comfortable height. This cooler also has a threaded drain plug that’s compatible with a garden hose for easy cleanup. The tie-down loops can accommodate bungee cords, allowing you to tie down blankets, towels, and chairs. It is available in rugged blue, spruce, carbonite, bone, olive/black, white/black, and gray/black.

Best budget: Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler

A blue Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler is placed against a white background with a gray gradient.

Coleman

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 13.32 x 13.32 x 19.97 inches
  • Weight: 7.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 42 cans

Pros

  • Holds up to 42 cans
  • Lightweight
  • Handles on the side
  • Extra storage

Cons

  • Only two color choices
  • 12-hour insulation limit

When you hear the brand Coleman, you might think grills and camp chairs, maybe lanterns or tents. But, eventually, a childhood memory of one of their coolers will flicker through your mind. The brand has been producing affordable, dependable outdoor accessories a long time, and the Coleman Chiller Series Insulated Soft Cooler is an economical option. And since we like to provide a range of choices, we chose this one because it’s also one of the best soft-sided coolers with wheels. It only weighs 7.2 pounds when empty and can hold up to 42 cans—or the equivalent. The exterior is eco-friendly and made from recycled polyester fibers. It looks like a piece of carry-on luggage—except it’s insulated.

The cooler uses TempLock insulation, which is designed to keep drinks cold for 12 or more hours. That is far short of the almost-week-long timeframe of many hard coolers. However, we realize that some people may find hard coolers too heavy to lift and even navigate with wheels. This Coleman soft cooler offers a telescoping handle that easily adjusts, and there are also handles on either side for easier lifting. It sits upright, and the wheels are on the back, so the cooler is gently tilted backward to use the wheels. There’s also plenty of additional storage with the zippered front compartment and the inside mesh pockets. It’s leakproof, and the hard plastic liner is removable to clean. The color choices include deep ocean and black.  

What to consider when buying the best coolers with wheels 

Use

How you plan on using the cooler is an important factor to consider. For example, if you’re just rolling it around your patio or backyard, your needs will differ from someone pulling the cooler up a steep, rocky hill. Likewise, if you just want to keep your cans and bottles cold for a few hours, your needs will be different than if you need to keep items at the desired temperature for several days.

All wheeled coolers have handles. However, when transporting the crate long distances, a telescopic handle can allow you to find the most convenient height. 

Weight

Wheels make coolers significantly easier to transport. However, keep in mind that after you load ice, cans, and bottles, the cooler will be significantly heavier, even when wheeling it around. Also, unless you’re only using it in your backyard, you may need to lift and lower the wheeled cooler to get it in and out of your vehicle, so keep this in mind as well.   

Capacity

Some wheeled coolers can hold the equivalent of 40 cans, while others can hold the equivalent of over 100 cans. So always note the capacity limit when choosing the right option for your needs.

Other features

All of the hard coolers on our list have seal-tight gaskets, excellent insulation, and tight latches, so we didn’t feel the need to highlight this every time. However, some wheeled coolers have other built-in features, such as butler trays, bottle holders, and bottle openers, as well as exterior storage. These features may be built-in, or they may be accessories that you can purchase separately.

In addition, some coolers can accommodate dry ice, which can keep food and drinks colder/frozen for a longer time frame than regular ice.

FAQs

Q: How long can a wheeled cooler keep the contents cold?

How long a wheeled cooler can keep content cold varies depending on the cooler. However, many wheeled coolers promise a seven to 10-day ice retention rate.

There are some steps that you can take to help the wheeled cooler work at maximum efficiency. For example, before you plan to use it, RovR recommends bringing the cooler inside of the house (assuming you normally store it in the garage or outdoors) and leaving the lid open. YETI suggests pre-chilling your cooler by loading it with ice a few hours prior to loading it up. How you pack your cooler also makes a difference, so you may want to study up on that if you need your ice to last as long as possible.

Q: How can I stop the wheeled cooler from developing bad smells?

Be sure to clean your cooler immediately after use. Usually, soap and warm water are sufficient. For heavy-duty cleaning, instructions may vary by manufacturer. For example, YETI recommends a 6:1 solution and warm water and bleach, used with a sponge or mildly abrasive rag.

Q: Do wheeled coolers really keep bears out?

Some wheeled coolers (like YETI and RovR), when used with manufacturer-recommended locks, are approved by the Interagency Grizzly Bear Committee as a bearproof design.

Final thoughts on the best coolers with wheels

Don’t get us wrong; we love our insulated water bottles. But sometimes you need drinks to share, not to mention meals to cook. The best cooler with wheels will make it a lot easier to transport ice and beverages from one location to the next. Some coolers even provide separate compartments for food, storage spaces for umbrellas, fishing rods, butler trays, and even a place to store your smartphone and keys. The best option for you depends on usage scenarios and budget, but we’ve narrowed this crowded field down to help you zoom in on the best wheeled cooler for your needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers with wheels in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-winter-tool-deal-early-black-friday-2023/ Wed, 01 Nov 2023 17:09:14 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585242
A Greenworks snow thrower in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

If you've moved past your shovel era, consider entering the age of snow shovels and throwers with this Greenworks tool deal at Amazon.

The post Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Greenworks snow thrower in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sure, you’ve amassed a variety of heated clothing to keep you warm while shoveling snow, but your back is silently screaming at you to stop being a cheap masochist and buy yourself something beefier. Thankfully, you can do just that while staying true to your thrifty nature with 15 percent off Greenworks tools for winter and beyond.

Greenworks 80V 20″ Brushless Snow Thrower, 5.0Ah Battery $314 (Was $499.99)

A Greenworks 80V snow thrower on a plain background

Greenworks

SEE IT

Greenworks makes some of our favorite snow blowers, and this one is no exception. Compared to its wired cousin, the 13 Amp 20-Inch Corded Snow Blower, an 80V battery provide more efficiency and better performance. A 12-inch clearing depth and 20-inch clearing width help you clear your driveway or sidewalk in no time; a brushless motor helps you do so without waking up the entire neighborhood. And, a 180-degree rotating chute helps you displace the snow where you want it.

If you really can’t let go of that shovel, consider meeting in the middle with the Greenworks 80V 12″ Brushless Snow Shovel. A 25-foot throwing distance means you won’t have to recover with a heating pad on your shoulders afterward.

Grab these winter tools before the sale ends—and before everyone else gets the good idea to save their back this year.

Here are more Greenworks tool deals if you’re looking for something for right now:

The post Save on Greenworks snow blowers and winter tools before Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best ice skates of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-ice-skates/ Thu, 04 Mar 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-ice-skates/
A lineup of the best ice skates on a white background
Amanda Reed

Anyway you slice it, skates make all the difference, so we've carved through the options for you.

The post The best ice skates of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best ice skates on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of white American Athletic Ice Skates on a blue and white gradient background American Athletic Ice Skates
SEE IT

These leather skates are comfortable, provide plenty of ankle support, and are available for men and women.
Best for ice hockey CCM Super Tacks 9360 CCM Super Tacks 9360 Senior Ice Hockey Skates
SEE IT

With an ergonomic fit and stiffness to protect your ankles and feet, these CCM skates are ideal for the next hockey match.
Best for kids Lake Placid Nitro 8.8 Lake Placid Boys Nitro 8.8 Adjustable Ice Skates
SEE IT

These adjustable skates are ideal for young ones new to the ice.

Finding the best ice skates is similar to shopping for any kind of specialized sports equipment. You have to know your intended use: Are you a speed skater, a figure skater, a hockey player, or just a recreational skater? You also have to understand how skates fit. It’s not the same as shopping for a pair of sneakers or work boots, so it’s important to grasp the intricacies of skate design and intention because it could mean the difference between a smooth trip around the rink and a painful round of crippling foot torture. The best ice skates are comfortable, provide great ankle support, and make ice skating as smooth as … ice.

How we chose the best ice skates

Evidence suggests that the notion of ice skates skimming across frozen ponds or lakes first occurred to the people of Finland more than 4,000 years ago. Since then, ice skating has evolved from a practical means of traversing icy terrain to a leisurely pastime to a professional sport (and the foundation of yet another professional sport). As the activity itself has changed and matured, so have the skates themselves. From rickety old strap-on blades to state-of-the-art high-performance skates, the range of options fits, and purposes are pretty vast. No matter what you intend to do once you’re on the ice, there is a skate to suit your needs.

We’ve previously covered the best rollerblades, and they both pack plenty of similarities. In fact, picking up a pair of rollerblades can help you become a better ice skater. There are differences between inline skating vs. ice skating, but they’re subtle. Getting a proper pair of ice skates that fit correctly is important for safety—no one wants a broken ankle on the ice. To find the best ice skates, we looked at peer suggestions, critical reviews, real-world user recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research into everything from minor material details to overall impressions. You only deserve the best when fulfilling your Miracle on Ice or Ice Princess dreams.

The best ice skates: Reviews & Recommendations

The best ice skates have major support and comfort, without needing anything high-end or performance-driven. A simple pair of skates without bells and whistles—so long as they’re well-constructed—will get you out on the ice in no time. Here are the best ice skates we’ve found, whether you’re a newcomer or a seasoned rink rat.

Best overall: American Athletic Ice Skates

A pair of white American Athletic Ice Skates on a blue and white gradient background

American Athletic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A comfortable skate with lots of ankle support and padding for peak performance.

Specs

  • Material: Leather
  • Skill level: Instructional; higher-level recreational
  • Blade: Hollow ground nickel-plated steel blade
  • Lining: Leather

Pros

  • Good for multiple skill levels
  • Professional-style boot
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Runs large

If you’re just getting into skating, or you’re at the frozen pond more than usual, these skates are for you. They have some important features to look for: they’re comfortable, include multi-layered ankle support, and full-quarter padding for comfort. You’ll look like a legit member of the U.S. Skating Team thanks to the professional-style boot. A form-fitting padded tongue prevents injury and makes your feet feel cozy and snug. These skates are also available in men’s sizing.

Best for figure skating: Jackson Ultima Excel Women’s Figure Skate

Jackson Ultima Excel Women’s Figure Skate

Jackson Ultima

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Land your toe loops in style with these durable skates that have light support—perfect for figure skating lessons.

Specs

  • Material: Vinyl
  • Skill level: Beginner
  • Blade: Ultima Mark II
  • Lining: Fabric

Pros

  • Flex notch for flexibility
  • Quality blade
  • Vinyl is durable and long-lasting

Cons

  • Runs small

With their foam-reinforced liner and sturdy Ultima Mark II blades, the Jackson Ultima skates deliver comfort and performance. Their “Heat Moldable Fit System” ensures that the skates break in quickly and conform to your feet, while the vinyl-coated boot is designed to be durable and long-lasting. They are just what you’re looking for—great-looking skates with high-performance construction.

Best for ice hockey: CCM Super Tacks 9360

CCM Super Tacks 9360

CCM

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The right amount of stiffness combined with mold-to-your-foot comfort equals a pair of durable skates that will take you from practice to scrimmage.

Specs

  • Material: High-level plastic, felt
  • Skill level: Beginner to intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel CCM Speedblade
  • Lining: Brushed microfiber

Pros

  • Durable
  • Long-lasting
  • Perfect amount of stiffness

Cons

  • Size 1.5 sizes lower than regular shoes
  • Blade is non-replaceable

CCM Super Tacks have been a hockey player staple for years, and for good reason. Tough, durable, and designed to mold to your foot, they’re like a good pair of leather boots that only get better over time. Featuring just the right amount of stiffness to provide a solid skating experience, the Tacks also have a strong microfiber liner that can stand up to long-term intense use. An overall great option for hockey players of any level.

Best for kids: Lake Placid Nitro 8.8

Lake Placid Nitro 8.8

Lake Placid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An adjustable skate that grows with your burgeoning NHL star, with closures that are easy enough for them to use.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Skill level: Young beginner
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Adjusts for growing feet
  • Closure is easy for children to use
  • Washable inner liner

Cons

  • Skate guards come loose compared to other children’s skates

The Lake Placid Nitros make for the best ice skates for kids for two key reasons: The adjustable straps make them easy for younger kids to take on and off without having to deal with thick laces, and the molded boots are flexible enough to last for a range of sizes (the Medium, for example, fits shoe sizes 1 to 4). Having a sturdy pair of skates they won’t immediately outgrow is a huge plus (the washable inner liner helps, too).

Best for beginners: Botas Attack 181

Botas Attack 181

Botas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s never too late to start a new hobby—and these beginner-friendly skates make it easy to pick up ice skating.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Skill level: Adult beginner, intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Wide variety of sizes
  • Well-ventilated
  • Durable and reliable

Cons

  • No wide sizes available

As the best ice skates for beginners, the Botas Attack 181 come in a wide variety of sizes, from children to adult, and offer durable, reliable construction for first-timers. A reinforced plastic tip protects toes against impact and the low-profile sole is designed with integrated “Clima Air” ventilation, which makes them breathable and keeps them drier during long-term use. The skates are also lightweight and well-padded for extra comfort.

Best budget: DUWIN Adjustable Ice Skates

A pair of blue and black DUWIN adjustable ice skates against a blue and white background

DUWIN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to break your budget in order to break some moves on the ice.

Specs

  • Material: PVC leather, nylon
  • Skill level: Beginner to intermediate
  • Blade: Stainless steel
  • Lining: Brushed fabric

Pros

  • Extra ankle padding
  • Adjustable
  • Moisture-resistant lining

Cons

  • Not a wide range of men’s sizing

The DUWIN skates have a reinforced outsole that helps with stability, as well as durable stainless steel blades, extra ankle padding, and firm heel support. Lightweight and featuring a moisture-resistant lining, these are the best ice skates at a price that doesn’t require a huge investment. And, they’re adjustable, meaning they can grow with you.

What to consider when buying the best ice skates

Ice skating is one of those activities that seems pretty straightforward but actually reveals itself to have a lot of layers and specificities the more you dig into it. When shopping for the best ice skates, you need to consider things like purpose (Are you figure skating? Playing ice hockey? Just recreationally spinning around the rink?), experience level, and comfort. Here’s a good place to get started.

Are you looking to take up figure skating?

The most important thing to consider when shopping for figure skates is fit. It will mean the difference between how well you maneuver around the ice, and how comfortable you’ll feel doing it. The general rule of thumb is that you should size down one and a half sizes from your shoe size. But since sizing can vary from brand to brand, it’s probably best to measure your foot.

The easiest way to measure your foot in order to find the right size skate is to use a blank piece of paper, a hard surface, and either a soft bit of measuring tape or a string. Place the paper against the wall. Stand on the paper with your heel against the wall, and then make a mark indicating the longest part of your foot. Measure from the end of the paper (where the wall was) to the mark—and this is your length measurement. Use a piece of string or a soft measuring tape to measure the width of your foot by wrapping it around the widest part (the ball of your foot). This will give you your foot’s circumference. Once you know your numbers, finding the right fit is easy.

Are you looking to play some hockey?

The fastest game on ice has changed over the years, but one thing remains consistent: Skating wins games. Whether it’s the speedy center scoring highlight-reel goals, the steady-on-his-feet defenseman shutting down the other team, or the sure-footed goalie making jaw-dropping saves, you need to be comfortable on blades to survive on the ice.

There are basically two things to consider when shopping for ice hockey skates: fit and purpose. Different manufacturers offer different options—from standard to wide fits—but each brand is unique, so don’t assume that if you wear one size in one brand you’ll automatically wear that size in another. A big part of fit is determined by the lacing system, as you want the boot to be as snug as possible. If your foot slips inside the boot, you won’t have good control of your edges. Many skates feature special materials on the tongue, sometimes called a “bite bar,” to lock the laces in place and keep them from loosening. The placement of padding inside the boot also helps achieve a snug fit without creating discomfort. Beyond that, consider if you’re a once-in-a-while rec player or a serious organized team player. This will determine whether or not you can handle a stiffer boot construction or might be in the market for a lighter (and less exhausting) skate.

Are you trying to get your kids into ice skating?

Ice skating can be a great recreational activity for kids, but getting them used to the ice takes a little more than just finding a pair of proper fitting skates. It takes a lot of (sometimes literal) hand-holding, and it helps if you have some comfort on skates yourself. It’s not unlike learning to ride a bike, and similarly, once they get the hang of it, it’s a skill they’ll have for life.

In addition to a good pair of skates, kids should hit the ice with some kind of head protection (a full hockey helmet isn’t necessary, you can also use a bike helmet) and clothes that offer warmth, extra padding, and resistance to wetness. Consider busting out the snow pants. And don’t think that, as a parent, you can hop out on the ice in sneakers and guide your child around the rink. There’s a reason why some skating comfort is important—sneakers or shoes on the ice will make you more of a liability than a help.

Are you a first-time ice skater yourself?

As we mentioned in reference to kids’ skates, it’s really difficult to teach the little ones if you can’t skate yourself. So if you’re looking to add ice skating to your list of skills, there are easy and comfortable options available. It’s not even all that necessary to specialize when looking for a first pair—you just want to have something that provides adequate support (especially around the ankles) and some durability.

Even if you have no intention of putting a stick in your hands, hockey skates are a good option for newcomers because they tend to be constructed a bit wider than figure skates, which gives you more of a sturdy feel on your feet. The blades are slightly thicker, too, which gives you a bit more surface area and can help with balance. They are also designed to accommodate more of a “side-to-side” skating motion as opposed to the more “straight and narrow” figure skating style, which most people find more natural.

Budget

You don’t have to break the bank to get started ice skating, but you also have to be wary of going too cheap. All plastic-molded skates, for example, may be available at bargain-basement prices, but you’ll soon understand why when you experience their unforgiving rigidity (and the blisters that result). Cold temperatures and constant pressure also make such skate styles susceptible to cracking and splintering—the last thing you want to happen is to lose a blade in mid-turn.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best ice skates cost?

Depending on the kind of skate you buy and your skill level, the best ice skates can start at $60 and reach $200-$300. However, more professional skates tend to be more expensive.

Q: How should ice skates fit?

Skates should be snug but not uncomfortably tight. When standing in your skates with them fully laced, you want your heel snug in the heel pocket so your toes have a bit of space at the end.

Q: How much are a really good pair of hockey skates?

Hockey skates really run the gamut, but high-end pro-level skates can be close to $600.

Q: How should ice skates fit?

There are, of course, pros and cons to each. A figure skate’s leather boot is tight enough to support the ankle, but pliant enough for the skater to achieve the jumps and contortions figure skating demands (but also has more “give” when you’re just skating).

A hockey skate is lighter weight, which allows players to skate fast and change direction. Hockey skate blades have more curve—or rocker—at both ends, making the skates more maneuverable and easier to turn.

Final thoughts on the best ice skates

Ice skating is both a casual recreational activity and the foundation of very specialized activities and sports, so there are a lot of options out there. In general, the best ice skates will provide ample ankle support, have the ability to mold and “give” around your foot through repeated use, and provide a sense of stability. Comfort level and style is a personal preference, but be sure you invest in something that fits your foot well as most of the issues people tend to run into when it comes to learning to skate is foot pain and discomfort—mostly from ill-fitting skates.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best ice skates of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best propane fire pits of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-propane-fire-pits/ Mon, 30 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584472
The best propane fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A propane fire pit provides familiar comforting flames with no mess or struggle with starting.

The post The best propane fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best propane fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit on a plain background with flames Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit
SEE IT

This sturdy table provides a solid addition to pretty much any an outdoor living space.
Best portable Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire on a plain background with fire Bond Manufacturing Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit
SEE IT

This barebones burner provides ample flame from a surprisingly light and compact body.
Best for camping UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit on a plain backround with no fire UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit
SEE IT

It’s relatively easy to move around, but its durable construction makes it great for adventures.

Nothing fights the short days and cold nights better than a toasty blaze from a propane fire pit. These convenient devices can provide warmth, brighten up the ambiance of a backyard patio, or act as a gathering point for crisp end-of-the-year outdoor get-togethers. Propane fire pits require less labor than traditional fire pits. There’s no wood to gather, no kindling to light, no real need to worry about tending to the fire. Simply hook up a gas tank, ignite the fire while it’s low, and set the intensity to your preferred level. You don’t get that wood smell, which can be lovely, but you also don’t have the level of clean-up required with an ash pan or half-burned wood. Propane is the way to go if you want to turn a fire off and on rather than tend to it. Whatever your needs—ambiance or heat—if you have the desire, let propane light your fire. These are the best propane fire pits of 2023.

How we chose the best propane fire pits

We compared spec, prices, reviews, and customer satisfaction for dozens of models of propane fire pits, weighing different use scenarios against one another. Sizes, shapes, and intended area for installation were weighed against versatility, efficiency, and ease of use. Additional safety features or unique capabilities were considered strong bonuses. Eventually, we correlated all of our favorite models into different categories, with special attention paid to our favorite overall model, as well as those that give a lot of bang for the buck (best value) and the cheapest model we can recommend (best budget).

While some of these propane fire pits are better-loved than others, your aesthetic preferences, the space in which you plan to use the fire pit, and the specific situations in which you want to use your fire pit should help you decide which of our recommendations best fits your needs. If you’re looking for wood-burning fire pits, we also have you covered. We’ve done extensive research on the best smokeless fire pits, the best portable fire pits, and the best outdoor fire pits, which together include wood-burning and gas options.

The best propane fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Before you can warm up your hands over a nice toasty fire, you need to pick the right model for your space an your lifestyle. Be sure to check out all of the options before deciding which one is worth your money. While most of these models are intended to be placed on outdoor patios, some are portable and can be taken beachside or on a camping trip—though not a nature trek. Most of them are designed to be more for ambiance and light than pure heat, but do watch out for the maximum BTUs (British Thermal Units) of each model. BTUs are a measurement of heat, so if you’re looking for a fire pit that will bring the warmth you expect, look for the highest numbers. Just make sure you keep an extra propane canister in the storage shed or outdoor storage box.

Best overall: Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit

Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit on a plain background with flames

Bali Outdoors

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 78.5 pounds
  • Height: 24 inches
  • Material: Alloy Steel, Stainless Steel, Ceramic
  • Structure: Table
  • Maximum BTUs: 60,000

Pros

  • Attractive, understated design
  • Table style adds more useability
  • Multiple shapes and sizes available
  • Good-looking rectangular flame zone
  • Competitive price

Cons

  • Build quality of table frame is not quite as study as more expensive models
  • Ignition isn’t always consistent
  • Takes upwards of an hour or two to assemble

Bali Outdoors offers a wide variety of propane fire pit shapes and sizes, all offering some of the same features: most hide the propane tank within the body of the fire pit, creating a more attractive patio piece. Some feature table tops around the flame source and covers, meaning they are functional pieces even when they are not lit. And the price of these items is extremely competitive, not far above budget and small portable fire pits.

While the whole line of Bali Outdoors fire pits is good, we most strongly recommend the 24”x24”x48” 60,000 BTU fire pit table. The blue glass fire rocks are very attractive, assembly is relatively simple, and the table looks as fashionable as options three times its price. The downside is that the steel of the table itself is a bit lighter and less sturdy than more expensive fire pits. It may be in your best interest to tie the table down to move it to a safe location in the event of a big storm to avoid damage.

However, there aren’t many more attractive, effective, and inexpensive options that will make you happier to sit and bask in the glow of the flames than the Bali Outdoors line. Our recommended table is perfect in front of an outdoor couch or a pair of chairs. Keep in mind that the glass flame guard you may see in some pictures is an optional (but recommended, for aesthetics more than anything) accessory. Scoring high in quality of flame, aesthetics, ease of use, and value, the Bali Outdoors Propane Fire Pit line, especially the 24” x 24” x 48” table, is our best overall propane fire pit.

Best portable: Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit

Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire on a plain background with fire

Bond Manufacturing

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 18 pounds
  • Height: 14.65 inches
  • Material: Stainless steel / metal
  • Structure: Non-collapsible, locking lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 54,000

Pros

  • Quick, easy set-up
  • Locking lid acts as a carrying handle
  • Very light for a propane fire pit
  • No assembly required
  • Auto-ignition feature works well

Cons

  • Separate propane tank adds weight as space
  • Somewhat awkward shape to fit amongst a lot of luggage
  • Small fire compared to non-portable

For some of us, propane is so wonderful that we want it every which way. Heck, we may even want to grill with it. But we certainly want it on the go if we have a smaller, lighter fire pit that can be considered portable. That’s where the Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit comes in. The gas burns clean, and stones are used for both aesthetics and to help contain the flames. You can get a consistent 50,000 BTUs, with a maximum of 54,000. The set-up is really easy on the Aurora, as the all-in-one-piece pit has a locking lid that makes it easy to carry and keep its lava rocks contained. Your propane tank will likely be the more awkward and heavy item to join you at the beach or campsite.

However, that 20-pound tank is going to more than double your load, making this portable fire pit a bit less portable. Of course, if the portability is just setting up at different spots in and around your yard, it’s not that big a deal. But you certainly can’t go trekking with this fire pit, and if you want to go camping or to the beach, you’d best have a van or flatbed truck to help you haul it.

However, the price and quality of this unit, among those that could be deemed portable, is second to none. In fact, the small size and utilitarian (rather than aesthetic) design are the only things that keep the Aurora from being a contender for best overall. Instead, it’s the best portable propane fire pit of 2023.

Best for camping: UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit

UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit on a plain backround with no fire

UKIAH

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 22.6 pounds
  • Height: 17.52 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Non-collapsible, magnetic lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 48,000

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Magnetic lid is useful and convenient
  • Flame is easy to control
  • Boxy shape packs extremely well into a car

Cons

  • Low BTU output
  • Industrial aesthetic is not for everyone

Another portable propane fire pit, the UKIAH Tailgator X Portable Gas Fire Pit is built for camping. The design is the first clue; when the magnetic lid is on, the Tailgator becomes a solid cube that is far, far easier to pack in a trunk, truck flatbed, or behind the back seats of an SUV than any other propane fire pit we found. While your 20-pound propane tank may be a bit more unwieldy, the Tailgator, with its built-in handles and sturdy but not overwhelming 22.6-pound weight, is a breeze to pop into and out of a vehicle. It’s also a very durable design, built to withstand some battering from wind, keep dirt and debris out of the rock area, and its steel alloy frame is easy to clean with a cloth (later, of course, when it’s unplugged from propane and cool).

The trade-off is a weaker flame than other models. The Tailgator only produces 48,000 BTUs, on the lower end of propane fire pits, so you may need to huddle a little closer to it than other, stronger models. This does result in less fuel use over time, however. Another possible drawback is that the boxy metal design is very “built Ford tough,” almost military in its look, which may not fit the cozy and/or natural vibe you’re looking for from a fire. Other more traditional designs may fit your decor better when used on the patio or backyard than the Tailgator.

If you can look past the weaker heat and the industrial design, the Tailgator offers a lot to love, especially if you’re going to be taking it somewhere in the back of your vehicle. It also can take a beating from the elements. For these reasons, it’s the best propane gas pit for camping.

Best modern: COSIEST Outdoor Propane Fire Pit Table 

COSIEST Outdoor Propane Fire Pit Table in a living room with a peach couch

COSIEST

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 50 pounds
  • Height: 11.8 inches
  • Material: Faux stone
  • Structure: Round base
  • Maximum BTUs: 40,000

Pros

  • Very aesthetically pleasing
  • Other options with similarly eye-catching designs
  • Easy to move (though heavy)
  • Good customer service reputation
  • 5

Cons

  • Propane tank cover table sold separately
  • Low heat output
  • Low profile needs similarly low-set seating

For a lot of people, the look of a fire pit is more important than the heat. It’s supposed to fit the design of an outdoor space, give a certain feeling when viewed, and generally add a touch of class to a poolside area or deck. That’s what COSIEST offers with its line of fire pits, our favorite of which is a sculpture-like, low-set round design. The off-white faux stone is extremely attractive, and the modern styling of the concentric rings of the table gives it a high-class look that would fit in next to the swimming area of a Hollywood Hills mansion. There are other options too: a more contemporary hexagonal design or more classic rectangular ones.

The main drawback of COSIEST’s fire pits is the need for accessories to really make the whole look work as best it can. A propane tank cannot fit inside the fire pit itself, so you may want to get a table tank cover accessory (though the hose will still be exposed). You also might want to purchase the glass guard for the flames to really make the look pop. The glass not only protects hands and objects from coming in contact with flames but creates an extra twinkling light effect that spreads out and improves ambiance. This is also the kind of fire pit that may look better with fire glass as its fill item rather than lava rocks, so you’ll need to source those separately.

The second drawback is the weaker flame and low profile of the table. This isn’t necessarily a big problem with how you want to use your fire pit. If you’re more about light than heat, the 40,000 BTUs are plenty. However, this fire pit will look strange and small next to furniture with higher-set seats. Make sure you have couches or chairs that dip a bit lower or choose a taller design.

The accessories drive the price up, making the COSIEST line a bit more expensive overall. However, if you care about modern styling more than pure heat power, the COSIEST Outdoor Propane Fire Pit Table is the best modern propane fire pit.

Best steel: Cuisinart COH-600 Chimenea Propane Fire Pit

Cuisinart COH-600 Chimenea Propane Fire Pit with fire inside

Cuisinart

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45.5 pounds
  • Height: 48 inches
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Circular pit with directional hood
  • Maximum BTUs: 40,000

Pros

  • Sturdy and attractive
  • Directional hood allows you to put heat where you want it
  • Easy to assemble
  • Can get 9 hours off a 20-pound propane tank

Cons

  • Low BTU
  • Design may block eye line if placed in the middle of furniture

You may not expect a fire pit from Cuisinart, a brand better known for food processors, but here we are in the modern, diversified business landscape. Not only is there a Cuisinart propane fire pit, but it’s also really good. Solidly and attractively constructed, the Cuisinart Chimenea Propane Fire Pit has a unique design that shields heat except for about 120 degrees of opening, letting you get much more out of the relatively low 40,000 BTUs than you expect (as long as you’re near the opening). While you do have to put it together yourself, the construction is quite easy—as long as you follow the instructions—and you’ll be able to do it quickly. A nice side of the low BTUs is low fuel use compared to stronger fire pits; you can get 9 hours out of a 20-pound tank.

On the negative side, the high height of this pit with the hood (4 feet) means it could easily be in your eye line if you place it amongst furniture. The hood isn’t optional or removable; it’s part of the design, so you have to be sure you want this kind of fire pit before you buy it. If you plan to arrange your patio furniture in a semi-circle around this fire pit, it’s less of an issue.

The Chimenea is not portable. It’s quite heavy and large. Part of that is there’s a compartment to hide your 20-pound propane tank, which increases the overall size but is also a nice feature, so there’s not an unattractive tank lying around. With its few drawbacks and many nice features, the Cuisinart Chimenea Propane Fire Pit is the best steel propane fire pit as long as your space works for its design.

Best value: Camp Chef Ponderosa Fire Pit 

Camp Chef Ponderosa Fire Pit with the lid off to the side

Camp Chef

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 47.5 pounds
  • Height: 15.1 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Circular with lid
  • Maximum BTUs: 64,000

Pros

  • Really strong heat
  • Sturdy construction
  • Technically portable
  • Reliable starter

Cons

  • Heavy for a portable fire pit
  • Profile is quite low for non-camping use

Our best-value propane fire pit dang near took best overall, so its relatively low price makes it a great value. The Camp Chef Ponderosa Fire Pit can pump out a whopping 64,000 BTUs, which means big, heat, great for warming you while camping. The shape and size of the Ponderosa is excellent for portability, even though it’s a bit heavy if you’re going to be taking it to a campsite or the beach regularly. It’s quite a low-rising fire pit, which means on a patio, you’re going to want to pair it with similarly low-rise furniture. The heat, which is wonderful, does tend to burn through fuel quickly.

Perhaps its aesthetic is the Ponderosa’s biggest weakness. It has a very “campfire” vibe to its shape and look, rather than a stylish piece of furniture. If you’re going for a rustic vibe in your backyard, that may be a plus. If you’re looking for something slicker, the value of the Ponderosa might not be worth it, and you may want to go with a table design.

Overall, the Ponderosa is a strong candidate for best overall propane fire pit, but its camping aesthetic and low position makes it a little less—but only a little—ideal than our top model. Its competitive price, however, means it’s the best-value propane fire pit on the market.

Best budget: Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table 

Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table on a plain background

Barton

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 81.57 pounds
  • Height: 25 inches
  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Structure: Table
  • Maximum BTUs: 46,000

Pros

  • Versatile styling that fits with most patios
  • Houses the propane tank within the table
  • Low price

Cons

  • Weaker heat than other tables
  • No cover for heating area to convert into a full table

If you’re in the market for a table-style propane fire pit and are looking to not spend much money, the Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table might be exactly what you’re looking for. It’s a weaker heater than our top table from Bali Outdoors and doesn’t feature as many options, but it’s a great starter model, considering you can usually get it for under $200.

Like most other table models, the Barton Table hides the 20-pound propane tank inside, meaning there’s no unsightly tank to spoil the vibe. Instead of lava rocks, this table uses fire glass, an aesthetic that many prefer. Of course, if you’re more of a lava rocks person, you can buy those separately and replace the glass with them. A wind/fire guard is available separately, but Barton doesn’t seem to offer a cover for the heating element, meaning, unlike the Bali Outdoors model, you can’t convert this fire pit into a regular table when it’s not in use. The Bali also produces 14,000 more BTUs, meaning the heat travels much further, giving you more arrangement options for furniture, but Barton’s 46,000 BTUs do the job for a standard four-sided arrangement.

While the retail price isn’t particularly “budget” award-worthy, this Barton model is almost always on sale, and as of writing was only $170. At that price, it’s a great starter fire pit for a patio or an additional accent fire pit if you’re looking to expand your seating arrangements. The nice look, standard features, and great price make the Barton Propane Outdoor Gas Fire Pit Table the best budget propane fire pit.

What to consider when choosing a propane fire pit

Once you’ve decided that you want to go propane, there are only a few other questions you need to ask yourself before choosing a fire pit. The first is perhaps the most important: Do you want a smaller, portable fire pit, or do you want your fire pit to essentially be a piece of outdoor furniture. If you choose the former, you’ll likely end up with a small, circular, all-flame fire pit. These more resemble camping fire pits aesthetically, even though they are using propane gas instead of wood. If you want a stationary fire pit or fire pit table, you’ll want to consider the aesthetic that your outdoor space features. Rustic? Modern? Casual? There are some fire pits that, for all their benefits, may look out of place with the decor you’ve already chosen. Finally, is your fire pit more for aesthetics, or are you really looking for a strong heat source for warming yourself and your guests up outside? If it’s the latter, really pay attention to the BTU (British Thermal Unit) heat measurement that each fire pit can output. The higher the BTUs, the toastier you’ll feel.

FAQs

Q: How do I make my propane fire pit flame bigger?

It’s going to be all about pressure (which makes the gas shoot out quickly and to higher heights) rather than pure fuel. The hose should be properly placed without any objects on top of it and without loops or sharp turns. I would not recommend trying any aftermarket modifications to your propane fire pit or hose yourself. It’s too easy to create a defect or damage that can result in your fire pit becoming unsafe. If you aren’t getting what you believe to be an adequate flame, contact the manufacturer and see if there’s possibly something wrong with your fire pit or have any modifications installed by a professional. 

Q: How long does a 20-pound propane tank last on a fire pit?

At maximum output, you should get 4 hours of flame from a 20-pound tank. At moderate output, double that. Fire tables are usually designed to run at maximum output.

Q: Should a propane fire pit be high or low pressure?

Propane fire pits should be at a maximum of 11” WC, which means 11 inches of water column. This is the pressure that an 11-inch high column of water would exert. This converts to around 0.5 PSI (pounds per square inch), the method of measuring air pressure in tires. This is a higher pressure than natural gas.

Q: What temperature is a propane fire pit?

The hottest part of the fire can reach 1500 degrees Fahrenheit or around 815 degrees Celsius. The BTUs of a propane fire pit (the heat that the flames radiate) are anywhere from 30,000 to 60,000 depending on the size of the fire pit.

Q: Do propane fire pits use a lot of propane?

Yes. If you don’t keep your flame modest, you can find yourself going through a ton of gas. You may want to keep a spare tank or two on hand at any given time (safely and securely stored, of course).

Q: Are propane fire pits unhealthy?

An outdoor propane fire pit is not inherently unhealthy. Of course, you don’t want to breathe in pure propane gas, that could be fatal. And you never want to use a propane fire pit indoors, as incidental gasses such as carbon monoxide that can do damage or worse could build up without ventilation. But a properly ventilated space (such as an outdoor patio) with a properly-use propane fire pit should pose no health risk.

Q: How much ventilation does a propane fire pit need?

You need at least 20 square inches of ventilation for a propane fire pit. Any commercial propane fire pit will have proper ventilation built-in. Only use your propane fire pit outside.

Q: What size propane tank do I need for a gas fire pit?

The vast majority of propane fire pits are designed to be used with a 20-pound tank.

Q: How many years is a propane tank good for?

An American-made and certified propane tank is considered fine for use up to 12 years after it is made. In Canada, the limit is 10 years. Recertified tanks may be as low as five years. There should be markings on your tank to let you know when it was manufactured or last certified.

Final thoughts on the best propane fire pits

A fire pit can really be the final piece that pulls a backyard together. It gives a patio a focal point, a spot around which family and friends can gather to chat, eat, or relax. And when the sun goes down, the fire produced can give an incredible ambiance that really is unmatched by electrical lighting. Plus, you’ll warm the area in a way that lets you minimize the use of heavier clothing, even on chillier nights. Ghost stories, reminiscing, or telling jokes become enhanced. There’s a certain magic to fire-lit nights and a ton of convenience and control that comes with choosing propane over wood fires. Any of these fire pits can bring that magic home because they are the best propane fire pits available right now.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best propane fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smokeless-fire-pits/ Thu, 10 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561939
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

A smokeless fire pit can provide a safe, simple way to get a blaze going for your next backyard get together or camping trip.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best smokeless fire pits composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
SEE IT

It’s simple to light, easy to store, and eradicates smoke.
Best large Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going at night surrounded by torches and chairs Tiki Fire Pit
SEE IT

Gather up to 10 people around this ample fire pit for superior s’mores.
Best for patios Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside BioLite Fire Pit+
SEE IT

The mesh sides offer a unique view of the flames inside and nice radiant heat.

The term “smokeless fire pit” almost sounds like an oxymoron. We love a controlled blaze for the light, the shadow, the warmth, and the crackle a fire provides to add a feeling of coziness and comfort to any conversation or gathering. But it’s not all s’mores and scary stories. It always feels like smoke blows right in your face, leaving you with stinging eyes and a nose full of soot no matter where you sit. And that’s if you can get it lit. Building a fire on the ground is tough, and you need a clear, safe space. Luckily, a quality fire pit can mitigate these issues.

These metal containers are built to control the flame and make it easy to start and finish. Not only do they make firing up easier, but they can also add a touch of class or a bit of flash to your patio, camp area, or backyard. A solid fire pit can turn a boring patio or backyard into a great place to spend an evening. Consider this your burn book, a list of the best smokeless fire pits of 2023.

How we chose the best smokeless fire pits

We started with a list of more than 30 models from hands-on testing and critical consensus before narrowing our options to the best we could find. The four main factors we considered were ease and effectiveness of use, aesthetics, value for price, and unique features. Our list represents our top choices, a couple for those who aren’t looking to spend as much money, and some situation-specific choices. After all, everyone’s needs when it comes to a fire pit are different, and it’s important to consider how and where you plan to use your fire pit before you buy it. The “best” is not always the “best for you.” Our list should help you avoid getting more fire pit than you really need, as every one of our picks is recommended.

The best smokeless fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Smokeless fire pits contain and elevate fires. Their design allows air to flow in such a way that it minimizes (and in some cases fully eliminates) smoke. There are different looks and focuses among our choices, so line up your desires as best you can with our recommendations.

Best overall: Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0

Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 in action

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.25 lbs
  • Height: 18.5 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Excellent single-piece construction
  • Well-controlled fires with efficient burn
  • Light for the size and quality
  • Attractive, simple silhouette
  • Excellent smoke reduction

Cons

  • The aesthetic doesn’t necessarily fit with some more casual backyards
  • Outside gets very hot


It’s no secret that we think the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 is excellent. In fact, we think it’s the best choice on the market for a smokeless fire pit. The first point for the Solo Stove Bonfire is performance. It heats up quickly and burns efficiently with a stunningly small amount of smoke. The aesthetic is particular: It’s not quite industrial, but it does have a shiny, smooth finish that doesn’t scream “tiki bar” or “family gathering” like some other models, and it’s not uniquely edgy in its stylings. It may not help bring certain patio looks together, but it also doesn’t stand out or bring attention to itself. The look is very “elevated comfort food outdoor cafe.”

Among the mid-sized models we recommend, the Bonfire 2.0 is one of the more portable (though look further down for the real portable star). Twenty-eight pounds is quite light for this category, and while the Bonfire 2.0 doesn’t collapse or disassemble to make it easier to transport, you can use a cloth carrying card to make things a bit easier for a beach trip or some light camping. Wood pellets are best in the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0—that’s true of most circular-basin fire pits—but small firewood also works extremely well. The interior volume of the pit isn’t particularly large, but the burn is so efficient and controlled that the fires tend to outperform the amount of fuel.

The Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0 comes at a semi-premium price, but its durable construction guarantees its long-term value. Unless your fire pit needs are particularly portable or particularly large, this is the one to get, the best overall smokeless fire pit.

Best for patios: BioLite Fire Pit+

Biolite's smokeless fire pit with a fire going inside

BioLite

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 19.8 lbs
  • Height: 15.8 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece self-assembly with foldable legs

Pros

  • Bluetooth-enabled, battery-powered fan keeps fires going
  • Cool, see-through design
  • Foldable legs make storage easier
  • Battery is USB rechargeable
  • App allows control of the flame size
  • Sized for commercial firewood logs

Cons

  • Foldable legs aren’t particularly durable
  • The aesthetic is specific enough to not be everyone’s cup of tea
  • Rectangular design requires a more specific space arrangement than circular models

The BioLite Fire Pit+ is one of the most unique-looking fire pits on the market, with some interesting tech features. It’s an excellent overall fire pit and a contender for best overall, but it landed in best-for-patio because of its big, open flame, cool look, and innovations. The smoke elimination is not quite as good as a few other models, but it makes up for that.

Let’s look at those innovations first. One of its chief innovations is mesh side panels that allow more heat to radiate out and make the fire easy to observe. This does require a bit more work maintaining the Fire Pit+, but it is worth it for the cool view and unique shadows that are interesting and calming when sitting around the fire pit. Another great feature that really contributes to the comfort at a backyard gathering, and is absent on any other model, is the Bluetooth-enabled, app-controlled, battery-powered fan which controls airflow and can make the flames in the Fire Pit+ larger or small at will. This is simply something that isn’t seen elsewhere and really sets the Fire Pit+ apart. The battery pack, which is removable and charged via USB, gives the Fire Pit+ a retro-futuristic look, but it can be easily hidden on the least-seen side in a patio set-up if needed.

The biggest mark against the Fire Pit+ is the double-edged sword that is its legs. The foldable legs make moving and storing the Fire Pit+ much easier than some other models, but they’re also a bit less strong and stable than the circular or thicker-legged bases that competitors have. This means you can’t overfill the Fire Pit+ with firewood (it can fit standard commercial logs). That’s good advice in general with a fire pit, but particularly vital advice for the Fire Pit+.

The Fire Pit+ offers a unique look, unique control, and an overall very good performance, making it the best patio smokeless fire pit among our recommended ones, and a great complement to patio heaters.

Best large: Tiki Fire Pit

Tiki smokeless fire pit with a fire going at night surrounded by torches and chairs

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 45 lbs
  • Height: 18.75 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Nice, classic design
  • Lots of space for fuel inside
  • Perfect size for a larger patio

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Works better with wood pellets which can be more expensive than firewood
  • Not intended to be portable; you can’t easily take it to the beach or camping

Most fire pits on this list are great for four-to-six people. The Tiki Fire Pit is much larger and is a better choice if your patio seating is couches and lounges for 8-10 rather than chairs. Additionally, the Tiki Fire Pit has a classic Tiki design, which may be just what you’re looking for in your backyard paradise.

The benefits of the Tiki Fire Pit’s size are the amount of fuel it can use and the length of burn your fire is going to get. Stronger, longer fires mean less time spent tending the flames during your evening get-togethers. Smoke elimination is very good thanks to the airflow design, and the small, strong legs lift the pit enough for performance while not detracting from the pleasing, rounded throwback style. 

The drawback is this fire pit is really not meant for moving around. Forty-five pounds is a lot, and it is large, meaning you will most likely need two people and plenty of space in a truck or van if you want to take this party starter to the beach. Honestly, the Tiki Fire Pit is much better served finding a permanent home on your patio. However, with that heft comes a lot of durability, so the included weather-resistant cover is probably enough to protect your fire pit outside of an extreme situation. 

If your lifestyle means bigger is better, the Tike Fire Pit is probably the better choice among our recommendations, making it the best large smokeless fire pit as far as we’re concerned.

Best stainless steel: Breeo X Series 24

The Breeo fire pit with a fire on gravel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 62 lbs
  • Height: 14.75 in
  • Material: Corten steel (also available in stainless steel)
  • Structure: Single-piece construction

Pros

  • Extremely strong and durable
  • Sleek look that blends in well with a lot of decor
  • Excellent fire control and smoke elimination

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Extremely heavy

If construction and materials really matter to you, and you want a fire pit that might become an heirloom to pass down to your children, break out the wallet for the Breeo X Series 24. This beautiful, sturdy, heavy, and durable fire pit is not one to travel; the 62 pounds of metal means it doesn’t want to go to the beach or a campground. However, at home you’re not going to get a longer-lasting, better-put-together fire pit.

The “24” in Breeo X Series 24 refers to the diameter of the fire pit’s interior—a considerable amount of space, larger even than the interior of the Tiki Fire Pit. There are 19-inch and even larger models as well. The legs of the Breeo X Series 24 are built-in and incredibly stable. The interior wall sucks up air and creates a wonderful, even secondary flame that shoots out the small holes just below the top of the rim. Visually, the Breeo X Series makes one of the nicest flames on the market.

The price tag is almost as heavy as the pit itself. The Breeo X Series is a premium product at a premium price—two or three times more than a lot of our other recommended models. If you have the means to splurge and believe in buying a product that will last a lifetime, the value is there, even if the initial cost is high.

Big, bold, and built to last, the Breeo X Series 24 is a beast and a beauty in one. For that reason, it’s the best corten steel smokeless fire pit we can recommend.

Best portable: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire on gravel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 15 in
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: single-piece construction

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • Good flame control and smoke elimination
  • Includes a carrying case
  • Sleek and strong design

Cons

  • Portable but not collapsible; still need a vehicle to transport longer distances
  • Grilling requires additional accessories for best results

If you want a multi-purpose fire pit, portability is really important. We know it ourselves, so we have a guide if this category is the one you are exclusively considering. For those looking at a wider range of options, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is the little sibling of our best overall smokeless fire pit and the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market. Smaller, lighter, and more portable—but no less efficient—the Ranger is a much easier carry than the Bonfire without sacrificing any of the quality.

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire going inside
Billy Cadden

The Ranger really sings when you add in grilling accessories. The Solo Stove product line’s design gives you a simple, flat top that placing any flat wire grill means producing nice results (though you’ll want to very carefully clean the inside of your fire pit later, as food can create some sticky burnt messes). Some official grilling accessories are available, as well as skewers for s’mores or hot dogs if you look at Solo Stove’s offerings. (However, we recommend a dedicated grill if you’re into cookouts more than casual entertaining.)

For a portable model, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 isn’t particularly light. It’s not meant for trekking but more drive-to-the-national-park-or-beach style portable use. The included carrying case is probably enough for inside storage, but outside storage will need a thicker, more protective case (which is also available to purchase).

If you’re planning to head out with your fire pit a lot, we can heartily recommend the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 as the best portable smokeless fire pit on the market.

Best value: Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit

The Innostage stainless steel fire pit with no fire going

Innostage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 33 pounds
  • Height: 18 in
  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • Two-piece design lets it travel smaller
  • Easy to set up
  • Good airflow for smoke elimination
  • Matte black coloration makes it blend in easily

Cons

  • The silhouette is a bit industrial
  • Clean-up is tougher than with some other brands

You’ll need firewood once you’ve purchased your pit, so buying something that leaves you with some cash left over isn’t a bad plan. For those a bit more thrifty, Inno Stage offers a line of fire pits that don’t quite match the higher-cost models for performance or style but more than do the job for a very reasonable cost.

Inno Stage’s design involves two pieces. When assembled, the larger piece sits on the smaller piece, which acts as the ash pan. For travel or storage, the smaller piece is turned upside down and slots into the larger piece’s basin, taking up less space and becoming easier to carry. This is the most convenient feature of the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but it also results in less efficient burn.

In terms of looks, the Inno Stage is not the most beautiful fire pit. It has a bit of a utilitarian and industrial look, which doesn’t make it a star of the backyard. There’s a trio of options for the finish: chrome, matte black, and faux terracotta. The last is our suggestion; it softens the look a bit. There are also multiple sizes (four in all) depending on your needs.

If you need a highly functional, well-priced fire pit or just want to dip your toe into the world of fire pits without committing too many funds, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit is your best entry point. It’s inexpensive enough to upgrade later without feeling regretful and functional enough to use it for a long time, squeezing every ounce of use out of what we consider the best-value smokeless fire pit.

Best under $100: Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge

The Blue Sky fire pit with its cover and wood poker on a plain background

Blue Sky

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 23.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.49 in
  • Material: Steel
  • Structure: Two-piece construction

Pros

  • One piece tucks into the other for portability
  • Assembly is quick
  • Low price

Cons

  • Not quite as efficient burn as other models
  • Non-stainless steel means it’s a bit less durable and a bit harder to clean

Sometimes, price is the most important factor. If you want to get into the smokeless fire pit game for less than $100, choose the Blue Sky Outdoor Living Ridge. This two-piece smokeless fire pit has a similar tuck-in-and-carry construction as our best value option, the Inno Stage Smokeless Fire Pit, but an even lower base price. 

The design of the Ridge doesn’t allow air to flow as efficiently as higher-end models, meaning the smoke elimination is less impressive. However, it’s still an incredible improvement over typical fire pits. The matte black finish to the Ridge means it’s unobtrusive, but it’s also not a particularly attractive fire pit. Weight and size make the Ridge easy to move, and you’ll probably want to store it inside and bring it out to use it rather than leave it as patio furniture.

What to consider when choosing a smokeless fire pit

Smokeless fire pits offer a focal point for your patio set-up, allowing you to enjoy cooler days and nights in a comfortable and stylish way. To that end, picking the perfect smokeless fire pit means considering smoke elimination effectiveness, style, size, and durability.

Smoke elimination

When it comes to smoke elimination, all of these models will do an excellent job of minimizing the amount of smoke produced but the fire. This is due to airflow design, which allows for more complete combustion. Smokeless fire pits will have secondary fires popping out of the interior wall of the fire pit’s basin, using up more oxygen and producing very little smoke. The best models do this most efficiently, but even our recommended value and budget models do a great job.

Most of the design elements of smokeless fire pits are utilitarian due to wanting to offer the best possible airflow efficiency. The nicer models are sleep and round, while the budget models tend to have more edges or corners. A few of our models took their look more into consideration: the Tiki Fire Pit and the BioLite Fire Pit+ chief among them. Make sure you like the look of your fire pit if you’re planning to use it when entertaining guests. No matter how great the fire is, if the pit feels out of place and clashes with the motif you’re trying to achieve, you’ll be disappointed with your purchase.

Size

Most of the smokeless fire pits we recommend are medium-sized, built to be used with a smaller circle of people, maybe no more than 6. Portable models are best with 2 or 4. Larger models exist that can accommodate 8-10 people around them, but you’re looking at completely non-portable models at that point. In terms of warmth radius, most of these fire pits will be nice and toasty within 8 feet, but some of the smaller models will need a tighter formation.

Materials and durability

Lastly, durability is important as you want to be using your smokeless fire pit long term. Stainless steel is the material of choice. It holds up well to use and elements and is the easiest to clean. Some steel composite low-end models exist but should probably be avoided.

FAQs

Q: Is a smokeless fire pit really smokeless?

Not exactly. Smokeless fire pits will still produce some smoke. However, the amount of smoke is drastically reduced because the design allows airflow on nearly all sides, causing much more complete combustion. Even the smoke that does make its way out of the fire still won’t find its way into your face.

Q: Do smokeless fire pits give off good heat?

Absolutely. A smokeless fire pit can easily give off 50,000 BTU (British Thermal Units), which is extremely warm within 8 feet and comfortable from 8 feet to 10 feet.

Q: How much does a smokeless fire pit cost?

The ones we recommend can be had for as cheap as $75 on sale, and you could spend up to $1000 on the luxury models when you add in accessories.

Q: What type of fire pit is best?

It really depends on the space you’re most likely to have your fire. If you will almost only use your fire pit on your patio, choose a fire pit that fits the aesthetic of your backyard area. If you want to take your fire pit to the beach, choose a lighter standard-sized fire pit with a carrying case or a very light “portable” model. These will make smaller fires, but your back will thank you. No matter what, it’s best to go smokeless.

Q: Can you put water in a smokeless fire pit?

Do not do this. The holes in a smokeless fire pit can get clogged with wet fire debris, and dirty water will spill out onto whatever surface your fire pit is over. Instead, douse the flames with sand, wait long enough for everything to cool off, dump it, then clean it carefully by hand if necessary.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

Don’t do this either. First, it’s very unlikely that a fire pit fire will last all night, anyway. It’s simply not big enough, even though it’s protected from wind and moisture within the pit. Second, never leave a fire unattended, even in a relatively safe environment like a fire pit. It only takes one stray ember to cause a tragedy.

Q: Can you burn wood in a smokeless fire pit?

Yes! Most smokeless fire pits are expressly designed for wood. Many work better with wood pellets, but small scavenged firewood or commercial firewood cut into smaller pieces also works well.

Q: What makes a smokeless fire pit smokeless?

The airflow design allows more complete combustion of your fuel (usually wood or wood pellets), and more complete combustion produces less smoke, sometimes so little as to appear “smokeless.”

Final thoughts on the best smokeless fire pits

If you’re looking for a fire pit, smokeless is the way to go. There’s enough variety in the marketplace, with quality throughout, that choosing a model based on your particular needs is more involved than simply choosing the “best” model. From portable to large-scale patio-only models, our recommendations should make sure that your nights are toasty, your shadows flicker, and you enjoy fire whenever you wish.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smokeless fire pits for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-clothing/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 20:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582173
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Heated clothing can keep you warm during chilly morning dog walks, Friday night football games, and every occasion in between.

The post The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pieces of heated clothing dividing vertically into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best jacket A Gobi Grit black heated work jacket on a plain background Gobi Grit Men's Heated Work Jacket
SEE IT

Working outside doesn’t mean you have to be chilly while you do it.
Best vest ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men ORORO Men's Lightweight Heated Vest
SEE IT

This vest heats up fast to get you warm quick.
Best slippers A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slippers
SEE IT

Perfect for walking the dog or fetching the morning paper.

If the temperatures are dropping and layers aren’t cutting it, consider upping your cozy game with heated clothing. Heated clothing provides covert, fireside-esque warmth while remaining sleek and lightweight. Clothing that uses thermal lining relies on your own body heat to create warmth. Heated clothing uses a network of small, heat-conducting flexible wires powered by a detachable, rechargeable battery. Both the wires and the rechargeable batteries are slim and hardly noticeable. Wearing a piece of heated clothing should feel just like wearing a regular jacket, vest, or pair of gloves. A button—usually on the glove’s cuff or front of the jacket—lets you control the temperature. The best heated clothing keeps you warm and comfy even when outside feels like the Arctic Circle.

How we chose the best heated clothing

It’s highly unlikely you can go the entire winter without going outside. Eventually, you’ll have to walk away from one of the best space heaters. However, just because you must stand out in the cold doesn’t mean you should freeze. We looked at our past heated gear coverage, rounded up our favorites, and tested new options. We also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to separate the tepid from the hot.

The best heated clothing: Reviews & Recommendations

If you’ve considered wearing something, it most likely comes in heated form. One of our choices will channel your inner Heat Miser when you’re about to turn into Mr. Snow.

Best jacket: Gobi Grit Men’s Heated Work Jacket

A Gobi Grit black heated work jacket on a plain background

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton with nylon lining
  • Max temp: 140 degrees
  • Heat settings: 3
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • 5 heating zones provide full coverage
  • Big, durable jacket with inner lining
  • Decent battery life

Cons

  • Fewer heat settings than other options

If you’re working outside in cold weather, not simply enduring it, you need something heavier than a shell, a fleece, or a hoodie. The Gobi Grit heated workwear jacket offers a heavier layer of electric warmth, ensuring you are ready to spend a full day in the cold. When things get rough, you can turn on the heat, which should last between 4.5 and 9 hours, depending on the setting. The company also makes heated hoodies for when you are enduring the cold. And, if you’re looking for something in a specific style, check out our other favorite heated jackets.

Best vest: ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest

A woman wears a black heated vest and stands against a brick wall

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (100°F), Medium (120°F), High (130°F)
  • Battery life: 10 hours

Pros

  • Quick heating
  • Machine washable
  • Zippered pockets

Cons

  • Might be too tight to fit under bulkier jackets
  • Only a 10-degree difference between medium and high settings

This heated vest for men is tailored neatly to the body and is machine washable. In seconds, the heating elements warm up the vest, which can be adjusted according to your comfort. It even includes a USB charging port within the vest battery that you can use for your cell phone. If you’re looking for a heated vest for a specific activity, like riding your motorcycle, check out our complete list of heated vests.

Best gloves: SAVIOR HEAT Heated Gloves

A pair of black Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves on a plain background

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Soft lambskin and polyester; cotton inner layer
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low)-150°F (high)
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Sizes: XS-3X
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Not as effective in temperatures below 10°F
  • Not waterproof

Savior’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures and reasonably priced, to boot.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most.

They’re a bit thick but still flexible enough to shift gears on a bicycle or hold ski poles. One personal complaint about these heated gloves is that the “on” indicator light is oddly bright when it’s on in the dark—but we’ve always had issues with bright lights in darkness being distracting.

All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for, and you don’t need to spend too much to get it.

Best socks: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

A pair of Gobi Tread heated socks on a plain background

Gobi

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is hardly noticeable in its calf pocket or while wearing tight pants. Our favorite feature is the remote, which lets you change the heat settings without bending over. Consider our other favorite heated socks if you want to stock up on multiple pairs.

Best slippers: Volt Resistance Rechargeable Heated Slipper

A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low
  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three heat levels (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. The previous iteration had a faux fur lining—although we loved the extra snuggliness, the new version ditches the bulky, a-little-too-hot fur for soft fleece that doesn’t make your feet feel like a sauna. You can also get insole warmers (even battery-powered ones) to turn any house shoe into a heated slipper.

Best wearable electric blanket: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. Need something a bit less wearable and a bit more shareable? Check out our other heated blanket picks.

Best hand warmers: HotHands Hand Warmer

A pack of Hot Hands hand warmers on a blue and white background

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

Want to save money on a handy choice from above? Any gloves are heated gloves with these disposable hand warmers from HotHands—a budget-friendly staple for keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes. Keep them in your glovebox or purse so you’ll never be caught with cold hands. If you’re looking for something reusable, we have an entire list for you.

Things to consider when buying the best heated clothing

With an entire closet’s-worth of options to choose from, what should you know when clicking “add to cart”? Here’s the short of it so you can spend more time exploring in your new hot digs:

Charging times

Heated clothing requires the use of a lithium-ion battery to power the heating elements. And, like other portable batteries and power banks, they take a bit of time to reach 100 percent. Prepare accordingly if you’re going to spend all day hitting the slopes or all night cheering in the stands. Most batteries in heated clothing also double as a portable charger in a pinch. We love killing two birds with one stone.

Machine washability

“Heated elements” plus “water” must equal “disaster” when it comes to heated clothing, right? Wrong! Most heated clothing can be washed—emphasis on the “most.” Read the care label before throwing the item in the wash, and make sure to remove the rechargeable batteries. You most definitely don’t want to run those through the washer.

Temperature

A piece of heated clothing that’s too hot leads to a sweaty person, which is not good when exposed to cold temperatures. You want to limit sweating since rapidly evaporating perspiration chills you … not exactly what you want when you’re wearing heated clothing to stay warm.

FAQs

Q: Can you wear a heated jacket in the rain?

It depends. If your jacket is machine washable or has a water-propelling shell, consider your jacket safe. Always check with the manufacturer’s care instructions before jumping in a puddle on a cold rainy day.

Q: Can you bring heated clothing on a plane?

Yes. TSA doesn’t prohibit heated clothing on planes. You only need to take electronic items larger than a cellphone or tablet from your carry-on. It’s highly unlikely the battery for your heated clothing is larger than a portable charger.

Q: Is battery-heated clothing safe?

Yes. We haven’t heard of any heated jackets or vests blowing up or catching fire. However, if you feel any sparks or electrocution, take the article off immediately, turn it off, and contact the manufacturer’s customer service line for guidance.

Final thoughts on the best heated clothing

If you’d rather not look like Randy in that one scene from A Christmas Story, consider some heated clothing for more warmth with fewer layers. The heated elements and batteries in heated clothing are thin and discreet—no one would know you’re wearing a heated jacket or vest unless you told them. And, with incredible choices like these, you’ll want to tell the entire world how cozy you are.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated clothing in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best leaf mulchers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-mulcher/ Tue, 23 Mar 2021 17:13:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278407
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We'll help you find the best leaf mulcher to tackle your fall cleanup.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Spend less time raking and more time composting with the help of one of the best leaf mulchers.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The WORX 12 TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum sitting on top of a pile of leaves WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum
SEE IT

This 3-in-1 model lets you mulch, vacuum, and blow your leaves with one powerful tool.
Best gas landworks gas powered leaf mulcher Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher
SEE IT

If you need to chop wood, this machine can handle branches up to 3 inches in diameter.
Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower
SEE IT

This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher.

Fall is gorgeous, but it’s also a grueling period for yard work, so a good leaf mulcher can come in handy. As stunning foliage falls from the trees, homeowners are faced with the Sisyphean task of clearing their yard of endlessly dropping debris. This step of lawn maintenance, important in preventing disease from hijacking your grass under the cover of wet leaves during the winter months, will be much easier if you have appropriate outdoor power equipment for the job. We’re here to help you identify the best leaf mulchers to clear your lawn and dispose of autumn debris.

How we chose the best leaf mulchers

Depending on your location, leaf disposal can be tricky. Some towns have a service for leaf pickup, but it often comes with a fee attached and the responsibility of tracking down a specific type of leaf bag. Other towns have a set location for residents to drop off their bagged leaves, which can be difficult if you don’t have a pickup truck to transport the hefty bags. 

A better option? Make leaf mulching a part of your yard maintenance. The process simply involves loading the leaves into a leaf shredder that cuts them up into tiny pieces, greatly reducing the heft of the load. Once shredded, leaves can be mulched around your plants and trees to retain moisture, protect from frost, and suppress weeds. 

Once you find the best leaf mulcher for your lawn care, disposing of leaves is a breeze. In compiling our recommendations, we looked at top brands and weighed a range of factors, including versatility, power, mulch ratio, ease of use, and price.

The best leaf mulchers: Reviews & Recommendations

Like any piece of outdoor power equipment, like a cordless leaf blower, an overwhelming number of leaf mulchers with different features are available for purchase. A little bit of research can ensure that your machine is tailored to your specific lawn care needs and worthy of space in your storage shed. We’ve gathered our recommendations and provided some tips below to consider when making your purchase.

Best overall: WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum

The WORX 12 TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum sitting on top of a pile of leaves

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 16:1
  • Weight: 9 lbs.

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Contains mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Some users had problems with attachments

Why invest in three different tools when you can blow your leaves, mulch, and vacuum with one device? WORX 12 Amp TRIVAC 3-in-1 Electric Leaf Blower/Mulcher/Yard Vacuum is lightweight at 9 pounds, and changes functions with the turn of a dial. The lightweight, handheld tool features a metal impeller with a shredder blade that provides a 16:1 leaves-to-mulch ratio. Once the mulch is collected, the bag is easy to detach for removal. This tool also provides a powerful 600 CFM (cubic feet per minute) for leaf blowing and switches between two speeds. So ditch the rake and dispense with your leaves quickly and easily with this versatile option.

Best electric: WORX 12 Amp 3-in-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

worx electric leaf mulcher and bag

WORX

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 18:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Versatile with mulcher, blower, and vacuum
  • Handheld
  • High mulch ratio
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Some users say suction is weak

This corded electric three-in-one model is lightweight but powerful. A simple switch quickly flips from blower to vacuum to mulching mode, and two speeds are available to accommodate different functions. It boasts an 18:1 mulching ratio, consolidating 18 bags of leaves into just one. As an electric device, this model is muted and environmentally friendly. 

Best gas: Landworks Mini Wood Chipper Shredder Mulcher

landworks gas powered leaf mulcher

Landworks

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Gas
  • Voltage: N/A
  • Mulch ratio: 15:1
  • Weight: 9.3 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle heavy branches
  • Powerful engine
  • Professional quality

Cons

  • Expensive
  • No other tools
  • Not environmentally friendly

This Landworks machine has a mulching ratio of 15:1, and is able to tackle branches of up to 3 inches in diameter. You can adjust the discharge chute anywhere between 90 to 145 degrees for easy and efficient disposal. The 7HP engine takes 87 octane gas with no ethanol. This mulcher doesn’t have the versatility but can handle harder jobs.

Best standalone: SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher

orange leaf mulcher on wheels

SuperHandy

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 17:1
  • Weight: 46.5 lbs.

Pros

  • Can handle branches, leaves, and grass
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable
  • High mulch ratio

Cons

  • Some users said it gets clogged
  • May not last long

The SuperHandy Leaf Mulcher is a smaller version of the SuperHandy Wood Chipper. While the mulcher can’t handle the sizable branches that the Wood Chipper can, it comes at a fraction of the price and is perfect for yearly leaf maintenance. It has a high 17:1 mulching ratio, and its electric belt-driven motor is quiet and eco-friendly. 

Best heavy-duty: Patriot Products 14 Amp Electric Wood Chipper/Leaf Shredder

black heavy duty leaf mulcher on wheels

Patriot Products

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Standalone
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 110V
  • Mulch ratio: N/A
  • Weight: 95 lbs.

Pros

  • Chops branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter
  • Environmentally friendly
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Only one function
  • Heavy

This Patriot Products wood chipper/leaf shredder offers versatile performance for various levels of yard maintenance. A larger piece of outdoor power equipment, this electric mulcher remains smooth and quiet as it shreds leaves and chips branches up to 2 ½ inches in diameter. Simply slide your debris into the top of the feeder, and the mulch spits out the side.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER 3 in 1 Electric Leaf Blower

black and orange leaf mulcher

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Handheld
  • Power: Corded electric
  • Voltage: 120V
  • Mulch ratio: 10:1
  • Weight: 8.1 pounds

Pros

  • Easy on the wallet
  • Includes mulcher, vacuum, and blower
  • Environmentally friendly

Cons

  • Low mulch ratio
  • Some users say it didn’t last long

This blower has options for more attachments, but even the bare-bones model is a blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. The corded electric blower is lightweight and easy to use, and it shreds 10 bags of leaves into one. This option is great for homeowners looking for a basic, wallet-friendly mulcher. 

Things to consider when buying the best leaf mulchers

With so many variations of leaf mulchers available, first narrow your options down by deciding what style mulching machine you’re looking for: handheld or stand-alone. Stand-alone mulchers are stationary machines into which you feed collected leaves for shredding. You can carry a handheld machine around the yard, and vacuum leaves straight into the machine. Handheld mulchers usually function as a leaf blower as well.

Also, think about what power source is best for you. A gas-powered mulcher is an excellent choice if you want more power and want to avoid plugging in the device or charging batteries, but that comes at the cost of a heavier machine. An electric or battery-powered mulcher leaves you at the mercy of your power source (so maybe keep a portable power station handy)—but can be significantly lighter and easier to maneuver. 

Lastly, pay attention to the mulching ratio of your leaf shredder. The mulch ratio basically tells you how much the shredder will cut down your leaves: the highest ratio of 18:1 will reduce 18 bags of leaves to fit into one bag. When choosing the best leaf mulchers for your needs, consider how many bags of leaves you typically have in the fall and what you plan to do with them after they’re shredded—larger shreds are fine for mulching around your trees, while smaller shreds are better for composting.

Electric vs. gas

A handheld mulching machine gives you the benefit of turning the two steps of gathering the leaves and then mulching them into one step. Most models can blow, vacuum, and shred, so one swift trip around the yard completes the entire cleanup. 

Electric leaf mulchers are significantly lighter than their gas-powered counterparts. Collecting leaves is done with relative ease, and while you’ll need a battery or connection to a power source, you can use a long extension cord or keep an extra battery charging.

For extended use without a power cord or having to stop and recharge batteries, gas-powered mulchers keep going for a lot longer than an electric model. Gas-powered models tend to be more expensive than electric, but you get what you pay for with more power and faster cleanup—just remember to keep extra gas in the shed so you can start with a full tank. 

Handheld vs. standalone leaf mulchers

The majority of the best leaf mulchers are handheld and come with blower and vacuum functions, but a standalone leaf mulcher has only one function: shred leaves. This is perfect for handling heavier loads, and if you go for a higher-end model, you’re ultimately purchasing a wood chipper that can even deal with small tree limbs. We found smaller and heavy-duty models for more extreme yard work. 

Versatility

If you’re willing to fork over some more green for a more versatile machine, a heavier-duty leaf shredder can reduce twigs, branches, and acorns. This is optimal for cleaning up debris after storms and heavy winds knock limbs into your yard. These powerful devices can make yard maintenance quick and efficient and leave you with aesthetically pleasing mulch for your landscaping.

Price

If your fall yard maintenance tends to be a small and simple job, the best leaf mulcher for you shouldn’t have to break the bank. While cheap mulchers often coincide with a smaller capacity for collection and a less powerful engine, we’ve found inexpensive models on the market that are still strong and efficient. 

FAQs

Q: What leaves are not good for compost?

The leaves that won’t compost well are higher in lignin, a polymer that makes them feel rigid, almost wooden. High-lignin leaves include those found on beech trees, oaks, and sweet cherry trees. Also, avoid black walnut, eucalyptus, and poison ivy leaves, as they can be toxic. The best leaves for mulching have high levels of calcium and nitrogen and are low in lignin, like poplar, maple, and ash leaves.

Q: What is the best way to shred leaves?

If you don’t have many trees around the yard and your fall blanket is minimal, a lawn mower could work as a leaf shredder in a pinch—simply mow over the leaves and collect them in the mower’s bag attachment. However, with several price-friendly options on the market, it’s better to take the easier route and buy a leaf mulcher. A specialized leaf vacuum and mulcher does a more thorough job picking up the leaves and shreds smaller than a mower can. 

Q: What is the best 3-in-1 blower, vacuum, and mulcher?

DeWalt and Husqvarna are both popular outdoor equipment brands, and each has excellent 3-in-1 leaf machines, but our favorite is the WORX WG518, a 12-amp 2-speed leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher. This is a corded model, so you’ll need a power source, but in return it’s lightweight and easy to carry. Its mulch ratio is on the higher end at 16:1, so if you have a large amount of leaves to consolidate, this machine does the trick. 

Final thoughts on the best leaf mulchers

Finding the best leaf mulcher to clean up your lawn this fall will take a lot of heavy lifting, and raking, off your shoulders. The 3-in-1 models are especially efficient and can operate as a leaf blower, vacuum, and mulcher all in one. Removing the bed of leaves from your yard is an essential part of your yard maintenance schedule, as it keeps the leaves from molding and suffocating your lawn or becoming a breeding ground for debris. Find yourself the best leaf mulcher for your needs, and in no time, you’ll have your yard cleaned up and ready for next spring.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf mulchers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated blankets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-blankets/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517407
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

Heated blankets provide comfortable warmth without tons of maintenance.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best heated blankets composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best wearable Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap
SEE IT

Don’t pretend like you don’t want that wrapped around you.
Best battery-powered Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket
SEE IT

A dedicated battery pack provides warmth without the grid.
Best overall Sunbeam best overall heated blanket Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket
SEE IT

It’s comfortable, durable, and easy to use.

On cold nights, there’s nothing more comforting than getting into a pre-warmed bed thanks to a heated blanket. Heated blankets, sometimes called electric blankets, are just like a regular soft blanket but with wires inside that provide heat when supplied with current. You can even get wireless battery-powered options that allow you to stay warm all night long without the hassle of tangling cords. Whether you opt for smaller single sizes, which are often better at dispersing heat, or share the experience with a large blanket made for two, we have sourced the best heated blankets for you.

How we chose the best heated blankets

The writers and editors at Popular Science have decades of combined experience in writing about, reviewing, and recommending products across a wide variety of categories. For this list of the best heated blankets, we relied on spec comparisons, personal experience, editorial reviews, and user feedback. We prioritize reliability here at Popular Science, so we emphasized models that promise to last several years. While we haven’t tested them for years to guarantee durability, we prioritize brands with solid reputations and models built with long-lasting materials.

The best heated blankets: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks for the best heated blankets promise to keep you toasty even when it’s cold outside and drafty in your home. Plus, they’re more convenient than sleeping in even the best, most comfortable heated gloves, socks, insoles, and vests. If you want to snuggle up for sound sleep and feel cozy without touching the thermostat or fiddling with a space heater, you can relax under the warmth of one of our top picks. 

Best overall: Sunbeam Royal Luxe Heated Blanket

Sunbeam best overall heated blanket

Sunbeam

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester microfiber
  • Heat Settings: 12
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Dual controllers
  • Easy to use
  • Soft, cozy fabric

Cons 

  • Thin fabric means you can feel the wires inside

Available in a range of colors—including beige, blue, red, and gray—this blanket scored top marks for comfort and durability. To machine wash, simply unplug the remote and toss the blanket in your washer and dryer. 

The dual controllers and large Queen size make it a good choice for couples sharing a bed. You’ll both be able to adjust the temperature and turn it on or off if your partner falls asleep before you. The control remote is also bright and easy to use, even in the middle of the night. It evenly distributes heat to prevent overheating, and the blanket material, although warm, isn’t too heavy. It comes with a five-year limited warranty for peace of mind. The automatic 12-hour shutoff was the longest shut-off from the blankets tested and means you can fall asleep knowing it will turn off by itself. This is our top choice to help you get a restful (and warm) night’s sleep.

Best battery-powered: The Cozee Battery Operated Cordless Heated Blanket

Onnetila heated blanket on a plain backdrop

Onnetila

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester & Polyester Blend
  • Heat Settings: 5
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Totally portable  
  • Wireless 
  • Modern design

Cons 

  • Battery life is poor on high setting

Instead of a bulky controller plugged into the wall, this portable heated blanket comes with a rechargeable large-capacity battery, not unlike a power brick you’d use to charge your phone. The blanket heats up in just five seconds, providing warmth when you need it most. It folds down to fit any 10 inches by 8 inches space, perfect for stowing in the car or a backpack on the road. 

Once heated, expect 2-8 hours of use, plenty of time to fall asleep soundly. The material is lightweight, machine-washable, and soft to the touch. Although this blanket would work well in bed, it excels as a portable option to keep you warm at sporting events, when traveling, or especially camping or staying in an RV. In fact, it makes a great present for anyone who loves warm gear gifts. However, the five heat settings don’t offer too much variation, and it’s worth keeping in mind that the highest setting will drain the battery considerably. Lower price options are available if a wireless design is not your priority.

Best for couples: Perfect Fit Ultra Soft Plush Electric Blanket

Soft Heat by Perfect Fit best heated blanket

SoftHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Polyester Blend micro plush
  • Heat Settings: 10
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Very large size  
  • Individual controls 
  • Small wires and even heat distribution

Cons 

  • Expensive

It’s a perfect solution for couples with different sleep styles and preferences. It features separate heating zones and individualized controls, and you can change the temperature silently so as not to wake your sleeping partner. The separate controls mean you can both choose your ideal temperature and sleep soundly. You can also adjust this temperature throughout the night for individualized comfort.

A large, easy-to-grasp dial-style controller and a non-slip bottom make this a very accessible device. If you forget to turn it off, an automatic shut-off at 10 hours will keep you safe. This blanket doesn’t feel overly hot to the touch and doesn’t get hot zones as the heat is evenly distributed. It also features very small wires that cannot be felt through the blanket for ultimate comfort while you both sleep. Choose from three colors—sage green, red, or beige—to complement your bedding.

Best wearable: Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap

Beautyrest reversible heated blanket on a plain background as one of the best heated blankets

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: Plush Fabric
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable  
  • Hands-free design 
  • Heats up quickly

Cons 

  • Control panel is bulky and can be uncomfortable
  • Variations in heat

As a wearable heated blanket, the Beautyrest Reversible Sherpa to Fleece Electric Wrap lets you stay warm while your hands can type, scroll on your phone, or flip between TV channels. It sits on your shoulders just like a shawl with the added luxury of heat, which you can control through three different settings. And it’s available in 10 different designs to suit your unique style and fashion sense. It’s also fully reversible with an ultra-soft beige plush fabric on the reverse side. 

The 2-hour auto shut-off prevents overheating. Fully machine washable, this wearable heated blanket provides warmth and comfort to relax anywhere in your home. This blanket would suit teens in particular because of the range of colors and styles. Like our top budget pick, also made by Beautyrest, the controller can become quite hot if covered. Simply unplug to machine wash and keep your new favorite blanket clean. 

Best budget: Beautyrest Brushed Long Fur Electric Throw

Beautyrest brushed fur heated blanket

Beautyrest

SEE IT

Specs

  • Fabric type: 100% Polyester
  • Heat Settings: 3
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros 

  • Affordable price point 
  • Furry fabric offers extra warmth

Cons 

  • Only one size (oversize throw) available 
  • Controller overheats if covered by the blanket

The heating wires are laid throughout this throw in an “S” pattern, evenly distributing heat. Although only available in one size, the oversized 50 inches by 60 inches, it’s perfect for one person to keep warm. Expect heat ranges of 85 to 105 degrees Fahrenheit, although the long fur provides additional warmth as well. You’ll be limited to just three heat settings, but this heated blanket still offers good value for money at such a reasonable price. 

The two-hour auto shut-off provides peace of mind, although if you like to snuggle up while you watch TV before bed, you might need to reset it to keep you warm as you sleep. Some reviewers complained that the lifespan was short, which you should remember when researching heated to buy. As this blanket is on the smaller side, it could be a great option for keeping warm on the couch instead of at bedtime.

Things to consider before buying the best heated blankets 

While we’re happy to recommend specific models, we also like to provide some insight into what we consider the essential features that come with your new heated blanket. Here are some features and specs to look for while you’re shopping.

Safety

You might prefer the reassuring heavy feel of a weighted blanket instead of a heated blanket; after all, they don’t suit everyone. If you prefer to sleep wrapped up in a ball or your temperature fluctuates dramatically during the night, a heated blanket might not suit your needs. It’s also important to keep a few safety precautions in mind:

Damaged or frayed wires can make heated blankets unsafe. Get into the habit of checking them regularly and rolling rather than folding your blanket for storage. You should also choose a model with an automatic shut-off to prevent overheating. 

Heat settings 

The more heat settings your heated blanket has, the more you can customize it to your unique (and changing) needs. Depending on the weather, your other blankets and bedding, or the season, adjust the heat setting to suit your sleep habits best. You might also prefer to choose a heated throw blanket over one that you sleep with. 

Pets 

It’s not advised to use heated blankets with pets as they can become overheated and may chew or claw through the wires.

FAQs

Q: Is it safe to sleep with a heated blanket?

If used correctly, heated blankets are perfectly safe to use while sleeping. When selecting your blanket, make sure you choose one with an automatic shutoff so that you can rest easy knowing that you won’t overheat during the night. It’s also important to look after your blanket to prevent wires from shorting and to buy a new one when your blanket gets too old. 

Q: Do heated blankets use a lot of electricity?

Heated blankets are very economical and use very little electricity to run, and certainly much less than a space heater or turning up the thermostat.

Q: Can I wash my heated blanket?

Not all heated blankets can be machine washed, so it’s very important to check the manufacturer details to make sure you’ll be able to clean your blanket properly. 

Final thoughts on the best heated blankets

Heated blankets can be a great way to stay warm on chilly nights, save money on your heating bills, or just make your bed extra snuggly and cozy. If you share a bed with someone else, buying an extra large heated blanket is a good idea and ensures you both have access to the controls to individualize your sleep space to your comfort level. Even if you don’t like to fall asleep with your heated blanket on, you can still opt for a wearable blanket to keep warm around the house or use a heated blanket to warm up your sheets before you slip out of your comfy heated slippers and into bed.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated blankets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated insoles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-insoles/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-insoles/
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keep your feet nice and toasty with insoles designed to last well beyond the winter.

The post The best heated insoles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated insoles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiing A Thermic C-Pack Set of foot warmers on a plain background Thermic C-Pack Set
SEE IT

The perfect boot warmer for skiers and snowboarders alike.
Easiest to trim A pair of Warmfits Rechargeable Heated Insoles on a plain background Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers
SEE IT

Consistent warmth and a custom fit.
Best customizable A pair of Hotronic S4 Universal Foot Warmers on a plain background Hotronic Foot Warmer S4+ Universal
SEE IT

Easily attach to your existing insoles with a long-lasting battery.

There’s nothing worse than heading home early from what should be a great snow day because all the heat has left your toes or having a tough time focusing at work because all you can think about is the cold creeping into your insoles. You might be dreaming of the space heater waiting for you at home, but you need a solution now. Heated insoles can quickly and comfortably take out any unwelcome chills that come your way. These impressively compact creations can be found in various sizes and suited to various activities. Some heated shoe insoles are disposable, some are powered by rechargeable batteries, and some are even water-resistant (we’re looking at you fellow frequent foot-sweaters). Plus, most models are designed to minimize bulk or extra padding, so you won’t have to worry about your toes being squished. The best heated insoles are a great way to stay warm and stay active even when the temperature starts to drop.

How we chose the best heated insoles

We’ve reviewed plenty of heated tech, but we’re practically experts in the realm of electric clothes. We looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research to back our findings. The scientific method! It’s great!

The best heated insoles: Reviews & Recommendations

Heated shoe inserts are safe and easy to use; as long as you follow all included directions, you don’t need to worry about any damage to your skin, socks, or shoes. This makes them the perfect companion for many shoe types, including ski boots, hiking shoes, running sneakers, and more. Any one of our picks will be sure to toast up those tootsies.

Best overall: Thermacell Original Heated Insoles

A pair of red Thermacell Original Heated Insoles on a blue and white background

Thermacell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These bright red insoles have a matching remote so you can control the temperature and turn it on and off without bending over or taking off your shoes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 100°F-111°F

Pros

  • Remote control
  • Shock absorbent
  • Retains it shape well

Cons

  • Can accidentally control a different pair of heated insoles with universal remote

Although Thermacell is known for its mosquito-repelling tech, they aren’t a one-trick pony with these battery-operated inserts. The wireless, remote-controlled insoles can heat between 100°F-111°F—there’s also a No Heat setting in case you end up indoors. Polyurethane foam allows for even heat conduction and shock resistance for comfortable wear all day. No more cold feet this winter—just ensure you stay far enough from someone else wearing these insoles, as you can control their pair thanks to the universal remote.

Best for ski boots: Thermic C-Pack Set

A Thermic C-Pack Set of foot warmers on a plain background

Thermic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These long-lasting heated insoles provide 17 hours of heat for warm feet all day on the slopes.

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Bluetooth enabled to control from phone
  • Can use with existing insoles
  • Ultra-fine heat elements for comfort

Cons

  • Expensive

This set from Thermic are the best heated insoles for ski boots on the market. The batteries provide up to 17 hours of heat, perfect for overnight trips, and they can fit underneath the strap of your ski boot to increase your mobility and keep you comfortable. There are three heat settings—low, medium, and high—that you can control via Bluetooth from your phone. Plus, the heating element can be used with your existing insoles or arch supports without issue. If this high-end model’s price point isn’t right for you, Thermic has many other options for you to peruse.

Best high-temperature: Riomza Rechargeable Heated Insoles

A pair of Riomza Rechargeable Heated Insoles on a blue and white background

Riomza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These inserts reach up to 150°F—as Paris Hilton would say, “That’s hot!”

Specs

  • Weight: .75 lbs.
  • Material: Carbon fiber
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: 104°F-150°F

Pros

  • Trimmable
  • Comes with a wireless remote control with LED display
  • Quickly heats up

Cons

  • Heels thick to fit battery

These heated shoe insoles have three different temperature settings easily controlled with an included remote. The highest setting can reach up to 150 degrees Fahrenheit. They come in three sizes that are easily trimmable to fit your shoe. Perhaps best of all, the battery for these guys sits inside the heel, so you don’t need to worry about strapping it elsewhere on your body—perfect for work or hunting—though this does tend to add a tiny bit of weight.

Best toe warmers: HotHands Heat Max Toe Warmers

A box of HotHands Heat Max Toe Warmers on a plain background

Hot Hands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These single-use toe warmers stop stinky feet and are perfect to throw in your car for warm feet at a hands’ reach.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2.2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, activated charcoal, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Thin
  • Odor-absorbing
  • Ingredients don’t hurt the environment

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

These toe warmers from HotHands are our go-to when we need a little bit of extra insulation in our shoes. All you need to do is remove them from the pack and shake them for up to eight hours of heat. They are super thin so that you won’t feel any extra bulk, and they contain odor-absorbing activated charcoal, so if you do start to sweat, you won’t notice any stink.

Easiest to trim: Thermrup Electric Heated Insole Foot Warmers

A pair of Warmfits Rechargeable Heated Insoles on a plain background

Thermrup

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get insoles for the whole family—with peace of mind that they’ll fit—with these lightweight, battery-operated inserts.

Specs

  • Weight: .62 lbs.
  • Material: Nylon, EVA foam
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Unknown

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Washable
  • Even heat distribution

Cons

  • Short battery life compared to other insoles on our list

These heated insoles from Warmfits can last for up to four hours. The included cable connects to the battery, which can be charged using rechargeable batteries. Plus, you can cut the soles to fit your shoes and relax, knowing they’re made from comfortable EVA foam.

Best customizable: Hotronic S4+ Universal Foot Warmer

A pair of Hotronic S4 Universal Foot Warmers on a plain background

Hotronic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get the perfect fit with these insoles that can last you from 2.5-25 hours.

Specs

  • Weight: 1 lb.
  • Material: Polyurethane
  • Power source: Battery powered
  • Heat range: Uknown

Pros

  • Last up to 21 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Switch design prevents accidental turn-off
  • Wiring is thin and not noticeable

Cons

  • Expensive

These heated insoles for shoes from Hotronic are all you need for custom heat. Though it does include insoles, it also has two separate heating elements that can attach to the toe of your own orthotic, with four heat settings. The batteries can last up to 21 hours, depending on the heat output, in cold climates with temperatures that can get as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These feet warmers stick to the bottom of your socked feet and are cheap—and easy—to keep around.

Specs

  • Weight: Entire package is 2 lbs.
  • Material: Iron powder, water, salt, and wood fiber
  • Power source: Air-activated
  • Heat range: 100°F-115°F

Pros

  • Long-lasting
  • Won’t budge
  • Natural heat

Cons

  • You’re bound to come across a dud pair of warmers
  • Can’t control temperature

HotHands heated insoles are air-activated, safely made, and can last for up to nine hours. They’re great for winter sports and outdoor activities like tailgating, yard work, dog walks, and more.

What to consider when buying the best heated insoles

To find the best heated insoles for you, think about how often you’ll be using them, what kinds of outdoor activities you’ll be doing, and the temperatures you’re expecting. Do you need something that will last for hours, or do you want to prioritize heat settings? Do you already wear shoe supports and need something customizable? Are you looking for something disposable and budget-friendly? We’ve created this guide to help you answer those questions and get one step closer to warm feet.

Need the perfect boot warmer for your ski trip?

Perhaps the most popular reason for purchasing heated insoles is skiing. Using a heated insole can extend your time on the mountain by preventing pain and cramping caused by the cold.

If you’re looking for a warming insole to slip inside your ski boot, ensure you get one that you can customize to fit the room inside the boot, particularly around the toe box. You’ll also want a boot warmer that will last more than a couple of runs; if you’re looking for a full day of skiing, go for a unit that has at least five to six hours of battery life. We also recommend grabbing an insole with a water-resistant battery pack. Even though your feet are likely protected from the snow by your ski pants, there is still a chance moisture will sneak in; waterproof or resistant insoles will prevent damage over time, as well as keep you safe.

If you’re entirely new to rechargeable insoles, you should know that most models come with an external battery that can attach to your shoe or be placed in a pack to wrap around your leg or ankle. They require a set of wires to plug the insole into the battery. If you’re using a heated insole for skiing, make sure you select a pair with super durable wires that won’t stretch or snap if you take a tumble. Of course, when you go inside, you can change into your heated slippers to keep your feet warm and cozy.

Will you be outside in below-freezing temperatures?

Maybe you aren’t a winter sports fanatic, and you need something for everyday use because you live in a freezing locale. If this is the case, the most important thing to consider is the included heat settings.

Many heated insoles will come with a few heat levels; some need to be manually set; others can be controlled via remote. Remember, when you use the highest heat setting on any insole, you will decrease the battery life faster than a cooler heat setting. You’ll still be able to squeeze out a couple of hours with consistent heat, but you might not be able to make it through a winter trek before the battery dies. It’s a good idea to take the insoles out for a little test drive before committing to more prolonged activities like hikes or an errand marathon. That way, you can figure out which setting is right for you, keeping your feet warm, not sweaty. However, it’s recommended you wear socks with your heated insoles to absorb any potential sweat.

Are you constantly scrunching up your toes to get the blood flowing?

While evenly dispersed heat is never a bad thing, some people need to target specific areas in order to get the relief they need. Just like your fingers get chilly before your palms, your toes are usually the first part of your feet to feel the effects of extreme cold. How many times have you found yourself standing outside desperately wiggling your toes, scrunching them up, or jumping up and down just to try and feel them again? If this sounds like you, and you have good circulation elsewhere, maybe all you need is a set of really great toe warmers.

Toe warmers are significantly smaller than insoles, making them a little more susceptible to moving around or getting scrunched up in the shoe; they also have a bit more trouble connecting to a battery via wires (which are connected to the heel in most insoles). This is why we actually recommend sticking to a disposable, adhesive toe warmer. You’ll get the heat you need, for an extended period of time, without breaking the bank or struggling to flatten them out at the end of the day.

What are the best heated insoles that will last for hours on camping our hunting trips?

Some winter activities require you to be outside in the cold for long periods of time. Hunting, camping, and trekking can leave you feeling frozen, especially if you haven’t prepared properly. Similar to prioritizing heat over longevity, if you need the maximum amount of battery life out of your heated insoles, you might need to sacrifice the highest temperatures or a variety of temperature settings. However, not having tons of levels to choose from means more concentrated, evenly dispersed heat that won’t get cooler with each passing hour as the battery’s energy fades.

You can also look for extra features to keep your heated insoles lasting longer. The best heated insoles for long days will include batteries you can charge in the car. This means you can charge on the way to your trip or activity while also keeping the option open for a quick boost.

Do you want to stay warm but keep your current insoles?

Orthotics and insoles are extremely common and used by people of all ages to support their arches, relieve strain, cushion calluses, and minimize symptoms of tendinitis. More serious conditions are often treated with custom-molded insoles prescribed by podiatrists. If you already have insoles you love, but find yourself needing a little bit of extra warmth, there are options out there.

Some heated insoles come in a pack, and some sell their parts separately. This is great for folks who have orthotics but need a heating element. The packs will instruct you where to place the protected element on your insole, typically on the toe area, and how to connect all necessary cables or wires. You generally won’t need to do anything else; any individual heating element will be safe for you to use without adding anything extra. However, do not try to remove the heating element embedded in traditional heated insoles; this could be dangerous and result in injury. If you tend to get cold easily, you should also check a pair of heated hand warmers or heated gloves.

Best budget heated insoles

You don’t need to spend a ton of money on heated insoles, especially if you only need them a few days out of the year. You can easily address frigid feet for well under $45. Disposable foot warmers work great and are a better fit for tighter budgets. Most of them just need a quick shake to combine the chemicals inside before you adhere them to the bottom of your shoe. Disposable insoles have a three- to four-year shelf life, so you don’t have to use them right away. This makes them great for a couple of winter vacations.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated insoles cost?

Whether rechargeable or single-use, the best heated insoles can cost between $20-$200.

Q: Can heated insoles get wet?

As a general rule, you don’t want to submerge any batteries in water. We don’t recommend buying heated insoles if you suspect your feet will be soaked by the end of the day. However, some models are water-resistant and work well to wick away sweat and other droplets. To be safe, never assume something is waterproof unless specifically stated.

Q: Are heated insoles safe for children to use?

Yes, so long as your children can verbally express discomfort. Heated insoles are totally safe, but you want to make sure your child can tell you if they start to feel too hot. Look for an insole that says it’s specifically for kids to ensure the right fit and rest easy with the knowledge that all necessary safety precautions have been taken when it comes to the design.

Q: Are expensive insoles worth it?

If your toes are always cold, it is probably worth it to invest in a reliable model that will last. More expensive models typically have better batteries, consistent heat regulation, a more comfortable design, and longer life overall. If you only use foot warmers every so often, or you’re just looking for something to add a touch of heat, you won’t necessarily need to invest in an insole for the long term.

Q: Can I use heated insoles to treat foot pain?

Applying a warm compress is a great way to treat foot pain, so heated insoles are a sound swap. Consult with your doctor or physical therapist before slipping some heated insoles into your shoes for medical purposes.

Final thoughts on the best heated insoles

The best heated insoles are going to keep your feet warm so you can enjoy your favorite winter activities. From rechargeable to disposable, these foot warmers are a great way to relieve any pain or discomfort you feel during the coldest time of the year. Consider how much time you’ll be spending outside, how much extra heat you need, and what you’ll be doing while wearing your new foot warmers. Once you can answer these questions, you’ll be ready to purchase a great pair of heated insoles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated insoles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best hand warmers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-hand-warmers/ Wed, 10 Feb 2021 13:59:28 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-hand-warmers-2/
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Whether you’re looking for reusable, rechargeable, or disposable hand warmers, there’s one that’s right for you.

The post The best hand warmers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four different hand warmers separated into fourths on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best budget An orange box of HotHands Warmers on a plain background HotHands Warmers
SEE IT

Just shake-and-go to get warmth on-the-go with this wallet-friendly hand warmers.
Best rechargeable A blue OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer on a plain background OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer
SEE IT

Get up to 15 hours of warmth in just five seconds.
Best for hunting A Hunter Safety System Heated Muff on a plain background Hunter Safety System Heated Muff
SEE IT

This fleeced-line muff that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours.

If you’re someone whose extremities suffer in the cold, think about investing in hand warmers. Have you ever tried tying your shoes, finding your car keys, or getting out your credit card when you can’t feel your fingers? Not fun. Cold weather can lead to poor circulation, which can, in turn, lead to uselessly frigid hands and frozen fingers. Hand warmers are a great way to keep you comfortable for hours at a time so you can get on with your life and stop desperately puffing warm air into cupped palms. They’re discreet, effective, and super portable, making them suitable for use on the go. They’re also great for camping, hiking, ice skating, and hockey, as well as non-sporting events like watching holiday parades, tailgating, waiting in line for the newest iPhone, you name it. You’ve probably used disposable hand warmers if you’ve ever gone skiing, but there are more long-lasting products we think you’ll want to see. The best hand warmers help you say goodbye to tripling up on gloves just to walk to the grocery store.

How we chose the best hand warmers

We didn’t want to leave you with cold feet looking for the best hand warmers, especially if you’re trying to prevent frostbite or pack your emergency car kit. We looked at critical reviews, under recommendations, and conducted heavy research to find the best hand warmers.

The best hand warmers: Reviews & Recommendations

Hand warmers are just one of the many things you can bring with you on an outdoor adventure to keep you warm. From football games to fall hikes, one of our choices should stop frozen fingers before they happen.

Best overall: HotSnapZ Reusable Hand Warmers

Red and green HotSnapZ Reusable Hand Warmers on a plain background

HotSnapZ

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 30-40 minutes
  • Temperature range: 115-120°F

Pros

  • Reusable
  • Last 200-300 uses
  • Instant heat

Cons

  • Doesn’t last as long as other options on this list

These HotSnapz hand warmers produce instant heat without using electricity or other conducting material. They last for 30 to 40 minutes, so they’re the perfect companion for a brisk morning walk or a quick errand. After your first use, simply boil them for 10 to 15 minutes; (we recommend fixing yourself a cup of tea with some of the water while you wait), let cool, then snap the internal metal disk and soak up the heat.

Best reusable long-lasting warmers: Zippo Hand Warmer

A green Zippo Hand Warmer on a plain background

Zippo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 6-12 hours
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Refillable and reusable
  • Long-lasting
  • Flameless warmth

Cons

  • Not TSA-friendly

Zippo hand warmers are the way to go if you think a refillable option is right for you. Zippo makes both a six- and 12-hour model in various colors and styles; each comes with a protective case, lighter fluid funnel, and detailed safety guide. You can also easily purchase additional lighter fuel when you need to refill.

Best rechargeable: OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer

A blue OCOOPA Rechargeable Hand Warmer on a plain background

Ocoopa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: Up to 15 hours
  • Temperature range: Up to 131°F

Pros

  • Safe on skin
  • Can be used as a power bank
  • All-day warming

Cons

  • Casing scratches easily

This rechargeable hand warmer helps you stay toasty all day. It lasts between eight to 15 hours with a full battery from just three-and-a-half hours of charging time. Simply plug the device into a USB-C or micro USB-compatible charger. Adjust the heat by selecting one of the three levels based on the outside temperature, calculated for 5, 32, and 50 degrees Fahrenheit. Bonus: This one is safe on the skin.

Best for skiing: Snow Deer Heated Gloves

A pair of black Snow Deer Heated Gloves on a plain background

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: 2.5-6 hours depending on settings
  • Temperature range: Up to 150°F

Pros

  • Water-resistant
  • Can use with phone
  • Soft lining inside glove

Cons

  • Palm runs small

These rechargeable heated gloves come in five sizes, from small to XX-Large. They’re perfect for a day on the mountain and stay warm between two-and-a-half to six hours. There are three temperature settings, starting at 100 degrees Fahrenheit and going all the way up to 150 degrees. Durable and water-resistant, these are also equipped with touch sensors so you can still use your phone. For more options, here’s our list of the best heated gloves.

Best for hunting: Hunter Safety System Heated Muff

A Hunter Safety System Heated Muff on a plain background

Hunter Safety System

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: Yes
  • Duration: N/A
  • Temperature range: N/A

Pros

  • Storage pockets
  • Soft lining
  • Ergonomic

Cons

  • Power bank not included

Looking for the best hand warmers for hunting? This muff from Hunter Safety System does, in fact, come heated, though you can also purchase a model sans extra heat. The interior is lined with fleece that contains heat coils that can stay active for up to five hours. You’ll need to charge and connect your own power bank, which can easily slide into the designated built-in pocket. Keep in mind that this model is less water-resistant than others, so if you foresee rain during an all-day hunt, look for something that is guaranteed waterproof.

Best budget: HotHands Warmers

An orange box of HotHands Warmers on a plain background

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Reusable: No
  • Duration: Up to 10 hours
  • Temperature range: 140-160°F

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Long-lasting
  • Provides consistent heat

Cons

  • Not reusable
  • Takes 15-30 minutes to heat up

These disposable hand warmers from HotHands are a staple when it comes to keeping warm. All you need to do is shake the pack vigorously for a couple of seconds, triggering a safe chemical reaction that will lead to up to 10 hours of consistent heat in 15 to 30 minutes.

Things to consider when looking for the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers are designed to keep you toasty throughout the duration of your outdoor activity. Some are reusable, some are rechargeable, and some are disposable, perfect if you want to toss them in the trash after you hit the slopes or get a drink après ski. We’ve broken down the various types of hand warmers out there and also provided some of our favorite options below.

Let’s start with the basics: chemically activated, reusable hand warmers

Reusable hand warmers are a fantastic way to keep cozy in cold weather. They eliminate the need to run out to store for replacements, plus, they can be easily shared. There are a few popular types of reusable hand warmers, differentiated by heating mechanism.

Some reusable pairs look like ice/heat packs found in first aid kits. These are chemically activated. Inside each pack is a metal disk that needs to be snapped or bent to release a heat-generating compound. Inside, sodium acetate (a food-safe ingredient found in salt), water, and energy mix to form solid crystals. This process produces an exothermic reaction, raising the pack’s temperature to roughly 130 degrees Fahrenheit in under 10 seconds. After a pack’s first use, you’ll need to boil the hand warmers for approximately 10 minutes before using them again, effectively reactivating the chemicals and returning the sodium acetate to its liquid form. These typically last between 30 minutes to an hour, though you can extend the heating time by adding extra packs or keeping them in coat pockets. If you’re an athlete, you can use them for additional relief on sore muscles. They are safe on the skin, but of course, take precautions when handling hot objects.

What are the best hand warmers for longevity?

If you need more than an hour of heat time but like the idea of simple reusable hand warmers without worrying about recharging, lighter-fuel-based models are the best option for you. Yes, we understand that filling something with lighter fluid, activating it, and stuffing it in your pockets seems a little outlandish, but trust us when we say you’ll keep warm all day.

Much like a regular lighter, these hand warmers, once filled with fuel, use a catalytic burner to generate heat. (Unlike a regular burner, you won’t see any external flames.) To ignite, hold a flame to it for roughly 10 seconds. Doing so will create a small internal furnace that can burn anywhere from six to 12 hours, depending on the model. Remember, once the warmer is ignited, you won’t be able to stop the heat until it naturally burns off. You can, however, place the hand warmer on a fireproof surface once you’re done using it and let it naturally smolder out.

Refillable hand warmers are not meant to be applied directly to the skin; most come with a small pouch into which you can place the warmer and then hold or slip into a coat pocket. Due to the delicate nature of the fill material, a.k.a. flammable fluid, we don’t recommend using these for intense sports such as skiing, snowboarding, ice skating, or hockey. We do, however, recommend them for long hikes, camping trips, cold offices, and cross-country car rides. There’s nothing worse than driving through Colorado in the middle of winter when your heat is broken.

Consider rechargeable hand warmers

If you’re ready to get a little more high-tech, plenty of rechargeable hand warmers are out there. These typically use electricity and a lithium-ion battery to generate heat. The models might be slightly thicker than refillable options, but they don’t differ too much in overall size, so they’ll still fit nicely in pockets or gloves.

The pros of rechargeables include long-lasting warmth with the ability to heat between two to eight hours. Plus, if you’re done with your outdoor activity or sufficiently warmed up, you can simply turn off the device. Many have heat-customization settings and the ability to charge other electronic devices simultaneously. You just have to remember to charge them. Simply plug in the hand warmer when not in use, and you’ll never be left out in the cold.

While we love a rechargeable option, there are a few cons you should know about. Rechargeable hand warmers are susceptible to water damage, so it’s probably best to keep them away from snow and sleet. Also, heat consistency can be a bit sporadic depending on the temperature outside. The overall heating time can also be affected by the cold, impacting the battery lifespan. Overall, we consider these to be minor impediments because a rechargeable warmer’s heating time is guaranteed to be longer than a chemically activated option, and the custom control is far greater than a lighter fluid-filled hand warmer.

Do you plan on hitting the slopes?

One of the most common reasons to purchase hand warmers is to keep your fingers from freezing while on the mountains. Though there are some amazing regular ski and winter gloves out there (heated, featured above, and not heated), it doesn’t hurt to have a little extra warmth, especially if you’re outside shredding all day. Hand warmers for skiers or snowboarders usually need to fit inside the glove rather than slide inside a coat pocket; they also need to be relatively flexible or small if you’re skiing with poles.

Though certainly non-traditional, it’s worth looking for glove/hand-warmer hybrids. Heated gloves use the same lithium-ion battery technology as the rechargeable ones listed above, but the active heaters are fit to the glove, so you can maintain grip and flexibility without maneuvering around a large chunk of plastic and metal. Plus, you won’t have to worry about the snow because these gloves are designed with an outer waterproof shell, which protects the batteries from any liquid damage.

Our second favorite option for skiing is the disposable hand warmer from brands like HotHands or Little Hotties. We’ll dive deeper into disposable hand warmers when we talk about our favorite budget pick, but these are a good option to keep in the back of your brain when thinking about ski-appropriate heating options. And when you’re done skiing, you can slip into a pair of heated slippers, or shoes with heated insoles, for warmth and comfort in the lodge.

Do you need something classic for hunting?

While muffs aren’t going to help much if your hands need to be out and at the ready, they’re a traditional way to stay cozy in a blind or tree stand. Muffs are, of course, reusable and can be adjusted to fit your frame. They’re made from many materials, including fur, shearling, or synthetic fabric. The outer layer will often be water-resistant and windproof, so you won’t need to worry about inclement weather. Some muffs even have special internal pockets for extra hand warmers to slide in, and others come with external pockets or shell pockets, so not only will your hands stay warm, but you’ll also get some additional storage space. A muff’s durability and reliability make it a great choice for hunters everywhere. We recommend bringing this and maybe one or two disposable hand warmers along with you, just in case you need even more warmth on those brisk early mornings.

Best budget hand warmers: What you get for under $20

Luckily, hand warmers don’t tend to be prohibitively expensive, unless you’re looking for high-end gloves or a really large rechargeable battery. That being said, reusable options will be more expensive than disposable ones, though disposable ones may be less cost-effective over time, depending on how you use them. If you want a more budget-friendly reusable hand warmer, the first thing to look for is brand reputation and clear safety guidelines; this is especially true if you go for something chemically activated or lighter-fluid-based. Disposable hand warmers are likely to be the cheapest option and work great for almost any outdoor activity; They’re thin and flexible, and they slide easily into gloves or pockets.

FAQs

Q: Can hand warmers expire?

Technically, yes. The expiration for each product is brand-specific. For example, the HotHands warmers we listed above have a shelf life of three to four years. Rechargeable hand warmers usually have a life span that includes a certain amount of charges (typically 300). Low-tech chemically activated chargers also tend to have an expiration date; HotSnapZ usually become defective after 200 to 300 snaps. Check out each product’s specs for more information on lifespan.

Q: How do disposable hand warmers work?

Like reusable hand warmers, disposable hand warmers rely on chemical activation instead of lighter fluid or lithium batteries. Each pouch typically includes salt, iron powder, activated carbon, and a little water. When the pouch is taken out of its airtight seal and exposed to oxygen, the iron powder causes an exothermic reaction, generating heat. The carbon helps evenly disperse the heat, and an absorbent material like wood or a polymer helps retain it throughout the day.

Q: Do I need to order a separate pouch for hand warmers?

Generally speaking, you do not need to purchase a separate hand warmer pouch. Refillable hand warmers will definitely need to be placed in a pouch to avoid burns, but the model you buy should come with one. Of course, if you end up losing it, definitely place an order for another. Other hand warmers, including rechargeable, chemically activated, and disposable styles, are safe on the skin once they reach the appropriate temperature. If you want an extra barrier because it’s just a little too hot in the mitten, you can place them in bags or wrap them in a thin cloth. We recommend using sunglasses bags or thin socks.

Q: Can you take hand warmers on a plane?

Handwarmers using carbon, charcoal, and iron compounds are allowed in carry-on and checked baggage. Handwarmers that use hazardous or flammable liquids are not allowed. Check TSA and FAA guidelines for more details.

Final thoughts on the best hand warmers

The best hand warmers for you fit your lifestyle and needs. If you’re active in short bursts, a reusable, chemically activated option might be right for you. If you’re going on longer camping trips with no electricity in sight, grab a refillable, lighter-fuel-based model. If you’re constantly going numb in the fingertips and need something reliable and reusable, reach for the rechargeable one. And if you just need something to get you out and about or on the slopes with all-day protection from the cold, consider a disposable model. No matter what, stay bundled out there.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hand warmers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-bird-feeder-cameras/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580793
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

Bird feeder cameras allow you to see your feathered friends in new ways.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best bird feeder cameras sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A blue Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder filled with seed against a white background with a gray gradient. Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder
SEE IT

The Bird Buddy offers stylish design, quality images, and a fun app with real-time notifications.
Best for hummingbirds A blue BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera against a white background with a grey gradient. BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera
SEE IT

The nectar attachment of this feeder can be swapped out to hold seed as well.
Best budget A white WYZE Cam v3 against a white background with a gray gradient. WYZE Cam v3
SEE IT

This budget option lets you see the birds without any extras.

Bird feeder cameras make documenting our feathered friends fun and easy, but they aren’t created equally. Some are best for bird-watching in your own backyard, while others are better suited to remote locations. More expensive models have features like solar panels, video options, and smart bird identification, while basic, budget models make feeder photography accessible for just about everyone. No matter what you are looking for, the best bird feeder cameras will allow you to capture quality images of the birds who call your area home. 

How we chose the best bird feeder cameras

There are dozens of bird feeder cameras on the market. Though many of them have the same basic features, they don’t all offer the same level of important features like durability, battery life, and accuracy of species detection. 

To arrive at our top picks, we relied on our own assessment of each device, including hands-on experience with multiple models. Because bird feeder cameras must be durable, weatherproof, and offer long-lasting performance, we also leaned heavily on user experiences and favored well-reviewed products. 

Features like accurate bird identification, solar panel availability, and useful accessories also helped push some models into the limelight. Other options like real-time notification and color night vision were nice to have but not essentials. Still, they didn’t tend to figure into our final decision simply because of their somewhat limited value for bird photography. 

The best bird feeder cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Choosing a bird feeder camera can be tough. There are dozens of available models, and the prices can range from less than $50 all the way up to $400 or more. The key to finding the right bird feeder camera is not necessarily shopping by price but knowing which features are must-haves and which are not. Not everyone will benefit from AI, for example. You may even prefer to use your own knowledge to identify the birds in your photographs. Below are our favorite options, suitable for a range of situations and users. 

Best overall: Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder

A blue Bird Buddy Smart Bird Feeder filled with seed is mounted to a green post.

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 1,000 bird species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 5-megapixel photos, 720p video
  • Battery: 4000 mAh rechargeable lithium-ion battery, optional solar panel

Pros

  • Sharp images with a 120-degree field of view
  • Weatherproof from -5°F to 120°F
  • The smartphone app allows you to see feeders all over the world
  • Compatible with an optional solar panel and lots of accessories
  • Three mounting options

Cons

  • No local storage, so it can’t be used without Wi-Fi
  • Video resolution is lower than some competitors

The Bird Buddy bird feeder camera is relatively new, but it has much to offer, so it earns our top spot. The bird feeder is attractively designed, so it will look nice in your yard or on your deck with some solar lights, which is an important feature for many. It’s available in blue or vibrant yellow, so you can choose an option that fits your style best. I really enjoy the look of the blue Bird Buddy on the side of my porch, which is a big plus. 

The camera module is removable, which is important when it comes time to clean the feeder. It can take five-megapixel photos or offers 720p live-streamed video. The image quality won’t be that of your dedicated mirrorless or DSLR camera, but it is nicely detailed and properly exposed even in backlit situations. And being able to tune in to watch live as a bird chows down is pretty neat. 

The camera’s 120-degree field of view is wide enough to capture birds hanging out on the feeder’s side. You can also buy multiple accessories through Bird Buddy to extend the perch or feed different species. With the solar roof (the model we thoroughly tested and reviewed), you’ll never need to think about charging the camera. Without the solar roof, you’ll need to charge the camera every 5 to 15 days.

The Bird Buddy relies on AI to automatically recognize over 1,000 species of birds. The Bird Buddy app notifies you when you have new visitors to your feeder, which is always exciting. You can even browse other Bird Buddy devices all over the world to see species that you wouldn’t otherwise encounter. Plus, the images from your device contribute to migration information for conservation databases. You’ll be helping science progress while getting fun images of your feathered friends. 

Best trail camera: TECHNAXX Full HD Birdcam TX-165 

The green TECHNAXX Full HD Birdcam TX-165 against a white background with a gray gradient.

TECHNAXX

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 8-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 4 AA batteries give it a working time of up to 6 months

Pros

  • Sturdy trail-cam style feeder
  • 6-month battery life
  • Removable water basin means it can be a feeder or a birdbath
  • Captures slow-motion video

Cons

  • No smartphone app or bird identification features
  • Memory card storage is less convenient than Wi-Fi or Bluetooth

This hybrid bird feeder camera is as tough as any trail camera. However, unlike most trail cameras, it can focus as close as 2 to 6 inches and offers a 100-degree field of view. This means you’ll get much better images of visiting birds than you would with a typical trail cam. The TX-165 takes standard AA batteries but has a working time of up to 6 months. You can leave it in a secure, remote location for a long time without worrying about the battery going flat.

The TX-165 also has a few features you won’t find on other bird feeder cameras. You can fill it with birdseed or fill the removable basin with water and turn it into a birdbath camera. It also takes impressive eight-megapixel images and full HD 1080p video. It’s also capable of 25 frames per second for slow-motion videos. 

Best for bird boxes: Hawk Eye HD Nature Cam

The Hawk Eye HD Nature Cam with included wires against a white background with a gray gradient.

Hawk Eye

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: None
  • App compatibility: N/A, no app available
  • Resolution: 700 tvl (television lines)
  • Battery: None (includes a 75-foot power cable)

Pros

  • Compact, so you can hide it almost anywhere
  • Night vision lets you capture clear images in poor light 
  • Durable and temperature-tolerant to between 35°F and 105°F

Cons

  • Only shoots video 
  • Not waterproof
  • Needs to be plugged into a power supply

Birds do a lot more than just eat birdseed, so at some point, you might want to step up to a birdhouse camera. Because the Hawk Eye Nature Cam isn’t built into a feeder, it’s much more flexible than most bird cams. Its small size means you can put it anywhere—on treetops, fence posts, or even in animal burrows (though please exercise caution when putting it down a snake hole). Or it can be wired discreetly into a bird box for a 24/7 look at growing bird families, from egg to fledgling. 

The Hawk Eye Nature Cam is meant for live-streaming to your television set. The video resolution is clear and sharp, with 700 tvl (television lines) and 10 infrared diodes. This lets you view clear video even in the darkened environment of a typical bird box. Note, however, that you will need an RCA to USB adapter if you have a modern TV. 

The Hawk Eye does have a few drawbacks. It has no battery, so you’ll have to mess with a long extension cord to get it set up. It also isn’t waterproof. If you want to attach it to an unsheltered location, you’ll have to build waterproof housing or limit your use to dry weather. Finally, you can connect the camera to your PC and use additional software to grab photos and video segments from the live stream, but it’s not designed to capture high-resolution stills.

Best for hummingbirds: BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera

A blue BirdDock Hummingbird Feeder Camera against a white background with a grey gradient.

BirdDock

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies species and alerts you when birds approach 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 2-megapixel photos, full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 6400 mAh rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of operating time 

Pros

  • AI can recognize around 5,000 different species, including hummingbirds
  • Rechargeable batteries provide 20 to 30 days of use
  • Hummingbird attachment is removable

Con:

  • Still photos are much lower resolution than those shot by similar feeders 
  • The app is clunky and difficult to use

The BirdDock is a flexible bird feeder camera that isn’t limited to just capturing photos of seed-eaters. It also offers a removable hummingbird attachment featuring five flower-shaped feeding ports with 0.16-inch holes to keep bees and other insects out.  When you want to switch to photographing songbirds, you can remove the hummingbird feeder and fill the device with seeds. 

Like other AI feeders, the BirdDock will identify species and alert you when one is approaching the feeder. It has night vision, too, which could help you identify other critters that visit your feeder overnight. This bird feeder camera features a 160-degree field of view and can be used with or without an SD memory card. It provides an impressive battery life of up to 30 days. You can also purchase a separate solar panel to keep the device charged in sunny weather.

The BirdDock has two primary drawbacks: It captures still photos at a relatively low resolution of only two megapixels (though it does also capture full HD 1080p video). It also doesn’t have an especially user-friendly app. Some users complain that the bird identification feature isn’t accurate and that the app frequently disconnects from the camera.

Best for bird identification: Netvue Birdfy Pro

The blue and white Netvue Birdfy Pro bird feeder camera with accessories against a white background with a gray gradient.

Netvue

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: Yes, identifies more than 6,000 different species 
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: Full HD 1080p video
  • Battery: 5000 mAh rechargeable batteries 

Pros

  • Can identify more than 6,000 different species 
  • Long battery life (the manufacturer claims up to six months of use)
  • Extra features like squirrel recognition and color night vision

Cons

  • The bird identification service costs extra
  • Storing photos on the cloud requires a subscription

The Netvue Birdfy rivals the Bird Buddy with features like ease of use, durability, and photo quality. It has an impressive array of extra features like color night vision. The AI can recognize squirrels, and the built-in microphone lets you yell at them when they’re caught robbing the feeder. You can also upgrade your feeder with add-ons like a solar panel, hummingbird feeder, and perch extension.

The Birdfy has the same features as most other feeders, including automatic capture/motion detection and real-time notification. It takes clear video at close range, provides a 135-degree field of view, and even offers 8x magnification if you want to study the fine details.

Birdfy has an impressive database of 6,000 species, though reviewers note that it isn’t always accurate. When it does misidentify a bird, you have the option to submit a report via the app. This is evidence that Netvue is constantly working to improve its software. 

The primary drawback of the Netvue bird feeder camera is you may have to pay for various subscriptions depending on what features you want access to. For example, if you want to take advantage of the bird identification feature, you must pay for a subscription. Likewise, a subscription is required if you want to store photos on the Netvue Cloud for longer than 30 days. 

Best budget: WYZE Cam v3

A white WYZE Cam v3 against a white background with a gray gradient.

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs

  • AI: No species identification
  • App compatibility: Android and iOS
  • Resolution: 1080p full HD video
  • Battery: No battery

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Weatherproof 
  • Compact for easy mounting

Cons

  • Minimum focus distance is around 12 inches
  • No battery; needs to be plugged into a power supply

Bird feeder cameras with all the bells and whistles can be expensive. A $200 feeder might be outside your budget, or you may not need all the features that expensive bird feeder cameras offer. The WYZE Cam v3 is essentially an outdoor security camera. You won’t be able to fill it with birdseed or attach a hummingbird accessory. But you can mount this sturdy little camera next to any commercial bird feeder or install it close to a high-traffic part of your backyard. 

The WYZE Cam v3 offers all the basic features you need in a bird cam. It’s weatherproof with an IP65 rating. It takes photos when it senses motion, and it has an app so you can see what’s happening outside in real-time. 

The WYZE Cam does have a few drawbacks. One of these is the focus distance. While most dedicated bird cams can focus on subjects as close as a few inches, the WYZE Cam isn’t designed for closeups. You’ll have to mount it at least a foot away from your feeder, meaning you won’t see a lot of detail in your photos. 

The WYZE Cam is also wired. It comes with a weatherproof six-foot USB cable, so you’ll have to install it close to your home. On the plus side, once installed, you won’t have to worry about changing or recharging the battery or losing your video stream on a cloudy day.

Things to consider before buying a bird feeder camera

If you love bird watching but don’t want to sit waiting with your binoculars, a bird feeder camera will allow you to capture photos and videos of birds even when you aren’t around.

A bird feeder camera is meant for permanent outdoor use. This means it needs features you probably don’t consider when shopping for other photography gear. Here are some of the most important things you’ll want to think about when shopping for a bird feeder camera.

Durability

Bird feeder cameras can be subject to some serious abuse. The sun’s UV rays and hot temperatures can degrade plastic casings over time. These devices must also withstand storms and sprinklers, remaining waterproof from season to season. Of course, they should also be tough enough to handle the beaks and claws of visiting critters—not just the birds they’re intended for but other potential visitors like squirrels and mice.

Image quality

The image quality of bird feeder cameras is dependent on a few things. Resolution is the first thing most think of, and indeed, it is important with these devices. If you want clear, sharp images, look for bird feeder cameras with higher resolution. These compact cameras won’t offer numbers you may be used to in smartphones or mirrorless cameras, though. Five to eight megapixels for stills and 1080p for video tend to be the highest available at the moment.  However, if you aren’t concerned with high levels of detail, you could save some money and opt for a device with a less impressive resolution. 

The second factor of image quality is close focusing distance. The majority of shots taken by a bird feeder camera will be up-close. As a result, look for a device capable of getting clear photos at a very short distance. Even as close as a few inches is ideal.  Finally, birds don’t tend to sit still for long. Because of this, the camera should be able to freeze action, even in low light conditions like early morning or cloudy days. 

WiFi connectivity

WiFi isn’t necessarily a critical feature, but it’s something to consider if you’re going to keep your feeder close to your house. Most people don’t want to trek outside daily to download photos or swap out a memory card. A WiFi connection will let you see what your camera captured at any time of day in any weather. Treating it like a smart-home device will save you from having to venture into the cold, heat, or rain unless you need to change the battery or add birdseed.

Pay attention to the range of the device, too. Shy birds won’t approach your device if it is too close to your home. If it’s too far away, you won’t be able to view your photos without exiting your home.

Mounting options

Each bird feeder camera will have somewhat different requirements for how you install them. Some require a pole, some can be mounted to a fence post, and others can be hung. Depending on where you want the feeder and what tools you have available for installation, some of these options may be better than others for your particular needs.

Battery life

Some bird feeder cameras take basic replaceable AA batteries; others rely on solar panels to power internal rechargeable batteries. Either way, you’ll want to pick a camera that isn’t power-hungry. A good battery will ensure you aren’t constantly changing batteries or missing photos because your camera goes dark on a cloudy day. 

Choosing a camera with motion detection is a good place to start. These cameras only activate when there’s something to take a photo of, which helps the battery last longer.

FAQs

Q: How do bird feeder cameras work?

Most bird feeder cameras are triggered by motion. When a bird visits the feeder, the camera will capture a still photo or record video, depending on its design. Some smart bird feeder cameras can also identify species by comparing photos to thousands of stored images of each individual bird species.

Q: What color bird feeder attracts more birds?

A 2017 study found that green or silver bird feeders tend to attract the most visitors, but color preference also seems to be species-specific. Robins in the study, for example, preferred black feeders, while greenfinches and starlings didn’t seem to care about color at all. 

Q: Where should I put a bird feeder camera?

Bird feeders should be placed in open spaces but not too far from potential cover. The Humane Society recommends placing feeders 12 feet from brush and trees. This prevents predators from hiding near the feeder and gives the birds cover to fly to if they feel threatened.

Q: Do infrared cameras bother birds?

Infrared light is invisible to birds, so a camera inside a bird box will give you clear pictures while the bird remains in darkness. 

Final thoughts on the best bird feeder cameras

Once limited to nature photographers with long telephoto lenses and lots of patience, bird feeder cameras have made bird photography nearly effortless and available to almost anyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean any camera will do, though. Thinking about what you want to get out of your investment is an important first step in choosing a feeder. If you’re hoping to get up-close, detailed shots, pay attention to the example shots provided by the manufacturer and uploaded by users. Consider how important good battery life is to you, and ask yourself if you really need a camera that will identify already familiar local birds.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeder cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-telescopes-under-500/ Mon, 27 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=451591
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

Looking to stargaze on a budget? We’ve got the goods on the best affordable telescopes.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best telescopes under $500 are a great starting point
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500. Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ
SEE IT

A solid build and specs, paired with smartphone-guided sky recognition technology, makes this telescope perfect for starry-eyed explorers.
Best for viewing planets Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets. Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope
SEE IT

This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for checking out neighboring orbs.
Best for kids Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids. Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit
SEE IT

The entire package is designed to inspire kids during the window where they stare curiously out of the windows.

Telescopes under $500 can provide a passport to the universe without emptying your wallet. In their basic function, telescopes are our connection to the stars. For millennia, humankind has gazed skyward with wonder into the infinite reaches of outer space. And as humans are a curious bunch, our ancestors devised patterns in the movements of celestial bodies, gave them names, and built stories around them. The ancient Egyptians, Babylonians, and Greeks indulged in star worship. But you don’t have to follow those lines to geek out over the vastness of the night sky. It’s just so cool. Fortunately, whatever your motivation for getting under the stars, there is an affordable option for you on our list of the best telescopes under $500.

How we chose the best telescopes under $500

The under-$500 telescope market is crowded with worthy brands and models, so we looked at offerings in that price range from several well-known manufacturers in the space. After narrowing our focus based on personal experience, peer suggestions, critical reviews, and user impressions, we considered aperture, focal length, magnification, build quality, and value to select these five models.

The best telescopes under $500: Reviews & Recommendations

To get the best views of the stars, planets, and other phenomena of outer space, not just any old telescope will get the job done. There are levels of quality and a wide range of price points and features to sort through before you can be sure you’re making the right purchase for what you want out of your telescope, whether it’s multi-thousands, one of the best telescopes for under $1,000, or one of our top picks under $500.

Best overall: Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ

Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ is the best overall telescope under $500.

Celestron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Solid build and specs, paired with the remarkable StarSense Explorer app, make this telescope a perfect introduction to celestial observation.

Specs

  • Focal length: 650mm
  • Aperture: 130mm, f/5
  • Magnification: 65x, 26x

Pros

  • App aids in finding stars
  • Easy to operate
  • Steady altazimuth mount

Cons

  • Eyepieces are both low power

Newbies to astronomy today can have a decidedly different experience than beginners who started stargazing before smartphones were a thing. Instead of carting out maps of the night sky to find constellations, the StarSense Explorer series from Celestron, including the DX 130AZ refractor, makes ample use of your device to bring you closer to the stars. 

With your smartphone resting in the telescope’s built-in dock, the StarSense Explorer app will find your location using the device’s GPS and serve up a detailed list of celestial objects viewable in real time. Looking for the Pleiades cluster? This app will tell you how far away it is from you and then lead you there with on-screen navigation. The app also includes descriptions of those objects, tips for observing them, and other useful info. 

The StarSense Explorer ships with an altazimuth mount equipped with slow-moving fine-tuning controls for both axes so you can find your target smoothly. And for those times you want to explore the night sky without tethering a smartphone, the scope’s red dot finder will help you zero in on your targets. The two eyepieces, measuring 25mm and 10mm, are powerful enough to snag stellar views of the planets but not quite enough to see the details a high-powered eyepiece would deliver.

Best for viewing planets: Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope

Sky-Watcher Skymax 102mm Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope is the best for viewing planets.

Sky-Watcher

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This telescope punches above its weight class in size and power, making it an ideal scope for viewing planets.

Specs

  • Focal length: 1300mm
  • Aperture: 102mm, f/12.7
  • Magnification: 130x, 52x

Pros

  • Great for viewing planets and galaxies
  • Sharp focus and contrast
  • Powerful

Cons

  • Not ideal for deep-space viewing

Let’s be real—most consumers in the market for a moderately priced telescope are in it to gain spectacular views of the planets and galaxies, but probably not much else. And it’s easy to see why. Nothing makes celestial bodies come alive like viewing them in real time, in all their colorful glory.

If that sounds like you, allow us to direct you to the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, a refracting telescope specializing in crisp views of objects like planets and galaxies with ample contrast to make them pop against the dark night sky. The Skymax 102 is based on a Maksutov-Cassegrains design that uses both mirrors and lenses, resulting in a heavy-hitting scope in a very compact and portable unit. A generous 102mm aperture pulls in plenty of light to illuminate the details in objects, and the 1300mm focal length results in intense magnification.

Two included wide-angle eyepieces measuring 25mm and 10mm deliver 130x and 52x magnification, respectively. The package also includes a red-dot finder, V-rail for mounting, 1.25-inch diagonal viewing piece, and a case for transport and storage. Look no further if you’re looking for pure colors across a perfectly flat field in a take-anywhere form factor.

Best for astrophotography: William Optics GuideStar 61 

William Optics GuideStar 61 is the best telescope under $500 for astrophotography.

William Optics

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Top-notch specs and an enviable lens setup make this telescope ideal for astrophotography.

Specs

  • Focal length: 360mm
  • Aperture: f/5.9
  • Magnification: 7x (with 2-inch eyepiece)

Pros

  • Well-appointed specs
  • Sturdy, durable construction
  • Carrying case included

Cons

  • Flattener is an extra purchase

Sometimes you want to share more than descriptions of what you see in the night sky, and that’s where this guidescope comes in, helping you to focus on the best full-frame image. You can go as deep into the details (not to mention debt) as your line of credit will allow in your quest to capture the most impressive images of space. Luckily, though, this is a worthy option at a reasonable price. 

The Williams Optics Guide Star 61 telescope is a refracting-type scope with a 360mm focal length, f/5.9 aperture, and 61mm diameter well-suited to capturing sharp images of planets, moon, and bright deep-sky objects. The GS61 shares many specs with the now-discontinued Zenith Star 61, including focal length, aperture, and diameter, as well as the FPL53 ED doublet lens for high-contrast images.

The scope’s optical tube is about 13 inches long and weighs just 3 lbs.—great for traveling with the included carrying case—with a draw-tube (push-pull) focuser for coarse focusing and a rotating lens assembly for fine focus. Attaching a DSLR camera to the Guide Star 61 is a fairly easy job, but note that the flattener for making that connection is a separate purchase.

Best for kids: Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit

Orion Observer II 60mm AZ Refractor Telescope Starter Kit is the best for kids.

Orion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The entire package is designed to get kids exploring space right out of the box.

Specs

  • Focal length: 700mm
  • Aperture: 60mm, f/11.7
  • Magnification: 70x, 28x

Pros

  • Capable of detailed views of moon and planets
  • Lightweight construction
  • Lots of handy accessories

Cons

  • Not enough optical power to reach deep space

Parents have a limited window of time to recognize and develop their kids’ interests, so kindle a fascination with the stars through a star projector and then fan it with a telescope. That’s what makes the Orion Observer II such a great buy. Seeing the craters on the moon or the rings of Saturn for the first time can affirm your kids’ curiosity about space and expand their concept of the universe—and they can get those goosebumps while learning through this altazimuth refractor telescope.

The Orion Observer II is built to impressive specifications, with a 700mm focal length that provides 71x magnification for viewing the vivid details of planets in our solar system. True glass lenses (not plastic) are a bonus at this price point, and combined with either included Kellner eyepieces (25mm and 10mm), the telescope delivers crisp views of some of space’s most dazzling objects. 

Kids and parents can locate celestial objects with the included red-dot finder. The kit also includes MoonMap 260, a fold-out map that directs viewers to 260 lunar features, such as craters, valleys, ancient lava flows, mountain ranges, and every U.S. and Soviet lunar mission landing site. An included copy of Exploring the Cosmos: An Introduction to the Night Sky gives a solid background before they go stargazing. And with its aluminum tube and tripod, the entire rig is very portable, even for young ones, with a total weight of 4.3 pounds. Find more options for the best telescopes for kids here. (And/or go the opposite direction with a microscope for kids—a love of science begets more science.)

Popular Science by Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is the best for the budget.

Celestron

SEE IT

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. The decision to include this model in our recommendations was made by our reviewer independently of that relationship, but we do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

Why it made the cut: With its feature set, portability, and nice price point, this scope is ready for some serious stargazing without a serious investment.

Specs

  • Focal length: 400mm
  • Aperture: 70mm, f/5.7
  • Magnification: 168x

Pros

  • Bluetooth remote shutter release
  • Ships with two eyepieces
  • Pack included

Cons

  • Lacks optical power for deep space

Getting out of town, whether camping in the wilderness or driving in the countryside, is one of the attractions of stargazing. Out in the great wide open, far away from streetlights, the stars explode even to the naked eye. Add a handy telescope like the Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope—our pick for the best portable telescope under $500—and you’ll see much farther into space. The fact that it’s as affordable as it is moveable just adds to the value.

The Popular Science Celestron Travel Scope 70 Portable Telescope is a well-equipped refractor telescope built for backpacking and adventuring but without skimping on cool gadgets. Whether you’re gazing at celestial or terrestrial objects, the smartphone adapter will aid you in capturing images with your personal device, with an included Bluetooth remote shutter release.

Designed with portability and weight in mind, the entire package fits into an included pack with a total of 3.3 pounds—that includes the telescope, tripod stand, 20mm and 10mm eyepieces, 3x Barlow lens, and more. Download Celestron’s Starry Night software to help you get the most from your astronomy experience. 

Here are some other options from the Celestron and Popular Science collaboration:

What to consider when buying the best telescopes under $500

Optics

There are three types of optics available on consumer telescopes, and they will help you achieve three different goals. Refractor telescopes use a series of glass lenses to bring celestial bodies like the moon and near planets into focus easily. Reflector telescopes—also known as Newtonian scopes for their inventor, Sir Isaac Newton—swap lenses for mirrors and allow stargazers to see deeper into space. Versatile compound telescopes combine these two methods in a smaller, more portable form factor, with results that land right in the middle of the pack. 

Aperture

Photographers will recognize this: The aperture controls the amount of light entering the telescope, like on a manual camera. Aperture is the diameter of the lens or the primary mirror, so a telescope with a large aperture draws more light than a small aperture, resulting in views into deeper space. F-ratio is the spec to watch here. Low f-ratios, such as f/4 or f/5, are usually best for wide-field observation and photography, while high f-ratios like f/15 can make deep-space nebulae and other bodies easier to see and capture. Midpoint f-ratios can get the job done for both.

Mounts

All the lens and mirror power in the world won’t mean much if you attach your telescope to a subpar mount. In general, the more lightweight and portable the tripod mount, the more movement you’ll likely get while gazing or photographing the stars. Investing in a stable mount will improve the viewing experience. The two common mount types are alt-az (altitude-azimuth) and equatorial. Altazimuth mounts operate in the same way as a camera tripod, allowing you to adjust both axes (left-right, up-down), while equatorial mounts also tilt to make it easier to follow celestial objects.

FAQs

Q: What is the most powerful telescope for home use?

The most powerful telescope for home use from this list is the Sky-Watcher Skymax 102, which tops out at 130x magnification with its included eyepieces.

Q: Is a 90mm telescope good?

Yes, a 90mm telescope is good for viewing planetary features like the rings of Saturn and the Great Red Spot on Jupiter.

Q: How much does a telescope cost?

The cost of a telescope varies depending on the brand, model, and construction but there are plenty of affordable options—like the ones on this list.

Q: How powerful does a telescope have to be to see planets?

A telescope with a minimum 60mm aperture has enough power to see planets.

Q: What size telescope do I need to see the rings of Saturn?

You can see the rings of Saturn with as low as a 60mm aperture. 

Q: What size telescope do I need? 

The telescope size you need depends on what you want out of it. This list of best telescopes under $500 gives a good rundown on telescope types, sizes, and uses.

Final thoughts on the best telescopes under $500

Although this group of sub-$500 scopes is fairly diverse, the Celestron StarSense Explorer DX 130AZ stands out in our best telescopes under $500 as the best place to start your interstellar journey due to its versatility and sky recognition app, which make for a fun evening of guided tours through the star patterns, no experience necessary. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best telescopes under $500 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
SEE IT

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.
Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
SEE IT

The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.
Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
SEE IT

The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone but can be especially helpful for older homeowners struggling with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation to access your car and walkways quickly.

How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

To determine how to select snow blowers for elderly people specifically, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

From there, we drew on our past research when recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and user impressions to ensure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease.

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 131 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Wide clearing width
  • Comparable to some two-stage models
  • Personal Pace system

Cons

  • Expensive

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary, but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

You don’t need to spend a ton on a snow blower.

Greenworks

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 30 Pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 20 inches
  • Power source: Corded electric

Pros

  • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
  • Adjustable chute
  • Easy push-button start

Cons

  • Cord could get in the way

Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

Clear your driveway before breakfast.

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 84 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 21 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Simple, effective design
  • Push-button start
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Only works well on pavement

Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420.

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 191 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • More powerful two-stage design
  • Self-propelled drive
  • Larger tires

Cons

  • Big and heavy

The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

Clear your driveway with Ryobi’s cordless design.

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 46 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 18 inches
  • Power source: Battery

Pros

  • Cordless operation
  • Folds up for compact storage
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Narrower clearing width

Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

It’s a snow-go with Toro’s Power Max HD 828.

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 310 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 28 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Anti-clogging system
  • 28-inch clearing width
  • LED headlights

Cons

  • Very expensive

With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

Snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that will help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers; you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to ensure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

Types of snow blowers

Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, making them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly damaging nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s best for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

Size and weight

To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend looking at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

Clearing width and depth

Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. A two-stage snow blower makes sense if you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow. 

Surface type

The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

Extra features

Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

Snow blower prices vary greatly depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Remember that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive but built to last.

Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you must either charge a battery before using them or plug them into an outlet, potentially limiting their range (unless you have a portable power station). They’re also generally less powerful, so you may be unable to move as much snow.

Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best tire chains of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
SEE IT

Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.
Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.
Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

How we chose the best tire chains

In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall.

Peerless Auto Trac

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

Specs

  • Material: Manganese alloy chain
  • Shape: Diamond
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
  • Durable steel alloy construction

Cons

  • A little on the heavy side

Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains are the best tire chains that are heavy-duty.

AutoChoice

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Shape: Squares
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
  • Separate pieces make them easier to install
  • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

Cons

  • Installation is more time-consuming
  • Expensive

One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

The Glacier 1046 is the best tire chain that's low-profile.

Glacier

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

Specs

  • Material: Steel rollers
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
  • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks.

Security Chain

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel chain
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 15-20 inch

Pros

  • Durable all-chain construction
  • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
  • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

Cons

  • Harder to install than other types
  • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price.

Security Chain

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel coils
  • Shape: Diagonal
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • No need to manually tighten
  • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

Things to consider before buying tire chains

Traction

Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

Material

Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

Size

Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

Installation

Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

FAQs

Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

Q: Do chains damage tires?

When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best tire chains

Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated slippers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-slippers/ Wed, 15 Dec 2021 18:40:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-slippers/
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

When the big chill moves in, heated slippers guarantee you’ll be comfy from top to bottom.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four pairs of slippers laid out next to each other in a cutout pattern
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ActionHeat makes some of the best heated slippers. ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers
SEE IT

These comfy wool slippers come with a mobile charger you can take with you.
Best microwaveable Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties
SEE IT

These microwaveable slippers help soothe arthritis pain with heat and aromatics like lavender and peppermint.
Best indoor/outdoor A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background Heated Slipper by Volt
SEE IT

These versatile slippers can provide up to 12 hours of warmth on a single charge.

When it’s cold out, slip into a pair of heated slippers to keep your feet as toasty as possible. You’ll get instant relief from cold floors and drafty indoor air. But it’s not just about the heat this footwear provides. Winter weather can leave feet dry, chapped, and constantly in need of an emergency pedicure. The best heated slippers also moisturize your feet while warming them up, so say goodbye to scaly roughness!

How we chose the best heated slippers

Heated slippers come in a variety of forms. Microwaveable slippers can be nuked right up to a comfortable lounging temperature. Some heated slippers warm up in the same way as heated socks, using a battery-operated module. Another type of electric foot warmer uses an internal heating pad that you power up via a USB cable. Once the slippers have reached a full charge, you can unplug them and start walking—or lounging—for hours.

Another option is foot warmers that work like a heating pad. They feel just like house shoes when you slip your feet inside. The only difference is these boots aren’t made for walking. They’re best when you’re parked in one spot, on the couch, or sitting at your desk. Your feet will be cozy and comfortable as long as the heat is on. In making our recommendations, we looked for options from top brands that spanned a variety of power sources and price levels.

The best heated slippers: Reviews & Recommendations

It’s hard to go wrong with a good pair of the best heated slippers, but the style you end up going for should depend on what you do during a typical cold day or night around the house. Or maybe you’ll be wearing them outside, too. In that case, think waterproof and non-slip. If you’ll have them on mostly while you’re working or bundled up on the couch and mobility is less important, a pair of heated slippers that you can wear and charge at the same time will get extra credit for providing warmth 24/7.

Best overall: ActionHeat Rechargeable Battery Heated Cable Knit Slippers

ActionHeat makes some of the best heated slippers.

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Included rechargeable ActionHeat batteries 
  • Sizes: S/M, L/XL, XXL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Attractive design
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Batteries only available through ActionHeat

These fuzzy wool slippers won’t leave your feet waiting long for heat. The soles are wear-resistant, non-slip, and lightweight. Each one weighs less than half a pound. These slippers bring the heat at three levels, ranging from high (150 degrees F, which lasts more than three-and-a-half hours) to low (115 degrees F, which lasts up to five hours). They also come with a mobile power supply that you can take with you when you venture from an outlet.

Best USB-heated: Wirziis USB Heated Slippers

Wirziis makes the best heated slippers that are USB-heated.

Wirziis

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: USB connection
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Convenient
  • Affordable
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Have to be attached to power source for them to work
  • Can’t adjust temperature level

Not a fan of slippers with batteries that will eventually run out? Wirziis USB Heated Slippers are designed with a replaceable heating pad that can be powered directly by any device with a USB-C connection, such as a computer, car charger, power bank, or plug. These comfy wool slippers heat up within three minutes and are available in black, gray, and brown. That said, you can’t really adjust the temperature, but you can keep the rest of your body warm with one of the best heated blankets.

Best indoor/outdoor: Heated Slipper by Volt

A pair of Heated Slippers by Volt on a plain background

Volt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Two included USB 5V VB550 batteries
  • Sizes: Small-3XL
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 12 hours on a single charge
  • Provides three levels of heat
  • Comes in multiple sizes for men and women
  • Can wear indoors and outside

Cons

  • Only come in one color
  • Heating pad may not provide a lot of warmth

Volt is one of the first brands to design heated slippers, and the company has continued to innovate since coming out with its first pair 10 years ago. These comfy slippers are heated with included rechargeable batteries. They provide three levels of heat (high, medium, and low) and can last up to 12 hours on a single full charge. Best of all, you can wear them indoors or outside. You can also pair them with some of the best heated gloves for extra warmth.

Best microwaveable: Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties

Mars Wellness Heated Microwaveable Foot Booties

Mars

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Microwave or freezer
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: Hot and cold

Pros

  • Provide both heat and cold relief
  • Incorporate aromatherapy
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Some users say they come off easily
  • Not easy to clean

Could your tootsies use a little TLC? These plush booties are ideal for arthritis and other foot ailments or just nice to slip into after a long day on the go. They contain 12 natural aromatic ingredients, including lavender and peppermint, and they can be used to warm up your feet after heating them in the microwave, or you can chill them in the freezer before pulling them on to cool down your feet. And they come in three colors (mauve, gray, and espresso).

Best with memory foam: Kamlif Heating Slipper Shoes

Kamlif Heating Slipper Shoes

Kamlif

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Rechargeable batteries
  • Sizes: Small and large
  • Levels of heat: High, medium, and low

Pros

  • Memory foam remembers feet
  • Three levels of heat
  • Less expensive than other models

Cons

  • Some users say they don’t provide a lot of heat

These heated slipper shoes feature memory foam to remember your foot for maximum comfort. Designed for both indoor and outdoor use, they’re equipped with toe warmers and can provide three levels of heat: high, medium, and low. Powered by rechargeable batteries, these slippers can last up to five hours in low mode on a single charge. They also provide infrared-ray warmth of these slippers that can encourage circulation, and help relieve foot fatigue. They also pair well with the best heated vests.

Best budget: HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands Insole Foot Warmers

HotHands

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power: Air-activated heat packs
  • Sizes: One
  • Levels of heat: One

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • Inexpensive
  • Provides up to nine hours of heat

Cons

  • Some users said they don’t provide a lot of warmth
  • Not sustainable

If you’re looking for a quick solution to keep your feet toasty that doesn’t require you to spend a lot of cash, HotHands Insole Foot Warmers may be just the ticket. Open the package, slip these air-activated insoles into your shoes or boots, and these heated insoles can provide warmth for up to nine hours. The peel-and-stick adhesive backing keeps them secure in place inside your shoe. Although you must discard them after each use, 16 pairs ensure that one package will keep your feet warm for a week or two (and you can pick up some similar hand warmers while you’re at it).

Things to consider when shopping for the best heated slippers

Buying a pair of heated slippers is more of an investment than your average pair of bunny slippers. You’ll want to keep in mind where you want to wear them, the level of heat you’re seeking, and whether you want to move around with them. Here’s how to narrow down your options.

Do you want USB charging?

When you spend a lot of time working at your computer or just browsing the Internet, cute and comfy slippers that plug into your laptop with a USB connection are a convenient choice. Although you can wear these heated slippers while puttering around the house for at least several hours at full charge, if you are tied to your computer, you can work and wear them while they’re charging. There’s no need to worry about replacing batteries.

Even if you aren’t the workaholic type and will be spending long days just vegging out on the couch, you can charge these heated slippers anywhere near a power bank. By the time you’re ready to get up and move around, they’ll be fully charged and ready to keep your feet warm for at least a few hours.

Need warm slippers for the outside as well?

If you live in an apartment, you’ll probably be happy with a good pair of heated slippers designed for walking around and relaxing indoors. For those living in houses with backyards who need warm slippers for the outside as well, a pair that travels is in order, especially when the forecast calls for rain or snow.

For those short trips outside, you’ll need slippers that are made of sturdy enough fabric to withstand the elements. The soles should be wear-resistant and non-slip. Rubber ones ensure they provide enough traction for both indoor and outdoor wear. Since your backyard is likely to be wetter than inside, be sure you opt for a fabric that’s waterproof. You don’t want your heated slippers to be soaked and useless just when you need them most.

Heated slippers can help with medical conditions like arthritis

Like heated socks, heated slippers have benefits beyond keeping your feet from freezing. Foot warmers and slippers can help with some medical conditions too! Ones that are heated by the microwave can offer foot relief if you suffer from arthritis or if you have stiff muscles, pain, or circulation issues. Some are infused with cloves, cinnamon, eucalyptus, and other ingredients that create moist heat and soothe achy feet.

Although it sounds like you just put your house shoes in the microwave, the process can be more civilized than that. Wrap them up in a towel before nuking them to avoid leaving your microwave smelling like feet. And if that still sounds too unorthodox, some aromatherapy booties come with a scent pouch that you warm up in the microwave before placing it inside the slippers. It’s like an at-home DIY spa treatment for your feet.

Love the slippers you already have? Try heated insoles

Heated slipper insoles are another surefire way to keep your feet warm in cold weather, and they can fit right inside a pair of slippers you already own. You can get ones that are battery- or microwave-powered, and they’re available in both single-use options and ones that you can wear over and over.

These aren’t technically heated slippers since they are separate items, but they do just as good a job of heating up your feet. Another bonus is that you can wear them with multiple footwear, not just your house shoes. If you’re going to be inserting them into your outdoor boots, make sure they’re waterproof in case you encounter rain, sleet, snow, or pesky puddles.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated slippers cost?

Although they may sound like a pretty big financial investment, you can still enjoy warm and fuzzy slippers on a budget. In fact, you can scoop up a new pair at a wallet-friendly price that’s well below $100. As with all things, the quality will vary, but you don’t have to go high-end to keep your feet well-heated. There are plenty of excellent options for under $50.

Q: How do heated slippers work?

Heated slippers work in a variety of ways. Some are heated by a battery-operated pad, while others are USB-powered. You can also get a pair that will heat right up in the microwave.

Q: How long will the slippers stay warm?

Heated slippers will stay warm for at least a few hours. If you get a pair that works with USB charging, you can wear them while they charge without worrying about them going cold.

Q: Can you wash heated slippers?

You can wash heated slippers; just don’t do it in the washing machine or submerge them in water. Spot drying is generally a safe option, but to keep everything fully functioning, carefully follow the cleaning instructions included with your pair.

Final thoughts on the best heated slippers

Heated slippers do an excellent job of keeping your feet extra warm around the house (and even outside) when the temperature dips, and you don’t have to be a big spender to get a good pair. These warm and comfy slippers come in several styles—including USB- or battery-operated and microwaveable—that cover a number of household activities, from doing chores to working at the computer to just sitting around watching television. And if you intend to wear yours outside to get fresh air in the backyard, non-slip rubber soles will take you there and back safely.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated slippers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated gloves in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-gloves/ Fri, 12 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461459
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let frozen fingers spoil your fun.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best heated gloves sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A pair of black Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves on a plain background Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves
SEE IT

Savior’s heated leather gloves bring the heat, along with touchscreen-friendly fingertips and a removable battery.
Best for cycling Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycling Glove product image Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove
SEE IT

The Sealskinz heated cycle glove offers maximum protection from the elements.
Best for work Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves are the best for work. Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves
SEE IT

Volt Resistance’s Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves have extra padding and cold-weather protection.

If you, like me, still enjoy spending time outdoors in below-freezing temperatures, you’ve probably considered purchasing heated gloves. I resisted for years, relying instead on chemical hand warmers and plastic bags. But, since winters seem to be getting colder and I start feeling the chill in my bones quicker than ever, I finally decided to see what all the hubbub was about. In the dead of winter, you want to keep your fingers toasty for a long time, whether you’re working up a sweat or just trekking out to the store. The best heated gloves are comfortable without impeding manual dexterity in your fingers, so you can ski, cycle, or do whatever you want in the freezing cold.

How we chose the best heated gloves

Living in New York City, I do not own a car, and while I have nothing against the city’s subway system, I prefer my bicycle as my mode of transportation. I ride/commute all year long, even through the winter. The only thing that keeps me off the bike is an active blizzard. I’ve also been lucky enough to spend months at a time cycling or trekking in remote mountain environments, like the Pamirs in Tajikistan and the Karakorum in northern Pakistan. I’ve been testing and writing about outdoor gear for over a decade for a variety of outlets, including HuffPost, BBC Travel, and Adventure Cycling. I am on a perpetual quest for cold-weather gear that works well and makes me forget that I’m even wearing it.

I tested these battery-operated heated gloves by using them like any other pair: taking them out on a bike ride or two. Cycling actively tests a glove’s grip, warmth, and wind resistance. You get to know a pair of gloves very well when you have a sustained stream of frigid wind blowing on your hands. I specifically noted how easy it was for me to operate my bike, the glove’s flexibility, and, when appropriate, their water resistance.

The best heated gloves: Reviews & Recommendations

As an outdoor and adventure lover whose hands and feet get cold easily, I feel as if I’ve spent an inordinate amount of time (and money) trying out a wide range of gear and techniques. While I admit to occasionally resorting to the wool socks and plastic bags on my feet method of combating freezing temperatures (I should try heated socks), my glove choices trend toward the more high-tech, as maintaining mobility and grippiness is almost as important as keeping warm. Here are some of the best heated gloves we’ve found for a variety of outdoor activities, and they’re a big step up from basic hand warmers in your mittens.

Best overall: Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves

A pair of black Savior Thick Battery Heated Leather Gloves on a plain background

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These Savior gloves are very warm and have all the features we could want for a cold day out.

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far-infrared fiber
  • Temperature range: 113°F (low) – 150°F (high)
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Soft lambskin and polyester; cotton inner layer
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive index finger and thumb, anti-slip material on palms
  • Sizes: XS-3X

Pros

  • Soft and flexible
  • Anti-slip
  • Versatile
  • Warm even without heating element turned on

Cons

  • Not as effective in temperatures below 10°F
  • Not waterproof

Savior’s rechargeable heated gloves provide the best, most versatile protection from the cold that we’ve felt in a pair of gloves. They are well suited for a variety of outdoor adventures and reasonably priced, to boot.

In a field full of very similar products from companies with little reputation, they serve as a good example of what to look for in a pair of heated gloves. First and foremost, they’re quite warm with or without the heat turned on. They have three temperature settings, water-resistance and windproofing, heating elements that cover the back of your hand and fingertips, and touchscreen-sensitive material. Meanwhile, a leather palm ensures you won’t lose your grip when you need it the most.

They’re a bit on the thick side but still flexible enough for shifting gears on a bicycle or holding ski poles. My one personal complaint about these gloves is that the “on” indicator light is oddly bright when it’s on in the dark—but I’ve always had issues with bright lights in darkness being distracting.

All in all, it’s exactly what you’re looking for, and you don’t need to spend too much to get it.

Best for cycling: Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycle Glove

Sealskinz Waterproof Heated Cycling Glove product image

Sealskinz

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, the Sealskinz waterproof heated cycle gloves keep your hands dry like no other.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber
  • Temperature range: N/A
  • Power source: 4-volt polymer rechargeable batteries
  • Battery life: 2200mAh
  • Material: Soft goatskin leather and polyester, Primaloft synthetic insulation
  • Special features: Waterproof, reflective details
  • Sizes: XS-XXL

Pros

  • Lifetime product and waterproof guarantee
  • Designed specifically for cycling
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Sizing runs small so make sure to purchase a size larger than normal

I first learned about Sealskinz products on an uncharacteristically cold, windy, and rainy group bicycle ride across the French countryside. Of the fifteen of us on the ride, all but one of us ended up with painful frozen fingers. The one guy whose hands were fine had a pair of Sealskinz waterproof gloves. I bought my own pair soon thereafter.

Many cold-weather cycling gloves do remain waterproof under sustained wet conditions, but Sealskinz’s cycling gloves keep your hands dry no matter how long you stay out. I have biked through rain, snow, and sleet storms (driving, relentless sleet for up to an hour), and very little moisture permeated the three-layer bonded construction. It features an insulation layer and a reflective layer that directs the body heat you’re generating back into the glove, keeping you extra warm. The integrated heating element produces heat for up to six hours.

A properly heated cycling glove is, in general, a rare find. Most heated gloves, while plenty warm, are often too bulky for gear-shifting and make braking cumbersome. They may also make it hard to grip your handlebars long-term properly. Sealskinz’s cycling gloves have a cycling-friendly design with a leather palm, enabling a better grip, and plenty of reflective details. (You can never have too many when commuting on dark, winter mornings.) In so many ways, it is the perfect winter cycling glove.

Best for motorcycling: Kemimoto Heated Gloves

heated motorcycle gloves

Kemimoto

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Kemimoto’s heated gloves are very warm and durable, making them an excellent choice for motorcycle rides in the blustery cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Thin wires woven into fabric
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500mAh 
  • Material: Faux leather
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Long-lasting heat—up to 9 hours on lowest setting
  • 3 heating levels
  • Good price

Cons

  • Thick

Kemimoto’s heated gloves really emphasize the “heated” facet of the heated glove. They feature 2,500MaH batteries that can last up to nine hours on the lowest setting. Kemimoto gloves offer three heating levels.

Looking at the glove itself, it features a water- and windproof outer layer. The wrist buckle and velcro closure at the cuff allow for a secure fit that will block out a cold wind no matter how fast you’re going. These feature an anti-grip palm and have protective knuckle guards and reflective coating.

Best for work: Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves

Volt Resistance Work 7v Leather Heated Gloves are the best for work.

Volt Resistance

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Volt Resistance’s 7v Work gloves are much more durable and made for working outside in extreme cold.

Specs

  • Heating elements: “Zero layer” heat system: Thin wires bonded to the lining fabric
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2500 mAh
  • Heat settings: 4
  • Material: Leather, tricot lining
  • Special features: Extra leather on palm for durability
  • Sizes: S-XXL

Pros

  • Extremely durable
  • Padded palms for added comfort
  • Heats entire hand

Cons

  • A bit bulky around the fingers

I grew up in northern Ohio near Lake Erie. My dad did a lot of work outside, including many wood-cutting expeditions to my Grandparents’ woods to procure fuel for our wood-burning stove. He had this amazing pair of yellow leather, fleece-lined work gloves that he’d wear on these trips. I liked to wear them around the house because I was fascinated with how they’d molded themselves into the exact shape of his hands and with how small my own hands felt inside them.

Constructed from durable yellow-stained leather with padded, reinforced palms, these heated work gloves from Volt Resistance remind me of the ones my dad wore. Heating wires extend through the entire glove, including the fingers, thumbs, and palms to provide full coverage across your hand. There’s a clear window on the back of the glove near the wrist that clearly shows how much power remains in the batteries. 

I bought a pair for my dad last Christmas. His review: “Wow, what will they think of next? You know, back in the day, we just put plastic bags on our hands under our gloves. These are definitely way better than that.”

Best for fingertips: Savior Thick Electric Heated Mittens

Savior Thick Electric Heated Mittens are the best heated gloves for fingertips.

SAVIOR HEAT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re a mitten person, this heated version from Savior is the warmest pair we’ve found. 

Specs

  • Heating elements:  Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, neoprene, cotton
  • Special Features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros

  • Great for winter sports
  • Soft and flexible
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Battery is bulky at the base

This updated version of Savior’s heated mittens has double the heated wires and elements in the thumb area as the previous model. My thumbs are always the first of my digits to be affected by the cold, but these kept me warm during an ice canyon tour and skating on Mildred Lake in Jasper, Alberta, in February.

I wouldn’t use these for cycling or any other activity where flexibility and dexterity are super important. Still, they’re cozier than most gloves and a perfect fit for low-key outdoor events.

Best for skiing: Akaso Heated Gloves

Akaso Heated Gloves are the best for ski.

AKASO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The anti-slip surface of these splashproof and breathable Akaso gloves makes them perfect for gripping ski poles.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Carbon fiber heating panels
  • Power source: 7.4V rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 3200mAh 
  • Heating levels: 3
  • Material: Faux leather, cotton
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips, waterproof
  • Sizes: S-XL

Pros

  • Splash proof
  • Breathable
  • Reflective strip
  • Warm up quickly

Cons

  • Limited long-term waterproofing

Featuring a layer of 3M Thinsulate material that retains heat 1.5 times better than down, anti-slip gripping material on the palms, and a cuff drawstring to secure them around your wrist, these Akaso heated gloves offer the right kind of protection for skiers and snowboarders.

Carbon fiber heating panels cover the back of the hand, fingers, and thumb (not the palm). The heating elements are covered by water-repellent nylon and the 3M Thinsulate, which keeps your hands warm with or without the electric heat on. They’re warm and comfortable in good weather but don’t fare as well in the rain or snow. With a steady stream of precipitation, you will eventually feel moisture penetrate the outer layer and start to pool inside the glove. That said, they’re perfect for clear, sunny, ski days.

Best thin: Sun Will Heated Glove Liners

Sun Will Heated Glove Liners are the best thin heated gloves.

Sun Will

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heated glove liners from Sun Will are so light you’ll almost forget you have them on.

Specs

  • Heating elements: Far infrared fiber heating wires
  • Power source: 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries
  • Battery life: 2200 mAh
  • Material: Polyester, lycra, fleece
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: XXS-XXL

Pros:

  • Thin and light
  • Soft
  • Can wear under another pair of gloves
  • Great for arthritis and blood circulation

Cons:

  • Not as durable as thicker, bulkier gloves

Made from lycra and fleece, these gloves are intended to fit close to your hand and be worn under a waterproof glove shell when needed. If you already have a favorite pair of waterproof gloves you wear while hiking or skiing, add these as an underlayer on particularly blustery days. You can, of course, also wear them on their own. 

Thin heated gloves are also especially useful if you suffer from chronically cold hands, even when indoors. They’re excellent for stimulating blood circulation, whether you need to warm up from the cold or need help with symptoms caused by arthritis or Raynaud’s Syndrome.

Best budget: Hot Hands Heated Fleece Glove/Mittens

Hot Hands Heated Fleece Glove/Mittens are the best for the budget.

HotHands

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you want to keep your hands warm without spending much money, a pair of cheap gloves and hand warmers will do the trick.

Specs

  • Heating elements: iron powder, salt, water, activated carbon. Oxygen reacts with the iron and salt to form iron oxide, which releases heat
  • Power source: Chemical air-activated hand warmers
  • Battery life: N/A
  • Heating levels: N/A
  • Material: Fleece, leather palm
  • Special features: Touchscreen-sensitive fingertips
  • Sizes: M/L-L/XL

Pros

  • No batteries or charging required
  • Inexpensive
  • TSA approved
  • Made in USA

Cons

  • Not very breathable
  • Not waterproof

Chemical hand warmers are the original, low-tech way to keep your hands (and feet) warm while out in adverse conditions. Working on outdoor TV productions in cold weather, we buy them in bulk and dole them out to cast and crew like candy. Any actor you see filming outside on a blustery day very likely has a hand warmer shoved into each of their pockets.

These fleece hybrid glove/mittens from Hot Hands, one of the biggest names in hand warmers, have a handy pocket to insert a warmer and hold them in place. Each individually sealed warmer is air activated when removed from its package and stays warm for 10 hours. That’s as long as you’ll get from any battery-powered heated glove. On the other hand, you’ll have to buy more hand warmers after using the single pair that comes with the gloves. A box of 40 additional warmers costs about $22.00, though, so you’re still spending less than you would on our top pick.

The gloves themselves are the kind with fingers and a foldable mitten you can pull over your fingers when needed. They’re made from toasty warm fleece with a TruGrip leather palm. Are they as warm as our other picks? No. Do they offer the same wind and water resistance? Not really. But they’re very affordable, and those hand warmers will keep you warm in a pinch.

What to consider when buying heated gloves

While the majority of heated gloves available offer similar features, each one feels slightly different than the others and performs differently when worn out in the elements. Everyone also has their own personal criteria when evaluating apparel. I personally look for a pair of gloves that I don’t have to think about too much while I’m out in the cold. With that in mind, here are some things you should look for when buying your next pair of heated gloves.

How do heated gloves work?

Heated clothing has ultra-thin metal wires or fibers built into it that warm up when electricity passes through them. These wires or far-infrared fibers, most commonly made from carbon or a metal composite, are woven or fused directly into or onto an internal fabric layer. The voltage of batteries used in heating clothing like slippers and insoles and vests is low enough that there is no chance of electrical shock.

Fit and size

To ensure your glove provides maximum warmth without restricting manual dexterity, you should measure your hand and make sure you get the right size. Gloves are not one-size-fits-all. Moreover, the measurements for each size vary from manufacturer to manufacturer, so that you may require a medium from one brand and a large one from another.

In a properly fitted glove, your fingertips should reach just shy of the end of the glove—about a ¼ to 3/8 of an inch—so you have a full range of movement. The wrist portion of the glove should run far enough up your arm to tuck into or extend over a jacket sleeve, preventing cold air from getting under it.

Most manufacturers will have a size chart on their websites, showing you how to measure your hand and find the right size with each brand.

Waterproofing

To waterproof or not to waterproof? That is the question. Waterproofing measures generally make clothing less breathable so that body sweat will get trapped inside. In other words, your waterproof gloves may soak up sweat and start to smell more quickly than a less water-resistant pair. On the other hand, you don’t want to get completely soaked and end up with gloves full of water. 

Many heated gloves have a waterproof fabric on the outside part of the glove and something breathable on the palm area, giving you the best of both options (kind of like how packable rain jackets sometimes have strategically more breathable panels). Breathable fabric on the underside of your hand reduces the chances of sweat building up in your palms, which could affect your ability to grip a ski pole or climbing rope. Having waterproof fabric on the outside of your gloves—the part that is most often exposed directly to snow and rain—means excess water won’t be able to penetrate the glove. As a general rule, if you’re likely to find yourself outside when it’s actively snowing or raining, go with a waterproof option.  

Battery life

Most heated gloves are powered by 7.4-volt rechargeable lithium-ion batteries, which usually last between 2 and 8 hours, depending on the temperature setting and other factors. Rather than presenting battery life estimates, which can vary quite a bit, we recommend looking at the raw battery capacity, measured in milliamp hours (mAh), which should give you a general idea of how long it should last compared to other gloves.

Some, but not all, heated gloves feature removable, replaceable battery packs. If you plan on being outside for extended periods of time, we recommend choosing gloves with replaceable batteries so you can swap them out as needed.

Touchscreen capability 

Gloves and smartphones don’t always get along. Between the padding and materials, capacitive touchscreens don’t pick up taps and swipes as easily when your fingers are covered. Having to take a glove off while in inclement weather in order to use your phone is annoying at best, and excruciating in extreme cold.

Some gloves have an outer layer over your fingertips with a special material made from copper fiber conductive yarn, making it easier to use a touchscreen without removing your gloves. Essentially, the copper in the fabric allows the gloves to interact with the electrical current produced by touchscreens. Most commonly, the material is used only on the tips of one or two fingers in a small enough area that overall warmth isn’t really affected. 

At this point, these features are fairly common, but you should check for them when picking a cheaper glove or something from a less technical brand.

FAQs

Q: How much do heated gloves cost?

Most of our favorite heated gloves cost around $100. There are alternatives, like our budget pick, which cost considerably less. That said, there isn’t too much variation between major and minor brands, so you should expect to spend $100 or more for high-quality heated gloves.

Q: Where do I recycle my heated gloves?

Recycle heated gloves anywhere that takes clothing and textiles as long as you remove the batteries beforehand. To recycle rechargeable lithium-ion batteries properly, you will need to find a local recycling center that’s certified in handling electronic waste. Check with your local recycling and waste disposal service to find out where.

Q: Are heated gloves or mittens better?

It’s largely a matter of personal preference. Gloves are the obvious choice if you’re doing something where you need your fingers to move individually. If you’re doing nothing, literally standing still, mittens may be better because your fingers keep each other warm. That said, the materials and design in modern technical gloves and mittens both keep your hands very warm.

Q: Are heated gloves worth it?

Heated gloves are definitely worth it if your fingers are always cold and you enjoy outdoor activities in the winter months. Frozen, stiff fingers will spoil the fun every time—and could be potentially dangerous. Heated gloves don’t really cost more than conventional winter gloves without a heating element, and are more convenient to carry around than a heated blanket. 

Final thoughts on the best heated gloves

Heated gloves are great when you need to work or want to play out in extremely cold weather. By giving these naturally warm gloves a nice, battery-powered boost, you can keep your hands toasty for hours on end. There are plenty of extra warm gloves out there, though, so you have tons of options.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated gloves in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated socks in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-heated-socks/ Tue, 15 Feb 2022 16:30:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-socks/
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

When the weather outside is frightful, these socks will ensure your feet feel delightful.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for skiiing SNOW DEER Heated Socks SNOW DEER Heated Socks
SEE IT

The cozy heated socks will keep your feet warm and dry throughout even the chilliest ski day.
Best battery-powered The VELAZZIO Heated Socks are the best battery-powered heated sock VELAZZIO Heated Socks
SEE IT

These high-powered socks heat up in less than 30 seconds—so you don’t need to wait to stop your cold feet.
Best budget Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women Electric Heated Socks Thermal Insulated Socks
SEE IT

Heated socks can be a hefty investment, but with this budget pair you can have toasty toes without breaking the bank.

Whether you’re adventuring in snowy mountains, shoveling the driveway, or snuggling up at a chilly cabin, a quality pair of socks can stop freezing toes in their tracks, and heated socks will warm you from the bottom up. Heated socks provide a toasty barrier between your feet and any cold surface they walk on and make outdoor activities in frigid temperatures feel like a breeze. If the warmth these special winter socks provide isn’t enough to convince you to spring for a pair, consider this: The socks can also improve your circulation, which will help stop your feet from going numb from the cold in the first place. And while everyday winter socks are nice when you’re mostly inside, you’ll want to take things up a notch when you plan to be outdoors for an extended period. Heated socks are suitable for almost every winter situation—and make the most frigid months of the year much more bearable and enjoyable. They may require a bit more TLC than your normal wash-and-tumble-dry pairs, but if your feet are the first thing to go cold in winter, the best heated socks are well worth the investment.

How we chose the best heated socks

Heated socks are an investment in your comfort during colder months—so we wanted to be sure your money was well-spent on quality socks that suit a variety of needs. We compared over 40 heated socks while looking at reviews, battery life, design, thickness, and price. We also have reported on heated insoles and heated slippers to keep you toasty till you get back to your heated blanket, so we used knowledge from those topics and applied it here.

The best heated socks: Reviews & Recommendations

You can wear heated socks while at home, or you can wear them with your shoes to keep cold winter air away from your feet when you go outside. And with slim battery packs designed to look like your average pair of socks, you might even forget you’re wearing super-charged protection against blustery winter weather. All of these picks have the reliability and warmth to help you endure frigid temperatures.

Best overall: VOLT 3V Heated Socks

The Volt 3V is the best overall heated sock

Volt Resistance Heated Clothing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Moisture-wicking micro polyester and up to 10 hours of warmth keep your feet warm and dry.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3 hours on high; 8 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Long battery length
  • Battery-powered or rechargeable
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Expensive

These extra-thin heated socks provide all-day heat on a single charge and fit like a glove thanks to spandex interlocking fabric. The sock’s moisture-wicking micro polyester keeps your feet dry for extra comfort—no swamp foot here. The socks come with two rechargeable 2 oz. lithium batteries, a dual charger, and a wireless remote to cozy up without bending down. The battery tucks into the sock’s small storage pocket. And a hook-and-loop closure ensures it won’t end up in the snow as you traverse the tundra. They may be on the pricier side, but we think the quality—and warming up your feet—is worth the price. If you’d like longer heating time, the company sells a 3.7V/5000 mAh battery that provides more than 8 hours of heat on high and more than 20 hours of heat on low. You can purchase them on Amazon or directly from the company on their website.

Best machine-washable: Gobi Tread Heated Socks

A person wearing gray boots with a pair of GOBI heated socks

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: After getting 12 hours of warmth, simply throw these socks in the wash the next time you use them.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (113°F-140°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 12 hours
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Separate keychain remote
  • Slim battery pack
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Expensive

With a range of heat settings from a balmy 113 degrees to a toasty 140, these machine-washable heated socks from Gobi can last up to 12 hours on the lowest charge. The toes are designed with their own individual heat zone to keep your pinky from feeling frozen, plus the slim battery is easy to tuck into your boot or shoe.

Best for skiing: SNOW DEER Heated Socks

SNOW DEER Heated Socks

Snow Deer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Heating elements on both sides of your feet mean you can hit the slopes without getting cold feet.

Specs

  • Material: Cool Max polyester, elastic; spandex
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (100°F-131°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 4 hours on high; 10 hours on low
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove batteries first)

Pros

  • Heats top and bottom of foot
  • Secure pocket for batteries
  • Rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Could be longer-lasting

Aside from the battery pocket at the top, these rechargeable, heated socks could pass for any attractive pair of socks. They come in four different sizes, but since the included rechargeable lithium polymer batteries last only up to six and a half hours on a full charge on the lowest setting, if you like to turn the heat up high (four hours of power), you might want to bring along a few extra back-up sets just in case.

Best for lounging around the cabin: Men’s Thick Heat Trapping Insulated Boot Thermal Socks

Mens Thick Heat Trapping Insulated Boot Thermal Socks

DG Hill

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Show off your style in the ski lodge with 17 design options to choose from.

Specs

  • Material: Acrylic blend
  • Power level settings: N/A
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Powered by your body heat
  • Insulated
  • Stylish

Cons

  • Not for extremely cold climates

Back at the ski lodge? Slip into these cozy heated socks. They have a winter-wonderland look, and the synthetic-fiber blend provides the ultimate heating benefits. They’re ribbed at the top, so they won’t slip inside your shoes and let in cold air. Feel free to take them outside for a hike, a sleigh ride, or a few trips down the slopes.

Best with the thinnest heating module: ActionHeat 3.7V Rechargeable Battery Heated Socks 2.0

ActionHeat 3.7V Rechargeable Battery Heated Socks 2.0

ActionHeat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Strategically placed heating panels don’t interfere with walking, running, hiking, or even lounging around.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton blend
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high (up to 145°F)
  • Approximate heat time: 7 hours on the lowest setting
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Thin
  • Comfortable to walk in
  • Wide heat settings

Cons

  • Expensive

The batteries for these electric socks are thinner and slightly curved for a more comfortable fit, and the heating panels located at the toes use advanced ultra-fine fibers so they won’t interfere with your walking, hiking, or skiing. The heat can go up to 140°F, while battery power lasts up to seven hours on the lowest setting.

Best battery-powered: VELAZZIO Heated Socks

The VELAZZIO Heated Socks are the best battery-powered heated sock

VELAZZIO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get warm feet in less than 30 seconds thanks to a nanofiber heating wire and two-zone heating.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 4.5 hours on high; 7.5 on low
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Remote controlled
  • Fast heating
  • Long-lasting

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

Made for men and women, these heated socks have a design that’s a bit on the simple side, so you’re going to get function (a lot of it) over fierceness. They come with three different heat settings and warm up in less than 30 seconds. They pull up over the calf, and you can tuck the battery packs into the pocket in the inner top cuff. The best part is that the heat will last. The fully charged batteries can last up to 7.5 hours when worn on the lowest heat setting. And they include a remote that lets you control the heat without hiking up your pant leg.

Best for hiking: Autocastle Unisex Battery Powered Heat Insulated Socks

The Autocastle rechargeable electric socks are the best heated sock for hiking

Autocastle

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Cotton allows your foot to breathe, and the 6.5-hour battery life on low keeps your tootsies warm from Raynaud’s to Rainier.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: Low, medium, high
  • Approximate heat time: 3.5 on high; 6.5 on low
  • Machine washable: Yes, but remove batteries beforehand

Pros

  • Rechargeable
  • Machine washable
  • Not bulky

Cons

  • Pocket not completely secure for batteries

The knee-high design and cotton makeup of these hiking socks mean they won’t be uncomfortably bulky by the boot opening. There are three different heat settings, which makes them an ideal fit for even your chilliest hikes. You can turn the heat up as you ascend or it gets colder. These have decent battery life, too—up to 3.5 hours on the warmest setting and up to 6.5 on the coolest.

Best budget: Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women

Winter Foot Warmer Socks for Men and Women

MGOGO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Don’t break the bank to be warm all winter long with these electric socks.

Specs

  • Material: Cotton
  • Power level settings: 95°F-113°F
  • Approximate heat time: N/A
  • Machine washable: Yes (remove battery packs)

Pros

  • Unisex
  • Cotton for breathability; fleece for warmth
  • Have a supportive arch

Cons

  • Not a wide range of temperature settings

These unisex heated socks come in three different sizes that can fit men with shoe sizes from 6 to 15 and women from 8 to 13. The fleece material provides breathability and sweat absorption as well as warmth even when the heat isn’t on. Each sock requires three AA alkaline or rechargeable batteries, which are not included. While they may not have bells and whistles, they can keep your feet warm for short outdoor activities.

What to consider when buying the best heated socks

Although electric socks will not be the cheapest ones you ever buy, they’ll definitely be the warmest socks you ever own. Plus, you can make the best snow boots even warmer. With so many to choose from, where do you begin making your choice? Fabric is a good place to start. Cotton, merino wool, and synthetics are all warm options. Still, since the first two hold moisture (look out for fungal infections!), we recommend synthetic fibers like nylon and lycra to keep your feet warm, dry, and free of microbial pests. As for other important variables to look for when shopping for the best heated socks, snag your winter hat and read on.

Pick the right pair of socks to match your winter adventure

Although you’re perfectly welcome to wear your heated socks while hibernating at home all winter long, if you’re the adventurous type who lives to hit the slopes, you’re in luck. Depending on what you like to do once you’re up in the snowy mountains, you can choose between heated ski socks and cabin socks.

The latter can be pretty much the same warm socks you wear when you’re lounging at home. But for going down the slopes, you’ll want a pair of heated socks with long-lasting batteries in a fabric that will continue to keep your feet warm even if the batteries run out. These cozy socks should also be thick enough to fill out your boots and, most importantly, comfortable.

Choose heated socks that put comfort first

The heating modules of the best heated socks will add a bit of volume, but they don’t have to be obtrusive. Most of the battery packs are slim enough that you won’t even notice them tucked away in the little pocket that sits right under the cuff. The wires that connect the batteries to the heating panels in the sock may be more noticeable underfoot, but you can get a pair with ultra-thin wires that you’ll hardly feel.

Size matters; the more sizes the socks come in, the merrier your feet will be. The one-size-fits-all design of some of the cheaper brands might leave you with too much wiggle room for your feet or not enough. If you don’t want to reach down to change the heat setting constantly, some heated socks come with a remote control for temperature adjustment, and others can be controlled with your smartphone via a Bluetooth connection. If one foot tends to get colder than the other, look for one with an app control that allows you to adjust the heat of each sock individually.

Decide how much battery life you need your heated socks to have per wear

Time matters when it comes to heated socks, and if you are going to be doing activities where recharging batteries isn’t an easy option, you should look for a pair with batteries that last longer on a full charge. Unfortunately, that often means the battery pack will be bulkier and less comfortable—and you may have to dish out more money, too. The key is finding the right balance to suit your needs and always having a good backup plan (extra batteries). That said, if your socks are thick and warm on their own, you’ll still have ample foot protection if your batteries die on you while you’re gliding down the slopes.

Pack your warmest heated socks for a winter hike

If your snow boots are made for hiking, the best heated socks can be, too. Since hiking can be rough on your feet, you’ll need heated socks that are as durable as they are warm. The best winter hiking socks should also be high enough to provide a complete barrier between your feet/lower legs and your shoes. Other things to consider are cushioning, fit, and fabric. Wool, polyester, nylon, silk, and spandex are the most popular materials for hiking socks. There are pros and cons with each one, so to get the optimal benefits, it’s best to go with a blend that will offer comfort, warmth, and durability.

Don’t feel like you have to blow your budget on heated socks

The best socks are going to cost you more than a bargain-rack three-pack, but they don’t have to leave you broke. That said, you’ll have to pay a bit more for some of the features that will make them more comfortable and functional (like long battery life and Bluetooth connectivity). The ones you can get for $40 or so will do what they are supposed to do, but they may have extra bulk or come in only one size. If you want a pair of socks with all the trappings, be prepared to pay up to a few hundred bucks for them. They might end up costing more than your snow boots, but if you get the right pair, they can last just as long. Still, you can find cheap heated socks that will do the trick and keep your toes warm and toasty.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated socks cost?

The best heated socks cost between $20-$200 based on materials and battery life.

Q: How do heated socks work?

Heated socks work by a heating panel hidden in the soles, heels, or toes that connects via wiring to a battery pack that acts as a miniature thermostat. The wires are separated by a waterproof membrane to make them safe when the socks become damp. If you don’t want to bend to adjust the heat, some allow you to do it with a remote control or a smartphone app with a Bluetooth connection to your socks.

Q: How long do heated socks last?

All good things must come to an end, but if you buy heated socks made of sturdy fabric and take care of them by following the washing instructions to the letter, heated socks last a couple of years—and even as long as your favorite snow boots.

Q: How do you wash heated socks?

Since stinky, fungus-infected feet are just as bad as cold ones, it’s important to know how to wash heated socks. After detaching the battery pack, a thorough hand-cleaning followed by air-drying in a well-ventilated area will do the trick. Never wring them (which can damage the wiring) or throw them into the washing machine or dryer.

Final thoughts on the best heated socks

The best heated socks will cost you a bit more than the cheap socks you wear during summer, but the warmth they provide—and the improved circulation as well as relief from arthritis and joint pain—make them worth the investment. If you get a pair with ultra-fine wires and a slim battery compartment that rests above the top of your boots, the only difference you might notice from regular socks will be the increased comfort and warmth that’ll make them much more comfortable as you enjoy the great wintry outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated socks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best projectors under $200 in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-projectors-under-200/ Thu, 14 Apr 2022 19:00:02 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=433292
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

Turn any wall into a window to other worlds with a portable projector.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best projectors under $200 composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

best overall WiFi Bluetooth Projector, DBPOWER is the best overall projector under 200. DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector
SEE IT

Excellent all-around performance with HD video and a good warranty.
Best bright image Projector, GooDee 2022 is the best projector under 200. GooDee 2023 Projector
SEE IT

With an extra bright image, this is a solid outdoor movie night option.
Best portable Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector is the best portable projector under 200. Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector
SEE IT

Palm-sized but still potent, this tiny pocket projector offers big entertainment.

Projectors do wonders at making any room—even minuscule city apartments—feel like a home theater. And not all projectors require a big investment to open up a huge new window of immersive entertainment. If you’re ready to expand your laptop binges and smartphone scrolling to the size of your wall, you can explore the world of streaming content at a surprisingly affordable price. You shouldn’t expect top-tier performance at this price point, but the best projectors under $200 can still provide a satisfying experience if you choose the right model and do a little prep work. 

How we chose the best projectors under $200

Having spent countless nights watching YouTube with my girlfriend’s cat at the foot of the bed purring and curled up around the projector’s exhaust fan, I know the joys of a simple-to-use home projector. For this best-of list, I evaluated leading projectors from numerous manufacturers, looking for the magic combination of a few factors that add up to make some truly great picks. We narrowed down this list from dozens based on intensive research, editorial reviews, and spec comparisons. 

The best projectors under $200: Reviews & Recommendations

These projectors offer surprisingly capable combinations of tech features that capitalize on crisp definition, Apollonian illumination, dynamic sound, and the connectivity you need for nightly use. Most hook into your laptop using an HDMI cable, while some pair wirelessly through a WiFi network. For audio, many pair with powered speakers (or an AV receiver) via aux connections and sometimes support Bluetooth. At the $200 price point, few projectors may be completely cord-free or the perfect pairing for your premium sound systems, but they could be a great partner to that new portable party speaker. Still, today’s budget projectors offer versatility and delivery that would have been unthinkable at this price a decade ago.

Best overall: DBPOWER WiFi Bluetooth Projector

WiFi Bluetooth Projector, DBPOWER is the best overall projector under 200.

DBPOWER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With native HD, 9,000 lumens, and WiFi connectivity, this is a versatile and powerful projector, but it’s the customer support that makes it the best overall.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,000 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, WiFi, Bluetooth (sound), TV stick, USB, AV port, 3.5mm audio

Pros

  • Really nice picture with good definition and bright luminance
  • Solid connectivity options
  • Allows viewers to screencast from their phones

Cons

  • Bluetooth connection is only sound, advertising is misleading
  • Some high-end sound systems won’t connect

This projector hits all the basics with aplomb: It offers 1080p definition without much warping along the edges, delivers 9,000 lumens to be visible in half-light conditions, and features impressive connectivity options. That connectivity lets you pair your devices to the projector via WiFi to screencast from a phone, or connect a sound system via Bluetooth. However, it will not deliver video via Bluetooth. That’s typical, but the product listings make it slightly confusing. 

The projector also delivers a few special features, such as a zoom function that allows you to shrink the image to 75% via the remote. Built-in speakers create a modicum of surround sound illusion. However, we think you’ll be best served by connecting to a separate Bluetooth speaker device.  

Best bright image: GooDee 2022 Projector

Projector, GooDee 2022 is the best projector under 200.

GooDee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With 1080p native resolution, 9,500 lumens, and two speakers to create a modicum of surround sound, this projector is more than capable of achieving most of what most users want.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: 2 HDMI, VGA, 2 USB, AV, TF card

Pros

  • Two speakers for true stereo sound
  • Extra bright LED luminance
  • Decent connections

Cons

  • Build quality is a bit cheap
  • Edges get somewhat fuzzy

At the sub-$200 price point, it can be hard to find a projector with really excellent brightness. The GooDee 2022 distinguishes itself here. Offering 9,500 lumens with a 3,000:1 contrast ratio and a max screen size of 230 inches, this budget projector emphasizes going big. A pretty perfect option for backyard movie nights, this might be the best outdoor projector under $200, hitting a nice sweet spot of big image and lightweight build. 

The GooDee does have a little trouble with warping and fuzziness around the image corners. However, that’s nothing rare at this price point. The device also suffers from a somewhat cheap-feeling build. It doesn’t feel super solid and primed for longevity. Still, the brightness and resolution may compensate for this for most users.

All in all, GooDee delivers a projector that yields a pretty bright, crisp image, with good contrast and resolution. It’s especially suited for backyard movie parties.

Best portable: Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector

Kodak Ultra Mini Portable Projector is the best portable projector under 200.

KODAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With support for 1080p signal and a two-hour battery charge, this super-petite projector fits in a pocket and makes for a perfect companion for campers with kids or travel.

Specs

  • Luminance: 25 ANSI lumen
  • Definition: 640 x 320 (capable of displaying images meant for 1080p)
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, MicroSD

Pros

  • Ultra-portable
  • Makes a great camping projector

Cons

  • Battery often dies in under two hours

Ready to bring your projector camping? The Kodak Ultra Mini projector does some amazing things, considering its size. At about 3 inches square and only 150 grams, the Kodak lives up to its title as a true “ultra-mini” projector housed in that tiny body is a decent projector that hooks up to most smartphones and portable devices.

With such a tiny size and low price, the Ultra-Mini will require you to make some sacrifices. While it can receive a 1080p signal, it only outputs at 640 x 320, meaning the 1080p video entering the projector will be downscaled to a much lower native resolution. It’s quite a drop from HD, so don’t expect crisp, beautiful video that perfectly represents contemporary cinema. Additionally, the brightness isn’t anything to write home about. Still, it’s nothing to sneer at on a dark tent wall. One other issue with the device is its short battery life. It generally won’t make it past two hours, so don’t expect any Lord Of The Rings marathon binges here.

If a miniature portable projector is something you’re after and you decide you can afford the bells and whistles, Kodak’s more expensive Luma 350 could be worth exploring. For its small price and equally tiny size, however, the Kodak Ultra Mini is the best mini projector under $200. It’s worth a look, even if it could be a good idea to get your expectations in order before you spring for it.

Best for home theater: Wsky HD Projector (Refurbished)

Wsky HD Projector is the best projector for home theater under 200.

Wsky

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a native 1080p HD resolution and a significantly higher-than-average 5,000:1 contrast, this projector puts its double-dense LED tech to work.

Specs

  • Luminance: 7,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, audio port, USB, MHL

Pros

  • 84 LEDs double the standard LED count in a projector and achieve greater detail, contrast, and less fuzziness on the exterior of the image
  • Value priced

Cons

  • Sound quality isn’t great

For a sub-$200 cinephiles projector, look no further than the Wsky HD Projector. This projector puts the work in on image quality using a higher-than-average LED count. The 5,000:1 contrast is noticeably better than much of the competition, and the 1080p HD coverage looks great, even with new movies. With better-than-average corner coverage achieved via the keystone wheel, Wsky also doesn’t suffer from as much of the edge blurriness that might make subtitles illegible on some projectors.

The Wsky’s sound won’t rack up any bonus points, however. While it advertises Dolby sound, the two speakers aren’t powerful enough. However, plugging speakers into the audio jack can mitigate this sound deficiency. Sadly, no Bluetooth audio connection is available. However, those who stump for Bluetooth speakers may be able to pair them to a device that’s sourcing video (such as your laptop, though there might be sync issues). 

With its impressive video capabilities, the Wsky HD Projector is worth consideration for anyone who wants a projector that yields a great picture.

Best with DVD player: BIGASUO Upgrade HD Bluetooth Projector

BIGASUO Upgrade HD Bluetooth Projector is the best projector under 200 with a DVD player.

BIGASUO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For folks with a legacy DVD collection who might want to skip all the wires, this projector has a built-in DVD player and does a decent job at all the rest.

Specs

  • Luminance: 5,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, AV, USB, Bluetooth (sound), TF SD card

Pros

  • DVD player built in
  • Decent connectivity, including Bluetooth for sound

Cons

  • Resolution and brightness are both somewhat low
  • Sound is nothing to write home about

Are you itching to tuck into the entire Lassie television series on DVD box set? The BIGASUO Upgrade HD projector with a built-in DVD player might be your best bet. The BIGASUO projector is remarkable for its connections and legacy media opportunities. 

The Bluetooth connection for sound is particularly useful in concert with the built-in DVD player. Often with contemporary laptops, Bluetooth sound on a projector is redundant since most laptops can pair to a Bluetooth speaker while casting video through HDMI. However, since this device acts as its own DVD player, the Bluetooth connection can be important for those skipping the laptop entirely. This means you can natively watch DVDs from the device while simultaneously paired with a Bluetooth speaker for sound.

Outside of its DVD player, this is an unremarkable projector. It downscales HD video to its native 720p definition, which falls short of similarly priced native HD projectors. Its brightness similarly lags the competition somewhat.

If you’re looking for a capable all-in-one DVD player/projector hybrid, the BIGASUO Upgrade HD is a good pick. Otherwise, you may want to move on.

Best with screen: YABER WiFi 9000L

Yaber makes one of the best projectors under $200.

Yaber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yaber boasts an impressive 10,000:1 contrast, supplemented by an included SCT screen that improves the image.

Specs

  • Luminance: 9,500 lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, VGA, AV, audio, TF card

Pros

  • Includes projection screen, which is primed for contrast
  • Decently bright
  • Lightweight and portable at just over two pounds

Cons

  • Resolution could be better

Pay for a projector, get the whole shebang? You’ll get just that with the YABER WiFi 9000L, which features a projection screen included in the box. While lots of folks use their projectors on a blank wall, you can demonstrably get a better image with a specially designed projection screen.

The rest of the YABER’s specs are average. It features a 1080p native resolution, and its brightness is better than average but not outstanding. It uses two speakers for decent sound. The WiFi connectivity is a nice touch that may sway some buyers. That, coupled with the 10,000:1 high definition, makes for a good all-around projector that’s a perfect addition to some households.

Best for gaming: WiMiUS S26 Projector

The Wimius S26 is the best projectors under $200 for gaming.

WiMiUs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This HD projector isn’t actually true 4K, but it does deliver 1080p video at gaming speeds, extra bright 480 ANSI lumens, 20,000:1 contrast ratio, and extra nice keystone correction. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 480 ANSI lumens
  • Definition: 1080p
  • Connections: HDMI, USB, AV, 1 audio output

Pros

  • Great video quality with very bright and detailed image
  • Relatively low lag makes it worthy of games
  • With a wider-than-average keystone correction capability, you’ll get a more balanced picture

Cons

  • “4K” claim refers to 4K video input, which is standard and downgraded to HD
  • Edges of the picture remain fuzzy

Available for a solid sale price more often than not, the WiMiUS S26 fits within the $200 mark for our purposes. While the false 4K advertising is certainly a turn-off, the projector is still a good enough deal to highlight on this list. 

This projector has a classic HD 1920×1080 resolution, make no mistake. The 4K claim simply refers to the projector’s ability to accept 4K video and downscale it to HD, which is common. Still, this projector throws a nice-looking image: It has the highest contrast ratio of any projector on this list, with about 1,152 LED lumens (480 ANSI lumens) that should appeal to gamers. That said, the image has some issues; its edges tend to blur, with the middle properly focusing and the corners getting fuzzy.

In the end, this is a pretty capable extra bright projector. But don’t be fooled by the advertising … this isn’t a magical unicorn 4K projector for under $200.

Best budget: Vamvo Mini Movie Projector

The Vavmo Mini Projector is the best projector under $200 at a budget-friendly price.

Vavmo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its two built-in speakers, 720p resolution, and under 1-pound weight, Vamvo dishes up a budget projector that does a really decent job. 

Specs

  • Luminance: 3,500 lumens
  • Definition: 720p
  • Connections: HDMI, VGA, SD/TF, AV, USB and RC

Pros

  • Better sound delivery than most at this price
  • Lightweight build makes it a great choice for a portable option
  • Decently bright

Cons

  • Non-HD picture is a bit blurry

For a truly low price for its capabilities, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector is the value pick for budget projectors. This 720p projector still delivers a decent enough high-contrast picture that’s adequately bright in dark rooms at 3,500 lumens, so that it’s effective in moderately dark to very dark spaces. While it advertises its support for 1080p HD, the 720p resolution will mean that high-end pictures do downgrade and lose detail. If you’re just watching the occasional movie in a dark backyard on a DIY screen or sheet, that may not matter very much.

The projector’s speakers certainly fall short of outstanding. Still, you can’t knock the performance here for the price point. It does a better job than most at this level. Overall, Vamvo is a true budget projector. While none of its components outpace the best equipped of the competition, if a low price is your most important metric, then it’s worth real consideration for its decent treatment of all the basics. At about just under a pound, this Vamvo is portable, reliable, and very cheap.

Things to consider when shopping for the best projectors under $200

You won’t get a chance to try out these projectors before you take the leap and buy one, but you can get a good idea of what you’re getting by comparing the specs. Here are some essential features to look for when trying to pick the best model for you. 

Do you need 4K?

4K is all the rage (until 8K finally establishes itself), and while I type this article on a laptop with a 4K screen, the resolution difference between 1080p and 4K at that scale is subtle. However, a top-tier projector is arguably one of the best applications of 4K resolution. Since projectors often cast their image onto large surfaces, the more pixels the projector displays, the better it looks at visual detail. That said, true 4K resolution is currently prohibitively expensive for an “under $200” list.

The difference between 1080p and a resolution like 720p is quite drastic. With a difference of 1080 lines of pixel dots versus 720 lines of pixel dots, you will notice the difference, especially if you’re projecting large. Generally, a substantive price difference separates the standard resolution brackets. So unless you are dedicated to getting the most portable projector out there, the choice should generally come down to budget vs. resolution. Go for the 1080p model unless image quality really isn’t important to you.

Read the fine print

Yeah, you want to believe that companies are being transparent about their products, but there’s a lot of bluster in the budget projector market. Often companies will claim their product supports HD in a header, then reveal that it has a native resolution of 720p, accepting HD video and downscaling it. It’s important to fully examine the specs of the projector you’re considering purchasing to ensure that it’s really the right one for you.

Keystone effect

Keystone correction refers to the illusion that’s created when your projector casts a square image onto a wall at an angle, creating a trapezoid. The shape created looks like the crowning keystone a mason would use to construct an arch. 

Today’s projectors compensate for the keystone effect by including a control that skews the image. This control usually takes the shape of a ring or nob by the focus control. Keystone correction can also be added digitally. 

Some projectors are better at keystone correction than others. But all projectors can benefit from supplementing keystone compensation with proper alignment of the projector against the wall. For permanent installation, getting the projector alignment right the first time is usually a good idea. Whether your projector will be installed permanently, or be moved around the house (or beyond), it’s worth understanding Keystone controls before you make a final decision.

Screen or wall?

Screens can make a huge difference in the image quality you get from your projector. Painted walls often contain more bumps and crevasses than you would expect. Not only do projector screens deliver a flat uniform surface, but they also often come primed with materials that help your projector do its work. Some projectors ship with a screen in the package. Many others would benefit from one. It’s worth considering whether you want to invest in a projector screen.

Luminance

Most of the time, projectors with the highest luminance are better than others for most users. Since projectors work by casting light onto a wall, higher luminance equals a brighter, more visible image, that will show up in half-light settings and on surfaces that aren’t primed for contrast. Usually, companies describe luminance in terms of lumens, which is the International System of Units standard for measuring total light emission over a unit of time. Sometimes, projectors advertise their brightness using the term “ANSI lumens,” a (generally) more accurate metric created by the American National Standards Institute for measuring total light emitted from a projector. While ANSI lumens aren’t directly convertible to lumens without accounting for a few additional factors (such as room temperature and surface color), 400 ANSI lumens roughly translates to a little under 1000 lumens. For this article, we prioritized higher luminance in most cases.

Picture quality and definition 

We’re in the era of 4K, and while a 4K resolution projector is rarely achievable for less than $200 (though we’ve got some great choices starting at $500), HD has become the bottom line in most cases. Many projectors still offer less than 1080p resolutions, and some are still worth considering, especially if you’re stumping for ultra-portability (or ultra-cheap prices). Still, most of the time, 1080p HD is the baseline we look for in a model designed for watching content. It creates a detailed image that does justice to your Criterion Collection binges. Definition isn’t the whole story, though: some projectors warp or blur image edges, skewing the picture. Other factors like contrast and color reproduction can also affect quality. This list prioritizes projectors that achieve image quality that displays the worlds you escape in how the director (or game designer) envisioned them.

Connectivity

At the sub-$200 price point, most projectors use HDMI cables for video connection. A few offer WiFi connections to supplement this. A few even offer Bluetooth connectivity. I factored in a projector’s connection offerings when I evaluated it and highlighted any that stand out from the crowd.

FAQs

Q: Which brand is best for projectors?

At the sub-$200 price point, DBPOWER is the most all-around capable projector. You also get solid support along with your purchase. 

Q: What should I look for in a good projector?

Great projectors under $200 offer solid brightness, which usually delivers 5,000 lumens and up, HD video, good connectivity, and reliable customer service. 

Q: How many lumens do I need for outdoor projector?

No projector can keep up with the luminance of the sun. Projectors that deliver the maximum possible lumens do the best outdoors; in the under $200 category, look for projectors that deliver 7,000 lumens and up, and 9,000-9,500 would be best.

Q: How many lumens is a good projector?

Certain mini portable projectors that emphasize small size can justify low brightness and still qualify as good quality. However, generally, 5,000 lumens and up makes a good projector brightness.

Q: What are the best projectors under $100?

The Vamvo Mini Movie Projector dishes up lean, mean video for under $100. With HD video, 3,5005-lumen brightness, and good connectivity, it’s a steal.

Q: What projectors under $200 work well with PS5?

The WiMiUS S26 Projector is a powerful gamer-ready projector. Its impressive video does justice to the PlayStation 5’s graphics. At just under $200, it’s a great choice. If you’re moving up to the PS5, though, you might want to consider larger, albeit more expensive projectors, or you’re just wasting all that next-gen game engine.

Q: How long does a projector last?

While so many components factor into the lifespan of your tech. Companies often advertise the lifespan of the LEDs or other light sources that power their projectors. Some are primed to last for 10 years, while others may only deliver about a year.

Final thoughts on the best projectors under $200

The best projectors under $200 offer tuned combinations of value and performance. You’ll find HD video, bright high-lumen LEDs, and solid connectivity at the price point. You can also find ultra-mini projectors capable of projecting from a phone or tablet and easily fit into a shirt pocket. For one of the best value projectors around, the Vamvo Mini Movie Projector delivers good video and brightness at a super-budget price. The Wsky HD Projector, with its impressive LED tech, is our favorite for home theater, though you might want to pair it with external speakers. DBPOWER, on the other hand, was the clear choice for the overall best projector under $200 for its HD video, good brightness, connectivity, and a customer service plan and warranty that goes far beyond most on this list. Whatever you pick, enjoy the new dimensions of video and picture quality that your projector will bring to your home media. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best projectors under $200 in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best trekking poles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-trekking-poles/ Tue, 13 Sep 2022 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=469199
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

The best tools for keeping you upright on all manner of hikes, treks, and scrambles.

The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best trekking poles sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole. Black Diamond Alpine FLZ
SEE IT

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole.
Best carbon fiber These MSR poles feature a “Dynalock” mechanism that shores up their durability. MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon
SEE IT

The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles.
Best aluminum Leki Makalu Lite Leki Makalu Lite
SEE IT

The Leki Makalu Lite will hold up through months-long treks over all sorts of terrain.

Many dedicated backpackers consider a quality pair of trekking poles essential gear for hiking. They help you hike and keep your balance over steep hills, rocky paths, and slippery snow-covered trails. Like their predecessor, the humble walking stick, a quality pair of hiking poles are sturdy enough to put your entire weight on them, yet light enough that they do not feel like a burden after a long day on the trail. They ease the strain on your knees and back, especially if you’re carrying a heavy pack. There are a dizzying number of poles to choose from. They’re made from different materials, feature different designs, and, of course, some are more expensive than others. We’ve tried a whole bunch of popular options, taking them on runs, hikes, climbs, and scrambles to find the best trekking poles for all your outdoor adventures.

How we picked the best trekking poles 

I’ve been writing about outdoor gear and my often dubious adventure travel for decades at publications like Hearst, HuffPost, BBC Travel, Fodor’s, Adventure Cycling, Input, and many others. My criteria for experiencing new places usually include how many people visit (the fewer the better), and if it has a reputation as a “challenging” journey. Over the years, I’ve traveled across all kinds of terrain and environments, many of which required a good set of trekking poles to navigate.

I’ve spent a good deal of time testing trekking poles—walking, running, climbing, scrambling, and sometimes falling—all over the world. Over the years, I’ve found a few favorites. I’ve also compared notes and talked for hours with trekkers, hikers, and adventurers about gear around countless campfires and well-worn tables in questionable bars.

The best trekking poles: Reviews & Recommendations

Like most outdoor gear, trekking pole preference can vary from person to person. Given that, our recommendations span a variety of options made from different materials and covering a wide range of prices. All of them, however, have a clear edge over similar poles in important qualities like durability and weight.

Best overall: Black Diamond Alpine FLZ

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a dynamic, highly packable trekking pole.

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is a highly versatile pole that packs down small, making it a prime choice for all kinds of activities.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 43, 49, or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14, 15, or 16 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trail baskets, snow baskets, rubber tips (sold separately)

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Comfortable handles
  • Packable

Cons

  • Heavy

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is an incredibly versatile trekking pole. The small packable size and durable aluminum construction make it an optimal pole for most everything including rugged trekking, multi-day backpacking, steep hiking, and even backcountry skiing. The cork handles become increasingly more comfortable over time as well as a secondary foam grip.

While a telescoping pole is inherently stronger than a foldable one, I’ve found the Alpine FLZ holds up extremely well in a variety of precarious situations including nefarious water crossings and muddy sheer drop-offs. They feature Black Diamond’s patented Flicklock pro locking mechanism, which uses a lever to secure the pole length with an inner adjustable tension dial that requires a small Allen key to adjust.

The Black Diamond Alpine FLZ is far from the fanciest pair of trekking poles out there but has proven that it can get the job done in difficult situations, and feels comfortable on easy trail hikes.

Best carbon fiber: MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon

These MSR poles feature a “Dynalock” mechanism that shores up their durability.

MSR

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The MSR Dynalock Ascent Carbon is a versatile, sturdy, and comfortable pair of poles that work for a wide variety of adventures.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 47 inches or 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 14.25 inches or 17.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Winter and summer baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable grip
  • Versatile
  • Small pack size

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy for a carbon pole

My friend Ben has been almost everywhere on the globe and he always travels with his MSR Dynalock Ascent carbon poles, which he considers an extension of himself and one of the best gear spurges he’s ever made (it may also be the only one).

The Dynalock Ascent poles have comfortable, contoured foam grip handles and padded straps. Each one folds down to a very packable 14.25-17 inches, depending on which size you get. Unlike most other poles where most of the tips are sold separately, these come with both winter and summer basket tips. 

They also feature MSR’s signature Dynalock mechanism, which consists of a thick aluminum lever and an inner metal dial that allows you to tighten or loosen with ease as well as providing exceptional sturdiness. It also locks each section into place with metal buttons on the sides. As someone who often has “Final Destination”-type scenarios running through my brain, I appreciate both of these components. 

Best aluminum: Leki Makalu Lite

Leki Makalu Lite

REI

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Leki Makalu Lite is one of the most durable poles I’ve tried.

Specs

  • Weight: 17.3 ounces
  • Maximum length: 54 inches
  • Collapsed length: 26 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, summer basket

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Extremely durable
  • Moderate price

Cons

  • Large packed size

If you’re planning to use your trekking poles on a weeks-long adventure, Leki’s Makalu Lite poles are among the most durable we’ve found. Despite the name, they’re slightly thicker than most other poles, making them tremendously strong, as well as fairly heavy.

The Makalu Lite features Leki’s very comfortable “Aergon Air” grip—a cork design with a hollow core and wide support at a lightly tilted ergonomic angle. Like all Leki poles, these use the company’s durable “Speed Lock” system, which combines a lever lock with a small dial to tighten spring tension by hand.

A pair of Makalu Lites is overkill for your average day hike, but their durability is worth the extra weight on a long trip where you’ll traverse mountains or glacial ice for weeks or months.

Best for hiking: Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork

Comfortable and sturdy, the Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork poles are ready for long, rocky hikes.

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Alpine Carbon Cork is an incredibly sturdy carbon pole with a very comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Weight: 17 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 24 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips and trail baskets included; snow baskets sold separately

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Excellent locking mechanism
  • Durable

Cons

  • Not as packable as other options
  • Expensive

I prefer cork handles over rubber and foam because they mold to your hands over time so, eventually, feel like a seamless extension of your body. The cork handles on Black Diamond’s Alpine carbon poles are quite comfortable right out of the box and improve exponentially over time. Like most trekking poles, they have a secondary foam grip beneath the handles, which gives you a comfortable place to grab when you need to lower your grip, as well as wide wrist straps.

They are amazingly durable and sturdy for a carbon pole, thanks to their thicker shafts and Black Diamond’s patented “Flicklock” mechanism, which flips into place with a robust snap. The “Flicklock” system has its disadvantages: The locking mechanism requires a tiny Allen key to adjust, which isn’t ideal since it’s easily misplaced. Not being the most graceful person, (especially when hiking) I routinely get my poles stuck between boulders requiring intense back-and-forth movement to dislodge. Despite this, I have yet to break them.

The collapsed length of these poles means they’re not well-suited to be stowed in a backpack during a technical climb but for most activities, including trekking over rock and snow in remote regions of the world, these poles are a solid choice that will last for years.

Best for backpacking: Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork

Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork

Black Diamond

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Black Diamond Trail Ergo Cork is a solid, affordable option that’s durable enough to handle most backpacking trips.

Specs

  • Weight: 18 ounces
  • Maximum length: 55 inches
  • Collapsed length: 27 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips, trekking baskets, and snow baskets

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Versatile
  • Reasonable mid-range price

Cons

  • Doesn’t pack down as small as other options

Black Diamond’s Trail Ergo Cork trekking poles are a great pick for new hikers. They’re sturdy, comfortable, and reliable—a great fit for most backpacking and thru-hiking. Plus, at less than $150, they don’t cost a fortune.

 The cork handles are tilted forward slightly for a more natural, ergonomic wrist alignment. They also have padded straps and a foam secondary grip, making them easy to hold. Like the other Black Diamond hiking poles on our list, these feature the company’s patented “Flicklock” system, ensuring they don’t come loose while you’re walking.

Collapsing to a fairly large 27 inches, they are longer than the majority of other poles when packed away. Unless you’re taking them on a plane, though, that probably shouldn’t be too much of an issue.

Best ultralight: Gossamer Gear LT5 Three Piece Carbon

Gossamer Gear’s LT5 carbon trekking poles are extremely light and highly durable.

gossamer gear

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Gossamer Gear LT5 is one of the lightest trekking poles available.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.6 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 23.5 inches
  • Shaft material: Carbon fiber
  • Grip material: EVA foam
  • Pole design: Collapsible
  • Tips: Carbide tips

Pros

  • Comfortable
  • Ultralight
  • Extremely durable for their weight

Cons

  • Expensive

For situations where every ounce (or even gram) counts, the ultralight Gossamer Gear LT5 carbon trekking poles streamline your experience better than any other poles. Despite weighing less than 11 ounces, they’re incredibly durable. I used them on a multi-week thru-hike over mixed terrain through a good portion of northern Spain one summer where I was intent on carrying as little weight as possible, both emotionally and physically, and they didn’t let me down.

The twist-lock mechanism is easy to set; you simply rotate the sections for a secure lock. The wrist straps sport comfortable padding and the EVA foam handles have proven to be comfortable enough (though I am partial to cork handles).

The LT5s also serve as great support for ultralight tents that use trekking poles as part of the structure, thus providing a super lightweight sleep system.

Best budget: Trekology Trek-Z

The Trekology Trek-Z is an inexpensive pole with lots of accessories for every kind of day hike.

TREKOLOGY

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Trekology Trek-Z is an incredibly inexpensive pole that doesn’t sacrifice comfort or durability.

Specs

  • Weight: 26 ounces
  • Maximum length: 51 inches
  • Collapsed length: 15 inches
  • Shaft material: Aluminum
  • Grip material: Cork
  • Pole design: Foldable
  • Tips: Carbide, rubber, snow baskets, mud stops, rubber feet

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Durable
  • Folds down small

Cons

  • Heavy

Made from aerospace-grade 7075 aluminum alloy, the Trekology Trek-Z is an inexpensive pair of poles that come complete with carbide tips, rubber tips, snow baskets, mud stops, and rubber feet, making them highly adaptable and a huge bargain. They feature a metal flip-lock mechanism that’s easy to operate, though you may not use it often since they offer a very limited 7-inch range. They do collapse into a very compact 15-inch package, though.

For less than $50, the Trek-Z is one of the most affordable poles we’ve seen. Unsurprisingly, they’re also among the heaviest. We wouldn’t recommend them for alpine climbing, mountain running, or speed hiking, where you want to be quick and nimble. For those sticking to the trail and not too concerned about their performance, they’re an excellent option for not a lot of money.

One thing to keep in mind: Trekology makes a new “Trek-Z 2.0” with EVA foam grips instead of cork. In general, I prefer cork grips because of the material’s moldable properties, so we’re sticking with the original. Just keep in mind that it may become harder to find in the coming months.

What to consider when buying trekking poles

Finding the perfect trekking pole can be a daunting task. As with all outdoor gear, there are a variety of options to consider. More often than not, finding the “best” choice requires you to balance different strengths and weaknesses based on your personal needs and taste. The lightest trekking poles will rarely be the absolute sturdiest. The strongest poles will likely not be the most packable. To help you figure out what you need, let’s talk about the most important elements of any trekking pole set.

Sizing up your poles

Trekking poles come in different lengths so that any person can find a pair that feels right. At standing position, the grip of the pole should line up with your elbow or, more precisely, with your hands when your elbows are bent at a 90-degree angle. If you’re shopping at home, look for poles that are adjustable to within 20-24 inches shorter than you. For example, I’m 5 feet 6 inches, or 66 inches, so I want poles that you can set to a height between 42-46 inches.

Most modern trekking poles are adjustable to some degree, so there’s a lot of wiggle room if you aren’t sure about what will feel right. Some companies also make fixed-height poles, as they are technically stronger. All of our recommendations are adjustable, though, as we find them to be much more versatile than fixed-length poles. In general, I usually shorten my poles when ascending a steep incline and lengthen them when descending. Collapsible and foldable trekking poles allow the user to change the overall length of the pole as the terrain and situation merit.

Collapsible poles feature a telescoping design, where increasingly narrow sections slide and fit inside each other. Foldable poles have a reinforced cord running through them that holds the sections together when pulled apart while allowing them to fold—like the pole technology used in most lightweight tents. 

Telescoping poles will be stronger than their foldable counterparts because, in most cases, the pole overlaps and slides into itself at a greater distance than foldable ones. A fixed-length pole will be the most durable option, though, as there are no weak points or breaks in the shaft. Many poles now feature one telescoping section coupled with two folding sections to offer more precise adjustment options.

Pole material

Most trekking poles are made from either high-grade aluminum or carbon fiber. Carbon fiber produces a lighter pole, while sacrificing a bit of durability. Under intense stress, a carbon fiber pole will likely snap. Aluminum poles, by contrast, will usually bend before they break, giving you a bit of a warning that you should navigate out of that particular situation right away if at all possible. 

If you’re looking for speed and/or the ability to go long distances, a carbon pole is probably your best choice. If you’re okay with a slightly heavier pole (and we’re usually talking ounces here, not pounds), an aluminum pole may be a better fit for difficult terrain and will last a bit longer.

Check the grip

You’re going to spend a long time holding your trekking poles’ grips, so you want to make sure that they’re comfortable. You should take a look at the grip and, ideally, give it a squeeze to see how it feels in your hand.

Most pole grips are made from cork, foam, or rubber. I prefer cork because the material molds to the shape of your hand over time. Grips made with EVA foam are also often quite comfortable and weigh a bit less than cork. Rubber grips absorb shock exceptionally well, but can get sticky and cause blisters when it’s hot and humid out.

Tips

Trekking poles come with different kinds of tips on the end, which can help you move across different kinds of terrain. Many poles, including our recommendations, either come with multiple sets of pole tips or give you the opportunity to buy alternate tips or replacements when you need them. (You should replace your tips every 1,500-2,000 miles.) Most pole tips have a screw-on mechanism, so it’s easy to change them on the fly, so it’s nice to have multiple options on your trip. Here are some of the most common choices:

Rubber tips provide extra grip on wet surfaces, as well as shock absorption on paved surfaces. Since they’re softer and less pointy, rubber tips don’t tear up trails as much as carbide tips, but also don’t provide as much traction.

Carbide tips are extremely durable. They don’t wear down as quickly as rubber versions. With a sharper point, they grip well on rock, dirt, and ice, allowing you to really dig into surfaces. They’ll also rip up soft dirt, so they may damage hiking trails.

Rubber feet have a shape that resembles a small foot. With a wider footprint, they allow you to move faster without losing your balance.

Mud baskets attach a few inches above the tip of your poles and prevent your poles from sinking down too far into soft, muddy earth. They can also prevent some of the mud from splattering onto your calves. Like carbide tips, though, they can damage plant life on trails, so you should reserve them for appropriate terrain.

Snow baskets are a wider version of mud baskets made for snow. They function like snowshoes, keeping your poles near the surface of deep snow.

Locking mechanism

If you follow my lead and go with adjustable poles, you should take a closer look at how it opens and closes. Most adjustable trekking poles feature a locking mechanism with a lever that opens or closes to slide the pole length up or down, coupled with a push button lock or spring-loaded twist lock. Many also include an inner dial in the lever to increase or decrease tension. When considering a pole, check to make sure it’s easy to adjust the poles and operate the lock with or without gloves. If you buy poles that require special tools to change spring tension, make sure those are included. You want a pole that you can easily adjust when out on the trail but also locks securely.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best trekking poles cost?

Most trekking poles cost $50-$250, depending on what they’re made from, versatility, comfort, durability, and weight. Generally speaking, the lighter the pole, the higher the price tag. When choosing hiking poles, remember that they need to be light enough to lift and carry all day without tiring you out on a hike, but strong enough to support your body weight.

Q: Where do I recycle my trekking poles?

If they are in good working condition without structural damage, you can often recycle a pair of trekking poles through a gear trade-in program like the one offered by REI. If they aren’t reusable, you can put aluminum poles out with your household metal recycling.

Carbon fiber trekking poles aren’t recyclable. There are companies who are developing ways to recycle it, but it’s not a process that is easy or currently available to the general public.

Q: Are trekking poles bad for trails?

Trekking poles can be bad for trails as they have the potential to tear up soft soil and damage plants growing along the trailside. Pay close attention to where you place your poles, and stick to hiking best practices, including the following:

Don’t use your poles when you don’t need them. Use rubber tips as much as possible. In an area with tense vegetation, avoid using baskets that will rip up plant life. And finally, make sure to leave no trace.

Q: Do carbon fiber trekking poles break?

Carbon trekking poles can break, though it’s usually a result of extreme pressure. It doesn’t happen often enough for them to be considered unsafe. 

Originally developed for the aerospace industry, carbon fiber is lightweight, strong, and stiff made from woven fibers held together with resin. It is stronger than even steel of the same thickness while also being much lighter which is why it’s used to make things like trekking poles and bicycles.

Final thoughts on the best trekking poles

Outdoor gear companies are always finding ways to build sturdier, lighter trekking poles, but I find that you don’t need to get too worried about the particulars. As long as you get a pair that’s sturdy, comfortable to hold, and light enough to use all day, you shouldn’t worry too much about optimizing for the “best” experience. More than anything, you want something reliable. All of the poles included here are durable and comfortable with the potential to be that favorite piece of gear you don’t leave for an adventure without.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best trekking poles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best insulated water bottles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-insulated-water-bottles/ Tue, 26 Jul 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458191
Best insulated water bottles sliced header
Stan Horaczek

Hydrate in style—and save some plastic—with these durable steel bottles that will keep water cold for hours.

The post The best insulated water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best insulated water bottles sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle is the best insulated water bottle overall. YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle
SEE IT

A variety of sizes and mouthpieces mean you can build your best bottle.
Best with straw Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid is the best insulated water bottle with straw. Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid
SEE IT

An included silicon bumper protects from dings and dents.
Best 64 oz. Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug is the best 64 ounce insulated water bottle. Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug
SEE IT

No refills are necessary with this easy-to-carry bottle.

The hottest accessory of the season (or maybe it’s the coolest, depending on the contents) is an insulated water bottle. Although that sounds a little zany to say in a world of Amazon and Etsy, the #emotionalsupportwaterbottle tag on TikTok has 45.1 million views, with hundreds of videos of people showing off their rotation of reusable water bottles—plural—in a variety of colors, sizes, and brands. Those looking for this level of attachment—something trustworthy and always at your side, much like an emotional support animal—often turn to insulated varieties, which can keep drinks frosty for hours sans condensation, making them perfect travel companions. The best insulated water bottles go the distance when it comes to keeping drinks icy in style, and here are our picks.

How we chose the best insulated water bottles

As a former field hockey player and marching band kid, I know the importance of a water bottle that can go from class to sports practice to band rehearsal without breaking a sweat—literally. Although I was both an average athlete and slightly better musician, I can say with confidence that I’m a water bottle expert (hydration is very important to me, a water sign). Although my current hydration MVP is a pink 32-ounce Nalgene plastic water bottle I was excited to rescue from my college bookstore’s lost & found, I’ve had insulated water bottles from Yeti, Hydro Flask, Stanley, and Kleen Kanteen in my rotation. I also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted first-hand testing to separate the bad bottles from the rest of the bunch. The only thing we don’t like to keep bottled up at PopSci is our feelings on the best buys. 

How do insulated water bottles work?

One of the biggest reasons to opt for one of the best insulated water bottles and not something like the BPA-free Tritan plastic in my Nalgene bottle is the vacuum insulation—a small gap of air between the bottle walls to reduce conduction, keeping liquids hot or cold for several hours. Additionally, this also prevents the outer layer from sweating and causing water marks on some surfaces. Plastic may be durable and is less likely to dent in a fall, but it will warm up if left in a hot car. Beyond temperature retention, there are certain things to keep in mind when picking an insulated water bottle.

The best insulated water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

These insulated water bottles will leave you feeling refreshed—hydration-wise and “this water bottle is a nice step-up from the other things I’ve used”-wise.

Best overall: YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle

YETI Rambler 26-ounce Bottle is the best insulated water bottle overall.

YETI

SEE IT

Also available on Amazon

Why it made the cut: Throw it in your backpack and then throw it in the dishwasher—this bottle is meant to keep up with busy lifestyles. 

Specs

  • Sizes: 12, 18, 26, 36, 46, 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 12-24 hours for iced drinks; 12 for hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with removable Chug Cap

Pros

  • Tough
  • Dishwasher safe
  • Lots of mouthpiece accessories are available

Cons

  • 5-year warranty
  • A bit more expensive compared to other reusable water bottles

There was stiff competition to name the best overall water bottle. However, the Yeti Rambler takes home the top prize. It’s more durable than other contenders like Hydro Flask, and the powder coating has a great feel and grip to it. The bottle itself comes in a plethora of fun colors (with equally fun names like “Bimini Pink” and “King Crab”), and the number of accessories you can get for your bottle is astonishing. We think the included Chug Cap is a happy medium between wide-mouth ease and narrow-mouth accessibility; you can remove the Chug Cap for washing and ice insertion and put it back on for spillage-free sips. 

The handle on the bottle feels sturdy and is grabble—an important feature for slippy-fingered people like myself. Even the straw cap warrants major kudos—you don’t have to touch the straw part to flip it up, and the handle is offset, so you can sip without any logistical problems. Yeti advertises 12-24 hours for keeping iced drinks cold, but we think it can keep drinks cold for closer to 36 hours. Although the five-year warranty is great in theory, other comparable brands feature a lifetime warranty on their bottles. And, although the price is great in the long run, you can technically get an insulated water bottle that will last just as long (with more dings and dents) but is cheaper. However, we think Yeti is worth the investment.

Best sustainable: Klean Kanteen TKWide

Klean Kanteen TKWide is the best sustainable insulated water bottle.

Klean Kanteen

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Insulated water bottles are already sustainable, but Klean Kanteen’s 90% post-consumer 18/8 stainless steel composition goes the extra eco-friendly mile.

Specs

  • Sizes: 12, 16, 20, 32, 64
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature retention: 46-47 hours for iced drinks, depending on cap; 14 hours hot with cafe cap
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Steel straw in twist mouthpiece is more luxurious and eco-friendly than plastic
  • Twist cap straw design is stylish and prevents germs
  • Innovative internal thread design
  • Lots of accessory options

Cons

  • Straw cap not recommended for hot liquids due to stainless steel straw
  • Mouthpieces have more crevices than other bottles
  • Handle could be more robust

If you thought your reusable water bottle was saving the planet, wait until you meet the Klean Kanteen TKWide line. The company states that 95 percent of its products will be made from recycled steel by 2023; however, the TKWide line is explicitly made from recycled steel right now. 

We love the innovative twist cap straw design, which hides the straw mouthpiece completely until use, meaning it’s only exposed to the world when you want it to be. The internal thread design uses a series of rounded bumps rather than a line of threads to create a better seal, keeping your drinks cooler for longer. There are multiple cap options available to turn your TKWide into a tumbler for iced coffee or transform it into athletic mode with the sport cap. If you’re looking for a bottle with a sleek handle, the TKWide metal loop cap is for you. It’s easy to snag with two fingers, but it might not be for you if you’re looking for something truly grabbable.

Best with straw: Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid

Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid is the best insulated water bottle with straw.

Takeya

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A large, flexible handle, included silicon bumper, and leakproof design are all game-winning features.

Specs

  • Sizes: 32, 40, 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: 24 hours cold; 12 hours hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw lid

Pros

  • Large handle
  • Included silicone bumper
  • Leakproof 

Cons

  • Reviews note pink bottle looks different in the product photo than in real-life

When looking for an insulated water bottle with a straw cap, we like to see some specific features: a durable handle that isn’t in the way of the straw itself; a ridge to easily flip up the straw so it doesn’t come in contact with sweaty or dirty hands; and a leakproof design. The Takeya Pickleball Insulated Water Bottle with Straw Lid checks off all these boxes, with an included silicone bumper to prevent damage. A powder coating makes this bottle durable and easy to hold, and the large handle makes it easy to clip onto a backpack or carry around. 

These bottles are also cheaper than others on this list of a similar size—for example, a 32-ounce Hydroflask retails for $44.95, depending on where you purchase it. This bottle retails for $39.99, which is a steal considering it comes with a silicone bumper, which other companies sell separately. We think everyone is sleeping on this Japanese brand. If you’re looking for a serious step-up option, check out the Titanium Aurora Bottle from Snow Peak, a Japanese outdoors brand founded out of the snowy mountains that crafts elevated everyday items.

Best for kids: Hydro Flask 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth Straw Lid

Hydro Flask 12-ounce Kids Wide Mouth Straw Lid is the best insulated water bottle for kids.

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight bottle has an included silicone boot for extra protection.

Specs

  • Sizes: 12 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes 
  • Temperature times: 24 hours for cold drinks
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Perforated silicone boot for extra protection
  • Kid-friendly features like a place to write a name
  • Straw doesn’t need to be open all the way to take a sip

Cons

  • Handle design not the most comfortable to hold
  • Not leakproof

It was tough to choose between this and the Yeti Rambler Jr. as best for kids. However, the included silicon boot—which other companies sell as a separate accessory—and kid-specific features like a place to write their name edged it out. It’s also lighter than the Yeti Rambler Jr., clocking in at 9.6 ounces compared to 1 pound.

The straw doesn’t need to be opened all the way to take a sip, which is a blessing and a curse: it’s easier to drink out of, but it’s not leakproof. Additionally, the handle is out of the way from taking a sip but is a little uncomfortable to hold since it requires you to hook your fingers rather than allow for a full grab. The company does sell water bottle slings separately, which can keep everyone hands-free. If this bottle doesn’t tickle your kid’s hydration fancy, check out our other picks for the best kid water bottles.

Best with a filter: LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle

LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle is the best insulated water bottle with a filter.

LifeStraw

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Clean water is all around you with this fabulous filtered bottle.

Specs

  • Sizes: 24 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes, only with filter and carbon capsule removed
  • Temperature times: 24 hours cold; not recommended for hot liquids
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw mouthpiece

Pros

  • Included carabiner
  • Clean water anywhere
  • Dishwasher safe

Cons

  • One size only
  • Heavy
  • Doesn’t fit in standard cupholders

Finding clean water in the great outdoors is a struggle. Heck, even finding clean water in cities is difficult—looking at you, suss outdoor water fountain in the park. The LifeStraw Go Stainless Steel Water Filter Bottle gets rid of this drinkable debacle thanks to its included Titan Renew and membrane microfilters, which protect against parasites, microplastics, chlorine, organic chemical matter, dirt, sand, and cloudiness, while also improving taste. 

Specifically, LifeStraw’s membrane microfilter removes 99.999999% of bacteria, 99.999% of parasites, 99.999% of microplastics, silt, sand, and cloudiness. It meets NSF 42 standard for chlorine reduction and meets U.S. EPA & NSF P231 drinking water standards for the removal of bacteria and parasites. This means you can also have access to clean water internationally. The carbon filter costs around $10 to replace, and the replacement two-stage membrane filter costs around $25. However, these filters only need replacing every 1,000 gallons—that’s a lot of lake water. Although it’s heavier than other insulated water bottles, doesn’t fit in standard cup holders, and only comes in one size, we think the benefits of clean water outweigh these cons. If you’re looking for a bottle with UV light filtering, consider the LARQ PureVis Bottle, which is also self-cleaning.

Best 64 oz.: Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug

Stanley Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug is the best 64 ounce insulated water bottle.

Stanley

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This jug is easy to carry and keeps drinks cold for hours, making it easy to drink more water.

Specs

  • Sizes: 64 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: cold for 20 hours; 4 days with ice
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth with straw lid

Pros

  • Extra large moveable handle 
  • Leakproof straw
  • Insulated lid doubles as a cup

Cons

  • Heavy when filled

Stanley Adventure Quencher travel tumblers are currently every TikTok drink girlie’s must-have item. A TikTok drink girlie is a person (girlie is gender neutral) who has at least three beverages on their person at once, one of them being some sort of chaotic Utah soda concoction or an iced coffee. Stanley makes a mean water bottle as well, and its 64-ounce Ice Flow Flip Straw Jug is our favorite. Unlike other jugs, which come with a narrower mouthpiece for chugging, this water bottle comes with a straw for easy sipping—no one wants to recreate the water-chair scene in Flashdance IRL, at least not unintentionally. 

Its temperature control is also unbeatable—four days with ice is a long time! The large, moveable handle allows you to carry the (objectively heavy) jug with ease. I have an older model of this jug with a fixed handle, and I’m debating swapping it out for this model. Although it won’t fit in your cupholder, you can throw it on the floor of your car without worrying about it tipping over—and if it does, you’re less likely to experience any spills.

Best budget: Igloo 36-ounce Vacuum-Insulated Bottle

Igloo 36-ounce Vacuum-Insulated Bottle is the best for the budget.

Igloo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to sacrifice quality for price with this bottle, which has the same cooling times and features as more expensive varieties. 

Specs

  • Sizes: 26, 36 ounces
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • Temperature times: 48 hours cold; 12 hours hot
  • Mouthpiece: Wide mouth

Pros

  • Ergonomic handle
  • Great price for how long it can keep drinks cold
  • Powder coating for durability

Cons

  • Reviewers note the bottle leaking despite closing it tightly

If you’re looking for quality on a budget, look no further than cooler-aficionado Igloo. Although the company doesn’t sell any accessory mouthpieces—you’re kinda stuck with the wide mouth bottle with twist cap—you might be able to get away with finding an accessory cap from another company (which we are obligated to say, do this at your own risk). This bottle features similar specs as our best overall, the Yeti Rambler, at a fraction of the price. The products even have almost identical dimensions and handle shapes. Which is to say we love this bottle for the same reasons we love the Rambler: a powder coat finish for durability, an ergonomic handle, and lasting cooling power.

What to consider when buying the best insulated water bottles

Size: Insulated water bottles bring plenty of bounce to the ounce; the water bottles on this list range from 18 ounces all the way up to 64 ounces. Shop for a size based on your water intake. If you’re a frequent hydrator or athlete, you might want to consider a bottle that is 32 ounces and up. For on-the-go use, I personally enjoy a water bottle in the 24- to 32-ounce range—it’s not too small that I need to refill it constantly, but not a complete lug to haul around. However, I have a 64-ounce water bottle for the sole purpose of getting in my daily water intake without having to refill. Those looking for super-extra hydration should consider a gallon water bottle. Tiny tykes who don’t need that much water should aim for a 12-ounce bottle.

Dishwasher friendliness: You should wash your stainless steel water bottle after every use, regardless of what was in the bottle. Not all stainless steel bottles are dishwasher safe, however. Warm, soapy water and a sponge does the trick for bottles that require handwashing. If you have a bottle with a narrower opening or one that has hard-to-reach crevices—which equals a stinky, smelly, stainless steel bottle—look for a bottle brush or bottle-cleaning tabs to take care of the job. All of the bottles on our list are dishwasher safe.

Sip preferences: Wide-mouth water bottles are great if you want a cup-like sipping experience or want to throw in some ice hassle-free. However, you might get some spillage on your shirt and face in public, which is humbling, to say the least. A narrow mouth prevents that but is harder to load up with ice. A flip-up straw lets you sip your water as you please, but can be harder to chug based on the model. Companies often sell separate cap accessories to customize a sipping experience to your liking. 

Weight & durability: Stainless steel vacuum-insulated water bottles tend to be light and durable, thanks to 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its elemental composition: 18% chromium and 8% nickel. However, there is still a possibility for dings during use since some bottles have a thinner outer layer of stainless steel compared to others. This makes them lighter in weight but more prone to dents. And, like phone screens, you never know if your bottle will survive a short fall on concrete or a 3-foot tumble down a mountain. 

Additionally, the bottle’s paint coating affects its durability. Powder-coated bottles are less prone to scratches and peeling than liquid-coated bottles. The powder coating also gives the bottle more grip, which prevents it from slipping out of your hands. Handles, slings, and silicon sleeves can add personality and keep your bottle ding-and-dent-free. 

Thankfully, you can allegedly fix a dented bottle with some hot and cold water or a hairdryer and dry ice. This is all to say that a bottle with a thicker outer layer and a powder paint coating will typically experience fewer dents. 

FAQs

Q: Is drinking from stainless steel harmful?

No. Stainless steel (and titanium) water bottles are made from food-grade material resistant to corrosion and oxidation. Unlike aluminum bottles, they do not need a protective inner coating. And, unlike plastic bottles, they do not leach chemicals when exposed to warm beverages or heat. In fact, using a stainless steel water bottle is your safest bet when it comes to drinking receptacles.

Q: How do I clean my insulated water bottle?

If it’s dishwasher safe, just place it in the dishwasher on the left or right of the top rack, upside down. If it’s handwash-only, some warm, soapy water, a sponge, and some elbow grease are perfect. Bottlebrushes can help clean bottles with narrow openings or crevices. Bottle-cleaning tablets work in a pinch or on stubborn stains. 

Q: Can I bring an insulated water bottle on a plane?

Per TSA, insulated water bottles are allowed in carry-on bags as long as they’re empty before entering security. If you walk through security with an insulated water bottle that’s filled, you will risk confiscation or getting pulled aside. It’s best to make the TSA agent’s life easier by filling up your bottle after passing security. 

Q: How long do insulated water bottles last?

With proper use and care, you can get 10-12 years out of your insulated water bottle. Considering most high-quality insulated water bottles are in the $25-$60 range, that means you’re helping the environment while getting excellent cost-per-use. 

Q: How much should an insulated water bottle cost?

Most insulated water bottles cost around $30, although you’ll have to pay a little more if you want one in a larger size.

Final thoughts on the best insulated water bottles

Choosing the best insulated water bottle doesn’t have to dry out your spirit. You can find high-quality bottles to fit your liking and lifestyle across all price points. Handles, different mouthpieces, accessories, stickers, and fun colors can help you personalize your water bottle so it matches your personality. Hydration is essential, but who says it should be boring?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best insulated water bottles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/shed-outdoor-storage-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 16:36:06 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=578306
A green shed on a white background
Amanda Reed

Protect your lawn equipment with a new shed or outdoor storage box, on sale as part of October Prime Day.

The post Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A green shed on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A garage is a perfectly acceptable place for storage, but sometimes your tools just need a little house of their own. If you’ve wanted to incorporate a shed or other form of outdoor storage into your backyard, consider now a great time to do so: Prime Big Deal Days gives you up to 30% of savings on Arrow Select, Handy Home, Keter Factory, and more.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Handy Home Products Rookwood 10 X 8 Do-it-Yourself Wooden Storage Shed $1,318.70 (Was $1,899)

A shed in a backyard on a blue and white background

Handy Home

SEE IT

Harken back to the times of Sears catalog houses with this build-it-yourself shed from Handy Home. It has enough vertical storage for ladders, racks, shovels, and more, and its strong wood withstands wind and snow. Extra-large wide doors on galvanized steel hinges give you easy access, and it comes ready to paint out of the box. It comes with or without a floor for custom foundations, and you can even turn it into your own little office away from the house.

Here are more shed and outdoor storage deals happening this Prime Big Deal Days:

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post Best Amazon Prime Day deals on sheds and outdoor storage—Keter, Arrow, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/fitness-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577989
Increase your fitness with the help of these Amazon Prime Day deals,

Think of these discounts as an added investment in your health.

The post The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Increase your fitness with the help of these Amazon Prime Day deals,

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sure, you can get lots of amazing deals on laptops, vacuums, TVs, speakers, and other electronics on Amazon Prime Day. And, believe me, we enjoy sitting in front of a nice flatscreen and soundbar combo as much as the next gadget geek. But it’s also a great opportunity to save on fitness equipment. Whether you like to row virtually led by Olympic-caliber athletes or just pedal under your desk during the workday, we’ve rounded up lots of discounts on fitness equipment to help keep you healthy without emptying your wallet.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Hydrow Connected Rowing Machine $1,995 (was $2,495)

Save $500 on the Hydrow Connected Rowing Machine this Amazon Prime Day.

SEE IT

If the promise of rowing virtually through some of the world’s most storiedwaterways appeals to you, consider the Hydrow Connected Rowing Machine. This premium rower features a 22-inch touchscreen and speakers that help bring the experience to you. With the required $44 monthly subscription, you’ll also gain access to more than 3,000 classes, from rowing technique for beginners led by world-class rowers to yoga and HIIT workouts to round out your fitness. You can also sign up for live sessions and through the Hydrow app, and track your progress compared to other Hydrow rowers. And this rowing machine is $500 off this Prime Day. If you’re looking for a comparable model for less, consider the Hydrow Rower, which is more compact and is also on sale for $1,495 (down from $1,895).

Prime Day deals on home gym equipment

Prime Day deals on Garmin health-monitoring multisport GPS smartwatches

Prime Day deals on bikes

Prime Day deals on kayaks and hiking equipment

Prime Day deals on earbuds, water bottles, and other fitness accessories

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post The best Amazon Prime Day fitness: Save $500 on a Hydrow Rower and more Prime Day deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/solar-generators-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577903
October Prime Day solar generator deals tiled
Stan Horaczek

Keep the juice flowing even during a power outage with these portable solar generators.

The post The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
October Prime Day solar generator deals tiled
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

You likely won’t know just how much you’ll appreciate a solar generator until you really need one. These robust portable backups offer huge batteries that can power full-sized appliances in a pinch. That’s crucial during a blackout or a camping trip. Unlike the gas-powered competition, they run silently and are often highly portable. Plus, they can draw power directly from the sun with optional solar panel attachments. These power stations require some investment, which makes them a perfect purchase during Amazon’s October Prime Day sale. Save more than $1,000 on some models. You’ll be so glad you did next time everything goes dark.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Jackery solar generator deals

Anker solar generator deals

Bluetti solar generator deals

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post The best October Prime Day deals on solar generators from Jackery, Bluetti, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/greenworks-fall-cleanup-amazon-deal/ Wed, 04 Oct 2023 17:20:31 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577101
A Greenworks leafblower on a purple and pink gradient background
Amanda Reed

Don't let your leaves turn into a soppy, buggy mess with these Greenworks tools at Amazon.

The post Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Greenworks leafblower on a purple and pink gradient background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Fall leaves are fun to jump into, but it’s an entirely different story when it rains and you’re left with a pile of soggy detritus that doubles as a five-star hotel for bugs. Stop the development of the bug hotel with up to 20 percent off Greenworks tools at Amazon.

Greenworks 7 Amp 160 MPH/150 CFM Single Speed Electric Blower $29.50 ($49.99)

A Greenworks leafblower on a blue and white background

Greenworks

SEE IT

This lightweight leafblower produces a formidable 160 MPH wind speed to easily remove debris and dust from your yard and garage. There’s virtually no vibration for better handling and less fatigue compared to gas-powered leaf blowers. A cord lock prevents accidental unplugging, and a three-year warranty covers any factory-based problems.

Don’t let this deal blow away from you—take advantage of it before it disappears.

Here are more tool deals that will help make your yard the envy of the neighborhood:

The post Make fall cleanup a breeze with 20% off Greenworks tools at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-bug-zapper/ Wed, 14 Jul 2021 07:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=374553
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

Fight the bite and keep away the insects that would like to bug you with these outdoor bug zappers.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor bug zappers will help keep inspects at bay.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Black+Decker Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper overall. BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper
SEE IT

The BLACK+DECKER is large, sturdy, and powerful.
Best budget The Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb is the best outdoor bug zapper at a budget-friendly price. Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb
SEE IT

Ninonly provides one of the best bug-zapping light bulbs that you can find.
Best handheld The Anne Diary Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper that's handheld. Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket
SEE IT

With the ability to swivel the killing racket head, you can effectively cover the target insect on any surface.

When you’re ready to head outside, the last thing you want to do is get bitten or swarmed by insects, so having an outdoor bug zapper is a good idea. They make your insect-fearing companions feel more at ease and can give your uncovered food and drink a standing chance against buzzing bugs. But there are many styles to choose from that, and it can be hard to pick out which bug zapper best suits your needs. To do our part, we compiled this list of the best outdoor bug zappers.

How we selected the best outdoor bug zappers

Bugs aren’t just pesky; they can sometimes be dangerous. When it comes to outdoor bug zappers, you want something that works, but you also want ingenuity. The location of the zapper, its shape, and its functional style all matter. And, despite being weapons of death against our exoskeleton-having foes, the best outdoor bug zappers don’t look like death themselves. As a result, the following list of the best outdoor bug zappers represents a variety of styles and forms of zappers that also happen to be attractive to the eye.

The best outdoor bug zappers: Reviews & Recommendations

Purchasing one of the following outdoor bug zappers should make your yard less insect-friendly. As most have lights, these insect repellents should also improve the visibility of your porch or patio a bit. However, we still recommend these solar deck lights for a brighter, more sustainable option for that purpose. Be sure to check over the whole list to find a style that suits your needs.

Best overall: BLACK+DECKER Bug Zapper

The Black+Decker Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper overall.

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a large size and tough exterior, this will get the job done easily.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 32 x 12 x 32 inches
  • Target species: Fly, moth, mosquito, gnat, wasp

Pros

  • Can choose between hanging or putting on table
  • Cleaning-free option
  • Tough, waterproof exterior

Cons

  • Dead bugs sometimes stick to zapping element

For a quick-killing machine with a hard, weather-resistant exterior, the BLACK+DECKER is a great choice. It can hang on your patio or sit on a table. This choice is important, too, because it’ll change how you choose to use the zapper. While on a table, you’ll want the collection tray placed in. However, if you hang the BLACK+DECKER over grass, you can leave the bottom collection tray off so bugs will fall to the ground directly, reducing cleaning. However, this is a powerful zapper, so sometimes a bug will burn directly on the element, meaning you’ll have to do a little cleaning (with the supplied brush) periodically.

Best cordless: BURLAN Solar Bug Zapper

Burlan makes the best outdoor bug zapper that's cordless.

Burlan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You’ll never need a cord if you let the sun do most of the work.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 9.4 x 5.1 x 5.1 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Charges via solar power or USB plug-in
  • Bright lamp on top adds to the ambiance
  • Quiet, 25dB zaps
  • IP66 water and dustproof

Cons

  • Needs consistent sun exposure

If plugging something in and dealing with cords bothers you, turn to the power of the sun. This is the best outdoor bug zapper with a solar charging panel that we could find. On a full charge—which can be achieved in 12 hours of direct sunlight—the top lantern, lighting, and mosquito killer can work for between 4 and 12 hours, depending on mode of operation.

Best for mosquitoes: Elechome Bug Zapper

The Elechome Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper for mosquitos.

Elechome

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This machine puts out a ton of special mosquito-attracting light.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.35 x 5.35 x 11.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, spider

Pros

  • Scientifically designed for mosquito attraction
  • Large killing area
  • IP66 dust and water resistant

Cons

  • Must USB-C charge

According to Pfizer, mosquitos kill more than 700,000 people each year. While we’re waiting for advanced mosquito control to deactivate their reproductive process, there are other things to try. While some are washing up with a soap mosquito repellent, others are turning to special wavelengths that attract mosquitos, which the Elechome Bug Zapper puts out in extreme degree. It’s also got a larger killing area than most lantern types, with its top exposed, allowing for more bug killing.

Best for patio: Endbug Bug Zapper

The Endbug Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper for the patio.

Endbug

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The bottom-facing light on this zapper is a plus for any patio.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 5.7 x 5.7 x 10.6 inches
  • Target species: Mosquito, gnat, fly, moth, wasp, etc.

Pros

  • Includes a bright light on the bottom to light your patio
  • Is IPX6 waterproof to ward off rain issues
  • Excellent bug attraction ability

Cons

  • Loud

The Endbug Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper for your porch or patio, as it provides excellent lighting for you and powerful killing for bugs. It’s a powerful 4,200V, so it kills quite effectively but is rather loud. Our advice is to hang it up high near the middle of your porch or patio area so you can get the maximum benefit from the provided light. However, if you do choose to put it closer to the edges, it’ll still be safe in the rain as it has IPX6 water resistance.

Best handheld: Anne Diary Electric Bug Zapper Racket

The Anne Diary Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper that's handheld.

Anne Diary

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The racket head swivels, letting you cover the scariest bugs safely.

Specs

  • Form: Racket
  • Size: 17.5 x 9.7 x 1.5 inches
  • Target species: Wasp, bee, fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Long handle keeps you away from dangerous pests
  • Auto zap mode while in stand
  • Swivel head provides maximum safety
  • Simple USB-C charging

Cons

  • Auto zap mode depletes battery in 5 hours

If you have really scary insects like bees, wasps, or hornets, you’ll want to be more proactive in your killing. Waiting for the bug to mosey into a light just won’t cut it. That’s why you should try out the best bug-zapping racket, this one from Anne Diary. You can swivel the zapping head to be parallel with the surface the offending insect has lit on, then cover it. This method keeps you safe and gives the insect no escape. When not in active use, you can turn on a passive zapping mode as well, but we only recommend this if the Anne Diary is plugged in, as the power drains after about five hours.

Best indoor/outdoor: PRODCA Bug Zapper

The Prodca Bug Zapper is the best outdoor bug zapper that works indoor and outdoors.

Prodca

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The small size of this bug zapper makes it great to tuck into a kitchen or bedroom corner, too.

Specs

  • Form: Lantern
  • Size: 3.8 x 3.8 x 5.5
  • Target species: Mosquito, fly, gnat, bee, moth, etc.

Pros

  • Small size fits anywhere
  • Can be made to be discreet
  • Lamp light for better outdoor vision
  • IP66 water- and dust-resistant

Cons

  • Not great for all indoor pests (such as fruit flies)

Though a lot of the best outdoor bug zappers could technically be used indoors, you wouldn’t necessarily want them to be there. They’re big, can’t be placed just anywhere, and scream to others that you have an insect problem. As a result, we like the more discreet nature and size of the PRODCA, which can do great work on the porch, but also be tucked away in a kitchen corner when you want it to be.

Best budget: Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb

The Ninonly Bug Zapper Light Bulb is the best outdoor bug zapper at a budget-friendly price.

Ninonly

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best bug-zapping light bulb you can get.

Specs

  • Form: Light bulb
  • Size: 3.14 x 3.14 x 6.3 inches
  • Target species: Fly, mosquito

Pros

  • Small, convenient form
  • Sloping trap stays clean
  • Multiple modes
  • Long lifespan

Cons

  • Must be put into a lamp

Most of the best outdoor bug zappers cost between $35 and $60 apiece, depending on current deals available. That can be frustrating if you want many of them or aren’t ready to spend a lot on bug zapping. Light bulb-style bug zappers, then, are a great option, though they tend to have worse functionality. The Ninonly has high-quality zapping, multiple lighting modes, and a sloping inside that helps bugs fall out after death. As a result, it is one of the best cheap outdoor bug zappers… if you have a lamp available.

What to consider before buying outdoor bug zappers

Outdoor bug zappers might seem relatively straightforward, and they are, but there are still some things to consider before buying one. The most important thing to consider is the form of the zapper.

  • Lantern styles are the most popular as they can be hung or placed on tables, add light and ambiance to the area, and are good passive killers that work well on porches and while camping.
  • Handheld “electric fly swatters” are another style, great for targeted killing, but suffer in that they typically are made for consistent pest removal.
  • Finally, light-bulb bug zappers are cheaper and simple to install, but these mini zappers typically don’t have as much killing power as the other styles.

You should also consider how easy the zapper will be to clean. The best outdoor bug zappers typically have at least one mode or feature that allows bugs to fall out of the zapping area, reducing cleaning. Powerful bug zappers may also burn insects directly to the zapping element, requiring you to clean it directly. It is highly recommended to review real customer experiences with cleaning if this is a concern for you.

FAQs

Q: How much does an outdoor bug zapper cost?

An outdoor bug zapper will cost anywhere from $20 to $65. You should expect to pay about $35 on average for the best outdoor bug zappers if you are willing to wait for a sale and about $55 otherwise.

Q: Can I leave a bug zapper on all night?

You can leave a bug zapper on all night in most cases. Typically, they are made to be used for the whole night. Please read the instructions of your bug zapper to double-check your specific case, however. You may also wish to bring your bug zapper inside at night when it is storming if yours does not have high-quality weather resistance.

Q: How long does a bug zapper last on average?

A bug zapper should last five or more years on average. Obviously, the quality of the build, the environmental conditions of where it is placed, and usage frequency will affect the overall lifetime of the product. Most bug zappers also have replaceable bulbs, which will extend the lifetime of the product.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor bug zappers

The best outdoor bug zappers all have one thing in common; they will remove pests from your environment eventually. Whether you go for a powerful light source that attracts insects quickly or a handheld racket that lets you seek them out, you should feel more secure in your outdoor environment with one of the above products.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor bug zappers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best water filters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-water-filters/ Fri, 29 Sep 2023 09:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=575759
four of the best water filters sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We filtered through the best options for clean drinking water on the go and at home.

The post The best water filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
four of the best water filters sliced together against a white background
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher against a white background Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher
SEE IT

This tried and tested pitcher offers long lasting filters and a BPA-free design.
Best faucet A green PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System
SEE IT

The PUR faucet filter will give you clean water on-demand.
Best water bottle LifeStraw Go 1L filtered water bottle LifeStraw Go Series
SEE IT

The two-stage filter in the LifeStraw Go water bottle will provide safe drinking water no matter where you are.

Water filters may seem like devices that mostly come up when people talk about travels to the backcountry or other countries, but they can be important tools everywhere. Tap water goes through a fantastic journey from rivers and reservoirs through pipes of many sizes to flow through your faucet. Drinking water in the U.S. from public water systems is among the safest in the world, but many households opt for additional filtration. Filtering often focuses on removing funky tastes, smells, and sediment, though many filtration systems also reduce other potentially harmful chemicals. We dove into specifications and certifications of small portable systems up to countertop water dispensers to surface the best water filters for a glass of fresh-tasting H2O.

How we chose the best water filters

Water filters come in as many sizes and shapes as you can imagine. However, we winnowed our list of portable and affordable options for households looking to improve their water taste. We kept our renting readers in mind, so homeowners may want to explore permanently installed options like under-sink water filters or whole-house water filters. We’re not a lab, so we opted for products that meet or are certified to standards set by NSF International/American National Standards Institute and the Water Quality Association.

The best water filters: Reviews & Recommendations

The type of water filter that’s best for you depends on how much you want to treat at a time, how long that takes, what you’re treating it for, and how often you’re replacing filters. Are you looking to remove basics like chlorine and sediment? Is a lead a concern? Different filters target a range of contaminants, such as chlorine, particulates, lead, heavy metals, microbes, bacteria, viruses, or PFAS, more commonly known as “forever chemicals.” Some even filter out microplastics, which is a growing concern for many. 

Best overall: Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher

The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher against a white background

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.7  x 5.4 x 10.1 inches 
  • Weight: 1.3 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups
  • Filter: Brita Elite filters (proprietary active filtering agents)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 120 gallons or about 6 months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Long-lasting filter
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Slow filtering
  • Frequent refills for thirsty/large households

Our pick for the best overall water filter is an update on a classic. The Brita Large Water Filter Pitcher is the best for most people because of its low cost (about $35), ease of use, and improved filter. Most of us have likely used a Brita pitcher at one point. This model makes some notable design improvements. Instead of removing the whole lid to refill, simply pop open the flip-top. 

The spout features a color-coded system to indicate when to replace a filter. Green is good, yellow indicates replacement is coming up, and red shows it’s time to change. The rest of the form is familiar: The tap water goes into an upper tank, and clean water slowly filters into the bottom reservoir. This model boasts a 10-cup capacity, but households that fill many water bottles daily may find themselves refilling—and waiting—a lot.

The essential improvement in this model is the Brita Elite filter, which catches more contaminants than the standard model and lasts three times longer. You only need to replace the filter once every six months instead of every two, minimizing cost and trash. The filter still results in the crisp, chlorine-free taste Britas are known for and is certified to reduce lead (99 percent), Cadmium, Mercury, Benzene, Asbestos, and more. Many reviewers note that the Elite does have clogging issues, so you may find yourself changing more frequently than the six-month replacement window. Still, the extra protection over Brita’s standard filters seems worth the extra few bucks.

All pitchers have downsides. They don’t purify water, so always start with potable water—and make sure it’s cold or room-temperature, never hot. They’ll need thorough hand washing regularly to keep clean, but most are made of a brittle plastic that chips, clouds, or cracks with age. But they are abundant, readily available, and affordable. Remember to factor in buying and replacing filters as part of the overall expense.

Best pitcher: Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour

The Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour filter pitcher against a white background

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 10.75 x 5.6 x 10 inches 
  • Weight: 1.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 10 cups
  • Filter: Brita Stream filters (activated carbon in a BPA-free housing)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or about two months

Pros

  • Low upfront costs
  • Filters as you pour
  • Flip top for easy refilling
  • Electronic filter indicator
  • BPA-free container
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and 53

Cons

  • Taste/odor-focused filtering
  • Frequent filter replacement

Usually, a water filter pitcher has an inner reservoir that you fill, and it slowly drips clean water into the bottom half. You have to wait until gravity does its job before taking a sip. The Brita Large Stream Filter as You Pour bucks that trend. The 10-cup pitcher forces water through an activated carbon filter before pouring out of the spout. Admittedly, waiting a few minutes for filtered water to drip from the reservoir to the rest of the pitcher isn’t the most significant inconvenience—but it is annoying if you’re the person who always seems to grab the pitcher when there’s only half a glass left. (And obviously, we’re often that person.)

This Brita water filter pitcher removes chlorine taste and smell but retains fluoride, minerals, and electrolytes. The filter clicks into a cage that then twists into place on the lid. The lid also houses an electronic indicator to remind you to change filters, which is about every 40 gallons or every two months. Brita Stream replacement filters run about $9 to $10 each, a few bucks more per filter than Brita Standard filters but on par with the longer-lasting Brita Elite filter.

Best faucet: PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System

A green PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System

PUR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.8 x 2.9 x 5.2 inches 
  • Weight: 1.3 pounds
  • Capacity: N/A
  • Filters: PUR PLUS faucet filters (activated charcoal)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 100 gallons or 3 months

Pros

  • Small form factor
  • Installs and removes without tools
  • Filter change light
  • Can switch between filtered/unfiltered water
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • May not fit all faucets, especially pull-out or handheld faucets
  • Frequent filter replacement
  • Doesn’t filter microbes

Installing a PUR PLUS Faucet Mount Water Filtration System is a low-cost, low-effort filtration system that quickly filters drinking and cooking water. No tools are required: Remove the faucet’s original aerator and washer and replace them with the PUR PLUS Faucet Mount system with the PUR PLUS filter inside. For around $30 to $40, the filtration system helps reduce chlorine taste, odors, and 70 other contaminants, including lead, mercury, and some pesticides. However, the filter does not remove microbes. 

The PUR PLUS filter includes activated carbon from coconut shells and a mineral core to replace some natural minerals—like calcium and magnesium—for a fresh taste. The benefit of a faucet filter is that you can pour directly into a pot or a giant gallon water bottle without repeatedly refilling a filtering pitcher or dispenser. And it filters instantly, so you don’t need to wait around. The PUR PLUS Faucet Mount filters last longer than most pitchers, stretching to 100 gallons or every three months. The faucet system comes in several colors, and the horizontal filter positioning looks sleek.

Best water bottle: LifeStraw Go Series

Fitness Gear photo

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: ‎‎3.54 x 3.54 x 10.79 inches
  • Weight: 9.9 ounces
  • Capacity: 1 liter
  • Filter: 2-stage filter system (membrane microfilter and activated carbon)
  • Filter lifespan: Membrane microfilter: 1,000 gallons (roughly 5 years), carbon filter: 26 gallons (roughly 2 months)

Pros:

  • Easy to carry
  • Available in many colors and 22-ounce capacity
  • Cap covers mouthpiece
  • Meets NSF/ANSI Standards 42 and P231

Cons:

  • Large size doesn’t fit in cupholders or some backpack pockets
  • Two filters will have different replacement schedules

Here at PopSci, we are very much into on-the-go hydration. And carrying a water bottle with a built-in filter can bring peace of mind whether refilling for everyday adventures or traveling to exotic locales. We’ve loved the LifeStraw Go Series for a number of reasons, but largely because of how effective the two-stage filter system is. 

The activated charcoal filter helps keep water tasting fresh and smelling, well, not smelling. The membrane microfilter catches little nasties like bacteria, parasites, sand, dirt, and microplastics—all things that could seriously ruin a vacation. It’s important to note that the charcoal filter lasts about two months (26 gallons), while the membrane lasts for five years (or more than 1,000 gallons). There’s no clear way to track both, so you’ll just have to remember.

The plastic version of this water bottle is BPA-free, made of 50 percent recycled plastic, and comes in 1-liter or 22-ounce sizes. The lightweight materials are ideal for hiking or travel. However, if you want to minimize your plastic use or want insulation, the Go Series also comes in a stainless steel version in 24-ounce or 1-liter capacities. The double-walled bottle keeps water cool—a huge part of hitting your daily water goals—but it’s not for hot beverages. All versions include a cover that keeps the mouthpiece clean, which we definitely appreciate when traveling. 

Best backpacking: Sawyer Products SP129 Squeeze Water Filtration System

Sawyer Products SP129 Squeeze Water Filtration System parts against a white background

Sawyer

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 5.5 x 1.9 x 1.9 inches 
  • Weight: 2.5 ounces
  • Capacity: N/A, but filters up to 32 ounces at a time
  • Filter: Hollow fiber filter
  • Filter lifespan: Indefinite

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Includes attachments for different uses
  • Lifetime warranty
  • Filters down to 0.1-micron absolute filtration
  • Reduces bacteria, protozoa, and microplastics
  • Can be cleaned and used nearly indefinitely

Cons:

  • Not for chemical contaminants or viruses
  • Reviewers warn not to let pouches freeze
  • Squeezing and rolling can wear out the pouches
  • Occasional backwashing is needed to restore flow rate

PopSci previously identified the Sawyer Products SP129 Squeeze Water Filtration System as a reliable, portable water filter system for backpackers, hikers, and other adventurers. The tiny size makes it easy to throw in your pack without adding excessive weight, which is a must when backpacking. 

It’s also very simple to use. To clean water, fill a pouch, attach it to the palm-sized filter, and squeeze the water into your mouth. But that’s just one way the kit works. It also includes a straw and a hydration pack adapter to filter inline. Plus, the filter can attach to most standard water bottles, so you don’t need to fuss with the pouches on trips. Reviewers often suggest avoiding the “squeeze” and letting gravity pull dirty water through the filter to prevent wear and tear. 

The system removes most bacteria, protozoa, cysts, and microplastics. In fact, the Sawyer squeeze filter is the only filter on the market that can claim 0.1 absolute microns (every fiber is 0.1 microns in size). For perspective, no harmful bacteria are smaller than that; therefore, none can slip through the filter. As long as you keep the filter clean, this device should last forever. In fact, there are no filters to replace. However, Sawyer recommends periodically backwashing if the flow rate slows, which should restore 98 percent of the flow rate. 

And remember, there are right and wrong ways to handle camping water filter storage.

Best countertop: Brita Hub

The Brita Hub water filter against a white background

Brita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12 x 9.5 x 15 inches 
  • Weight: 8 pounds
  • Capacity: 96 ounces
  • Filter: Brita Hub filter (carbon block)
  • Filter lifespan: 120 gallons or 6 months

Pros

  • Water reservoir position can change
  • No tools for installation
  • Frees up fridge space
  • Pours 12 or 20 ounces at a time, with one free-flow option
  • Filter lasts up to 6 months
  • Certified for NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Dispenses room-temperature water only
  • Requires counter space
  • Higher upfront costs

For fast-filtered water and less frequent filter changes, check out the Brita Hub. No installation or plumbing is required for this countertop filter system. Simply plug in the sleek, white Hub, fill the 12-cup water reservoir, and instantly get filtered water free of chlorine tastes or odor. The tradeoff for a filter on the counter is that it will only serve up room-temperature water. But it’s a solid option for people who don’t have the fridge space for clunky pitchers or large dispensers.

The carbon block filters (about $30 each) last up to six months, and an indicator light will give a heads-up when it’s time for a change. The Brita Hub is certified to reduce 70 contaminants, such as lead, some forever chemicals, and select pesticides. The main downside is that a unit will run about $180 (at the time of writing), which is more upfront cost than other options on this list. But if you want a large-capacity option for your counter, the Hub is a great choice. 

Best budget: PUR PLUS 30-Cup Dispenser

The PUR PLUS 30-Cup Dispenser water filter against a white background

PUR

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 11.2 x 6 x 16.1 inches 
  • Weight: 4.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 30 cups
  • Filter: PUR PLUS faucet filters (activated charcoal)
  • Filter lifespan: Replace after 40 gallons or 2 months

Pros

  • Inexpensive
  • Filter change indicator
  • Slim design
  • Large capacity
  • Certified NSF/ANSI Standards 42, 53, and 401

Cons

  • Heavy when full
  • Frequent filter replacement

One of the better bargains for water filters is getting a high-capacity dispenser in your fridge. You can snag a PUR PLUS 30-Cup Water Filter Dispenser for the same price as some water filter pitchers. The slim, deep design doesn’t take as much space in a fridge as it feels like it should, though it can be heavy and awkward to put on a shelf when it’s full. 

A spigot allows easy access, even if the system is still filtering. The dispenser uses the same activated carbon filters as the PUR PLUS faucet mount system, reducing 70 contaminants, such as lead and microplastics. It’s good for chronically parched or large households, though the filter must be swapped out every two months. Like most water-filtering pitchers, this dispenser isn’t a purifier. It refines already drinkable water and doesn’t remove microbes.

What to consider when buying the best water filters

Choosing water filters depends on where and how much water you plan to drink or use for cooking. That said, you could surround yourself with many options, like a pitcher for home use and a water bottle for running around during the day. While all these options will result in crisp, clean-tasting water, consider if you want your filter to offer additional protection.

Cost

We stuck to products with relatively low-cost products, but the ongoing cost of each replacement must be factored into the long-term cost of ownership. There’s no hacking a filter: They must be replaced regularly to remain effective. Most use proprietary filters, so you’ll need to stick with the specific filter made for your product. 

Water consumption vs. filter capacity

Compare how much water you drink with how long the filter is supposed to last. Many options above require changes as frequently as two months or 40 gallons. If you’re attempting to drink a gallon per day, that shortens the filter’s lifespan to just over one month. Finding a water filter system that handles a higher volume of water with a longer-lasting filter may be time-saving and cheaper.

Filter type

Most of the filters in this round-up rely on activated carbon, which can absorb chlorine and reduce asbestos, lead, mercury, and volatile organic compounds. Other products use other filtration processes like reverse osmosis, ion exchange, and distillation, which you should consider if installing an under-the-sink or whole-home filter or if you have serious concerns about water quality.

Filtration efficiency

Filter effectiveness varies, so we looked at NSF/ANSI standards. We prefer certified products, which means that NSF International or the Water Quality Association tested and verified the company’s claims. Certification is time-consuming and costly for a company, so we also indicated where outside labs found products that “meet the standards” but aren’t certified.

Here’s what some of the standards mean, but review the manufacturer’s performance data to see the specific contaminants a filter is effective against:

  • NSF/ANSI Standard 42: This is a common standard, which indicates a filter can remove chlorine taste and odor or chloramines.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 53: Another common standard that indicates the reduction of some heavy metals like lead, arsenic, and mercury, as well as some pesticides and herbicides.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard 401: This indicates the filter removes or reduces up to 15 kinds of “emerging impurities,” such as bisphenol A (BPA), ibuprofen, DEET, microplastics, and some pesticides and herbicides.
  • NSF/ANSI Standard P231: This is where purification comes in. This standard means microbiological contaminants like bacteria, viruses, and cysts are reduced or removed. 

FAQs

Q: Do I need a water filter?

Whether you need a water filter should be a straightforward yes or no answer, but it’s not. The U.S. drinking water supply is considered safe, and the Environmental Protection Agency regulates public water systems (this excludes wells). You can check annual water quality reports on EPA’s website, but systems can also experience contamination after leaving a treatment plant or have an acute issue due to recent natural disasters or climate change. Plus, some pollutants aren’t regulated yet, like forever chemicals, which the EPA issued proposed rules for in March. Not sure what may be in your water? You can also look up your zip code on The Environmental Working Group’s database of what’s been measured in tap water or get an at-home water quality test.

Q: What contaminants do water filters remove?

What contaminants water filters remove depends on the individual water filter. Most of the filters in this guide are activated carbon, which can absorb chlorine and reduce asbestos, lead, mercury, and volatile organic compounds. You’ll need to review performance data to see what specific pollutants a filter reduces or removes.

Q: How often should I replace my water filter?

How often you should replace your water filter depends on the filter. Always check the manufacturer’s recommendations, but other factors may reduce the filter’s life. For example, a particularly active or large household may filter 40 gallons of water through a pitcher well before two months. 

Final thoughts on the best water filters

Anyone looking for the best water filters has plenty of affordable options to cover a variety of needs, whether lugging around a reliable system in the woods or covering a household’s drinking and cooking needs. It’s hard to go wrong with the filters we recommend from well-known, longtime brands like PUR and Brita. Both brands’ filters are readily available and carry multiple certifications. And don’t rule out getting multiple items—you never know when you’ll be thirsty next.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best water filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best winter jackets for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-winter-jacket/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 16:52:48 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=361987
The best winter jackets will keep you warm and stylish.

A solid winter jacket will help you get the most out of your favorite cold-weather activities.

The post The best winter jackets for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best winter jackets will keep you warm and stylish.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best men's overall The North Face McMurdo Parka The North Face McMurdo Parka
SEE IT

Brave the elements during quick trips to the supermarket or longer excursions outdoors.
Best stylish for women Rossclair Parka Heritage Canada Goose Women's Rossclair Parka
SEE IT

This women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.
Best budget A man wearing a long thick winter jacket in a light grey color and posing with it. Columbia Horizons Pine Interchange Jacket
SEE IT

An interchangeable jacket that won’t break the bank.

It’s always winter in some hemisphere, so it’s a good idea to supply yourself with a fantastic jacket to keep you warm wherever and whenever you might need it. An absolute essential for anyone who lives in or travels to a colder climate, the best winter jacket will mesh well with your personal style while providing top-notch protection from wind, rain, sleet, and snow. Whether you are looking for a lightweight running jacket, a simple, stylish parka jacket for errands, or a down-filled design perfect for vacations exploring the backcountry, you want to find the best blend of form and function. Plenty of options are available, so we’ve curated this selection to help you find the best winter coats to add to your wardrobe.

How we chose the best winter jackets

When choosing the best winter jacket for you, the most important thing to consider is climate, followed closely by activity. You’ll likely have to choose between a casual or performance coat. Casual winter clothing is designed for errands, walks about town, or keeping warm during your commute to work. These coats might be a bit heavier, but they are super warm and crafted with style and silhouette in mind. A performance jacket is designed for athletic activities like hiking, running, or cycling. They are lightweight and will provide increased mobility while protecting for long periods in the cold. For example, if you live in a super snowy place and need a jacket suitable for a long hike, you’ll need a well-insulated waterproof model with a lightweight fill to keep you warm without dragging you down. If you live in a city with cold winds, a versatile jacket with a sleek shell and fur-lined hood is a stylish way to stay warm and keep the wind out of your eyes. 

The fill material and its effect on price is the next thing to consider. Winter jackets can be quite expensive, for a reason. They are your first line of defense for brutally cold days, offering excellent insulation and heat retention. Pricing can depend on many things, but one of the most common structures correlates to the fill material and power. A jacket’s fill is the material stuffed between the outer and inner layers, directly responsible for trapping heat and keeping out the cold. The most popular fill is down, which is the light undercoating that lies beneath the feathers of ducks and geese. Synthetic down is also available, typically made from ultrafine polyester fibers that perform well even when wet. Each jacket is given a fill-power number to reflect the loftiness of the down. The higher the fill power, the better the down will be at trapping air, generating an effective warmth-to-weight ratio, and quickly compressing when it’s time for summer storage. 

The best winter jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

Now that you’re prepped with the logistics, let’s dive deeper into our favorite picks and a few more tips for selecting the best winter jackets. We’ve also covered other winter gear—like the best heated gloves, socks, and insoles—so we know something about staying cozy in frigid situations.

Best men’s overall: The North Face McMurdo Parka

A young man wearing a big and warm winter jacket with black color and stuffed hood.

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A loose fit and 600-fill goose down makes for a warm and stylish jacket.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Insulation: 600-fill recycled down
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof,
  • Machine washable: No, dry clean only

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Down fill for light warmth
  • Light

Cons

  • Dry clean only

The North Face McMurdo winter jacket will help you brave the elements during quick trips to the supermarket or longer excursions outdoors. It has a two-layer DryVent waterproof shell, 600-fill-power recycled down, and weighs a little over 3 pounds. The hood has an emergency gaiter to prevent any snow from sneaking in, plus the faux-fur trim is removable, so you can even customize your coat a bit. While North Face doesn’t have a women’s winter jacket that’s the exact same model, The North Face Arctic Parka II, shares many of the features of the men’s winter jacket, including fill power and DryVent technology.

Best women’s overall: The North Face Metropolis Parka III

The North Face Metropolis Parka III

The North Face

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A fitted silhouette and 550-fill goose down make for a warm and stylish jacket.

Specs

  • Material: 100% recycled polyester plain weave with non-PFC durable water-repellent finish
  • Insulation: 550-fill goose-down
  • Weather-proofing: Water-repellent
  • Machine washable: No

Pros

  • Long design keeps you warmer
  • Removable hood
  • Collar lining is soft brushed-tricot
  • Very warm

Cons

  • Hood detaches too easily

A long jacket is the way to go if you want ultimate warmth. The North Face Women’s Metropolis offers an ideal length that keeps your tush and waist warm even as you move around. It helps keep the drafty, biting wind at bay as well. But it isn’t so long that it’s difficult to walk or move around in, which is ideal for your winter commutes or playing outside with your kids. 

This winter jacket uses 550-fill goose down for ultimate warmth. The down is certified to the Responsible Down Standard (RDS), which we like to see. The exterior is made with a water-repellent finish and 100 percent recycled materials. It will keep you dry and comfortable even during a strong snowstorm. The North Face lined the collar with a soft brushed-tricot material, which keeps your neck, chin, and cheeks from getting stretched or rubbed even when you have it zipped all the way up. 

There’s not much to dislike about this puffy. The main complaint is that the hood comes off too easily, which makes it liable to get lost. But if you want an all-around excellent winter jacket for those extra cold days, you can’t go wrong with this one. 

Best lightweight: Ibex Women’s Wool Aire Hoodie

Ibex Women’s Wool Aire Hoodie

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This super-lightweight jacket is insulated with merino wool that adjusts to your body temperature to keep you warm.

Specs

  • Material: Nylon, polyester
  • Insulation: Merino wool
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof and wind-resistant
  • Machine-washable: Yes

Pros

  • Ultra lightweight
  • Insulation adjusts to body temperature
  • Comes in its own bag
  • Easy to pack

Cons

  • Not designed for super-cold conditions
  • Doesn’t cover lower body

Layering is one of the secrets of keeping warm in the winter, and the Ibex Women’s Wool Aire Hoodie is designed for just that. This extremely lightweight nylon jacket weighs just 10 ounces but is insulated with merino wool that adjusts to your body temperature to keep the heat in. The materials also make the jacket breathable and help wick moisture away. 

Designed with a hood you can pull tight around your face, this jacket is also water- and wind-resistant. Zipped pockets on the side and the interior help you keep your hands warm and your keys and phone safe from the elements. This jacket is comfortable to wear throughout the year, but keep in mind that it runs small, so you may want to go a size up if you plan to wear it over layers. 

The Aire hoodie comes in a cute bag that makes it easy to pack, and it’s available in seven colors: Aqua Blue, Black, Bloodstone, Midnight Navy, Deep Ocean Orange, Dark Green, and Evergreen.

Best for warmth: Nobis Supra Men’s Performance Puffer 

Nobis Supra Men's Performance Puffer 

Nobis

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This jacket withstands temperatures as low as -20 degrees Fahrenheit, ensuring you’ll feel cozy in even the iciest of conditions.

Specs

  • Material: Polyester
  • Insulation: Duck down insulation
  • Weather-proofing: Windproof, waterproof
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Underarm vent system
  • Performs in incredibly low temperature
  • Machine washable

Cons

  • Hood is non-removable

The Supra Men’s Performance Puffer makes a great winter statement. Filled with premium Canadian Origin White Duck Down, down-filled hood and ribbed cuffs that seal in heat, this men’s winter jacket will keep you warm in temperatures as low as -30 degrees Fahrenheit. The waterproof material will keep you dry during a snowstorm, and its seam seal tape beefs up its ability to protect you from the elements. Plus, a 10,000mm windproof laminated membrane fends off gusts and gales.

You can protect your phone or keys in its flap pockets at the waist or the zipped pocket on the left bicep. And there’s no need to spend extra money to maintain the jacket—just toss it in the washing machine. The men’s winter jacket is available in a variety of colorways so that you can find your perfect match. 

Best outdoor performance: Arc’teryx Gamma Lightweight Hoody

Arc’teryx Gamma Lightweight Hoody

Arc’teryx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t need a thick, bulky jacket to stay snug while hiking or running outdoors.

Specs

  • Material: Fortius DW 1.0 87% nylon/13% elastane
  • Insulation: None (soft shell)
  • Weather-proofing: Wind-resistant, water-repellent, UPF 50+
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Very lightweight
  • Fabric is breathable and moves well
  • Durable materials
  • UPF 50+ protection

Cons

  • More water resistance would be ideal

If you’re moving around in the mountains, you won’t want a bulky winter jacket. Instead, layers are key. That’s where a shell like the Arc’teryx Gamma Lightweight Hoody comes in handy. This softshell jacket is breathable and lightweight for those warm, sunny winter days in the mountains. Then, when the temperature drops, the regular fit allows you to layer underneath for added warmth. 

The Gamma Lightweight Hoody is made of 43 percent recycled content. It stretches nicely, allowing you to move freely even when you have layers underneath. The Fortiu 1.0 softshell fabric is highly durable, making this a good choice for technical hikes on rugged terrain. It is wind resistant and provides UPF 50+ protection, an important feature for high alpine environments. The main downside is that this jacket is only water-repellent, not waterproof. You won’t want to get caught in extremely wet conditions with this one. But for treks that would benefit from layering, the Gamma Lightweight Hoody definitely fits the bill.

In general, if you’re off on an alpine adventure, Arc’Teyrx has protective, packable layers that have got your back (literally) from pavement to peak. For instance, the Alpha Lightweight Parka has RDS-certified 850-fill goose down warmth and a windproof, weather-resistant, breathable GORE-TEX INFINIUM with an abrasion-resistant Hadron face—perfect for base camp at upper elevations. You can layer underneath it and put a shell on top—like the Gamma if traveling light or the thermally insulated GORE-TEX Beta Insulated jacket or minimalist but rugged Alpha SV GORE-TEX PRO shell in colder climbing conditions—if the weather turns severe. While the brand’s jackets are an investment, they can be relied on no matter the environment.

Best stylish for women: Canada Goose Women’s Rossclair Parka

Rossclair Parka Heritage

Rossclair

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a tailored fit and finish, this women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.

Specs

  • Material: Company’s Arctic Tech fabric, a blend of polyester and cotton
  • Insulation: 625-fill duck down
  • Weather-proofing: Water resistant
  • Machine washable: No, dry clean only

Pros

  • Fusion fit great for more petite bodies
  • Not boxy
  • Adjustable waist for A-line silhouette

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Dry clean only

Canada Goose is known for producing the best winter coats with Arctic Tech fabric, a blend of 83% Polyester and 17% Cotton with a water-repellent finish that will hold up in the freezing cold. The Rossclair parka is a Canada Goose jacket that delivers 650 fill power in a streamlined, slim fit that eliminates any boxiness, plus adjustable exterior waist straps mean you can get a sleek cinch. Available in nine colors, each with a two-way adjustable hood with removable fur ruff, plus recessed rib-knit cuffs, this women’s winter jacket combats harsh winds and offers many comforts.

Best budget: Columbia Horizons Pine Interchange Jacket

A man wearing a long thick winter jacket in a light grey color and posing with it.

Columbia

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A quality winter jacket doesn’t have to cost an arm and a leg—and this one from Columbia is proof.

Specs

  • Material: Nylon and polyester
  • Insulation: Thermal insulation
  • Weather-proofing: Waterproof
  • Machine washable: Yes

Pros

  • Removable hood
  • Interchangeable layers mean you can customize it depending on temperature
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Not windproof
  • Runs large

An interchangeable jacket that won’t break the bank, this model from Columbia utilizes a combination of heat-reflective and air-permeable waterproof technology to dissipate moisture while keeping the heat in and the cold out. As it gets warmer, you can settle on just the shell, or if it’s still quite cold, but the snow has stopped, you can comfortably get away with the inner layer alone. 

What to consider when buying the best winter jackets

Looking for an everyday, casual jacket that will keep you toasty at all times?

A truly great winter jacket is comfortable, and cozy, and can last for seasons to come. It should stand up to snow and sleet without weighing you down, protect and insulate without any Achilles heel, and have a stylish yet neutral design to pair with any outfit you own. If you’re not looking for a thin, lightweight outdoor activity jacket, you might find it comforting to buy a model with a little more weight and slightly lower fill power. You’ll know for sure that you won’t get cold, plus you’ll feel more protected. A fill power of 500 and above should be perfectly adequate for walks about town, taking the train to work, or heading out to dinner with friends on a below-freezing winter evening. 

If you live in a place that gets a fair amount of snow or winter rain, ensure your winter jacket is waterproof or has a waterproof shell. We recommend selecting a coat that will fall at or around the upper/mid-thigh for maximum coverage without any extra bulk. It also doesn’t hurt to wear a hood for additional shielding around the face. Once you’ve found an option with the right amount of fill for your locale’s weather, all you need to do is decide on the color and—bam—you’ll have the best winter coat around town.

Do you want something that will be on-trend without sacrificing warmth?

Winter coats are known to be boxy, bulky, or simply uncool. But that doesn’t have to be the case. While you can undoubtedly find a sleek, streamlined wool coat, hip bomber jacket, or trendy oversized teddy designs, you may find yourself shaking if things get too frigid. If you live in a freezing climate, we recommend having at least one really well-insulated coat to keep on hand when your other options just won’t cut it. A long parka jacket with a fur-lined hood is one of our favorite popular styles (there’s a reason, say, a Canada Goose jacket is coveted). If you select a top-notch jacket from a reputable brand, you won’t need to invest in a new coat for years to come. They will give you the look of winter royalty and ensure you stay protected against the elements.

Want a jacket that can transition from the sidewalk to the hiking trail?

While some prefer to have two different jackets for outdoor pastimes—one for, say, trail walking, and one for shorter excursions like running to the store or walking the dog—there are many great options for those looking to have it all. A combination casual/performance winter coat is the way to go if you want maximum flexibility. For an easy transition from snowshoeing to a drink slopeside, go for a jacket with a high fill power: something around the 700 mark should do the trick. This will ensure your jacket is light enough to keep you moving without overheating, with a bit of puff to provide maximum coziness and comfort when you’re not exercising. Of course, you’ll want to make sure the shell is water and wind-resistant, so you’re not soaked through or chilled to the bone if the weather suddenly changes. Unlike a purely casual jacket, we recommend lifting the hemline a bit so that it rests at or around your hips. This length will still keep you warm, but it will free up your lower half and increase mobility. A combination casual and performance jacket will set you up nicely for anything the colder months can throw at you.

Do you need a winter jacket for running and other outdoor exercises?

Cold weather doesn’t mean you must stop enjoying the great outdoors and everything it offers. If you’re lucky enough to live in or visit a place where winter running and cycling are available to you, make sure you’re equipped with the best winter jacket available. A winter running jacket made for running outdoors will rely less on down fill and more on a thin yet insulated design to ensure you don’t overheat. The key to outdoor exercise is layering. You’ll notice that many winter jackets are significantly thinner than their casual or even trekking counterparts; this is because they are designed to fit over other pieces of moisture-wicking clothing, like long-sleeve shirts or lightweight fleece. Having the option to shed or add a layer can be a game-changer when it comes to a challenging run. If you know your first few layers can be quite thick, think about sizing up your jacket. You can also opt for a heated vest if you don’t need a full jacket, but would still like some warmth.

As with all our favorite jackets, it’s important to find a waterproof hooded model, but you’ll also need to think about breathability. While you can still consider a high fill power (something around 750 will do nicely), you should pay even more attention to the construction and material. A material like Gore-Tex repels water without trapping in sweat, making it great for all-weather use and ensuring your cool down won’t leave you shivering. 

So, what’s the best winter jacket I can get for under $200?

An excellent winter jacket is certainly an investment and can set you back more than just a pretty penny. However, you can definitely find a few more reasonably priced winter jackets if you’re not ready to shell out a grand for a Canada Goose jacket quite yet. Ultimately, you’ll want your winter coat to last for more than one season, which can help explain the price. If you want an outer layer that costs under $100, there is a good chance you’ll find yourself looking for a replacement within a year or two. However, if you pay apt attention to the fill quality (synthetic or natural) and overall construction, you may be able to find a great quality jacket for less.

FAQs

Q: How do you wash a winter jacket?

When it comes time to wash a winter jacket, many can be loaded into your washing machine and tumble-dried on low for a quick and easy clean. However, we don’t recommend doing this more than a few times per season. If you get dirt, salt, or other schmutz on the outer shell, you should be able to simply wipe away debris with a cloth towel and warm water. Read the fabric care labels before washing for the first time, as some coats require dry cleaning.

Q: How should a winter jacket fit?

A winter jacket should fit snugly without being too tight. If the coat is too small, the down might become compressed and less effective, plus your mobility will be restricted. You’ll know it’s too tight if you can’t easily give yourself a hug, arms touching your shoulder blades. The jacket should never rise above your belly, and the shoulder seams should not be resting mid-bicep. Feel free to size up in winter jackets, especially if you plan on layering, but make sure you can still perform daily activities without the bulk of the coat getting in the way.

Q: What are other types of winter jackets?

There are many other types of winter jackets to choose from, especially if you don’t need a waterproof jacket. Lined leather jackets, wool peacoats, and fleeces are a great way to supplement your waterproof, down-filled staple. You can find a ton of styles and colors suitable for various weather conditions to maximize outfit options. 

Related: Need a warm, comfortable hat? Head on over to this winter accessories guide.

Final thoughts on the best winter jackets

The best winter coats and jackets are wardrobe essentials for anyone who will experience cold weather. The best winter jacket for you will suit your climate and won’t prohibit you from participating in your favorite outdoor activities. Water and wind resistance are certainly must-have features, and we recommend never saying no to a removable hood. Choose a casual coat for everyday wear and a performance coat for more demanding activities like trail running, or select a combination for a great winter jacket that will keep you cozy during the winter seasons to come.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best winter jackets for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best dog leashes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-dog-leash/ Fri, 10 Dec 2021 16:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=364478
A dog walking down a wooden bridge on one of the best dog leashes.
Stan Horaczek

The best dog leash will set you free to enjoy a great walk, or run, with your loyal companion

The post The best dog leashes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A dog walking down a wooden bridge on one of the best dog leashes.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best retractable tug retractable dog leash and a dog on a sidewalk best overall retractable dog leash TUG 360° Heavy-Duty Retractable Dog Leash 
SEE IT
Best hands-free Light blue hands free dog leash with wrist strap Fable Running Leash
SEE IT
Best for two dogs Gray double dog leash for two dogs iYoShop Dual Dog Leash
SEE IT

The right dog leash can mean the difference between a calm adventure with your pup and a total catastrophe. Leashes in different lengths, materials and even colors affect how they function, and many pet parents need more than one. A reflective leash for evening walks, a long leash for training or a hands-free leash for runs could easily make life with your dog easier. 

Leashes also come in various designs, like double leashes and slip leads that function as a collar and leash. If you live where it’s wet or your dog loves water, you may need a waterproof leash, while those with a dog that pulls may need a model with a cushioned handle. The dog’s age, breed, and size will factor into the decision, too. For example, small breeds don’t need a thick, heavy leash, and puppies may need the leash training help offered by a long dog leash. The best dog leash has the durability, length, and extra features that you need to maintain control and keep your dog safe. 

Use the best dog leashes to maintain control and enjoy walks with your dog

Leashes are an absolute necessity for most dog owners to safely exercise their dog, take the pup to the vet, and maintain control in public places. The best dog leash for you and your dog depends on the activities you do together and the dog’s personality and size. Designs vary from embossable leather models to retractable leashes that provide extra freedom for dogs to sniff and explore. 

The dog’s size affects the best leash thickness and length. Large breeds may need a heavy, long option for added durability. However, small toy breeds could get weighed down by a 10 -foot-long, heavy leash. Nylon is the most common material for leashes because it’s inexpensive, durable, and comes in various colors. They’re made in flat or round/rope designs. However, depending on the nylon’s quality, it might not be strong enough for heavy pullers or chewers. Dogs who can’t help but chew probably need a leather one. Leather stands up to the wear and tear of a rambunctious dog who chews or pulls better than nylon, but you’ll pay a little extra. 

Some leashes have extra handles and extra clips for extra configuration options or to help you keep control when crossing the street. Options with extra D-rings or clips also offer a means to connect storage for other dog supplies like poop bags or treats. 

Related: Best dog collar for every pup

The best dog leashes: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: TUG 360° Heavy-Duty Retractable Dog Leash  

tug retractable dog leash and a dog on a sidewalk best overall retractable dog leash

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

The TUG 360° Heavy Duty Retractable Dog Leash comes in four sizes and six colors. The different sizes work for dogs under 26 pounds and up to 110 pounds. Dogs get 16 feet to explore, while owners get a comfortable hand grip with an easy sliding push-button lock/unlock thumb control. A specially designed opening on the housing prevents the leash from tangling and gives 360 degrees of control. 

Best for two dogs: iYoShop Dual Dog Leash

Gray double dog leash for two dogs

iYoShop

SEE IT

The iYoShop Dual Dog Leash takes the double dog leash into heavy-duty territory. The padded handle keeps the grip comfortable, while the double ones attach with a 360-degree swivel and are made of bungee cord to offer some tension and pressure relief for active dogs. This 35-inch leash comes in two sizes and six colors. 

Best hands-free: Fable Running Leash 

Light blue hands free dog leash with wrist strap

fable

SEE IT

The Fable Running Leash’s versatile design includes adjustable length with clips and stoppers that transform it from a traditional leash to a hands-free option that attaches to the waist or wrist. Depending on the configuration and which of the two sizes are used, this leash reaches 40 to 80 inches and comes in six colors. 

Best reflective: Bark Reflective Leash 

Small black and gray dog leash

BarkShop

SEE IT

The Bark Reflective Leash features a durable, flat nylon surface with reflective material on both sides of the leash. It’s bright and visible, but the locking hook and neoprene handle offer extra security for the dog and comfort for the owner. Both of the two sizes are 60 inches long and include a D-ring on the handle to hold dog supplies like poop bags or a dog-treat pouch. 

Best budget: BAAPET Strong Dog Leash 

Dark grey dog leash with padded handle

BAAPET

SEE IT

The BAAPET Strong Dog Leash comes in nine colors and three sizes, with nylon rope widths ranging from ⅓ to ½ inch and lengths of 4, 5, or 6 feet. With reflective threads weaved into the rope, it’s visible and durable. For the owner’s comfort, a cushy foam covers the handle. 

Best leather: Fairwin Leather Dog Leash

Braided, brown leather dog leash and the packing box

Fairwin

SEE IT

The Fairwin Leather Dog Leash comes in four widths—½ inch, 5/8 inch, ¾ inch, and 1 inch—to accommodate dogs of different sizes and strengths. The leather thickness varies from ⅙ of an inch to ⅕-inch thick. A high-tensile copper clasp and heavy-duty buckle keep the dog secure. This leather option also includes a 60-day unconditional return policy. 

Things to consider when buying the best dog leashes

Give your dog extra freedom to explore with a retractable dog leash

Retractable leashes offer adjustable lengths that range from 5 to 30 feet. They have plastic housings with an ergonomic handgrip that protects the retracted nylon leash. Your thumb usually controls a locking mechanism that releases or stops retraction, putting easy control within your hands.  

However, retractable models tend to be a polarizing topic among dog owners—either you love them or you hate them. For some pet parents, they’re the perfect solution to balance the dog’s need to explore with the owner’s need to keep their pet safe. 

Retractable leashes are a great choice if you walk your dog in an area where he’s not likely to run into traffic or other dangerous obstacles. It’s also a good solution for dogs who like to explore. The dog’s personality matters with a retractable leash. A dog who will pull no matter the leash length might be too out of control for a retractable model. However, if your dog gets frustrated because he wants to sniff off of the walking trail where you’d prefer to stay, a retractable leash becomes a compromise that keeps you both happy.

Double the trouble, double the fun with two dogs on one double dog leash

The more dogs you have, the more leashes you have to untangle. A double leash offers a simple solution for well-behaved dogs. These leashes feature a single handle connected to two leashes. Sometimes the handle has a single cord that extends 2 or 3 feet, then splits or has a D-ring that connects to two short leads, so you can walk two pups with one leash. 

If you’re walking two dogs with separate leads, they inevitably get tangled. Double leashes can prevent a tangle of feet, fur, and leash. However, like other designs, you have to know your dogs. If they wrestle and nip each other when they’re in close proximity, a double leash might not be the best choice. They work well for leash-trained pups who are relatively calm and get along with one another.  

Walk, run, or skip with your dog on a hands-free leash

Hands-free picks grant you extra freedom while your dog stays close by. These leashes have extra length, clips, and connectors that allow you to wear them as a belt, on your wrist, or as a traditional leash. When you’re hands-free, you’re not managing a leash while scooping poop, holding hands with young children, or balancing your way up a mountain trail.

They’re an excellent choice for active pet owners who want to take their dogs on outdoor adventures. You may need your hands-on steep trails to drink water or stay balanced when you’re pushing your own physical limits. It also can make simple evening walks more pleasant for you. If you’re going hands-free, however, the dog should be well trained. A dog that chases squirrels or becomes distracted by every passerby can pull you off your feet. However, if your pet stays by your side and loves to be with you, one of these types will give you freedom and safety to enjoy a wide range of activities together. 

Now you see it, now you…still see it with a reflective dog leash

Many models have some reflective properties built into the design, like a reflective thread woven through the nylon or tapes on the handle. Visibility is an important safety issue for walking dogs at dawn and dusk. Drivers, bikers, and other pedestrians may see you and not the dog or vice versa. Reflective leashes increase visibility for both of you. Volume matters when it comes to visibility. The more reflective material on the leash, the easier it is to see. However, these leashes need regular cleaning. Dirt and mud can cover the reflective material, reducing visibility. 

Ready to save some cash on your dog products?

Budget leashes are usually made of nylon but lower-quality nylon than more expensive models. The hardware on these leashes may be plastic or low-grade stainless steel. Cheap leashes are a great option when you’re on a tight budget or for an extra leash in the car. They’ll last longer with dogs who are well-leashed trained, don’t pull, and don’t chew. These leashes will also last longer in a dry climate, where water exposure stays to a minimum. Inexpensive leashes may be flat or round/rope designs. Thicker ropes tend to last longer, whether they’re used with a small or large breed. 

Also consider …

Dogs who chew or pull excessively can go through fabric leashes in a matter of weeks if not days. Leather options offer better, tougher durability for dogs that are hard on leashes. That doesn’t mean leather won’t get worn out with chewing and pulling, but it will last longer. And leather leashes don’t cost that much more than a high-quality fabric one but will last longer with pups who love to test their limits. 

FAQs

Q: What is the D-ring on a dog leash for? 

Some leashes have a D-ring on or near the handle. The ring can hold extra dog supplies like a poop-bag dispenser or a dog-treat pouch. You can buy a poop bag holder with a carabiner on it that clips directly to a D-ring. These designs make it easy to head out the door with everything you need to walk the dog. 

Q: Can a dog escape a slip lead?

Dogs can escape slip leads. These leashes have a ring on the end instead of a hook or clip. The handle then slides through the ring, creating a loop that secures around the dog’s neck and acts as a collar. For a dog that’s been well trained on a lead, a slip lead stays comfortably loose. However, if the dog pulls or tries to run away, the loop tightens on their neck, potentially choking them if they (or you) don’t stop pulling. A dog can escape a slip lead by staying close to the person holding the leash, causing the loop to loosen. The dog could then slip its head out. Slips leads are somewhat controversial and should only be used on dogs with plenty of obedience and leash training.

Q: What age can you leash train a puppy? 

Basic obedience and leash training can start around eight weeks old. At this age, pups begin to become more aware and have the ability to understand basic commands. Before starting, remember to be patient, keep training sessions short, and always end on a positive note.

Related: Best dog DNA kits

The final word on the best dog leashes

Different dogs and owners will find that different options work better for them than others. As you’re choosing the best for your pup, whether it’s a long leash or a hands-free leash, consider how and where you want to use the leash and the dog’s size and temperament. If you’re willing to pay a little extra for a leash with aluminum or high-quality stainless steel hardware and thick nylon, chances are it will last longer and provide a better bang for your buck. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dog leashes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best budget electric bikes for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-budget-electric-bikes/ Wed, 14 Dec 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=496637
Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

Got some speed and savings at the same time.

The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Get started with the best budget electric bikes.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Ride1Up Roadster V2 Ride1Up Roadster
SEE IT

The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.
Best mountain Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26” Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”
SEE IT

Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700.
Best folding Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike
SEE IT

The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

Is the term budget electric bike an oxymoron? Two things are certain about ebikes: They’re really cool, and they are very expensive. They often cost upwards of $2,000, so getting one is no small investment. There are plenty of people who can’t afford one. That said, it is possible to get a decent ebike for less than $1,000. A few brands have designed relatively affordable ebikes that deliver admirable functionality at the low end of the price range. They tend to be foldable or compact versions for commuters, so they’re made for relatively light use, but there are options for trail bikers, too. Let’s examine the benefits and limitations of the best budget electric bikes.

How we chose the best budget electric bikes

I’ve been an avid outdoorsman enthusiast for my entire life, which has resulted in several years of providing gear and tech coverage for outlets like Popular Science, the Daily Beast, Runner’s World, Thrillist, the Manual, and more. My love of cycling has been a recurring theme throughout all of it.

Over the past several months, I’ve ridden dozens of electric bikes at all different price points and categories. I have come to learn what to look for when separating genuine quality from flashy marketing. In certain cases, those tests were supplemented with research collating reviews from experts and impressions from customers alike.

The best budget electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

The best budget ebikes span several different riding purposes and considerations. While most low-cost ebikes are often very similar, our picks offer distinctive riding experiences. They got our attention; maybe you’ll see something in them, too.

Best overall: Ride1Up Roadster V2

Ride1Up Roadster V2

ride1up

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Ride1Up Roadster V2 is an all-around great ebike that won’t break the bank.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 7Ah (252Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 12-20 miles (and maybe even more)
  • Motor: 350W (500W peak)

Pros

  • Solid all-purpose bike
  • Relatively good range and power
  • Classic looks
  • Smooth ride

Cons

  • Not for short riders
  • No lights

For just $1,000, the Ride1up Roadster V2 is a remarkably well-rounded and polished bike. High-powered for its price with a 350W motor, the Roadster V2 provides strong acceleration and propulsion, making it capable of reaching 24 miles per hour with pedal assist. It also has a range of 12-20 miles on average, with several riders suggesting they’ve gone 25 miles on a single charge. That’s a great range for an around-town cruiser.

It’s lightweight—only 33 pounds—and durably built. Plus, it looks very slick, with a classic aesthetic that almost doesn’t look like an ebike.

The Roadster V2 isn’t perfect, though. It’s a very tall bike, best suited for riders 5’8” and over. It also doesn’t have much in the way of accessories; there’s not even a headlight, which is pretty standard at this point.

Still, with all the core features working at or above our expectations, you’ll be hard-pressed to find an ebike that works so well for this price.

Best for urban adventures (and apartments): Lectric Bikes XP Lite

Lectric XP Lite ebike in an elevator

Tony Ware

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Small but spry, the Lectric Bikes XP Lite lets you zip through crowds and doesn’t require much storage space.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 7.8 Ah (374 Wh)
  • Range: 15-40 miles
  • Motor: 300W nominal, 720W peak

Pros

  • Good range and power
  • Solid build quality
  • Class 1 or 2

Cons

  • Lack of suspension is noticeable on rough roads

Started in 2019 from a garage in Phoenix, Ariz., Lectric Bikes expanded quickly because of the company’s restless spirit. Not only are the company’s ebikes intended for the intrepid—for gaining the experience points, XP, in the bike names—but the founders are continually listening to user feedback to refine the product line while maintaining affordability.

Foldable yet offroad-friendly, the core Lectric XP 3.0 model can comfortably accompany RVers and van-lifers. The less-expensive XP Lite, meanwhile, was developed as the optimal option for city dwellers needing a lighter-weight ebike that could go from closet to commute. It even shows up quickly in a surprisingly compact box. At 46 pounds, and 36- x 16- x 26-inch folded dimensions, the XP Lite is easy to tuck and transport via elevator, as shown above—or even stairs in a pinch, as shown below—while packing in a lot of features for its $799 price point.

Class 1 and 2, the XP Lite features a twist-grip throttle plus five levels of pedal assist, with slimmer tires that assist the maneuverability needed in active urban environments. The 48V lithium-ion battery can get up to 40 miles on a charge (assuming you’re using no more than intermittent pedal assist level 1). Or you can use the throttle to scoot to/from work, the store, etc., quickly with the least effort and sweat (the single-speed drivetrain makes it easy—just twist and go—but you’ll get max 15 miles in this mode).

The base XL Lite includes front & rear safety lights, and a backlit heads-up LCD screen offers trip and battery info (electrical components are IP65-rated in case you get caught in incremental weather, but don’t leave the bike out in the rain). You’ll absorb some shocks if navigating uneven asphalt, and acceleration—while appropriately fast for street navigation—isn’t always the smoothest in transition. But you can buy an optional seat with a suspension post, and you’ll appreciate the nimble nature of the bike whether you’re zipping through downtown or kicking up some dust on more developed trails. — Tony Ware

Lectric XP Lite ebike folded in a stairwell
Tony Ware

Best mountain bike: Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”

Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike 350W 26”

ANCHEER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Most electric mountain bikes cost thousands of dollars. This one’s highly capable and costs less than $700. 

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
  • Range: 20+ miles
  • Motor: 350W

Pros

  • Good range and power
  • Solid build quality
  • Shock-absorbing fork
  • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

Cons

  • No built-in light
  • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

It’s not uncommon for electric mountain bike prices to steer closer toward $10,000 than $1,000, making them a very hard sell. Luckily, Ancheer makes a highly capable alternative that costs less than $700.

With a 350W motor capable of cruising at 20 miles per hour, the Ancheer Electric Mountain Bike has no problem charging up inclines. It also has a substantial range, with many users reporting that it will go well over 20 miles if you’re using the throttle economically. 

Its design is also surprisingly solid for a budget electric mountain bike, inspiring several buyers to leave shining reviews after several months of hitting the trails. Shock absorbers in the fork deliver a smooth, capable riding experience. And its overall aesthetic is clean and sporty. 

Best folding: Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike

Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike

Vivi

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Vivi 26-inch Folding Electric Mountain Bike feels especially solid for a folding ebike.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 8Ah (288Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 14 miles
  • Motor: 350W

Pros

  • Solid all-purpose bike
  • Relatively good range and power
  • Shock absorbers
  • 21-speed shifter w/ throttle

Cons

  • Slow charging
  • Poor customer service from the manufacturer

Most folding electric bikes feel somewhat rickety, thanks to their signature hinges. Budget bike-maker Vivi somehow made a folding design that minimizes that wiggle in its 26-inch Electric Mountain Bike, and does so without charging an arm and a leg.

Its strong 350W motor will zip you up to 20 miles per hour using either throttle or pedal assist. Its 14-mile range can’t compete with high-level ebikes, but is acceptable for an $800 bike and should be more than enough for local commuters to ride their daily route on a single charge. What’s more, its Shimano 21-speed transmission makes taking on hills effortless. 

When you’re done for the day, folding the bike up to store is easy, as is reassembling it to ride. More importantly, the bike feels sturdy despite the movable points on the frame and provides a comfortable riding experience. And it has a built-in headlight that can be switched on via the handlebar control pad, which is also used to shift between three riding modes: normal bike mode, pedal-assist, and pure electric power.

While Vivi has a solid bike on its hands here, the company has earned a reputation for poor customer service when issues have cropped up. This may impact the bike’s long-term viability, but it is also a common issue with companies targeting budget products.

Best compact: Sailnovo 14-Inch Electric Bike

Sailnovo 14-Inch Electric Bike

Sailnovo

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike offers supreme portability and solid performance.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 36V 10.4Ah (374.4Wh)
  • Range: Approximately 18 miles
  • Motor: 450W

Pros

  • Strong motor
  • Relatively good range
  • Waterproof
  • Throttle and pedal assist

Cons

  • Could be more ergonomic
  • Some customers have had customer service issues

The Salinovo 14-inch Electric Bike is surprisingly powerful for a compact electric bike. Its 450W motor can quickly reach just shy of 20 miles per hour via either the throttle or pedal assist. (Salinovo claims the range goes much further, but some reviewers reported that it falls short of those claims.) Round that out with a surprisingly solid range and little flourishes like integrated head and tail lights, plus a central shock absorber, and you’ve got a pretty solid bike for around $500 bucks.

Some serious cyclists might find that compact, foldable ebikes at these prices don’t deliver the structural solidity they expect from a bike. Generally, they can feel a bit more rickety than their non-folding counterparts. With a bike like the Sailnovo, it’s important to remember that you are making a compromise, favoring affordability and portability over feel and stability. All in all, though, it’s a great little commuter or a fun way to explore a neighborhood.

Things to consider before choosing the best budget electric bikes

If you’ve come looking for the best budget electric bikes, rather than simply the best electric bikes, then we know the price is on your mind. Even cheap bikes cost a few hundred dollars, though, so you want to make sure you’re putting that money into something worth riding. There are several specific factors you should keep in mind, so you can figure out whether a budget ebike is a bargain or, for lack of a better word, junk. The best budget electric bikes will deliver in these specific ways.

Price

First and foremost, you’re here because you’re looking for an electric bike that won’t cost as much as a used car—all of the bikes on this list cost under $1,000. We also included a few compact bicycles that cost around $500. These offer somewhat limited functionality and durability compared to full-size ebikes, but they’re still great for the price.

Riding range

An electric bike that runs out of juice after a few miles isn’t worth buying, no matter the price. What good is a motor if it can’t get you from point A to point B? A large battery will ensure you get a boost from your ebike, rather than pushing it home.

Most ebikes rate their batteries in a combination of volts (V) and amp-hours (Ah), which you can combine to calculate a bike battery’s actual capacity in watt-hours (Wh). Watt-hours are the more useful specification, as they allow you to approximate how long the battery will last at a given speed.

Converting volts and amp-hours into watt-hours is easy. Simply multiply the two numbers together. A number of our picks, for example, boast 36V 8Ah batteries. 36 x 8 = 288, so we know that battery lasts for 288Wh. With this number, we can calculate how far the battery will take us by dividing the number of watt-hours by your speed to see how far you’ll go. So, at 20 miles per hour, a 288Wh bike should carry you about 14.5 miles.

“About” is an important word here. In the real world, your actual range will be affected by things like rider weight, road surface, flat vs. hilly terrain, and other factors that can demand more or less power. So, while you can’t measure and determine the minimum amount of juice you’ll need on spec, you can probably figure out if a bike can get you where you need to go.

If nothing else, remember that a bigger battery is always better.

Motor

There’s no point in having an ebike if the motor isn’t powerful enough to take the edge off your pedaling effort. Power is one of the biggest differences between less expensive ebikes and the cream of the crop. Many are so weak that you’ll barely notice the pedal assistance. However, all of the bikes on this list deliver at least 250 watts, meaning they’re capable of delivering solid pedal assistance or even propelling themselves at 20 miles per hour or higher.

Keep in mind that your actual speed will vary based on factors like payload, road conditions, stops and starts, and so on, but a high-watt motor is important, especially when looking to spend less money.

Durability

Whenever you’re going with a budget-tier version of a product, you need to pay extra attention to its overall construction. You aren’t saving money if you buy something cheap, but it breaks down after several uses. To verify the durability of our recommendations, we’ve scoured reviews from owners who can attest to the longevity of each bike.

When you’re checking out a specific bike in the real world, check over its various parts to find out if anything rattles to a worrisome degree. Some budget picks may feel more rickety than their more expensive brethren, but they should still be sturdy and comfortable to ride.

Accessories

Ebikes can come with an extremely wide range of accessories, including lights, bells, cargo carriers, and so on. While you don’t need accessories like these, they can make your riding experience safer, more fun, and more versatile.

FAQs

Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

Electric bikes are absolutely worth the money for commuters if it allows you to cut down on expenses like gas, parking, and vehicle maintenance. They’re also incredibly fun to ride, especially when they let you blow past traffic jams. That said, they are very expensive, so we’d only recommend them for people who ride a lot. You don’t necessarily need to be a commuter, but they aren’t a worthwhile investment for people who only bike once in a while.

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

As we’ve discussed here, money is a major hurdle for most people considering whether or not to buy an ebike. Electric bikes usually cost more than traditional bikes, and they feature more complicated machinery, which translates into more maintenance and repair costs. The range can also be an issue. Electric bikes tend to be very heavy. When they run out of juice, they can be difficult to ride without power assistance.

Q: Do you pedal an electric bike?

You can, but you don’t always need to. On Class 2 and 3 electric bikes with throttles, you can propel the ebike with zero effort. On class 1 bikes with pedal assist, you have to pedal, but the motor speeds you up and does most of the work. Technically, some companies also sell “electric bikes” without pedals. These tend to be cheaper and work similarly to using the throttle on a class 2 or 3 bike. By removing the pedals, these companies are playing with the line between an electric bike and an electric scooter or moped, so we’re not sure they fit what we think of when we talk about ebikes.

Q: How fast do electric bikes go?

Your ebike’s top speed comes down to the motor of its motor, plus several other factors, including rider weight, flat vs. hilly terrain, road surface conditions, bike weight, cargo weight, and so on. They are not so powerful that they can push their limits under any conditions. That said, we generally expect budget ebikes capable of average top speeds between 15-20 miles per hour. A top-of-the-line model should be able to go a bit faster, up to about 28 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best budget electric bikes

Electric bikes are an environmentally friendly, fun way to get around town, whether commuting, running errands, or simply going for a ride. While they often come with a hefty price tag, there is a price range, and you can get one that won’t cost too much. If $500-$1,000 is still too much, looking for a used or refurbished model may help you cut costs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best budget electric bikes for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dual-fuel-generators/ Mon, 15 Aug 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=461892
Home photo
Tony Ware

When it comes to keeping a generator (and your devices) running, two fuels are better than one.

The post The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall DuroMax XP12000EH is the best dual fuel generator overall. DuroMax XP12000EH
SEE IT

The DuroMax XP12000EH delivers plenty of power for any purpose.
Best portable Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best portable dual fuel generator. Westinghouse iGen4500DF
SEE IT

The Westinghouse iGen4500DF packs more power into a relatively portable package.
Best electric start Wen DF1100X is the best electric start dual fuel generator. Wen DF1100X
SEE IT

For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

Most people probably look for a gas generator as the easiest way to get backup power in a pinch, but a dual-fuel generator—which can run on gas or propane—provides a more flexible alternative. With two ways to power your generator, you have more options when fuel is in short supply (in conditions like a hurricane). Dual-fuel generators also give you more control over secondary factors like noise and emissions: Gas is easy to get at any station, but propane burns cleaner and quieter. The best dual-fuel generators not only offer the best of both worlds but also come equipped with slew of slick features to make your user experience easy and safe.

How we chose the best dual-fuel generators

As a tech enthusiast and camping addict, I’ve looked at a wide range of portable power stations and related accessories—such as the Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core portable generator and the best home wind turbines—for the likes of Popular Science, Scientific American, The Daily Beast, and more. (And if you’re looking for things to do with all that power, consider charging one of the best ebikes I’ve written about.) I’ve researched each of these dual-fuel generators extensively via a combination of first-hand trials, input from experts, and reviews from real-world consumers.

The best dual-fuel generators: Reviews & Recommendations

Our favorite dual-fuel inverter generators span a range of purposes. Some are designed as reliable backup power sources for an entire home. Others are small and portable, giving you just enough juice for a camping trip or short blackout. Our list features generators of all shapes and sizes, so you can find something that suits your needs and budget.

Best overall: DuroMax XP12000EH

DuroMax XP12000EH is the best dual fuel generator overall.

DuroMax

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With its high output and heavy-duty build quality, the DuroMax XP12000EH will keep the lights on and more.

Specs

  • Rated output: 9,500W
  • Peak output: 12,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 8.3 gallons
  • Weight: 238 lbs
  • Volume: 74 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Solid output
  • Outstanding build quality
  • Power Boost for bigger appliances and RVs
  • Wheel kit included

Cons

  • Very heavy
  • Expensive
  • Some owners report limited customer service support

The DuroMax XP12000EH is a true workhorse of a dual-fuel generator. With a steady output of 9,500W, it’s more than powerful enough to provide electricity to an entire home, and its 12,000W peak output allows it to provide extra power if there’s suddenly a much larger need. It also has a large 8.3-gallon gas tank so that it can run for a long time on petrol alone.

What’s more, XP12000EH has a reputation for providing outstanding reliability. It was built for rugged uses, like on a work site, and its all-metal construction ensures that it can handle a bit of roughhousing. All that metal and gas capacity means it’s very heavy, though. At 238 pounds, you won’t be moving this around a lot, and forget about taking it camping. But it comes with a wheel kit, which may help ease the load over short distances. 

truction quality is clearly solid. Again, the gas tank is pretty small, but that’s actually an advantage in this case.

Best portable: Westinghouse iGen4500DF

Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best portable dual fuel generator.

Westinghouse Outdoor Power Equipment

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you need to take plenty of power camping or to the job site, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is a great choice.

Specs

  • Rated output: 3,700W
  • Peak output: 4,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 3.4 gallons
  • Weight: 104.7 lbs
  • Volume: 52 dB
  • Starter: Electric

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Plenty of power output
  • Quiet
  • Solid construction

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy for a “portable” generator

If you need lots of power and the ability to move your generator around, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF is the best semi-portable option we know of. It’s slightly larger than our “best small” pick and almost twice as heavy. Still, it’s significantly more compact and portable than most dual-fuel generators, with a similar 3,700-4,500W output. That’s plenty of power for a large camping expedition, an RV, or a work site. 

Best electric start: Wen DF1100X

Wen DF1100X is the best electric start dual fuel generator.

WEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For an easy startup and lots of safety features, check out the Wen DF1100X.

Specs

  • Rated output: 8,300W
  • Peak output: 11,000W
  • Gas tank capacity: 6.6 gallons
  • Weight: 213.8 lbs
  • Volume: 72 dB
  • Starter: Electric

Pros

  • Plenty of power output
  • CO2 shutdown safety sensor
  • Relatively quiet

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

It isn’t all that uncommon for a dual-fuel generator to have an electric start switch—all of the recommendations on this list have them, either solely or alongside a pull cord. The Wen DF1100X sets itself apart with an automatic stop mechanism that can cut power in an emergency.

The Wen DF1100X comes in several packages. However, we specifically recommend the model with a built-in CO2 shutdown sensor, which is important if you run the generator in a garage or otherwise poorly ventilated space.

With a hefty 8,300-11,000W output, above-average gas capacity, and a relatively low operating volume, the Wen DF1100X is a generator powerhouse. It’s both expensive and heavy, but if you’re looking for an easy-on, safety-off option, it’s a solid investment.

Best budget: DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH

DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH is the best dual fuel generator for the budget.

DuroMax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its relatively high output, relatively low price, and solid construction, the Duro Star DS5500EH is a solid budget-conscious pick.

Specs

  • Rated output: 4,500W
  • Peak output: 5,500W
  • Gas tank capacity: 3.9 gallons
  • Weight: 124 lbs
  • Volume: 69 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Solid output for price
  • Outstanding build quality
  • Relatively portable

Cons

  • Not powerful enough for an entire home
  • Some owners report limited customer service support

The DuroMax Duro Star DS5500EH is effectively a smaller, more affordable version of our best overall pick. At just under half the price of the DuroMax XP12000EH, the Duro Star DS5500EH delivers about half the power. A 4,500W generator gives you plenty of power if you’re charging up an RV, topping off power tools at a work site, or keeping key appliances on during a power outage.

At just over 100 pounds, it’s not exactly light, but it’s also not so heavy that you can’t get it around. It wouldn’t take too much wrangling to bring it camping, especially thanks to the inclusion of wheels.

Also worth considering: Champion Power Equipment 7,500-watt dual fuel generator

Champion 7,500-watt Dual Fuel generator

Champion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You can often find this powerful dual-fuel generator at a deep discount—it’s regularly sub-$1,000 but sometimes dips far below that mark.

Specs

  • Rated output: 7,500W
  • Peak output: 9,375W
  • Gas tank capacity: 7.7 gallons
  • Weight: 205 lbs
  • Volume: 74 dB
  • Starter: Electric and pull

Pros

  • Plenty of power for big jobs or long run times
  • Up to 10 hours runtime on gas or 5.5 on propane
  • Lots of connectivity: 120V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L5-30R), 120/240V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L14-30R), (2) Two GFCI 120V 20A Household Outlets 
  • Sturdy wheels

Cons

  • Big and heavy
  • Loud

When it comes to pure power-to-price ratio, this Champion offering makes a solid showing. It weighs just over 200 pounds and contains a 439cc 4-stroke engine. When running on gasoline, it produces 9,375 starting watts and 7,500 running watts. On propane, it churns 8,400 starting watts and 6,750 running watts. That’s plenty of power for even large jobs or whole-home backup in an emergency. Despite its size and weight, it’s relatively easy to move around thanks to sturdy integrated wheels. It starts easily with an electric system, but it also has a recoil option for use in a pinch.

What to consider when buying a dual-fuel generator

While there are plenty of dual-fuel generators on the market, they aren’t cheap, and many of them simply aren’t worth the investment. Some are poorly made and don’t last long. Others don’t deliver reliable performance, so they may not work when the lights go out. To make a wise purchase, you should keep a few things in mind to judge whether a generator is worth the cost. When it comes to connectivity, it offers ample ports. They include a 120V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L5-30R), 120/240V 30A RV Locking Outlet (L14-30R), and a pair of Two GFCI 120V 20A household outlets.

Power output

Simply put, if a generator can’t give you enough power to meet your needs, it isn’t worth buying. Manufacturers usually provide two numbers, both measured in watts (W), which will help you understand how much power a generator produces. First, a generator’s “Rated” output tells you how much power it produces at any given moment. Second, many generators also have a “peak” output spec, which refers to the maximum amount of power that a particular unit can handle blasting out in a short burst. This comes in handy if you plan to turn appliances on and off, which can cause sudden surges of electrical draw.

Ideally, you want a generator with a rated output equal to your typical power needs. If you’re simply looking to power and recharge a handful of devices alongside a simple appliance or two, 1,500W-2,000W might be all you need. If you are turning a lot of random power tools on and off, or powering an RV, look for something around 4,000W. However, if you’re looking to power a house, you’ll likely need at least 8,000W or more.

Fuel capacity

With petrol and propane, dual-fuel generators can keep the power going longer than most single-fuel power solutions. Of course, that depends on how much fuel you have in your tanks. Most dual-fuel generator gas tanks run between 2 and 10 gallons, which is pretty typical of single-fuel generators that run solely on gas. Propane is almost always stored in separate pressurized gas canisters that are attached via a hose, exactly like you would a propane grill. So the propane capacity depends on the size of your canister rather than the generator itself.

In both cases, though, you should keep in mind that more storage means more weight. If you’re looking for a portable generator, you’ll want to balance those two factors. If you’re buying a generator to back up your home’s power and plan to leave the generator in one place, weigh it down as much as you like.

Starting type

Dual-fuel generators use one of two starting mechanisms: either a recoil cord or an electric starter. With a cord, you pull the handle hard and fast to produce the rotation necessary to fire the generator. It requires more physical effort but tends to be more reliable. An electric starter is a push-button solution—no exertion is required, but it only works when its internal battery is charged.

Operating noise

Generators are pretty loud, which can be a nuisance if you keep one (or more) in or near your home. Generators tend to get louder as they generate more power. (There are exceptions, though.) If you’re going to keep your generator around your house or run it while camping in a quiet spot, you will want to keep the noise to a minimum. 

Typically speaking (but not always), higher-quality generators manage to turn the volume down thanks to the use of thick shielding and other design elements. If your priority is pure power, though, you may simply have to put up with the noise or find another way to minimize it.

Dual-fuel generators give you the advantage of running propane, which generators process more quietly than gas. Most dual-fuel generators produce between 50 dB (roughly the same as a refrigerator) and 90 dB (about the same as a small-engine motorcycle).

Size, weight, and features

There may be other logistical considerations you’ll want to keep in mind based on your specific needs and setup, such as the specific dimensions of the generator and how much it weighs. If your generator sits at home for backup power, size, and weight might not be much of an issue. For mobile uses like camping or worksites, however, you will want something you can move without too much strain.

There are also several physical features for transportation that are common but not universal, like wheels or a lift hook bar to hook onto a crane. You may also find special safety features, such as CO2 safety shutoffs, over-speed shutoffs, or high-temperature alarms. For better or worse, none of these features are ubiquitous enough to be “must-have” features across the board, but you should absolutely look for generators with specific features that feel important to you.

FAQs

Q: Are dual-fuel generators worth it?

While dual-fuel generators tend to be slightly more expensive than traditional ones, they are more fuel-efficient, lowering costs in the long run. They’re also significantly quieter when running on propane rather than gas, which is great if you plan to keep it within earshot.

Dual-fuel generators are also extremely valuable when fuel isn’t readily available. If you’re preparing for a natural disaster like a hurricane, for example, it’s better to be capable of using whatever fuel you can get your hands on.

Q: What is the most powerful dual-fuel generator?

Theoretically, the sky’s the limit in terms of power. In reality, though, the most powerful consumer-grade dual-fuel generators top out at around 12,000W.

Q: Is it better to run a dual-fuel generator on gas or propane?

Gas produces more power, but the generator runs more quietly while using propane, and it’s less damaging to the environment. Having a dual-fuel generator means you can choose or at least have access to both options.

Q: How long will a dual-fuel generator run on propane?

That depends entirely on the size of your propane tank, the generator’s engine, and the amount of power it’s generating. For example, our “best overall” pick can run for about seven hours at 25 percent power output capacity using a typical 20-pound propane tank.

Q: What is the difference between an inverter and a generator?

A generator produces the electricity, while a power inverter stores and reconfigures the energy. Virtually all consumer-grade generators have inverters integrated into them.

Q: Who makes the quietest dual-fuel generator?

The quietest dual-fuel generator you’re going to find produces around 50 dB. At 52 dB, our “best portable” pick, the Westinghouse iGen4500DF, is about as quiet as they come.

Final thoughts on the best dual-fuel generators

A dual-fuel generator can really be an asset when you’re camping or when prepping for an emergency. That said, it is a major investment, so make sure you’re buying the right size generator for whatever you’re doing. To power a whole house, bigger is obviously better. But you might be better off with something more portable for powering an RV or a casual blackout backup. Also, consider the possibility that a more environmentally friendly power solution, like a solar generator, might be able to give you the power you need with a smaller carbon footprint.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dual-fuel generators in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor saunas for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-saunas/ Wed, 08 Jun 2022 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=448299
The best outdoor saunas
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Want to get healthier? Do sweat the small things but do it in the comfort of your own backyard.

The post The best outdoor saunas for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor saunas
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar
SEE IT

A fantastic overall option that’s more affordable than some competition.
Best infrared Enlighten Rustic 5 Person Sauna Enlighten Rustic 5 Person Sauna
SEE IT

All the sauna effects without the high temperatures.
Best budget Sunray 3-person outdoor sauna on a plain background Sunray Grandby 3-Person
SEE IT

Get a traditional sauna experience during any season.

Saunas boast an array of health benefits and for those looking to make an investment in their wellness, an outdoor sauna provides one of the most authentic and enjoyable experiences. Outdoor saunas were traditionally used across Northern Europe as far back as 2000 BC. Today, however, many people think of Finnish saunas, which use stones heated over a fire to create steam and heat. And there’s a reason most people think of Finland when they think of outdoor saunas: they can be rejuvenating in cold weather. You can use an outdoor sauna year-round but, when the temperatures drop, saunas can really help you get through the winter and, hey, maybe actually enjoy it. Whether you’re looking for the best outdoor saunas or the best home saunas, we curated this list of options that include both traditional saunas, infrared saunas, and even wood-burning models.

How we chose the best outdoor saunas

We scoured write-ups and reviews to find the best outdoor saunas for our readers. We wanted to include a range of products that could appeal to any user, no matter how much space you have for a home install. We know that outdoor saunas can be a serious investment so, while we included products across multiple price levels, we prioritized those that had materials or features that made them worth the money. We also looked at capacity, sustainability of materials, and complexity of assembly.

Most of the products we included have a DIY option to minimize installation costs, but this can be a laborious process. We also wanted to ensure that our selections used high-quality, non-toxic materials like natural cedar. Last, we ensured that each sauna we selected—no matter how cheap—has a high-quality heating element, as these can make or break your experience. (No one wants a really slow-warming or inefficient sauna.) 

The best outdoor saunas: Reviews & Recommendations

Our guide includes a range of products that could appeal to any user, no matter your budget or how much space you have for a home install.

Best overall: Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar

Aleko Outdoor Rustic Cedar

Homedepot

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This indoor or outdoor barrel sauna fits eight people while minimizing unusable space, resulting in a relatively affordable and energy-efficient sauna. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 93” W x 72” D x 75” H
  • Materials: Western Canadian Red Cedar, tempered glass, and stainless steel
  • Type of Heater: Harvia 8kW ETL-approved electric heater for steam or dry heat

Pros 

  • Great price-to-quality ratio 
  • Can be used indoors and outdoors 
  • Free shipping or local pick up at a retailer like Home Depot

Cons 

  • Manufactured overseas 
  • The interior doesn’t have any windows, so the door is the only source of natural light 

Aleko’s outdoor sauna tops our list because it is a high-quality barrel sauna without an absurd price tag. While the exterior may not be made with premium lumber as some of our other selections, this outdoor barrel sauna comes with a comparable 8W Harvia electric heater. Harvia is a high-end Finnish brand, and you’ll see these heaters featured in other saunas below. Also, while some other sauna kits charge extra for components and accessories (like the heater, bucket, ladle, and thermometer), this includes all of these parts in one package. 

Like most traditional saunas, you can choose either dry or steam heat by adding water to the sauna stones. Many prefer this traditional experience to the hands-off infrared heating panels. We also love that the sauna heats up quickly because of the space-efficient design. Pick this up and you can have your own outdoor wood sauna in less than a week. 

Best infrared: Enlighten Rustic 5-person Sauna

Enlighten Rustic 5 Person Sauna

enlightensauna

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This large outdoor infrared sauna is made with eco-certified, non-toxic materials and is great for cold climates, as it is insulated.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 81.5” W x 61.5” D x 86” H
  • Materials: Western Canadian Red Cedar, asphalt shingles 
  • Capacity: 5 people

Pros 

  • Insulated to retain maximum heat even in cold weather
  • Plenty of features, including a magazine rack and cup holders
  • Two full-spectrum heaters and 10 carbon far infrared heaters 

Cons 

  • You need to request a quote for the price 
  • Slightly complicated installation

This gorgeous 5-person outdoor home sauna is made with Western Canadian Red Cedar paneling and is great for a family or larger group looking for an infrared sauna, no matter where you live. Thanks to its insulation, this sauna can withstand colder climates and still provide comfy warmth even in the winter. It houses a total of 12 heaters, two of which are full-spectrum infrared, including bench and floor carbon heaters. 

Customize your experience by playing music through the built-in Bluetooth speaker or filling your space with reading material in the magazine rack—it won’t get as hot as a traditional sauna so people often extend their sessions to up to an hour. The exterior and interior materials are eco-certified and non-toxic, but the cedar still provides the feel of a more traditional sauna.

Best steam: Traditional Outdoor Country Living Barrel Sauna by Saunacore

Traditional Outdoor Country Living Barrel Sauna by Saunacore

northernsaunas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This traditional-style steam sauna comes with a wood-burning stove option for total off-the-grid immersion. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 96” W x 72” D x 96” H 
  • Materials: Canadian Clear Western Red Cedar and tempered glass 
  • Type of Heat: Saunacore CTW-WS12 wood-burning stove or electric heater

Pros 

  • Choose either a wood-burning stove or electric heater.
  • Quick heat time because of barrel design
  • Available in both 6ft and 8ft lengths

Cons 

  • The electric heater isn’t very sightly 
  • Wood-burning stoves are not allowed in all municipalities and may come with health concerns

For those who don’t want to deal with the electrical installation or don’t have the means to hook up a sauna, this outdoor barrel sauna comes with a wood-burning stove. (However, check your local regulations to ensure wood-burning stoves are allowed in your area.) Don’t worry; unlike traditional smoke saunas, this one has an extensive ventilation system. 

It’s spacious, well-designed, and customizable to your budget and needs. You could add a porch with bench seats or substitute American Poplar wood if you need a hypoallergenic and scent-free alternative to cedar. It also comes in both 6-foot and 8-foot lengths, so it’s perfect for larger groups or community outdoor spaces. 

While the barrel design is classic, it’s also energy efficient because of the reduced volume. So, with the design and the wood-burning stove, this sauna heats up pretty quickly. Our only complaint is that you don’t get much natural light exposure from the only window on the door. 

Best barrel: Redwood Outdoors Thermowood Panorama Sauna

Redwood Outdoors Thermowood Panorama Sauna

Redwood Outdoors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A beautiful, full-sized glass window makes this an ideal backyard sauna if you want to take in your natural surroundings. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 71” W x 73” D x 76.5” H
  • Materials: Scandinavian softwood, stainless steel components
  • Type of Heat: Harvia 8kW Clindro Electric heater for steam or dry heat

Pros 

  • Natural light from the full back window 
  • Wood sourced from PEFC-certified forests 
  • Self-assembly takes four hours

Cons 

  • Only comes with a 1-year warranty

We swooned as soon as we saw the big, panoramic back window on Redwood Outdoors’ Thermowood Panorama Barrel Saua. It is designed with classic Scandinavian principles and features an interlocking system that forms a tight, natural seal for energy efficiency. Thermowood, which is heat-treated Scandinavian softwood, is durable and resistant to heat, humidity, and fungi. It’s also naturally insulating, so you can use this sauna year-round, even when snow is falling outside. You can even add on roof shingles if you want to further weather-proof your sauna.

While the large window provides ample outdoor views, the interior is equally impressive. The included Harvia 8kW Cilindro Electric heater is absolutely gorgeous, and the bench seats have ergonomic backrests for comfy lounging. Best of all, you can easily assemble it at your house with only a few hours and some basic hand tools.

Best two-person: Clearlight Sanctuary 2

The Clearlight Sanctuary Sauna is the best outdoor sauna that's two-person.

Audacia

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Feature-packed infrared sauna with Bluetooth compatibility and an integrated audio system. 

Specs 

  • Dimensions: 51” W x 46” D x 71.5” H 
  • Materials: Cedartec coating, Western Canadian Red Cedar exterior, mahogany wood interior, and ceramic/carbon heating panels 
  • Type of Heat: Full-spectrum infrared

Pros 

  • Full-spectrum infrared technology that is rare in outdoor saunas 
  • A smartphone app allows you to control it remotely 
  • Integrated Bluetooth audio system and charging station

Cons 

  • The exterior appears cheap because of Clearlight’s Cedartec coating
  • Expensive for a two-person sauna

This elegant backyard outdoor sauna from wellness brand Audacia is packed with features. If you want to listen to music or watch TV from a tablet during your session, you can do that with the Bluetooth audio system and outside tablet cradle (which also doubles as the door handle). Inside, choose between an ergonomic seat style and a flat seat by flipping over the bench to fit your comfort. 

While these features are beneficial, what really sets this Clearlight outdoor sauna apart for us is the full-spectrum infrared technology. Infrared technology eliminates the need for excessively high temperatures so that you can stay in the sauna for longer. The company’s proprietary True Wave™ heaters line the back, side walls, floor, and front wall to provide 360-coverage and powerful heat. Overall, it’s one of the best small outdoor saunas with infrared heating on the market. 

Best kit: Dundalk Leisurecraft Outdoor Luna Sauna

Dundalk Leisurecraft Outdoor Luna Sauna

the hardware supply

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: High-quality components, a modern design, and “choose-your-upgrades” options put this at the top of our list for best sauna kits. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 85” W x 86” D x 86” H
  • Materials: White cedar, bronze-tempered glass, stainless steel
  • Type of Heater: 6kW Saaku Electric heater for steam or dry (not included in price) 

Pros 

  • Quick, 20-minute heat-up time
  • Great design that blends modern and traditional elements
  • Upgrade the kit depending on your needs
  • Sustainably-sourced cedar 

Cons 

  • Can get pricey once you start upgrading components
  • Lengthy assembly—expect it to take the whole day if you DIY 

Somehow modern and classic at the same time, this outdoor sauna has wooed us with its incredible aesthetic design and sustainably sourced materials. The full-size door and large window really make this feel like an outdoor sauna because you’ll be able to get glimpses into your surrounding environment as you soak in the dry or steam heat. The inside has two cedar benches so that you can fit two in luxury or four comfortably. 

The price point fluctuates for Dundalk Leisurecraft’s Luna Sauna because you can customize it to fit your needs, making it a top choice for an outdoor sauna kit. Upgrade to include a front porch or lounge bench option if you want the added space and comfort, or just add some basics like an outdoor solar light and sand mount wall timer if you’re trying to minimize expenses. 

Also, while you may want to hire an electrician, many people opt to set this up themselves. The manual installation is relatively simple yet lengthy, so plan a day around it. 

Best budget: Sunray Grandby 3-Person

Sunray 3-person outdoor sauna on a plain background

Homedepot

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A more budget-friendly option for an infrared sauna that heats up in minutes.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 69” W x 47 D x 83” H
  • Materials: Canadian hemlock 
  • Type of Heat: Far infrared

Pros 

  • The price tag is appealing
  • 7-year structural warranty
  • Easy to set up

Cons 

  • Not as powerful as many outdoor saunas

Okay, let’s start by addressing the obvious: home saunas are an investment, and no outdoor sauna is cheap. But this one clocks in at around $3,000, making it a more budget-friendly option than anything else on our list. It comes equipped with seven far-infrared ceramic heaters to quickly warm the room in less than 15 minutes.

The temperature maxes out at 140 degrees Fahrenheit, which is standard for infrared saunas. It comes with a built-in bench and lighting, cup holders, and a Bluetooth/USB-compatible audio player. Although this sauna can technically fit three people, it’s a better option for two people. 

Overall, this is a solid entry-level infrared sauna option with easy assembly and an aesthetic of all-wood construction.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor sauna

Regardless of whether it’s a larger home sauna or a portable sauna you’re seeking, there are some essential terms and features that you should know about before heading out into the market:

Price

While saunas don’t cost much to maintain, the upfront costs can be high, especially when considering installation and electrician costs. Set a budget and then determine if you’re okay with the baseline model of the sauna or if you want to add extra features. Some saunas do not come with the heater in the price tag, so check this before you buy. 

The price of the best outdoor saunas can vary widely, but if you need to prioritize one thing, prioritize the heating element in the unit. While you may be able to cut costs on a less aesthetic design or smaller footprint, you shouldn’t skimp on the heater. This is one of the most important components of the sauna’s performance.

Capacity

You can find outdoor saunas with different capacities, but they generally range from 2-person saunas to 8-person outdoor saunas. Two-person saunas have a smaller footprint but will not fit the whole family or social group.

Material

Look for outdoor wood saunas with high-quality materials to make the most of your investment. You’ll want to look for a well-constructed sauna to retain heat, a premium electric heater or infrared panels, and comfortable benches. Wood, like cedar, will smell great as the sauna heats up.

Where you live

If you live in a cold region, you will be happier in the winter if you buy a traditional sauna instead of an infrared. As infrared saunas operate at lower temperatures, they may be less enjoyable if the outdoor temperatures are too cold. Alternatively, if you live in the desert, an infrared sauna may be more enjoyable in the summer because you won’t have to withstand such high temps.

FAQs

Q: How much do outdoor saunas cost?

Outdoor saunas ran in price based on materials, size, and components. They range from around $3,000 to upwards of $12,000. You’ll also have to factor in installation (some saunas are DIY) and electrical assistance for higher-voltage units.

Q: Will I have to assemble my outdoor sauna?

Many modern outdoor saunas are “pre-fab” meaning they are pre-fabricated and ship in larger parts to go together quickly. Some outdoor home saunas have self-assembly, while others require installation. Check with each manufacturer for the complexity of installation before you purchase. Most manufacturers will recommend hiring a professional electrician to assist with the installation due to the high voltage requirements.

Q: Are outdoor saunas expensive to run?

Many outdoor saunas are designed to run extremely efficiently, ranging from 1kWh for small models to 6kWh for larger saunas. Depending on where you live, 1kWh of electricity can range in price from $0.10 to $0.34 per hour. Typically, sauna owners will not notice a change in their energy bills and will spend less than $1/hour to run their sauna.

Q: Can you use an outdoor sauna in the winter?

Winter is a great time to get warm, purifying benefits of an outdoor sauna. You can use any outdoor sauna in the winter, although barrel saunas and insulated saunas will have the highest performance in cold temperatures.

Q: How do I protect my outdoor sauna?

If you buy an outdoor sauna, it should be treated or designed to withstand the elements. Some saunas come with mildew- and UV-resistant coating, while others use naturally durable wood like cedar. If you do decide to treat the exterior, you can use wood stain with UV protection or a wood-penetrating oil to reduce the weathering of your outdoor sauna. 

For the interior, do not use any chemicals or household treatments. Maintenance is minimal, but you should clean your sauna regularly to get rid of sweat or buildup. If you’re purchasing a barrel sauna, use the cradle supports to keep it suspended off the ground, reducing its exposure to moisture.

Q: Are infrared saunas better than traditional?

Both infrared and traditional saunas have their benefits. 

Infrared saunas require lower operating temperatures because the heat penetrates your body directly rather than heating the air around you. It raises your core temperature much more effectively than a traditional sauna. Infrared saunas are great for people looking to maximize their health benefits without exposing themselves to very high temperatures or humidity.

Traditional saunas, on the other hand, use either dry heat or steam to warm the air in the sauna. They are more reminiscent of Finnish saunas and have a heating element, rocks, and water. Both dry and steam saunas can reach higher temperatures than infrared, so you can’t spend as long in the sauna as with an infrared. If you’re looking for shorter, yet intense steam or heat sessions, a traditional sauna is a better fit.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor saunas

The Aleko 4-person barrel sauna is a great introductory outdoor sauna for any backyard, as it comes with a high-quality heating system comparable to more premium models. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor saunas for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor TVs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-outdoor-tv/ Thu, 11 Mar 2021 13:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-outdoor-tv/
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

Entertain guests with fresh entertainment in the fresh air with a fresh new outdoor TV.

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
man in a hoodie sitting in an old armchair outside watching an outdoor tv
Jordan Koons via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall The Samsung Terrace TV Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV
SEE IT

This television is IP55 rated and features 4K QLED for excellent picture quality.
Best budget Sunbrite Veranda is the best 55-inch outdoor TV. SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade
SEE IT

Its picture quality is high despite its low price.
Best for partial sun Furrion Partial Sun Outdoor TV product image Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series Outdoor TV
SEE IT

A self-adjusting screen means more time watching TV and less time fiddling with settings.

An outdoor TV can change the entire vibe of your al fresco living space. Want to play whiffle ball while you watch Field of Dreams? No problem. Most standard TVs can’t withstand the elements, and not all outdoor TVs offer the same level of protection and versatility. Some work on covered patios and decks, while others can handle full exposure to rain and snow. Sunlight makes a difference, and most TVs will fall under one of three categories: shade, partial sun, and those that will offer great picture quality no matter what the conditions are. Other factors to consider when shopping for an outdoor TV are size, sound quality, and price. With so many options out there, choosing the right one can be a little confusing, but we’re here to help you find the best outdoor TV for all your viewing needs.

How we chose the best outdoor TVs

As pool lovers, grill geeks, and float fanatics, we’re excited about everything outdoorsy. We looked at critical reviews and consumer impressions, along with important features like weatherproofing and anti-glare technology, to narrow down the best outdoor TVs. We then took that list, culled through pages of specs and opinions from the most trusted sources, and selected the top six options we’re presenting to you.

The best outdoor TVs: Reviews & Recommendations

From enjoying America’s pastime in prime time to movie nights under the stars, the best outdoor TVs can handle it all. After plenty of research, here are our outdoor television picks. All you’ll need is some popcorn and a cooler full of drinks and you’ll be entertaining in no time.

Best overall: Samsung 55-inch Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV

Samsung 55 in. Class QLED The Terrace Outdoor TV

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An IP55 rating and 4K QLED ensure durability and excellent screen quality.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″, 65″ 75″
  • Resolution: 4K, 8K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Excellent screen quality
  • Intuitive

Cons

  • Decrease in quality at outer angles

With a 55-inch screen utilizing QLED technology, this Samsung TV is our pick for best outdoor TV overall. Equipped with smart TV technology, this TV lets you easily stream your favorite sports and movies without having to buy a separate device. Although its anti-glare technology and exceptional brightness levels mean that it works well on sunny days, you may notice a decrease in quality at the outer angles if you have very wide seating. Overall though, it’s no surprise that Oprah named The Terrace one of her favorite things in 2020.

Best with soundbar: Furrion FDUP55CSA 55″ Aurora Partial Sun Outdoor TV Bundle with 2.1-Channel Soundbar

SunBriteTV SE 43-Inch Weatherproof Outdoor Television Excellent Sound Quality

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This outdoor television combines excellent sound quality with clear audio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 55″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Included soundbar
  • Works in a wide temperature range
  • Daytime and nighttime viewing settings

Cons

  • Pricey

While picture is important for consuming quality content, audio also plays a similarly huge role. This 55-inch outdoor TV offers all the features you’d expect out of a high-end model, including 4K, HDR, and a display that’s rated against weather, temperatures, and even impacts. It also, however, comes with a relatively powerful 75W Bluetooth soundbar that mounts directly with the TV itself. It’s easy to connect and adds serious audio oomph that will really make a difference when you’re trying to watch the latest James Bond movie and birds won’t stop screaming in your yard. Even if you’re not going to use the TV, you can hook up your phone to the soundbar and use it as an outdoor speaker for playing music.

Best for shaded areas: SunBriteTV Weatherproof Outdoor 55-inch Veranda

SunBriteTV Weatherproof Outdoor 55-Inch Veranda

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A backlit 4K HDR screen and an aluminum case make it a welcome addition to your covered patio.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: No

Pros

  • Durable
  • Multiple sizes
  • Built-in speakers

Cons

  • Is not a smart TV

This model from SunBriteTV is durable enough to live in a shaded area like a covered porch but won’t get damaged by wind, rain, dust, and stray insects. The 55-inch screen is up to 50-percent brighter than your typical indoor TV and comes with excellent built-in speakers. Unlike some of its more expensive rivals, this outdoor screen isn’t a smart TV, but it’s easy to connect multiple media sources to it through its three HDMI ports and single USB port.

Best for partial sun: Furrion Aurora Partial Sun Series 43-inch 4K UHD LED Outdoor TV

Furrion Partial Sun Outdoor TV product image

Furrion

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A self-adjusting screen means less time fiddling with settings and more time enjoying the sun.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 50″, 55″, 65″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Built-in fans
  • Self-adjusting screen
  • Waterproof remote
  • Streaming ready

Cons

  • Not the loudest speakers

This Furrion HDR10 LED outdoor TV is a terrific choice if you’re watching in an area that gets partial sun. In fact, the 400 nits screen will even adjust itself according to how much light it’s getting, so there’s no need to constantly fiddle with the brightness settings. It’s IP54 rated for when it does rain and has built-in cooling fans for when it’s hot. And if your weather gets a bit intense, you’ll be happy to know the screen comes equipped with enhanced protection against scratches and impacts thanks to XtremeShield IK08-rated tempered glass.

Best budget: SunBriteTV 43-inch Outdoor Television for Shade

SunBriteTV 43-Inch Outdoor Television for Shade

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This television is hard on the elements but easy on your wallet.

Specs

  • Sizes: 43″, 55″, 65″, 75″
  • Resolution: 4K
  • Anti-glare: Yes

Pros

  • Weatherproof media bay included
  • Powder-coated rust-proof aluminum exterior
  • Easy cable hookups

Cons

  • Sound doesn’t travel as far compared to others

The smallest and least expensive option in the SunBriteTV Veranda line, this unit is designed to be enjoyed in the shade but can withstand rain, snow, dust, insects, and whatever else Mother Nature decides to throw at it. The Ultra 4K HDR LED screen delivers a crisp picture that’s 50-percent brighter than a standard TV and is perfect for patios, screened-in porches, and covered decks. This SunBrite TV comes with a large weatherproof media bay so whatever you plug into it will be protected as well.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor TVs

Before you bust out the snacks at your next shindig, there are a couple of things you’ll need to think about when choosing the best outdoor TV for your space. For example, if you plan on watching your new set under your porch, you probably won’t need a model that offers the same level of waterproofing and anti-glare technology as a full sun option.

Placement

Sun exposure is a major consideration when choosing an outdoor TV. Partial sun models might have some glare, and some will only deliver a great picture if they’re in the shade.

However, the picture might not be the only thing that suffers if you aren’t choosy about your new TV. Models designed to be enjoyed under a covered porch may not be as resilient to extreme weather conditions as ones that are meant to live in a backyard. In some cases, it may be wise to invest in a cover, just as you would for your grill or ping pong table.

TV size

If you want to keep everyone from invading each other’s personal bubble, but don’t want your guests squinting to see the game, a huge outdoor TV will keep everyone entertained and safe at the same time. Plus, if you’re a movie buff, a large TV is terrific for simulating the fun of a drive-in without leaving your home. Just remember, the bigger the TV, the bigger the price tag.

Audio quality

When you’re shopping, make sure you pay attention to audio quality. Some models don’t come with built-in speakers, meaning you’ll have to connect them to something else unless you just plan on watching old, silent movies. Other models come with speakers but deliver less quality.

One way to make sure that you don’t end up straining your ears is to find an outdoor TV that comes equipped with a soundbar. A soundbar (also known as a media bar), is a speaker that is wider than it is tall and delivers superior audio quality when mounted above or below the TV. In a pinch, you could also pair waterproof Bluetooth party speakers with your TV, and then be ready when the party migrates to the pool.

Amount of shade and sun

If you plan on enjoying your TV on a screened-in porch or in a covered gazebo, there may not be a reason to shell out extra money on the latest anti-glare technology. The best outdoor TV is suited for where you’re watching it—there are great options that work in the shade while still offering protection from temperature shifts, rain, insects, and dust.

If you have a covered porch that receives some amount of light but isn’t directly exposed to the sun, consider a partial shade TV. These models will have brighter screens compared to shade-friendly TVs and will offer more protection against glare.

Price

Although outdoor TVs have come down in price considerably over the past couple of years, they’re still relatively expensive compared to standard models. The cheapest outdoor designs are not designed to truly live outside. In fact, some won’t work at all if they aren’t in the shade because the glare from the sun will make it impossible to see what’s on the screen.

If you’re just looking for a TV to watch on your covered deck or screened-in porch, look for options that are durable enough to be (partially) exposed to the elements. And expect to pay between $1,500 and $5,500, depending on brand, size, and features.

FAQs

Q: What is the best outdoor television?

The best outdoor television depends on where you’re going to watch it. The most important thing to consider is how much sun the television will be exposed to because glare can be a major issue if the TV is designed to only work in the shade.

Q: What is the best outdoor TV for a large viewing party?

The best outdoor TV for a viewing party depends on where and how many people are watching it. The most important consideration is sunlight, but if you’re trying to keep your friends and family socially distant, then you’ll need to consider the size of the screen. Another thing to keep in mind is what angle people will be watching it from, as some outdoor models lose quality if they’re not watched head-on.

Q: Do I need an outdoor TV enclosure?

Outdoor TV enclosures are usually designed to keep an indoor model safe when it’s used outside. Most outdoor TVs are built to be weatherproof and can withstand extreme temperatures. That being said, investing in a cover for your TV is still a good idea.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor TVs

Enjoying your television in the great outdoors can be a wonderful change of pace, especially after a year of being cooped up inside. The most important thing to consider when shopping for the best outdoor TV is where you’re going to watch it because different models can handle different conditions. A TV built for shade is not recommended for sun exposure. Likewise, one that is meant to be watched in the sun will probably be wasted sitting under a covered porch.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

More TV roundups to help you find the perfect set

The post The best outdoor TVs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-electric-bikes/ Thu, 31 Mar 2022 15:32:16 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=401436
Best Electric Bikes
Stan Horaczek

Power up your bike ride!

The post The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Electric Bikes
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Ride1UP Electric Bicycle Ride1Up Rift
SEE IT

The Ride1Up Rift is an outstanding electric bicycle bike whether you’re headed to work or joyriding around town.
Fastest Best Electric Bikes Priority Current
SEE IT

The Priority Current gets up to max speed quickly and maintains that speed once it gets there.
Best budget Ancheer Blue Spark Ancheer Blue Spark
SEE IT

Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

While electric bikes have existed in some form or another for more than a century, the modern version was properly introduced in the 1990s—to little fanfare. At the time, they were considered something of a novelty and failed to generate much interest. That changed in the 2000s, when ebikes took off in China. In the last 10 years, the rest of us have come around: There are countless ebikes now, which come in configurations to suit every rider’s needs. But with so many to choose from, how do you pick the one that will put you out in front of the pack? The best electric bikes deliver power (duh), comfort, style, and smart features, whether you’re riding for sport, for work, or simply as a way to get around.

How we chose the best electric bikes

As a lifelong outdoor and fitness enthusiast, bicycling has always been a part of my recreational repertoire. From daily commuting to work via road bike to mountain biking through the rurals of my native state of Washington, I’ve spent more than my fair share of time perched upon the pedals. When it came to electric bikes in particular, I took the testing very seriously—by which I mean I had a lot of fun riding around! At this point, I’ve ridden ebikes from an expansive range of brands—both renowned and up-and-coming—have discussed the pros and cons of different options with industry experts, and have even built several of them piece by piece straight out of the box.

I’ve written about outdoor and fitness gear, including electric bikes, for publications like Popular Mechanics, Runner’s World, the Manual, Thrillist, the Daily Beast, and the Los Angeles Times. All that testing has made me an expert at recognizing genuine quality over hype. In categories where my judgment was a tie, I looked to impressions from real-world owners to verify which ebikes deliver a truly electrifying experience.

The best electric bikes: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selections for the best electric bikes span a spectrum of budgets, from several hundred dollars to several thousand. We’ve included ebikes from a variety of categories that include a fairly wide range of features, so while which is right for you is determined largely by your specific needs, we think the options below cover the bases for most new and veteran riders.

Best overall: Ride1Up Rift

Ride1UP Rift

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Ride1Up’s Rift is easy to assemble and feels smooth to ride.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 20 Ah
  • Range: 45-60 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2-3

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Solid frame and overall construction
  • Comfortable to ride
  • Cost

Cons

  • Weight

After a few rides, I began to see Ride1Up’s Rift as wish fulfillment for anyone curious about electric bicycles. The Rift was almost fully assembled when it arrived, which is very helpful if you’ve never put together an electric bicycle. We recommend following Ride1Up’s video instructions for a step-by-step guide on putting it together. It’s possible to assemble this bicycle by yourself, but it’s far easier for two people since one can keep the Rift steady, or lift up its frame while the other attaches its front wheel. The one accessory you’ll need when assembling any eBike—beyond the correct tools—is an air compressor to fill its tires.

Once the bicycle was set up and a helmet was firmly strapped to my head, it was time to take the Rift for a ride on the suburban streets of Long Island. The area I rode in was paved but hilly, giving me the chance to test this electric bicycle’s motor. I started by riding around without any “pedal assistance” to get a feel for how the Rift handled. It’s a heavy electric bicycle, but after a couple of minutes, I had a good handle on how to take wide and sharper turns or how its fat tires would handle bumps in the road, hoses, or smaller potholes.

None of these smaller obstacles posed a problem, thanks to the Rift’s fat tires, though we wouldn’t recommend going over huge bumps just for fun. Ride1UP recommends checking the bicycle’s brakes several times before taking it for a ride to make sure they’re fully operational, and these small test rides gave me the opportunity to do so—though I also checked them before getting on the Rift for the first time.

All of the Rift’s pedal assistance features are accessible via a 2.2-inch color screen mounted on the left handlebar. It’s easy to check your trip time, power consumption, and pedal assistance level (between one and five) at a glance. You shouldn’t be spending a lot of time looking at the screen while riding, so we appreciate how cleanly this information is arranged. As its name suggests, pedal assistance will only kick in when you’re pedaling. The electric bicycle’s motor will kick on after a few seconds, which gives you time to adjust to the increase in speed. Settings one and two feel like a nice little push while you’re going up hills—enough of a boost to make them easier to climb while still requiring effort.

Cranking the Rift’s pedal assistance up to four or five will turn pedaling into a performative act. We could get up steep hills easily, but always felt completely in control of the bicycle. Yes, the Rift can up to 28 miles per hour with pedal assistance cranked up to five, but we never felt like we were going too quickly. If you’ve never used an electric bicycle before, we recommend sticking to the lower power levels to start and working your way up.

Overall, the Ride1UP Rift is a stupendously smooth ride whether you’re upgrading from a different electric bicycle or have always ridden an analog bike. It strikes the right balance between easy assembly, ease of use, comfort, and overall design.

Best moped-style: Ride1Up Revv 1

Ride1up Revv 1 bike ridden next to a running dog

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 15 Ah
  • Range: 30-60 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2-3, off-road mode

Pros

  • Available in full suspension or hardtail configurations
  • Multi-class speed system for use on and off roads
  • Very comfortable suspension and seat deliver a smooth ride

Cons

  • Relatively heavy
  • Non-adjustable seat

The Ride1Up Revv 1 is one of the most durable moped-style electric bikes we’ve tested. It offers switchable speed classes and multiple suspension options for a customizable and streamlined riding experience. The bike comes equipped with 20″ x 4″ all-terrain tires, a 750-watt motor, and a 52-volt (15 Ah) battery that offers a range of up to 60 miles on a single charge. While the Revv 1 ships ready-to-go in Class 2 mode, users can unlock a top speed of 28 miles per hour by switching into Class 3 mode using the bike’s control buttons and LCD display. For legal use on private roads, an additional off-road mode is also available to bring the bike’s top speed above 28 miles per hour. The Revv 1 sports a vaguely motorcycle-like design from its frame to its accessories. Weighing in at 93 pounds when fully assembled, it also feels like a real motorized vehicle more than a traditional bike. While it’s possible to assemble this bike on your own, we’d recommend enlisting another set of hands or even a bike shop to be safe.

The Revv 1 offers one of the most comfortable rides in the electric bike market thanks to its pillowy suspension, rugged tires, and extra large seat. We easily cruised along both pavement and fire roads without issue. Riders who normally stick to slower speeds and off-road riding may prefer the more responsive feel of the hardtail configuration. Still, the full-suspension configuration is ideal for maximum flexibility whether you’re commuting or hitting the trails. We do wish the Revv 1 offered some measure of seat height adjustment for users with longer legs; however, overall, the bike’s 32.5-inch seat height should feel comfortable enough for the majority of riders.

Best fat tire: Juiced RipCurrent S

Juiced Ripcurrent S Best Electric Bikes

Juiced Bikes

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: TheJuiced RipCurrent S is powerful, comfortable, and stylish.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 52V 19.2 Ah
  • Range: 40-120 miles
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 3

Pros

  • Better than average range
  • Super comfortable seating and handlebars
  • Awesome throttle
  • Rack, fenders, and powerful headlight included

Cons

  • Very heavy

Before you even start riding, the Juiced RipCurrent S delivers a favorable impression. It looks amazing, boasting an aesthetic that fuses classic road-bike elements with a modern tech edge. The seat is highly comfortable, the handlebars ergonomic, and the overall build quality is immediately evident.

Once you’ve started down the road, you’ll quickly realize why the RipCurrent S excels at the head of the pack. Its thumb-controlled throttle is smooth and powerful, capable of propelling you up to 28 MPH with minimal pedaling exertion. The 9-speed cassette gears shift crisply, and as you’re charging ahead, you’ll enjoy a supremely smooth ride.

All of that is great, but perhaps most important is the RipCurrent S’s outstanding electrical performance. With a range that spans 40 to 120 miles depending on how hard you push it, I tested the RipCurrent while riding alongside several other ebikes and this one accelerated faster than most and outlasted them all.

What’s more, with its sturdy, integrated carrying rack, an uber-bright headlight, and fenders, bell, and tail light included, the RipCurrent S has pretty much all the features any typical rider would need.

All in all, the Juiced RipCurrent S is a truly superior ebike. It’s ideal for daily commutes, and thanks to its front air suspension and fat tires, it’s even fairly off-road capable.

Best cargo: RadPower RadWagon 4

RadPower RadWagon 4 best electric bikes

RadPower

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: RadPower’s ebikes are all solid, but their RadWagon 4 is an unparalleled cargo hauler.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 14Ah
  • Range: 25-50
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2

Pros

  • Massive cargo carrier
  • Twist-grip, motorcycle-style throttle
  • Surprisingly good acceleration
  • Highly adjustable seating and handlebars

Cons

  • All that cargo capacity does reduce the range

Generally speaking, RadPower’s electric bikes all offer the utmost in durability, comfort, adjustability, and customization options. Our favorite design, the RadWagon 4, takes things a step further by tacking on a massive cargo carrier and powerful motor. I’ve seen people carry everything from a week’s worth of groceries to musical gear to multiple child safety seats on this thing.

At the same time, the RadWagon delivers an all-around comfortable, downright fun riding experience. Its seating and handlebars are comfortable and highly adjustable to suit your preferences, and it’s got a slew of slick customization options. I’m particularly enamored by their front-end basket and the twist-grip throttle, which provides ample acceleration.

As with other cargo bikes, the extra power needed to carry its cargo translates to a shorter range than other models, but its battery life is still very solid.

Best off-road: QuietKat Jeep

Best Electric Bikes

QuietKat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The QuietKat Jeep delivers true go-anywhere capability.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 14.5Ah
  • Range: Up to 58 miles
  • Motor: Mid-drive
  • Class: Configurable as both 1 and 2

Pros

  • Superior off-road ability
  • Outstanding suspension
  • Removable thumb throttle
  • Ultra-durable

Cons

  • Somewhat limited range

It should come as no surprise that one of the most capable (if not the most capable) off-roading ebike was inspired and cosigned by the Jeep brand, inspired by their 4×4 vehicle. With its high-grip fat tires, advanced torque sensor motor system, powerful brakes, outstanding suspension, and peak power output of 1,500 watts, the QuietKat Jeep is genuinely capable of going just about anywhere. That includes everything from hardpacked trails to soft sand and even snow.

The QuietKat Jeep is all about performance and capability. The company’s four-bar link, Fire-Link suspension system optimizes ground contact, the motor is designed to provide bursts of power and torque when pushed to overcome obstacles, and the whole thing is designed to carry plenty of weight—both human and cargo.

Speaking of cargo, one of the coolest and most unique things offered by the Jeep is its various cargo kits. The Angler’s Kit includes a gear trailer, premium suspension seat post, and Gore cargo cooler. The Overland Kit boasts a Tannus Armour Tire Liner, portable ebike solar charging system, and a bike rack tailored to fat-tire bikes. And the Ultimate Hunter Kit fuses the town, offering the tire liner, premium suspension seat post, fat tire bike rack, and a cargo trailer.

Best for speed: Priority Current

Best Electric Bikes

Priority Bicycles

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Priority Current seems sparse at a glance, but the more you put in, the more it puts out.

Specs

  • Battery Capacity: 48V 10.4 Ah
  • Range: 20-50 miles (in Class 1 setting)
  • Motor: Mid-drive
  • Class: 1 or 3

Pros

  • Great looks
  • Class 3 capability
  • Integrated USB charger for devices
  • Enviolo CVT shifter option

Cons

  • Limited range
  • LCD screen looks big but does little
  • No throttle

I’ll start out by saying that the use of the word “fastest” can be a little misleading with electric bikes, as the fastest any of them can go under motor power—legally—is 28 MPH. The Priority Current earns the distinction for getting up to max speed very quickly and maintaining that speed once it gets there. While the Current has no throttle, its pedal assistance is undeniably powerful. The more you put into pedaling it, the more it will put out.

The Current comes in Class 1 out of the box, but you can easily change the settings and upgrade to Class 3 via an onboard digital display. When choosing your Current, you can go with either a classic Shimano 5-gear shifter or pay a bit more for the Enviolo CVT—a super-smooth transmission system that is in gear no matter how you shift it and can be easily adjusted to suit your terrain via a little gauge indicating flatness vs. hilliness. It also has a super-durable belt drive and an integrated USB outlet for charging devices on the go.

The Current doesn’t have a top-tier range, which may be an issue for long-distance riders. Without Priority’s battery extender, it realistically tops out at around 30 miles. But the Current shines in regards to the overall design, offering an attractive, classically minimalist vibe, and a durable build quality that can go a long way with little to no maintenance.

Best budget: Ancheer Blue Spark

Ancheer Blue Spark

Ancheer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Offering all the basic ebike elements at a lower cost, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great budget ebike.

Specs

  • Battery capacity: 48V 10Ah
  • Range: Up to 38 miles (in pedal-assist mode)
  • Motor: Hub
  • Class: 2

Pros

  • Solid motor power
  • Throttle-capable
  • Smooth transmission

Cons

  • Limited range
  • Slower charging time

If you’re looking for a solid electric bike that delivers all the standard features without paying thousands of dollars, the Ancheer Blue Spark is a great pick. While there are technically ebikes out there for half its just-shy-of-$1,000 price tag, they simply don’t offer enough features to make you feel like you’re getting a quality battery-assisted ride. The Blue Spark gives you the true electric bike experience, and it does so for $1,000 or $2,000 less than similarly equipped models.

Generally speaking, the Blue Spark offers the performance you need for daily commuting or casual off-roading. Whether in pedal-assist or throttling mode, it will provide plenty of speed and adequate hill-climbing ability, and its riding experience is smooth. 

The lower price comes with caveats, as it always does: The Blue Spark suffers from a rather limited range, but its 20-38 miles capability is pretty typical for its price. And while it certainly is a fine bike for taking over light off-road trails, just be aware that it isn’t meant for anything too extreme.

Blue Spark owners who have ridden it over the long run report that it’s very durable, though, requiring less maintenance than you would expect considering its lower cost. When all is said and done, this is a great bike if you’re looking for a quality ebike but can’t fork over several grand.

Things to consider before choosing from the best electric bikes

With electric bikes available in a seemingly endless variety and wide range of price points, it can be difficult to know where to begin. Many people assume that spending more money guarantees that you get a better product: While there is an element of truth there, I’ve found that the best ebikes can excel in a few key ways without rocketing into the upper stratosphere of bike prices. Here are a few things to consider if you’re looking to ride one of the best electric bikes:

What is its riding range?

Few things make an electric bike less fun and functional than finding yourself out of juice with a long ride still ahead of you. Ebikes boast a lot of tech, which makes them heavy … and makes them a genuine pain in the keister to pedal sans power. Suddenly peddling your slick, cool tech-infused bike feels more akin to pushing an aircraft carrier through the mud.

To avoid this, get an ebike with a large battery. Look for electric bikes that boast the highest watt-hour (Wh) capacity. Ebikes are rated in volts and amp-hours, so to determine battery life in watt-hours you should be multiplying its volts and amps specs. Our best overall pick, for example, has a 52-volt 19.2 amp-hour battery which results in nearly 1,000 Wh. Generally speaking, I’ve found that most bikes offer between 500-800 watt-hours, so anything near the high end of that range is great.

To determine the range from here, you would theoretically just divide the total watt-hours by the average miles per hour. So let’s say you’re averaging 20 MPH on that 1000 Wh bike; then you’d have a range of 50 miles. If you’re looking to go on a really long ride, some companies support external battery packs that can recharge their bikes on the go.

The truth, however, is a bit more complicated. The harder your bike’s motor works—due to bike weight, load weight, speed, hilly terrain, etc.—the more power it uses. The reverse is also true. Lighter weight, flatter terrain, more laidback speed equals less power usage. So essentially, the real-world range is determined by the rider, what they’re doing, and where they’re going.

What class of electric bike do you need?

In the United States, electric bikes are divided into three classes depending on the degree of motor assistance they provide to augment your pedaling.

Class 1 electric bikes are solely pedal assist: They provide oomph to your pedaling up to 20 miles per hour. These are the most basic ebikes and they can be used everywhere traditional bikes can go.

Class 2 electric bikes feature a throttle that, at the flick of a switch, can propel you up to 20 miles per hour on their own and maintain that speed even if you aren’t pedaling. Depending on where you live, Class 2 ebikes may not be allowed on certain bike lanes and trails. The European Union, for example, has a total ban on throttled bikes.

Class 3 electric bikes usually drop the throttle in favor of pedal assist and have stronger motors capable of reaching 28 miles per hour. Regulations for Class 3 bikes vary from place to place, but they tend to be allowed on roads and bike lanes but may be restricted from mountain bike trails and multi-use paths.

Speaking broadly, commuters and professionals tend to gravitate toward Class 2 bikes, which require the least effort, or Class 3 bikes, which are faster and tend to be better equipped for carrying heavy loads.

Type of motor

Electric bikes almost always feature one of two motor types: mid-drive or hub-drive.

Mid-drive motors are positioned on the bottom bracket and their primary benefit involves the fact that they have a greater gear range, making them easier and more efficient to pedal uphill. The downside, however, is that they’re harder on the bike and can exact a heavy maintenance toll. 

Hub-drive motors, on the other hand, are usually attached to the rear hub and require little-to-no maintenance. That said, hub-drive motors do usually make it a bit more challenging to change a flat tire. 

To make a broad generalization, hub-drive motors make for better commuter bikes, while mid-drive motors are geared more toward performance riding on trails or up hills. The latter tends to be somewhat more energy-efficient, but you won’t necessarily feel the difference unless you’re riding up a lot of hills. 

Durability and build quality

It can be hard to determine unless you buy a bike and spend many years with it, but you want to make sure you aren’t buying a bike that’s going to need repairs all the time. When trying out different bikes, pay attention to whether the parts all feel firmly in place, or if some of them seem brittle or poorly fitted in any way. Check that the motor and chain system doesn’t rattle to any undue degree. Lastly, get on the bike and make sure that the design feels comfortable.

Lights, carriers, and other extras

One final thing to look for in an electric bike involves safety, convenience, and other add-on features. Many ebikes include high-quality lighting systems, integrated locks, and other safety/protective elements. Some, like the VanMoof S3, even have tracking and remote locking systems, alarms, and other tech-enabled security. 

Several brands also boast the option to trick out your ride with super-sleek integrated rear cargo carriers, front-end baskets, water bottle holders, bells, and other fun/functional accessories. Just as with a traditional bike, you can always tack on third-party products, but the best companies offer some really cool options to build out your bike from the get-go. How much do electric bicycles cost?

FAQs

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric bikes?

You might be wondering if traditional bikes have advantages over electric bikes, and the answer is yes.

Electric bikes are more expensive, heavier, and costly to maintain. Riding range can be limited, and all that extra weight can be a real pain if you run out of juice. While most of those on this list can be completely charged within 3-5 hours, some models can take a lot longer.

Q: Are electric bikes worth the money?

Now that we’ve looked at a few disadvantages, you might wonder whether ebikes are worth the money. That really depends on how you expect to use them.

For commuting to work every day, an electric bike means considerably less exertion than a traditional bike, and they require zero gas versus a vehicle. If you plan on using an ebike off-road, they can transform your experience, allowing you to enjoy the ride rather than suffer under the effort.

And they’re a lot of fun, so even if you are a more casual cyclist, they can add a lot of enjoyment to the experience. Whether or not that is worth the price is up to you.

Q: How long will electric bikes last?

An electric bike’s lifespan depends entirely on factors like a particular brand’s build quality, how often and hard you expect to use it, and how well you maintain it. That being said, many experts say that an electric bike should last around 10 years, with individual elements lasting:

Battery: 3-5 years before charge capacity begins to decline.
Motor: Approximately 10,000 miles, depending on brand and maintenance.
Brakes: 3,000-6,000 miles, depending on riding style and road conditions.
Chain: 2,000-3,000 miles, depending on brand.
Tires: 1,000-3,000 miles, depending on road conditions.

Simply put, if you take care of your bike and replace components as necessary, you can expect to get a lot of life out of it.

Q: How much do electric bicycles cost?

This depends on their range, size, battery capacity, and additional features. Most electric bicycles will cost between $1,500 and $3,000, although you can get one that costs a lot less or a lot more.

Final thoughts on the best electric bikes

Picking the right electric bike comes down to how you expect to use it. I spent an entire day testing out different ebikes with my brother and nephew, and while we all agreed on which was the best, we preferred different models based on our individual riding styles.

Knowing that, my final advice is to test out a variety of ebikes before you buy one. Reading descriptions online can be useful, but digital hype versus on-road reality can make a big difference. I had somewhat low expectations for the Juiced RipCurrent S, for example, because it was a lesser-known brand getting comparatively less attention online. Then, when we actually tried it out, my testing trio unanimously agreed that it was the best.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric bikes of 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best leaf vacuums of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-leaf-vacuum/ Tue, 25 Jan 2022 15:10:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=279082
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

Keeping your property clean doesn’t have to be time-consuming or difficult with these handy tools.

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best leaf vacuums on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall worx electric leaf mulcher and bag WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum
SEE IT

This all-in-one yard tool can vacuum, leaf blow, and mulch, and is less than nine pounds for easy maneuvering and lifting.
Best cordless greenworks leaf blower vacuum with accessories Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum
SEE IT

This pick offers up to 21 minutes of cordless leaf cleanup time and six speed selections for a customized user experience.
Best for pools Poolmaster Big Sucker Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum
SEE IT

Keep your outdoor swimming space sparkling clean with this waterproof-equipped leaf vacuum.

When the weather is warm, you won’t think you need a leaf vacuum. There’s just something sublime about long summer evenings, lying in the green grass under a lush canopy, listening to bugs chirp, leaf vacuum safe and sound in the shed. That glory, however, is short-lived. Come fall, you’ll be screaming, leaf me alone, as nature’s debris accumulates and deteriorates over flowerbeds, streets, and neighbors’ yards if left unchecked. Grab that dependable leaf vacuum, however, and you can mitigate an unsightly mess and provide easy yard clean-up. Combining the best features of traditional leaf blowers with a convenient bag system, the best leaf vacuums on the market will save you a ton of effort on your next yard waste removal job and you’ll enjoy a tidy lawn again in no time.

How we chose the best leaf vacuums

We’ve previously compiled a list of the best leaf blowers and best leaf mulchers. We took our knowledge and research from those subjects and applied them here. We also looked at reviews, recommendations, conducted user testing, and performed heavy research to narrow down our list of the best leaf vacuums. After all, you want something that sucks—in a good way.

The best leaf vacuums: Reviews & Recommendations

When shopping for a yard vacuum, consider the size of the area you’ll be cleaning, as well as the volume of leaves that accumulate annually, to help determine the level of power and capacity required. Many electric leaf blower vacuums and cordless electric models are suited to medium-duty jobs, while a commercial model may be better for sustained professional or high-volume use in larger yards. From leaves in the driveway to debris in the pool, the best leaf vacuums can handle every scenario.

Best overall: WORX WG509 TRIVAC 12 Amp 3-In-1 Electric Blower/Mulcher/Vacuum

orange and black worx leaf blower/vacuum

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An ergonomic design, different modes, and swappable bags allow for easy leaf disposal.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 20 x 15 x 9 inches
  • Weight: 8.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 75-210 mph
  • Power source: Electric, corded

Pros

  • Ergonomic
  • Easy to switch between modes
  • Expandable capacity

Cons

  • Additional bags sold separately
  • Not best for heavy jobs

This electric corded leaf blower vacuum is capable of collecting and distributing leaves and other debris with an airspeed of 75 to 210 miles per hour. This WORX leaf vacuum quickly changes modes at the flip of a switch, and the integrated dual-stage metal impeller allows for an 18-to-1 reduction in leaf volume, making this a fantastic all-around choice for light- to medium-duty jobs. Its ergonomic design weighs in at 8.6 pounds, and it comes standard with a small bag, as well as the option to expand capacity with vacuum tubes and additional bags (sold separately).

Best cordless: Greenworks 40V 185 MPH Variable Speed Cordless Leaf Blower/Vacuum

greenworks leaf blower vacuum with accessories

Greenworks

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Collecting leaves isn’t a struggle, thanks to this leaf vacuum’s easy-to-control design and comfortable grip.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 32.5 x 8.5 x 11 inches
  • Weight: 5.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 185 mph
  • Power source: Rechargeable battery

Pros

  • Easy to control
  • Interchangeable battery
  • Comfortable to use

Cons

  • Two-hour run time might not be long enough to clean larger yards

This 40V cordless leaf vacuum combines powerful blower action and high-performance mulching in an easy-to-control design. A six-speed dial with top airspeed of 185 miles per hour offers plenty of flexibility, and the cushioned over-mold grip brings users ample comfort during extended use. It’s designed with a durable brushless motor and includes a 4Ah battery with a charge time of 120 minutes.

Best gas-powered: Husqvarna 2-Cycle Gas Handheld Leaf Blower/Vacuum

orange and black Husqvarna leaf blower vacuum

Husqvarna

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: 170 mph blowing speeds and a 16:1 mulching ratio means you can decimate your backyard leaves.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 38.5 x 9 x 14 inches
  • Weight: 9.6 lbs.
  • Air speed: 170 mph
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Creates fine mulch
  • Easy to start
  • Cruise control

Cons

  • On the heavy side

The combo Husqvarna 2-cycle gas leaf blower/vacuum is incredibly powerful, with blowing speeds of up to 170 miles per hour. When in vacuum mode, it also mulches leaves at a 16:1 mulching ratio, so you can suck up more without worrying about overfilling the bag too fast. Plus, it’s built with smart start technology to start the leaf vacuum with minimal effort. For easier handling, set the variable speed throttle with cruise control.

Best for pools: Poolmaster 28316 Swimming Pool Leaf Vacuum

black pool vacuum

Poolmaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Say goodbye to those pesky post-storm leaves with this easy-to-use manual pool vacuum.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.58 x 3.29 x 3.29 inches
  • Weight: 1.82 lbs.
  • Air speed: N/A
  • Power source: Garden hose

Pros

  • Durable
  • Easy to maneuver
  • Won’t scratch your pool

Cons

  • Bag might need changed frequently if dealing with lots of leaves

This Poolmaster swimming pool leaf vacuum is crafted from durable ABS plastic and features eight high-pressure jets that use a standard garden hose water supply to trap debris within a secure mesh bag. It’s easy to maneuver thanks to its four multidirectional swiveling wheels on the underside and has replaceable brushes along its perimeter for dislodging leaves. Because it’s finished with a rubber bumper, you’ll never have to worry about accidentally scratching your pool. If you’d like to find more pool vacuums, check out our pool vacuums round-up.

What to consider when buying the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuum available generally provides the standard features of a leaf blower while offering the ability to invert airflow to collect leaves in an attached bag for storage and removal. This dual functionality can be helpful when performing yard maintenance, as blowers require leaves and debris to be collected in piles before accumulation or disposal. And it comes in a familiar, ergonomic form for easy maneuvering without excessive bulk. Many blower/vacuum combos provide the added benefit of an integrated impeller to trap and chop debris into smaller, more manageable sizes. Not only does this feature save bag space and allow for more leaves to be vacuumed, it also prepares organic material to be redistributed and recycled as mulch and compost without requiring you to manually collect and break down debris. This feature is highly beneficial for anyone with a home garden or other plants requiring nutrients.

The best leaf blower vacuum is a cost-effective, flexible yard waste removal tool

The best leaf vacuum is a versatile lawn tool, effectively an all-in-one solution for managing leaves and debris, while saving storage space and task time. For example, combination blower-mulcher leaf vacuums use an air duct where a bag or hose can be attached for expeditious processing and collection of leaves (bags are the more portable option, but a hose to a bag or bucket is better suited to high-volume collection). The best blower/vacuum requires much less effort than a traditional rake or standard blower to complete the same amount of work. This makes collecting wet leaves after heavy rainfall—typically laborious and rage-inducing—a walk in the park.

When shopping for a blower/vacuum for yard work, look for a design that offers compatibility with both bags and hoses to assure the best results. This user-customizable feature maximizes the situations in which the blower-and-vacuum combo is useful. A built-in mulcher is also a must regardless of whether you’ll be using leaves in your flower beds, etc., as it drastically cuts down on the volume of leaves and maximizes storage space.

The best cordless leaf vacuum takes the hangups out of yard cleanup

Cordless leaf vacuum designs are championed for most yard maintenance and leaf removal jobs thanks to their portable, lightweight designs. Battery power frees users from the encumberment of cables and bulky gas tanks, while still packing ample power for most medium-duty jobs. Lighter weights also translate to better maneuverability, which is key when you’ll be gathering leaves over and around landscaping, lawn ornaments, wraparound porches, gazebos, and other obstacles. Some cordless models can even be worn like a backpack.

One thing to keep in mind is that the added convenience of cordless models does come at a price premium compared to corded models, and cordless designs also require somewhat frequent recharging. Still, investing in a cordless model can prove to be worthwhile when factoring in the greater mobility and lack of entanglement hazard.

When shopping for the best cordless vacuum, battery life is a critical consideration that can make or break this tool’s usefulness. Variable speeds are also a key feature to look for, as they allow users to conserve battery and only use the amount of power required for the moment at hand.

Got a bigger yard? Go beyond standard with a gas-powered model

A gas-powered leaf vacuum will require more maintenance than an electric model, but it makes quick work of large, leafy lawns. Most gas-powered models on the market are actually leaf blowers with the ability to convert into vacuums by attaching a suctioning tube and large vac bag. They are typically powered by two-cycle gas engines, which should be filled with a pre-mixed combination of gas and oil. 

It’s important to keep in mind that gas-powered leaf vacuums are much noisier than their electric counterparts and that two-stroke engines emit hazardous levels of hydrocarbons. In fact, to reduce environmental damage (and noise complaints), some cities have an outright ban on gas-powered machines.

For leaf removal from water, a dedicated pool leaf vacuum works swimmingly

Pool leaf vacuums are their own class of product, but they perform the same debris removal duties of traditional models … just in water. The collection of wet, submerged leaves and organic debris comes with its own unique set of challenges, so it’s crucial to use equipment designed for this specific task when cleaning out your pool or pond.

The best pool leaf vacuums are designed to function using a standard garden hose and pool pole, creating vortexes of water around a central net to divert and capture leaves and other debris. When considering which pool model is best for your needs, go with a manually operated unit for the greatest degree of control and cost-effectiveness. Many designs include bumpers to protect the bottom and side surfaces of pool interiors from scratching as well, which can save money and prevent unsightly damage.

On a budget? For small, isolated jobs, a cheap leaf vacuum is great

Because these machines are specialized pieces of lawn equipment, it’s generally difficult to find a cheaper model that performs at an acceptable level for most yards. Portability and power along with capacity add to the costs of these units, so most budget models suffer a high drop in these areas and are simply not suited to the demands of most yard work. However, users may still encounter situations in which a less expensive model performs acceptably, such as in the cleaning of an enclosed porch or the removal of leaves from a deck or courtyard.

Be aware that the best model for less is usually corded designs, which cuts down on the bulk and weight of the unit while limiting mobility somewhat. Mulching options are also not found in budget units, so leaves will pile up quicker in the bag and require more frequent emptying. Still, a cheap vacuum may be all you need for small jobs and infrequent use.

FAQs

Q: How powerful does a leaf blower need to be?

Any standard leaf blower needs to be powerful enough to dislodge and move wet leaves and other heavy debris, so a model capable of winds between 80 and 250 miles per hour is usually a good place to start.

Q: Are leaf vacuums worth it?

Having a dedicated leaf vacuum is worth it because it’s a great way to make an easy, quick, and fun task out of the typically time-consuming process of raking. Models that transform leaves directly into mulch are doubly worth it.

Q: Should I get a leaf blower or vacuum?

Leaf blowers only take care of half of the problem and don’t actually aid in the collection, mulching, or disposal process, while a dedicated leaf vacuum provides all those perks. Leaf blowers are great for moving leaves from one place to another but go with a vacuum if you’re looking to dispose of the problem altogether.

Final thoughts on the best leaf vacuums

The best leaf vacuums on the market are unparalleled in transforming unsightly debris into a mass of usable mulch. A cordless model is more of an investment than a standard leaf vacuum but is maneuverable and tends to be lighter. If you’re looking for a long-term solution to large-scale yard clean-up, a commercial lawn vacuum might be more suited to your needs. And pool cleaner models are entirely different beasts but serve a very important function if your property has water features. So when trees shed their coat, shed your yard maintenance frustrations with the best leaf vacuum you can find. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf vacuums of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-outdoor-storage-box/ Thu, 29 Jul 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283635
A lineup of the best storage sheds on a white background
Amanda Reed

Looking to store gardening tools, cushions, trash bins, and lawn games? Declutter your deck with a storage shed.

The post The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best storage sheds on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Rectangular, brown outdoor storage box Suncast Resin Wicker Patio Outdoor Storage Container
SEE IT

This water-resistant poly resin pick has a capacity of up to 99 gallons to store and protect your goods from weather and water.
Best storage bench A black Keter Solana storage bench on a blue and white background Keter Solana 70 Gallon Storage Bench
SEE IT

Combine form with function in this 70 gallon storage bench box. You can seamlessly tuck away unsightly items, provide seating, and save valuable space.
Best storage shed A Rubbermaid outdoor storage shed on a blue and white background Rubbermaid Resin Weather Resistant Outdoor Storage Shed
SEE IT

This sturdy storage solution is equipped with double-walled construction, an impact-resistant floor, and weather-resistant materials so your stored items stay safe and dry year-round.

Outdoor storage boxes can be tremendously useful for a wide variety of purposes. It can be much more convenient to have a deck box within reach for outdoor items—think tablecloths, toys, sports equipment, small tools, outdoor extension cords, and pool products, to name a few—rather than having to lug them in and out of the house or shed each time you finish using them. In addition, a heavy-duty deck storage box can provide additional seating when you have guests in your backyard. Another great benefit to picking the best outdoor storage box is that they can be used to store patio furniture cushions when not in use, preserving upholstery life spans potentially by years and keeping them clean and dry in between uses. After all, you don’t want your guests to sit on cushions soiled by birds, rain, pollen, or other outdoor issues. The best outdoor storage box models are out there, but you must know what to look for. Luckily, you’ve got us and this guide.

How we chose the best outdoor storage boxes

We sorted through 50 of the top-rated outdoor storage boxes to select these top five. Between all the products, we compared prices, materials, capacity, brand, and reviews to find those that stood out from the pack. We also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and conducted heavy research to narrow down our choices.

The best outdoor storage boxes: Reviews & Recommendations

Our picks range from functional storage boxes that double as benches to storage tents that fit tight spaces, as no two storage needs are the same. These final picks are built to last through any inclement weather and keep your goods safe and secure all year long.

Best overall: Suncast Resin Wicker Patio Outdoor Storage Container

Rectangular, brown outdoor storage box

Suncast

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This large capacity pick can hold any variety of yard toys, patio cushions, or gardening tools—and will outlast inclement weather.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 50 x 25.2 x 25.2 inches
  • Capacity: 99 gallons

Pros

  • Durable to weather
  • Large capacity
  • Warp-resistant

Cons

  • Assembly can be challenging

This large deck storage box has a rounded top that’s less likely than others to warp in the heat (a common problem with outdoor storage boxes), so the cover stays put solidly and keeps contents dry. It has a hinged top and space for a lock (though the lock isn’t included) and measures 50 inches x 25.5 inches x 25.5 inches. The dark brown wicker design has many matching pieces, so you can also buy the brand’s outdoor garbage bin, dining chairs or benches, hose reel, or other variations of storage boxes if you want your decor to match.

Best bench: Keter Solana 70 Gallon Storage Bench

A black Keter Solana storage bench on a blue and white background

Keter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pick allows you to save space while providing seating—and is durable enough to sit outside all year long.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 23.4 x 54.6 32.8 inches
  • Capacity: 70 gallon

Pros

  • Bench included
  • Affordable price
  • Easy assembly

Cons

  • No lateral supports on the middle of the bench

This outdoor storage bench is no slouch: It holds 70 gallons, which can translate to barbeque tools, gardening hand tools, cushions, sports equipment, or many other items. It’s made of resin with a wood-grain appearance and comes in two color combinations. You can add a cushion to the outdoor storage bench seat to make it more comfortable, and there’s a place for a lock.

Best shed: Rubbermaid Resin Weather Resistant Outdoor Storage Shed

A Rubbermaid outdoor storage shed on a blue and white background

Rubbermaid

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re looking for a no-frills pick with great capacity, this shed-style option can store larger items year-round.

Specs

  • Material: Resin, plastic
  • Dimensions: 89.75 x 45 x 20.25 inches
  • Capacity: N/A

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Weather resistant
  • Double-walled construction

Cons

  • May warp over time

Snow shovels, garden shovels, rakes, hoes, weed trimmers, and similar tools are generally too big to fit into deck boxes—not to mention that they don’t store well piled up horizontally. At 7 feet by 7 feet, this type of outdoor storage shed is tall enough to hang them on hooks underneath the sandalwood/onyx roof so they don’t get damaged or rusty and are always easy to reach. You can also add shelving.

Best for bikes: The YardStash IV Outdoor Storage Shed Tent

Green outdoor storage box for bikes

YardStash

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While this pick might be built like a tent, its heavyweight fabric seals out water and weather, making it a great place to store bikes or gardening supplies even in winter conditions.

Specs

  • Material: Vinyl
  • Dimensions: 74 x 32 x 68 inches
  • Capacity: Two adult bikes

Pros

  • Easy to move
  • Affordable option
  • Space-saving

Cons

  • May require two people to set up

If you’re looking for outdoor bike storage you can set up, take down, and move around easily, this heavy-duty vinyl tent may be your thing: it’s ready without tools in 10 minutes and is made to hold two adult bikes with some room left over. It’s meant to be fully waterproof and pest-proof, and you can use this outdoor bike storage all four seasons (the roof is made to deflect snow and rain).

Best budget: Keter Marvel Plus Resin Outdoor Storage Box

Brown outdoor storage box

Keter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It is a great option for slimmer, lower storage.

Specs

  • Material: Resin
  • Dimensions: 17.4 x 45.9 x 22.2 inches
  • Capacity: 71 gallons

Pros

  • Affordable price
  • Sleek design
  • Easy assembly

Cons

  • Not as durable as other options

When you’re looking for a budget outdoor storage box, you’re not going to get some of the durability or special features of the higher-end ones: this one has no hydraulics or strap to help open and close the lid, and some reviewers describe it as more flimsy. But overall, it’s still a bargain for a large (71-gallon capacity) storage box that’s simple to assemble. Dark brown and plastic, it matches many other brands’ outdoor products and also provides limited seating.

What to consider when shopping for the best outdoor storage boxes

As great as an outdoor storage bin can be, it’s not always without problems. One common issue is in assembly: resin patio storage boxes often snap together in a certain way, and if you assemble the pieces incorrectly, it can be very difficult to separate them again without causing irreparable damage (this is also not generally covered under manufacturer warranties). If you have any doubts at all about any included assembly instructions, be sure you check the manufacturer’s website or YouTube for an instructional video or call the manufacturer for more specific advice. Trying to take apart pieces that have been snapped together can break connections or crack or weaken the plastic. Here are other things you should look out for when choosing an outdoor storage box:

Weather

Another concern is wind: If you don’t use some kind of lock or carabiner to keep a patio storage box closed, heavy wind can not only lift the top and expose the contents to the weather, but it may even rip the top off its hinges, which can also be an irreparable problem. Be sure to choose a storage box that you can close securely so it won’t fall apart in the first storm of the season. A lock is also a necessity if you’re storing any kind of valuable equipment, like bikes or snowblowers, or you may become an easy target for thieves in the area.

Warping

Some patio storage boxes and storage sheds have problems with roof warping. If a roof warps upwards at the ends, it can leave gaps that aren’t just unsightly and leave the items inside unprotected from moisture and bugs. Even without a warped roof, though, most outdoor storage bins are not entirely bugproof. Most are made to be waterproof or at least water-resistant, but any sort of ventilation or gap between the lid and bottom, or under or between the doors, could be enough for a variety of critters from carpenter ants to spiders. If this is an issue, you might want to use a deterrent, such as boric acid or diatomaceous earth sprinkled around the outdoor storage box, or move the box to a spot that’s away from foliage and less likely to attract bugs.

Bins vs. sheds vs. benches

Outdoor storage bins are great not only for typical backyard items, but also for other items that you might store in the front or side of your house: trash bins, recycling bins, bicycles, a snowblower, large tools (such as shovels and rakes), holiday lawn decorations, scooters, and so on. 

There are specialized outdoor storage sheds sized just right for all kinds of purposes—ones that are wide and mid-height meant specifically as outdoor bike storage, and others that are tall and narrow for full-size tools. You can often attach tall storage units to the outside walls of your house.

While most well-made storage boxes like this aren’t inexpensive, they can make your life easier and protect your investments. Bike storage sheds and trash storage sheds are meant to be easy to wheel in and out of, so the front doors swing open rather than just the tops opening like deck storage boxes. You may also use a storage tent with vinyl sides rather than a plastic or wood outdoor storage container. There are also outdoor storage benches designed with seating in mind.

FAQs

Q: What’s the best way to store outdoor cushions?

Before storing your outdoor cushions for the winter, or between uses, ensure they’re clean and entirely dry. Depending on the material, you may need to simply wipe the cushions down with a rag and some dish soap, or you may be able to spray with vinegar and water or bleach solution to remove any mildew or stains. Never put cushions away while they’re damp, or they will develop mold and mildew. Once dry, you can put them in a waterproof deck storage box or outdoor storage shed. You may want to include mothballs or other pest repellents to prevent bugs from nesting inside the safe haven of your outdoor storage container and ruining your cushions. Moths, ants, stink bugs, and many other types of nuisance bugs love hiding out in cushions—and some can eat right through just about any kind of material.

Q: What is the largest deck box?

Keter’s XXL deck storage container is the largest deck box we’ve found: It holds up to 230 gallons, with dimensions of 32.7 inches x 33.8 inches x 57.8 inches. It has a lockable top and piston opening mechanism.

Q: Are Keter storage boxes waterproof?

Keter calls their outdoor storage boxes “water-resistant,” but users rarely report any problem with water coming through. You can also buy a cover for your outdoor storage box if you have any concerns about water.

Final thoughts on the best outdoor storage boxes

You’ll have to assess your storage needs to figure out the best outdoor storage box (or boxes) for your yard: measure any cushions to make sure you’re getting a big enough outdoor storage bin, and put together anything else you’re looking to store so you can get a better idea of the dimensions you’ll need. From there, it’s a matter of deciding what kind of look you like, how handy you are in putting things together, and what kind of budget you have. The best outdoor storage box should last you many years. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor storage boxes of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best wireless security cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-wireless-security-cameras/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570963
A lineup of the best wireless security cameras side-by-side
Amanda Reed

Today's wireless security cameras are easy-to-use, easy to install, and easy on your budget.

The post The best wireless security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best wireless security cameras side-by-side
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Ring Floodlight Cam Pro on a blue and white background Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro
SEE IT

Versatile and produces excellent video.
Best with 4K resolution A Lorex 4K wireless camera on a blue and white background Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera
SEE IT

This camera can detect people, vehicles, animals, and packages.
Best budget A WYZE camera on a plain background Wyze Cam v3
SEE IT

A cheap camera with a cheap cloud storage subscription.

Although security cameras have been around for more than 50 years, do-it-yourself wireless security cameras installed by consumers have only been available for a fraction of that time. Before that, most security cameras needed to be installed by professional technicians. However, a few factors have allowed wireless security cameras to evolve so that average consumers can install and use them: They’ve been designed to be easy to install, use, and understand; because of marketplace competition, DIY wireless security cameras are relatively inexpensive; and technology that interacts with wireless security cameras, like home wireless networks, as well as other technologies, are easier to use and works seamlessly with each other. The best wireless security cameras should fit the needs of almost every consumer and budget.

How we chose the best wireless security cameras

I’ve written about many types of different cameras, including wireless security cameras, for a number of publications over the years, including PCMag.com, Consumer Reports, The New York Times, Tom’s Guide, Gearbrain, and, of course, Popular Science. I’ve also written stories on wireless security systems, video doorbells, and other related security system devices. I brought my expertise in this area to help discover the best outdoor security cameras. I also looked at critical reviews and user recommendations and did a lot of research to narrow down our list to find the best models. 

To find the best security cameras, I carefully considered a number of factors, including video resolution, night vision capability, audio, ease of use, versatility, and smart home compatibility.

The best wireless security cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Today, you’ll find a very wide range of wireless security cameras and smart-home security systems, which are very easy to install and use. Many of them also include cutting-edge technologies, such as artificial intelligence for detecting people, pets, and objects. They’re available at a variety of price points—from budget models that don’t require a subscription for storing and accessing video that costs as little as $30 to feature-packed models that cost more than $400. One of our picks will allow you to give you peace of mind by protecting your home, both inside and out.

Best overall: Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro

A Ring Floodlight Cam Pro on a blue and white background

Ring

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 1080p 
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription) 
  • Size: 12.8 x 7.8 x 8.5 inches 

Pros

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 1080p-resolution video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes two bright adjustable LED spotlights
  • Comes with a remote-activated alarm 

Cons

  • A bit pricey
  • Lacks support for HomeKit and Google Assistant compatibility

Although it’s a bit pricey, there’s a lot to like about this Ring wireless security camera. For starters, like the company’s many doorbell cameras, it’s easy to use and set up. However, since it needs a wired connection, you may be a bit limited when mounting this model outside your home. It produces excellent quality video, assisted by HDR features to provide video footage with better contrast and detail. That can be helpful if the location you’re setting up to monitor is dimly lit during certain times of the day. Of course, that dim setting would also benefit from the two adjustable LED floodlights included on this Ring cam, rated at 3,000 degrees Kelvin and 2,000 Lumen.

There’s a variety of other useful features that also make it worth the price, like color night vision. But it also includes additional smart features, like 3D motion detection, a customizable system, and a bird’s eye view feature, which tracks a visitor (or intruder) on your property and provides you with a record of their path. It also has clear, two-way audio and a loud siren to scare away trespassers. However, in order to access videos and enable some features, you will need to subscribe to a Ring Protect plan, which starts at $3.99 a month.   

Best system: SimpliSafe 10 Piece Wireless Home Security System with Outdoor Camera 

The SimpliSafe 10 piece wireless home security system on a blue and white background

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Rechargeable battery 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa and Google Assistant 
  • Storage options: Cloud storage only (for both cameras)
  • Size: 4 x 4 x 8.3 inches

Pros

  • Lets you set up a whole security system right out of the box
  • Outside cam has a very good quality video with 140 degrees field of view
  • Easy to install and use
  • Comes with a professional monitoring option
  • Compatible with Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant 
  • Includes convenient magnetic mount

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Lacks support for HomeKit 

If you’re looking to install a wireless security camera and a DIY home security system along with it, the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System might be your best bet. It’s pricey but far less expensive than buying the components individually. But even more importantly, it lets you set up a whole security system right out of the box.

What’s in the box? In addition to the two 1080p cameras (indoors and outdoors), it also comes with a base station, keypad, motion sensors, and entry sensors. All the components, including the cameras, connect to the base station, which also includes the ability to generate a loud siren to scare off intruders. Although the inside security camera isn’t the most robust model, the outside camera offers very good quality video with color night vision. What’s also nice is that the SimpliSafe mobile app is nicely designed to let you effectively interact with your entire setup, and it comes with the option of including a professional monitoring system. However, for the price, it would be nice if both cameras had the option to store videos locally. 

Best with 4K-resolution: Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor WiFi 6 Technology Security Camera 

A Lorex 4K wireless camera on a blue and white background

Lorex

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 4K
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired power only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Local storage
  • Size: 3.0 x 3.0 x 3.4 inches

Pros 

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 4K-resolution video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes WiFi 6 technology

Cons

  • Doesn’t have a battery backup

As a brand, Lorex has been making very good quality outdoor security cameras for many years. This model is no exception. It stands out because it captures very good quality 4K-resolution video and has a very good 8-megapixel sensor that lets you shoot 8-megapixel photos with more detail and data. It also comes with WiFi 6 technology, allowing faster data transmission with a compatible router to deliver impressive 4K resolution with fast loading time. Plus, it includes 2.4/5GHz dual-band coverage for better connectivity. You can also use one of two smart-motion detection features: Person, Vehicle, and Animal detection or Package detection, although both cannot be used simultaneously. 

It’s not ideal for everyone, though. It’s hardwired, so you may be more limited in where you need to place this model. It also doesn’t have a battery backup, which can be useful for units that are wired. 

A TP-Link Tapo security camera on a blue and white background

TP-Link

SEE IT

Specs

  • Video resolution: 2K
  • Field of view: 104 degrees
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant,
  • Storage options: Cloud storage or local storage 
  • Size: ‎5.6 x 4.1 x 2.5 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Excellent 2K-resolution (2304 x 1296) video quality
  • Versatile 
  • Can connect wirelessly or via an ethernet connection

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit 
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • Field of view isn’t as wide as other models

Not only is this one of the most affordable security cameras on the market, but it’s also great for those who want to avoid paying extra for cloud storage since you can store video locally by inserting a microSD memory card (up to 128 GB). However, it’s also very versatile since it does offer a subscription plan if you’d rather subscribe to the brand’s cloud service for storing video (Tape Care). Overall, it captures excellent-quality video. However, it has a lower frame rate (just 15 frames per second). It also comes with night vision, but it’s only in black-and-white, and not color. 

Best with cellular: Arlo Go 2 

An Arlo Go 2 on a blue and white background

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 3.4 x 2.5 x 4.7 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Can use either cloud or local storage
  • Includes color night vision 
  • Powerful Secure Plan features

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Need to pay extra for a cellular plan

One thing almost every outdoor security camera requires is access to your home’s wireless network. But what if you have poor reception or don’t have a WiFi network at all? If you’re one of these people, consider the Arlo Go 2. It not only lets you hook up to a WiFi network, but you can also use a cellular plan. However, if you choose the latter, you’ll have to buy both a cellular plan and SIM card. Also, it only works with Verizon, US Cellular, and T-Mobile. 

It does have color night vision and two-way talk and audio, but it’s not perfect for everyone. For instance, it provides you with the option of using cloud storage via one of Arlo’s Secure plans (plans start at $4.99), which also lets you access special features or store your videos on local storage. Still, if you use local storage, you can’t access the Secure plan features, which include 30-day video recording, person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them), and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. 

Best budget: Wyze Cam v3

A WYZE camera on a plain background

WYZE

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Wired power only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 2.0 x 2.0 x 2.3 inches 

Pros 

  • Very affordable
  • Compatible with major smart technologies
  • Cloud subscriptions are relatively inexpensive
  • Color night vision is very good

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit compatibility
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • May not be as sturdy as other models

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market, but it performs very well, capturing very good quality video. It also provides you with the option of storing your videos in cloud storage or on local storage using a microSD memory card. 

But it’s not the perfect option for all users. For example, those looking for high-res video probably won’t be happy since it shoots just 1080p video. It also shoots at a lower frame rate than other models: For Daytime and Color Night Vision, the frame rate is 20 frames per second (fps), and with Night Vision with IR lights it’s a frame rate of 15fps. However, remember to consider your needs—you’re most likely not looking to produce cinema-quality video. You simply want your security camera to capture decent video. 

What to consider when buying the best wireless security camera

Wireless security cameras continue to evolve at a dizzying pace, with many models coming with better connectivity and cutting-edge technologies, such as artificial intelligence, to improve a host of features. However, if you’re new to these types of cameras, it can be confusing to figure out which features, specs, and capabilities are important for you and your home security system. 

The following factors will help you figure out what’s important before you purchase a wireless security camera or wireless security camera system:  

Video resolution and field of view 

You’ll often see 1080p, 2K, or 4K resolutions in outdoor security cameras. A higher resolution means you’ll get a crisper image. A higher resolution will also fill up your local or cloud storage faster. That’s a problem if your subscription plan or card has a fixed limit to its capacity. If you’re trying to balance subscription costs for cloud storage with what resolution you’ll need, consider how detailed of a picture you’ll need. If you need more detail, go with a higher resolution. 

You’ll also want to check a security camera’s field of view specification, which is measured in degrees and tells you how much of a particular scene your security camera is capturing. The higher the FOV number indicates a wider lens and lets you see more of a particular scene in front of your house.  

Lighting, power options, and storage

Light has always been incredibly important when it comes to capturing digital video and photos. That’s why if you need your outdoor security camera to capture better-quality video or photos, you should consider buying a model with flood lights. Such models not only allow for improved image quality, but they can also act as a deterrent to intruders.

When planning to set up your new outdoor security camera, you’ll need to think about where to install it. This is not as much of an issue for models that only use battery power. However, hardwired connections require a direct connection to your home or an outdoor outlet with a weatherproof cord. This limits where you can place it. You make up for the lack of creative control with video and audio quality, which is better in a hardwired connection. 

In addition to lighting and power options, consider whether you want your security camera to store the video it captures locally, on a cloud-based server, or perhaps both. Most store video in the cloud, which is convenient, but you’ll most often have to pay a fee to access them. So, if you don’t want to pay a fee for a cloud service, consider models that let you store them on a memory card. 

Other features to look for

Because there is a lot of competition in the industry, all security camera brands are continually updating models and adding new features. For example, many brands have introduced privacy features, such as two-factor authentication, to ensure devices are not compromised or hacked. Many brands are also making security cameras that integrate with smart-home features, such as voice technologies, like Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, and others. And then there are some brands that even offer professional monitoring services for an extra level of protection, but you will generally have to pay more for such services. Make sure you consider additional features that may be important to you and your family.

FAQs

Q: Can wireless security cameras work without the internet?

If you have a camera that needs to store video footage in a cloud server (via a cloud subscription plan), you’ll need a wireless connection to access the internet. However, there are a number of models that can store video locally, on a memory card, hard drive, or other local storage. Additionally, there are some models that use cellular data plans to store video footage. 

Q: How long do wireless security cameras last?

Most wireless security cameras last anywhere from three to ten years, although there are a few factors to consider: Is the camera itself constructed to last? Also, is the camera placed outdoors and exposed to harsh weather? If it’s not waterproof and it’s exposed to the elements in an outdoor setting, the camera might not last more than a few months. 

Q: What is the longest range on a wireless security camera?

Most wireless security cameras made for consumers are designed to capture more of a wide-angle view of a scene, instead of zooming in on a particular subject. That’s why most models can see subjects anywhere from a few feet up to 75 feet away. However, some models are equipped with digital zoom features, which can crop in on the sensor and give the appearance of an optical zoom lens. However, digital zoom works best if you have a higher resolution sensor (such as 2K and 4K resolution) since you’re actually cropping the video clip and losing resolution, which can degrade video image quality.

Final thoughts on the best wireless security cameras

A wireless security camera can provide you with a way to keep a watchful eye on your home, both inside and out. But before you buy, consider the actual space you need to use the security camera or cameras for and what constellation of features on those cameras will best cover that area. If you’re living in a one-room apartment, you might only need one inexpensive security camera. But if you’re looking to oversee a more expansive environment, you may want to buy more than just one security camera. And be sure to always examine the mobile apps for all models to make sure they’re easy to use.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best wireless security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best solar garden lights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-garden-lights/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 16:40:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=571430
The best solar garden lights will help you harness the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

Use the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

The post The best solar garden lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar garden lights will help you harness the power of the sun to illuminate your yard.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Urpower Solar Lights are some of the best solar garden lights overall. Urpower Solar Lights
SEE IT

Bright, durable, versatile, and easy to install. Ideal for security and ambience, offering auto-dusk-dawn operation with lighting mode options. Plain design but top-rated reliability.
Best string lights Brightech Ambience Pro Solar-Powered Outdoor Strong Lights are the best solar garden lights that are solar-powered. Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights
SEE IT

Charming Edison bulb style, ideal for ambience at outdoor gatherings. Not the brightest but perfect for mood lighting. Limited battery life and non-expandable.
Best budget Better Homes Ellis Solar Lights are the best solar garden lights at a budget-friendly price. Better Homes & Gardens Ellis Solar-Powered Path Lights
SEE IT

Affordable, attractive lantern style, 20 lumens warm white light, auto shut-off, great for small yards, pathways, and highlighting specific areas.

Transform your backyard or patio into an extra livable space with solar-powered lights. Forget about trailing extension cords or the additional cost of lighting up your yard by opting for eco-friendly solar-generated lights. These innovative lighting solutions reduce energy use and offer the added convenience of effortless wireless illumination for your outdoor spaces. Whether you’re looking to create a cozy oasis or simply enhance the safety and ambience of your pathways, choosing the right solar garden lights can make all the difference. There’s an array of options flooding the market, however, so this guide is here to help you stay informed about the latest trends, technologies, and designs to make the best choice for your home. From dazzling string lights that create a magical atmosphere to motion-sensor security lights that keep your property safe, we’ve done the research to help you make informed choices about the best solar garden lights.

How we chose the best solar garden lights

Our recommendations for solar garden lights are based on extensive research. We surveyed peer recommendations, critical reviews, and user impressions to create a list of contenders and then put them through their paces. We drew on our experience with everything from solar landscape lights to solar deck lamps. We considered a wide variety of solar garden lights suitable for various purposes, different outdoor spaces, and user needs to develop a comprehensive list of the best solar garden lights.

The best solar garden lights: Reviews & Recommendations 

The sun is a powerful energy source, one we recommend harnessing for everything from the best solar generators to the best solar panels. Using the power of the sun to light up your garden can help illuminate and beautify your landscape while using renewable energy. Whether you are looking for floodlights, path lights, or motion sensors, we’ve rounded up a list of recommendations.

Best overall: URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor

Urpower Solar Lights are some of the best solar garden lights overall.

UrPower

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 4-5 hours
  • Operating Time: 8-10 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Bright light
  • Quick charging
  • Durable

Cons

  • Very plain design

The URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor are our top choice as they offer bright beautiful light on specific areas of your house or yard, which are both useful as a security feature and as outdoor ambience. You can easily adjust them to direct the light 90 degrees to where you need it most, and with a bright 200 lumens of light, they provide excellent illumination.

They are very hard-wearing and durable even in cold weather and rain. Take your pick when it comes to installation; you can either attach them to the wall or use the stakes to put them in the ground, depending on your space and design aesthetics. Both types of hardware options are included in the pack. They automatically turn on and off at dusk and dawn, offering peace of mind and ease of use. Choose from either cool or warm white tones and two different lighting modes to create your ideal effect. The design is rather plain, especially compared to other prettier options on the market, but for a reliable lighting source, the URPOWER Solar Lights are a top-rated choice.

Best motion-sensor: Aloftsun Solar Motion Sensor Outdoor Lights

AloftSun makes the best solar garden light with motion-sensor.

AloftSun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 1-2 days first use, then up to 8 hours on overcast days
  • Operating Time: 6-12 hours depending on use
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Great range on motion sensor
  • Easy installation
  • Good light coverage

Cons

  • Basic design

Motion-sensor solar garden lights provide a cost-effective, eco-friendly, and convenient lighting solution for outdoor spaces while improving security and curb appeal. They offer several benefits over regular outdoor lighting. They only activate when motion is detected, which helps conserve battery life, and this limited use extends the life of the LED bulbs and batteries, reducing maintenance and replacement costs. They can also deter potential intruders by illuminating areas when motion is detected, enhancing your property’s security (making them a great pairing with outdoor security cameras). 

The Aloftsun Solar Motion Sensor Outdoor Lights have three different light modes, allowing you to customize their use to your needs with either wall mounting or stake installation available. The 120-degree detection angle and a 33-foot sensing range offer peace of mind for various triggers, including visitors, animals, or cars. They give off a bright light in a cool tone and are incredibly durable and able to withstand even extreme weather conditions.

Best string lights: Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights

Brightech Ambience Pro Solar-Powered Outdoor Strong Lights are the best solar garden lights that are solar-powered.

Brightech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 6 hours
  • Operating Time: 5-6 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: Comes in 27- or 48-foot options

Pros

  • Ambient pretty lights
  • Create a romantic atmosphere
  • Safe shatterproof plastic bulbs

Cons

  • Can’t connect more than one together

The Brightech Ambience Pro Solar Powered Outdoor String Lights offer pretty ambient lighting, perfect for outdoor parties or get-togethers. The Edison bulb-style lights offer a romantic look but could be brighter. They are best used for atmospheric lighting, but if used in conjunction with other lights, you could create a brighter outdoor space with accent and task lighting options, which may be more suitable for reading outdoors or even dining.

It’s disappointing that you can’t connect different cables together for larger spaces, but these string lights look great on a balcony or smaller patio. They offered the least operating time of any lights we reviewed.

Best path lights: Hampton Bay Solar Powered Black Led Outdoor Integrated 3000k Warm White Landscape Path Light

Hampton Bay makes the best solar garden lights that are path lights.

Hampton Bay

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: 10-12 hours
  • Operating Time: 8 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 10

Pros

  • Good value
  • Bright light
  • Attractive design

Cons

  • Only sold in sets of 10

These solar-powered path lights from Hampton Bay allow you to easily illuminate walkways, driveways, and paths, enhancing safety by preventing trips and falls in the dark. With no wires or plugs to contend with you can simply walk the route placing your lights where you like for optimum safety. They also help create a charming and inviting atmosphere in your garden or outdoor space, leading the way to doorways, seating areas, or the driveway. 

The 10-pack size offers good value and allows you to plot longer sections to illuminate. However, it also means that if you need just one or two extra lights you have to buy an entire set. These lights are very bright, and the bulb has an attractive cracked glass effect that makes them look more expensive than they are. Dusk-to-dawn operation creates a hassle-free option for your garden or outdoor pathways.

Best budget: Better Homes & Gardens Ellis Solar-Powered Path Lights

Better Homes Ellis Solar Lights are the best solar garden lights at a budget-friendly price.

Better Homes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Charging Time: Not listed
  • Operating Time: 8 hours
  • Number of Lights in Set: 2

Pros

  • Easy to assemble
  • Long stake for maximum coverage
  • Durable

Cons

  • Not as bright as competitors

At under $30, these Better Homes & Gardens Ellis solar lights offer great value for money. They come as one unit perfect for smaller yards, patios, or for specific areas you want to highlight, like close to your front door, a particular bush or flowerbed, or to light the way to your car. An attractive lantern style with some weight to it, they look just as good in a uniform row as one-off lights. They give off 20 lumens of warm white light, and the auto shut-off helps to conserve energy. The long stake means you get good coverage, and the light produces a sunburst pattern. This is a pretty simple design featuring only an on/off switch but as a budget model, it does the job very nicely.

Things to consider when choosing solar garden lights

When choosing your solar garden lights, keep the following factors in mind:

Lighting purpose

Determine the primary purpose of your lights, whether that’s security, accent, pathway, or decorative, or a mix of different needs.

Brightness

Check the lumens rating to ensure the lights provide the desired brightness level for their intended use.

Battery capacity

Look for lights with larger battery capacities for longer runtimes, especially during cloudy days.

Weather resistance

Check for an IP rating to ensure the lights are weatherproof and withstand rain, snow, and extreme temperatures for four-season use.

Design

You may wish to choose lights that also complement your outdoor decor and landscaping style.

Expandability

If you plan to add more lights in the future, consider whether the brand offers expandable options that can be easily integrated into your current setup.

FAQs

Q: How do solar garden lights work?

Solar garden lights have photovoltaic panels that convert sunlight into electricity. This energy is stored in the batteries, which power the LED bulbs when it’s dark.

Q: Do solar garden lights need direct sunlight to charge?

While direct sunlight is optimal, most solar lights can charge in indirect sunlight or on cloudy days, albeit at a slower rate.

Q: Can I replace the batteries in solar garden lights?

Many solar lights have replaceable batteries. It’s a cost-effective way to extend the life of your lights. Check the details of the manufacturer when you purchase your lights.

Q: How do I clean and maintain solar garden lights?

Wipe clean the solar panel regularly to ensure optimal charging. Replace batteries when needed and check for loose connections or damaged parts from time to time.

Final thoughts on the best solar garden lights

Our top choice for the best overall solar garden lights is the URPOWER Solar Lights Outdoor. It scored well for its very bright light, easy installation, durability, and adjustability for optimum performance. But we hope we’ve offered enough options that your face lit up when you found the right lights for your home and budget.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar garden lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era https://www.popsci.com/gear/sonos-move-2-speaker-review/ Mon, 18 Sep 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570031
Sonos Move 2
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Sonos has packed its latest audio and sustainability advancements into an on-the-go form, with few sacrifices. Sorry for your wallet!

The post Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Sonos Move 2
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sonos released its latest at-home speakers, the Era 100 and Era 300, in March 2023. Their new name signified the next chapter of Sonos’ journey into connected speakers, and the multi-driver, multi-channel 300 even introduced Dolby Atmos support into its non-soundbar speakers. With the company’s latest speaker—the creatively named Move 2, a successor to its first party speaker—Sonos seeks to bring some of its new audio standards into a device you could take anywhere.

The original Sonos Move was released in 2019, and a lot has happened in the audio world since then, especially in the increasingly competitive world of high-fidelity wireless speakers. Having spent a little more than a week with the speaker, I can confidently say the Move 2 is an excellent addition to Sonos’ lineup, taking everything I really liked about the Era 100 and cramming it into a portable speaker.

The Move 2’s release comes at an interesting time in the portable smart connected speaker world. JBL released its new premium lineup, including the Authentics 300, which is the same price as the Move 2. Bang & Olufsen’s Beosound A5, released this past spring, comes in at a whopping $1,300, which proves premium audio companies are taking portable speakers seriously. The Move 2 keeps pace and even exceeds much of its competition by offering a speaker with an inviting design, great sound, continued advancements in sustainability, and tight integration with the company’s every-growing ecosystem of speakers. Sonos, like Apple, has cultivated an active fanbase, and they’ll find a lot to like about the Move 2. Skeptics may become converts if they give the speaker a chance.

Sonos Move 2

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Overview

  • The Sonos Move 2 is the second generation of Sonos’s first portable speaker, released in 2019.
  • It inherits many features found on the Sonos Era 100, including stereo sound, a USB-C port for charging and expandability, and a recessed volume slider.
  • Music lovers charmed by Sonos’ sound profile, ease of setup, and broader ecosystem should consider the Move 2 before any other mid-sized portable Bluetooth speaker.

Pros

  • Excellent sound
  • Wireless charging
  • Replaceable battery
  • Modularity (Via USB-C)
  • Built-in handle

Cons

  • $50 price increase from the original Move
  • Coating can come off

The verdict: The Sonos Move 2 is a big improvement over the original in tangible ways, including better battery life, stereo sound, and even more sustainability features. In a crowded field, it’s hard not to recommend this portable speaker to anyone who cares about ease of use, ergonomics, and great sound.

The build

It seems odd to describe a speaker as inviting, but that’s the adjective that’s continued to come into my mind during my time with the Move 2. From the front, it looks like a standard Sonos speaker: Ovular, brandished with the Sonos logo, and a pinhole-sized LED on top to let you know the speaker’s status. On top of the speaker, you’ll find a recessed well that acts as a volume slider—swiping your finger left turns audio down, right turns it up—as well as play/pause, voice assistant mute, and track selection controls.

Turning the speaker around will reveal a power button, Bluetooth button, a mic switch, and USB-C port. The USB can charge the speaker or connect the Move 2 to a Sonos dongle for additional connectivity options. There are two exposed pins at the very bottom, allowing you to wirelessly charge the Move 2 by setting it atop a charging base (a plastic loop) included in the box. The base feels solid, and the speaker immediately recognized it and began charging. This isn’t the only way to top up the Move 2, but it gives the speaker a sense of additional portability; you feel like you can grab the speaker and go at any time. Sonos more than doubled the Move 2’s battery life compared to the original version, offering up to 24 hours of use per charge instead of 11. You shouldn’t have to plug it in daily—and I certainly didn’t—though you might have to more often if you pump the volume or take advantage of its ability to be a power bank for USB-C devices. Sonos did this without dramatically increasing the speaker’s size or weight, too.

Sonos-Move-2
The Move 2’s rear cutout makes it easy to grab and go. Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

What makes the back of the Move 2 different than any other speaker I’ve tested is that those aforementioned buttons are inside a tapered recess. The top of this control panel cutout is hollow, with enough space for four of my fingers. This acts as a handle, allowing me to transport the Move 2 from place to place easily. It’s the type of industrial design feature that feels immediately natural and nicer than the straps or handles that come with many larger portable speakers. While I really like the Move 2’s sound profile—more on that later—it’s this built-in handle that charmed me the most.

Cutting a chunk out of the back of your speaker could be a recipe for disaster as it leaves less space for audio components (bigger amps and drivers are better) and a battery. Sonos seems to have accounted for this, and I never had any issues with the Move 2’s sound or lifespan. I set it down on its charging stand for testing purposes but could have gotten a week’s worth of daily use from the speaker without running the risk of having it conk out. This is not entirely unique for a speaker in the Move 2’s size class, but still nice to see.

While the Move 2’s physical design impressed, what’s on the inside really counts. Sonos outfitted the speaker with three class-D amplifiers to drive a pair of angled tweets and a single mid-woofer. This driver array allows the speaker to play music in stereo, though you might want to pair it with a second Move 2 if you’re concerned with better channel separation. My only complaint about the Move 2’s build is that part of its finish got scratched while being transported in a backpack, which feels like it shouldn’t happen so easily for a speaker intended to be lugged around. All this doesn’t take away from the Move 2’s ability to perform indoors or out; with an IP56 rating, the speaker is protected from dust and high-pressure water streams so that you can feel confident taking it from the patio to the pool, the backyard to the beach (though don’t submerge it in sand nor surf).

The setup

Sonos has streamlined the setup process to the point of virtual perfection. The Sonos app (available on both iOS and Android) immediately recognized the Move 2 and asked if I wanted to add it to my system. Tapping “yes” on the prompt initiated a setup process that happened entirely in the background. The speaker was added to my home’s WiFi network and integrated as part of the Sonos system in under a minute.

I was prompted to download a firmware update, which was just as simple, and then I was free to begin testing the speaker in earnest. Many wireless speakers have a similarly straightforward setup process, but it’s impressive that Sonos has streamlined it for one that connects over WiFi. It’s tedious to enter your WiFi password into yet another app, and I was pleased I didn’t have to.

The Sonos Move 2 (left) next to its homebound sibling the Sonos Era 100 (right).
The Sonos Move 2 (left) next to its homebound sibling, the Sonos Era 100 (right). Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

If you’re on an Apple device, like I was for testing, you can stream lossless music to the speaker over WiFi using AirPlay 2, Apple’s custom protocol. Non-Apple devices can stream music from both services and their local library through the Sonos app. If you prefer Bluetooth, you can enable this mode by pressing the Bluetooth button on the back of the speaker. The first time you do this, the speaker will enter a pairing mode, and the LED on its front side will flash blue. Once connected, you can use it like a typical Bluetooth speaker, trading more universal connectivity for more limited bandwidth and range. However, it’s important to note that you must go through the WiFi setup before taking advantage of Bluetooth; this is not a speaker intended for anyone who doesn’t have a connected household.

It’s unnecessary, but you can connect the speaker to your Amazon account via the Sonos app to use the Move 2’s microphone to access Alexa, Amazon’s smart home assistant. When connected, you can use the Move 2 to control smart-home devices and play tracks with your voice. The Move 2 ships with Sonos’ more limited smart home assistant mostly designed around music playing. The microphone can be temporarily muted by tapping a capacitive touch control on the speaker’s top.

The sound

If you’ve heard a Sonos speaker before—especially the Era 100 or recently released Ray and Beam 2 soundbars—you’ll be familiar with how the Move 2 sounds. Sonos has its own preferred tuning and makes no qualms about admitting that. The Move 2’s press page goes so far as to say the speaker’s class-D digital amplifiers are “precision-tuned for the speaker’s unique acoustic architecture.” I’m typically very critical of non-flat EQs because I’d like to hear music as close to the artist’s intentions as possible, but I admit to liking the Move 2’s sound profile a lot.

Don’t worry; Sonos hasn’t evoked the infamous “smiley face,” or U-shaped, EQ setting wherein the lowest bass and treble frequencies are jacked up while the midrange is tamped down. The speaker sounds remarkably natural, with a tasteful EQ that you’ll only notice if you’re really listening to it. If you’re listening to tracks you’re very familiar with, you may notice a little extra bass here or a little less treble there, but it’s all in favor of making audio sound pleasing.

There isn’t an identical “one-sound-fits-all” Sonos sheen applied over everything you hear, as tweaks will vary from song to song and room to room. Sonos’ audio profile is backed up with Automatic Trueplay, a software feature that adjusts the Move 2’s sound based on the environment using the speaker’s built-in microphone. This happens in real-time, and it was possible to hear a slight difference in the Move 2’s sound when moving from one location to another. The one caveat, however, is that you need to have the microphone enabled for Automatic Trueplay to work. A physical switch on the back cuts off power to the mics if you’re not into persistent monitoring, but there’s no way to create a Trueplay profile that works with the mics off.

Some speakers, like JBL’s Authentics 300, live up to their name by providing a warts-and-all presentation of music, which is great if you crave music accuracy but does rely on you having higher-quality, better-mastered source material. This was the strategy high-end audio companies employed before the powered, connected, and wireless speaker revolutions. Still, it doesn’t always square with the way people listen to music now, i.e., listening to lossy tracks on streaming services. Both paths work, but Sonos’ path of applying digital processing makes it easier to get a consistent experience.

Sonos Move 2
The Sonos Move 2 is the new way to experience digital music. Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

While listening to podcasts, I noticed the richness in each voice, regardless of its register. There was a lot of detail, while a subtle sheen was placed over the entire recording to buff out some rough edges, which were audible when listening through other speakers. Sometimes, some light processing is good; you want to enjoy a show rather than be distracted by the effects of someone broadcasting from an untreated room. This doesn’t mean poor-sounding recordings will magically sound good; it’s just that good recordings can sound even better.

I had a similar experience when listening to music. I could make out every bass note Chris Hillman played on The Byrds’ cover of Bob Dylan’s “You Ain’t Going Nowhere” as clearly as the snare drum beats laid down by Michael Clarke. Jumping ahead 55 years to Olivia Rodrigo’s “bad idea right?” I was similarly pleased that the bass—turned way up—didn’t drown out the multi-layered vocals or driving guitar solo. I tested the Move 2’s treble performance by listening to The Clash’s “Train In Vain (Stand By Me),” whose intro includes a series of cymbal hits that can sound piercing on speakers with a bright sound profile. If that’s the case, each hit will hurt your ears. The Move 2 walked right up to that line but didn’t cross over. Naturally, the mastering and resolution of the music you listen to will play a factor in your experience. Different versions of the same songs can differ pretty dramatically depending on the musician and engineer’s tastes.

Listening to tracks from different eras and genres, I continued my formal tests by listening to Earth Wind & Fire’s autumnally appropriate “September.” The song, a total bop, has a lot going on. The horns in the background, conga drums, steady drum and bass lines, and those soaring vocals. The auditory menagerie sounded well-kempt on the Move 2, on which each song element was audible if you focused on it. On the whole, the Move 2’s sound profile sounds a little bass-heavy (not uncommon for a speaker that can see outdoor use), with a lot of effort put into making sure sounds in the midrange, like vocals, sound particularly great.

I spent most of my time listening to lossless audio tracks from an iPhone over WiFi, but did pop on Bluetooth mode for testing (the baseline SBC and native-Apple AAC codecs are supported). I didn’t notice any significant quality hit switching to the more compressed format and didn’t even feel limited by its lower range most of the time. In most cases, a track’s mastering will matter much more than its resolution.

While the speaker can play songs in stereo, it can’t recreate as wide a soundstage as a pair of individual speakers or even the football-shaped Bowers & Wilkins Zeppelin. If I listen to the lopsided stereo mix of The Mamas & the Papas’ “California Dreamin’,” it still sounds pretty close to the mono mix. On the Zeppelin, I could clearly hear vocals from half the band on my left and the other half on my right. Stereo separation gets better the further away you sit, but a portable Atmos speaker, this is not. Of course, you’re not taking the Zeppelin anywhere with you, no matter how powerfully dynamic it sounds. You can pair two Move 2 speakers together for better separation to the tune of $900, but you should consider other options at that point.

The conclusion

Sonos Move 2

Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 9.5 x 6.3 x 5 inches (HWD)
  • Weight: 6.61 pounds
  • Battery life: Up to 24 hours
  • Connectivity: WiFi 6, Bluetooth 5.0, USB-C port
  • IP Rating: IP56
  • Voice assistants: Amazon Alexa, Sonos Voice Control
  • Price: $449
  • Release date: September 20, 2023

Sonos has been on a roll since the introduction of its first smart speaker, the One, in 2017. The Move 2 is the latest addition, and it benefits from the improvements Sonos continually makes to its audio infrastructure and product ecosystem. Some features I didn’t test, like the ability to hook the Move 2 to a turntable using an optional dongle or the user-replaceable battery, speak to Sonos’ confidence in this being your go-to portable speaker for a long time and that you may even find new ways to use it. Of course, the Move 2’s $449 price tag will put it out of reach for many people, which is why the Toblerone-shaped Sonos Roam exists for $179. But what you get with the Move 2 is similar performance to the homebound Era 100 wherever you go and a battery that keeps going and going. The Move 2 is a refined speaker that will satisfy existing Sonos fans with its familiarity and audio quality that should convert new fans if their budget allows.

The post Sonos Move 2 speaker review: Welcome to the portable era appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best satellite phones of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-satellite-phone/ Tue, 30 Mar 2021 13:28:14 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=278707
best satellite phones sliced header
Tony Ware

Keep a means to communicate close in remote areas with a trustworthy satellite phone.

The post The best satellite phones of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best satellite phones sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A red and black Garmin-brand satellite communicator Garmin inReach Mini GPS
SEE IT

This tough communicator is perfect for outdoor camping trips.
Best for international travel black satellite phone out of the box Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone
SEE IT

Flat rate calling charges are included with this satellite phone, saving you money on your post-trip phone bill.
Best budget green and grey communicator ZOLEO Satellite Communicator
SEE IT

This sub-$200 option includes Iridium satellite connection just like higher-end models.

Harnessing a satellite phone connection can provide you with communication anywhere globally. Using a satellite allows you to keep in touch with friends and family, whether you’re hiking in remote areas, sailing, flying, or just want to be prepared in case of a natural disaster. While cellphones and smartphones provide connections in major cities and towns, they’re dependent on terrestrial towers. In case of a natural disaster, cellphone networks can be overloaded or subject to structural damage. With one of the best satellite phones, your connection is dependent on satellites in space, so after a disaster or even if you’re traveling to the far corners of the Earth, you’ll be able to stay connected. 

Satellite phones can be used for voice calls, text messaging, and even basic emails to keep in touch. They allow for emergency preparedness by issuing SOS distress signals, GPS locations, directions, and emergency weather alerts. Some sat phone packages come with a satellite-based WiFi hub that will allow for your smartphone to work in locations that don’t have cellphone connections. Some satellite phone packages even allow for broadband access to the internet. To compare phones and determine which is right for you, we’ve selected some of the best satellite phones on the market to keep you safe and connected.

How we chose the best satellite phones

When venturing off the beaten path, communication can mean the difference between smooth sailing and a rough misadventure. We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations, consulted outdoor enthusiasts and experts, and conducted heavy research to find the best satellite phones—because there’s comfort in knowing you can always call home.

The best satellite phones: Reviews & Recommendations

The best satellite phones can do everything from traversing craggy ledges and vast green hillsides to phoning home while traveling internationally. The following are our picks that will keep you in touch wherever you go.

Best overall: Garmin inReach Mini GPS

A red and black Garmin-brand satellite communicator

Garmin

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This satellite communicator is portable and packed with features, like interactive SOS calling, to ensure safety anywhere in the world.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, ANT+
  • Battery life: 50 hours in default tracking mode; 20 days in power-saving mode
  • Battery power: Internal rechargeable lithium battery
  • Dimensions: 2 x 1.3 x 3.9 inches

Pros

  • Portable
  • Fast access to SOS
  • Lots of battery power

Cons

  • Satellite subscription required for use

Makers of top-tier hiking watches, Garmin knows GPS devices and what adventurers need. This handy mini GPS Garmin satellite phone is perfect for packing with your tent on outdoor camping trips. This satellite communicator lets you send two-way text messages using the Iridium satellite network. It is compatible with other handheld devices, and you have unlimited access to maps and aerial images through the Garmin Earthmate app to support your trip safely. Plus, it’s water-rated to IPX7 and impact-resistant, meaning it’s just as tough as your next uphill climb. Sending out an SOS message is easy thanks to 24/7 access to the GEOS emergency response team. A satellite subscription is required for use.

Best satellite messenger: Spot X with Bluetooth 2-Way Satellite Messenger

The Spot X Satellite Mesesnger on a blue and white background

Spot X

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple messenger allows you to send pre-programmed messages and your GPS location to loved ones.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth, USB
  • Battery life: 10 days
  • Battery power: 1 Lithium polymer battery
  • Dimensions: 2.9 x 0.94 x 6.54 inches

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • SOV capabilities
  • Spot Mapping app gives those at home peace of mind

Cons

  • Must pay for a year of activation

Stick to the basics and stay safe with this simple satellite GPS messenger. Connect with friends by sending coordinates and pre-programmed messages via satellite and stay safe in case of emergency with GPS locators and SOS signals. It also includes Save Our Vehicle (SOV) request capabilities and a track button to send and save your location. Those at home can look at your location and progress using the SPOT Mapping app. Be aware that you’ll need to pay for a year of activation in order to use this device. 

Best for international travel: Inmarsat Isatphone 2.1 Satellite Phone

black satellite phone out of the box

Inmarsat

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tons of battery life and dust, splash, and shock resistance mean this sat phone is reliable and tough.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: eight hours of talk time; up to 160 hours on standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 10 x 9 x 4 inches

Pros

  • Easy to set up and activate
  • Comes unlocked for compatibility with multiple service providers
  • Lots of coverage area

Cons

  • Better for traveling than hiking
  • Typing on phone is tedious

The Isatphone is backed by the Inmarsat satellite network and is a good option for international travel. Additional features include GPS and SOS capabilities. Activate its included Bluetooth connection to use it hands-free. It’s preloaded with eight hours of talk time, up to 160 hours on standby, and comes with chargers, cables, and adapters. The phone is also dust, splash, and shock resistant, meaning you don’t have to worry about breaking it while out and about on your international adventure.

Best bundle: Iridium GO! Standard Package

An Iridium GO! Standard Bundle on a blue and white background

Iridium GO!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This bundle includes tons of adapters—no dead batteries here.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 5.5 hours of talk time; 15.5 hours of standby
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 4.5 x 3.2 x 1.25 inches

Pros

  • Lots of adapters
  • Prepaid SIM card included
  • Simple user interface

Cons

  • Expensive

This ready-to-use satellite communicator connects to the Iridium global satellite network, which includes 66 operating satellites. A prepaid SIM card with 1,000 minutes of talk time, a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, travel and car chargers, international adapters, and even a convenient carrying case are all included in the bundle. The Iridium GO! satellite communicator also connects to the Iridium GO! app to connect five separate devices sans wires. And it’s dust-proof, shock-resistant, and jet-water resistant. Carry it in your travel backpack or mount it in a car.

Best budget: ZOLEO Satellite Communicator

green and grey communicator

ZOLEO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This flexible device lets you connect to a satellite for less than $200—a steal compared to other satellite communicators.

Specs

  • Connectivity technology: Bluetooth
  • Battery life: 200 hours
  • Battery power: Lithium-ion
  • Dimensions: 3.58 x 2.6 x 1.06 inches

Pros

  • Flexibility in using satellite, WiFi, or cellular
  • Iridium satellite network access
  • Required monthly subscription is less than $100 for cellular, WiFi, and SOS messaging

Cons

  • Monthly subscription required

Zoleo created a small rugged device with all the essentials for keeping you safe in remote locations. Highly rated by many outdoor editors, this device allows you to use the Iridium satellite network, WiFi, or cellular service, depending on what’s available. A monthly subscription is required with cost-level options, depending on your needs.

What to consider when buying the best satellite phones

While satellite phones won’t replace your smartphone for everyday use, they step in and offer communication solutions for use when cellphone service isn’t possible. Sat phones are designed for international travel—but always check the countries’ policies ahead of time: is access allowed while off-the-grid camping and hiking or for use on boats or on recreational aircraft? The best satellite phones are designed with off-the-grid use in mind and should be rugged, waterproof, and durable. 

While connections are possible in all remote locations, the ability to receive signals can be hindered by buildings, roofs, shelters, or heavy tree coverage. Many manufacturers have solved this issue and offer packages that are designed to include antennas to use on the outside of structures or buildings, vehicles, boats, or even in the cockpit of an airplane. 

Use case

If you want to stay safe and connected when setting out for off-the-grid outdoor adventures, you will need a small, lightweight satellite phone that’s set up to offer all the features you need to stay safe. The best satellite communicator for wilderness adventures will be rugged, waterproof, and allow for easy messaging and an SOS distress call in case of emergency. 

Choosing a satellite communicator made for outdoor adventures means you’ll also have access to useful extra features. Companies like Garmin offer top-of-the-line GPS support, extra maps, topographic information, and safety advice for all types of rough terrain. Better brands offer excellent customer support as well as handy online resources.

Messaging vs. calling

When you travel or go on outside adventures, having a fully loaded SAT phone may not be necessary. Opting for a more basic satellite communication solution also means saving money. You’ve already got a smartphone—what you need is another layer of communication safety outside the cellphone zone. If you want to keep it simple, consider a satellite GPS messenger. These devices allow you to send messages to family and friends, letting them know you are safe, and also have important extra safety features like GPS location and SOS signals.

Text & voice calling bundles

The best satellite phone bundle will not only include a reliable, durable, easy-to-use phone, but it should also offer voice calling, text messaging, and email messaging. The best phones include a reliable large global network with 24/7 technical support. Packages should include all you need to use and get going without any additional purchases.

Helpful features to look for include different power adapters that allow for use in locations throughout the world. The best sat phone bundles also give you flexibility. You should be able to choose between a monthly plan or a prepaid SIM card—if you only use the phone a few months out of the year, you’re not stuck with a large monthly payment. 

International travel

Sat phones are a smart solution when traveling outside your home country. (Be sure to check the policies of the country you’re visiting before bringing one: They’re illegal in some places.) The best satellite phone for international travel is easy to set up and comes with a prepaid SIM card. That gives you the peace of mind that you can use the phone quickly no matter where you are without worrying about cellphone carriers or reception. Look for phones that offer reliable voice and call connectivity, as well as emergency signals. International travel often takes you to places where you can’t be sure what to expect, and a sat phone offers safety and protection, along with the security of knowing that you won’t be unreachable.

Budget

If satellite phone cost is a factor, consider a more basic satellite communication device. Fully loaded satellite phones can set you back around $1,000, not to mention the extra cost of SIM cards or monthly service plans. Economical solutions keep communication basic but also require a monthly subscription for service. 

The best budget satellite communicator allows you to text and receive texts, and some even offer apps that allow your phone to access the satellite WiFi network. Always look for added emergency features such as SOS alerts and GPS coordinates.

FAQs

Q: How much does a satellite phone cost?

Satellite phones and satellite communication devices range in price from $300 to over $1,000. In addition to hardware costs, you need a satellite provider to connect the phone for service and can purchase a monthly or prepaid plan from $100 to $5,000. Depending on your provider, voice calls range from $.0.15 to $2.00 a minute. Satellite calls between different satellite networks can be expensive. Review voice calls, text messaging, and incoming call costs with your selected provider.

Q: Are satellite phones illegal?

Satellite phones are not illegal in the United States, but in some countries, like China and Cuba, they are. It’s important to research and contact the government of any country you may be visiting to check their policies for use. Satellite phones have restricted use in some countries (e.g., Russia, India), and you must get permission to use these devices or risk arrest. Legal restrictions are in place to curtail any possible illegal or terrorist activities that depend on signals that can bypass censorship and wiretapping. 

Q: Can I turn my phone into a satellite phone?

It is possible to use your smartphone as a satellite phone by purchasing a SatSleeve (Satellite Sleeve) and installing the SatSleeve App. The first time you use your SatSleeve, you have to set it up to connect via Bluetooth. Some satellite providers (like Iridium Go!) offer packages that include a satellite phone and a satellite phone hotspot that allows you to connect your smartphone, tablet, or laptop to a satellite-backed WiFi hotspot. 

Final thoughts on the best satellite phones

The best satellite phones will allow you to roam around the globe and stay connected. With rugged, waterproof designs, these phones can follow you on any adventure by land, sea, or air. Connect with a prepaid SIM card, or with a monthly plan to keep safe and communicate no matter where you are. In case of emergency, sat phones will send SOS signals and GPS coordinates to make sure you return home safe. Compare phones, then get shopping.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best satellite phones of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best solar landscape lights of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-solar-landscape-lights/ Fri, 15 Sep 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570740
The best solar landscape lights will illuminate your path and save energy.

Light up the landscape with the glow of these solar-powered beauties.

The post The best solar landscape lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best solar landscape lights will illuminate your path and save energy.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Innogear Solar Lights are some of the best solar landscape lights overall. InnoGear Solar Lights
SEE IT

Easy installation, multiple modes, and remote control make these lights sparkle more than the competition.  
Best value Lianglome Solar Lights are the best solar landscape lights for value. LIANGLOME Solar Lights
SEE IT

Save some dollars but still get a stable mount that sits close to the wall for a sleek low profile.

Best string lights Brightown Solar String Lights are the best solar landscape lights that are strong lights. Brightown Solar String Lights
SEE IT

These beautiful lights adjust to three brightness levels. They also offer change through a USB cord when sunlight is limited.

Solar landscaping lights can illuminate your favorite outdoor spaces without increasing your energy bill. Their designs range from practical to whimsical to enhance different types of outdoor spaces. Some come in strings, and others are lantern-like with shepherd’s hooks to brighten walkways. What they all have in common is their ability to harness solar energy to light the night. When making your choice, you’ll need to consider what you want the lights to accomplish, whether that’s lighting for safety or accentuating decor. And keep in mind the number of lights and the design that will best complement your landscaping. We’ve rounded up seven of the best solar landscaping lights on the market from the dozens we researched, with an eye for different types to fit the landscaping of various modern homes.

How we chose the best solar landscape lights

The right solar landscaping lights for you come down to your specific personal needs. However, when we looked at creating our list, we thought about factors that improve the chances of the lights meeting those needs.

We started with light quality. While solar lights aren’t known for longevity, we looked for models with materials and construction to last several years. Next, we considered brightness levels, and our list includes models with adjustable brightness and a few without. If you’re looking for lights that enhance safety, there are models on the list that shine bright enough for that. However, we also considered that lights that set a mood don’t need to rival a spotlight, so we included solar landscaping lights with a gentler glow, too. 

Our methods also included the lights’ control methods, from remote control to light sensors. Finally, we looked for extra features that enhance the light’s practical use, such as adjustable solar panels and multiple installation methods.

The best solar landscape lights: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re looking to illuminate the front path to your home or create a festive atmosphere with string lights, we’ve rounded up the best solar landscape lights to serve your needs.

Best overall: InnoGear Solar Lights

Innogear Solar Lights are some of the best solar landscape lights overall.

InnoGear

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white, white
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Touch

Pros

  • Easy ground or wall-mount installation
  • Low and high modes
  • Automatic turns on and off
  • Comes in warm or bright white

Cons

  • Some units may dim prematurely

The InnoGear Solar Lights offer practical lighting with easy installation. We like that they come in warm or bright white to fit the mood you’re creating in your yard. They can wall-mount on a deck or fence but also come with stakes for fast ground installation. 

Once the lights are installed, you can adjust the lighting angle up to 90 degrees and the solar panels by up to 180 degrees. That adjustability lets you get the right angle for your landscaping, like highlighting a tree or other features. The adjustable solar panels ensure you get the best angle for the panels to gather solar energy. 

A light sensor detects light and controls the on/off feature so the lights can energize once the sun is up. The InnoGear lights are IP65 waterproof so that they can withstand inclement weather, though reviewers suggest angling the solar panels to shed water. The manufacturer promises 12 hours of light on low, but reviewers find that number a bit exaggerated. According to customers, the lights last for several hours but not all night long.  Additionally, some units may dim within a few months.

Best string lights: Brightown Solar String Lights

Brightown Solar String Lights are the best solar landscape lights that are strong lights.

Brightown

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Remote 

Pros

  • Three lighting modes
  • Solar-powered or electric charging using a USB cord
  • Remote control
  • 180-degree adjustable solar panel

Cons

  • Automatic on/off only turns on when very dark
  • Only comes with one replacement bulb

The Brightown Solar String Lights have classic good looks, and with 54 feet of string and 25 bulbs, you can cover a decent amount of space. They made our list because of their versatile lighting, control, and charging options. Four lighting modes let you choose the mood of your outdoor space, and a remote control makes it easy to adjust the lighting or set a timer if you don’t want to rely on the light sensor for control. 

The solar panel adjusts up to 180 degrees to get the best charging angle. However, if the sun’s hiding, you can charge the battery or run the lights using a USB cord. You can set an automatic on/off, but some users report that they only turn on when it’s extremely dark. The Brightown lights also have an IP44 rating, which protects them in all but the wettest of weather. Our biggest complaint is that they only include one replacement bulb.

Best path light: Rayolon Solar Ground Lights

Rayolon Solar ground lights are the best solar landscape lights that are a path light.

Rayolon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm light, white light
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Foot mount switch

Pros

  • Line walkways for better definition
  • Sit flush with the ground
  • Eight LED lights per unit enhance brightness

Cons

  • Ground stakes break easily

The Rayolon Solar Ground Lights come in packs of four, eight, 12, and 16 to line paths and walkways of different lengths. Each unit features eight LED lights, creating a ring of illumination. Each light also has its own solar panel and rechargeable battery. While you have to keep the solar panels clean, these lights charge well and offer several hours of illumination per charge. 

With an IP65 waterproof rating, they can withstand heavy rain and snow without water damage. The lights charge well in full sunlight, but it could take longer to reach a full charge in winter when there’s a lot of cloud cover. Installation isn’t difficult. However, users reported that the ground stakes break easily, with the manufacturer suggesting breaking up or digging a partial hole before installing to protect the stake.

Best post light: SOLPEX Solar Outdoor Lights

Solplex Solar Outdoor Lights are the best solar landscape lights for a post light.

Solplex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Sensor

Pros

  • Decorative design adds character
  • Offers excellent accent light
  • Holds charge well

Cons

  • Loses ability to hold charge over time
  • Requires assembly

The SOLPEX Solar Outdoor Lights bring style and character to the garden with illumination that goes beyond practical into decorative. These lights give off a gentle light that’s not designed to overpower a walkway. Instead, they emit an accentuating glow to highlight a garden or other landscaping features. They charge in a relatively short six to eight hours and offer several hours of illumination. 

These SOLPEX lights have an IP44 waterproof rating, which means they can withstand rainstorms, though regular deluges might be a bit much. Control is a no-brainer with an automatic on/off switch controlled by a light sensor. There’s some assembly involved, and you may need to break up hard ground before installation. 

Best lantern: MAGGIFT Hanging Solar Lights

Maggift Solar Hanging Lights are the best solar landscape lights that serve as a lantern,

Maggift

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: cool white, warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP44
  • Control: Sensor

Pros

  • Includes shepherd hooks for hanging
  • Easy assembly and installation
  • Attractive, decorative design

Cons

  • May lean

The MAGGIFT Hanging Solar Lights bring a touch of elegance to the outdoors. They come with the shepherd’s hooks that hold the lights high enough to disperse light but not so high that they obstruct a view or fight with the rest of the landscaping. We like how their hanging design can integrate with different types of outdoor decor. For example, you can use them to line a walkway or use separately sold hooks to hang them from eaves or outdoor structures. 

These lights come in a bright or warm white, so you can match them to the rest of your outdoor lighting. The solar panels blend into the overall design. As long as the lights are placed where they can get full sun for most of the day, they emit a gentle glow for several hours into the night. Control comes from a standard light sensor that turns the lights on as it gets dark. The downside with these lights is that the stakes on the shepherd’s hooks aren’t super stable, so they can lean if bumped.

Best step lights: JACKYLED Solar Step Lights

Jackyled Solar Step Lights are the best solar landscape lights that are step lights.

Jackyled

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: cool light, warm light
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Automatic

Pros

  • Adhesive or screws for installation
  • Installs on a wide range of surfaces
  • Light casts in three directions for better illumination

Cons

  • Adhesive strips can fail

The JACKYLED Solar Step Lights have a three-sided design that casts 270 degrees of light. They come with two installation methods: screws and adhesive strips. The screw installation may be the more complicated method, but it’s the most secure between the two. Adhesive strips are easy, but some reviewers report that they fail after a short time. However, we do like the variety of surfaces these lights can be used on, from wood fencing and concrete to siding and various decking materials. 

These lights cast light in three directions, which provides extra light on stairs, and better visibility means better safety. Like other solar lights, these lights run using a light sensor, so you don’t need to worry about turning them on or off. The JACKYLED lights are also IP65-rated, which means they can withstand heavy rain, snow, and sleet.

Best value: LIANGLOME Solar Lights

Lianglome Solar Lights are the best solar landscape lights for value.

Lianglome

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Cold white, multi-color, warm white
  • Water-Resistance: IP65
  • Control: Automatic

Pros

  • Fun lamp head design that disperses light in patterns
  • Powerful illumination for their size
  • Excellent instructions make them easy to assemble and install

Cons

  • Packages occasionally arrive with a faulty light

The LIANGLOME Solar Lights save a few dollars without sacrificing style or illumination. The unique head design directs light for a more concentrated beam, which makes them seem brighter than they are. The manufacturer includes almost overly helpful instructions that walk you through every part of the assembly and installation. Consequently, there’s rarely an issue with getting them installed. 

The lights are controlled with a light sensor and are IP65-rated, which means they can withstand rain, sleet, and snow. They take a relatively short four to six hours to charge. While they don’t typically live up to the manufacturer’s promised eight to twelve hours of illumination, according to reviews, they can easily last four or five on a single charge. However, every now and then, a package will arrive with a light that’s dim or doesn’t work.

Best floodlights: AmeriTop LED Solar Motion Sensor Lights

AmeriTop Solar Lights are one of the best solar landscape lights that are floodlights.

Ameritop

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: One
  • Water-Resistance: IP65 Waterproof
  • Control: Remote

Pros

  • Broad coverage area of up to 270 degrees wide
  • Bright output of 800 lumens
  • Motion detection up to 26 feet

Cons

  • Panel must receive 6 to 8 hours of full sunlight to fully charge

These motion-activated solar-powered floodlights eliminate the need for a wired power source, making them well-suited for homes without outdoor wiring for standard floodlights. Each light in this set consists of 128 tiny LED bulbs divided into three adjustable heads. The LEDs put out 800 lumens, ample brightness to light up a driveway or back patio.

In addition to being among the brightest outdoor solar lights on the market, this set is also one of the most adjustable. You can set the motion sensor to detect movement up to a range of 16 to 26 feet and aim each fixture’s two side heads to cover an area as broad as 270 degrees. When the lights’ sensors detect motion, they turn on for about 30 seconds, illuminating the area while conserving battery life.

The solar panel on top of each light uses polycrystalline silicon technology, which offers a higher level of charging efficiency than older solar panel technology. Mounting brackets for the lights are included.

Best budget: Signature Garden 8-Pack Solar Garden Lights

Signature Garden Solar Lights are some of the best solar landscape lights at a budget-friendly price.

Signature Garden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Color Options: Black, bronze, silver
  • Water-Resistance: Yes
  • Control: App

Pros

  • Includes eight lights
  • Install easily with no tools required
  • Rust and corrosion-proof

Cons

  • Plastic construction is not as attractive as a metal finish

At a cost of about $5 per light, one would be hard-pressed to find a better deal than this set of solar-powered garden lights from Signature Garden. With its eight lights, the set can cover a walkway or illuminate several garden beds. The lights are black and have a simple no-frills look that suits many home exteriors. Though they lack the durability of metal, they are constructed of ABS rigid plastic, which won’t rust or corrode in wet weather and is tough enough to endure the occasional bump.

Despite their affordable price, they’re brighter than most pathway lights at 15 lumens. Small solar panels that sit on top of the light charge a rechargeable battery that keeps the light on at night for up to eight hours. Like other pathway lights, each light in this set sits on a stake. To install, simply insert the pointed end of the post into the soil and attach the lamp.

Things to consider when shopping for the best solar landscape lights

You have a few things to consider when choosing the best solar landscaping lights. Everything from the size and shape of your yard to how you want to use the lights will factor into your final decision. 

Type

Outdoor solar lights come in a variety of types. Pathway lights are commonly sold in groups of six or eight to light walkways. This type of landscaping light sits on top of a spike that you drive into the ground.

String lights are ideal for lighting outdoor living and dining areas. You can run string lights between trees or a set of poles, or weave them through a pergola.

Floodlights provide task and security lighting for driveways. Floodlights typically mount to the eaves of the home or garage via a simple-to-install mounting kit.

Spotlights are another popular form of outdoor lighting and are typically used to highlight architectural features on a home or landscaping features, such as trees, fountains, or statues. Similar to pathway lights, the spotlight typically sits on stakes that you drive into the ground.

Color and brightness

Next, think about the light color. Light color is measured in kelvins, with anything below 3000K falling on the warm side. Warm light gives off a yellowish glow. Lights that are 4000K and above are considered cool or bright white, giving off a bluish cast. Bright white lights may seem brighter, while warm lights offer more ambiance and mood. 

Although outdoor solar lights won’t be as bright as hardwired lights, they should still shine bright enough to do the job. A pathway light should produce around 10 to 15 lumens, while a spotlight should generate around 200 lumens. Floodlights designed to provide visibility and security will produce around 800 lumens.

Battery life

Outdoor solar lights are powered via a rechargeable battery that will provide a varying amount of runtime before requiring a recharge. Expect to get around eight hours for a walkway light and around six hours for a brighter spotlight. Floodlights, which can use more than 100 LEDs, will get significantly less run time due to their high-lumen output. As such, this style of light is only designed to come on for a short period when the light senses motion.

Keep in mind that solar lights need around six hours of direct sunlight each day to sufficiently recharge the batteries. Since rechargeable batteries eventually wear out and no longer hold a charge, look for solar outdoor lights with replaceable batteries.

Budget

Finally, don’t forget to consider your budget. You might be able to get two dozen lights for $20, but half of those lights may not work right out of the package. The other half may go out within a few weeks. While more expensive doesn’t always mean better, for solar landscaping lights, additional durability and quality can go a long way to help your investment. 

FAQs

Q: How do you pick outdoor solar lights?

 First, determine where you need lighting and choose a light fixture that meets that need. Choose a light that will provide the brightness and runtime you need to light the area adequately. Finally, determine where you can place the light so that its solar panel receives at least six hours of direct sunlight daily. 

Q: How long do solar landscape lights last?

The durability and lifespan of solar landscape lights vary by brand and model. Inexpensive lights may only last a year or two. Models with a sturdier build that fall into the $40 to $60 range can often last several years with proper care. Care includes cleaning off the solar panels, replacing the batteries, and protecting the lights from damage from pets and lawnmowers.

Q: Do you leave solar landscaping lights on all the time?

Yes, you generally leave solar landscaping lights on all the time. Most solar landscaping lights have light sensors that turn the lights as the sun goes down. However, some have remote controls with timers and different lighting schemes.

Q: How do you position outdoor solar lights?

Outdoor solar lights require maximum access to the sun. Direct sunlight charges the batteries so the lights can illuminate after dark. Any shade will limit the amount of power the solar panels can absorb. To maximize the light, avoid installing solar lights under trees, bushes, or in the shade of a house or other outdoor structure.

Q: Which solar lights are the brightest?

With their 15-lumen output, the Signature Garden 8-Pack Solar Garden Lights are the brightest pathway-style solar lights on the market. InnoGear Solar Spotlights put out 200 lumens each, making them the brightest solar spotlight. At the same time, the AmeriTop LED Solar Motion Sensor Lights are among the brightest outdoor lights you can buy at 800 lumens.

Final thoughts on the best solar landscape lights

The best solar landscaping lights improve safety, add character, and fit within your outdoor design plans. Whether that’s a string of lights strung through an arbor or post lights lining a walkway, these outdoor lights illuminate where you need them without gobbling up energy (and money).

Selecting a solar outdoor light is about choosing the right type of outdoor fixture for the job. Floodlights are the best option for providing visibility and security for driveways and areas around the home, while pathway lights are ideal for illuminating walkways. Once you know what type of light to choose, make sure to purchase one that provides adequate brightness to do the job with a solar cell that can capably recharge the batteries during the day.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best solar landscape lights of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/fall-solo-stove-fire-pit-amazon-deal/ Thu, 14 Sep 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=570408
Home photo
Solo Stove

Nothing says fall like a roaring fire. This smokeless pit from Solo Stove is on sale and can help you make a mean s'more.

The post Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo
Solo Stove

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The temperature is dropping to a Goldilocks-esque perfect degree—not too cold, but not too hot. That means one thing: it’s time to get cozy while you make some s’mores and enjoy a cold beverage around a hot fire. And you can make that vibe easier to access with $200 off a Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon.

Solo Stove Yukon Portable Fire Pit with Stand $399.98 (Was $609.99)

Home photo

Solo Stove

SEE IT

The Solo Stove Yukon is the company’s largest smokeless fire pit, coming in at 27 inches in diameter and 17 inches in height. It’s not the latest Solo Stove Yukon—that would be the Yukon 2.0—but its previous iteration has the same superior airflow and smokeless action as its updated cousin. It also lacks a removable ashtray, but it’s not a dealbreaker if you don’t mind doing a little extra work to dispose of them. We love this brand of portable fire pits and feel it will ignite your passion for evenings outdoors.

No campfire is complete without some quality tunes, of course. Play some campfire hits from the JBL Go 3, which is 20% off. It’s waterproof, dustproof, and packs a big punch despite its compact size—perfect for making all those rustic Americana guitar tones melodic as they are mournful.

Get this deal before it blows out—not all fires can last forever.

Here are other deals we’re falling for:

The post Cozy up to $200 in savings on this Solo Stove portable fire pit at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best night-vision goggles of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-night-vision-goggles/ Mon, 22 Nov 2021 20:18:37 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=388318
A lineup of the best night vision goggles on a white background
Amanda Reed

Here are our picks for night vision goggles that are perfect for camping, canoeing, surveilling, and everything in between.

The post The best night-vision goggles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best night vision goggles on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Bushnell Equinox X650 Night Vision Monocular is the best overall night-vision goggles Bushnell Equinox X650 Monocular
SEE IT

Night-vision monocular with a wide array of uses and a useful field of vision.

Best for boaters SiOnyx Aurora are the best night-vision goggles for boaters. SiOnyx Aurora
SEE IT

A monocular night-vision camera that can help you navigate, even if you aren’t a wayfinder. 
Best budget The CREATIVE XP 2021 Digital Night Vision Monocular is the best budget night vision goggles CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular
SEE IT

An excellent pair of inexpensive night-vision goggles.

You don’t have to be on a movie set or on a tour of duty to use night-vision goggles. While the most advanced NVGs are still largely reserved for those in the armed forces—as well as the exciting missions depicted by Hollywood—many of the best night-vision goggles have become affordable enough for general use. So if you’re looking to see the campsite in a new light or have a clearer view of when you have a clear shot, you can find a pair of goggles that’ll suit your needs. Still, because NVGs are so often associated with special ops, it’s understandable if you feel a little left in the dark. This guide is meant to enlighten your search for the best night-vision goggles.     

How we chose the best night-vision goggles

There’s a major difference between a cheap pair of night-vision goggles that use the term “night vision” loosely and those that are budget-friendly and tactical. To sort out the toys from the tried-and-trues, we looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, conducted first-hand testing, and performed heavy research. We also consulted experts who have contributed to outdoor publications like Field & Stream and Outdoor Life.

The best night-vision goggles: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you need night sight on the boat, on the trail, or on duty, here are the best night-vision goggles as we see them. 

Best overall: Bushnell Equinox X650 Monocular

The Bushnell Equinox X650 Night Vision Monocular is the best overall night-vision goggles

Bushell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Reliable performance, user-friendly zoom, and daytime color controls at a great price point.

Specs

  • Battery: 4 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IPX4 standard
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 5X

Pros

  • Tripod mountable
  • Color daytime viewing
  • Built-in video recording

Cons

  • Does its best in ambient light/moonlight

Whether you’re hiking under the stars or hunting under the cover of darkness, the  Bushnell Equinox X650 Night Vision Monocular can improve your nocturnal adventures. The built-in columnated infrared illuminator lets you see in pitch blackness, while the 32mm objective lens lets in plenty of light and affords a field of view of 26 feet at a distance of 100 yards. The 5X zooming means that the deer you’re hunting or the owl you’re watching will look even bigger. Meanwhile, these infrared goggles are themselves nicely compact, measuring under eight inches long, under six inches wide, and clocking in at less than a pound. Once you pop the batteries in, you’ll get up hours of use that’ll let your target be seen at night.

Best for boaters: SiOnyx Aurora  

SiOnyx Aurora are the best night-vision goggles for boaters.

SiOnyx

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An IP67 waterproof rating adds durability in case of a spill on a near-starless, moonless night.

Specs

  • Battery: 1 replaceable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP67 rated
  • Tripod mountable: No, but can be worn around the neck
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Weapon-rated
  • Provides full color in darkness
  • Sync to SiOnyx app for wireless video streaming

Cons

  • No auto-focusing

With an IP67 waterproof rating, the SiOnyx Aurora camera can survive falling into the water near the shore. (The included case is waterproof, too). The camera also features GPS, as well as a compass and accelerometer, offering useful information when you’re out on the water. The infrared technology lets you see in near-starless, moonless conditions, and you can sync the camera to your smartphone to stream your night footage wirelessly. You can also save footage via the 32GB microSD card. That’s all packed into a portable night-vision monocular that weighs less than three-quarters of a pound.

Best for long distances: ATN BinoX 4K 4-16x

ATN BinoX 4K 4-16x Best for long distances

ATN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These wireless-enabled 4K goggles feature a 1,000-yard zoom range and a laser rangefinder, making them a strong choice for long-distance spotting.

Specs

  • Battery: One replaceable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery
  • Water-resistant: Not published
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 4-16x

Pros

  • Staggering 16x zoom range spots targets up to 1,000 yards away
  • Integrated 1080p video recording
  • Rechargeable internal battery offers up to 15 hours of operation

Cons

  • Lacks an official IP waterproof rating
  • Infrared light doesn’t reach out to goggles’ full range

If long-distance night vision is what you’re after, you’ll be hard-pressed to find a more capable option than the ATN BinoX 4K. With its eye-watering 1,000-yard maximum zoom range, integrated 1080p microSD video recording, and laser rangefinder, the BinoX 4K is built to expand the range of your outdoor adventures in a convenient binocular-style form. The goggles use a 4K UHD sensor to deliver crisp picture quality at zoom distances of up to 10x before any resolution loss, and if you’re hunting on a team, the BinoX 4K can tag and send target location information to any other ATN devices and smartphones. While the ATN BinoX 4K features an integrated infrared (IR) lamp, its effective range naturally begins to drop at a distance of around 100 yards, making it ineffective for the goggles’ full zoom range in full darkness. The goggles are also marketed as being weatherproof, but as they lack a specific IP rating you’ll want to be mindful if working in wet conditions.

Best for military precision: Armasight PVS-14 Gen 3 Multi-Purpose Monocular

The Armasight PVS-14 Gen 3 Multi-Purpose Night Vision Monocular is the best night vision goggles for military precision

Armasight

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tactical night-vision goggles that are trusted by police forces and militaries around the world.

Specs

  • Battery: Single AA battery
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP67 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 1X

Pros

  • Military-grade and combat tested
  • Included 3-year warranty
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Expensive

The Armasight PVS-14 Gen 3 Multi-Purpose Monoculars are used by militaries around the world, so you know right away they’re serious. Add a 40-degree field of view and infrared illuminator, and you’ll find some of the best night-vision goggles. It’s no wonder that they’re used by police officers and military units alike. These military night-vision goggles, with up to 50 hours of battery life, will automatically adjust to the brightness in your environment. Plus, they have an ergonomic design with easy-to-use controls. They are regulated under International Traffic in Arms Regulations (ITAR) guidelines, which means you can’t bring this NVG outside U.S. soil.

Best for kids: JStoon Night-Vision Goggles

JStoon Night-Vision Goggle are the best night vision goggles for kids.

JStoon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A powerful casual option for helping your young one get in touch with nature.

Specs

  • Battery: 6 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP 56 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Great for casual use or beginners
  • Adjustable night-vision brightness
  • Video recording capabilities

Cons

  • IP56 rating offers limited protection against water and dust

The JStoon Night-Vision Goggles for kids could easily be good enough for many adults. They feature 3X magnification and 4X digital zoom, an 850 nm infrared illuminator, and are capable of seeing more than 984 feet in complete darkness. Kids (and adults) still learning patience can view footage (up to an hour of 960p high-resolution video) directly on the goggles’ 2.31-inch TFT screen. The 25mm objective lens won’t let in as much detail as the larger lenses that you’ll find in the best night-vision goggles. That said, the affordable price tag also means you don’t have to get too worked up if your kid breaks them—the IP56 rating offers only limited protection against water and dust.  

Best budget: CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular

The CREATIVE XP 2021 Digital Night Vision Monocular is the best budget night vision goggles

Creative XP

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A quality budget monocular that offers high-price features at a fraction of the cost.

Specs

  • Battery: 5 AA batteries
  • Water-resistant: Yes, IP56 rated
  • Tripod mountable: Yes
  • Optical magnification: 3X

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Under $100
  • SD card included

Cons

  • Not military grade

The CREATIVE XP Digital Night Vision Monocular is one of the best cheap night-vision devices you can buy, letting you see up to 650 feet ahead with a 25mm objective lens. An LED illuminator provides clear vision even in complete darkness—no ambient light required. It also allows you to take photos, record soundless video, and play back what you’ve captured. It comes with a USB cable and a 32 GB microSD card, but it can handle microSD cards up to 128 GB. Best of all, at just over 10 ounces, it’s highly portable for on-the-go use.

What to consider when buying the best night-vision goggles

NVGs work by amplifying the small amount of visible light present after the sun goes down to create images that your eye can see. They rely on complicated technology that turns light into electrical current before turning it back into visible light—much like old televisions. Complicated, too, is deciding between the best night-vision goggles. Here are some of the main features to consider.   

Have you made a style choice?

Night sight comes in different forms: goggles, binoculars, and monoculars. Night-vision goggles go over both eyes and can be mounted to your head. But unlike night-vision binoculars, pure night-vision goggles offer no magnification. Night-vision monoculars are used with just one eye and are, therefore, more compact than the other two options. So binoculars are best if you want to see objects farther away, monoculars are best if you need to keep weight down in your pack, and NVGs are best if you’re looking for night sight that’s easy to use, especially when on the move.    

Do you need the next generation?

The best night-vision goggles are made in four generations of technology, numbered 1 through 4. Generation 1 is the oldest and the cheapest, and they are still the most common for hobbyists. On the other hand, military NVGs are made with generations 2 and above and can also cost 10 times as much as Gen 1 technology—though such models are still available for public sale.

The main difference lies in the strength of the light amplification. While Gen 1 tops out at about 900 times the light gain, Gen 2 and above can reach 30,000 times the light gain. Gen 1 also offers lower resolution images—1,000 compared to more than 5,000, meaning Gen 2 and above gives you images with more clarity, especially at greater distances. Gen 2 and above also work better in lower-light situations since they have more than 240 UA/lm light sensitivity, compared to Gen 1, which tops out at that rating. Gen 3 is currently used by many U.S. military units since it features more than 300 yards of range, more than 10,000 hours of use, and a ton of versatility as it can be used with scopes, camera adapters, and magnification lenses. Gen 4 offers benefits like faster adaptation to shifting light, but it’s not otherwise widely viewed as a huge advancement over Gen 3. The next innovation in night vision will likely be augmented reality.

Can you see heat?

Thermal night vision is another means of seeing images in the dark. Rather than converting light into electrical current and amplifying that signal, thermal goggles detect heat, providing outlines of the world based on what’s hot and cold. That means when you use infrared goggles, the deer you’re tracking will stand out in bright red and orange against the cold blue of the night. Thermal goggles are best in extremely low-light situations, where there truly isn’t any light to be amplified.

Do you want to relive what you see?

Some of the best night-vision goggles are also cameras, letting you capture footage and save it, rather than just viewing everything in real-time. If you’re hoping to take pictures of owls or video of the northern lights, you definitely want night goggles that can also capture content. Many such night goggles come with 32GB SD cards for storing files. Other NVGs have built-in LCD screens that let you watch what you’ve captured on the goggles themselves, without having to transfer any files. 

FAQs

Q: How much do night-vision goggles cost?

Night vision goggles can start at around $100 and can go up to $4,000 if they’re military-grade.

Q: Do night-vision goggles work in total darkness?

Yes, night-vision goggles really work. They let you see objects in total darkness, even if those objects are football fields ahead of you. Night-vision goggles work by converting the small amount of light photons that are present at night into electrical current and amplifying those electrons before converting them back into visible light. Thermal goggles detect heat energy, letting you see the shapes of images, even in situations where there truly is no light—like in a smoky building. Night-vision goggles cannot see through walls, however. And the majority are not built for daytime use—doing so can cause internal and external damage to the NVR.

Q: Why is night vision so expensive?

Night vision is so expensive for a number of reasons. One reason is the high manufacturing costs for technology that can turn nearly invisible light into something visible or for technology that can read heat. Relatively low demand is another reason for the higher prices. In addition, many manufacturers have expensive contracts for making military NVGs, thus driving up the price point. You can find affordable options, though they may come with fewer bells and whistles.

Q: Can civilians get night-vision goggles?

Yes, as there are no laws or regulations regarding owning them. However, you can’t take military-grade or tactical models out of the country without approval from the U.S. State Department.

Final thoughts on the best night-vision goggles

The best night-vision goggles can let you see after dark in a whole new light. If you’re looking for military precision, you’ll need a pair of enhanced night-vision goggles with advanced technology that can amplify low levels of light by the tens of thousands. But that technology will also cost you thousands of dollars. For a factor of ten less, you can find night goggles that’ll sufficiently brighten the campsite or your view from the hunting stand. Ultimately, finding the best night-vision goggles comes down to how well you need to be able to see and how much you want to spend.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best night-vision goggles of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best neck fans in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-neck-fans/ Tue, 15 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=562654
The best neck fans provide welcome relief while going easy on your wallet.

Stay cool when the mercury is soaring with the help of these easy-to-wear devices.

The post The best neck fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best neck fans provide welcome relief while going easy on your wallet.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Green neck fan on a counter. JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler
SEE IT

This lightweight fan can last up to 16 hours on a single charge.
Best for cooling Torras' Coolify Air Conditioner and Fan is the best neck fan for cooling. Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan
SEE IT

This air conditioner and neck fan in one features a powerful motor.
Best budget Comlife makes the best neck fan at a budget-friendly price. Comlife Portable Beck Fan
SEE IT

This wallet-friendly model includes two fans for extra cooling.

Neck fans have already racked up millions of searches on TikTok because they’re cool. Or at least they’re cooling. These wearable fans provide a steady breeze exactly where you need it: right next to your face. They’re ideal for walks in the heat or keeping cool in the office, cost a fraction of bigger fans, and can be a stylish accessory. Here are some tips on what to look for before purchasing and our recommendations for the best neck fans.

How we chose the best neck fans

In the face of increasing heat, we’re on the lookout for ways to stay cool that don’t contribute to global warming. We looked to brands that are using the latest technology to provide relief in a package that’s lightweight and easy to use. In addition, we searched for models that would work for different uses. We considered the design, noise level, and time each charge lasted.  Finally, we included fans at a variety of price points.

The best neck fans: Reviews & Recommendations

Neck fans provide welcome relief from scorching sidewalks and on humid hikes, all while keeping your hands free. The best fans for your neck are lightweight, provide several levels of cooling breezes, and last at least 5 hours on a single charge. Here are our favorite options to help you chill.

Best overall: JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler

Green neck fan on a counter.

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: 9.1 ounces
  • Battery: 4,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 16 hours

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Stellar battery life
  • Available in five colors

Cons

  • Wayward strands of hair may get caught

The highly rated JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler is ready to go right from the box. Just connect the included USB-C cord and charge the included lithium-ion battery for up to 16 hours of use. Impressive! This bladeless fan is lightweight and felt good around my neck. This 360-degree fan features 78 vents and three speeds, providing a steady, refreshing breeze to the underside of my face without blowing my hair all over the place. This JisuLife fan is also reasonably quiet, though louder at Level 3—the highest wind speed.

That said, when I let my hair down, a few strands did get a little caught in the fan. And while this JisuLife model is great for a walk or hike on a hot day, it’s not particularly suited for running if you bounce up and down a lot as you stride. But it’s an attractive and affordable way to stay cool on the go. And it comes in five colors (dark green, dark blue, gray, green, and yellow).

Best for cooling: Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan

Torras' Coolify Air Conditioner and Fan is the best neck fan for cooling.

Torras

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: .77 pounds
  • Battery: 5,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 4 hours in cooling mode; up to 8 hours in fan mode

Pros

  • Air conditioner and fan in one
  • Lightweight
  • Long-lasting battery

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Some users say battery can run hot

Why not get the best of both worlds with a neck fan and air conditioner in one? Torras’ Coolify neck fan comes with a built-in ceramic semiconductor radiator that provides air conditioning the company says can cool the skin by 18 degrees Fahrenheit in three seconds. It also features a fan with a motor that operates at a speedy 500 rpm, blowing cool air out and up to your face through 36 vents. At just .77 pounds, it’s lightweight and has a sleek design. The included lithium-ion battery charges in about 2.5 hours and lasts up to 4 hours in cooling mode and up to 8 hours in fan mode.

Best adjustable: AMACOOL Bladeless Neck Fan

AMACOOL makes the best neck fan that's adjustable.

AMACOOL

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless
  • Weight: 9.7 ounces
  • Battery: 5,000 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 7 hours

Pros

  • Adjustable neck band
  • Comes with two motors
  • Features energy-saving mode

Cons

  • Some users say it’s not that powerful

A neck fan is an ingenious solution for on-the-spot cooling, but if it doesn’t feel comfortable on your neck, you’re not going to wear it. AMACOOL’s Bladeless Neck Fan was designed from silicone to be adjustable so that the neckband can fit everyone from a child to an adult with a large neck. At 5,000mAh, the battery is powerful for a neck fan. This device features two motors that power four speeds, including an energy-saving mode. It can also provide up to 9 hours of cooling (depending on the fan speed) from its 60 air vents. You can also use it with a stroller. Consider one of the best outdoor misting fans for a more comprehensive option.

Best for kids: ICEBIRDS Portable Neck Fan for Kids

ICEBIRDS makes one of the best neck fans for kids.

ICEBIRDS

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Bladeless 
  • Weight: 9.2 ounces
  • Battery: 1,800mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • Comes in animal designs
  • Affordable
  • Features three speeds

Cons

  • Battery not very powerful

Getting a kid to wear something is a lot easier if it has a fun design. ICEBIRDS Portable Neck Fan fits the bill. Designed specifically for children, these fans come in several animal-inspired models, including Bear Orange, Dinosaur Cyan, and Swan White. At 11.9 ounces, this neck fan is lightweight. It also has three speeds, though the 1,800-mAh battery isn’t particularly powerful. But depending on the speed, the charge can last for up to 9 hours. 

Best budget: Comlife Portable Neck Fan

Comlife makes the best neck fan at a budget-friendly price.

Comlife

SEE IT

Specs

  • Type: Blades
  • Weight: 6.9 ounces
  • Battery: 2,600 mAh
  • Battery life: Up to 9 hours

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Features two heads 
  • Long battery life

Cons

  • Battery may get hot
  • Some users say it’s not that powerful

Comlife’s wearable fan is an ideal way to stay cool without spending a lot of cash.  This double-headed small portable fan hangs comfortably on the neck and is 360-degree adjustable. It features six fan speeds, battery life between two and 9 hours depending on use, and an included USB cable for simple charging. This necklace fan weighs just 6.9 ounces, so you can even wear it during a vigorous workout or just for a walk around the neighborhood. — Carsen Joenk

Things to consider before you buy a neck fan

Neck fans are deceptively easy to use; just charge them and put them on for instant relief. But there are some features to look for when making your decision.

Bladeless v. with blades

The makers of bladeless fans say the benefit of their design is that users’ hair won’t get caught in blades and that they’re safer for kids. While that’s generally true, sometimes longer strands can still get caught in a neck fan’s vents. But hair is easier to remove and doesn’t get tangled as it would for models made with blades.

Power

The batteries of the neck fans on this list range from 1,800mAh to 5,000mAh. The best overall one we tested provided plenty of relief, but some users have said certain models aren’t powerful enough. While a neck fan should provide a cool breeze to your face and neck, keep in mind that at their size, they’re not a replacement for more powerful portable fans.

Two-in-one functionality

Some models are designed with additional features for extra cooling, such as the Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan, which is a neck fan and air conditioner in one. You’ll appreciate the added cooling power, but remember that this more advanced technology will cost more and may be harder to repair.

Battery life

Many of the picks on this list come with USB-C cords for charging. It’s important to remember that most of the neck fans on this list can operate at three levels of wind speed. The battery will last longer (up to 16 hours) if you use a lower speed or an energy-saving mode if the fan has one.

Noise levels

You don’t want a neck fan close to your face that’s so loud you can’t hear. The range of wind speeds also results in different noise levels. Look for neck fans that are quieter, such as the JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler, which operates at about 25 decibels.

FAQs

Q: How much does a neck fan cost?

The cost of a neck fan depends on the sophistication of its features. The Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan is designed with a ceramic semiconductor radiator that allows it to act as a neck fan and air conditioner in one. It costs around $120. At the other end of the spectrum, the budget-friendly Comlife Portable Neck Fan features two small fans and will cost you about $20.

Q: How long should you charge a neck fan?

The amount of time you should charge a neck fan depends on the model. Some, like the Torras Coolify Portable Air Conditioner Neck Fan, reached a full charge in about 2 hours, while the Comlife Portable Neck Fan takes about 4 hours to charge up fully. Once your device is charged, you should remove the power source to ensure the battery doesn’t overheat.

Q: Can I leave a fan on for 12 hours?

You can leave a neck fan on for 12 hours if you have a model like the JisuLife Bladeless Neck Cooler, which lasts up to 16 hours. Keep in mind that you’ll have to run the fan at a lower speed for it to last that long.

Final thoughts on the best neck fans

Just as headphones and earbuds help you create a serene bubble on the go, a neck fan can help add some physical cool to that mental oasis. These adaptable options can provide targeted relief for hours, saving energy and money. As the hot days linger, a neck fan is an essential tool to add to your collection of weather-related accessories.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best neck fans in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best patio heaters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-patio-heater/ Thu, 16 Dec 2021 18:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=283668
The best outdoor heaters
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Being outdoors is a natural mood enhancer, even when the temperature drops, so pick a patio heater and get that pick me up.

The post The best patio heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best outdoor heaters
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Black and silver patio heater on a mushroom shape with wheels AmazonBasics 46,000 BTU Outdoor Propane Patio Heater with Wheels
SEE IT

This high-powered propane options has a slim space-saving design and a rust-resistant finish.
Best electric Black electric patio heater with remote control Sunday Living Electric Patio Heater, Outdoor Heater
SEE IT

This electric option offers modern features like a remote control, multiple power settings, and a 12-hour timer.
Best budget Mocha color patio heater Mainstay Tall Mocha Patio Heater
SEE IT

Stay cozy all year long with this affordable, yet powerful gas-powered pick.

If you’ve ever been a little underdressed for the weather at an outdoor get-together, you know the feeling of being irritated as the cold creeps in—especially after the sun goes down and there’s nary a patio heater in sight. A chill can put a damper on the fun of being with friends. However, getting fresh air is a boon to our mental and physical health, even if the sun isn’t warm. Luckily, there’s a good solution to keep you and your guests comfortable so you can socialize longer in your yard: an outdoor patio heater (or two, or three, if your wallet can handle it).

Patio heaters can enable you to stay outside later during nice weather and extend outdoor sessions into the colder seasons without worrying about your guests’ comfort. Even in wintery weather, you can get together outdoors with friends if you have ways to take the chill out. So here’s our suggestion for how to do just that: Pick the best outdoor heater below that matches your budget, preference for the type of heat, availability of an electrical outlet, how much output you need, and desired appearance.

How we chose the best patio heaters

We wouldn’t want to leave you in the cold when it comes to buying the hottest seasonal piece of backyard furniture: the patio heater. In order to separate the torches that light our fires from the lukewarm lighters, we looked at critical reviews, peer recommendations, tested them out on our own back porches, and conducted a bonfire’s worth of research.

The best patio heaters: Reviews & Recommendations

The best patio heaters should be as hot as the sixth circle of hell. We may be neutral in some aspects of life, but not here: We believe that at least one of the patio heaters we’ve listed should provide enough warmth to make guests feel cozy during a wintertime fête. Combine a patio heater with a portable fire pit, and you’ve got quite the outdoors event properly accessorized.

Best overall: AmazonBasics 46,000 BTU Outdoor Propane Patio Heater with Wheels

Black and silver patio heater on a mushroom shape with wheels

Amazon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This powerful patio is reasonably priced and easy to transport for hosting on the fly.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • BTUs: 46,000
  • Heating coverage: 9 ft.
  • Dimensions: 32.12 x 32.12 x 91.3 inches

Pros

  • Affordable
  • Easy to transport
  • One-touch ignition

Cons

  • Need batteries for the igniter

With 46,000 BTU output and stainless steel construction, it provides strong heat and looks classy. Its wheeled base makes it easy for you to transport. The bottom has a sand or water reservoir (no sand included, though) to help keep it weighed down. Installation is not too difficult; just be aware that you’ll need batteries for the igniter.

Best pyramid-style: EAST OAK Pyramid Patio Heater

EAST OAK Pyramid Patio Heater

EAST OAK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A piezoelectric ignition and auto-shutoff combine ease and safety.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane (electric start)
  • BTUs: 48,000
  • Heating coverage: 15 ft.
  • Dimensions: 91 x 20 x 20 inches

Pros

  • High powered
  • All stainless steel design
  • Wheels for easy movement

Cons

  • Slightly uneven heat distribution

Just over 90-inches tall, this pyramid-style outdoor patio heater comes with a wheel kit so you can move it easily wherever you need it. It’s well-designed and easy to use, with a triple safety protection system that’ll automatically shut the heater off when it’s tipped over. If its flame is accidentally extinguished, the heater will stop feeding gas to the flame. Delivering 42,000 BTUs of heat, this patio heater can cover areas of up to 15 feet. That’s ideal for a backyard gathering because nobody will feel cramped. Finally, this heater’s rust-resistant stainless steel frame will help it survive the outdoor elements.

Best wall: Briza Infrared Patio Heater

Black wall patio heater with remote control

Briza

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Mount this heater on the wall or use it like a stand-up heater thanks to the included tripod stand.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • BTUs: 3,069-5,115
  • Heating coverage: 9 ft.
  • Dimensions: 35.5 x 48 x 4 inches

Pros

  • Built-in timer
  • Three heat levels
  • Included tripod stand

Cons

  • Not as strong as a propane heater

If you’re thinking of mounting your heater to a wall outdoors, this infrared patio heater is a good pick: It can be mounted or used on the included stand, which adjusts up and down so you can find the right height. It provides instant infrared heating at an output of 1,500 watts—not as strong as most propane heaters, but simple plug-and-play use with remote control and a safety shutoff function. This infrared heater does have an IP55 rating, however, which means it can withstand harsh outdoor conditions.

Best propane: Mainstays Tall Mocha Patio Heater

Mocha color patio heater

Mainstay

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A matte bronze finish adds style, and 10 feet of heating coverage ensure your guests stay warm and cozy.

Specs

  • Power source: Propane
  • BTUs: 48,000
  • Heating coverage: 10 ft.
  • Dimensions: 30 x 30 x 85 inches 

Pros

  • Easy to move
  • Wide heat coverage
  • Cheaper than similar models

Cons

  • Buyers complain of dents or scratches on the base

There’s a bit of a gamble when you choose this low-priced pick: several buyers have complained about dents or scratches on the base. But if you’re up for the risk, it’s significantly cheaper than comparable models and has the same functionality: 48,000 BTU with a push-button igniter and adjustment knob. However, there is no base weight (so don’t leave it out in windy weather) and it doesn’t come with a cover.

Best budget: Sunday Living Electric Patio Heater

Black electric patio heater with remote control

5 SUNDAY LIVING

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take the chill off your porch with this patio heater that’s less than $100.

Specs

  • Power source: Corded electric
  • BTUs: 5,000
  • Heating coverage: 4 ft.
  • Dimensions: 21.5 x 9.6 x 20 inches

Pros

  • Waterproof
  • Easy-to-read digital panel
  • Wall-mountable

Cons

  • Not as powerful as other models

This highly rated outdoor electric patio heater has three power settings: 500W, 1,000W, and 1,500W. Its height is adjustable from 4.5 feet to 7.2 feet with telescoping rods; it can be tilted 15 degrees up or 20 degrees down, and it can heat an area of about 15 square feet. You can also wall-mount the heater. The unit is waterproof and comes with remote control and an easy-to-read digital front panel. 

What to consider when buying the best patio heaters

When it comes to options for outdoor heaters, there are several types that might be the choice for you: a propane patio heater, an electric patio heater, or a natural gas patio heater. You can also look for tall stand-up models that emit heat downward, tabletop patio heaters, models that heat outward vertically or horizontally, or models that mount on an outside wall or structure. There are lots of creative ways to situate your heater, depending on where you need it.

The most popular type is the one you’ll find outside of many restaurants, hotels, and other businesses: the tall, dome-topped metal heater that you stand under as the heat beams down on you like the sun. These are also known as “mushroom-type heaters.” You can get that same kind for your yard, and it comes in a variety of finishes and BTU capacities (the British Thermal Unit, a unit of heat—typically 40,000 or more for an effective patio heater). But that’s far from your only option.

When you consider the type of heat you want, you’ll also have to consider the power that’s available to you: propane means filling tanks frequently (and potentially keeping a backup tank around so you don’t run out in the middle of a gathering); electric means you have to have close access to an outdoor outlet (and deal with cord placement so your guests don’t trip); and gas means you’ll need professional installation to tap into your property’s gas line, and you won’t be able to move the unit easily once installed.

What about outdoor heater safety features?

As with any other product that produces high heat, there are risks involved with using outdoor heaters for patios, and the risks differ a bit with each product type. The main risk involved is starting a fire if the heat source touches something flammable. So, above all, make sure whatever outdoor heater you use, you keep it a safe distance away from your house, outdoor furniture and cushions or pillows, as well as trees, and make sure branches and leaves can’t fall into the heater. Never put towels or bathing suits on a heater to dry, and keep the heater off of rugs. Also, make sure that if you’re using an outdoor electric heater, it’s nowhere near a pool or other source of water. Most manufacturers caution against using an extension cord with an electric patio heater as well, so be aware of your distance from an outdoor outlet.

With propane heaters, inspect the tank and connections before each use: make sure the tank isn’t rusty, and that all connections are secure. Replace any tubing or accessories that look worn. Be sure the base is on level ground and not in danger of tipping over. When you’re done using a patio propane heater, make sure it’s not only turned off but also that the propane tank connection is shut down.

All outdoor heaters should come with built-in safety features to shut down the heat supply if the unit tips over, but don’t depend solely on that. Make sure whatever unit you buy feels very sturdy and appropriate for the ground or surface you’re using. Add weight to the bottom (usually sandbags) if that’s possible; don’t rely on the weight of a propane tank alone to steady your unit. Propane tanks aren’t heavy enough to keep your outdoor patio heater safe if a strong wind picks up.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best patio heaters cost?

The best patio heaters can cost between $80-$400, depending on what category of heat they produce, the kind of mount they use, and other built-in features.

Q: Can I put a patio heater under a gazebo?

In general, you can put a patio heater under a gazebo, roof, or another type of awning as long as there’s enough clearance. Manufacturers’ instructions should include this information, but as a rough rule of thumb, you’ll need at least two (sometimes three) feet of clearance above a mushroom-style heater if it’s going to be used under a roof. Propane and gas heaters are not meant to be used indoors or in enclosed outdoor spaces, however. Some electric heaters can be used indoors or out.

Q: How long does a patio heater tank last?

When you choose a propane patio heater, you’ll have to regularly trade in the propane tank for a full one (which you can do at many hardware and home improvement stores). Most full-size patio heaters use either 15-pound or 20-pound liquid propane tanks, and how quickly you’ll use them up depends on how high you set the temperature: setting it on high will use up the propane faster than setting it on low, naturally. A 20-pound propane tank holds approximately 430,000 BTUs. You can divide that number by the BTU rating on your patio heater to figure out approximately how long it will last on high. If your propane heater is 43,000 BTUs, you can divide 430,000 by 43,000 to find out that it will last approximately 10 hours before needing a refill.

Q: Are patio heaters safe on decks?

If you have a wood or composite deck, you might worry about whether patio heaters are safe for decks. In short: they are safe on decks, as long as you don’t leave them running unattended and as long as they’re not in an enclosed space. There is no active flame or embers as there are with a fire pit, and the bottom of a patio heater should never get hot. Tipping is a concern, though, so be sure that your heater’s base is weighed down and steady. In storms or heavy winds, move the heater indoors to a garage or shed if possible.

Final thoughts on the best patio heaters

Within the three main categories of heat (propane heaters, natural gas heaters, and electric/infrared heaters), you’ll find an array of sizes, designs, and prices. The end result is the same: the best patio heaters are a way to allow you and your guests to remain comfortable outdoors longer even when the weather isn’t perfect.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best patio heaters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-use-trekking-poles/ Fri, 01 Sep 2023 16:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=567342
person learning how to use trekking poles
Learning how to use trekking poles can make hiking easier on your joints. Владимир Брызгин / Pexels

Relieve your joints and hike faster for longer.

The post Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
person learning how to use trekking poles
Learning how to use trekking poles can make hiking easier on your joints. Владимир Брызгин / Pexels

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

If there’s one thing hikers love to debate, is the practicality and functionality of the humble trekking pole. Some say it’s just an inefficient luxury item weighing you down, while others regard it as a truly useful tool that can improve balance and speed on the trail. 

Whatever camp you’re in, science has proven time and time again that trekking poles have multiple benefits, and using them correctly on every hike can help you get the most out of them. 

The science behind trekking poles

Hiking with trekking poles can provide plenty of physiological advantages. A 2020 review published in Wilderness & Environmental Medicine found that these tools can reduce the pressure and load on your lower joints by dispersing your body weight to your arms. This is especially true when hiking downhill, which means those with knee pain will likely find picking up a pair of trekking sticks incredibly helpful.

[Related: 10 time-tested essentials that can help you survive your next hiking trip]

And even if you have no joint pain, a 2000 study in Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise found trekking poles can make your trekking experience more comfortable. Erica Little, a hiking guide and owner of Big Bend Boating and Hiking Company in Terlingua, Texas, explains poles also provide substantial balance and stability when hiking through mud, snow, or across moving water or uneven terrain, making your hike feel easier than it is. That feel-good sensation will last even when you’re back home—several studies have found poles to be helpful at reducing delayed onset muscle soreness during challenging uphill treks. 

But these tools can provide more than better, more comfortable hikes. According to another study published in 2001 in Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise, trekking poles could also help you hike faster and even increase the length and frequency of your stride. They could even help you burn more calories—a 2018 study by researchers at the University of Verona, in Italy, concluded that using your poles at an angle on flat terrain (a discipline known as Nordic walking) requires more energy than a regular walk because it invites your arms to aid in pushing you up or lowering you down. 

Trekking pole technique is everything

Carrying a stick in your hand doesn’t mean you’re automatically in for a breezier hike. In fact, learning how to use trekking poles can mean the difference between just swinging the metal sticks around and actually benefiting from them.

For starters, trekking poles need to be at the right height, says Little. When you’re on level ground (or close to it), adjust your poles so that your forearms and biceps form a 90-degree angle when your hands are on the grips, and the tips are resting on the ground a few inches away from your little toes. This will offer the most comfortable position for your arms and the best leverage for pushing yourself up.

When hiking uphill, shorten the poles by a few inches—the steeper the slope, the shorter the poles should be. If your hands are above your shoulders before taking the new step, you won’t have the leverage or power you need to push yourself up, explains Gates Richards, associate director of wilderness medicine at the National Outdoor Leadership School.

When hiking downhill, lengthen your poles by a few inches to help keep you balanced and upright, while allowing your arms to better aid in lowering you with each step, Richards adds.

Whether you’re hiking up or down, Little instructs to keep your arms and poles close to your body, ideally a few inches away from your sides while the tips rest a few inches away from your feet. It’s critical that the position feels natural to you, she says: if you keep your arms too close, you’ll lose some balance and leverage, and if you plant the tips too close to your feet, the poles could become a tripping hazard.

If you’re still unsure about your technique, Richards says there’s one easy way to tell if you’re using poles effectively: If you’re making progress easier, then they’re working.

Pro tips for using trekking poles

Once you’ve got your body-to-pole orientation down, a few tweaks will ensure maximum comfort and effectiveness. 

Start by using the wrist straps as intended: Slide a hand through each strap from the bottom up to get a little extra wrist support, says Little. Tighten the straps so they’re loose enough to easily slide your hand out again, but snug enough to keep your wrist from flexing too much.

Then, as you walk, alternate the swinging of the poles with your legs just like you would your arms when walking. This means planting the left trekking pole at the same time as you take a step with your right foot and vice versa.

On a steep uphill or downhill slope, if you need a little extra assistance raising or lowering yourself, you can also plant both poles ahead of you at the same time. This will provide a bit more stability and the combined power of both your arms.

Finally, stay safe by leaving extra space between you and the hikers in front and behind you. The tips of the trekking poles can sometimes get stuck between rocks and if the person in front of you stops abruptly to take care of it, you could collide with them. Likewise, it’s happened more than once that a hiker with trekking poles will reach back to adjust their pack without letting go of their sticks, creating a potential hiker kebab situation if the person behind them is too close.

Accessorize your trekking poles

When you purchase a new pair of trekking poles, they probably come accompanied by at least two sets of accessories. They’re both useful in specific situations, so don’t toss them out with the packaging.

The first one is a pair of rubber tips that fit over the metal points. They are multifunctional—pop them onto the ends of your poles to protect your luggage and its contents from getting stabbed while traveling. When hiking on rocky terrain or paved paths where you don’t need the traction offered by metal tips, these rubber protectors are excellent at silencing the irritating and repetitive tapping of metal on rock.

[Related: What to know before you go on your first multi-day hike]

The second accessory you’ll probably find is a pair of round, hole-peppered disks called baskets. They are designed for use in snow, mud, and sand—they’re like snowshoes to help keep your sticks on top of the soft stuff. “The bigger the basket the better. It’ll help your pole from sinking in too deep,” says Little.

Get the hang of it

If you’re new to trekking poles, you may find them awkward or unwieldy at first. That’s normal, Little says. Your first hike may feel a bit unnatural as you think too hard about when and where to place your poles with every step. Don’t worry, though: “It will become second nature,” she states.

As it does, you may choose to hike with one pole instead of two or ignore the wrist straps in favor of having the option to release the poles quickly in case of a tumble. Find what works for you and stick with it.

The post Learn how to use trekking poles and improve your time on the trail appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best trampolines of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-trampoline/ Tue, 24 Aug 2021 14:03:39 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=391462
A lineup of the best trampoline on a white background
Amanda Reed

Endless high-flying enjoyment is yours to be had with trampolines that can appeal to everyone in the family.

The post The best trampolines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best trampoline on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Jumpzylla trampoline on a blue and white background Jumpzylla Trampoline 14FT
SEE IT

Sturdy construction and an enclosure net keep your family safe while jumping.
Best for toddlers The Little Tikes climb 'n slide trampoline on a blue and white background Little Tikes Climb ’N Slide Trampoline
SEE IT

Rugged, sturdy, and safe for the most fun jumping.
Best budget A Skywalker round trampoline on a blue and white background Skywalker Round Trampoline 10FT
SEE IT

Affordable and just as safe.

Trampolines are an excellent way to get good, solid exercise that’s not boring. There’s just something about all that jumping and bouncing that makes a body feel good. Kids love them, too. If you’re tired of paying to take your kids to the trampoline park, invest in a trampoline for your yard and let them (and you) get a fun workout whenever they want. However, there’s more to selecting a trampoline than just the fun quotient. You’ll need to consider size, for one. There’s also shape, materials, and whether it has springs or not. Some even involve water. How many people—and the size of those people, i.e., is it for adults or children—should also be on your list of things to think about. Who knew trampolines could be so complicated? Thankfully, with so many options, this means the best trampoline is out there just waiting for you and your family. 

How we chose the best trampolines

When deciding on the best trampolines currently for sale, we separated them largely by target use. A trampoline for adults will differ from a kids’ or even a toddler’s trampoline. There’s also the material that provides the bounce. While most trampolines will have springs, others are springless. Trampoline location is also a factor. A trampoline meant for outside, such as a backyard, will differ from an indoor trampoline. And while any trampoline will exercise your body, some fulfill the specific function of workout trampoline. 

Once we separated them into categories, we used personal experience, market consensus, and peer reviews to determine the best trampoline for each category. You can feel confident that all of the choices here represent the best of the bouncy best.

The best trampolines: Reviews & Recommendations

The best trampoline will meet your specific needs, whether for a single jumper or many, adults or children, or indoors or outdoors. Above and beyond this, though, as you’ll be using your trampoline to jump into the above and beyond, you should always keep safety in mind. Thankfully, the best trampolines are also assuredly safe, with plenty of protective measures to ensure harmless fun. Of course, outdoor-use trampolines are designed with the weather in mind and will be weather-resistant and fade-proof to boot.

Best overall: Jumpzylla Trampoline 14FT

A Jumpzylla trampoline on a blue and white background

Jumpzylla

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 168” L x 168” W x 103” H
  • Frame: Galvanized stainless steel
  • Weight capacity: 450 lbs.

Pros

  •  Affordable
  • Powder-coated frame to resist rust
  • Five colors available

Cons

  • Relatively short warranty period

Jumpzylla trampolines feature a modern design with five colors to choose from. They’re also on the affordable side when compared to some of their competitors, an attractive proposition for a family looking to add a trampoline to the yard.

The 14-foot Jumpzylla trampoline, with its maximum weight capacity of 450 lbs., will provide plenty of jump size and support for kids and adults alike. Construction is sturdy, with a galvanized stainless steel frame powder-coated for rust resistance. The jumping mat is made of high-quality materials and is waterproof and UV-resistant—exactly what you want for an outdoor trampoline. Plenty of padding on the frame and springs and an enclosure net ensure your family will be safe while jumping.

Best springless: Springfree 13FT Jumbo Square Trampoline

A Springfree springless trampoline on a blue and white background

Springfree

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 156” L x 156” W x 110.4” H
  • Frame: Metal
  • Weight capacity: 1,100 lbs.

Pros

  • Unique construction ensures safety
  • Extremely durable
  • 10-year warranty

Cons

  • Pricey

As the name suggests, Springfree offers a springless trampoline design. Flexible composite rods that sit under the frame and mat, offering support and, of course, plenty of bounce. To up the safety, a proprietary FlexiNet enclosure resistant to tearing and enclosure rods that bend as you jump prevent impact injuries. The 13-foot square model works out to the same amount of jump area as a 16-foot circular trampoline.

All this advanced trampoline technology comes at a price, though. Springfree’s trampolines are considerably more expensive than spring varieties. You do get a 10-year warranty, though, which is superb.

Best indoor: Giantex 7 Ft Trampoline for Kids

A Giantex trampoline on a blue and white background

Giantex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 87.6” L x 62” W x 17” H
  • Frame: Galvanized steel
  • Weight capacity: 220 pounds

Pros

  • Indoor and outdoor use
  • Sturdy U-shaped base
  • Great price

Cons

  • Foam on bars may come off after repeated use

Setting up a large trampoline in the backyard may just not be possible for some people. In this case, you will want a trampoline that can be used indoors. For this, we recommend Giantex’s 7 Ft Trampoline For Kids, a fantastically fun (and safe) jumper that works just as well indoors as out.

Safety is part of the design. The zippered enclosure net seamlessly meets the base, so there’s no place for children to become stuck. The poles are covered in EPE foam to reduce the chance of injury. The springs are encased in a waterproof pad, meaning there’s no chance of getting caught between springs. The jump mat is tear-resistant with plenty of bounce, and the 220 lb. weight limit means multiple children can enter the enclosure at the same time (under adult supervision, of course).

Best for adults: Zupapa Trampoline 14FT

A Zupapa round trampoline on a blue and white background

Zupapa

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: Unavailable
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 425 pounds

Pros

  • Great for adults and children
  • No-gap design prevents spring injuries
  • Comprehensive warranty

Cons

  • Some have trouble with assembly

Sometimes, adults will want to get in on the high-jumping action. In times like this, it’s beneficial to have a trampoline that is sturdy enough to support full-size bodies. The 14-foot Zupapa trampoline is excellent for adults and big kids alike.

As of 2021, its trampolines have a no-gap design, so arms and legs can’t get caught under the safety mat that covers the spring. Frames are strong and durable, with long net poles for extra sturdiness. There’s a comprehensive warranty should something go wrong, and Zupapa gets excellent marks for its customer service. Just be sure to have a few extra pairs of hands on hand for assembly.

Best for toddlers: Little Tikes Climb ’N Slide Trampoline

The Little Tikes climb 'n slide trampoline on a blue and white background

Little Tikes

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 84” L x 84” W x 90” H
  • Frame: Blow-molded plastic
  • Weight capacity: 105 pounds

Pros

  • Includes ladder and slide
  • Durable and weather-resistant
  • Easy to put together

Cons

  • Outdoor only

Little Tikes has been making toys for toddlers for five decades now. You have surely seen its famous Cozy Coupe Car before—maybe you even had one yourself. Its Climb ’N Slide Trampoline lives up to the company’s reputation.

This outdoor-only trampoline is rugged and sturdy, as you’d expect from Little Tikes. It has safety foam covering all exposed metal, plus a high-quality pad protector hiding the safety springs. Two zippered entrances provide access in and out of the trampoline area, and children will love the colorful ladder and slide. Adults, on the other hand, will love how easy it is to put together.

Best for exercise: BCAN Foldable Mini Trampoline

A BCAN foldable trampoline on a blue and white background

BCAN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 40” L x 40” W x 42” H/48” L x 48” W x 58.5” H
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 330 pounds/440 pounds

Pros

  • Now stronger alloy steel
  • Adjustable handlebar
  • Foldable for storage

Cons

  • Springs attached to mat by fabric

All of the trampolines we’ve looked at so far are about recreation. However, BCAN’s Foldable Mini Trampoline is aimed at people wanting a rebounding trampoline for exercise. Available in two sizes, 40-inch and 48-inch (the larger has a higher weight limit), BCAN’s Foldable Mini Trampoline includes a high-quality steel frame, eight legs, and enough springs to ensure plenty of good bounce. The height of the safety handlebar is adjustable, while the mat is durable and waterproof. As the name suggests, the trampoline can be folded for easy storage, and you don’t even need to remove the pad. Make sure to stay hydrated, too.

Best budget: Skywalker Round Trampoline 10FT

A Skywalker round trampoline on a blue and white background

Skywalker

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 120” L x 120” W x 110” H
  • Frame: Alloy steel
  • Weight capacity: 175 pounds

Pros

  • Sturdy construction
  • Incredible price
  • Safety net has dual zippers and a latch clip

Cons

  • Low weight capacity

Not everyone has a massive yard in which to set up a trampoline. For those with smaller gardens, we can’t recommend Skywalker’s 10-foot Round Trampoline enough. Best of all, it’s so affordable that you won’t have to dip into savings to give the kids a jumping good time. Despite the low cost, Skywalker’s Round Trampoline doesn’t skimp on safety features. The alloy-steel constructed frame is plenty strong, with four foam-covered angled poles that rise from the base. These add stability and hold the net, which keeps jumpers safely inside. Speaking of safety, Skywalker’s trampoline features a clever design that puts the springs outside the jump area. They’re covered with a pad for extra safety.

What to consider when buying the best trampolines

Like inflatable pools, you want to do some research before jumping into a particular option (all pun intended). Here’s what else you should look for when getting a trampoline:

Size

In the same way you would keep size in mind when buying a car or bed, you’ll want to do the same thing with a trampoline. A trampoline for a single person, such as a workout trampoline, will be much smaller than one for groups. If you have a large family (and a big yard) or plan to invite the neighborhood over for trampoline parties, a big-size trampoline—such as one 14 feet or larger—is what you want.

Weight limit

Along with size, you’ll need to keep the trampoline’s weight limit in mind. While larger trampolines will undoubtedly have higher weight limits, trampolines for adults will be more robust than ones for kids and toddlers. Before buying, check the single-jumper weight capacity and take it seriously to avoid possible future injuries. Although every trampoline will have its own weight specifications, in general, the following overall weight limits may apply:

  • Mini trampolines (for toddlers): around 100 lbs.
  • Rebounders (for exercise): 300-600 lbs.
  • Eight-foot trampolines: 175-200 lbs.
  • 10-foot trampolines: 200-250 lbs.
  • 12-foot trampolines: 200-350 lbs.
  • 14-foot trampolines: 200-450 lbs.
  • 16-foot trampolines: 250-450 lbs.

Safety

As with any other physical activity, it’s better to be safe than sorry—this applies doubly to trampolines. Make sure that you respect the weight limit set by the manufacturer. A safety net is necessary, especially when children use the trampoline. If there’s no net, such as on an exercise trampoline, make sure there’s a handlebar to hold onto. Be sure to jump in the center of the trampoline to avoid injuries on the springs. Additional padding to cover the springs is highly recommended. If you can afford it, spring-less trampolines are an even better choice for safety.

FAQs

Q: What trampoline size should I buy?

The size of the trampoline you buy will depend on the amount of space you have for the trampoline and the age of the people who will be using it. For the first point, measure how much space you can allot to the trampoline. Pay attention to whether you can accommodate a round or rectangular trampoline. As for the second, the ideal-sized trampoline is directly related to the age of the bouncer. Toddlers up to three years of age will do best with a mini trampoline. Four to seven-year-olds will match with six-foot to 12-foot models, while older kids will need nine or 12-foot to 14-foot models. If you have large families, 14 feet or more will be satisfactory.

Q: Are rectangular trampolines better than round ones?

Rectangular models aren’t necessarily better than round ones; however, they do offer a higher bounce. No matter where you jump on a rectangular trampoline, it will give you a bounce with equal height and power.

Q: Are springless trampolines safer?

Springless trampolines offer an alternative to the standard, spring-based trampoline. Rather than have a frame around the edge, with springs attached to the interior mat, spring-less trampolines use a unique construction with the frame below the mat fabric. Because there are no springs, users can jump on the mat all the way to the edge without risk of injury. However, springless trampolines are significantly more expensive than their spring counterparts. If safety is a large concern for you, they may be worth looking into.

Q: Are in-ground trampolines better?

There are pros and cons for in-ground models. Pros include that they are more attractive in your yard and are better for children because they can’t get their fingers caught as easily, can’t get stuck underneath, and don’t have as far to fall should they topple off. Cons are that they are pricier and a hassle to move once installed.  

Q: How do I prepare my yard for a trampoline?

Prepare your yard for a trampoline by ensuring you have the right amount of space. In order to do that, measure your yard and ensure there are at least three to four feet on each side of where you plan to place it. Ensure all brush and trees have been cleared, and find a spot within your yard that’s level.

Q: How do I get more bounce out of my trampoline?

Once you have a trampoline, you may want to hack it to get even more altitude from your bounces. While safety should be your first concern, if you really do want to increase your jump height, there are a number of things you can try. First, older trampolines will gradually lose their bounce as springs become worn down, rusty, stretched out, or even broken. Try replacing your springs to restore your trampoline to its former glory. If you still want more bounce to the ounce, you can try altering the spring pattern, criss-crossing them in X or V patterns. Be aware that this may cause the springs to wear down faster, though. You can also try adding more springs or changing the springs out for heavy-duty ones.

Q: How long should a trampoline last?

Trampolines generally last between three to eight years, depending on the frequency of use. As with many other things, regular maintenance can help extend the life of your bouncy friend. Replacing rusty, stretched, and broken springs will bring the bounce back to your trampoline. Don’t forget to keep an eye on the mat and frames as well.

Final thoughts on the best trampolines

Finding the right trampoline for you or your family can significantly improve your quality of life. It’s a great, full-body workout and—assuming your trampoline is big enough—something the whole family can do together. By following the mantra of safety first and choosing a trampoline that is appropriate for the age of the jumpers as well as the size of the area available, you’re sure to find one that is perfect for your situation. Happy jumping.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best trampolines of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-security-cameras/ Wed, 30 Aug 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=566666
A lineup of the best outdoor security cameras
Amanda Reed

We take a close look at the best models that let you keep a close eye on your home.

The post The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best outdoor security cameras
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall An Arlo Pro 5S 2K outdoor security camera on a blue and white background. Arlo Pro 5S 2K
SEE IT

Arlo’s powerful collection of camera-based and cloud-based features makes it well worth the cost.
Best with 4K resolution A Lorex 4K spotlight indoor/outdoor security camera on a blue and white background Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera
SEE IT

You can choose between package detection or vehicle, person, and animal detection with this camera.
Best budget A Wyze Cam v3 outdoor security camera on a blue and white background Wyze Cam v3
SEE IT

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market.

Over the past 8 or 10 years, the outdoor security camera market has changed dramatically. What was once a small market has become massive, with reports showing even more growth in the coming years. That’s great news for consumers; market growth means there will continue to be competition, which has kept prices for security cameras pretty low. It also forces higher-end features in commercial outdoor security cameras, such as 4K resolution image sensors and AI-enhanced capabilities, to appear more quickly on lower-end DIY models. Although there’s been plenty of focus on doorbell cameras to catch package theft and indoor cameras to ensure the pets aren’t wreaking havoc in the home, outdoor security cameras give you robust peace of mind over your entire property. The best outdoor security cameras are easy to use, smart, and include important security features like two-factor authentication to protect consumer data. 

How we chose the best outdoor security cameras

I’ve written about many types of different cameras, including outdoor security cameras, for a number of publications over the years, including PCMag.com, Consumer Reports, The New York Times, Tom’s Guide, and Gearbrain. I brought my expertise in this area to help discover the best outdoor security cameras. I also looked at critical reviews, user recommendations, and did a lot of research to narrow down our list to find the best models. 

To find the best ones, I carefully considered a number of factors, including specific features such as video resolution, night vision capability, and audio, as well as more expansive qualities, like ease of use, versatility, and smart home compatibility. 

The best outdoor security cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

You’ll find a variety of outdoor security cameras on this list, which should also accommodate a wide range of budgets and needs, from inexpensive models that cost as little as $30 to more feature-packed models that cost closer to $300. One of our picks should give you a better eye on your driveway or backyard and can help complement and strengthen a home security system.

Best overall: Arlo Pro 5S 2K 

An Arlo Pro 5S 2K outdoor security camera on a blue and white background.

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 2K video resolution
  • Field of view: 160 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription)
  • Size: 3.5 x 2 x 3 inches

Pros 

  • Excellent video image quality
  • Has color night-vision capabilities
  • Includes built-in spotlight 
  • Dual-band WiFi (2.4GHz and 5 GHz)
  • Better battery life

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Lacks support for Apple HomeKit compatibility
  • Narrower field of view

Arlo included a few impressive improvements in this version of their Pro 5S 2K model, which is the successor to its popular Pro 4 model. Although they both can capture 2K-resolution video (2,560×1440), the newer model comes with a 12-bit image sensor, allowing you to shoot at a higher bit rate. That translates into better-quality video. The Pro 5S 2K also improved wireless connectivity; this version supports routers with dual-band WiFi (both 2.4GHz and 5GHz), while the Pro 4 only had the lower band—2.4GHz. 

You still get many of the great features found on the Pro 4, including its 160 degrees field of view, a 12x digital zoom, color night vision and black-and-white infrared night vision, a built-in spotlight, two-way audio, and the ability to use smart-home technologies like Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, and IFTTT. However, it lacks support for Apple HomeKit. 

Some might find this Arlo 5S 2K pricier than many others in its class. Plus, it also doesn’t offer any free cloud-based plans to access your video and photos. In order to access your videos stored in the cloud, you’ll need to sign up for one of Arlo Secure plans (starting at $4.99), which gives you the ability to access 30 days of your video recordings and provides you with additional features such as person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them), and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. The model is a bit pricey, but Arlo’s powerful collection of camera-based and cloud-based features makes it well worth the cost.

Best with 4K resolution: Lorex 4K Spotlight Indoor/Outdoor Wi-Fi 6 Technology Security Camera 

A Lorex 4K spotlight indoor/outdoor security camera on a blue and white background

Lorex

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 4K
  • Field of view: 140 degrees
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Local storage
  • Size: 3.0 x 3.0 x 3.4 inches

Pros 

  • Versatile
  • Excellent quality 4K video
  • Comes with dual-band WiFi
  • Includes WiFi 6 technology

Cons

  • 140 field-of-view is narrower than other models
  • Doesn’t have a battery backup

As a brand, Lorex has made very good quality outdoor security cameras for many years. This model is no exception. It stands out because it captures high-quality 4K-resolution video and has a very good 8-megapixel sensor that lets you shoot photos with more detail and data. It also comes with WiFi 6 technology, allowing faster data transmission to deliver impressive 4K resolution with fast loading time. Plus, it includes 2.4/5GHz dual-band WiFi for better connectivity. You can also use one of two smart-motion features: Person, Vehicle, and Animal Detection or Package Detection (both cannot be used simultaneously).

It’s not ideal for everyone, though. It has a 140-degree field of view, which is narrower than most in its class. It’s hardwired, so you may be more limited in where you need to place this model. It also doesn’t have a battery backup, which can be useful for units that are wired. 

Best wired with lights: Eufy Security S330 Floodlight Security Camera 2 Pro

A Eufy security camera with a floodlight on a blue and white background

Eufy

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 2K 
  • Field of view: 360 degrees (horizontal); 130 degrees (vertical)
  • Power: Wired only 
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant
  • Storage options: Cloud storage or local storage 
  • Size: 12.2 x 7.9 x 7.1 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Camera can pan 360 degrees horizontally
  • Lights are moveable and adjustable
  • Camera comes with pan-and-tilt capabilities
  • Lets you store video in either the cloud or locally

Cons

  • Doesn’t have a battery backup
  • Cloud storage reduces video footage to 1080p

Although image sensors have made incredible improvements over the years, you still often need a powerful light source to capture very good-quality video. That’s why this model from Eufy is an excellent buy. It captures 2K resolution video and has flood lights to make the subjects more defined and detailed, but the lighting is adjustable—for instance, you can adjust the color temperature of the lights. Also, the camera itself can pan 360 degrees horizontally so that you can see more of the setting outside your home. And the lights aren’t fixed, so you can turn and position the lights in different directions. 

It doesn’t come with a battery backup, which can be helpful if your power goes out. Also, if you use cloud storage, it will reduce the video footage to 1080p. That’s still great video resolution, and most consumers will be quite pleased with the quality and versatility of this outdoor security camera. 

Best with cellular: Arlo Go 2

An Arlo Go 2 outdoor security camera on a blue and white background

Arlo

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Battery powered only
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 3.4 x 2.5 x 4.7 inches

Pros 

  • Very versatile
  • Can use either cloud or local storage
  • Includes color night vision 
  • Powerful Secure Plan features

Cons

  • Pricey
  • Need to pay extra for cellular plan

One thing almost every outdoor security camera requires is access to your home’s wireless network. But what if you have poor reception or don’t have a WiFi network at all? If you’re one of these people, consider the Arlo Go 2. It not only lets you hook up to a WiFi network, but you can also use a cellular plan. However, if you choose the latter, you’ll have to buy both a cellular plan and a SIM card. Also, it only works with Verizon, U.S. Cellular, and T-Mobile. 

It does have color night vision and two-way talk and audio, but it’s not perfect for everyone. For instance, it provides you with the option of using cloud storage via one of Arlo’s Secure plans (plans start at $4.99), which also lets you access special features or store your videos on local storage. Still, if you use local storage, you can’t access the Secure plan features, which include not only 30-day video recording but also person, vehicle, and animal detection (and the ability to distinguish between them) and smart activity zones, which allow you to focus motion detection on a specific area within your camera’s field of view. 

Best budget: Wyze Cam v3 

A Wyze Cam v3 outdoor security camera on a blue and white background

Wyze

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Video resolution: 1080p
  • Field of view: 130 degrees
  • Power: Wired
  • System compatibility: Amazon Alexa, Google Assistant, IFTTT
  • Storage options: Cloud-based (via subscription); accepts microSD memory card for local storage
  • Size: 2.0 x 2.0 x 2.3 inches 

Pros 

  • Very affordable
  • Compatible with major smart technologies
  • Cloud subscriptions are relatively inexpensive
  • Color night vision is very good

Cons

  • Lacks support for HomeKit compatibility
  • Lower frame rate than other models
  • May not be as sturdy as other models

This hardwired security camera is one of the cheapest on the market, performing very well and capturing very good quality video. It also provides you with the option of storing your videos in cloud storage or on local storage using a microSD memory card. 

But it’s not the perfect option for all users. Those looking for high-res video probably won’t be happy since it shoots just 1080p video. It also shoots at a lower frame rate than other models: For Daytime and Color Night Vision, the frame rate is 20 frames per second (fps), and with Night Vision with IR lights frame rate of 15fps. This means choppier video upon playback However, remember to consider your needs—you’re most likely not looking for producing cinema-quality video. You simply want your security camera to capture decent video. And for that type of video, this model fits the bill.

What to consider when buying the best outdoor security cameras

If you want to install an outdoor security camera, you’re certainly not alone. According to a 2021 report from the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, the number of installed surveillance cameras grew nearly 50 percent, from 47 to 70 million in the United States from 2015 to 2018.

Here are some important factors to think about before you purchase an outdoor security camera: 

Video resolution

You’ll often see 1080p, 2K, or 4K resolutions in outdoor security cameras. A higher resolution means you’ll get a crisper image. A higher resolution will also fill up your local or cloud storage faster. That’s a problem if your subscription plan or card has a fixed limit to its capacity. If you’re trying to balance subscription costs for cloud storage with what resolution you’ll need, consider how detailed of a picture you’ll need. If you need more detail, go with a higher resolution. 

Lights

Light has always been incredibly important when it comes to capturing digital video and photos. That’s why if you need your outdoor security camera to capture better-quality video or photos, you should consider buying a model with flood lights. Such models not only allow for improved image quality, but they can also act as a deterrent to intruders. 

Power options

When planning to set up your new outdoor security camera, you’ll need to think about where to install it. This is not as much of an issue for models that only use battery power. However, hardwired connections require a direct connection to your home or an outdoor outlet with a weatherproof cord. This limits where you can place it. You make up for the lack of creative control with video and audio quality, which is better in a hardwired connection. 

FAQs

Q: How far can an outdoor security camera be from WiFi?

This will mostly depend on the strength and quality of the wireless network you plan to use and its position in your home. You should note that physical objects, like walls, will weaken WiFi signals. Try to place your outdoor security camera as close as you can to your wireless router.  

Q: Is it better to have wired or wireless security cameras?

It depends on your setup and where you’d like to position your outdoor security cameras. For instance, if you don’t have easy access to an electrical outlet, you may want to use a battery-powered model. However, you’ll need to remember to replace or recharge the battery. Wired security cameras give you better audio and video quality, but you need access to an outside outlet or direct connection to your home’s electricity.  

Q: Which is better: 1080p or 4K CCTV?

One of the benefits of having a 4K outdoor security camera is that, depending on the model you buy, you’ll have more resolution and possibly more detail. However, the quality of the video depends mostly on the lens and sensor quality. Another thing to consider when buying a 4K outdoor security camera is that it will fill up your storage capacity more quickly. 1080p is a great option if you’re trying to balance video resolution with storage capacity. 

Q: What are the disadvantages of security cameras?

Some outdoor security cameras don’t have the highest resolution or quality, at least compared to cameras found on cellphones or stand-alone cameras. They also don’t have as many features and aren’t as versatile. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor security cameras

Many outdoor cameras on the market today offer 4K resolution, perfect for ultra-detailed shots. Cloud storage makes it possible to keep that footage safe, secure, and easily accessible—you’ll have to pay a subscription for it, however. Otherwise, look for an option that allows for external storage, like a microSD card. Regardless of the model you choose, an outdoor security camera is a great way to watch your entire home, whether you’re away, at work, or in your house.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor security cameras in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/jackery-power-station-generator-amazon-deal/ Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=566943
Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up
Stan Horaczek

Power your appliances in an outage with this portable Jackery solar generator, on sale at Amazon.

The post Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery 2000 Plus front panel close-up
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Solar generators are an excellent, energy-efficient way to power your home during a power outage or your RV while camping. And one of the best from Jackery—who we’re fans of, for good reason—is a whopping $500 off at Amazon.

Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 2000 Plus $1,869 (Was $2,399)

Jackery Solar Generator 2000 Pro Review

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

The Jackery Explorer 2000 Plus can power current-hungry devices at up to 6000w, so even if you want to power a welder, you can. The battery will only last you about a half-hour doing this (we tried it), but it does work, and that’s more than many other models can say. We tested the Explorer 2000 Plus after a storm disrupted power—It kept our router running for several hours to maintain connectivity. You can power it even longer by daisy-chaining extra external batteries or connecting optional solar panels. The switch to lithium iron phosphate batteries (LiFePo4) means this unit will last a long time before the battery degrades beyond its usable range. The company claims it will take 4,000 cycles before the battery life degrades to 70 percent—that’s a long time.

If you’re looking for something more compact to power smaller appliances, the Jackery Portable Power Station Explorer 500 can power a mini cooler for nine hours and a laptop for 30 hours.

Don’t wait until you’re already out of power to take advantage of this deal—start preparing for an outage by snagging a generator.

Here are a few other powerful portable generator deals:

The post Save up to $500 on Jackery power stations at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best portable fans of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-portable-fan/ Wed, 21 Jul 2021 21:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380827
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

You can stay cool without sacrificing outdoor fun with the best portable fans.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Portable Fans
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Best Portable Fans Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan
SEE IT

The Milwaukee M18 makes it easy to stay cool.
Best handheld The Handfan Misting fan is our pick for best portable misting fan. HandFan Misting Fan
SEE IT

This lightweight model lets you bring a cool breeze wherever you go.
Best budget The Comlife Portable Neck Fan is our pick for the best wearable fan. Comlife Portable Neck Fan
SEE IT

Portable neck fans are so hot right now.

The cooling breeze of a portable fan is a cheap and easy way to combat scorching temperatures. With the press of a button, you get an instant breeze—and sometimes a cooling mist—to keep the heat at bay. Best of all, they don’t rely on outlet power and are (mostly) small enough to transport in a purse, pocket, or backpack. Some are even made to attach to desks and strollers. The next time you leave the comfort of your AC, the best portable fans will ensure you stay cool.

How we chose the best portable fans

The temperature and humidity can get unbearable where I live, which makes doing anything outdoors uncomfortable. That’s why I’ve made it my mission to find the best portable fans to stay cool wherever I am.

Outside of my pursuit to keep cool, I write about gadgets and gear and have been doing so for over 10 years. My byline has appeared on sites like XDA Developers, Gear Patrol, and CNN Underscored. To find the best portable fans, I researched and tested everything I could get my hands on. I also looked at editorial reviews and customer feedback to give me an idea of what people value most in a portable fan.

PopSci has been writing about the best fans for years, so I also drew on previous knowledge and recommendations from colleagues.

The best portable fans: Reviews & Recommendations

To find the best portable fan, consider when and where you’ll be using it. Are you looking for something small to toss in your beach bag? Do you need something that stands on its own to cool you down at your desk? Or are you looking for a stroller fan that can cool your little one? Answering these questions will help you find the fan that fits your needs. We picked these fans for some of the most common scenarios where you need a light cooling breeze on the go.

Best overall: Milwaukee M18 Jobsite Fan

Best Portable Fans

Milwaukee

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Milwaukee’s M18 Jobsite Fan provides several hours of operation and a 120-degree adjustable head.

Specs

  • Height: 10.29 inches
  • Weight: 5.2 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • 120-degree adjustable head
  • Long-lasting battery
  • 18mph max air velocity

Cons

  • Expensive

Milwaukee is well known for making some of the best tools available, so it’s no surprise it also makes a great portable fan. Made of durable plastic and capable of circulating air over 40 feet, the cordless fan features a rechargeable battery that provides up to 17 hours of runtime on the lowest setting. If you’re on a job site or a camping trip, a single charge can keep you cool all day long.

In addition to a long-lasting battery, Milwaukee’s M18 features a 120-degree adjustable head with nine stopping positions, so you can angle it almost any way you like. It also offers three-speed settings, with the highest options capable of 18mph max velocity. And if the M18’s battery does run out, the fan comes with an AC adapter to keep the breeze flowing.

Want to up the refreshment even more? If you’re looking for an industrial misting fan that’s easily transportable, try out the RYOBI 18-Volt ONE+ Bucket Top Misting Fan Kit, which sits on top of a bucket (sold separately) filled with water—and ice, if you like—and provides hours of revitalizing fog. Combine either choice with a portable solar generator, and you’ve got reliable refreshment for days.

Best for neck: Jisulife Bladeless Neck Cooler

JisuLife makes one of the best portable fans for your neck.

Jen McCaffery

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This well-designed portable neck fan is lightweight and has three speeds to keep you cool on the go. 

Specs

  • Height: 7.8 inches
  • Weight: 9.1 ounces
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Lasts for up to 16 hours
  • Has three speeds
  • Available in five  colors

Cons

  • Wayward strands of hair may get caught

When it’s ridiculously hot outside, but you need to walk to the grocery store or want to go for a hike, a neck fan can provide welcome relief. The highly rated Jisulife Bladeless Neck Cooler is super easy to get started right from the box. Just connect the included USB-C cord and charge the included lithium-ion battery for up to 16 hours of use. 

This bladeless fan is lightweight and felt good around my neck. It’s designed with three speeds, and the steady air came both out and upward, providing a steady breeze to the underside of my face without blowing my hair all over the place. This portable fan is also reasonably quiet, though louder at Level 3, the highest speed.

It’s also worth noting that I originally had my hair up when I was testing the fan, and when I let it down, it did get a little caught in the fan. And while this Jisulife model is great for a walk or hike on a hot day, it’s not particularly suited for running if you bounce up and down a lot as you stride. But this fan is an affordable option to save energy and stay cool wherever you go. Plus, it comes in five colors (dark green, dark blue, gray, green, and yellow), making it almost as appealing a personalized accessory as a cool set of headphones. — Jen McCaffery

Best for large spaces: Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan

The Big Ass Sidekick is the best portable fan for industrial purposes.

Big Ass

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The 48-inch-wide Sidekick is powerful enough to cool large spaces, inside and out. 

Specs

  • Height: 58 inches 
  • Weight: 180 pounds
  • Battery-powered: No

Pros

  • Sleek design
  • Arrives assembled
  • Works indoors and outside

Cons

  • Expensive

Whether working on a construction site or in a barn, cooling a big space can be challenging, so you need a powerful fan. The Big Ass Sidekick Portable Fan is up for the job. This barrel fan is 48 inches wide, providing plenty of airflow from its six airfoils. The Sidekick comes fully assembled, and its swivel casters make it portable and lockable. With its IPX5 waterproof rating, you can roll this fan indoors or outside. And if you’re unhappy, there’s a warranty of up to three years. — Jen McCaffery

Best for stroller: Amacool Stroller Fan

The Amacool Stroller Fan is the best portable stroller fan.

AMACOOL

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Amacool Stroller Fan is easy to use and features flexible tripod legs that can attach to almost anything, particularly strollers.

Specs

  • Height: 12 inches
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Flexible tripod legs
  • Also includes adjustable LED light
  • 360-degree adjustable head

Cons

  • Small battery means poor battery life

This stroller fan comes in three cute colors with a protective fan cover and flexible tripod legs that are easy for you to attach but hard for your baby to remove. It can easily adhere to the sides, tray, or hood of your stroller, as well as your little one’s car seat, playpen, or baby gym. The fan head is adjustable vertically and horizontally with 360 degrees of rotation. It even has three fan speeds so that you can customize the breeze your baby needs. The fan lasts between 2.5 and 10 hours, depending on wind speed, and can be easily recharged via USB. While this fan is safe for babies and toddlers, always make sure to have an adult on the lookout whenever it’s switched on.

Best handheld: HandFan Misting Fan

The Handfan Misting fan is our pick for best portable misting fan.

HandFan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The HandFan Misting Fan gives you a breeze and a cool spritz of water for extra relief in your personal paradise.

Specs

  • Height: 8.9 inches
  • Weight: 0.41 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Misting capabilities
  • Three speed options
  • Foldable design

Cons

  • One button design can be confusing

This rechargeable handheld misting fan from HandFan is one of the best ways to stay refreshed during a hot summer day. It can easily fit in a purse or backpack pocket, with a handle that can be adjusted from 0-180 degrees for handheld or standalone use. Choose from three different fan speeds to cool you down, no matter the weather. You can even trigger night mode, which includes a delightful array of colored lights. 

Best of all, the HandFan comes with a built-in mister and 17-millimeter water reservoir, which can produce a steady stream of gentle mist for 10 minutes at a time. All of these functions can be controlled with just one button for ultimate ease. This mini-fan weighs just 6.6 ounces and measures 4.1 by 8.9 inches, the perfect size to keep handy in your car, back pocket, or travel bag. Need something more industrial-strength to cool down a group? Check out our guide to the best outdoor misting fans.

Best for camping: Comlife 10000mAh Rechargeable Camping Fan

Comlife makes the best portable fan for camping.

Comlife

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a battery that can last up to 28 hours and a lantern with three brightness levels, the Comlife Rechargeable Camping Fan is the perfect companion for the Great Outdoors.

Specs

  • Height: 8 inches
  • Weight: 1 pound
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Featured 36 LED lights
  • Adjusts 360 degrees
  • Durable design
  • Battery can last up to 28 hours

Cons

  • No place to store remote

This Comlife camping fan is an excellent choice for anyone who likes to spend time outdoors. It features three fan speeds and a battery that can last up to 28 hours on slower speeds and a full seven hours at maximum speed. The lantern also has three brightness levels and three timer settings. You can even plug in your mobile phone or computer and use the fan’s USB-C port to charge your device. The unit itself can be charged via USB cable, power bank, car charger, laptop, and more. It comes with a flexible tripod that lets you easily attach it to a tent, bunkbed, golf cart, or even a growing system. At just 1 pound, this powerful fan will be easy to transport for on-the-go use.

Best for desk: Honeywell Turbo on the Go  

Honeywell Turbo on the Go is the best portable fan for your desk.

Honeywell

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Honeywell Turbo is lightweight, provides a powerful breeze, and includes a convenient handle for carrying.

Specs

  • Height: 5 inches (12 inches with handle flipped open)
  • Weight: 0.49 pounds
  • Battery-powered: AA x 4

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Handle doubles as a stand
  • Battery-powered and USB-powered

Cons

  • Needs four AA batteries

While the Turbo On the Go fan won’t replace traditional AC, it’s a fantastic way to stay cool during a hectic workday and a great small personal fan for a desk. It measures roughly 5 x 12 inches and weighs under 1 ounce, so you don’t need to worry about it taking up too much space or dragging you down if you’re on the move. This fan produces a breeze you can feel from up to three feet away with several set-up options, including standalone, hanging, or carrying. It can be powered with four AA batteries for outdoor use or via a USB-A cable, which can plug directly into your work computer.

Best budget: Comlife Portable Neck Fan  

The Comlife Portable Neck Fan is our pick for the best wearable fan.

COMLIFE

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Comlife’s Portable Neck Fan can be worn like a necklace and also used on a desk.

Specs

  • Height: N/A
  • Weight: 0.43 pounds
  • Battery-powered: Rechargeable

Pros

  • Also USB-powered
  • Can be worn like a necklace
  • Two fans offer double the breeze

Cons

  • Can get in the way while worn

You shouldn’t have to pause all your favorite pastimes to dab sweat away or take a break in the shade. A wearable fan, like this one from Comlife, is a magnificent way to keep moving even when the heat rises. This double-headed small portable fan hangs comfortably on the neck and is 360-degree adjustable so you can stay cool without anything getting in your way. It features six fan speeds, battery life between two and nine hours depending on use, and an included USB cable for simple charging. This mini portable fan weighs just 0.4 pounds, so you won’t be under any strain while wearing it, even during exercise. From cooking to hiking, cycling to traveling, you’ll have no trouble keeping comfortable, even during a vigorous workout.

What to consider when buying the best portable fans

We look for the same things in a portable fan as in any other cooling device. Aside from strong airflow, a portable fan shouldn’t produce much noise. On the other hand, it should be durable enough to throw in a bag and easy to clean. Here’s everything to look out for in your search.

Size and weight

Portability is an essential part of a good personal handheld fan. When researching our picks, we paid special attention to things like size and weight. Portable fans come in all shapes and sizes, and different options work better for different situations. Before making your pick, you should take a moment to figure out how and where you plan to use your fan, whether you’re traveling, sitting at your desk, or working on an engine in your garage.

Remember that the bigger the fan, the stronger the airflow. A handheld pocket fan will only generate enough wind to cool down one person. There are also larger portable fans big enough to cool down a small space, like a tent. 

Power

Portable fans use a couple of different battery types. Usually, they’ll either use built-in rechargeable batteries or require disposable cells, like AAs. Some models with built-in rechargeable batteries can also plug directly into the wall, so you can recharge the battery and use the fan simultaneously. Often, the whole point of a portable fan is to get away from outlets, but it’s still a nice perk.

A traditional battery is the most straightforward option. Just install a few AA batteries and feel the temperature drop. While single-use batteries are convenient, we generally avoid them whenever possible to minimize generating e-waste. (Of course, you always pop in some rechargeable batteries to sidestep the issue.)

A built-in rechargeable battery means you don’t need to buy batteries from the store. However, there’s always the risk of forgetting to recharge a rechargeable battery each night, which could render a portable fan useless.

Noise

No fan is competently silent, but nobody wants to use one that sounds like a buzzing insect. No matter what size portable fan you choose, you don’t want the whirring to be a distraction, especially if you’re using it as a travel fan. We focused on finding options with minimal noise, even on their highest setting. A quiet fan is particularly important if you plan to have it pointed at you from close range.

Cleaning

Keeping your fan clean is not only the sanitary thing to do, but it ensures everything works effectively and efficiently. A good fan should be relatively easy to disassemble (and reassemble) so that you can access the fan blades and remove dust and hair collected on moving parts.

Extras

For outdoor summer days, you can’t go wrong with a mini fan that can give you a cooling spritz. If you don’t want to miss out on enjoying beach trips, summer barbecues, or picnics, reach for a small, handheld fan you can easily slip into your bag or pocket—major bonus points for a model that has a small reservoir for water. With the push of a button, you’ll feel a steady spray that refreshes and cools.

There are also portable options you can wear around your neck. These portable fans sit comfortably around your neck so you can keep your hands on the steering wheel, tongs, walking stick, oar, etc. These battery-powered fans are a great way to get a breeze without taking a break from your favorite activities.

Finally, some options include flexible tripods that can attach to strollers and car seats, ensuring your little one stays cool on a warm day. Kids love to grasp and grab at just about everything, so make sure your stroller fan is sturdily attached yet adjustable, so you can angle airflow without worrying your baby will get a hold of the mini fan.

FAQs

Q: How much does a portable fan cost?

Depending on its features and functions, a portable fan starts at $20 and goes into the hundreds. The most expensive portable fan on our list is around $120.

Q: Is there a fan that blows cold air?

Some fans blow colder air, but keep in mind that they can be a bit pricier than the portable models listed above. Unlike energy-efficient air conditioners that use freon, or regular fans that circulate the ambient air, cold-air fans need to use more advanced technology to create highly concentrated, controlled pressure and super-high speeds that actively cycle and slightly chill the air. Top-notch models like the Dyson Pure Hot Cool can do more to chill the air around you. If you want actively cooled air and live in the right climate, you might be interested in trying an evaporative cooler that cycles recently evaporated, chilled water from a reservoir to cool a room.

Q: What is the quietest portable fan for the bedroom?

There are several options out there for super-quiet fans you’re sure to sleep through, and many others include a sleep or night mode to quell sound or lights further. Honeywell, Vornado, and Lasko make small portable fans that are practically noiseless. It will be a bit more challenging to find a compact, pocket-portable fan that can provide the same options when it comes to quiet modes, but that shouldn’t be as much of an issue when you’re using them on the road.   

Q: How long do portable fan batteries last?

Battery life depends on a few factors, like fan size and what setting is used. If you use lower power, most portable fans will last for several hours. Crank it up to the highest setting, and the battery may only last a couple of hours.

Q: What type of portable fan is best for the beach?

Any fan designed for outdoor use would work well at the beach, as long as you’re not taking it into the water or burying it in sand. No portable fan will completely resist the elements, so it pays to be cautious when using electronics outside.

Final thoughts on the best portable fans

While the summer heat can undoubtedly feel oppressive at times, there’s no reason why you can’t grab one of the best portable fans out there to make things more bearable, especially if you know which factors to prioritize. If you want to stay especially active, go for a mini wearable or personal handheld model. If you need some extra chill indoors, a compact desk fan or lightweight tower fan will do the trick. And for special situations, look for a fan that proudly boasts its strengths, like stroller or camping fans. Beating the heat won’t be so hard with a great portable fan in hand.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable fans of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best travel backpacks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-travel-backpacks/ Mon, 01 Aug 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458987
The best travel backpacks composited
Stan Horaczek

These are our top picks for hands-free carrying, whether you're a frequent flyer or a daily commuter.

The post The best travel backpacks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best travel backpacks composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Osprey Nebula is big enough to hold all your stuff, and gives you plenty of straps to keep the weight off your back. Osprey Nebula
SEE IT

The Osprey Nebula is big enough to hold all your stuff and gives you plenty of straps to keep the weight off your back.
Best for laptops The Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe is built to handle the heavy burden of the largest laptops. Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Backpack Deluxe
SEE IT

The Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe is built to handle the heavy burden of the largest laptops.
Best for cameras You can reconfigure Peak Designs’ Everyday Backpack to fit whatever camera bodies and lens you need to carry. Peak Design Everyday Backpack 30L
SEE IT

You can reconfigure the Peak Design Everyday Backpack to fit whatever camera bodies and lens you need to carry.

Frequent flyers and daily commuters both know the value of a good travel backpack. When making subway connections or running through airport terminals, having your hands free and essential everyday gear—your laptop, a book, a water bottle, a change of clothes—makes traveling easier. Great travel bags come in all shapes and sizes, just like your trips. From big camping backpacks with room for clothing and shoes to smaller bags that snuggly swaddle your electronics, and keep them dry in an unexpected downpour, the best travel backpacks can store and protect whatever you need to bring with you on your next trip.

How we chose the best travel backpacks

As a freelance writer and editor covering adventure travel and outdoor gear, I’ve worn and worn out more than my fair share of travel backpacks. I usually travel at least once a month by air and carry my laptop everywhere to work from hotel bars and local coffee shops. I’ve spent years testing backpacks, especially bags for carrying my laptop or maximizing my carry-on-only space on nearly every airline you can imagine. 

In addition to my personal experience and testing (and general knowledge of durable materials and fabrics), I checked out consumer reviews to get a general sense of brand reputations and explored the popularity of specific products. Plus, I compared company warranties and other logistical information.

The best travel backpacks: Reviews & Recommendations

The best travel backpacks make air travel less stressful and daily commuting a bit easier. Travel backpacks are not hard to find—nearly every travel or outdoor brand makes at least half a dozen—but finding the right one for you can feel harder than it should be. Fortunately, we’ve spent weeks testing bags on the road and days scouring online reviews to help narrow down the list. 

Best overall: Osprey Nebula

The Osprey Nebula is big enough to hold all your stuff, and gives you plenty of straps to keep the weight off your back.

Osprey

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Osprey Nebula is relatively affordable for a big bag and comes loaded with features we like, including a fold-out laptop sleeve, compression straps, and hip and sternum straps.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.4 lbs
  • Internal capacity:  34L
  • Size: 12.2 x 11.8 x 18.9 inches (WDH) 

Pros

  • Fold-out laptop panel 
  • Expandable outer pocket 
  • Side pockets large enough for bottles or tripods 
  • Compression straps to maximize space

Cons

  • Could be too large for daily commutes 

Simply put, the Osprey Nebula is a darn good bag. At 34 liters, its main compartment is extremely roomy, as are its external front pocket and the large side pockets. Admittedly, it’s a bit bulky, but you can slim it down with its external compression straps.

Beyond its capacity, which makes it the perfect size for long trips, the Osprey Nebula has every backpack feature you could dream of. There’s a Velcro-secured fold-out laptop sleeve so you can access your computer without opening the rest of the bag; double water bottle pockets; a removable chest strap and mesh strap padding to help distribute weight when full; a lined pocket for sunglasses; and a handful of vertical pockets for smaller items. It even has features you’d never think you needed, like pockets to hide the compression straps when not in use and a second slim pocket in the laptop area for a tablet or travel documents. 

Some daily commuters may find it to be a bit too large to lug around every day. For travel, though? It should serve most adventurers quite well, whether you’re heading out for a week or a weekend.

Best for air travel: Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro 40

The Dueter Aviant Duffel Pro 40 looks like a duffel, but features backpack straps so you can carry it however you want.

Deuter

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The very packable Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro 40 holds almost as much clothing as a roller bag, allowing you to nearly double your carry-on space without paying extra fees.

Specs 

  • Weight: 2 lbs, 10 oz
  • Internal capacity: 40 liters 
  • Size: 20.5 x 13.8 x 8.7 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Works as a duffel or a backpack
  • Compression straps maximize space 
  • Variety of inner and outer pockets 
  • Waterproof, tear-resistant, and Bluesign approved 

Cons 

  • No hip strap 
  • No padded laptop pocket 

If you’re getting on a flight with nothing but a backpack, you need to make sure you can comfortably cram as much stuff as possible into it. The Deuter Aviant Duffel Pro is built specifically for that, with a duffel-style design and backpack straps making it easy to carry through airports and pass off as your personal item (just don’t pack it to the brim if you want it to look like it’ll fit under your seat). 

Of Deuter’s many Aviant bags, the Pro 40 stands apart thanks to a few extra-useful features for flyers. Its top panel fully unzips for easy packing and internal compression straps to maximize how much it can fit.  There’s a separate shoe compartment, which is very helpful if you want to avoid tracking dirt all over your fresh clothes. It also folds into its own storage pouch, making it a great backup bag if you plan to fly home with extra baggage.

Best for laptops: Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe

The Timbuk2 Authority Laptop Bag Deluxe is built to handle the heavy burden of the largest laptops.

Timbuk2

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: A slim travel backpack with a ton of storage space, the Timbuk2 Authority Deluxe features a chest strap to distribute weight and a very protective, easy-access pocket for even the largest of laptops. 

Specs 

  • Weight: 2.4 lbs
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 11.4 x 5.31 x 18.9 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Fits up to 17-inch laptops
  • Pairs well with a carry-on suitcase
  • Air channel to avoid back sweat during commutes

Cons 

  • Side pockets don’t hold larger water bottles 
  • Not as deep as other bags 

I’ve been using a Timbuk2 laptop bag as my go-to carry-on personal item for a long time, returning to it even as I switch from travel bag to travel bag. The Authority Deluxe has a secure pouch that keeps up to 17-inch laptops snug and secure and has just the right amount of organizational pockets for chargers, cords, and travel accessories. 

The Authority Deluxe is a particularly good choice for travel, as opposed to daily carrying, because it features lots of alternative ways to quickly access your most important stuff. There’s a side access panel to pull out your laptop even if the bag is packed full or jammed under a seat. There’s also a strap allowing you to holster your bag on the handles of a carry-on suitcase for easy maneuvering through airports. There are also a few slim pockets on the outside of the bag—useful for stashing your phone, passport, or other items you’ll want to access on the go.

Best for cameras: Peak Designs Everyday Backpack 30L

You can reconfigure Peak Designs’ Everyday Backpack to fit whatever camera bodies and lens you need to carry.

Peak Design

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Peak Design’s Everyday backpack for photographers features adjustable panels to hold various lenses and bodies, plus useful features for photographers like silent clasps, side access panels, and an external tripod carry. 

Specs 

  • Weight: 4.65 lbs (with dividers)
  • Internal capacity: 22 to 30 liter (adjustable)
  • Size: 13 x 5.9 x 19.1 inches (WDH) 

Pros 

  • Durable, waterproof, weatherproof fabric 
  • Comes with camera organization dividers
  • Expandable pockets and tuck-away straps 
  • Quiet one-handed buckles 

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Small side pockets 

The Peak Design Everyday Backpack’s subtle design hides a host of great features for photographers. Its weatherproof fabrics and rearrangeable dividers let you create perfect-fitting compartments for varying sets of camera bodies and lenses, along with a laptop and other gear. It also has other thoughtful features shutterbugs will appreciate, including a silent lock/unlock mechanism (so you don’t scare away wildlife with a loud Velcro woosh when you switch lenses), locking zippers to ensure no one steals your expensive camera gear, and a laptop sleeve.

Best small: Matador Beast 28 Ultralight Technical Backpack

The Matador Beast is a small pack with a waterproof coating for hiking, biking, and whatever else you get up to.

REI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Though it packs up quite small, the Matador Beast 28 is well-suited to active days, with a waterproof coating, a hip belt to distribute weight, and a light build that’s easy to carry while sightseeing. 

Specs  

  • Weight: 1.8 lbs 
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 11 x 7 x 22 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Packs into its own stuff sack
  • Flexible frame, mesh padding, and hip belt for weight distribution
  • Weather-proof 

Cons 

  • Thin material
  • Minimal pockets 

There are plenty of packable travel backpacks on the market, but most of them are flimsy, with unpadded straps that can dig into your shoulders if the bag is heavy. The Matador Beast 28 is the exception, which looks and feels like a specialty outdoor/hiking backpack. It has a flexible frame and hip belt to more comfortably distribute weight, plus a super-durable and tear-resistant outer fabric. It’s hydration compatible, so you can use a hydration reservoir/bladder when you’re hiking but remove the bladder if you just want to use it as a sightseeing bag or daypack. It also stuffs down to the grapefruit size, so it can fit in your luggage if you’d rather pack it for a flight.

Best for business: Briggs and Riley Baseline Traveler

The Briggs and Riley Baseline Traveler is a stylish bag for business trips.

Briggs & Riley

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A modern, minimalist travel backpack with a separate large clothing compartment, the Briggs and Riley Traveler functionality features a dedicated tech pocket, plus monogramming and fabrics that add a touch of sophistication.

Specs 

  • Weight: 3.3 lbs
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters
  • Size: 12 x 8.8 x 18 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Modern, upscale look
  • Clamshell-style opening makes smart use of space
  • Lifetime guarantee
  • Pass-through ports for charging cables 

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Black only

There’s no shortage of commuter bags for professionals, but the Briggs and Riley Traveler is an especially good backpack for people who frequently hit the road for work. Made from water-resistant nylon, its clamshell-style design can probably hold enough to be your only bag on a quick overnight trip, storing clothing on one side and your laptop, notebooks, or papers on the other. It also features a few useful design flourishes, including a back panel to secure the bag to a carry-on and a “power pocket” with a pass-through cord slot to charge your electronics on the go. Last, but not least, it comes with free monogramming when you buy it directly from Briggs and Riley, adding a traditional touch ideal for the boardroom. 

Most sustainable: Cotopaxi Allpa 28L

The Cotopaxi Allpa is a solid travel bag made with social responsibility in mind.

Cotopaxi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Cotopaxi Allpa 28L is functional, durable, and sustainable in every way you can imagine.

Specs 

  • Weight:  2 lbs, 10 oz 
  • Internal capacity: 28 liters 
  • Size: 11 x 9 x 19 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Supports eco- and community-conscious development 
  • Opens flat for easy access to storage 
  • Compression zippers 
  • Laptop pocket 

Cons 

  • No side pockets 

Few brands take more care to make their travel bags as sustainably as Cotopaxi. The company bakes sustainability and socially conscious business practices into everything they do, from using scrap materials in 94 percent of products to donating “at least one percent” of its revenue to nonprofits working to end extreme poverty around the globe. If you’re looking for the best travel backpack to have a positive impact on communities, individuals, and the environment—and perform flawlessly while traveling, of course—it’s the Cotopaxi Allpa 28L.

The Allpa 28L travel pack features a clamshell-style opening with a full-size compartment on one side and a split pocket on the other. Both sides feature compression zippers to keep the pack’s profile as slim as possible. There’s a slide-in laptop pocket, a hip belt and sternum strap for comfortable carrying, and even a rain cover, just in case.

Opt for the Del Dia version, and you can choose your one-of-a-kind color combo; Cotopaxi makes their bags out of scrap materials and gives the staff in their factories free range to choose whatever color combos strike their fancy on any given day. 

Best budget: High Sierra Loop Backpack

The High Sierra Loop is an easy pick if you want something solid for as little as possible.

High Sierra

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The High Sierra Loop isn’t going to win any beauty pageants, but it’s big, durable, and comfortable, even when full.

Specs 

  • Weight: 2 lbs 
  • Internal capacity: 33 liters
  • Size: 13.5 x 8.5 x 19 inches (WDH)

Pros 

  • Great price
  • Compression straps for securing gear 
  • Large capacity

Cons 

  • No padded laptop pocket
  • Bulbous design 

The High Sierra Loop backpack isn’t an impressive-looking backpack, but it’s an effective, budget-friendly travel bag. It’s large and loaded with useful features like exterior compression straps, a tablet pocket, padded straps, and easy-access external pockets for water bottles or a phone. 

What it lacks, really, is a prestigious name, along with the style and perks that tend to come with a bag from a major brand. It doesn’t come with a warranty, or any waterproof protection, so don’t use it as your primary travel bag on outdoorsy trips. Even with a few caveats, it can comfortably hold a ton of gear and keep it organized. For less than $40, that’s a pretty good bargain.

What to consider when picking the best travel backpacks

Finding a  travel backpack isn’t necessarily a make-or-break decision. It doesn’t need to be a perfect fit like a properly sized pair of hiking boots. A backpack designed for daily commuting works just fine on airplanes, and a large backpack can serve as your daily commuting bag if you prefer more space. There’s no right or wrong choice. If you’re buying a backpack for a specific type of trip, though, it helps to think about what you need, so you can get the bag you want. Here are a few things to think about while shopping around. 

Where are you going?

First and foremost, consider how often you travel. Do you bring a backpack on your daily commute? Bringing your laptop to coffee shops? Going on road trips? Flying for work or going sightseeing? There are bags designed for each of these experiences: If you know what you want, you can find one that fits perfectly into your life. You might also want to look at featured designs for various locations. For example, backpacks with built-in locks can be helpful if you’re leaving your backpack unattended briefly at coffee shops, and a pass-through sleeve can be useful if you’ll frequently be towing your backpack with a roller bag through airports.

Size and capacity

If you use your bag for daily travel, choose something on the smaller side that’s easy to pack and unpack since you’ll be doing it every day. Backpacks around 16 liters (L) should suffice. If you’re looking for a carry-on bag to hold clothing and maximize much you can pack, look for a bag with a large compartment and compression straps to pack everything as tightly as possible. These are usually in the 30-40 liter range, and won’t be allowed as a carry-on. If you want something big enough to be an overnight bag, but need it to fit under the seat in front of you, look for something between 20-30L.

Compartments

Depending on what you’re doing, the interior structure of the bag may be as important as its size and capacity. Some bags have a single open compartment. Others have special pockets for sensitive items. Still others have modular compartments that you can adjust to hold specific gear.

The most common compartment is a laptop pocket, which can be helpful. But don’t fret if your favorite travel backpack doesn’t have one, as you can use a padded laptop sleeve to protect it instead. Some larger “clamshell-style” travel backpacks open flat and usually feature a large compartment for clothing, making them helpful as an alternative to packing a suitcase.

Other types of pockets and compartments you’ll find include tech organizing pockets, external pockets for bottles, protected and lined pockets for sunglasses, and very small pockets for pens and small items like flash drives. A bag with too many pockets can be hard to navigate, but too few make it easy to lose and/or break small items. If you don’t have a preference, aim for one with a few small- and medium-sized pockets. If you find you need more structure, you can always use a packing cube or case to create more compartments.

Materials matter

There are, very literally, hundreds of materials that can be used to make travel backpacks. Rather than looking for a specific one, keep an eye out for the important qualities they offer. For example, “rip-stop”—a bag material “feature” that prevents rips and tears from growing over time—comes from how a bag material is woven, not the fabric, so you may find it on many kinds of bags. Likewise, bags that are water-resistant or “abrasion-resistant” get that trait from a collection of materials.

On the other hand, it pays to pay attention to how a bag was made. More and more manufacturers make travel backpacks from sustainable materials. Some—such as Cotopaxi, Deuter, and Timbuk2—also use “factory scraps,” which are leftover materials that would otherwise be thrown in the trash. 

When looking for a sustainable bag, look for companies that follow international, cross-brand standards like Bluesign, which certifies products for sourcing sustainable materials and for using factories with ethical labor practices. That said, there are plenty of companies that implement their own sustainable manufacturing practices. If you care about sustainability, you’ll find plenty of good options if you do a little digging. 

Water resistance

You should also look at what materials go into your bag. Specifically, consider whether or not you’d like your bag to offer some protection against water. As with materials, there are many ways to achieve various degrees of water protection. The measurements and testing are actually quite extensive and complicated but, usually, water resistance means it can withstand some level of water (like rain) without letting moisture through. Most travel backpacks will meet these criteria, although how much water they can withstand varies from product to product. Most water-resistant backpacks will use a coating called DWR—Durable Water Resistance—which usually means you’ll be fine in light rain and snow. Almost any fabric can have a DWR finish, though it wears off over time. 

Waterproof fabrics mean they can withstand extreme amounts of water; everything short of full submersion, usually. These fabrics will be much more plastic-y and solid feeling, rather than feeling like a woven fabric. If the travel backpack you like isn’t as water-resistant as you’d like, you can always add a rain cover if you’re expecting bad weather. 

If you take public transportation or live in a city, you’ll probably want a travel backpack with some level of water and weather protection. If you’re using it more like luggage, that probably won’t matter as much, and you may be able to save some money on your bag by buying one with slightly more budget materials.

FAQs

Q: How much do travel backpacks cost?

Travel backpacks can range from less than $50 to $300 or more. They vary in price based on their size, the materials they’re made from, how they’re made, and more. You can buy a very cheap backpack, akin to something for a young school student, for under $30. As you add more expensive fabrics, like leather and waterproof materials, prices go up. Likewise, many travel-centric features—like locks, padded sleeves, and durable zippers—are reserved for technical bags that cost $100 or more.

Q: What sized backpack is best for traveling?

The ideal size for your travel backpack will depend on where and how you plan to travel. If you plan to use it as a suitcase to carry clothing and shoes on planes, you’ll want the largest possible bag that meets your airline’s carry-on bag guidelines. That’s usually somewhere around 14 x 9 x 22 inches (WDH) for bags in the overhead bins and 13 x 9 x 17 inches (WDH) for a personal item (though most airlines never enforce the latter).

If you’re using your bag for daily commuting, you’ll want something more slim and narrow, especially if you take public transportation. For most people, a 13- or 16-liter bag is large enough to carry a laptop plus daily use items like a water bottle, jacket, keys, chargers, and more.

Q: How do I pack a backpack for air travel?

If you’re using a smaller bag, like a commuting laptop bag, most items will sit upright and be easy to access, so you don’t need to worry much about organization. When using a large travel backpack, I like to use packing cubes for clothing and items I won’t need mid-flight, and then I pack them at the bottom of the bag. Pack the things you’ll need during the flight last so they’re on top and easily accessible. If you have a side access panel on your bag, place your easy access gear on the side, and make sure the panel is facing up when you stow the bag under your seat.

Q: Where can I recycle a travel backpack?

Unfortunately, most local recycling centers won’t be able to process a backpack, especially one with multiple materials. There are ways to recycle or dispose of your bag responsibly, though. First, check with the brand to see if they have a warranty or repair program. If they do, you may not need to recycle their products at all. But if you’ve decided you no longer want to keep something, consider selling it on a clothing and accessory resale site (like Poshmark) or selling it back to a store; REI gives co-op members a store credit when they trade in their old gear. Finally, consider donating the backpack to a local charity, especially if it’s an appropriate size for a student.

Final thoughts on the best travel backpacks

Hit the road with any backpack, and sure, it technically becomes a travel backpack. But the best travel backpacks are quite a bit different from the school bags of yesteryear. Having the right travel backpack can protect your laptop or keep your clothing from getting soaked if you get caught in the rain. Though it may seem like a simple item, having the right backpack helps make traveling less stressful, whether you’re commuting or crossing continents.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best travel backpacks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best wool socks of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-wool-socks/ Fri, 30 Sep 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=473964
A lineup of the best wool socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

Ditch your sad, hole-embedded socks and grab a pair that’s warm and moisture-wicking.

The post The best wool socks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best wool socks on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock are the best overall wool socks. Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock
SEE IT

Keep your feet dry and warm on everyday adventures.
Best for hiking Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock is the best for hiking. Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock
SEE IT

Like the name suggests, these socks can go from mountain to river and back.
Best for cycling A pair of black cycling socks on a blue and white background GripGrab Regular Cut Merino Cycling Socks
SEE IT

Thin enough to ensure an effient pedal stroke sans sweat.

Wool socks aren’t just for skiing or extreme cold weather situations. Combined with other materials, they can be incredibly durable, moisture-wicking, and fast-drying—all of which are incredibly important if you’re an athlete or hiker and wear shoes all day. However, wool socks can also provide everyday comfort to those who have incredibly sweaty feet. Although you might picture wool socks as thick and bulky, most are far from it. In fact, wool socks and “regular” socks are practically indistinguishable from each other. The best wool socks combine style, longevity, and comfort—because nothing as small as a sock should cause a big hassle. 

How we chose the best wool socks

I was #blessed with my dad’s sweaty feet, and I am a perpetually damp person. All of this is exacerbated by too much caffeine, very stressful boss battles, and the wrong kind of polyester. In fact, my hands are a little sweaty right now as I type this. The hyperhidrosis diagnosis remains unknown, but I do know one thing: what fabrics to wear to remain easy, breezy, and beautiful. Wool is just one of the many textiles I trust. 

With my perspiration propensity in mind, I gathered peer recommendations, looked at critical reviews and consumer impressions, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research to find the best wool socks. No sheep were harmed in the making of this review.

The best wool socks: Reviews & Recommendations

Just like the Merino sheep they come from, no two pairs of wool socks are alike. The best wool socks are soft, durable, reliable, and machine washable. Here’s what made the cut:

Best overall: Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock

Smartwool Everyday Spruce Street Crew Sock are the best overall wool socks.

Smartwool

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An everyday sock that packs incredible performance power thanks to its primarily wool blend.

Specs

  • Material: 52% Merino wool; 42% nylon; 2% recycled nylon, 4% elastaine 
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 8 inches
  • Cushion: Zero cushion

Pros

  • Secure fit
  • Durable
  • Comfort welt

Cons

  • No cushion

If you’re looking to up your sock game, look no further than the Everyday Spruce Street Crew Socks from Smartwool, who claims they were the first outdoor company to make performance merino wool ski socks. Although not meant for skiing, these Smartwool socks hold up on the day-to-day and make your feet feel like a champion. Reliable and fashionable, these socks are durable thanks to Shred Shield technology that prevents your toes from ripping a hole in your sock, a la that one scene in Alien. A comfort welt helps them stay put, and the merino wool, which is ZQ-certified (an animal welfare and environmental standards audit), has all the benefits sans carbon footprint. 

Smartwool best wool socks Amanda pick
Amanda Reed

Although the top pick is a crew height with no cushion, the company has plenty of other shoppable socks, both showy and sensible, like the targeted cushion ankle socks for running combo shown above. And our assistant managing editor loves his Bike Zero Cushion Ankle Socks, Run Targeted Cushion Low Ankle Socks, and Hike Full Cushion Lolo Trail Crew Socks, using Smartwool’s numerous options to customize his cushioning and coverage for a variety of activities.

Best for hiking: Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock

Darn Tough Merino Wool Boot Sock is the best for hiking.

Darn Tough

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fine-gauge knitting gives this sock incredible durability—just like the name suggests.

Specs

  • Material: 66% merino wool; 32% nylon; 2% lycra; spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Feels like you’re not wearing a sock.
  • Company dedicated to sustainability
  • Full cushion for shock absorption 

Cons

  • Socks can get fuzzy after washing

These socks have a lot to live up to coming from a company name like “Darn Tough.” Thankfully, these socks are truly darn tough. This sock is made using fine-gauge knitting and includes an undetectable seam for an invisible feel that’s obviously built to last. A performance fit means no slipping, bunching, or blisters while keeping your feet cool in the summer and warm in the winter. This full-cushion, boot-height sock has a lifetime warranty—there aren’t that many brands that can say the same. Additionally, the company uses Responsible Wool Standard (RWS)-certified merino wool in all of its products and incorporates recycled nylon—it’s currently looking for a recycled spandex alternative. This means you can rest easy that your socks came from happy sheep and were made with a limited impact on the environment.

Best for cycling: GripGrab Regular Cut Merino Cycling Socks 

A pair of black cycling socks on a blue and white background

GripGrab

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Made specifically for cycling, these tall socks have the right amount of cushion to make hours spent in cycling shoes more comfortable.

Specs

  • Material: 52% merino wool, 25% polyamide, 20% polyester, 3% elastane
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 8 inches
  • Cushion: Light

Pros

  • Odor-resistant
  • Versatile
  • Comfortable

Cons

  • Might be too light for colder rides
  • Expensive

A great pair of cycling socks isn’t just a fashion statement. The socks keep you comfortable as you ride. A three-pack will cost you $54.99, but we think it’s worth it as a specialty sock. The light cushioning isn’t bulky and is in all the right places. The toe seam is practically invisible, and the cuff at the top doesn’t dig into your calves—a major problem with cyclists with thick calves from all the leg work. The balance of merino and synthetic fibers makes this sock durable with just enough of the wool benefits. It also looks classy—no one would know it’s a cycling sock unless you told them. However, reviews note that it’s better suited for warmer rides.

Best for work: Dickies Men’s Dri-Tech Work Crew Socks

Dickies Men’s Dri-Tech Work Crew Socks are the best wool socks for work.

Dickies

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These heavy-duty wool socks come in a bundle to keep your feet dry every day of the week.

Specs

  • Material: 48% polyester, 25% wool, 20% acrylic, 5% nylon, 2% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Thick but lightweight
  • Reinforced heel and toe
  • Arch compression

Cons

  • Not as soft compared to other socks
  • Might not fit smaller feet

Some jobs require steel-toed shoes, which can be tough on your feet. These wool-blend socks from Dickies regulate your foot temperature. Added Dri-Tech fights sweat for dry feet. Cushioning in the leg and foot allows for all-day comfort in constricting shoes and steel-toed boots. Compression at the arch provides support, while a special heel lock keeps the socks in place. Ventilation channels provide extra air circulation and moisture control. Also, they come in a bundle, which means you can save on getting more than one pair for work.

Best for winter: HOT FEET Mens Active Work and Outdoors Hiking Socks

HOT FEET Mens Active Work and Outdoors Hiking Socks are the best wool socks for winter.

HOT FEET

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These thick socks are extra cozy thanks to a thermal wool blend that won’t make your feet sweat.

Specs

  • Material: 62% polyester, 20% wool, 15% nylon, 3% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Reinforced heel and toe
  • Moisture wicking
  • Versatile

Cons

  • Have a tendency to fall down

If you don’t want to get a pair of heated socks or to size your shoes for heated insoles, consider these a great option. You can throw them on for lounging around the house or ski lounge, or take them outside under your favorite boots. A stretchy ribbed cuff keeps the socks in place without digging into your leg, and reinforced heels protect your feet. Also, moisture-wicking means they’ll stay dry in your ski boots. The socks are thicker, so you won’t have to worry about blisters or cold feet.

Best budget: Alvada Merino Wool Hiking Socks 

Alvada Merino Wool Hiking Socks are the best wool socks for the budget.

Alvada

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to break the bank for a soft, warm pair of wool socks that are great for lounging or adventuring.

Specs

  • Material: 80% Merino wool, 15% polyester, 4% nylon, 1% spandex
  • Machine washable: Yes
  • Height: 6 inches
  • Cushion: Full

Pros

  • Primarily wool construction
  • Bundle pack
  • Fuzzy on the inside

Cons

  • Heels and balls of feet wear out fast
  • Run large

If you’re looking for knit socks that aren’t expensive, look no further than this bundle-pack from Alvada. A reinforced heel and toe area allow for more durability and keep your feet blister-free. Arch compression provides support and stability, and full cushion padding gives you extra protection. Say goodbye to stinky feet thanks to ventilation channels that allow for more airflow and breathability. Plus, the socks have a great balance of wool and synthetic fibers to keep your feet dry. They wear out more than higher-priced socks and run large, but you can’t beat the price.

What to consider when buying the best wool socks

Unlike the scratchy, itchy ragg wool that makes up your mom’s sweaters from the ’80s, most wool socks are made of merino wool. This soft, thin fiber comes from Merino sheep and is known for its natural properties: It regulates body temperature, wicks moisture, and prevents odors sans bulk. It’s usually combined with other materials like polyester, nylon, cotton, and spandex for the right balance of the good stuff. Here’s what else you should know when searching for the best wool socks:

Use

A wool sock made for everyday wear is going to perform differently than a crew sock built for cycling. The same goes for those meant for hiking, running, and hunting. When you’re going to wear the sock also matters. A thinner ankle sock is going to be more comfortable than a thick crew sock in the hot, hazy throes of summer. Think about what activity your socked feet will have to endure and shop accordingly. 

Cushion

Cushioning helps prevent blisters and acts as a buffer against the shoe. Wearing a sock with low cushioning with a tough hiking boot leads to major discomfort—and you’ll have to give up halfway up the mountain. Look for a pair of wool socks with more cushioning in the toe, heel, and ankle area if you’re going to wear boots. Likewise, you can get away with less cushioning if you’re wearing extra comfy sneakers with your socks. 

Height

A tall wool sock prevents your tall hiking boots from rubbing against your calf. It also protects your legs from any nasty, gnarly brush or bugs you encounter. If you’re looking to air out your legs because you’re simply walking down the street and not fending off random detritus, choose an ankle-height or no-show sock. 

FAQs

Q: How much do wool socks cost?

Wool socks can go for $30 for a pair or $20 for a pack of three pairs. If the socks are being worn for a specialized activity, you can get away with buying a single one for a higher price. If you’re looking for socks to wear to work, a bundle can be more bang for your buck.

Q: What percent wool should socks be?

It depends on what you’re wearing them for and the kind of wool, but generally, around 40% is the standard. Other textiles, like polyester, cotton, spandex, nylon, and elastane, are added into the mix to add flexibility and durability to the sock. Almost every selection on our list has a fabric blend that includes 30-40% wool.

Q: Can you wear wool socks every day?

Yes! Merino wool is incredibly light and versatile. “Wool” tends to be synonymous with “thick” and “heavy,” and there are wool sock options that can be worn every day. Smartwool has lots of wool socks for everyday and others can also double as an everyday sock.

Q: Which wool is warmest for socks?

Qiviut wool (made of musk ox down), yak wool, and bison wool are incredibly warm. However, these textiles are expensive and difficult. Alpaca wool and merino wool are easier to source and cheaper, which is why a majority of our selections feature merino wool.

Final thoughts on the best wool socks

Wool socks can ease feet during your next big adventure but are functional enough to be worn every day. Although “wool” tends to conjure images of a shoulder-pad clad, gaudy, itchy, eau de mothball sweater that has haunted many a closet and clothing rack, the best wool socks are far from that. Our top picks, from brands like Smartwool, are soft, dependable, and practically indistinguishable from cotton socks. However, they’re more breathable and naturally antimicrobial, keeping your feet dry and your spirits high. Say goodbye to stinky, sweaty feet and hello to sheep-sponsored pleasurable podiatry.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best wool socks of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best sleeping bags of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-sleeping-bags/ Fri, 27 Sep 2019 17:34:42 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-sleeping-bags/
Outdoor Gear photo

There are two simple keys to spending several days in the Great Outdoors: Stay warm, stay dry.

The post The best sleeping bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Outdoor Gear photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best head-to-toe Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy 45-Degree Synthetic Mummy Sleeping Bag
SEE IT

This lightweight and water-repellent sleeping bacg will keep you warm and dry during those unexpected summer showers.
Best for big and tall people Coleman Big Basin Coleman Big Basin 15 Big and Tall Adult Sleeping Bag
SEE IT

This fleece-lined option suits people up to 6 feet, 6 inches tall and will keep you warm down to 15 degrees F.
Best for multiple people Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag for Camping
SEE IT

Cozy up against the cold in this waterproof queen sleeping bag that can also be broken out into two twin sleeping bags.

When you’re out adventuring, camping, or backpacking, a good night’s rest can be the fine line between enjoying nature’s splendors and counting the hours until you’re back inside. A sleeping bag proven to keep its inhabitants warm and dry is key to a good time. It’s important to note that not all sleeping bags are built to accommodate every trip outside. Make your choice according to the climate and season. Here are some of the best sleeping bags.

The best sleeping bags: Reviews & Recommendations

Best head-to-toe: Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy 45-Degree Synthetic Mummy Sleeping Bag

Therm-a-Rest Space Cowboy

Therm-a-Rest

SEE IT

For those camping during the summer, this super lightweight mummy sleeping bag is the key to staying cool and comfortable at night. The exterior boasts a water-repellant coating and the fill dries quickly, so if you’re caught in an unexpected summer shower, you aren’t doomed to hours of sogginess. It comes in three different sizes, so choose according to your height. For those who may want extra warmth, there are loops that allow you to pair the bag with a quilt or blanket.

Best extra-warm: Marmot Trestles 15F Degree Sleeping Bag

Mountain Hardwear Unisex Phantom Flame 15 Long Sleeping Bag

Marmot

SEE IT

If you’re planning on camping in colder climates, this Marmot Trestles 15F Degree sleeping bag is a worthy investment. It’s lightweight enough for backpackers but doesn’t compromise on warmth or comfort. It’s stuffed with a down fill that retains its shape well in damp conditions and features a two-way zipper and a handy mesh pocket.

Best for big and tall people: Coleman Big Basin 15 Big and Tall Adult Sleeping Bag

Coleman Big Basin

Coleman

SEE IT

If you’re on the taller side, you have many advantages in life: easy access to top-shelf items, a great view at any concert venue, and, if you’re a man, a higher salary. But finding a sleeping bag that fits your limbs? Much harder. This large bag from Coleman will do just fine for those up to 6′6″, and can keep you warm in degrees as low as 15° F. The feet are fleece-lined for warmth, and the adjustable hood allows for extra warmth or ventilation. It’s not the lightest sleeping bag, but it is very comfortable.

Best for multiple people: Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag for Camping

Sleepingo Double Sleeping Bag

Sleepingo

SEE IT

If you enjoy sleeping next to another person, this sleeping bag allows enough space for two. It’ll keep you both warm in colder climates (down to 32° F) and comes with two travel pillows. The outer shell is waterproof, and if your relationship breaks down, this queen-size sleeping bag also can break down into a couple of twin-sized sacks.

The post The best sleeping bags of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboarding-jackets/ Fri, 05 Mar 2021 19:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snowboarding-jackets/
snowboarder on top of a snowy mountain holding a snowboard and wearing the best snowboarding jacket
Yann Allegre via Unsplash

Stay warm, dry, and show off your best moves with these stylish jackets.

The post The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
snowboarder on top of a snowy mountain holding a snowboard and wearing the best snowboarding jacket
Yann Allegre via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall for women Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket
SEE IT

This eco-friendly shell made from 70 percent recycled materials.
Best for pros Arc’teryx Rush Jacket - Men’s Arc’teryx Rush Jacket – Men’s
SEE IT

Designed for maximum protection from the elements while still offering breathability.
Best for kids Burton Boys Symbol Jacket Burton Boys Symbol Jacket
SEE IT

This coat that expands as you need it, so it will last kids more than one season.

If you’ve bundled up in cold and snowy conditions to hit the ski slopes, you might think that you don’t need a separate snowboarding jacket if you want to switch things up to do a few halfpipe tricks. It’s true that a ski jacket with sufficient insulation and waterproofing does provide protection against the elements—and that might be just fine for some people. However, the best snowboarding jackets offer coveted features tailored to the unique nature of the sport.

Ultimately, choosing the best snowboard jacket to match the rest of your snowboarding gear depends on your preferences, skill level, and the conditions in which you’ll be taking to the air. Snowboarding jackets can be made up of high-tech material suitable for intermediates and pros, or a variety of materials that emphasize comfort and versatility. Special features like zippered air vents, designated pockets, and taped seams can make your experience even better. Here’s what to look for to find one of the best snowboarding jackets, whether you’re hand planting or face planting.

The best snowboarding jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

The key differences between these ski jackets and showboarding jackets come down to fit and style. In many types of skiing, how fast you can make it down the mountain is a top goal. Aerodynamic designs need to fit snuggly to minimize resistance on your (hopefully controlled) descent. In contrast, the intricate movements required to stay on your snowboard as you execute flips, grab the heel or toe edges of the board, and rotate in mid-air, favor a looser fit. Even when you don’t bail in the middle of a move or unexpectedly land on your backside, you’ll also spend a lot of time seated in the snow to strap on your board, so a longer jacket is crucial to keeping your rear end from feeling the deep freeze. And with obvious parallels to the subcultures of skateboarding, snowboarding clothes are an opportunity to experiment with creative expression rather than fit into a traditional resort look.

Best overall for men: Patagonia Snowshot 3-in-1 Jacket

Patagonia Snowshot 3-in-1 Jacket

REI

SEE IT

The 2-layer outer shell is waterproof, water-repellent, and breathable, with a detachable hood, cuffs you can adjust to wear over or under your gloves to protect against gaps, and zippered air vents under the armpits for quick cooling. Wear the quilted and insulated inner layer by itself depending on the weather, or bundle up with the whole combo. The embedded RECCO® reflector is a nice feature in the event of an avalanche as part of a comprehensive safety plan. Plus, you can keep your feet warm and protected with some of the best snowboarding boots.

Best overall for women: Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket

Patagonia Snowbelle 3-in-1 Jacket

REI

SEE IT

The Patagonia Snowbelle is very similar to the men’s Snowshot, and is an excellent women’s snowboarding jacket that can be worn while snowboarding or skiing. The inner insulated jacket is reversible to either a smooth or quilted surface, with 60 grams of synthetic insulation that performs even in wet conditions. Design highlights include a back long enough to reach your hips and a powder skirt that can be attached to any of Patangonia’s snow pants to offer a comprehensive barrier against the weather.

Best for beginners: REI Co-op First Chair GTX Jacket

REI Co-op First Chair GTX Jacket

REI

SEE IT

At this price point, this is the best snowboarding jacket to acquire a high-quality shell when you’re still getting to know the sport. Stay comfortable with classic features including two-layers of Gore-Tex, a longer back hem, water-repellent zippers, and lots of room for adding insulated layers. What really makes this snowboarding jacket stand out are extra touches like the ability to detach the power skirt, a soft liner in the hand pockets, and cozy tricot fabric in the high collar to pamper your chin when you’ve tucked it in against the wind. Then protect yourself with one of the best snowboarding helmets.

Best for all-day wear: Arc’teryx Ravenna LT Jacket – Women’s

Arc’teryx Ravenna LT Jacket - Women’s

REI

SEE IT

This Arc’teryx jacket features brushed flannel on the inside for softness and warmth, plus waterproof and windproof protection courtesy of 3-layer Gore-Tex.

Enjoy the added security of RFID blocking materials to help ensure your passport and credit cards can’t be accessed by a scammer while you’re out and about. The powder skirt is removable once you’re off the slopes.

Best for pros: Arc’teryx Rush Jacket – Men’s

Arc’teryx Rush Jacket - Men’s

REI

SEE IT

The Arc’teryx Rush features a special material created in collaboration with Gore-Tex to deliver three layers of protection against water and wind. Pit-zips and pocket zips alike are fortified with their trademark WaterTight design, and the helmet-compatible hood protects while keeping maximum visibility. The sleek, color-block appearance leaves plenty of room for your awesome jumps, flips, and aerial rotation to take center stage. At just over 1.5 pounds, it’s easy to store in anticipation of your next adventure.

Best for kids: Burton Boys Symbol Jacket

Burton Boys Symbol Jacket

Burton

SEE IT

This snowboarding jacket checks all the boxes of comfort and utility: a waist gaiter that’s compatible with Burton’s snow pants, DryRide insulation (their version of Gore-Tex) to keep kids from shivering when they work up a sweat, a hood that’s adjustable to fit a helmet, and taping of major seams for durability and protection from the elements. Their signature Room-To-Grow system makes this coat last more than one season, since you can let out the sleeves 1.5 inches when they start to get taller than you.

Best budget: Suokeni Women’s Snow Coat

Suokeni Women’s Snow Coat

Suokeni

SEE IT

The Suokeni Women’s Snow Coat is versatile enough to grab out of your closet for a brisk winter walk with friends or a trip to the slopes. Key features include adjustable cuffs for your gloves or mittens, a detachable storm hood, and a snow skirt. While it’s primarily made of synthetic material, this jacket includes a cotton filling to help retain heat. A DWR polymer coating repels water and the outer layer also protects against the wind. Consider layering for added warmth in colder temperatures.

Things to consider when shopping for the best snowboarding jackets

When you take a little time to familiarize yourself with the types of snowboarding coats on the market, you’ll be able to choose the perfect gear for your needs and budget. The best snowboarding jacket for you may change along with your relationship to the sport, but you can avoid over (or under) equipping if you understand the purpose of each feature offered as you shop.

Are you searching for versatility in a jacket?

If you’re looking to get the most for your money in a jacket you can wear at home, around town, or on the trail, gear with multiple functions is a good choice. The best snowboarding jacket for multiple functions is called a 3-in-1 jacket, which means it can be worn three different ways depending on the situation.

Look for 3-in-1 jackets with a waterproof and insulated outer layer, and an inner shell that can be easily un-zippered from the outer layer. If you’re lucky enough to hit the resort when it’s warm outside, the shell might be just what you need to stay dry and minimally exposed to the wind. Wear the insulated outer layer as an everyday coat, and both together when conditions are truly wintery.

Synthetic materials are generally the most practical option for snowboarding jackets. Down jackets may be known for their ability to retain heat, but they lose their power to insulate you when wet. You can buy down jackets meant for use in snowy conditions with additional water-resistant layers, but synthetic materials for the best snowboarding jackets have been researched, planned, and tested expressly under the powder-tasting conditions snowboarders face.

Are you new to the sport?

If you’re just starting out, purchasing a quality jacket at a lower price point allows you to learn what features are a must-have for your snowboarding style. How hot will you actually be on the trail or course when you hit your groove? What kinds of pockets will prove essential for your phone, gloves, and snacks, and whatever else you’d like to carry once you’ve left the lodge?

To get the full benefits of gear designed specifically for snowboarding as opposed to skiing, a mid-range shell jacket is a solid option. A well-designed shell with good water and windproofing gives you room to layer and doesn’t restrict your movement as you practice grabs and basic jumps.

The one feature beginners should definitely look for in a snowboarding jacket is an elongated back with a powder skirt (also called a waist gaiter), which creates a tighter fit of your jacket around your body so you don’t have the freezing sensation of snow traveling up your back when you’ve taken a spill or from loose powder in the wind. (And you will take a spill. Or three.)

Are you ready to level up?

Snow enthusiasts who are contemplating investing a significant amount of time in snowboarding should consider purchasing a shell-style snow jacket. Sometimes called technical shells, these jackets are meant to be worn with extra layers underneath in colder temperatures, and feature high-tech materials like Gore-Tex, eVent, and Omni-Tech. These materials help ensure your jacket is waterproof, breathable, and protective against the wind.

You’ll also want to think about what your days look like snowboarding. Are you a weekender who books a couple of nights at a resort and likes to ski, snowboard, and drive into town for fine dining or drinks? In that case, you might prefer a slightly bulkier shell with warmer insulation that you can keep on all day.

Remember, along with top technical fabrics for waterproofing, the best snowboarding jackets have taped seams to ensure that there is no room for leaks and that everything you’re storing in your pockets stays dry.

Are you a super-serious shredder?

There’s no question that making an investment in the best snowboarding jackets is a good idea when you’re at the pro-level —even if you never plan to compete. A comprehensive grasp of the terminology of the sport means you’ll recognize what each feature of a pro-level jacket is addressing, like spindrift, which the Avalanche Center defines as “fine grained snow being carried by wind or falling.”

Keep in mind that snowboarding jackets at the pro-level are designed for a specific purpose, rather than trying to cover all the bases of a day spent outdoors. A lighter and more portable technical shell may be excellent for water and wind protection but work best with additional specialized layers of insulation. You might also see additional layers of Gore-Tex or other highly technical insulation in pro-level jackets, and other types of fabric designed to stand up in the toughest conditions.

Expect pro-level gear to be made from the latest materials being developed for optimal mobility and protection, and subjected to rigorous testing and standards pro athletes can trust. Every detail should be thought-out carefully and questioned in the larger context of performance. You can definitely find stylish pro-level gear, but that style will be in service to the end game: ensuring you can give every run all you’ve got.

Are the kids coming with you?

With all clothing purchases for kids, there are numerous factors that come into play, many of which you can’t control. Kids lose interest in activities quickly, and grow out of clothes just as fast. Get the most from your money by seeking a coat with features that can adapt as they grow (such as Burton’s Room-To-Grow sleeves), and that they’ll want to wear to school, on snowy weekend adventures, and in the backyard building a snowman.

Unless your child is training or competing as a snowboarder, you don’t necessarily need a jacket designated only for snowboarding. After all, next week they might decide they’re going to be a downhill Olympic skier. If the jacket you choose has a waist gaiter to keep powder at bay and a hood that fits a helmet, that will go a long way towards making your time together on the mountain enjoyable.

Are you on a budget?

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a snowboard jacket?

Once you gain a thorough understanding of the common features and jacket types described in this article, you’ll want to choose a snowboard jacket that has the features you need for your skill level, fits in with your other winter gear (i.e. if you already have a 3-in-1 jacket, a technical shell will probably be next on your list), and is compatible with your budget. After you’ve narrowed down the jackets that meet these specs, feel free to have fun with style and color.

Q: Are snowboard jackets warm?

The warmth of a snowboard jacket will vary depending on the type of jacket you purchase. Lightweight technical shells will have less insulation than a 3-in-1 jacket. For many snowboarders, layering is key to enjoying boarding in all conditions. Choose a jacket based on your entire snow wardrobe, rather than based on warmth alone.

Q: What is a good waterproof rating for snowboarding?

Waterproof ratings can tell you something about your gear, but it’s a better idea to take into account the quality of the whole garment and the conditions under which it will be used. The difference between a 10,000mm waterproof rating and a 28,000mm rating may not matter at all, depending on these other factors. If you choose a top brand jacket made with technical fabrics and quality craftsmanship, you’ll likely find the number you need— but if you search based on number alone, you could end up with a jacket with leaking seams or poor durability.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboarding jackets

The most important characteristic of snowboarding gear is performance that matches what you’re capable of at the resort or in the backcountry. The best snowboarding jackets keep you warm and dry, give you plenty of room to move, and offer features like powder skirts tailored specifically for the sport. Casual snowboarders might have one great jacket for both skiing and snowboarding, and serious shredders might have several jackets depending on the weather and terrain. Once you have the right gear, you can focus on the unparalleled thrill of fresh air and exercise that in its best moments, make you feel like you’re on top of the world.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboarding jackets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? https://www.popsci.com/gear/oru-beach-lt-sport-kayak-review/ Thu, 24 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=564465
The Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on the shore of a lake
Abby Ferguson

Despite the lightweight and portable design, the Oru Beach LT Sport is a foldable kayak that's very stable on the water.

The post Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on the shore of a lake
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Kayaks have not changed significantly in general shape and materials for quite some time, and the traditional design presents some logistical issues for most of us. Most companies craft their personal-sized boats out of rigid materials like hard plastic. That makes them heavy to transport and hard to store when you’re not on the water. If you live in a smaller apartment or home, having a kayak may be flat-out impossible simply because you don’t have a place to keep it. And transporting one on your own could require Herculean strength on top of having access to a vehicle large enough to hold it. 

Enter Oru Kayak. Inspired by origami—the Japanese paper-folding technique—Oru developed a range of unique foldable kayaks, offering a much more apartment-friendly solution. The result is a lightweight, compact, and highly portable boat that isn’t at risk of deflating like pack rafts and other inflatable options. Oru sent us its Beach LT Sport Kayak to test out for a few months, and we had a blast getting to know this truly distinct boat. 

Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on a grassy shoreline

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Overview

  • The Oru Beach LT Kayak is a lightweight, open cockpit-style kayak that’s easy to store and transport.
  • Despite being foldable, it’s stable on the water.
  • It offers a rail system for mounting accessories like fishing poles or camera gear. 

Pros

  • Only weighs 28 pounds
  • Folds up to a large suitcase size for easy storage and transport
  • Extremely stable in the water
  • Easy to get in and out of
  • Rails allow for easy accessory attachment
  • Moves smoothly and quickly in the water
  • Gel cushion seat adds comfort
  • Adjustable backrest and footrest
  • Easy to maneuver around

Cons

  • Gets pushed around in windy conditions
  • Some components showed wear after just a few uses
  • Black plastic gets hot in the sun
  • Expensive

Verdict

The Oru Beach LT Sport hits a sweet spot for those who want to get out and adventure on the water but don’t have the space or transportation for a traditional kayak. It isn’t a cheap option, but it is in line with heavier fishing kayaks.

The Oru Beach LT Sport folded down and carried by a woman on a shoreline.
When folded down, the Beach LT Sport is very easy to carry by just one person. Abby Ferguson

The Oru Beach LT Sport Kayak’s design

The Oru Beach LT Sport Kayak falls roughly in the middle of Oru’s six different offerings in terms of size, price, and features. In fact, it combines features from its enthusiast-oriented Beach LT and the larger, more advanced Haven TT. Oru makes all of its kayaks out of 5mm double-layered, custom-extruded polypropylene—called OruPlast—which looks like a plastic version of corrugated cardboard. Oru coats the material with a 10-year UV treatment and claims its kayaks are puncture- and abrasion-resistant. 

The Beat LT Sport is a 12-foot-long, open-cockpit kayak, which means it leaves your legs exposed as you float but offers more room for gear. It weighs just 28 pounds but can hold up to 300 pounds. Oru says this kayak can be paddled in deep water but not in heavy wind or chop. Your best bet is to stick to calm days. It features rails on both sides for attaching fishing rod holders, cup holders, camera equipment, and more, making it the ideal Oru for fishing and other such adventures. 

A woman folds up the Oru kayak
It takes a few times to get the process down, but then setup and breakdown is easy and fast. Abby Ferguson

The Beach LT Sport’s setup

One of the main perks of Oru kayaks is that they fold down into compact packages—33 inches by 13 inches by 29 inches, in this case. But that means that they do require assembly. For help with this, it comes with a handy book with graphics and step-by-step instructions. You can also scan a QR code to pull up a video of the assembly process, which was very helpful. 

Oru specifies on its website that assembling the Beach LT Sport takes 10-15 minutes. I found that to be accurate after I put it together a few times. The first time took about 20 minutes as my husband and I figured out the process and which pieces go where. It’s worth noting that the edge of the plastic is pretty sharp, and I managed to slice myself when putting the boat together the first time. It didn’t happen again, but definitely be careful as you assemble the kayak. After I got the hang of it, assembly was really quick and simple, and I could easily knock it out myself in 10 minutes or so. 

Putting the boat back into suitcase mode was more of a challenge than assembling it and took quite a bit longer, especially the first few times. There were instructions in the book with graphics for each step, but some weren’t very clear. It also took a lot of hunting to find a video of the disassembly process. Adding to the difficulty is the fact that the plastic was extra rigid the first few times, which made it tough to bend things back the opposite way. But, after working out some of the kinks—literally and figuratively—disassembly took roughly the same amount of time as assembly. 

A person sitting in the Oru Beach LT Sport kayak on a river
The Beach LT Sport is surprisingly stable on the water, thanks partly to how long it is. And the rails for accessories like cup holders are very handy. Abby Ferguson

The Beach LT Sport’s performance

A foldable kayak may be neat and useful, but it isn’t much good if it doesn’t perform well on the water. Luckily, the Beach LT Sport was fantastic in most situations. I was really surprised at how stable it was, especially considering how lightweight it is. I could move around in the kayak—reaching behind the seat to get the sunscreen and sun hat, casting a fishing rod, reaching over to grab my husband’s boat—without the slightest worry about tipping over. I even purposefully wiggled around a lot with no issues. Oru even specifies that these are great for dogs. I didn’t bring my pooch along while testing since she doesn’t do very well in boats, but it would definitely be stable enough for all but the most rambunctious dogs. 

Since the kayak is so lightweight, it is extremely easy to maneuver in the water. It picks up speed with ease, and I could turn on a dime. The boat cuts smoothly through the water, making for a really pleasant experience. And, as you would hope, the boat was completely watertight, so the only water I had coming in was dripping from the paddle. 

The lightweight design does have its downsides, however. Both the current and wind pushed me around pretty easily, which made it tricky to stay in one spot while fishing. When I went out in a nearby river or in windy conditions, I had to repeatedly put the fishing rod down and paddle back to my spot. Granted, this is going to be the case to a certain extent with most sit-in paddle-based kayaks when compared to a sit-on peddle-drive setup, but it still got to be frustrating. I also found myself skipping out on trips on windy days because I didn’t want to fight with the wind, and Oru specifies this boat isn’t for use in heavy wind or chop.

The interior of the Oru Beach LT Sport, showing the gel seat and backrest
The Beach LT Sport comes with a gel seat cushion, which is extra comfy. Abby Ferguson

Oru Beach LT Sport comfort

Most people will be taking a kayak out for more than just a few minutes, so it needs to be comfortable to sit in for long periods. Oru clearly prioritized comfort with this model, as it includes a gel cushion seat, which is usually a separate upgrade. It’s nicely padded and comfortable to sit on. The backrest—which is lightly padded—is adjustable in height and reclining angle so that you can fine-tune your position. The adjustable footrest is just a plastic bar, but you can adjust its distance for an ideal sitting position.

I typically ventured out for a few hours at a time, and overall, I was quite happy with how comfortable the Beach LT Sport was. After an hour or so, I did get a bit restless and had to keep adjusting my position to be comfortable, but that’s true of any seated position for extended periods for me. Luckily, it’s stable enough to hold up to my wiggling around to get comfortable. 

A photo showing the rubber edging coming off of the floor panel of the Oru kayak
The rubber edging came loose from the floor panel after just a single use. Abby Ferguson

Durability

Overall, I was really impressed by this Oru kayak, but it was not without faults. While Oru kayaks are made of rugged and durable materials, the front and back fairings showed signs of wear (slight tearing near the seams) after just a few uses. I didn’t pull on them any more than I had to in order to get them on the kayak, so this was surprising to see. Also, the rubber edging on the floor piece popped off slightly the first time I used it and continued to come loose throughout my testing. It tended to collect water, which would get inside the corrugated plastic. I’m sure it could be glued on, but I was disappointed that the piece came loose so quickly. 

It’s also worth pointing out that while Oru kayaks are made of highly durable plastic, the act of unfolding and folding puts wear and tear on the joints. That’s one aspect typical kayaks don’t need to consider. Oru specifies that its kayaks are rated to 20,000 folds, which means they should last for a very, very long time, but I only tested it for about half a dozen folds and can’t speak to long-term durability.  

The Oru kayak on a grassy shoreline
The Beach LT Sport isn’t a cheap kayak, but it does have lots of perks. Abby Ferguson

So, who should buy the Oru Beach LT Sport?

I have wanted a kayak for a long time, but the idea of figuring out storage and then trying to transport the thing on my own as a small female was an obstacle. Inflatable kayaks have existed for a while, but you need to have some means of inflating them and then hope you don’t get a puncture. Oru Kayaks offer a sweet spot for a lot of people because of just how lightweight, compact, and portable they are without needing any additional equipment or tools. 

The Beach LT Sport is normally priced just shy of $2,000, which is at the expensive end, to be sure. But if you compare it to other fishing kayaks—which is what this is meant to be—it’s not out of line. That’s especially true when you consider the portability and storage benefits you get from this kayak compared to traditional ones. The Beach LT Sport has its downsides—it doesn’t perform well in windy conditions or in rough water—but it is also an extremely fun kayak in a tiny, easy-to-work-with package. 

More photos of the Oru Beach LT Sport

The Oru Beach LT Sport folded down
When folded up, the Beach LT Sport is remarkably compact. Abby Ferguson
Legs in a kayak going through a narrow canal through a forest.
This kayak can take you to some pretty spots. Abby Ferguson
The fairings and front handle of the Oru Kayak
The fairings offer handles on both sides for easy carrying when you have two people. I did notice some tearing on mine after just a few uses, though. Abby Ferguson
Legs stretched out in the Oru Kayak with another kayak in front on a river.
There is a ton of legroom in the kayak, at least for someone of my height (5′ 6″). Abby Ferguson

The post Oru Beach LT Sport foldable kayak review: Whatever, wherever floats your boat? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme https://www.popsci.com/gear/solo-stove-pi-prime-pizza-oven-review/ Wed, 23 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=564674
Solo Stove Pi Prime with pizza coming out
That's a gluten-free pizza believe it or not. Stan Horaczek

Solo Stove's propane-powered pizza oven is durable, portable, and requires just the right amount of culinary skill.

The post Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Solo Stove Pi Prime with pizza coming out
That's a gluten-free pizza believe it or not. Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cooking pizza with a wood fire requires a certain amount of artistry. You have to craft the pie itself, but tending to the fire is a skill all its own. The flame lives and breathes as it burns, which was a key selling point for Solo Stove’s first pizza oven, the Pi. Unfortunately, for culinary dunces like myself, that romantic Neapolitan fantasy often ends with sad, burnt pizzas and a call to Domino’s. That’s where the Solo Stove Pi Prime comes in. 

This 30-pound, propane-powered oven doesn’t require wood fire at all. Push the electric starter, and the built-in burner churns out a consistent flame that burns with relentless consistency and ruthless intensity. The end result: Crispy crusts and charred pepperonis that are delicious enough to justify the extra Tums you’ll need to digest them. No practice necessary.

Solo Stove Pi Prime pizza oven sitting on a patio

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Overview

  • The follow-up to the original Solo Stove Pi, the Pi Prime only works with liquid propane like you’d use for your gas grill. Wood fire isn’t an option. 
  • It cooks 12-inch pizzas at temperatures up to 900 degrees Fahrenheit on a removable Corderite pizza stone. 
  • It weighs just 30 pounds and comes with a durable cover, so it’s easy to lug around in a typical car trunk.
  • It costs $349 directly from Solo Stove, but we recommend upgrading to the $469 starter kit, which comes with essential accessories that make cooking much easier.

Pros

  • Electric start gets the fire going instantly, and it heats up in less than 15 minutes
  • It reaches extremely high temperatures. We read over 900 degrees when cranked. 
  • It burns roughly one pound of liquid propane per hour when set to max (which you won’t need), so it costs less than $1 per hour to operate
  • Relatively easy to carry around and fits in a typical car trunk
  • Removable pizza stones and stainless steel construction make cleaning simple
  • Cheaper than the fire-based model
  • Accessories allow for cooking other foods besides pizza
  • Monolithic design makes it easier to transport than other pizza ovens with tall chimneys

Cons

  • Stainless steel outer surface gets very hot and stays that way for more than an hour after cooking
  • No built-in thermometer
  • Culinary dorks will tell you how much they like fire better and how the pizza was “totally amazing” when they went to Napoli (which they’ll pronounce in an annoying way)

Verdict

This is a perfect option for cooks who want to spend more time picking ingredients, stretching dough, and actually making pizza instead of fussing around with sticks in a wood fire. It’s simple, portable, easy to clean, and generally a great addition to any quiver of outdoor cooking equipment.

The Solo Stove Pi Prime build

An internal look at the Pi Prime pizza oven
This is what the interior looks like before the first cook. The flame comes from the burner at the back, and the stones are separated to make them easy to take out and clean. Stan Horaczek

If you’re familiar with Solo Stove’s excellent fire pits, the design here should make sense. It’s a stainless steel cylinder with a hole cut in the side to slide the pizzas in. It weighs roughly 30 pounds, so it’s relatively easy to carry around. It stands just 15 inches high and 20.5 inches across, so even my 14-year-old son had no trouble lugging it around on his own. It does require a liquid propane tank, however, so you’ll need to consider the bulk and weight of that if you’re going to transport the Pi Prime.

It looks and feels like a Solo Stove, which is a very good thing in our book. 

The Solo Stove Pi Prime setup

The Pi Prime can sit on any non-flammable surface (it has feet to elevate the hot parts above whatever surface you choose). For my test, I simply sat it on a wall made of patio stone in my yard. But I would recommend getting the dedicated stand to go with it if you can stomach the $250 price. You constantly need to look into the oven to watch the pizzas as they cook quickly, so you want it at a height that doesn’t require endless bending. 

Once you find a spot, the rest of the setup process requires little more than attaching the propane tank via the integrated hose, installing the Corderite pizza stones (which consist of two pieces to make them easier to maneuver), and pushing the electric ignition to get the fire going. 

The Solo Stove Pi Prime performance

Solo Stove Pi Prime with a pizza cooking inside
The stainless steel surface gets messy during the cooking process, but it’s easy to wipe with a damp cloth. Stan Horaczek

You’ll notice the conspicuous absence of a thermometer on the Pi Prime. Solo Stove sells an instant-read infrared thermometer on Amazon and as part of its pizza oven packages instead of integrating a temperature monitor directly into the device. I thought that would be more of a downside than it turned out to be in practice. I started my test by simply turning the gas to medium/high and letting it rip for about 20 minutes before putting in the first pizza. It worked out just fine. 

The burner is localized to the back of the oven, so it’s obviously much hotter back there than it is up front near the opening. As a result, you need to give the pizza constant attention to ensure each quadrant of the pie gets the correct amount of char. This may sound tedious, but pizzas take roughly 90 seconds to a maximum of three minutes to cook at these temperatures. It gives novice cooks like me a chance to get in there with the turning peel (an accessory I absolutely recommend) and really take part in the pizza-making process. After the first pizza, I was totally hooked on the process. I thought that must be how other famous pizza chefs, like Charles Entertainment Cheese, must feel. It’s a rush.

After about seven pizzas, I did need to turn the power down slightly because the heat was getting too intense in the chamber. If you’re going to be doing extended cooks, the infrared thermometer really is a must. The same is true if you plan on doing any proper baking since that process is far less forgiving. 

Once everything is heated up and running smoothly, each pizza takes about 90 seconds from when it first slides into the oven until it comes out bubbling from a 750-degree chamber. Times vary depending on toppings–adding fresh mozzarella takes longer because of all the moisture. Overall, though, it’s very pleasant and meditative. 

Cleanup

The worst part about cleaning the Solo Stove Pi Prime is waiting for it to cool down after you’re done cooking. Once it’s comfortable to touch, you can remove the stones, which come in two pieces so they’re easy to slide in and out of the chamber. The stones are sensitive to water, so you can’t submerge them. You have to scrape the loose particles off and then gently wash them. They will stain—that’s inevitable. But it doesn’t affect the performance.

The rest of the device is very simple to clean. It’s all stainless steel, so you can wipe it with a damp rag and sauce, cheese, and whatever else comes off very easily. The only part that provides any real challenge is the roof of the cooking chamber, which might get some goop on it if your dough bubbles high enough that the toppings touch it. Even that’s relatively quick to deal with, however.

Solo Stove Pi vs. the Solo Stove Pi Prime

Solo Stove Pi Prime-cooked gluten free pizza with arugula and chicken.
Here’s a gratuitous pizza detail. It’s a gluten-free crust with chicken, mozzarella, and arugula (it’s a vegetable). Stan Horaczek

If you’re considering both of Solo Stove’s pizza offerings, the choice should be relatively simple, depending on your desires. Both ovens are nearly identical in size and weight, but the original Pi costs $399, $50 more than the $349 Pi Prime’s retail price. The original Pi can work with propane, but only if you buy the optional burner accessory that you’ll need to install. That adds another $129 to the total cost. 

I’m only really interested in propane cooking, so the choice is obvious for me. If you want the flexibility, it may be worth spending the extra money upfront so you can satisfy your culinary whims. I don’t have culinary whims. I want pizza. That’s what makes the Pi Prime work for me.

So, who should buy the Solo Stove Pi Prime?

For $349, this is one of the most portable, durable, and versatile gas-powered pizza ovens available at the moment. It weighs more than a similar model from its main competitor, Ooni, but it’s also cheaper, and I like the form factor better overall. While some serious cooks may find the lack of wood fire support limiting, I’m grateful for it. And I think other enthusiastic novices will feel the same way. Pizza ovens aren’t worth the money they cost and the garage space they occupy if they’re too annoying to use. The Pi Prime is so simple, quick, and effective that I used it way more than I would have initially thought. Sure, I did slightly burn off my fingerprints when I carelessly touched the stainless steel outer surface that’s clearly marked “hot,” but I also made and ate a bunch of great pizzas. And that’s what outdoor cooking is really all about. Just stock up on Tums when you add it to your cart. Those pepperonis will get you.

The post Solo Stove Pi Prime review: Propane-powered pizza oven supreme appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snowboard helmets of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboard-helmet/ Thu, 04 Mar 2021 22:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-snowboard-helmet/
person snowboarding down a mountain wearing the best snowboard helmet
Visit Almaty via Unsplash

These will shield your your head from a fall while making sure you still look good.

The post The best snowboard helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
person snowboarding down a mountain wearing the best snowboard helmet
Visit Almaty via Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Smith Optics Unisex Adult Smith Optics Unisex Adult
SEE IT

High quality, highly rated in a timeless style offers lightweight, warm but breathable protection.
Best smart POC, Obex Spin POC Obex Spin
SEE IT

This high-tech helmet has built-in speakers and a microphone along with Bluetooth technology.
Best budget Smith Optics Holt Smith Optics Holt
SEE IT

Modern unisex helmet with ABS construction.

Before you get to shredding the slopes, you have to make sure you’ve got the best snowboard helmet as part of your snow gear. Snowboarding, like skiing, requires an investment in selecting the right gear. Some gear can be rented but others are better to purchase and bring with you—for example, items that really need to have a personal fit, like snowboard helmets and goggles. Whether you are a beginner or advanced snowboarder, helmets are an essential piece of snowboarding gear and should offer optimal fit, comfort, hygiene, and protection for full, fun, safe days on the slopes.

The best snowboard helmet will fit snugly, fasten with a secure chin strap, and protect you from the cold while allowing for venting and moisture-wicking for added comfort. For safety, your helmet should be certified by the ASTM, and should coordinate and fit seamlessly with your goggles. While there is no actual difference between skiing and snowboarding helmets in terms of practical protection, snowboarders are big on style, and this carries through to snowboard helmets. Ranging in price from around $50 to $350, the market is full of selections for your budget. While some helmets are specifically designed for men, women, or children, many are made to be unisex—and every helmet is made to keep you safe, regardless of who is wearing it.

The best snowboard helmets: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: Smith Optics Unisex Adult

Smith Optics Unisex Adult

Smith

SEE IT

This is a classic, well-rated unisex snowboard helmet from a leading snowsport industry manufacturer. It features a hybrid SL shell with Aerocore open cell construction to both protect and ventilate. Additional flexibility and comfort come from the adjustable Boa FS360 fit system.

Best for women: Oakley Women Mod1 MIPS

Oakley Women Mod1 MIPS

Oakley

SEE IT

This women’s snowboard helmet offers a comfortable ventilated design with removable ear pads and liner. A fidlock style buckle uses magnets to fasten the helmet strap quickly even while wearing gloves. It’s fully rated for safety, and durability.

Best smart: POC, Obex Spin

POC, Obex Spin

POC

SEE IT

This is a bluetooth snowboard helmet for tech-minded snow sport enthusiasts. Layers of protection and an EPS liner protect your head from impact, while sliding vents control temperature and reduce overall fogging. Bluetooth-enabled built-in speakers and a microphone allow communication and music right inside.

Best for kids: Bern Kids Winter Bandito Snow Helmet

Bern Kids Winter Bandito Snow Helmet

Bern

SEE IT

This is the best kids snowboard helmet, for those who are not quite ready for adult sizes. The style is trendy and is available in several fun colorways, including all-white with confetti. The helmet has a built-in visor to reduce sun glare and uses EPS Thinshell technology to keep the helmet lightweight.

Best with visor: Giro Orbit MIPS Spherical Snow Helmet

Giro Orbit MIPS Spherical Snow Helmet

Giro

SEE IT

This is one of the best snowboard helmets, from a well-respected and highly rated brand. This high-end helmet uses MIPS protection as well as a spherical vivid shield for added peripheral vision and protection from glare. A plus is that it can be used with or without eyeglasses. It comes at a higher cost but if you consider it as a two-in-one, it makes more sense.

Best budget: Smith Optics Holt

Smith Optics Holt

Smith

SEE IT

This Smith snowboard helmet is a solid option for beginners or budget-minded shoppers. This classic skate-style helmet is unisex. The helmet is designed with a self-adjusting lifestyle fit that offers flexibility to conform to individual head shape for added comfort.

Features to consider when shopping for the best snowboard helmet

Check out our shopping guide to help you select the best snowboard helmet for your budget and style. Whether you want a well-rated, basic unisex helmet or a tricked-out Bluetooth-enabled number, we’ve selected some of the highest-quality helmets on the market.

Looking for something versatile? A unisex snowboard helmet is a must

The best unisex snowboarding helmet should be—not surprisingly—extremely versatile. If you are buying a helmet to casually try out the sport, a unisex style means someone else in your family can use the same helmet (assuming they have a similar-sized head). In fact, most snowboarding helmets are marketed as unisex, because, well, heads are pretty much the same. There is no actual reason to buy a gender-specific helmet other than a simple style preference. The best unisex helmets will come in basic solid colorways and a streamlined modern style. Designed for safety, the best helmets will be designed to absorb impact in case of crashing. Comfort will include the use of breathable liners and vents throughout the helmet to expel hot air.

Looking for a helmet designed for a woman?

While there is no specific anatomical reason to buy a women’s snowboard helmet, sometimes you just want the extra design flourishes. Many women’s helmets are a little more streamlined and less visually bulky.

The best women’s snowboarding helmet will offer style without any compromise to function, safety, and comfort. Like all quality helmets, you will want to find a snug, comfortable fit with some adjustability. Ventilation systems will allow for heat to pass during intense exercise keeping the head warm and dry. And again, all helmets should be rated by ASTM for impact safety.

Do you like to listen to music when you go snowboarding?

It’s hard to imagine a more thrilling experience than listening to your favorite songs comfortably in your helmet while enjoying a pristine day on the slopes. With built-in Bluetooth technology, you can feel a little like James Bond—all this technology is now possible right inside your helmet. Speakers and a microphone are built into the ear pads and allow for not only tunes, but communication, so you can stay connected with others and keep updated on snow and weather conditions. This added communication can keep you safer when you’re out in the mountains, which are notorious for quickly changing weather conditions.

A good Bluetooth snowboard helmet will offer comfortable built-in speakers, along with all the other important safety and comfort features you would want in your snowboarding helmet. Important features to look for are impact safety construction, interior adjustment for optimal fit, soft wicking interior lining fabrics. as well as ventilation.

Interested in less gear? Consider a snowboarding helmet with a built-in visor

If you’re trying to streamline your snow gear, consider a snowboarding helmet that includes a visor. Snowboard helmets that include an integrated shield will not only protect your head, but will also offer protection to your eyes and increased visibility. This unique combination eliminates the need for goggles, thereby reducing the overall amount of items you need to bring for days on the slopes. Another bonus for this style is you don’t have to worry about helmet/goggle compatibility—and the combo allows a quick flip-up/flip-down when you want to expose your face without eye protection.

The best snowboard helmets with visors, also known as integrated shields, will offer top-of-the-line protection and include MIPS (Multi-Directional Impact Protection System) protection. The eye shield should fit seamlessly over the face with or without eyeglasses and provide venting and anti-fogging technology. This combo style offers a practical, futuristic look and can be a good solution for streamlining your snow gear bags.

Best snowboard helmet on a budget: What you get for under $75

Snowboard helmets range dramatically in price. The lowest end can be even slightly under $50, but these are typically the inexpensive children’s helmets or the lesser-known and trusted brands. We suggest choosing a lower-priced model from a well-known and trusted brand, like our pick below.

The best snowboard helmet for less will offer impact protection and durable construction, and be designed to seamlessly fit with goggles. There should also be some degree of adjustability to ensure a comfortable fit, as well as ventilation. Lower-cost helmets may not offer the MIPS protection, which is an added layer designed to increase protection for action sports.

FAQs

Q: How should a snowboard helmet fit?

The best snowboard helmet should fit comfortably, feeling snug but not tight. A good test for fit is to shake your head from side to side and see that it remains in place. Measurements are taken about an inch above your ears around the circumference of your head. The chin strap should fit snugly but allow for comfortable allowance for talking or chewing. Finally, consider the googles along with the helmet, as there should not be a gap between the two.

Q: How often should I replace my snowboard helmet?

Even the best snowboard helmet will show wear and tear over time. It is suggested to replace helmets at least every 5 years. If your helmet is made with EPS (expanded polystyrene) and you crash with it, you should replace it as its form may be compromised. However, if your helmet is made of EPP (expanded polypropylene), it will last several minor impacts before needing replacement.

Q: Is a snowboard and ski helmet the same thing?

Snowboard and ski helmets are essentially the same thing. Both helmet types are designed to protect your head from the elements and from accidental impact. Both helmets should fit snugly, and connect seamlessly to your goggles. The major difference between the two types is style, but there is certainly a cross-over between the two sports.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboard helmet

The best snowboard helmet will offer style, comfort, and full protection for your days on the slopes. Your helmet will keep you safe in case of any impact and also offer ventilation to help keep you head warm and dry.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboard helmets of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best snowboard boots of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-snowboard-boots/ Mon, 22 Mar 2021 22:59:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-snowboard-boots/
three people with snowboards walking on a snowy moutain
Visit Almaty via Pexels

These boots were made for boarding for beginners and shredders alike.

The post The best snowboard boots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
three people with snowboards walking on a snowy moutain
Visit Almaty via Pexels

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best men's Ride Lasso Pro Mens Snowboard Boots Ride Lasso Pro Snowboard Boots
SEE IT

This flexing boot comes in regular and wide widths, and it’s fitted with an intuition support wrap liner for maximum comfort and security.
Best Beginner Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots
SEE IT

Vans snow boots are super popular with shredders of all levels, and this lace-up pair lets you customize the fit exactly to your liking.
Best Budget Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens
SEE IT

A soft-flex feel and traditional lace-up design combine to make a dependable, straightforward pair of snowboard boots.

The first step to hitting the slopes is to find the right pair of snowboarding boots. After that, it’s the bindings and the board. Unlike ski boots, which are rigid and unforgiving, snowboard boots are flexible and, in general, much more comfortable—a blessing for anyone with wide feet or any podiatric issues, like bunions, corns, or hammertoes. To get you going, we’ve curated the best snowboard boots out there for every level, age group, gender, price point, and style preference around.

How we picked the best snowboard boots

Whether you’re a pro on the powder or just starting out, a successful snowboarding run starts with appropriate snowboard gear, especially when it comes to your feet. Unlike ski boots, snowboarding boots lock in sideways (not frontways) and must be released manually in the event of a fall. That can feel jarring at first, but you get used to it, promise! We looked to top brands for boots that were comfortable, stylish, and affordable for beginners and established snowboarders alike.

The best snowboard boots: Reviews & Recommendations

Best men’s: Ride Lasso Pro Mens Snowboard Boots

Ride Lasso Pro Mens Snowboard Boots

Ride Lasso

SEE IT

Many men’s snowboard boots, including these, boast a BOA feature, which means that they’re an easy pull-on style sans traditional laces. These also have micro-adjustable ankles, enabling the perfect fit. Their Michelin soles made out of rubber and phylon are super lightweight.

Best women’s: thirtytwo Women’s Lashed Double Boa

thirtytwo Women’s Lashed Double Boa

thirtytwo

SEE IT

These women’s snowboard boots have medium flexibility, a 3D molded tongue, a molded footbed with heel cradle and arch support, and a performance backstay to support your spine. Note that anyone used to a traditional lace-up or pull-on style may find it tricky to put these on at first.

Best kids’: Burton Boy’s Zipline Boa ’19

Burton Boy’s Zipline Boa ’19 (Big Kid)

Burton

SEE IT

Little hands can adjust these babies even with their mittens on—how cool is that? A heat-moldable imprint liner will keep their feet nice and warm, and the easy BOA dial lets them easily adjust to the perfect fit. The fabric of the boot is virtually indestructible—perfect for fall-prone kids who may not treat their boots like the treasure they are.

Best BOA: Burton Ion BOA Mens Snowboard Boots

These Burton snowboard boots have a snow-proof internal gusset keeps your feet warm and dry, even after an entire day on the slopes. Something called a Tuff Cuff Lite wraps the ankle and holds your heel in place so that you get the perfect balance of stability and range of motion. Two independent lacing zones allow you to custom-fit the upper and lower portions of these BOA snowboard boots, which is particularly great for accommodating a difference in width between calves and ankles.

Best beginner: Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots

Vans Hi-Standard Men’s Snowboard Boots

Vans

SEE IT

Made specifically for those at the beginner or intermediate level, an ultra-cushy footbed makes sure that no matter what, the new boarder in your ranks will at least be comfortable. These Vans snowboard boots also feature an instep lace lockout and internal web harness, which provide extra support—very important for newbies. And the waffle sole looks just like the slip-on surfer Vans you wear during the summer!

Best all-mountain: adidas Tactical ADV Snowboard Boot Mens

adidas Tactical ADV Snowboard Boot Mens

Adidas

SEE IT

A heat-moldable foam liner conforms to your feet and keeps these Adidas snowboard boots warm and comfortable, while an inner ankle harness secures your foot inside for a no-slip fit. These promise a smooth, powerful ride. They’re particularly great for anyone who’s not a fan of BOA boots.

Best wide: K2 Maysis Snowboard Boots Wide

One really cool feature of this style—called Harshmellow Dampening—is impact-and-vibration absorption, which results in less foot and leg fatigue while you ride. However, these do run on the stiffer side, so if you prefer a super-flex fit, find another pair.

Best budget: Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens

Symbolic Ultra Light Black Snowboard Boots Mens

Symbolic

SEE IT

You get what you pay for when it comes to snowboard boots, and what you don’t get with this pair is a liner or any major cushioning. That said, if the cost is your main concern, with these you still get a medium-stiff flex, 3D molded tongue, and some custom-molded foam for impact.

How to choose the best snowboard boots

To find the best snowboard boots for you, think of yourself like Goldilocks: You want something that’s snug enough to hold your foot in place, but not so tight that it’s distractingly pinchy. You should be able to wiggle your toes comfortably, and when you lean forward, your heel should stay in place. And never, ever forget your socks. (A thin or medium-thickness pair will do.) You also need to make sure that the boots you’re buying are compatible with your board and its bindings. (That’s a whole other issue that includes figuring out the best board width for your shoe size, and how much boot overhang you should have—so if you’re a beginner, consult an expert.)

Who needs snowboarding boots?

If you plan to snowboard with any regularity, buying your own pair of snowboarding boots will ultimately be cost-effective. And if you have an uncommon shoe size or any foot issues that make finding a perfectly fitting pair difficult, buying is smart because it guarantees that you’ll be comfortable during your entire day on the mountain (and not beholden to whatever the rental shop happens to have in stock). The only criteria for the best snowboard boots, whether you’re renting or buying, is that they’re comfortable.

If you’ve never snowboarded before, rent your gear for your first time on the slopes. If you get addicted (and you probably will), once you do the math you’ll likely find that buying your own boots, board, binding, and weatherproof snowboarding gear will save you dough in the long run.

What are BOA snowboarding boots?

Before the new millennium, snowboarding boots were primarily lace-ups. Then BOAs came along and changed the game. Double BOA boots feature two sets of laces: one on the inside that you tighten like traditional laces, and one on the outside that you control with the turn of a knob. (Single BOAs have one knob that controls the tightness of the entire boot.) Fans of BOAs like that tightening doesn’t necessitate glove removal, while some people complain that unless a regular lacing system, tightening isn’t uniform and some parts of the foot can feel insecure. (This is much less likely with a double BOA than a single.)

New to snowboarding? These snowboard boots are for you.

The best snowboard boots for someone who’s been shredding the gnar since birth may not necessarily be ideal for a newbie. In general, those just starting out should look for styles that have a soft to medium flex. Beyond that, the best beginner snowboard boots have the same specs as everyone else: The boots should be comfortable and fit right. (After all, a first-timer who spends the day in foot agony is unlikely to be interested in a second time, so choose your snowboard equipment wisely.)

How do I know if I need all-mountain snowboard boots?

All-mountain boots allow you to snowboard on nearly any type of terrain, and have a medium level of flexibility and mobility. They’re the most common types of boots because of their versatility. If you’re not sure what kind of terrain you’ll be riding on the most or you want the option to try all different parts of the mountain, this is the pair for you.

Do you have extra-wide or pain-prone feet?

Long gone are the days when only those with narrow, symmetrical feet and perfectly unscathed toes were entitled to a comfortable day on the slopes. The widest snowboard boots were made for anyone who wants to hop on a board and just needs a little more room. Take that, tiny feet!

Best snowboard boots on a budget: What you get for under $90

Unfortunately, spending less on snowboard boots means that you get less. Maybe not much less, but the expensive pairs are expensive for a reason: They use quality materials and offer bells and whistles the cheapies don’t. (And the cheapies are only comparatively cheap—you’ll still end up shelling out close to 100 bucks.) If you can spare it and plan to have your boots for a long time, leveling up could be worth it. These are the eBay snowboard boots we’ve found to hold you over if you’re on a budget.

FAQs

Q: What are the most comfortable snowboard boots?

Comfort is, of course, subjective, but typically you want to find a pair with ample cushioning, medium flex (not too soft, not too stiff), and, if you have a wide foot, a boot that truly fits you. Laces also give you slightly more control than BOA styles, because you can make micro-adjustments to how tight you’ve laced.

Q: Are stiffer snowboard boots better?

Stiffer boots might be better, depending on how you plan to use them and your ability level. Flexible boots give you room to maneuver, which can be helpful for beginners but also pros who like to freestyle and jump. Stiff boots are best for intermediate and advanced riders; they give you maximum ankle support and allow you to go super fast.

Q: Are snowboard boots worth buying?

If you play to snowboard a lot, definitely! Rates obviously vary from place to place, but let’s say you rent a pair for 20 bucks and hit the slopes just five times during the season—that’s $100, and for that much money, you could own your own pair. Not only that, owning a pair means that they’re perfectly molded to your feet and nobody else’s.

A final word on shopping for the best snowboard boots

Figuring out which are the best snowboard boots for you isn’t rocket science, but there are some key considerations. The first is deciding whether it’s cost-effective to buy a pair instead of renting (and the answer is yes if you plan to snowboard with any regularity). Beyond that, you’ll want to know whether you prefer lace-ups, single BOA models, or double BOAS; the different kinds of terrains you plan to board on; and whether you prefer a super-flexible soft boot or something a bit more rigid. There are loads of options out there with an infinite combination of features, so find your best boots, then get on out there!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snowboard boots of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best downhill skis of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-downhill-skis/ Tue, 31 Aug 2021 19:07:47 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=393781
Hit the powder with the best downhill skis.
Curt Nichols, Unsplash

Leave no powder uncarved with the best downhill skis on the market.

The post The best downhill skis of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Hit the powder with the best downhill skis.
Curt Nichols, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best beginner ski for kids The Rossignol Experience Pro Skis are the best beginner ski for kids. Rossignol Experience Pro Skis
SEE IT

These skis have the edge to stay in control without sinking into the powder.

Best powder skis The Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis are the best powder skis. Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis
SEE IT

These wide, wooden skis provide extra control for heavier skiers. 
Best budget The Rossignol Smash 7 are the best cheap downhill skis. Rossignol Smash 7
SEE IT

These responsive skis make quick turns and provide great value.

The thrill of hitting the powder makes it hard to resist the call of the slopes. When you’re making those turns on the best downhill skis, you merge with the slopes and become part of a centuries-long tradition. Snow skis have come a long way since the days of strapping wooden boards to the feet and tromping through the snow. Today, different types of skis cater to different ski styles—the carvers and mogul junkies—and conditions—crud, ice, and powder. 

Do you attack the mountain, or do you float above the snow, gliding where the mountain takes you? The skis’ materials, shape, edge design, and weight change how they feel and respond. Consequently, if icy conditions rule your local mountain, you’ll need different skis than if a fresh layer of powder welcomes you on the weekends. Keep reading to get the lowdown on the best downhill skis for the wide range of factors you bring to or run into on the mountain.  

The best downhill skis: Reviews & Recommendations

Best men’s skis: Nordica Enforcer 100 Skis

The Nordica 2021 Enforcer 100 Skis are the best for men.

Nordica

SEE IT

The Nordica 2022 Enforcer 100 Skis feature a carbon-reinforced wood core surrounded by two metal sheets. The carbon fiber reduces the overall weight but gives the ski more strength and responsiveness. The combination of materials, length, and width makes it an excellent choice for powder or groomed runs. Nordica has adjusted the core thickness with each length, creating greater stability at shorter lengths. 

Best women’s skis: BLIZZARD Women’s Black Pearl 88 All-Mountain Skis 

The Blizzard Women’s Black Pearl 88 All-Mountain Skis are the best for women.

Blizzard Entertainment

SEE IT

A narrower waist and carbon flipcore design give the BLIZZARD Black Pearl 88 excellent stability, especially if you keep your speed entering into the turn. The edges dig into the mountain, making it a better choice for those who prefer carving into groomed runs than riding through the powder. However, it can also handle powder to a depth of about six inches. Overall, it’s a stable choice that lets a woman carve deep trenches all the way down the mountain. 

Best beginner ski for kids: Rossignol Experience Pro Skis 

The Rossignol Experience Pro Skis are the best beginner ski for kids.

Rossignol

SEE IT

Rossignol Experience Pro Skis have the materials and design for intermediate junior skiers who are ready to carve or float down the mountain. A medium-width waist keeps it from sinking too deeply into the powder, but the edge provides the cut to stay in control on groomed snow. The flex and rocker support young skiers as they develop their ability to turn, pivot, and stop. 

Best for groomed runs: Rossignol Hero Elite Plus Ti Skis

The Rossignol Hero Elite Plus Ti Skis are the best downhill ski for groomed runs.

Rossignol

SEE IT

The Rossignol Hero Elite Plus Ti Skis integrate technology from the company’s race line. The Line Control Technology locks the ski into each turn, letting you dig into the mountain as you carve your line. A narrower waist creates quick turns that let you take on a diverse range of run difficulties, including the elusive double black diamonds. 

Best powder skis: Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis

The Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis are the best powder skis.

Blizzard Entertainment

SEE IT

The Blizzard Rustler 11 Skis definitely do not have a trim waist. The wide width gives them the float needed for deep, powdery runs. This powder ski’s mix of paulownia, poplar, and beech wood is lightweight but provides good control. The width of the ski coordinates with the length, making these a good option for taller, heavier skiers who need extra surface area to redistribute their height and weight on the snow.

Best all-mountain skis: Volkl M6 Mantra Men’s Skis

The Volkl 2021 M5 Mantra Mens Skis are the best all-mountain skis.

Volkl

SEE IT

The Volkl 2021 M5 Mantra Men’s Skis hold an edge in almost any condition—crud, powder, groomed. They’re relatively lightweight, so your legs don’t wear out on moguls or when hitting the jumps. The M5 has more pop than many all-mountain skis and is more forgiving for those who want to sit back and relax on the mountain. 

Best for moguls: Rossignol Experience 80 CA Men’s Skis

The Rossignol Experience 80 CI Men’s Skis are the best downhill skis for moguls.

Rossignol

SEE IT

The Rossignol Experience 80 CI Men’s Skis feature a tip and tail that’s slightly flatter than previous models. That gives them the responsiveness to cut over and around moguls with good speed. Their edge provides the right angle to cut into the mogul without slipping. When you keep a tight form and manage your poles, these skis turn well enough to do the hard work for you. 

Features to consider when shopping for the best skis

The best skis for you have a shape that easily lets you carve, a width that floats (or cuts), and a length that keeps you in control. Take a look at what’s and why’s of finding your dream skis so you can hit the slopes.

Size the skis by your age and skill level

Are you a complete newbie, or are you racing to the double-black-diamond runs from the moment you get out of the car? Shorter skis that are narrow at the waist (the portion in the middle) are more forgiving and easier to turn, making them a great choice for beginners. Beginner skis also have more flex. That extra flex makes them more forgiving and responsive should you get off balance or try to tighten your turns. 

Intermediate skiers can look for a wider waist and rockered tip and tail that pull the ends of the skis up. This design feature makes them feel shorter and adds responsiveness when you hit the powder. Intermediate skis are typically a little stiffer to let you really dig into the mountain on hard turns. Advanced skiers need skis with carbon or Titanal that absorb vibration and let you focus on the slope while cruising down trails at higher speeds. 

Age and gender make a difference, too. A woman’s lower center of gravity and wider hips need a different ski shape than a man’s narrower profile. While many skis are labeled unisex, women often get a better fit and responsiveness from a ski specifically designed for them. Children need skis with a lot of flex and forgiveness as they learn a new sport. Skis for younger skiers are also shorter, making turns easier. 

The best skis for groomed trails are designed to carve and hold a turn

The perfect corduroy (‘roy) of a newly groomed run is a glorious beast to conquer. It takes a ski with a deep cut edge and the ability to absorb the vibrations that kind of snow can put out. The edges of these skis dig into the snow, leaving the telltale troughs of a snake trail. 

Skis for groomed runs also need technology to lock them into the curves, holding the shape of the turn until you’re ready to shift into the next turn. Skis that lean toward the groom lovers tend to have medium to narrow waists. A narrower waist lets you shift from one edge to the other for sharper, quick turns. 

If you spend more time searching for deep powder, your ski gear will need to keep up 

When you see skiers in powder up to their waists, it’s hard not to jump in and make a snow angel. However, staying upright in deep powder is a challenge. The right skis can help you float your way through the powder, letting you kick up a good spray with each turn. The best skis for powder have a fatter waist, long length, and full rocker to keep you from sinking too deeply into the snow.

Powder skis feature wide waists that spread out the skier’s body weight. Think of them as the snowshoes of downhill skiing. Look for a medium or multi-radius side cut to help you carve and hold your turns when the powder tries to pull you down. Models with a rocker in the tips and tail help the ski float and turn more readily despite disappearing into fine powder. 

All-mountain skis are a versatile downhill ski that works for both powder and groomed runs 

Beginning and casual skiers often do well with an all-mountain ski. These skis run the middle of the road on width, stiffness, and rocker design. Their edges can cut decent troughs on groomed runs, but they also have enough surface area to provide some float in the powder. 

The key with these skis is to get the right length and width for your size. Taller, heavier skiers need a longer, wider ski that can support their weight and give them control through turns and powder. Smaller skiers can end up fighting a long, wide ski. Stick to a length somewhere between mouth and forehead height when the ski stands on the ground. If you’re new to skiing or like tight turns, opt for a ski in the shorter range for your height. 

Professional skiers who love the thrill of the black diamond should consider investing in a pair of mogul skis

A tightened stance with soft knees lets you glide through moguls with precision. Moguls require a lightweight, responsive ski that won’t wear out your legs faster than the mountain. In general, a model with a narrower waist will provide more responsiveness and the fast turns needed to navigate tight moguls. 

Mogul skis also require an edge that can cut into the snow, so you don’t slide or drift over the bumps. From there, it’s about finding a length that supports your speed and skill level. 

FAQs

Q: How long should downhill skis be?

The length of the downhill ski should correspond with your height, weight, and skill level. Look for a ski that, when standing on end on the floor, reaches between your mouth and your forehead. Beginners should start with shorter skis, and heavier skiers should opt for longer skis. 

Q: What are the best skis for an intermediate skier?

The best skis for an intermediate skier is a ski that’s medium in width and height. These mid-range skis provide a slightly stiffer ride than a beginner ski but let intermediate skiers dig into tougher runs. The Volkl 2021 M5 Mantra Men’s Skis, for example, gives intermediate skiers a chance to take on harder runs as their skills improve.

Q: What is the best downhill ski brand?

The best downhill ski brand depends on your skill level and the conditions you usually ski in. However, some of the most well-known include Volkl, Rossignol, K2, Blizzard, and Nordica. There are many more, but these five have models that continually make the best-of lists. 

A final word on shopping for the best downhill skis

Not much can compete with the feel of crisp mountain air making your eyes water as you glide down a mountain. When you add in the best skis, you’ll get in more runs, experience less fatigue, and focus on the thrill of an adventurous winter sport. Look for a pair of skis that fit your ski style and size, and you’ll be tearing up the runs in no time. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best downhill skis of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-metal-detectors-for-gold/ Wed, 22 Jun 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=450212
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

Between every modern prospector and that little pocket of bullion, there’s a great metal detector.

The post The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best metal detectors for gold composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Minelab Equinox is the best overall metal detector for gold. Minelab Equinox
SEE IT

Complete versatility meets exceptional tools for finding gold.
Best for beginners Fisher Labs Gold Bug is the best beginner’s metal detector for gold. Fisher Labs Gold Bug
SEE IT

An easy-to-use detector specifically designed for gold.
Best waterproof XP Deus 2 is the best waterproof metal detector for gold. XP Deus 2
SEE IT

Deep waterproofing meets good penetration and custom profiles.

Glimmering in the soil, just a couple inches beneath the sandy upper strata, is the nugget you’ve always dreamed of … and a few inches above that, a metal detector for gold. With the right metal detectors, you’ll come to the field equipped with the tools needed to find that pocket, seize that seam, and sniff out the deposits that still dot the hills of the United States and beyond. The best detectors are sensitive enough to distinguish between gold and ferrous metals, are often fully submersible, and can even find gold in difficult soils, such as mineralized black sand. Some detectors also come with special features, such as a gold-probability register that shows how likely a nugget might be gold or just a chunk of lead. Whatever your price point, sniff out a doubloon or three with the best metal detectors for gold.

How we chose the best metal detectors for gold

The people who love metal detecting love it for the hunt. If you’ve ever swept sandy shores looking for a little pot of washed-up relics or scoured scree fields in Colorado searching for a glimmering something that’s freshly rolled off the mountain, you know the thrill of the hunt. However, a successful hunt can’t happen without two things: the right know-how and the right tools. We researched numerous models from lots of different leading brands, looking for the best of the best. We took into account metal detectors we’d used, ones that peers had recommended, and ones that users spoke favorably of. Along the way, we did a deep dive into the technology behind our picks.

The best metal detectors for gold: Reviews & Recommendations

Metal detectors come in a few basic varieties, but all follow a general principle: an electric charge is used to create a magnetized wave that is directed at the ground; if this wave comes into contact with metal, the metal begins to vibrate in a specific manner, which can be detected by the device. When the sensor finds metal, it alerts the detectorist via a set of earphones or a moving dial. With the wrong detector for the job, however, you may have strayed past a life-changing chunk of gold and never been the wiser. That’s why when we were compiling this list, we wanted to make sure we could bring an authoritative selection of metal detectors to the table. Here are our picks for the best metal detectors for gold.

Best overall: Minelab Equinox

Minelab Equinox is the best overall metal detector for gold.

MINELAB

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With full waterproofing and multiple frequency modes, this excellent gold detector is ready for all valuables in all sorts of environments.

Specs 

  • Operating frequency: Simultaneous 5, 10, 15, 20, 40 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: Gold, Park, Beach, Field
  • Weight: 2.96 pounds
  • Price: $899

Pros

  • Multiple frequencies and detection modes
  • Solid waterproofing
  • Clear dig tones
  • Superior sensitivity

Cons

  • Somewhat pricey

Sometimes a company just hits on a slice of perfect and if you’re after a personal basset hound for the bullion, then the Minelab Equinox is a detector you can’t afford to ignore. Historically, when you bought a metal detector, you picked a frequency and worked within it, but not so here. The Equinox is one of the most versatile machines out there. With multiple simultaneous frequency responses from 5 – 40 kHz, this detector is as capable of nosing into a patch of gold as it is turning up ancient coins, spearheads, and jewelry—all without committing to a mode in advance. That picture is completed with solid target IDs that keep you from digging up nails when you’re looking for pieces of eight.

The Equinox offers a great combination of automatic settings and options for manual tuning. With its four distinct detection modes, it’s as easy to set it for beach hunting as it is for the mineralized mountain soils where gold is usually found. It also comes with eight custom search profiles and allows you to save the settings you most frequently use. Advanced settings allow you to tweak how much target audio you hear. The LCD display sums it all up concisely with simple controls that let you instantaneously adjust detect modes and frequency. Special accessory coils for specific situations are also available to expand your range.  

Best for beginners: Fisher Labs Gold Bug

Fisher Labs Gold Bug is the best beginner’s metal detector for gold.

Fisher Labs

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple prospector’s detector is easy to use and provides great value in mountainous areas where gold is found. 

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 19 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Search coil is waterproof
  • Detect modes: All metal, discriminate
  • Weight: 2.5 pounds
  • Price: $439

Pros

  • Easy to get started
  • Solid auto ground balance
  • Lightweight
  • Viable for other targets beyond gold

Cons

  • Not great for beach hunting
  • Not as much manual control as some would like
  • Doesn’t offer the same depth as more premium detectors

Head for the hills without draining your savings with the Fisher Labs Gold Bug. Optimal for new prospectors, the Gold Bug is easy to use and tuned for gold. With simple controls, you won’t need to stay up late with the owner’s manual before you get out sweeping.

The two-tone detector uses a fixed frequency of 19 kHz and offers an all-metal mode, as well as a discriminatory mode for when the search gets serious. It uses two tones to differentiate metals: a lower tone for ferrous metals like iron and a higher tone for gold. It also features simple, automatic grounding that’s easy to use for new prospectors without constant fiddling. The pro version, on the other hand, allows you to customize grounding and may have slightly better sensitivity. 

Because of this instrument’s tight focus on gold, it works best in the rocky natural environments where gold is found and less well in some other types of environments. It’s not a great option for those who might be searching the beach and, for this reason, it might not be as appealing to budding detectorists who want more versatility. Its waterproofing is also only so-so, with a submersible head but no waterproofing above that. Still, for such a moderate price point, this is a good deal for those who’ve newly got the gold bug. 

Best waterproof: XP Deus 2

XP Deus 2 is the best waterproof metal detector for gold.

XP Metal Detectors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A multi-frequency high-end detector with up to 49 individual frequency settings, simultaneous-frequency mode, wireless headphones and pointer, and impressive waterproofing down to 60+ feet.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 4 kHz – 45 kHz, and simultaneous multi-frequency
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 66 feet
  • Detect modes: Wide discrimination, precise discrimination
  • Weight: 1.65 pounds
  • Price: $1,599

Pros

  • Top-notch waterproofing
  • Generous frequency controls
  • Good wireless headphone and pointer functions
  • Multiple tones for different metals in pulse width modulation (PWM) and square wave

Cons

  • Complex menu system and overall steep learning curve
  • Pricy

Choose your adventure: Snorkel down to a lost shipwreck that’s potentially full of doubloons or scour the mouth of a Canadian basin while your friends sweep the forested banks. Either way, there’s one clear detector for the job. The XP Deus 2 is a formidable submersible detector for serious prospectors that can function up to 60 feet below the surface of the water. 

The XP Deus isn’t just waterproof, however. This high-end multi-frequency detector is capable of 49 individual frequency settings, as well as an impressive simultaneous mode. The 4 – 45 kHz range offers more than enough room for gold. Wide and precise discrimination modes help you further narrow the field, and the machine reports back on the findings with three different tones for ferrous, low conductor, and high conductor metals, in PWM or SQUARE wave. 

The Deus also delivers some impressive modern touches. The system uses a wireless headset and can pair wirelessly with a pointer. The monitor is IP68 certified for water and dust resistance.

The Deus II is not a beginner system (at least not without a lot of work); with so many features packed into one, the detector’s controls aren’t exactly intuitive. Still, the steep learning curve will pay off. With such a wide swath of frequencies available, and with such excellent waterproofing, this is one of the most versatile detectors around.

Best professional: Garrett ATX 

Garrett ATX is the best professional metal detector for gold.

Garrett

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With superior sensitivity even for deeply buried objects, saltwater immunity, and great resistance to interference, this is a PI detector that’s perfect for rugged environments and mineralized soils.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: Unspecified
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof up to 10 feet
  • Detect modes: All metal mode, pinpoint, motion, non-motion
  • Weight: 6.9 pounds
  • Price: $2,380

Pros

  • Pulse induction detects metals deeper
  • Very rugged build
  • Multi-frequency modes for multiple depths and metals
  • Wide sensitivity scale

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Bulky and heavy

A draft horse of the metal detection world, the pulse induction Garrett ATX is a powerful instrument built for deep discoveries in rough environments. Using PI tech, the ATX is built for going deeper and finding gold in rougher locales. 

This is a stacked instrument with lots of modes and capabilities that will become second nature with time. The ATX leverages a multi-frequency mode to cut deeper into the ground and uncover more metal. It features 13 sensitivity modes, a capable ground-balance function that takes mere seconds to calibrate to the soil you’re working with, as well as ground tracking. Together, the ATX easily cuts through salty soil, seawater, and mineralized crusts. The iron check feature is another nice capability that audibly checks whether an item is iron, and the pinpoint feature helps you lock onto and find nuggets that you’d like to investigate.

The ATX is indisputably rugged but it’s also heavy—three times as heavy as some of the other leading detectors we follow. However, it’s also sturdier than most. It’s submersible up to 10 feet and won’t be affected by salt water or dust. All in all, if you want a rugged detector that leads the pack in terms of detection depth, this PI detector is it. You’d have to spend considerably more on something like the ultra-premium Minelab GPZ series with its ZVT tech to exceed it.

Best budget: Bounty Hunter 3410001

Bounty Hunter 3410001 is the best budget metal detector for gold.

Bounty Hunter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a budget price, this easy detector can still find gold.

Specs

  • Operating frequency: 6.6 kHz
  • Waterproofing: Waterproof coil
  • Detect modes: Discrimination, all-metal, tone
  • Weight: 3.7 pounds
  • Price: $119

Pros

  • Budget price
  • Easy automatic ground presets
  • Two-tone audio discrimination
  • Easy interface for different modes and discrimination dial

Cons

  • Frequency isn’t optimal for gold
  • Finicky in difficult soil and shallow

It is possible to find gold without spending thousands. The Bounty Hunter 3410001 is an affordable metal detector that’s loved by many. While this VLF detector isn’t optimal for hunting gold in deep bush settings, deeply mineralized soils, or salt water, it’s still a great choice for scanning for gold lost near the surface or small gold nuggets in gravel pits or tailings ponds. 

The Bounty Hunter might be inexpensive but it doesn’t lack features. Its control array is simple to use, whether you’re throwing a switch to cycle modes, adjusting sensitivity with a dial, or dialing in the disc/notch control to tune to gold. It features simple automatic grounding presets, three search modes, and a nice target strength meter that won’t make your brow furrow. Its frequency response is lower than optimal for gold but, with the right sensitivity setting and patience, that hasn’t stopped hundreds of users from finding lost wedding rings, gold jewelry, and undiscovered nuggets near the surface. 

With a waterproof coil, this 4-pound detector is capable of following you into multiple environments—even while its build might not be the definition of rugged. Still, at such a great price, it’s one of the most affordable metal detectors out there and a great place to start. Its frequency might not be optimal, and its grounding leaves a little to be desired, but you can still hit the jackpot with the Bounty Hunter by your side.

What to consider before buying the best metal detectors for gold

Before you start prospecting, there are a few considerations to make: 

Versatility

Most metal detectors are tuned to a specific frequency. However, some metal detectors do a better job than others at versatility. If you’re looking for a great metal detector for gold that can also moonlight as a detector for silver, relics, and rare ores, then look around for a more versatile detector that has multiple frequencies or swappable heads.

The methods used to detect metal falls into a few categories. The two most common technologies are very low frequency (VLF), and pulse induction (PI). These technologies both use electromagnetic waves to locate metal.

VLF detectors use a sensor coil and transmitter coil. The transmitter coil emits constant electromagnetic energy at a tuned frequency. When this energy encounters metal underground, it creates an eddy current in the metal that results in a phase shift of the reflected frequency. The sensor coil is then able to read this phase-shifted frequency pattern. VLF detectors make up the majority of metal detectors out there and tend to be the most versatile. However, they don’t do as well in more mineralized soils without calibration. VLF detectors meant for finding gold will usually be tuned to a higher frequency. Some VLF detectors at higher price points are able to emit varying frequencies.

PI detectors, on the other hand, emit rapid pulses of electromagnetic energy. These pulses quickly decay. When the pulses encounter a magnetic object they cause an eddy current to form in it. This magnetic eddy current then causes a measurable delay in the decay of subsequent pulse transmissions. PI detectors do a better job than VLF detectors at picking out gold in more mineralized soils and can generally be effective at ID’ing gold at greater depths. The newer technology is also generally quite expensive but can be worth it for veteran prospectors who want a device that will give them the edge in more difficult terrain. 

Coil size is an important factor in VLF detectors. While smaller coils will generally be more sensitive for gold, larger coils will allow you to scour more ground quickly. Luckily some detectors allow you to swap out coils. These enable you to hone in on a gold-rich area, then switch coils for a more accurate search.

Detection depth varies substantially. PI detectors usually do a better job at detecting gold that’s buried deeper, sometimes up to two feet. Only the higher-priced VLF detectors have the penetration required to find deep gold.

Ground balance is used to tune a detector’s frequency to the mineral you’re after (in this case, gold) and filter out everything else. A properly ground-balanced detector will filter out the frequencies of other minerals and mineralized earth you encounter, and dial you into gold, at deeper levels, and with better accuracy. Many detectors offer automatic ground balancing, while some allow you to fine-tune their balance manually. 

Frequency describes the transmission of electromagnetic waves from your detector. Since gold is a very low conductivity metal, higher frequency transmitters with shorter wavelengths do a better job at spotting it. Most detectors will have one frequency that they are able to transmit, while some have a range. We looked for detectors that transmit at good frequencies for finding gold, generally 14kHz and above.

Price

Metal detectors get expensive quickly. Before you commit to a metal detector, it’s usually a good idea to determine exactly what you want. While there are budget options out there, if you’re serious about looking for gold, an investment in a true prospector-grade detector could be worth it. Pricier detectors are usually better at piercing deep into the soil where worthwhile nuggets of gold remain and won’t get thrown off by deposits of other minerals. Still, gold is hard to find. Many true prospector-grade devices leave most hobbyists priced out. For this reason, it’s a good idea to have a budget in mind before you begin to shop.

Gold-producing environments

While gold can certainly be found with the right time and know-how, you’re unlikely to find any in Central Park. Before you commit to investing in an expensive metal detector for gold, it’s a good idea to plan your prospecting strategy. When you’re starting, it’s generally a good idea to search areas known to produce gold in the past, even if larger hauls might come from remote areas, such as Alaska, Northern Canada, or Western Australia. 

FAQs

Q: How much do the best metal detectors for gold cost?

Metal detectors for gold vary substantially in price. The cheapest metal detector for gold that we think is worth your time will cost about $100, while the highest-end prospector’s detectors can cost close to $10,000. 

Q: Will any metal detector find gold?

Yes. Most metal detectors are capable of finding gold, but some will do a much better job than others. Since gold has rather low conductivity, metal detectors that use higher frequencies will spot gold better than low-frequency detectors. For this reason, most metal detectors for gold have variable frequencies or are tuned for frequencies above 14 kHz. This isn’t an absolute requirement, however, and some lower-frequency models are still certainly capable of hitting that jackpot. 

Q: How deep do metal detectors go?

The depth that metal detectors go can vary substantially. Most cheaper metal detectors only find metal that’s a few inches beneath the dirt. Some of the most powerful detectors can find metal and gold that’s 2 feet underground. Larger nuggets are easier to find at greater depth.

Q: How do I look for gold with a metal detector? 

It can be quite hard to find gold. If you’re just starting out, it’s a good idea to look for gold in places where gold is known to have been found before. Pick your spot and search systematically. When you find a grain of gold, extend your search in that area, traveling in a grid pattern to ensure you cover the entire area. If the gold is naturally occurring then there’s usually more in the area.

Q: Can you make a metal detector for gold?

For a good DIY engineer, a simple metal detector isn’t actually all that hard to make. There are lots of helpful YouTube videos like this one that will help you design your own metal detector with common household items. It should be noted; however, that metal detectors made specifically for finding gold may be considerably harder to make, as the best metal detectors for gold run at higher frequencies than regular metal detectors.

Final thoughts on the best metal detectors for gold

Maybe you lost an engagement ring in the backyard ivy and you need a simple detector to help you get it back. Or maybe you’re a dedicated prospector looking to hit the jackpot in the Canadian Northwest Territories. Whatever your motivation, the best metal detectors for gold give you the tool you need to find gold, whether it’s in the wild, or out on the lawn. Great metal detectors for gold use high frequencies that help you pinpoint low-conductivity metals embedded deep in the dirt, easily filter noise from mineralized dirt, and are rugged enough to work in lots of environments.

For one of the deepest piercing detectors out there, consider the pulse induction Garrett ATX, which is rugged enough to rely on anywhere. If you’ve got an eye for tracking some shekels in the surf, the XP Deus 2 not only has some of the best waterproofing out there, it’ll do a great job in lots of different environments. If you’re just getting your feet wet detecting gold, the Bounty Hunter 3410001 is both affordable and easy to use; it’s a great instrument for those who want to learn the ropes or dig up jewelry from the yard. Finally, the Minelab Equinox is a metal detector that no one can afford to ignore. With superior tech, the Minelab’s completely customizable controls allow you to tune it to excel in any gold-bearing environment.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best metal detectors for gold in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best heated vests of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-heated-vest/ Wed, 12 Jan 2022 22:42:33 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-heated-vest/
A lineup of the best heated vests
Amanda Reed

Up your game this winter with a heated vest for any outdoor adventure.

The post The best heated vests of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best heated vests
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for men ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest
SEE IT

With 10 hours of wear time and a convenient USB charging port, this pick can keep you warm all day long.
Best for winter sports ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest is the best heated vest for winter sports ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest
SEE IT

This pick offers breathable fleece and carbon fiber heating elements to keep you at a comfortable temperature.
Best budget PKSTONE Heated Vest for Men & Women Anbero Heated Vest for Men & Women
SEE IT

With adjustable temperatures and a fast-heating design, this unisex heated vest will keep you warm on a budget.

Innovations in winter weather gear like heated vests and other battery-powered clothing are designed to bring amazing warmth without cumbersome extra layers. These pieces give you an extra boost of warmth and comfort and even allow you to customize the temperature and locations where you feel the heat. And they will fit well, promote overall well-being by harnessing heat to improve circulation, and relieve back and shoulder tension with their comforting warmth. Designed using low voltage, they are safe and cannot cause any serious injury to the wearer. They use lightweight wiring and rechargeable lithium-ion batteries to discreetly warm your core while appearing like a typical, stylish outdoor vest. The thin heating elements are fully concealed within the garment and are protected by a waterproof membrane, so you don’t need to worry about rain. Keep reading for the best heated vests that are warm, safe, lightweight, and will work for hours, allowing you to work and play outdoors this winter in style.

How we chose the best heated vests

While some people use the cold as an excuse to spend months mostly inside, this is not the case for all. Grumble less this winter by investing in the right gear to keep you warm and comfortable. To find the best heated vests, we tested them personally, looked at reviews, recommendations, gathered impressions, and conducted thorough research. The last thing we want is to leave you out in the cold with a heated vest that gives a wimpy, tepid hug instead of a warm, cozy embrace.

The best heated vests: Reviews & Recommendations

The best heated vests have strategically placed heat zones to bring warmth to your core, helping you to stay comfortable outdoors longer, no matter how cold it gets. We’ve whittled our choices to a select few who bring the heat in the winter. One of these should leave you as snug as a bug in a rug.

Best overall: Foxelli Heated Vest

The Foxelli Heated Vest is the best heated vest overall

Foxelli

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This vest has lots of heating zones, a detachable hood, and is wind-resistant—best of all, it’s machine washable.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 4
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Material: Polyester
  • Temperature settings: Low (95°F), Medium (110°F), High (130°F)

Pros

  • Detachable hood
  • Machine washable
  • Water and wind resistant

Cons

  • Some reviews note problems with the power bank

This rechargeable heated vest is a good option when you need more hours of warmth. The vest can adjust between three heat settings (low/medium/high) to customize comfort level and save on battery life. The vest offers four heating zones at the collar, back, and core, which are a nice addition for cold walks outdoors.

Best for men: ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest

ORORO Men’s Lightweight Heated Vest is the best heated vest for men

Ororo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s tailored to fit the body, and can even charge your phone. Plus, it heats up fast and can last for 10 hours.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (100°F), Medium (120°F), High (130°F)

Pros

  • Quick heating
  • Machine washable
  • Zippered pockets

Cons

  • Might be too tight for bulkier jackets
  • Only a 10-degree difference between medium and high settings)

This heated vest for men is tailored neatly to the body and is machine washable. In seconds, the heating elements warm up the vest, which can be adjusted according to your comfort. It even includes a USB charging port within the vest battery that you can use for your cell phone. The company also sells vests for women, including the quilted heated vest shown below.

A woman wears a black heated vest and stands against a brick wall

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Best for women: Venustas Women’s Heated Vest

venustas heated down vest is the best for women

Venustas

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A combination of nylon and duck down ensures you won’t face any chills this season.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 5
  • Battery life: 8 hours
  • Material: Nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (86°F) Medium (113°F), High (131°F)

Pros

  • Lots of heat zones
  • Water-resistant
  • Down adds extra warmth

Cons

  • Heat can be hard to feel through heavier sweaters on lower temperatures

This women’s heated vest is tailored to fit snugly and uses a combination of nylon and duck down with multiple heating elements to provide long-lasting warmth. There are five heating zones, so more areas of your body will remain warm, and you can pick from three heat settings. This vest includes a USB port to charge your smartphone, and you’ll get about 8 hours of battery at the low heat setting and 3 hours at the high heat setting. We’re also fans of the GOBI Heated Vest for Women, pictured below. It’s lightweight, and the wind- and water-resistant material really keeps you warm in the elements.

A woman stands against a brick wall wearing a sage green heated vest

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Best for winter sports: ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest

ORORO Men’s Fleece Heated Vest is the best heated vest for winter sports

ORORO

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This heated fleece vest adds an extra layer of coziness while you’re in the great outdoors.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 10 hours
  • Material: 50% polyester, 50% cotton
  • Temperature settings: Low, Medium, High

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Phone charging capabilities
  • Heats up fast

Cons

  • Battery is on the heavy side

This ORORO heated vest is a great choice for winter sports enthusiasts as the fleece provides warmth and breathability. Carbon fiber heating elements heat up three body areas quickly, and temperature levels can be adjusted for your comfort, especially when you start sweating. Added perks: It’s machine washable and includes a USB charger for your phone.

Best for outdoor work: ARRIS Heated Vest

A black Arris outdoor vest on a blue and white background

Arris

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The heating material is made from carbon fiber, giving you peace of mind when it comes to safety.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 7
  • Battery life: 3-12 hours, depending on temperature
  • Material: Polyester
  • Temperature settings: 5 heat settings: pre-heat (104°F), low (122°F), medium (140°F), high (158°F), very high (176°F)

Pros

  • Size-adjustable
  • Lots of temperature settings with a wide range of temperatures
  • Controllable heat zones

Cons

  • Charger sold separately

This Arris heated vest is a great choice for outdoor work as it offers a wide range of adjustable heat zones and temperature settings. Each of the seven heating zones can be controlled and turned off or on as you move from indoors to outdoors and back again. Additional safety features include powering down if the vest gets too hot. It’s also size adjustable, so you can wear it by itself or over a hoodie by adding or subtracting included panels.

Best for motorcyclists: Gerbing Men’s 7V Battery Heated Vest Liner

A Gerbing heated vest for motorcyclists on a blue and white background

Gerbing

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This thin vest liner is slim enough to wear under a jacket for hours of comfort while riding around town.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 3
  • Battery life: 2-8 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Material: Nylon exterior, polyester interior
  • Temperature settings: Max heat: 135°F

Pros

  • Thin and lightweight
  • Can be worn by itself or with a jacket
  • Drop tail for better coverage when riding

Cons

  • Battery short compared to other vests on this list

Don’t let the cold stop you from hitting the road on your motorcycle. This thin, lightweight vest from Gerbing—the OGs of heated motorcycle wear—keeps you warm without the bulk. Three heat zones keep you toasty on the road, and a 2-8 hour battery life means you’ll stay toasty. The company also sells heated jackets in case you’re looking for even more warmth. Passersby in cars will surely go, “That’s a nice motorcycle,” when seeing you wear this heated vest while riding your bike.

Best hooded: NORWELL Men’s Heated Vest

A black Norwell hooded heated vest on a blue and white background

Norwell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The detachable hood lets you decide how you’d like to keep your ears warm—add a winter hat for extra toastiness.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 4
  • Battery life: 6-8 hours depending on heat setting
  • Material: Polyester, nylon
  • Temperature settings: Low (77°F), Medium (95°F), High (122°F)

Pros

  • Machine washable
  • Mylar thermal lining
  • Water-resistant

Cons

  • Runs small

Finding a vest with a hood is hard; finding a heated vest with a hood is even harder. This one from Norwell is an easy inclusion on this list thanks to its long battery life, water resistance, and machine-washing capabilities. Plus, the Mylar thermal lining keep you extra, extra warm—perfect when you run out of the house with a half-charged battery and need to make every bit of heat last.

Best budget: Anbero Heated Vest

PKSTONE Heated Vest for Men & Women

Anbero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: At around $50, this unisex pick rivals some of its more expensive counterparts when it comes to the number of heat zones and temperature ranges.

Specs

  • Heat zones: 5
  • Battery life: 6-12 hours, depending on heat setting
  • Material: Cotton, polyester
  • Temperature settings: Low (104-113°F), Medium (113-131°F), High (131°F-149°F)

Pros

  • Inner fleece lining
  • Lots of heating zones
  • Heats up fast

Cons

  • Heating elements on the small side

A great choice for keeping warm outdoors, this Anbero vest offers five heating zones and three temperature settings all with a simple zip-up unisex design. It is machine washable and lightweight, making it a good option for layering.

What to consider when buying the best heated vests

When it comes to finding the best heated vest for cold weather and your next outdoor adventure, you’ll want to learn about the different styles, brands, and features available. We’ve selected some of the best options on the market to keep you warm, dry, and enjoying being outside.

Focus on heated vests that recharge fast

When it comes to getting dressed and out the door, we all want to do it fast and without fuss. This can inevitably take longer in the cold winter months, and you’ll pay the price in comfort when you shortcut this process. With the addition of heated clothing, like heated insoles, you’ll need fewer layers, which saves time—but you want to be sure your vest’s batteries are charged and ready to go. The best heated vests will have batteries that are easy and quick to recharge, heat the vest quickly upon wearing, and offer many hours of warmth and comfort between charges.

In order to get more hours of warmth out of your vest, compare vests based on the type of battery and method of charging, as well as the length of time it takes to heat up. Most models will offer adjustable temperature or zone settings, which will save on battery life and allow you to move the heat around the vest at just the right temperature for your comfort. A nice feature to look for is carbon fibers used as heat elements, as they allow for vests to heat up quickly.

Stay warm while engaging in winter sports

As winter sports enthusiasts know—it’s never too cold out, you just don’t have the right cold-weather gear. The best cold-weather clothing can mean hours more of outdoor time, which is essential for winter sports enthusiasts. They can be a critical extra layer that keep your core warm, and your muscles relaxed throughout your sweat session. Getting extra warmth without extra bulk—like throwing on a pair of heated socks under your snow boots—will provide a full range of motion and keep you in the game.

The best options for winter sports will be lightweight and breathable with adjustable heat settings. The lighter the materials used, the less fatigue you will feel. After some time spent doing vigorous outdoor activities, you may feel both cold and sweaty, so breathable, moisture-wicking fabrics will be an important feature to keep you warm and dry. The best vests for winter sports will have multiple heating zones and customizable heat so you can warm up or cool down as you see fit. Finally, a securely fastened battery pack is essential when engaging in sports.

Look for extra warmth while you work

If your work takes you outside or in non-heated areas, you need to protect yourself from the elements with the best cold-weather gear. These vests will protect your core to keep you safe and warm and can easily coordinate with other work clothes or uniforms or even other heated clothing like gloves or a jacket.

The best vest for outdoor work will be versatile and lightweight. It should be simple and classic in design, with hidden heat elements to make the garment look more work-appropriate. Because the weather can change dramatically when working outdoors, you want to select a vest that features multiple heat zones, adjustable temperature, and the ability to turn certain areas off and on. Adjustable sizing is also a nice bonus, so it can fit under other layers or loosen to wear on top, depending on the day and the nature of your work.

FAQs

Q: How much do the best heated vests cost?

Depending on the number of heat zones and other materials used, the best heated vests can cost between $50-$250.

Q: Are heated vests safe?

They are definitely safe to wear. Although there are thin electrical wires running through the vest, the voltage is so low that there is no risk of electrocution. The vest is heated with a removable, rechargeable lithium-ion battery that is discreetly sewn into the garment in an accessible location, and they all include a waterproof membrane to keep the wires and battery safe from water. Still, care should be taken to ensure the battery stays in good working order, discarding and replacing if it becomes damaged.

Q: How do I use a heated vest?

Using a heated vest is simple and harnesses battery power to keep you warm. They have thin, lightweight wires placed within the garment and use a low charge to warm up. Some have Bluetooth connectivity so you can power up (or down) the heat by using an app on your smartphone.

Q: Can I wash heated vests?

They can be washed safely when following the manufacturer’s instructions. Typically, the first step will be to disconnect and remove the rechargeable battery, and zip away or seal any connector cables. Be sure to wash your vest with cool water with the machine’s gentle setting. Line drying the garment is usually recommended, with care not to squeeze or wring out the vest so as to keep the delicate wiring inside safe for your next use.

Q: Do I need to wear a jacket with my heated vest?

You don’t! You can keep your arms free when it’s not as chilly and throw on a sweatshirt or jacket once the weather starts to drop. How you’d like to wear your heated vest is up to you.

Final thoughts on the best heated vests

While long underwear has often been the first line of defense for an outdoor adventure, the best heated vests will take things up a notch and provide hours of warmth for your core, fit comfortably, and look stylish without all the bulky layers. With lightweight wiring and multiple heating zones, you can keep warm no matter how long you find yourself in winter weather.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best heated vests of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best packable rain jackets in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-packable-rain-jackets/ Sat, 30 Jul 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=458659
The best packable rain jackets
Stan Horaczek

Because weather is never 100 percent predictable, no matter what the forecast says.

The post The best packable rain jackets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best packable rain jackets
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Showers Pass Refuge Jacket is the best overall packable rain jacket. Showers Pass Refuge Jacket
SEE IT

The Showers Pass Refuge keeps you dry under the worst conditions.
Best for hiking Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for hiking. Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket
SEE IT

The Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is elastic enough to give you full freedom of movement.
Best for Travel Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for travel. Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket
SEE IT

You never know where you might end up, but the Patagonia Torrentshell 3L is ready for anything.

As an all-weather bike commuter, mountain lover, and frequent traveler who rarely allows the elements to deter me from my plans, I always carry around a packable rain jacket. Whether I’m on the road for work or off on an outdoor adventure, it never hurts to have rain gear that is effective, breathable, and light enough to carry around all day. And packable rain jackets compress down to about the size of a large wallet, folding into a pocket or the corner of your bag. Though I see it ideally as a very dynamic piece of clothing, certain rain jackets are better suited specifically for various activities. Depending on your budget, you can find expensive, high-tech jackets loaded with features and basic, reasonably priced ones. A full list of great jackets would be very long, so I’ve narrowed the selection down to what I feel are the best packable rain jackets for every situation.

How we chose the best packable rain jackets

As a person who rides a bicycle everywhere, I’ve been on a perpetual quest for the best packable rain jacket for years now. While I think I’ve pretty much found it, there’s always new technology and updated features to try out. You only know if they do what they say they’ll do after you’ve weathered a storm or three wearing them. As it happens, I work in film and television production, so I spend a lot of time working out in the elements, putting my jackets to the test.

The jackets that made our list provided sustained rain and wind protection while being lightweight enough to pack easily into a pocket or bag. I also considered fit and comfort, especially in the chin guard and hood. Lastly, I looked for special features like a fold-down tail and zippered pockets, which often make a particular jacket stand out from similar designs from other companies.

The best packable rain jackets: Reviews & Recommendations

I have a few favorite packable rain jackets that I use regularly depending on what I’m doing and where I’m going. I found them through working and traveling, using them in all kinds of situations. Many of those jackets made their way onto this list, along with some specialty shells for traveling, cycling, hiking, and other adventures.

Best overall: Showers Pass Refuge Jacket – (Men’s Version)

Showers Pass Refuge Jacket is the best overall packable rain jacket.

Showers Pass

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Showers Pass Refuge jacket possesses all the features we want for almost any adventure we dream up.

Specs 

  • Weight: 19 oz (size M)
  • Material: 3-layer Elite waterproof hardshell
  • Price: $295

Pros

  • Fully seam taped
  • Removable hood that fits over a helmet
  • Multiple zippered pockets
  • All outward-facing zippers are waterproof

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • No stuff sack

The Showers Pass Refuge jacket is my go-to for stormy bike commutes, long-distance hiking trips, and wandering around cities in the rain. I seem to find myself caught in unpredictable adverse weather on a pretty regular basis, so I look for rain jackets with special features that make walking around in a storm almost feel enjoyable. 

Most rain jackets, no matter what they’re made from, will eventually allow water through if submitted to a relentless heavy rain that lasts for more than a few hours. The Refuge jacket is effective for all-day light or moderate rain or about three hours of a heavy downpour. When I say downpour, I mean the kind of rain that makes it difficult to see what is right in front of you; the kind that if possible you might want to take shelter from until it’s passed. 

Its enormous zippered side pockets easily accommodate my Samsung Galaxy S21, the reinforced shoulder area is suited for backpack straps, and the hood fits comfortably over a helmet—and stays there while cycling thanks to a drawstring cincher. The Refuge also has a dropdown tail, which comes in handy while biking, or scoping a place to sit during or after a storm. Add in reflective details, core vents, and secure wrist cinchers to keep the wind out and it’s pretty much the best packable rain jacket. 

The purchase of a Showers Pass Refuge jacket even supports their “enjoy all the elements” campaign, an initiative dedicated to providing programs and education to get more people outside. 

Best for hiking: Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket – (Women’s Version)

Rab Kinetic Alpine 2.0 Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for hiking.

Rab

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Rab’s Kinetic Alpine 2.0 is the only fully waterproof jacket we’ve found that, because of the stretchiness in the fabric, doesn’t hinder your movement at all, no matter what you may be climbing.

Specs

  • Weight: 13.8 oz (Size L)
  • Material: Recycled polyester with 3-layer membrane
  • Price: $280

Pros

  • 2-way front zipper
  • Zippered inner chest pocket
  • Stretch woven Proflex panels in hips, arms, shoulders, & hood

Cons 

  • Expensive

True to its name, the Rab Kinetic Alpine jacket has been designed thoughtfully and specifically for climbing mountains. Described by the company as a “breakthrough in technology,” the softshell jacket is made from a proprietary material called “Proflex”—a stretchy and breathable waterproof fabric that’s perfect for propelling yourself up the side of a rocky and/or snowy cliff. It’s also engineered to handle scrapes against rough surfaces, like stone or bark, without ripping. I’m rather clumsy and routinely utilize sturdy trees and rock faces to steady myself on both inclines and descents. Despite this, my Kinetic Alpine 2 has yet to suffer any significant damage. 

At the same time, it’s also one of the few rain jackets I’ve worn where I’ve actually forgotten that I had it on. There’s no restriction to movement, even when stretching to reach the next tree root on the way up a muddy embankment. Its hood is also among the most comfortable I’ve ever worn, with a wide chin guard.

All the pockets are equipped with waterproof zippers; the inner chest one being the perfect place to stash small valuables like a credit card, ID, and lip balm (Chapstick definitely classifies as valuable in dry mountain environments). Last but not least, it comes with a stuff sack for easy stowing in your pack.  

Best for travel: Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket – (Men’s version)

Patagonia Torrentshell 3L Jacket is the best packable rain jacket for travel.

Patagonia

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Patagonia Torrentshell 3L packs neatly into its own pocket and can withstand a wide variety of adverse weather situations.

Specs 

  • Weight: 12.5 oz. (Size M)
  • Material: Ripstop nylon with 3-layer H2No Performance shell
  • Price: $149

Pros

  • Pit zip ventilation
  • Self-stuffs into hand warmer pocket
  • Fair Trade Certified
  • Contains recyclable materials

Cons 

  • The recycled nylon fabric gets noisy
  • Small hood may not fit over helmets

For travel, especially across several destinations, Patagonia’s Torrentshell 3L rain jacket has everything you need. It packs into one of the two hand warmer pockets, has pit zips and a comfortable roomy chin guard, and stands up well to rain, wind, and snow. It comes in a variety of stylish colors if you want to deviate from basic black, grey, or white. 

The Torrentshell 3L is also both Fair Trade Certified and made from recycled materials that meet the bluesign criteria. Bluesign technologies, based in Switzerland, focuses on sustainability in the entire textile manufacturing chain to guide brands in creating products with as little negative environmental impact as possible.

One thing to keep in mind: The recyclable nylon fabric of this jacket can be weirdly noisy. It isn’t excessive, but you may not be able to quietly slip on your rain gear to slip out for an early morning hike. 

Best for cycling: Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985

Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985 is the best packable rain jacket for cycling.

GORE WEAR

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Gore Wear C5 Gore-Tex Shakedry 1985 jacket is the lightest and most packable jacket we found, making it perfect for weight and watt-obsessed cyclists (while also leaving room for more snacks in your back pockets).

Specs 

  • Weight: 3.4 oz. (Size L)
  • Material: Gore-Tex
  • Price: $250 – $300

Pros

Cons 

  • Expensive
  • Really just for cycling

While I don’t consider myself a full-on “roadie” when it comes to cycling, I do my fair share of cycling club road rides around New York City. There are tons of cyclists in the city, many of whom embark on lengthy rides around the New York Tri-State area on weekends. When the rain comes out, so does the Gore-Tex Shakedry.

At a mere 3.4 ounces, its ultralight weight and form-fitting, which is very important for competitive cyclists looking who don’t want to drag from their clothes. The Gore-Tex “Shakedry” material is so thin that it’s almost transparent but is also somehow waterproof and windproof. The Shakedry fabric repels water beads that land on the fabric surface without letting any moisture through. When the rain stops, you can simply shake it dry with a sharp flap and put it back in your cycling jersey pocket.

This jacket is not recommended for use with a backpack, as the straps could damage the fabric. Still, it’s a solid pick even if you prefer your cycle with a motor. And if you’re a commuter looking for a more traditional silhouette that can stand up to light rain and road spray, the PEARL iZUMi Prospect Barrier Jacket is a great choice.

Best lightweight: Outdoor Research Helium Rain Jacket – (Women’s version)

Outdoor Research Helium Rain Jacket is the best lightweight packable rain jacket.

Outdoor Research

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: At only 6.3 ounces, the Outdoor Research jacket is half the weight of most all comparable competitors but still delivers top-of-the-line wind and rain protection.

Specs 

  • Weight: 6.3 oz. (Size L)
  • Material: Nylon with 2.5 layer Pertex Shield
  • Price: $159

Pros

  • Very light
  • Breathable
  • Current version has updated fabric that is 7x more tear resistant than previously

Cons 

  • Only one pocket (chest)
  • May not withstand heavy rain

If you very specifically want the lightest everyday rain jacket possible, consider the Helium by Outdoor Research. It’s much lighter than most of the jackets on our list but still performs well against light rain and wind. Because of the low weight, it’s a popular jacket amongst thru-hikers and long-distance backpackers who count ounces as fastidiously as enthusiast road cyclists.

Between its weight and the fact that it packs into its chest pocket, the Helium is a great everyday carry jacket. On the other hand, that chest pocket is its only pocket, so it offers limited storage.

Best budget: Marmot Precip Eco Jacket – (Men’s version)

Marmot Precip Eco Jacket is the best packed rain jacket on a budget.

MARMOT

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: For around $100, the Marmot Precip Eco is one of the most popular (and effective) jackets we see out on the trail.

Specs 

  • Weight: 9 oz. (Size M)
  • Material: Recycled nylon with 2.5-layer Nanopro
  • Price: $100

Pros

  • Pit zips
  • Stuffs into own pocket
  • Good quality for price

Cons 

  • Runs small

Marmot consistently manufactures quality outdoor gear and sells it for reasonable prices. The Precip Eco jacket may lack some of the advanced bells and whistles found in our top picks, but it performs well and costs less than our top picks. A lightweight jacket that packs easily into one of the pockets, the Precip Eco feels roomy in the shoulders to give you a full range of movement while hoisting your pack on and off. The hood also packs into the collar, which is useful for climbers and cyclists.

While it runs a bit small and has a hood with a narrow chin guard, you’re getting a garment that feels very close to the best of the best, without spending quite so much money.

Things to consider when buying the best packable rain jackets

There’s a surprising amount of technical jargon you should know before picking out a rain jacket. While shopping for one, you’ve likely seen terms like “hardshell,” “softshell,” “taped seams,” and “packable” thrown around a bit, along with claims about how waterproof and breathable a particular garment may be. This isn’t just marketing-driven jargon added to impress. They do really impact how well your jacket can protect you.

If you’re unsure exactly what some of these mean, you’re not alone. Here’s a breakdown of what to look for when looking for the best packable rain jackets:

Hardshell or softshell

As with many things in the apparel and gear industries, there is no universal, absolute definition of “softshell” and “hardshell” jackets, but there are common guidelines that most companies follow. Traditionally, softshell jackets are more breathable, while hardshells offer more prolonged water protection, pack down smaller, and weigh less. 

Hardshell jackets have a stiffer, more rigid feel than softshells, and feature a thicker, 3-layer fabric with a waterproof, breathable membrane sandwiched between its inner lining and a “hard” exterior layer. 

Softshell jackets are made from softer, more pliable material. They’re usually stretchier and more breathable than a standard hardshell, which makes them better for moving around.

At this point, many companies have developed new fabrics that blur these lines, providing the best properties of both in a single jacket. For example, Rab’s Proflex fabric offers the weather protection of a hardshell, with the comfort, stretchiness, and feel of a softshell. 

Nearly all of the jackets on this list are hardshell jackets, as they tend to weigh less and pack into smaller sizes.

Waterproof/breathable fabrics

Most modern rain jackets are constructed with fabric made from two or three different layers of material that are fused together, maximizing protection while keeping them light and breathable. For instance, the 3-layer Elite fabric used by Showers Pass consists of an outward-facing fabric with a durable water-repellent (DWR) finish, backed with a waterproof-breathable membrane laminate. This membrane is covered with microscopic pores that prevent rain-sized water droplets to pass, while allowing moisture from your body through. On the backside of that membrane, a laminate tricot liner to make sure the jacket feels dry against your skin while adding protection for the membrane layer.

Most 2-layer (or 2.5-layer) materials use a charcoal- or cellulose-raised print directly on the membrane instead of a liner layer which allows for a more compact and lightweight jacket (by eliminating one layer.) 

Taped seams, including zippers

Stitching garments together creates hundreds of tiny needle holes in the seams—there’s no way around this when sewing. A well-made rain jacket requires the seams to be taped in order to keep water from getting through these minuscule holes. After sewing, manufacturers fuse thermoplastic tape with heat and pressure over the seams to prevent this. These are called taped seams. Without them, water can easily penetrate the seams.

Fit, including hood

When trying on a rain jacket, look for a Goldilocks fit—not too loose, but not too tight. If it’s snug, the jacket won’t make for an effective top layer over other outerwear like a hoodie or another, not-so-waterproof jacket. If it’s too loose and bulky, the jacket could hinder your mobility. 

For most of us, a just-right fit is slightly larger than that of an average jacket. It won’t ride up over your waist when you raise your arms. You also want the sleeves to be long enough to come well over your wrists so they don’t pull up too high when you reach to grab something.

We prefer a rain jacket with a hood because in cold, inclement weather, keeping your head warm and dry goes a long way in keeping you from feeling like a drowned rat. And a hood keeps the water from getting under your neck and trickling down your back. A well-designed hood has a small visor built in to keep rain out of your eyes and a way to cinch it so that it fits closely to your head. You don’t want to just see the side of the hood every time you turn your head (plus it can be dangerous). If you regularly partake in an activity like climbing or cycling where a helmet is a good idea, make sure the hood will fit over it.

Packability

By definition, the best packable rain jackets should fold or roll up into a very small size that makes it easy to carry around. Many of the jackets on this list stuff into their own chest or hand pocket, though that isn’t a requirement. As long as you can shove it into the last, small, available space in your backpack, that counts as packable. If your jacket doesn’t crumple into its own pocket, you can buy a lightweight “stuff sack” just for that purpose.

FAQs

Q: What does a packable rain jacket mean?

Packable rain jackets are defined by the ability to fold or roll down into a very small size and stuffed into either their own pockets or small carrying sacks. They tend to be lightweight jackets made to protect you from wind and rain when you plan to go out in less-than-ideal weather.

Q: Can you repair rain jackets?

You can repair a rain jacket with tenacious tape, a one-sided vinyl tape made for patching waterproof fabrics, including jackets and tents. Available by the roll, or in pre-cut patches, you simply cut a piece to cover the tear plus an inch on all sides. For added strength, apply a patch on both the inside and outside of the jacket over the tear. Press down from the center out and wait 24 hours if possible before wearing. Many camping and outdoor-focused jacket manufacturers, including Patagonia and Showers Pass, also offer repair services for their products.

Q: How much does a packable rain jacket cost?

A good packable rain jacket can cost anywhere from $60 to $800, all depending on how many features you want. Keep in mind that the most expensive gear on the spectrum is made for scaling mountains and other extremely harsh conditions. A well-made, technically minded jacket should suffice for most people, and that usually costs between $100-$300

Q: Where do I recycle my rain jacket?

The best and easiest way to recycle your rain jacket is to give it away or donate it to an organization that resells or donates used clothing. Many waterproof jackets have coatings or have undergone treatments that make them impossible to recycle through conventional means. That said, some manufacturers, such as Patagonia, accept all their products for recycling.

Final thoughts on the best packable rain jackets

All of these jackets are solid, quality garments that will keep you dry when the skies open up. Finding the best packable rain jackets that are waterproof, comfortable, lightweight, and breathable makes every kind of outdoor activity more fun and comfortable in bad weather, from cycling and climbing to a leisurely walk around the neighborhood.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best packable rain jackets in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn https://www.popsci.com/gear/ecoflow-delta-2-solar-generator-review/ Wed, 16 Aug 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=563346
EcoFlow Delta 2 generator sitting on the ground near a truck tire
Nick Hilden

EcoFlow's 27-pound battery-powered generator has enough juice to keep your whole life going when the grid isn't an option.

The post EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
EcoFlow Delta 2 generator sitting on the ground near a truck tire
Nick Hilden

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The EcoFlow Delta 2 takes everything great about the brand—build quality, reliability, smart features—and puts it in a highly portable, moderate-capacity package. Clocking in at 1,000 watt-hours and just 27 pounds, the Delta 2 is the Goldilocks power station for most users: not too big and not too small. In other words, it provides a decent amount of easy-to-carry juice at a comparatively reasonable $999. There are more expensive, higher-capacity stations out there that are better suited for serious van-life conversions or prolonged home power backup. Still, if you’re looking for a solid amount of power for purposes like camping, short power outages, off-grid job sites, or simply having around for when the outlet is too far, the Delta 2 is an outstanding solar generator option.

EcoFlow Delta 2 generator on a plain background

EcoFlow

SEE IT

Overview

  • Wattage: 1024Wh
  • Weight: 27 pounds
  • Charge time (from an outlet): 80 minutes
  • Solar capable: Yes, with optional solar panels
  • Ports: 2 USB-A Fast Charge (18W), 2 USB-A, 2 USB-C (100W), 6 AC output (1200W), and 2 DC5521 ports
  • Price: $999

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Charges quickly
  • LiFePo battery lasts many cycles
  • Plenty of outlets

Cons

  • Some users may want to upgrade for more capacity without the need for expansion

Verdict: This highly portable, reliable, fast-charging generator will likely serve most users well for years to come.

The EcoFlow Delta 2 build

The latest in EcoFlow’s Delta series, the Delta 2 shaves a bit of capacity off the previous edition to offer a version that is a little sleeker, a little more portable, and that feels like an all-around better thought-out package.

Its 1000Wh capacity will keep a full-sized fridge going for 7-14 hours or a car fridge on for up to a day and a half. It will charge a phone 89 times or a laptop 16 times. That’s decent power for a part-time van traveler or brief blackouts at home. While it’s not quite enough for full-time van-lifers or extended home power issues, it can be doubled or tripled in capacity via EcoFlow’s expansion batteries, allowing you to more or less tailor its capacity to your needs.

Where it really excels is in terms of design. Its dual, frame-integrated handles make it super light and easy to lug around. A little bigger than a shoebox standing on its side, it’s no hassle to store or pack in a vehicle. Like everything EcoFlow produces, the build quality is outstanding—it doesn’t feel like it will rattle apart like lesser brands. It has a long-lasting battery and feels like a tool you’ll have around for years and years to come.

It can charge fully in just 80 minutes via wall outlet or in 3-6 hours with 400 watts of solar input. For ports, it offers 6 AC outlets, 2 USB-A ports, 2 USB-C, fast-charge ports in both USB-A and -C, and a 12V car plug.

The EcoFlow Delta 2 setup

EcoFlow Delta 2 generator ports
Here’s a look at the ports available for power on this side of the device. Nick Hilden

One of the biggest factors in determining the quality of a portable power station involves how quickly and easily it charges. Plugged into the wall, its 80-minute charge time is pretty fast. If you’re on the go, you could stop for a long cup of coffee and drive away with a more or less full battery.

Many buyers seek a portable solar generator for camping, van life, or RV use. That means they want it to be able to charge via solar with relative speed and ease. The Delta 2 delivers on both. Using one of the company’s 400W panels or a set of 220W, you’ll theoretically have a full charge in as fast as three hours. Maybe if the sun is perfect, but realistically it takes more like five or six as sun conditions tend to be more finicky. For most purposes, however, that will do fine. If you’re camping, just leave the solar array out during the day, and it should remain more or less topped off with no problems.

The EcoFlow Delta 2’s performance

EcoFlow Delta 2 generator screen and USB ports
The display is handy for keeping track of essential variables. Nick Hilden

The capacity and charging times are decent, but I think where the Delta 2 really stands out is in regard to portability and durability. Light and compact, it’s a breeze to move around. Our photos were taken next to a car wheel so you can get an idea of the scale, and as you can see, it’s pretty small for a station of its capacity.

And it’s built tough enough to feel like you could hammer nails with it. Don’t do that—you shouldn’t do that—but it feels like you could. Some other brands feel like pieces will fall off every time you move them. The Delta 2, on the other hand, is solid.

The EcoFlow ecosystem

Another of the main benefits of the Delta 2 is that it’s designed to work with the wider EcoFlow ecosystem of solar, portable, emergency power gear.

Beyond the solar panels, it can be paired with backup batteries or the company’s Smart Generator—a dual-fuel generator that will keep it fully charged in the event of longer power outages. EcoFlow has even released a new car fridge with freezer capabilities, and new devices will likely continue to roll out over time.

So if you’re looking for a power station that can be expanded upon for different purposes, the Delta 2 is a good place to start.

EcoFlow offers a Delta 2 Max version of their popular generator. And while those models offer some upgrades like double the capacity and more powerful AC and DC charging, you’ll be paying a lot more.

So, who should buy the EcoFlow Delta 2?

The Delta 2 doesn’t feel tailored for any particular use but more like a solid jack-of-all-trades power box that can do a little of everything. If you plan on going on camping, van-life, or RV trips lasting 2-5 days and just want to keep a few devices charged and maybe a fridge cool, it will do the job fine. Or, if you live in an area where you experience occasional, short-term power outages, it will keep the essentials going for a few hours. Or, if you’re a photographer looking to charge your camera, drones, and other equipment while off-grid or on the go, this is an outstanding option. In other words, if you need moderate power capacity but high portability, the EcoFlow Delta 2 is a great choice all around.

The post EcoFlow Delta 2 solar generator review: A mobile power unicorn appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-power-bank-for-camping/ Wed, 16 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=562407
The best power banks for camping
Stan Horaczek

A fully charged (or solar-compatible) power bank for camping will keep all of your devices juiced without adding extra weight to your kit.

The post The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best power banks for camping
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core
SEE IT

This is the ideal mix of capacity, features, bulk, and price for most campers.
Best budget Goal Zero Flip 24 power bank Goal Zero Flip 24 Power Bank
SEE IT

This tiny charger weighs less than a third of a pound and fits in your pack.
Best with light Outdoor Tech Fuel + Charger power bank Outdoor Tech FUEL+ Charger
SEE IT

The built-in illumination can save your in a pinch when your phone is dead.

A power bank for camping can change the way you adventure outside. These days camping tends to involve all manner of devices—lanterns, flashlights, cooking appliances, drones, and, of course, your phone—which means you need to pack along a way to charge them. That’s where power banks come in. Power banks are available in various forms, with different models offering particular features that make them ideal for different purposes. In any case, the best power banks for camping always offer outdoor-ready durability and reliable operation, and we have recommendations for a few outstanding options you can count on when you head off the grid.

How we chose the best power banks

To say that I’ve spent a lot of time under the stars or without cellphone bars would be a major understatement. Over the past 40 years, I’ve spent weeks and even months at a time camped in the great outdoors, and during the latter decades, that meant bringing along plenty of power to keep my devices charged. This has become increasingly important as my location-independent work requires more juice for my laptop, camera, portable WiFi hotspot, drone, and more.

Accordingly, I’ve used power banks of all varieties, from small pocket-sized models to large solar generators. These have spanned everything from the top established brands to new and lesser-known competitors, and I’ve come to recognize those that are all hype and those that deliver true quality. Equipped with this experience, I’ve written about power banks and a range of other outdoor tech for Popular Science, Popular Mechanics, the Daily Beast, Thrillist, and more. In cases where my opinion was split between two products, I typically looked to reviews from real-world customers and a variety of outdoor experts to determine which power banks are truly the best for camping.

The best power banks for camping: Reviews & Recommendations

The recommendations below span a range of forms and sizes, from small power banks that cost a few dozen dollars to hefty power stations that cost a few thousand. Some are intended for short camping jaunts with limited electricity needs, while others are designed for longer trips and larger power demands. Whatever you need to recharge an iPhone or an ebike, you’ll find something suitable on this list.

Best overall: Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core

Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core Portable Generator Review

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Outdoor durability, excellent portability, and solid storage capacity make this an outstanding power bank for camping trips of any duration.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 983Wh
  • Dimensions: 9.86 x 15.25 x 10.23 inches
  • Weight: 31.68 lbs
  • Price: $1,198.95

Pros

  • Highly portable
  • Incredible durability
  • Plenty of plugs

Cons

  • Charging rate could be faster

The Goal Zero Yeti 1000 Core is an ideal power station for camping for several reasons. Its 983-watt-hour capacity will more than meet the needs of most campers, easily powering small devices and lighting for a long weekend without recharging. Plug in a solar panel or two, and it will keep those same devices going indefinitely. It offers some of the best craftsmanship on the market and is durable enough for hauling around in a vehicle and to and from your campsite. And its squared shape with inlaid handles makes for excellent portability.

In terms of use, the Yeti 1000 Core offers plenty of plugs. Dual AC, USB-A, USB-C, and a single 12V car plug translate into plenty of port options, and its 1,200-watt output capacity is capable of powering just about anything you could need while camping.

Its one drawback is that its recharging rate has fallen behind some competitors, but for use with typical devices—phones, drones, lights, etc.—it will provide more than enough power for a long weekend.

Best for backpacking: BioLite Charge 80 PD Power Bank

Biolite charge 80 PD Power Bank

BioLite

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Super compact, durable, and capable of charging multiple devices simultaneously, it’s the perfect power bank to toss in your pack.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 74 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.7 x 3.2 x 1 inches
  • Weight: 1.4 lbs
  • Price: $79.94

Pros

  • Supremely portable
  • Great power capacity
  • Multiple device charging

Cons

  • Some buyers report lifespan issues

The BioLite Charge 80 PD power bank will do pretty much everything you want of a charger while backpacking. It offers an abundance of capacity for such a small package—enough to charge a phone five times, a headlamp or flashlight 16 times, or a tablet twice—and its 18-watt output is strong enough to charge a 13-inch laptop once. It can charge two devices simultaneously via its dual USB-A and single USB-C ports.

I really haven’t found any flaws in the Charge 80. There are a handful of reviews out there from people who complained of a short lifespan, but most users—myself included—report that it’s hardy and reliable. It’s a great backpacking power bank by every metric.

Best for laptops: Goal Zero Sherpa 100AC

Goal Zero Sherpa 100AC

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its excellent balance of capacity, charging capability, and portability, this is the perfect power bank for content creators on the go.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 95 Wh
  • Dimensions: 7.69 x 5.49 x 1.02 inches
  • Weight: 3.19 lbs
  • Price: $299.95

Pros

  • Integrated AC inverter
  • Solar capable
  • Multiple device charging

Cons

  • Wireless charging struggles

A laptop power bank needs to provide two things above all else: AC power inversion (so that it Is actually capable of charging a laptop in the first place) and solid capacity. The Goal Zero Sherpa 100AC delivers on both, plus a bunch of other camping-friendly features. Not only will it charge the average laptop twice, a phone eight times, or a camera over a dozen times, but it can be plugged into a solar panel and recharged if you expect to stay off the grid for more than a couple of days. Multiple ports allow it to charge two to three devices simultaneously, and its build quality is absolutely outstanding.

While the wireless charging doesn’t always do what it’s supposed to—many users report that the 15-watt wireless charging is realistically more like three—every other function works perfectly. For a content creator on the go looking to power a laptop, camera, phone, drone, and other gear, the Sherpa is the ultimate portable pick.

Best for solar (large): Jackery Solar Generator 2000 Pro

Best Solar Generators

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: No other portable solar power station on the market offers such an outstanding combination of portability, capacity, input/output capability, and solar rechargeability.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 2,160Wh
  • Dimensions: 15.1 x 10.5 x 12.1 inches
  • Weight: 43 lbs
  • Price: $2,498

Pros

  • Fast charging and outstanding capacity
  • Plenty of ports
  • Can connect to six 200W solar panels

Cons

  • Heavy for its size

Simply put, I love the Jackery 2000 Pro. It does pretty much everything you’d want of a medium-to-large-sized portable power station. While its 2,160-watt-hour capacity is huge—big enough to power a van conversion for 2-3 days—its boxed shape and relatively compact size make it easy to fit into your vehicle. It has plenty of ports and more output capacity than any typical camper could reasonably need. And, having knocked mine around a good bit while on the road, I can definitely attest to its durability.

But if you’re specifically interested in solar capabilities, that’s where the 2000 Pro really shines. Capable of wielding six 200-watt solar panels, it can charge as fast as 2-2.5 hours in ideal sun conditions. That’s lightning fast. So if you plan on setting up camp and then leveraging the sun for a prolonged stay, you won’t find a better option.

Best for solar (small): QiSa Solar Power Bank

QiSa Solar Power Bank

QiSa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its fold-out solar panels and surprisingly large capacity relative to its size, this is a great power bank for off-grid device top-offs.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 194 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.89 x 4.41 x 1.9 inches
  • Weight: 1.42 lbs
  • Price: $39.99

Pros

  • Foldout solar panels
  • Surprising capacity
  • Weather-proof

Cons

  • Solar charging is gradual

For more humble solar purposes—say to keep a couple of devices charged while out in the woods for the day, or if you want a reliable way to charge up a phone in an off-grid emergency—check out the QiSa Solar Power Bank. Its 194-watt-hour capacity is surprisingly large for such a compact bank and will charge a phone around a dozen times. Multiple ports and effective wireless capabilities allow you to charge up to three devices at once. And its solid weather-proofing holds up under most conditions.

Key here are the four foldout solar panels. While their recharge rate is admittedly gradual—you more or less have to keep them resting in the sun all day for a decent charge—they work fine for keeping your devices topped off over the course of camping.

Best high-capacity: Jackery Solar Generator 3000 Pro

Jackery Explorer 3000 with handle extended

Nick Hilden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Offering paramount power capacity in a decently portable design, this is a great choice when you want big batteries above all else.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 3,024 Wh
  • Dimensions: 18.6 x 14.1 x 14.7 inches
  • Weight: 63.93 lbs
  • Price: $3,999

Pros

  • Top-tier capacity and output capability
  • Fast charging
  • Retractable handle and integrated wheels

Cons

  • Very expensive

When only the biggest box of juice in the biz will do, you want the Jackery 3000 Pro. Its massive 3,024-watt-hour capacity will charge a phone over 100 times, power an electric grill for nearly three hours, or will keep an electric cooler going for days uninterrupted, and its 3000-watt output capability will power pretty much anything. It delivers all the other pluses I mentioned for the previous Jackery, such as plentiful plugs, fast charging, and durable build quality. What’s more, all that is packed into a surprisingly portable unit. At over 60 pounds, it’s not exactly lightweight, but integrated wheels and a retractable handle make it easier to move around.

Greatness does come at a cost. Four thousand bucks isn’t cheap, and the addition of solar panels makes that price climb fast. If you have the budget for it, however, this is the ultimate high-capacity setup.

Best all-weather: Dark Energy Poseidon Pro

Dark Energy solar power bank

Dark Energy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If there’s a more durable power bank out there, I haven’t seen it.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 50 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6 x 3.25 x .63 inches
  • Weight: .6 lbs
  • Price: $119.99

Pros

  • Insane durability
  • Holds charge for years
  • Included accessories are a nice touch

Cons

  • Low capacity

If you’re one of those outdoor adventure types who tend to push the durability of their gear to the limits, the Poseidon Pro from Dark Energy was designed for you. Supposedly, it can survive being dropped from 50 feet, submerged underwater for 45 minutes, exposed to extreme temperatures, crushed by 1500 pounds, fired upon by a shotgun, or blown up with 1.5 pounds of explosives. So “all-weather” is something of an understatement. It will also hold a charge for over eight years, so it’s ideal for charging up and then throwing in your kit for emergencies. And included accessories—like a 3-foot knitted USB-C cable, leather strap, and Dark Energy’s Carabiner Pro (a carabiner with an integrated knife blade, screwdriver, bottle opener, and window breaker)—bolsters its value.

The battery capacity isn’t exactly enormous—enough to charge a phone a couple of times, a camera once, or recharge a lantern several times—but for a bit of extra power in what may as well be an invincible shell, the Poseidon Pro can’t be beat.

Best with light: Outdoor Tech FUEL+ Charger

Outdoor Tech Fuel + Charger power bank

Outdoor Tech

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Compact, waterproof, and equipped with a wide, bright light, it pulls double duty as a lamp and battery.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 36.18 Wh
  • Dimensions: 3.8 x 3.8 x 1.1 inches
  • Weight: .59 lbs
  • Price: $49.95

Pros

  • Bright, multi-setting light
  • Super compact
  • Waterproof

Cons

  • Low capacity

With its super compact design, solid weatherproofing, and—most important for our purposes here—highly functional integrated light, the FUEL+ Charger from Outdoor Tech is a great little power bank. The LED lantern offers three modes: normal, high, and SOS flashing. It’s tiny and waterproof, making it perfect for hooking onto your backpack or tossing in your go-kit. It does everything you want for a supremely portable power bank that leans into illumination.

Admittedly the power capacity isn’t all that big—realistically, it will charge your phone once, maybe, alongside use as a lantern—but for a bit of extra power plus plenty of light, it’s an excellent choice.

Best for multi-device charging: Scosche PowerUp 32K

Scosche Powerup 32K

Scosche

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With its compact size, decent capacity, and—most importantly—AC plug capability, this is the perfect power bank for portable, multi-device charging.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 116.8 Wh
  • Dimensions: 6.1 x 3.8 x 2 inches
  • Weight: 2.1 lbs
  • Price: $249.99

Pros

  • AC plug
  • Charges up to 4 devices simultaneously
  • Protective case included

Cons

  • No waterproofing

It can be difficult to find pocket-sized power banks capable of charging several devices at once and next to impossible to find one that offers an AC plug. The Scosche PowerUp 32K is almost entirely unique in that it delivers on the latter point. With its four-device capability, it can be switched to charge via USB-C or USB-A, 110-volt AC, or all three at once. It’s pretty small but still delivers decent capacity, and it is capable of charging a phone nine times, a laptop 1.5 times, or a drone 20 times, and it can power a light or USB fan for a full day.

While it doesn’t boast any waterproofing and isn’t exactly designed for rugged outdoor use, the addition of a protective case helps keep it safe, and it’s still a great option for keeping your smaller electrical gear going while camping.

Best budget: Goal Zero Flip 24 Power Bank

Goal Zero Flip 24 power bank

Goal Zero

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Affordable yet designed with well-considered camping features, this offers high quality at a low price.

Specs

  • Storage capacity: 24.12 Wh
  • Dimensions: 3.7 x 1.63 x .83 inches
  • Weight: .2875 lbs
  • Price: $29.95

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Very compact
  • Solar compatible

Cons

  • Recharging mechanism could be better

Goal Zero has created something special with the Flip 24. While it’s exceedingly affordable—power banks don’t get much cheaper than this—it’s still a well-thought-out piece of puny camping equipment. Super compact, it’s smaller than a deck of cards yet can throw a couple of charges into a phone, lamp, or GPS tracker. It also has an integrated USB tip that can be plugged into a solar panel, making it a great tool for gathering a bit of emergency power while off-grid.

Some users say that charging via a wall outlet—which requires plugging the USB tip into a wall adapter—can be a little tricky, but beyond that, this is a smart yet cost-effective power bank for bringing a little power outdoors.

What to consider when shopping for the best power bank for camping

While many power banks offer relatively straightforward designs, here are still a few things you should consider when choosing the right one for your specific needs:

Capacity

You need a power bank that offers capacity relative to your power needs. If you’re just looking to charge a phone or lantern a few times over the course of a camping trip, you probably don’t need one of the larger power stations. A pocket-sized battery will suffice. But if you’re hoping to stay for longer and use a lot of power, a smaller product simply won’t do the job.

Most power banks rate their capacity in terms of watt-hours or milliamp hours, though when it comes to smaller devices, these numbers themselves don’t tell you a whole lot. A good rule of thumb is that a cell phone (probably the device you’ll charge most often) can be recharged approximately two to three times with 30 watt-hours. You can usually find information on capacity relative to other devices by checking the product description.

Portability

When camping, you want your gear to be as portable as possible. With power banks, that means ensuring you don’t go overkill in terms of power capacity. If you don’t need a big, multi-thousand-watt-hour power station, don’t waste the car space and effort lugging it around. If you do end up going with a larger unit, look for products with helpful features like handles and wheels.

Durability

Anytime you bring electrical equipment into the great outdoors, you should bear in mind the weather and the fact that camping gear tends to get banged around. That means looking for power banks that offer durability and ideally some form of waterproofing.

Durability is hard to assess without time and use, so the best way to judge this before heading into the woods is by reading reviews written by those who have already put a particular product through its paces. Waterproofing is rated via an “IP” code including two numbers (the first for dust-proofing, the second for liquid) ranging from 0-8. A rating of IP67, for example, is completely dust-proof and protected against submersion in water for up to 30 minutes.

FAQs

Q: Is a power bank the same as a portable charger?

Essentially yes. “Power bank” is a catchall term for portable chargers and larger power stations.

Q: Do power banks with wireless charging work with all devices?

No, for a device to charge wirelessly, it must have “Qi” compatibility. Check your device information to determine if it can use wireless charging.

Q: Can a power bank charge any type of device?

No. While smaller 5V power banks can charge most devices with low energy demands—like phones, tablets, cameras, speakers, or USB fans—larger devices like laptops usually require a voltage output of at least 16V-20V. This is less common in small banks, so check product descriptions.

Once you jump up to larger banks like power stations, they’ll typically charge any device you throw at them. Powering larger equipment or appliances can be less certain, so check that a power station’s output is relative to whatever you plan on powering.

Final thoughts on the best power bank for camping

The list above has positioned each product as if it is the only power bank you’ll need for camping, but I’ve found that it’s best to use two or even three banks of different sizes in conjunction. I almost always bring along a large power station for heavier power loads, a pocket-sized bank for carrying while hiking or just using around camp, and a third, smaller bank that I keep charged and stored in my kit in the event of an emergency. Between two or a trio of power banks, it’s pretty easy to cover all your electricity needs while enjoying the great outdoors.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best power bank for camping in 2023, tested and reviewed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best gallon water bottles in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gallon-water-bottles/ Fri, 15 Jul 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=455945
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

Here’s one way to make sure you drink enough water every day.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best gallon water bottles
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug is the best gallon water bottle overall. Yeti Gallon Jug
SEE IT

Yeti’s stainless steel gallon water jug is rugged and cleverly designed.
Best insulated Hydro Flask Oasis is the best insulated gallon water bottle. Hydro Flask Oasis
SEE IT

Hydro Flask’s 1-gallon Oasis can quench a big thirst after a long day.
Best motivational Fidus Motivational Water Bottle is the best motivational gallon water bottle. Fidus Motivational Water Bottle
SEE IT

The Fidus motivational water bottle has markings to help you hit your hydration goals.

The gallon water bottle is the ultimate hydration vessel. Carrying 128 ounces of liquid, these giant vessels are the perfect companion for balmy beach days, backcountry hikes, and sweaty gym sessions. They’ve also recently grown popular as a way to push yourself to drink more water every day. If your average 40-ounce water bottle just isn’t cutting it, an absolutely immense gallon bottle will ensure you never feel parched again. Chances are, you’ll have plenty left over to share with your friends and family after you absolutely crush those hydration goals. Here are the best gallon water bottles for aspirational drinkers, fitness obsessives, and anyone who wants to catch the big water bottle wave.

How we chose the best gallon water bottles

I consider myself an outdoorsy guy, so I spend a lot of time at the beach, in the mountains, and far away from clean running water. I was particularly excited to look into gallon water bottles since I’ve been thinking about picking one up myself. To make our selections, I performed hands-on testing and did hours of research, surveying critical viewpoints from water-obsessed coworkers alongside user impressions before settling on our picks.

At Popular Science, I cover a little bit of everything. I’ve researched all kinds of products, from the best energy-efficient air conditioners to the best smoke detectors. Before PopSci, I wrote about and reviewed gadgets for over 10 years for sites like iMore, XDA Developers, and CNN Underscored. 

The best gallon water bottles: Reviews & Recommendations

The type of gallon water bottle you buy depends on how you plan to use it. If you want to keep liquids hot or cold, a stainless steel bottle that’s vacuum insulated is your best option. Otherwise, plastic bottles tend to be more affordable and weigh less. Since there aren’t that many trustworthy brands making gallon water bottles, we feel confident that one of these picks is the best option for you.

Best overall: Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug

Yeti Rambler Gallon Jug is the best gallon water bottle overall.

YETI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Yeti Gallon Jug features tough stainless steel construction and double-wall vacuum insulation to keep drinks icy cold all day long.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Weight: 4.5 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Clever magnetic lid to store spout cap
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Sturdy handle

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

The Yeti Gallon Jug will keep your water cold if you’re out in the field and away from refills. It’s made of durable stainless steel and features vacuum insulation so that it will keep liquids hot or cold for several hours. It also keeps your bottle from sweating, so surfaces are safe from condensation.

The Gallon Jug’s lid features a sturdy metal handle with soft grip padding, making it easier to carry on long hauls. The lid also contains a neat magnetic design, so users can store the cap when the spout is open. You can also screw the entire lid off for easy cleaning and refills. It’s a clever design that reinforces Yeti’s attention to the small details.

Like all Yeti’s other stainless steel bottles, the Gallon Jug is BPA-free and dishwasher safe. It weighs 4.5 pounds before putting water in it, or over 12 pounds full. That’s heavy on a hike. Still, it is far and away the nicest water bottle of this size.

Best insulated: Hydro Flask Oasis

Hydro Flask Oasis is the best insulated gallon water bottle.

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Hydro Flask Oasis is big and heavy, but it’ll keep your liquids cold for up to 24 hours or hot for up to 12 hours.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Height: 14.8 inches
  • Weight: 4.96 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Easy grip base
  • Double-wall insulation
  • Keeps liquids cold for up to 24 hours

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Heavy

Like our top pick, the Hydro Flask Oasis is a large, heavy stainless steel bottle with double-wall vacuum insulation that ensures liquids stay cold. Hydro Flask claims water stays chilled in the Oasis for up to 24 hours, making it the perfect companion for the summer months. It’s also rated for hot liquids and keeps coffee, tea, or soup hot for up to 12 hours. It’s an excellent option for skiers who want a piping hot cup of joe after a long day on the slopes.

In addition to its superior insulation, we like the Oasis’ beveled base, which makes it easier to grab and pour. It’s a nice touch that you won’t find elsewhere. On the other hand, the Oasis’ lid doesn’t provide a place to store the spout cap, and the plastic handle isn’t as durable or easy to hold.

Like the Yeti Rambler, the Hydro Flask Oasis weighs nearly 5 pounds and pushes 13 pounds when filled with water. The weight isn’t a significant hurdle if you’re keeping hydrated at home, but the Oasis’ weight could be an issue on a camping trip or climbing up a mountain when every ounce counts.

Best for the gym: Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler

Coleman One Gallon Beverage Cooler is the best for the gym.

Coleman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Coleman One-Gallon Beverage Cooler features a simple flip-top spout, insulation, and a classic design you remember from childhood.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 12.8 inches
  • Weight: N/A
  • Dishwasher safe: No
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Sturdy design
  • Insulation
  • Flip-top spout

Cons

  • Not dishwasher safe

If you played sports as a kid, you may remember the Coleman gallon jug. Your coach may have brought it along to keep your whole team hydrated, but now it’s just for you.

The fact of the matter is that Coleman still makes a great bottle, and it’s specifically the perfect option for the gym. It has a leakproof lid, flip-top spout, and insulation to keep liquids cold. It’s also incredibly durable and features a handle that makes the Coleman Chiller easy to carry. It’s a simple, classic design that will keep you hydrated through every workout step.

Best motivational: Fidus Motivational Water Bottle

Fidus Motivational Water Bottle is the best motivational gallon water bottle.

Fidus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For people buying a big water bottle to drink more water, the Fidus Motivational water bottle gives you regular hydration goals.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 0.83 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Paracord handle
  • Button cap
  • Available in several colors

Cons

  • No insulation

Drinking a gallon of water in a single day is hard work. As we mentioned, you don’t actually need to do it to stay healthily hydrated. But if you want to, this water bottle from Fidus is a trendy Tritan plastic water bottle with markers and motivational quotes to keep you on track to hit that daily goal. 

The 1-gallon water bottle from Fidus features eight motivational quotes to keep users focused and energized about hitting their water intake goals. It also features a cap that covers the spout and straw, so it’ll stay shielded from dust and particles throughout the day, and comes with a detachable paracord handle for easier carrying. Who doesn’t like a bit of encouragement?

Best budget: Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle

Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle is the best for the budget.

Simple Modern

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Simple Modern Gallon Water Bottle offers a basic bottle at an affordable price.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Height: 13.8 inches
  • Weight: 1.15 pounds
  • Dishwasher safe: Yes
  • BPA Free: Yes

Pros

  • Silicone straw
  • Button cap

Cons

  • No insulation

The Simple Modern 1-gallon bottle is, just like the brand name implies, a simple gallon water bottle. The dishwasher-safe Tritan plastic bottle comes in a variety of colors, including some calming color gradients like the green-to-purple “Tropical Seas,” and warm coral-to-cyan “Havana.” The best part of the Simple Modern bottle is its lid, which features a silicone mouthpiece with a lockable cover to keep it from getting dirty between sips. Press, Flip, Hydrate. Simple!

What to consider when buying the best gallon water bottles

So let’s get one thing out of the way: You don’t actually need to drink 8 cups of water every day. Giant water bottles have recently seen a surge in popularity, as people see them as a means of motivating themselves to drink more water. While you should never deny yourself water if you’re thirsty, it turns out that you don’t need to push yourself to drink that much.

That doesn’t mean there aren’t good reasons to carry around an absolutely gigantic jug of water. If you frequently go camping or spend long stretches of time away from a clean water source, it pays to bring a lot of water along. 

There aren’t as many manufacturers making gallon water bottles as the standard 32-ounce and 40-ounce options, so there isn’t as much room to get picky about style and design. That said, it still pays to know the essentials of water bottle construction so you can tell the best gallon water bottles from the knockoffs. Once you know where to look—and what to look for—in a gallon water bottle, you’ll find options that offer excellent durability, insulation, and clever designs for comfortable transportation and enhanced hydration.

Material

Most water bottles, no matter the size, are made of durable plastic or stainless steel. You may also find gallon jars made from shatter-resistant glass, but it’s fairly uncommon among bottles made for daily drinking.

Stainless steel water bottles are popular because they’re light but durable. They’re usually made from 18/8 stainless steel, which refers to its elemental composition—18% chromium and 8% nickel. It is considered food safe and is resistant to corrosion and oxidation. Many stainless steel bottles are also vacuum insulated or designed to create a sealed buffer between the liquid in the container and the environment outside the bottle, which reduces conduction and keeps liquids hot or cold for several hours. 

Reusable plastic water bottles offer a great balance of durability and affordability. High-quality plastic bottles are arguably more resistant to superficial wear and tear, though they generally lack stainless steel’s insulation. There is far more variability among the material to make plastic water bottles than there is among stainless steel water bottles. 

When buying plastic, make sure to get a plastic water bottle that’s made from BPA-free Tritan plastic, which is light, ultra-durable, and safe. Some studies suggest that containers made from plastics with bisphenol A, or BPA, can seep into what’s stored in the container and cause adverse health effects, so avoid plastic bottles unless the manufacturer specifies that they use a BPA-free material.

Durability

The gallon water bottle you buy will likely be by your side day and night, so it needs to withstand the pitfalls of everyday use. Stainless steel can get dented and scratched, but it’s pretty resilient over the long run and should last for several years. Stainless steel can also handle sudden temperature changes, making them more versatile than other materials on this list.

Tritan plastic water bottles are generally more scratch-resistant and won’t ding, but are by no means indestructible. Both materials are strong enough to withstand everyday wear and tear, even hiking or running. However, if you’re likely to drop your bottle off a cliff (or off a car’s roof), maybe go with stainless steel.

Weight

Here’s where things get a little tricky. There’s no way around the fact that our stainless steel picks are heavy. When filled up with water, they feel like small kettlebells. We don’t feel like their weight disqualifies them from consideration because, well … a gallon of water is always going to feel heavy. (Remember: A gallon of water weighs approximately 8 pounds.) That said, if you really want to minimize your bottle’s weight, a plastic bottle will generally weigh less than a stainless steel one.

FAQs

Q: How much does a gallon water bottle cost?

Depending on the bottle material, a gallon water bottle can cost between $20-$130.

Q: How often should I clean a gallon water bottle?

Some experts argue that you should clean your water bottle once a day. That may not be feasible for everyone, especially if you’re using your gallon water bottle off the grid. We’d argue that cleaning it a few times per week is a more achievable goal.  What you don’t want to do is go several weeks without washing your reusable bottle. Even if it looks clean, water bottles can build up bacteria over time, so you should clean them often.

Q: Can I put other liquids besides water in a gallon water bottle?

You can put other liquids in your gallon water bottle besides water, but some things are safer than others. For example, you can put hot coffee in the Yeti Rambler, but the company says to avoid using the jug’s lid with carbonated beverages because of potential pressure build-up. For the plastic bottles on our list, you should stick to room temperature or cold water.

Q: How long is water good in a gallon jug?

According to the Centers for Disease Control (CDC), you should replace stored water every six months. If you plan to keep water for an extended period, make sure it’s in an FDA-approved food-grade storage container. If you can’t find a food-grade water storage container, be sure the container has a top that can close tightly, is made of durable, unbreakable materials, and has a narrow neck for easy pouring.

Q: Is it safe to drink a gallon of water per day?

Drinking a gallon of water daily isn’t harmful but you probably don’t need to drink so much for optimal health. Optimal water intake varies from person to person based on a variety of personal and environmental factors, including height, weight, their activity level, and the current temperature. Rather than aiming for “eight cups a day,” simply try and drink water whenever you feel thirsty. 

Final thoughts on the best gallon water bottles

Gallon water bottles are for people who either won’t have access to a water source for a while or need to hit a specific intake goal. Otherwise, their size and weight make them too cumbersome for most people. If you want something easier to manage, you’re better off checking out our picks for the best water bottles. And if you’ve got young ones, there’s our guide to the best kids’ water bottles.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best gallon water bottles in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best insect repellents of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-insect-repellent/ Fri, 30 Apr 2021 20:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=362232
A brown mosquito caught behind a green leaf.
Syed Ali, Unsplash

Don’t let pests run—or ruin—your life. The best insect repellents will keep your skin protected and ward off bug-borne illnesses.

The post The best insect repellents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A brown mosquito caught behind a green leaf.
Syed Ali, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Thermacell makes one of the best insect repellents.best-insect-repellents-thermacell Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series Rechargeable Repeller
SEE IT

No application is required for this wide-range tabletop bug repellent, which offers up to nine hours of protection with each charge.
Best for babies Mosquito wipes to prevent mosquito bites Cutter Family Mosquito Wipes
SEE IT

These towelettes make putting on bug repellent quick and easy and give parents greater application control for small kids that want more playtime.
Best budget DEET OFF spray insect repellent OFF! Deep Woods Insect & Mosquito Repellent
SEE IT

This aerosol spray doesn’t feel greasy or oily upon application.

Whether we’re in the middle of nature or in the comfort of our own homes, biting bugs can wreak havoc on humans and pets, so effective insect repellant is the first defense. It’s a proactive way to keep the rude critters away before these scores of Davids leave their mark on our sensitive Goliath skin … or do even more serious damage. But it can be overwhelming to browse through rows of sprays, lotions, wipes, bracelets, and even electronic bug control options. We’re here to help you find the best insect repellents that really, genuinely work.

How we chose the best insect repellents

What do solar generators, tents, and coolers have in common? They’re all things you enjoy outdoors—or at least you should enjoy outdoors, insect adversaries allowing. That’s why we’d argue that effective repellent is one of the most important things you can pack on a camping trip—without it, you’d be itchy, uncomfortable, and putting yourself at risk of getting a bug from a bug. We turned to reviews, recommendations, and user testing to find the best insect repellents.

The best insect repellents: Reviews & Recommendations

The best insect repellents will help you reduce your calamine lotion and anti-itch cream use. Here are the ones we found:

Best overall: Thermacell Mosquito Repellent E-Series Rechargeable Repeller

Thermacell makes one of the best insect repellents.

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: No application is required for this wide-range tabletop bug repellent.

Specs

  • Volume: .33 fluid ounces
  • Form: Liquid
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Metofluthrin

Pros

  • Comes with dimmable light
  • No application
  • Long-range coverage
  • Rechargeable

Cons

  • Reviews say refills tend to deplete quickly

This rechargeable mosquito repeller from Thermacell gives you a 20-foot protection zone within 15 minutes. Its refills are long-lasting (12 hours), and the spray-free design makes for a more comfortable gathering. The repeller is designed with a dimmable light that provides from 50 to 200 lumens of light. One charge gets you up to 9 hours of continuous mosquito protection (5.5 hours if you’re also using the light). An interactive LCD panel will let you know the battery status both visually and audibly. The metofluthrin-based repellent is scent-free and has been independently tested and EPA-reviewed for safety. Additionally, it’s covered by a one-year warranty that can be extended two extra years with item registration.

Best for ticks: Thermacell Tick Control Tubes

Thermacall makes the best insect repellent for ticks.

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These easy-to-use tubes you can spread around your yard provide reliable protection against ticks.

Specs

  • Volume: 24 tubes
  • Form: Tube
  • Scent: None
  • Active ingredient: Permethrin

Pros

  • Easy to use
  • No mess
  • Inexpensive

Cons

  • Some users say mice didn’t use the cotton
  • Cardboard tube may degrade in the wet weather

The prevalence of tick-borne diseases like Lyme, babesiosis, and Rocky Mountain Spotted Fever require another level of protection when you’re spending time outdoors. Thermacell’s’ Tick Control Tubes can help make the job easier. These 24 tubes provide protection for an acre; the company recommends placing them in wood piles, rock walls, gardens, brush, and other areas that attract mice. The tubes contain cotton treated with the insecticide permethrin, and when mice bring the cotton back to their nest, the ticks feeding upon the mice die. Thermacell recommends you use them in spring and summer. Plus, the tubes are biodegradable.

Best picaridin: Sawyer Products 20% Picaridin Insect Repellent

Picardin insect repellent is some of the best bug control

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get 14 hours of protection against bugs with this non-greasy, non-scented lotion bug repellent.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces
  • Form: Lotion
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Picaridin

Pros

  • Long-lasting
  • Scent-free
  • Repels ticks

Cons

  • Spray not as effective as lotion

This bug repellent is completely fragrance-free and offers a stronger defense against biting flies than most DEET products. The lotion offers longer-lasting protection on skin, while the pump spray lingers longer on clothing. The lotion protects from mosquitos for up to 14 hours and provides eight hours of protection against flies and gnats. The spray provides 12 hours of protection against mosquitos and the same level of protection against flies and gnats. It is non-greasy and dries quickly. Additionally, it won’t damage synthetic coatings, and you can use the spray on clothing, backpacks, and more.

Best for babies: Cutter Mosquito Wipes

Mosquito wipes to prevent mosquito bites

Cutter

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These wipes make putting on bug repellent quick and easy for more playtime.

Specs

  • Volume: N/A
  • Form: Wipes
  • Scent: Yes
  • Active ingredient: DEET

Pros

  • Non-greasy
  • Clean scent
  • Easy-to-use

Cons

  • Only 15 wipes

These wipes use a 7.15 percent DEET-based formula to keep mosquitoes away. They’ve got a cooling, clean scent, and don’t feel sticky, greasy, or oily on the skin. You can use them on your face, ears, and neck, which usually go untreated. A resealable packet keeps them moist and allows you to take them on the go. They repel against mosquitoes, deer ticks, gnats, biting flies, fleas, and chiggers. You can use it on children two months and older. And, DEET will not damage nylon, cotton, or wool, but it can damage some synthetic fabrics. You’ll have to buy multiple packages for heavy use since each pack only contains 15 wipes.

Best premium: Thermacell LIV Smart Mosquito Repellent System

A mosquito repellent system on a white background

Thermacell

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Get on-demand protection season after season with this yard system.

Specs

  • Volume: N/A
  • Form: Liquid
  • Scent: No
  • Active ingredient: Metofluthrin

Pros

  • Wide coverage
  • Customizable placement
  • Effective

Cons

  • Expensive

Protect your entire backyard from mosquitos this summer with the LIV Smart Mosquito Repellent System. You can choose between three, four, or five repellers to place around your property lines, and each kit includes a smart hub, mounts, 24-foot cables, and ground stakes. The amount you receive of each depends on the size of the kit you purchase. Each repellent can last for 40 hours and uses scent-free, heat-activated metofluthrin as its active ingredient. The Smart Hub connects multiple repellers and can be controlled using the LIV+ app. The kits are expensive to purchase (it ranges from $699-$899) and the refills are pricey too—as a six-pack is $120. However, if you want to eradicate bugs from your outdoor entertainment spaces, it might be a worthy investment.

Best for dogs: Wondercide Flea, Tick, and Mosquito Spray

Flea and tick control for dogs

Wondercide

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This plant-based insect repellent smells great and keeps your pooch pest-free.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces; 16 fluid ounces; 32 fluid ounces, 1 gallon
  • Form: Spray
  • Scent: Yes: Lemongrass; peppermint; rosemary; cedarwood
  • Active ingredient: Essential oils

Pros

  • Not harmful to your pet
  • Wide variety of sizes
  • Plant-based

Cons

  • The scent might irritate skin

This flea and tick control is so much more than an insect killer. It uses pet-safe plant-based essential oils to combat pests at all stages of their life cycle. As an added bonus, it won’t harm birds, bees, and butterflies that eat insects that have been treated with the product. You can use it on your pooch, or you can use it on yourself. If your pet has sensitive skin—especially cats—the scent might irritate your pet. Bathe your pet in soap and discontinue use if your pet experiences a negative reaction.

Best budget: OFF! Deep Woods Insect & Mosquito Repellent

DEET OFF spray insect repellent

OFF!

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This long-lasting, non-greasy insect repellent comes in a two-pack for more bang for your buck.

Specs

  • Volume: 4 fluid ounces
  • Form: Aerosol
  • Scent: Lemon
  • Active ingredient: DEET

Pros

  • High DEET concentration
  • Non-greasy feel
  • Scent not overpowering

Cons

  • Propellant can leave a white residue on clothes

This DEET OFF insect repellent approaches the maximum level of protection with a concentration of 25 percent, and it’s especially effective at repelling deadly and/or annoying mosquitoes, along with ticks, biting flies, gnats, and chiggers for long periods of time. Its powder-dry insect-repelling formula protects without feeling oily or greasy, and its lemon scent is light and pleasant. Use caution when spraying on or near fabrics, as its included propellant can leave a white residue. It can be washed off easily, however.

What to consider when buying the best insect repellents

So how do you go about choosing the best insect repellent your money can buy? There’s a wide variety, which vary in effectiveness, application style, and whether their effects are scientifically proven. (Mosquito repellent bracelets, for example, are an option but experts are not unanimously sold on their effectiveness.) 

Before settling on any product, it’s important to read the label and look for one of three key ingredients: DEET, oil of lemon eucalyptus, and picaridin. Some experts are less than enthusiastic about natural insect repellents, like citronella, because their active ingredients aren’t as effective. That doesn’t make them useless, but they’re not ideal as a primary protector; they’re best used in tandem with the stronger stuff. Also, beware of products that combine sunscreen and bug repellent. Since sunscreen has to be reapplied every few hours, you’ll risk overexposing yourself to the chemicals in repellent.

When applying insect control, be sure you cover only exposed body parts, using only the recommended dose. Keep it away from cuts and bruises and, when using it on your face, rub it in using your hands and avoid touching your eyes, mouth, and ears. At the end of the day, wash it off using soap and water, and if you’ve sprayed it onto your clothing, keep them in a separate wash pile. The best insect repellent is also often some pretty harsh stuff: it can damage leather, vinyl, and some synthetics, so proceed with caution when applying bug spray directly to fabric.

DEET vs. picaridin

DEET (N,N-diethyl-meta-toluamide, in case you needed to know for a Jeopardy! question or bar trivia) is the most widely used active ingredient in insect repellent, and it offers a strong defense against mosquitoes, ticks, and some flies. The amount used in most products ranges between 10 percent and 100 percent, with a protection time of two hours to 10. The level of protection maxes out at a concentration of 30 percent, with higher levels only increasing the protection time. Control-release DEET can keep working for up to 12 hours.

DEET, which was developed by the United States Army during the 1940s, is perfectly safe to use if you follow the instructions that come with it. It’s considered the old faithful of the best insect repellent, but you have to be sure to handle it carefully and keep it away from your sunglasses and trekking pole grips since it doesn’t always mix well with plastics. It can also cause some temporary numbness in your lips if it comes into contact with them, so be careful when applying.

Picaridin is the synthetic version of a repellent found in pepper plants, and it’s often mentioned alongside DEET as a prime active ingredient in insect repellent. The maximum protection of picaridin is reached at 20 percent concentration, with spray and lotion forms providing different lengths of protection. In insect repellent spray, it can keep you covered against mosquitoes and ticks for 12 hours and flies for eight. In lotion form, it can protect you from mosquitoes and ticks for 14 hours and flies for eight.

Picaridin has a few advantages over the older competitor, DEET. When dealing with mosquitoes and ticks, picaridin is similarly effective as DEET, and it’s actually a bit more effective on flies. Picaridin also has less of an odor, and when used in the best insect repellent, it doesn’t do any damage to plastics and other synthetics.

Can kids use insect repellent?

According to the American Academy of Pediatrics, insect repellent used on children should not contain any more than a 30 percent concentration of DEET, and insect repellent shouldn’t be used at all on babies younger than two months. Picaridin is also generally safe to use on children, though it can irritate their eyes and skin. To avoid exposing kids to these fairly serious chemicals, you might want to consider an alternative like essential oil insect repellent, but keep in mind that repellents with plant oils as a main active ingredient offer fewer hours of protection than DEET and picaridin products.

To further protect babies from the effects of bugs outdoors, cover their strollers with netting. When applying the best insect repellent to children, adults should follow the same safety guidelines when applying it to themselves.

How do I protect my pets from insects?

Collars, pills, chewables, and drops provide pets with varying levels of pest protection. DEET can be toxic to dogs, especially in large quantities, so it’s best to avoid using DEET insect repellent on dogs, or even on yourself if you’re hanging out with a dog. (They do like to lick skin, remember.) Natural bug repellent is a safer option, but some essential oils are harmful to dogs, so it’s a good idea to check with your veterinarian before using any of them.

The safe list for dogs generally includes citrus, soybean oil, and geranium oil, and you can apply those to their coat or collar. Another option is filling your yard with plants like basil, catnip, lavender, lemon balm, peppermint, and rosemary as a mosquito repellent for dogs. But dog owners beware: Plants such as geranium, citronella, and garlic can be dangerous if eaten by dogs, and if you have a cat, essential oils can be especially toxic, causing an upset stomach and damage to the liver and central nervous system.

How much will you have to pay for bug protection?

The best insect repellent won’t set you back very much—if it’s designed for humans. Solid options can be found for under $10. But specially formulated bug control for pets tends to be a bit more expensive; it can even approach the $100 range. Home systems can also get pricey, and can go for around $600-$700 dollars.

FAQs

Q: What is the most effective insect repellent?

The most effective insect repellent will contain either DEET or picaridin as an active ingredient. DEET has been in use for longer and is more effective as a tick repellent, while picaridin provides a stronger defense against flies. Picaridin also has a milder odor and doesn’t dissolve plastics, as DEET can.

Q: What is the most effective natural insect repellent?

The most effective natural insect repellent is probably lemon eucalyptus oil. It is the essential oil cited most frequently by experts; a 32 percent solution can provide 95 percent protection against them for three hours. Citronella, on the other hand, has a minimal effect at best, when you’re talking about candles and torches.

Q: What smell do mosquitoes hate the most?

The smell mosquitoes hate the most is a relatively lengthy list that includes DEET, lavender, peppermint, citronella, garlic, lime, basil, clove oil, and eucalyptus. Considering how many things they hate, it’s clear they really must love biting humans to overcome all of those scents!

Final thoughts on the best insect repellents

The best insect repellent is likely to include one of the two power ingredients, those being DEET and picaridin. It doesn’t take a high concentration of either to maximize bug control, but the higher the concentration, the longer you’ll be protected. Natural insect repellent is an alternative to these, but they’re not always as effective. Since DEET poses a danger to dogs, natural bug repellents are a better pet option, but you have to be careful to stay away from toxic plants and essential oils that might threaten their health.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best insect repellents of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best electric scooters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/best-electric-scooters/ Tue, 10 Sep 2019 13:20:45 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-electric-scooters/
Save money and have fun getting where you need to go on one of the best electric scooters.

Improve your commute or take a tour of your town.

The post The best electric scooters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Save money and have fun getting where you need to go on one of the best electric scooters.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Segway makes some of the best electric scooters. Segway Ninebot MAX Original
SEE IT

It’s easily portable, uses a dual-braking system, and has pneumatic tires.
Best for kids The Flare by Hover-1 is one of the best electric scooters for kids. Flare by Hover-1
SEE IT

The scooter doesn’t let your kids go too fast, and it offers adjustable handlebars.
Best budget GoTrax makes one of the best electric scooters at a budget-friendly price. GoTrax GXL V2
SEE IT

This affordable model provides a hand brake and solid battery life.

Picking an electric scooter is becoming an increasingly challenging task. While there were just a handful of manufacturers to select from a few years ago, there are now myriad. The benefit of this much broader field is that there are now specialist vehicles for whatever you have in mind, whether that’s zooming past the pedestrians on your commute or doing leisurely laps of the park on a sunny Sunday. The downside, however, is that you’ll still have to sift through the dozens of available models. We sorted through the options to identify the best electric scooters for you.

How we chose the best electric scooters

To compile this list, we extensively researched the offerings of notable manufacturers and insurgent brands, accounting for unique product features and comparable performance levels in key attributes such as top speed and range per charge.

Though traffic laws concerning electric scooters vary from state to state (in Colorado, you can ride some electric scooters on sidewalks, while California requires you to use a bike path, trail, or bikeway), we placed strong focus on safety features, such as headlights, indicators, and tires that gain considerable traction. Other significant factors in our decision-making were battery life and charge time, power, and the overall comfort of the ride.

The best electric scooters: Reviews & Recommendations

We’ve come a long way since the Go-Ped craze of the late 1980s, and the scooters listed showed an array of strengths and weaknesses that make them suitable (or not so suitable) for your needs. While there’s no one-size-fits-all solution in our selection, the variety of available models does mean you can find an electric scooter that appears to be designed with you in mind.

Best overall: Segway Ninebot MAX Original

Segway makes some of the best electric scooters.

Segway

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: An ambitious model from one of the pioneers in the electric scooter space, the Segway Ninebot excels in every way. Massive range per charge, self-healing tires, and dual shock absorbers for a smoother ride are just some of the impressive features.

Specs

  • Weight: 42.1 pounds
  • Range: 40.4 miles
  • Max speed: 18.6 mph

Pros

  • Fast charging
  • Self-healing pneumatic tires
  • Multiple riding modes
  • Effective on inclines

Cons

  • Expensive

The Segway Ninebot MAX Original seeks to outdo its competitors in virtually every field. It almost succeeds, so we’ve made it our best pick overall, especially for those willing to extend their budget.

With a top speed of 18.6 miles per hour and maximum travel distance of 40.6 miles per charge, the Segway Ninebot MAX Original is both nimble and offers long range, even if few commuters test the limits of its range in a single day. A 20% hill grade, meanwhile, is reassuring for anyone who’s ever had to get off and push on pesky steep inclines.

The scooter boasts best-in-class safety features, including self-healing pneumatic tires and both front and back shock absorbers to reduce ride disruption across uneven sidewalks or bicycle lanes. The Segway Ninebot MAX Original delivers on its sturdy construction. Ample standing room and a grippy platform covered in raised rubber add to the sense that Segway’s flagship model diligently covers all bases.

Best design: Unagi Model One E500

Unagi makes one of the best electric scooters with a sleek design.

Unagi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A streamlined aesthetic and satisfactory performance make it a standout for anyone looking to pair style with speed.

Specs

  • Weight: 26.5 pounds
  • Range: 15.5 miles
  • Max speed: 19 mph

Pros

  • Impressive design
  • Lightweight
  • Anti-lock brakes
  • Three speed modes

Cons

  • Expensive

Job interview? First date? Sometimes it pays to look the part. And anyone seeking to arrive at significant formal occasions by electric scooter should consider the Unagi Model One E500. Referred to as the “iPhone” of electric scooters, this design-forward ride is the sleekest on the market, and it refuses to compromise for the sake of its looks in most other areas.

The dual 250-watt motors provide competitive power in the category, and a 15-mile per charge range places it squarely among its peers. Three speed modes ensure a comfortable ride speed for users of all skill levels, while an air pocket suspension system for absorbing bumps in the road creates a smoother—and potentially safer—ride.

Front and rear anti-lock brakes, meanwhile, are a key safety feature, while retro-futurists will appreciate the back friction brake that offers a foot braking option. Bright LED lights for visibility in low-light round out the Unagi Model One E500’s comprehensive safety package. For a smart option, read a review of the NIU KQi3 Pro Scooter.

Best for kids: Flare by Hover-1

The Flare by Hover-1 is one of the best electric scooters for kids.

Hover-1

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A suite of safety features and child-friendly design modifications make the Flare by Hover-1 the go-to electric scooter for younger riders.

Specs

  • Weight: 22 pounds
  • Range: 3 miles
  • Max speed: 8 mph

Pros

  • Safety-conscious design
  • Adjustable handlebars
  • Easy to store

Cons

  • Short range

The safety-first approach taken by Hover-1 equips the Flare with a thumb and brake throttle, disc brakes, an easy-to-read speed and battery display and an LED lighting system for high visibility in low light.

While its modest maximum speed of 8 miles per hour, courtesy of a 100W electric motor, is slower than adult models, it’s fast enough for adventurous kids. It can only be used for about 3 miles before it’ll need another charge—slightly less than its competitors—but it’s a tolerable inconvenience given this model’s strength in other areas.

An easy-to-fold design and lightweight frame also contribute to its family-friendliness, especially for those with limited garage space or multiple scooters to store. Adjustable handlebars give the Flare by Hover-1 longevity for growing riders as well. Multiple available colors and the neat, color-changing LED lighting system that illuminates both the stem and the platform also add playful, exciting touches for kids looking to impress their friends on the block.

Got a kid that’s 8+, and you trust them to travel a lil farther and faster? The Razor E100 has a run time of 40 minutes/range of 6.5 miles, and its 100-watt, high-torque, single-speed, chain-driven motor can reach 10 mph.

Best with seat: Hiboy S2 Pro

Hiboy makes one of the best electric scooters with a seat.

Hiboy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With strong credentials in all areas, the Hiboy S2 Pro is our choice for a seated electric scooter thanks to its ultra-comfortable ride.

Specs

  • Weight: 36.3 pounds
  • Range: 46 miles
  • Max speed: 22 mph

Pros

  • Dual rear suspension
  • Regenerative battery
  • Hiboy app access

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Have to buy seat separately

Whether intended for longer journeys or more relaxed rides, electric scooters with seats are becoming increasingly available from the biggest names in the industry.

The Hiboy S2 Pro is our favorite because it pairs a high-quality saddle and dual rear suspensions that provide best-in-class performance on challenging road surfaces. Built-in headlights, cruise control, and solid performance in both speed and range tests add to the all-round appeal of this commuter model.

Bonus features include the Hiboy app, which allows users to customize speed and cruise control and also provides a secure remote locking function. Meanwhile, the regenerative battery harnesses excess kinetic energy from both downhill rides and braking, adding to the longevity of each charge. The scooter also features LED headlights, taillights, and sidelights, plus a water-resistance rating of IP54.

Best budget: GoTrax GXL V2

GoTrax makes one of the best electric scooters at a budget-friendly price.

GoTrax

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The GoTrax GXL V2 is affordable, water-resistant, folds easily, and competes with higher-priced models on numerous fronts.

Specs

  • Weight: 26.98 pounds
  • Range: 12 miles
  • Max speed: 15.5 mph

Pros

  • Pneumatic wheels
  • Front and rear disc brakes
  • Greater range than most at this price point
  • Lightweight frame that folds

Cons

  • Lower top speed than some competitors

While the GXL V2’s price sits just above the most economical of entry-level models, it stands out for its sheer functionality. It’s light, has an impressive range at 12.5 miles per charge, and its essential features, including a simple, vibrant visual display and an anti-lock dual braking system, are effective and efficient. In some departments, it punches well above its price range, as GoTrax has found a way to build pneumatic tires and disc brakes into a scooter under $300.

It also carries an IPX4 water-resistance rating, which means it is protected from water splashes from any direction. It can handle a little rain, but you won’t want to leave it in inclement weather for too long. It also has air-filled tires instead of solid rubber so that it can generate more traction on slick asphalt.

Naturally, at this price point, certain features are missing, the most prominent being the lack of suspension, meaning those traveling routes in need of maintenance may need to upgrade their choice for a smoother ride. Users favoring portability, though, may see the upside of this omission as a weight-saving opportunity.

Things to consider when buying an electric scooter

Getting around on an electric scooter can save you time and money and be a lot more fun than public transportation. It could also have “positive effects in terms of environmental sustainability.” But to find the model that’s best for you, you should weigh the following factors:

Personal preferences

The first thing to consider when buying an electric scooter is your personal needs and preferences. Fairweather weekend riders may prioritize budget over build quality, while commuters will require a reliable, safe, and possibly water-resistant model. Aesthetic concerns are also worth considering, especially given the spectrum of available designs, from the hefty and unwieldy to the slim and elegant. Commuters may also prefer models that fold up neatly and can be stowed in the corner of an office or taken on public transportation.

Safety

We recommend that all riders consider the safety features of their ultimate purchase. It’s also important to know your local laws regarding the use of electric scooters. Riders who intend to travel at night should ensure their vehicle is equipped with adequate lighting. Some models include app-based remote locking functions, while high-quality displays and tires that can achieve considerable traction may also contribute to owner safety.

Price

The increase in popularity of electric scooters has seen a dramatic rise in available models and, thus, a broad price spectrum. While it is always tempting to opt for the most revered and equipped models on the market, it may make sense for some riders to look into budget options that offer exceptional value for money while still comfortably meeting their rider’s requirements.

FAQs

Q: How much does an electric scooter cost?

Electric scooters vary tremendously in price. Budget models can be found for less than $200, while a top-of-the-range vehicle can easily exceed $1,000 and beyond.

Q: How long does an electric scooter last?

The longevity of an electric scooter is dependent on many factors: intended use, build quality, weather, and rider maintenance. On average, electric scooters can be expected to last between three and five years, or 3,000 to 10,000 miles traveled.

Q: Which brand of electric scooter is best?

Segway has history on its side and continues to excel in an increasingly crowded field. Newcomers are carving niches in the market, though, with brands like GoTrax specializing in budget-friendly options and UNAGI setting the standard for streamlined aesthetics.

Q: What are the disadvantages of electric scooters?

The biggest potential drawback of any electric scooter is unreliable or non-existent safety features, with inadequate lights or brakes being particular areas of concern in models we felt unable to recommend here. Specialized vehicles may forgo certain features in favor of budget, weight, or aesthetics, in which case perceived advantages and disadvantages depend on the individual rider and their demands. For example, leisure riders may deem the Segway Ninebot MAX Original’s range per charge and solid build as surplus to their needs, rendering its price too high.

Final thoughts on the best electric scooters

Electric scooters are undeniably part of the mainstream, appealing to commuters and leisure riders alike for their speedy performance, efficiency, and capacity to be unfolded and ridden at any moment. Our selected models excelled either in specific areas or—as in the case of the Segway Ninebot MAX Original and GoTrax GXL V2—surpassed their peers across the board at their respective price points. First things first, though, decide when, where, and how you plan to ride.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best electric scooters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best bird feeders of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-bird-feeders/ Thu, 06 May 2021 11:36:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=281081
best bird feeders
Elvis Bueno, Unsplash

The best bird feeders are sure to attract beautiful, feathery flocks.

The post The best bird feeders of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best bird feeders
Elvis Bueno, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best for hummingbirds red antique glass bird feeder Perky-Pet 8116-2 Red
SEE IT

This affordable and antique-inspired pick will attract hummingbirds to your yard with its nectar reservoir.
Best window see through bird feeder Nature Gear Window Bird Feeder
SEE IT

Get a glimpse of nature up-close with this see-through window adhesive pick.
Best squirrel-proof bird feeder with clever design Droll Yankees YF-M Yankee Flipper
SEE IT

Avoid your bird feed being eaten by pesky squirrels with slim and impenetrable design.

Birds are fascinating wildlife and endlessly enjoyable to watch. The best bird feeders will not only help support the local bird population, but they will also bring these delightful animals into your yard and into your trees, making bird watching possible from the comfort of your home. Feeders can be especially useful to birds in the late winter and early spring when their natural food sources are scarce. With so many feeders on the market, we’ll explain the differences and help you find a beautiful, durable feeder sure to bring you hours of viewing enjoyment. 

How we picked the best bird feeders

Narrowing down the best bird feeders requires you to consider the types of bird species you want to attract, the frequency of maintenance that is realistic for you, your overall budget, and the best location around your home. Backyard bird enthusiasts know that adding a feeder will not only attract birds, but any other wildlife that thinks they can steal a quick meal. If squirrels are a concern for you, consider a squirrel-proof bird feeder. Nectar-style bird feeders should be drip-proof to prevent unwanted ants and bees. 

Picking the perfect location will also affect how you shop. A bird feeder pole can be installed anywhere, while hanging style feeders require either a tree branch or another structure to allow for hook installation. Choosing a location that will keep your birds safe is important as well: low feeders near bushes can set birds up to be attacked by cats, while hanging feeders too far away from cover can endanger birds from other predators such as hawks. If you want to try and get the closest view you can for birdwatching, consider a window bird feeder which uses a translucent design suction cupped to your window. We’ve selected the best bird feeders on the market for your consideration.

The best bird feeders: Reviews & Recommendations

Attracting birds to your backyard can require some thought, but the payoffs for both kids and experienced bird watchers are immense. Here are the best bird feeders for a variety of situations you may encounter.

Best for hummingbirds: Perky-Pet 8116-2 Red

red antique glass bird feeder

Perky-Pet

SEE IT

If you want to get the chance to view one of nature’s most amazing small birds zipping around, hovering, or even flying backward (they are the only birds that can), you can add a hummingbird feeder to your yard. The best hummingbird feeders are brightly colored (evidence suggests bright red, yellow, and orange feeders work best),  easy to fill with nectar, and offer a drip- and leak-proof design that only a hummingbird can reach. 

This antique-looking hummingbird feeder comes in several vibrant colors, and holds a sizable 24 ounces of nectar. It’s easy to fill and screw on, although the small opening does require the use of a bottle brush for deep cleaning. Take care when cleaning, as this bottle is actually clear glass that is painted to attract more birds.

Best window: Nature Gear Window Bird Feeder

see through bird feeder

Nature Gear

SEE IT

Take the squinting and the binoculars out of the equation, and bring the birds to you with the best window bird feeder. Window bird feeders are typically constructed out of clear acrylic and mount directly to your window with suction cups. There really is no closer way to attract birds, other than the birds being inside your home (which we don’t recommend). 

Strong suction cups keep this charming acrylic window bird feeder attached securely to your windows. The feeding tray and house detach for easier cleaning. A circular cutout helps to increase the visibility of birds from inside your home. 

Best for cardinals: Perky-Pet Red Cardinal Bird Feeder

red cardinal bird feeder

Perky-Pet

SEE IT

If you’re interested in attracting colorful, non-migratory species, consider a cardinal bird feeder. These colorful birds are some of the most awe-inspiring and beautiful species in nature. Local cardinal populations will benefit from the extra food in a feeder particularly in the fall and winter months when their food sources are scarce. 

This feeder holds up to 2.5 pounds of black-oil sunflower seeds, a favorite snack for cardinals. The circular perch design lets cardinals sit and rest while they snack, and the red-on-red color protects, by helping them blend in. A special zinc-plated finish makes this metal design more durable and resistant to rust.

Best squirrel-proof: Droll Yankees YF-M Yankee Flipper

bird feeder with clever design

Droll Yankees

SEE IT

There’s a reason why there are so many cartoon scenes about this— it can be downright comical to watch how many inventive ways squirrels come up with to steal food from bird feeders. While amusing, depending on your level of seriousness at attracting birds, it’s important to find a good squirrel-proof bird feeder.

Easy to assemble, this squirrel-proof bird feeder uses weight detection to start spinning the feeder sending any squirrels that make it on, right off again. This squirrel-spinning bird feeder can hold up to five pounds of birdseed and offers four feeding ports.

Best budget: First Nature 3055 32-ounce Hummingbird Feeder

red budget bird feeder

First Nature

SEE IT

Luckily, it doesn’t have to cost a lot of money to feed your neighborhood birds. There are many budget-priced bird feeders on the market that are well-rated and attractive. This is a simple, well-reviewed, affordable hummingbird feeder. This feeder features an extra-wide mouth which makes the reservoir easy to fill and clean, and it can hold up to 32 ounces of nectar.

Things to consider before purchasing a bird feeder

What birds do you want to attract?

Hummingbirds spend their lives searching and consuming food. In fact, they need to drink nectar every ten minutes to maintain their fast metabolism. You can make your own nectar at home using granulated sugar and water, or buy a premade nectar. Hummingbirds can visit 1,000 to 2,000 flowers a day in search of their food, which means that regardless of where the nectar comes from, they will be grateful for the easy energy from a well-stocked feeder. Known for their amazing memories, hummingbirds are able to remember nectar locations and may pay a visit to your feeder during their migrations. 

To make your yard a hummingbird’s paradise, garden experts advise luring the birds with nectar-producing flowers, either planted in the ground or in pots and planters. Once in your yard, they will discover your feeder and will be sure to remember their new feeding spot. It’s best to keep your feeder in the partial shade to avoid any spoiling of nectar. To keep ants and bees at bay, keep the exterior of the feeder clean and dry, and give it a wash every one to two weeks with warm soap and water.

Cardinals are most attracted to food sources that are easy and safe for them to access. A cardinal feeder is typically a cylindrical tube (which is either hung up, or supported from below), or a rectangular style, which includes a wide trough at the base filled with seeds. Platform bird feeders are another option, but these can become overwhelmed with other types of birds as well. Stock your cardinal bird feeder with fresh sunflower seeds to make your red beauties happy and healthy.

Build quality

The best window bird feeders are lightweight, just large enough to house your feeding bluebird, and constructed out of good-quality clear acrylic. Look for window feeders that have a pitched roof design to provide shelter from snow and rain. Another important feature is a feeding tray that includes drainage holes. If any water enters the feeder, it will drain away, which will help prevent the seeds from spoiling. 

Most window bird feeders are not designed to be squirrel-proof, so if that’s a concern you may need to experiment with different windows and heights to try and prevent these crafty critters from leaping or dangling onto the window feeder for stolen snacks. Window bird feeders are usually affordable, and a fun way to experiment with bird watching. Reviewers rave about how much children and house cats enjoy these as well. 

Tired of squirrels stealing your bird seed?

Squirrel-proof bird feeders use a few methods to deter squirrels. Some utilize a simple, metal-made tube feeder with chew-resistant enclosures. Another solution can be pole-mounted feeders, which should be a minimum of six feet off the ground, and far enough away from jump-off points that squirrels can use to leap onto the feeder. Finally, some squirrel-proof bird feeders have an engineered design which uses weight detection, so if a squirrel stands on the feeder the seed port immediately closes. All of these options should help keep your bird feeder safe for only birds.

Looking to attract birds without spending a lot of money?

When it comes to features, you can expect more cost-conscious feeders to be constructed out of less expensive materials like plastic. Also expect the size and capacity to be smaller for budget feeders.

The majority of the best bird feeders for hummingbirds (outside of handmade fancy specialty items) are very reasonable in price, as are the majority of small window feeders. Hanging feeders range from very inexpensive to high priced. The good news is there are a lot of options and especially if this is a new hobby, it can make sense to start off small and see if you enjoy owning, viewing, and maintaining bird feeders in your garden before you invest in the more expensive models.

FAQs

Q: How do I choose a bird feeder?

When choosing a bird feeder, you should consider the type of local birds you are trying to attract to your yard. Certain species prefer specific types of feeders, and will be most likely to visit your yard if you accommodate their preference. For example, sparrows and cardinals are likely to visit ground feeders, while suet feeders are popular with chickadees and woodpeckers. If you are trying to attract hummingbirds, they require a special feeder which dispenses their favorite energy source—nectar. If you want a variety, you can always consider adding a couple of different types of bird feeders.

Q: Are bird feeders good for birds?

Bird feeders are good for birds, as long as you install the feeder in a safe location and offer a fresh, healthy blend of seeds. Bird feeders are especially useful during the times of the year when birds’ natural seed sources are limited like late winter/early spring. It isn’t necessary to feed birds in the summer, although you still can if you enjoy their twittering company year-round.  Safe locations for bird feeders are far enough away from predators, but close enough to another natural shelter that they can take cover if needed. 

Q: What food do birds like the most?

Birds love seeds, grains, and nuts such as black-oil sunflower seeds, white proso millet, peanuts, suet cakes (a mixture that includes beef fat), nyjer seed and cracked corn. While it’s common to see bread crumbs thrown for birds, this is not a good food source for birds as it doesn’t provide adequate nutrients. The humane society advises avoiding chocolate (it is toxic for birds) as well as table scraps which can attract rats.

Our final thoughts on the best bird feeders

The best bird feeders will attract fascinating birds into your yard, while helping your local bird populations thrive. Whether you wish to bring hummingbirds, cardinals, or a variety of local birds to your home, the best feeders will allow for safe, comfortable feeding and keep birdseed fresh. With options in size, color, style, and price, there’s no reason not to start birding right from your own window.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best bird feeders of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best grill covers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-grill-covers/ Mon, 07 Aug 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=561438
The best grill covers will help your protect your grill from the elements.

Protect your grill from the elements and during the off months with the help of these durable covering.

The post The best grill covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best grill covers will help your protect your grill from the elements.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Weber makes some of the best grill covers. Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II
SEE IT

Made of durable waterproof and UV-resistant canvas, this grill cover is an ideal option for compatible grills.
Best heavy-duty Grillman makes the best grill cover that's almost rip-proof. iCOVER Grill Cover 50in, 600D Grill Cover
SEE IT

Blowing debris and powerful storms won’t affect the heavy-duty durability of this grill cover.
Best budget Tvird makes one of the best grill covers at a budget-friendly price. TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof
SEE IT

This affordable, waterproof grill cover is ideal for protecting small grills.

When the smell of cooking hot dogs and hamburgers is wafting through the air, a grill cover may be the last thing on your mind. But grills are vulnerable to rusting and corrosion caused by rain, sleet, snow, and hot, humid air, so a cover is a must if you want that same satisfaction for multiple seasons. Grills can also be susceptible to UV radiation damage and blowing sand, dirt, and other debris, so it’s important to keep the grill properly protected with thick, durable material to preserve and extend the grill’s life. Here are our recommendations for the best grill covers to keep your grill in good working order for many years to come.

How we chose the best grill covers

Grilling on the porch or patio is a favorite pastime that has led to our team having years of experience with grills, grill tools, and regular grill maintenance. We compiled this list of top products using this extensive experience and a significant amount of product research that focused on selecting the top grill covers from over 30 different options.

Key considerations during the research and selection process included the size, material, maintenance requirements, protective qualities, and any special features that made a product stand out from competitors. The selected products fell into several different size categories to provide a suitable range representing the grill cover sizes that are typically available. This list also includes polyester and canvas grill covers but left vinyl options out due to their propensity for drying, cracking, and fading.

Most grill covers that were considered could be maintained relatively easily with semi-regular cleaning, but we also looked for products that were capable of providing top-level protection against rain, sun, and debris. Some special features that were noted included built-in pockets, vents, and secure straps to ensure that the grill cover would not be blown off of the grill during a storm.

The best grill covers: Reviews & Recommendations

Grill covers should fit comfortably over the entire grill without stretching out the material, but the cover should not be so big that it actually touches the ground. So whether you prefer gas grills or charcoal grills, a cover is an essential grill accessory.

Best overall: Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II

Weber makes some of the best grill covers.

Weber

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Equipped with Velcro fastening straps, this durable grill cover can keep your grill safe during strong storms.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined polyester
  • Dimensions: 48 x 17.7 x 42 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, weather-resistant, UV-resistant

Pros

  • Built-in UV inhibitors
  • Fastening straps to secure the grill cover
  • Breathable fabric for increased ventilation
  • Weather-resistant PVC coating

Cons

  • Custom design may not fit all grills

Weber has long been known for producing superior grills and grill accessories, including tools, thermostats, and covers, so it shouldn’t be surprising that this durable product is a top option for individuals with a Weber Spirit II grill. This cover measures 48 inches wide by 17.7 inches deep by 42 inches high and will properly cover most grills that fall within these measurements. However, it should be noted that this grill cover is custom-made for Weber grills, so the cover may not fit all grills, depending on the side table’s shape. 

The Velcro fastening straps can help to secure the cover for a tighter fit or to keep it from flying away during a storm. This grill cover is made with breathable polyester fabric that has been treated with a weather-resistant PVC coating to ensure that the grill cover can protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. It can also shield the grill from harmful UV radiation due to built-in UV inhibitors that slow discoloration and block UV rays.

Best heavy-duty: iCOVER Grill Cover 50in, 600D Grill Cover

iCover makes the best grill cover that's heavy-duty.

iCover

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Two built-in handles and adjustable straps help to secure the sturdy, heavy-duty oxford canvas and ensure the grill remains protected in clear, overcast, or stormy weather.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined oxford canvas
  • Dimensions: 50 x  22 x 40 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-resistant, UV-resistant, side handles

Pros

  • Fastening straps and handles to help secure the grill cover
  • Heavy-duty PVC-lined oxford canvas construction
  • Concealed air vent to reduce moisture accumulation
  • Multiple sizes available

Cons

  • Custom-fit for top brands, may not fit some grills

To protect your grill from the elements, it’s important to invest in a durable product that can withstand harsh conditions without tearing or leaking. The iCOVER grill cover is made with UV-resistant oxford canvas material that is specifically designed for enduring tough weather so the grill can remain safe. It has an interior PVC coating that waterproofs the material, while the oxford canvas resists tears, rips, and other damage to the exterior.

The grill cover is designed with built-in handles for better control while putting the cover on or taking it off, and it has fastening straps to ensure that the cover will not be blown away during a bad storm. This version measures 50 inches wide by 22 inches deep by 40 inches high, though this product is also available in six alternate sizes. However, this grill cover is designed for Weber, Char-Broil, Nexgrill, and Brinkmann grills, so it may not fit some lesser-known grill brands.

Best rip-proof: Grillman Premium (58-Inch) BBQ Grill Cover

Grillman makes the best grill cover that's almost rip-proof.

Grillman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With adjustable fastening straps and weather-resistant construction, the durable, rip-proof canvas grill cover is ideal for larger grills.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined oxford canvas
  • Dimensions: 58 x 24 x 48 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-proof, UV-resistant

Pros

  • Rip-proof material and stitching
  • Adjustable fastening straps
  • Multiple sizes available

Cons

  • Grill cover may hang on the ground with shorter grills

This Grillman grill cover is made with premium oxford canvas with an interior PVC lining to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. The canvas exterior is resistant to UV rays, but the material and even the stitching are rip-proof, making this grill cover a great choice for yards with a lot of blowing debris. It’s equipped with adjustable fastening straps that help to secure the grill cover during powerful storms. Just put the cover on the grill and tighten the straps to the desired tautness, then secure the hook-and-loop Velcro straps.

Intended to be used with large grills, the cover measures 58 inches wide by 24 inches deep by 48 inches high. Unfortunately, this means that the grill cover may hang on the ground if used with smaller grills, which can lead to an increase in moisture accumulation, mold, and mildew growth. However, the grill cover comes in six different sizes, so a more suitable size may be available.

Best adjustable: Classic Accessories Veranda Water-Resistant Grill Cover

Classic Accessories make the best grill covers that are adjustable.

Classic Accessories

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A built-in storage pocket, handle, air vents, elastic hem cord, and adjustable click-close straps give the user a range of features and functions for more effective grill protection.

Specs

  • Material: PVC-lined polyester
  • Dimensions: 52 x 24 x 44 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, UV-resistant, handle

Pros

  • Bound seams increase water resistance
  • Adjustable fastening straps and elastic hem cord
  • Built-in storage pocket, handles, and vents

Cons

  • Vulnerable to ripping and tearing damage

The Classic Accessories grill cover is equipped with adjustable fastening straps with strong plastic click-close buckles to ensure the cover will not slip off the grill once it is secured. This grill cover also has an elastic hem cord that can be tightened around the base of the grill to prevent the cover from sliding and to shield the grill from water that may splash up from the ground. It measures 52 inches wide by 24 deep by 44 inches high and is made with waterproof PVC-lined polyester to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow.

The grill cover has integrated vents to improve ventilation and reduce moisture accumulation. It’s also made with a built-in pocket on the front of the cover where accessories, like grill gloves, can be kept safe when the grill is not being used. Padded handles in the top of the cover make it easier to put on or take off. Still, the polyester material isn’t as durable as canvas, leaving the cover susceptible to ripping and tearing damage from blowing debris and careless users.

Best budget: TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof Grill Cover

Tvird makes one of the best grill covers at a budget-friendly price.

Tvird

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Designed with built-in side handles, Velcro fastening straps, and a drawstring to tighten the base, this affordable grill cover is easy to put on but difficult for high winds to dislodge.

Specs

  • Material: Oxford canvas with PVC coating
  • Dimensions: 30 x 26 x 43 inches
  • Protective Capabilities: Waterproof, rip-proof, UV-resistant, side handles

Pros

  • Built-in side handles
  • Fastening straps for a more secure fit
  • Durable, rip-proof canvas
  • Waterproof PVC coating

Cons

  • Small size isn’t suitable for larger grills

The TVIRD grill cover is a premium quality product available at an affordable price because it has a relatively compact size that isn’t suitable for larger grills. However, users with a small grill will get excellent protection from the thick, durable oxford canvas grill cover treated with a PVC coating to increase weather resistance. In fact, this coating makes the grill cover waterproof and resistant to UV radiation, protecting the grill from corrosion, rusting, and discoloration.

The thick canvas material is rip-proof, but it also serves as an insulating layer that helps keep the grill safe during the freezing winter months. It measures 30 inches wide by 26 inches deep by 43 inches high and comes with a storage bag to keep the cover safe and pest-free while the grill is in use. Two large side handles make it easier to put the grill cover on and take it off, though the Velcro fastening straps and the drawstring base can keep the grill cover secure, even during strong winds.

Things to consider before buying a grill cover

When you’re deciding on the best grill cover to protect the grill from inclement weather, it’s key to learn about the most important product factors to select a product that suits your needs. A little extra time considering the size, material, maintenance requirements, and protection capabilities of the grill cover will help you make the right choice.

Size

The reason to have a grill cover is to protect the grill by covering it when it’s not being used. The cover should prevent rain, sleet, snow, and UV radiation from damaging the grill, but for this to occur, it needs to be the right size. If the cover is too small, it won’t be able to fit over the top of the grill, leaving it exposed to the elements. However, it’s also important that the grill cover isn’t too big because the sides and bottom of the cover will hang on the ground, trapping moisture and creating an ideal environment for mold and mildew growth.

The grill cover should completely cover the top and sides of the grill, but it should hang about one or two inches from the ground to allow for proper ventilation. To ensure you invest in the right grill cover, measure your grill from top to bottom and side to side with the side table or side burner fully extended. With these measurements in hand, it will be easier to select an appropriate grill cover, though you may also want to look for custom products that are made specifically for the make and model of your grill. Many grill cover manufacturers design the cover to fit popular models, so you may be able to find an exact match.

Material

The three primary materials commonly used to make grill covers are vinyl, polyester, and canvas. While each material affords the grill some protection, each option has benefits and shortcomings.

Vinyl grill covers are naturally waterproof, so they will provide a substantial amount of protection from rain. Keep in mind, though, that thin vinyl grill covers are prone to drying and cracking under the hot sun, so this material may not be the best for protecting the grill from UV radiation. Also, when the vinyl begins to crack, it exposes the grill to rain, sleet, and snow. That said, these grill covers do tend to be more affordable than canvas options.

Polyester is the most popular material for grill covers because it is affordable and durable, helping to protect the grill for years before needing to be replaced. While polyester isn’t inherently waterproof, it is typically treated with a PVC layer that is designed to resist water, UV radiation, and debris. However, polyester is more susceptible to tearing than thick, canvas grill covers.

Canvas is primarily used to make premium or high-end grill covers, so users can expect to pay a higher price for these products. However, the premium price is well worth it due to the thick, durable construction that’s resistant to rain, sleet, snow, UV radiation, dirt, dust, sand, and other debris. This material can also withstand high- and low-temperature extremes instead of drying and cracking under the hot sun or after being frozen during the winter months.

Protection

Anyone can throw a simple sheet or tarp over a grill to try and keep rain and sun from damaging the metal, but that doesn’t mean that the grill is properly protected. Instead, invest in a grill cover in a size that’s specifically designed for the purpose of protecting the grill. Research grill cover products and consider the various protection capabilities offered by each in order to find the right cover for your grill.

UV-resistant coatings prevent grill cover cracking and fading, while also protecting the grill from extended exposure to the sun. Waterproof coatings keep rain, sleet, and snow from reaching the grill but can also prevent water accumulation outside and inside the grill cover.

Rip-proof grill covers are made with thick, durable material that resists tearing damage. These covers are great for homes with inexperienced users that may be too rough when removing or replacing the cover.

Air vents can be built into the grill cover to increase airflow and reduce water accumulation.

Handles may not seem like they offer a lot of protection, but having one or more handles on a cover does reduce the likelihood of accidentally tearing the cover while removing or replacing it because the handles give the user a purpose-built area to grab and manipulate the cover.

FAQs

Q: How much does a grill cover cost?

The cost of a grill cover depends on the materials it’s made out of, its size, and the protection it provides. A durable custom model from a well-known brand, such as the Weber 7138 Premium Cover Spirit II, costs about $83. A more basic affordable option like the TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover 30-inch Waterproof Grill Cover will run you just $15. The other options on this list are in the $30 to $40 range.

Q: What material is best for a grill cover?

Grill covers are made of several different materials, including vinyl, polyester, and canvas, though the best material for a grill cover is thick, durable, waterproof, and UV-resistant canvas. Canvas grill covers do come at a higher price, but the trade-off is superior grill protection.

Q: Are all grill covers waterproof?

One of the main reasons to have a grill cover is to protect the grill from rain, sleet, and snow. That’s why most grill covers are either made with a waterproof material or are treated with a waterproof PVC coating to ensure that the grill is properly protected against the elements.

Q: Is it better to cover a grill or leave it uncovered?

Although a grill can remain uncovered after use, you should use a grill cover to preserve and protect the grill. Remember, the paint on a grill is vulnerable to peeling and chipping when it is regularly left exposed to the sun, wind, and rain. Once the paint begins to peel, the metal construction is significantly more vulnerable to rusting and corrosion, so it’s better to cover the grill after it has cooled down.

Q: Should a grill cover touch the ground?

Wanting to protect a grill properly may encourage some users to find a grill cover that completely encloses the grill from the top to the bottom. However, the grill cover is actually supposed to end a few inches from the bottom of the grill, and it should not be touching the ground. This gap at the bottom of the cover increases air circulation to prevent water accumulation, which can lead to mold and mildew growth.

Final thoughts on choosing the best grill cover

All the options on our list will help protect your grill from the elements. The thick, durable construction of the Weber 7138 Grill Cover makes this product an excellent choice to keep the grill properly protected. However, the TVIRD BBQ Grill Cover is a more affordable choice that comes with many of the same protective qualities for a smaller grill.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best grill covers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hydroelectric-generators/ Sat, 29 Jul 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559517
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

These surprisingly powerful devices can turn the power of running water into current.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Waterlilly turbine
Waterlily

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best portable waterlily turbine WaterLily Turbine
SEE IT

This model is small enough to carry with you into the wild.
Best overall Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine
SEE IT

This reliable model can power a small home all on its own.
Best budget Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator Water 12V DC 10W Micro Hydro Water Charging Tool Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator
SEE IT

Install it on your pipes and get up to 10W of power.

Hydroelectric generators produce electricity by harnessing the force of running water. This may seem like a novelty or impractical for home use, but you’d be surprised. While hydropower—or the use of the kinetic energy of running water to generate power—has been in use since ancient times, it is most associated these days with massive industrial damming projects, like the Oahe Dam and the Hoover Dam in the United States. But, hydropower can exist on an extremely small scale.

The benefits are obvious: you can generate power from an available resource—running water (with some models, even the water in your home’s pipes). In addition to possibly lowering your energy bills, allowing you to run additional electrical equipment, and potentially providing other benefits, utilizing hydro can take the pressure off the electricity grid, provide electricity if living off-the-grid, and offer backup power in the event of a blackout. Regarding sustainability, generating your own hydropower can reduce your use of fossil fuels and, consequently, your carbon footprint. According to the Department of Energy, about 7 percent of the nation’s electricity (and 37 percent of its renewable electricity) comes from hydropower—but with your own generator, you may be able to help those numbers grow, even slightly. Better yet, unlike large-scale hydroelectric projects, which can be extremely damaging to river ecology, small-scale hydro has relatively minimal effects on the immediate environment. Here are our picks for the best hydroelectric generators.

How we chose the best hydroelectric generators

We looked through about a dozen models to find the top hydroelectric generators. Admittedly, there aren’t a ton of options in the middle. There are a few larger-scale, ultimately stationary models that require a good amount of flow but can usually power a home, as well as tiny models that are best for producing small amounts of power. But we did find a couple of relevant models that—while maybe not meeting all your power needs—can provide extra energy and are particularly useful in a camping or off-grid setting. 

When purchasing a hydroelectric generator, sustainability is primarily in the concept: if you have running water near you, you can access a freely available resource to produce, potentially, a lot of electricity. Again, unlike with massive industrial hydro projects, effects near you should be minimal, and you can take pressure off the grid or other less sustainable energy sources. If you want to get deeply technical about it, you can calculate hydropower that you produce, and compare it to grid power, estimating both the relative cost and carbon impact of the energy you use.

The best hydroelectric generators: Recommendations & Reviews

If you’re on this page, then you likely know exactly what you’re looking for because these are somewhat complex machines that require lots of infrastructure to go with them. We’ve selected the best to fit specific uses, but products always overlap.

Best overall: Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine

Scott Hydro 1500W Water Turbine

Scott Hydro

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is an extremely well-built machine that—even with low head—can reliably power a small home with steady water flow.

Specs

  • Rated at 1500W output (but can reach 2000W)
  • Largely self-cleaning
  • Made in USA

Pros

  • Provides ample power
  • Very sturdy

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Additional components required

If you live near a decent, steady source of running water, this high-quality machine can, once installed, probably provide consistent power for your home year-round. Your electricity bills will be negligible, you will not have to worry about the weather (as you do for solar or wind power), and you can sustainably produce consistent electricity with limited environmental impact.

ABS Alaskan, the maker of this machine, has been making high-quality alternative energy devices for over 30 years, geared toward the conditions in Alaska—a state with over 12,000 rivers—but applicable all over. The Scott Hydro Turbine, with a 1500-watt output, can almost certainly provide the energy you need for your home. While it requires a steady flow of water, it only needs a 20-foot drop in “head” (a term explained in our “Things to consider …” section near the bottom)—relatively small given the power provided. Once installed, it’s very easy to maintain—it is effectively self-cleaning, using the water flow, with only three rotating components.

On the con side, these units are pricey, and installation does take some work, requiring a relatively simple water diversion and a small shelter to protect the unit. You’ll also need an electric connection kit, not to mention batteries (if intending to store power). But once it’s up and running, it can provide lasting, sustainable power for years.

Best value: Energy Systems and Design Watter Buddy

Energy Systems and Design Watter Buddy

Energy Systems and Design

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a modest price and small size, the Watter Buddy can provide a non-insubstantial 200W of power.

Specs

  • Type: Generates DC power via rectifier
  • Weight: 8 lbs

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Multiple nozzle sizes provided to match flow

Cons

  • Likely cannot provide all your power needs

The Watter Buddy is an innovative machine from Energy Systems and Design, a Canadian company providing off-grid hydro solutions for four decades. While the company produces a couple of larger (and more expensive models), the Watter Buddy meets you in the middle. For a modest price, it can provide a considerable amount—though probably not all—of your power needs. But don’t discount 200W. Whether you need supplementary off-grid power, are looking for electricity for a small workshop, or have other relevant needs, with steady water flow, this machine can do a lot—potentially lessening your reliance on a traditional electric generator. And you don’t have to be off-grid—this can even be effectively used with traditional household pipes.

This product is convenient in a few other ways. Multiple nozzle sizes allow you to match the flow you use to generate power easily. A built-in rectifier converts from AC to DC power, allowing electricity produced to be easily sent to batteries or compatible devices. Finally, its very small size allows you to move it around conveniently as needed.

Best portable: WaterLily Turbine

waterlily turbine

WaterLily

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The WaterLily Turbine is easy to set up and use anywhere you can access running water, providing charge capabilities for both 12V and USB devices.

Specs

  • Produces up to 2A (on 12V output); or up to 3A (via USB output)
  • 10 ft. charge cord
  • 1 km/h minimum water flow required

Pros

  • Can charge cellphones, battery banks, lights, and more
  • Under 3 lbs.

Cons

  • Likely can’t provide for all power needs

For something easily transportable but extremely reliable, check out the WaterLily Turbine. This innovative little device can be set up virtually anywhere you have running water, producing (at highest power) up to 15 W. With good flow, a small device (cellphone, camera, etc.) should charge at roughly the same rate as it would if plugged into a traditional wall outlet. The WaterLily also offers unique accessories, including its WindLily attachment, which allows you to convert the device to harvest wind energy, and its SolarLily panels, which allows for a solar harvesting component.

In terms of sustainability, again, a small hydroelectric generator has the virtue of harnessing natural flow with minimal ecological impacts. According to the company, using a WaterLily can provide the equivalent power of 50 AA batteries in a day. The company also looks to promote its values by collaborating with organizations that help deploy WaterLily turbines in the developing world.

Best budget: Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator

Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator Water 12V DC 10W Micro Hydro Water Charging Tool

Yosoo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For a very affordable price, this small Yosoo generator reliably generates up to 10 W of power and can be used on your household pipes.

Specs

  • 12V, 10W output
  • 3.2 oz
  • Made in China

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Reliable, steady

Cons

  • Provides very limited power

The Yosoo DC Water Turbine Generator is a small, handy device that neatly hooks up to the pipes in your home. For an extremely affordable price, you can use water that, in most cases, should flow through your pipes anyway to generate a little extra electricity. It’s not useful for big devices, but it can provide additional capacity for lightning, charging for phones or other devices, or similar uses that require comparable power.

While this generator may not make a huge difference if you’re tied into the grid, it can be very handy if you live off-grid, where every little bit of power matters. Keep some lights on, charge up your phone or radio, or fulfill other needs based on existing water flow. 

Best lightweight: Beduan Micro Water Turbine Generator

Beduan Micro Water Turbine Generator

Beduan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is another small, inexpensive, and simple option that can provide some extra power in your home.

Specs

  • 3.17 oz
  • 12 V, 10 W
  • 0.5” G thread

Pros

  • Very light
  • Affordable
  • Easy to install

Cons

  • Provides limited power
  • Can be noisy

This small device from Beduan provides another handy way to generate a little extra power from water running through a pipe, like a shower or through a hose. Its recommended water flow for full power is about 26 L/min, and with 10 W, you can provide a little extra power to charge a small device or power a light. While that certainly won’t be enough to run your washing machine or fridge, it can still be helpful—again, especially in off-grid situations, where power may be limited.

In practice, this little device from Beduan can make a handy addendum to your stock of energy-efficient tech. It makes up for its limitations by being both extremely affordable, as well as lightweight and easy to install.

Best off-grid: PowerSpout TRG

PowerSpout-TRG

PowerSprout

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a high-caliber model that comes in high-head, medium-head, and low-head options, with the capacity to provide substantial off-grid power.

Specs

  • Head range is 6.6 to 100 feet
  • Maximum flow 254 gpm
  • 16.9×16.1×13.8”

Pros

  • Customizable to different types of flows
  • Relatively affordable given power provided

Cons

  • Can be challenging to set up

PowerSpout is a New Zealand-based company that offers an assortment of hydroelectric generators. We’ve linked to their medium-head option here, but they also make a high-head and low-head model. This variety is great, allowing you to carefully select the right model for your given conditions. Bear in mind, though, that setup can be tricky, and it is best to buy from a dealer.

The PowerSpout TRG is a high-quality machine that—for a pretty modest price—can generate 1.6 kW daily with adequate flow. The company even notes that “stacking” units is an option for generating additional power. The turbine will come with pretty much everything you need for setup, and by ordering from a dealer, you can go over your system specs to be sure you are prepared to easily get it up and running. While these are ideal for off-grid setups, they can be ordered such that the system voltage can easily be tied into the grid. In short, a great model for all situations.

Best small: Suneco 500W Hydro Turbine

Suneco 500W Hydro Turbine

Suneco

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If your water flow has decent head, this fairly small turbine can produce a decent amount of power that can cut down your electricity budget or provide extra off-grid power.

Specs

  • Rated for 12-18 m. head
  • Output: 500 W
  • Weight: 27 kgs.

Pros

  • Consistent, fairly substantial power
  • Good safety protection

Cons

  • Requires considerable head to generate power

Suneco Hydro has been developing micro hydro turbines since 1991—and they have several options. The 500W hydro turbine is a modest size that slots in right in the middle; it’s not too large or expensive but is substantial enough to make a difference in terms of power provided.

This particular model, weighing in at 27 kgs., is small enough that you can most likely set it up yourself. While it requires a somewhat considerable 12 m. of head to generate power, if you have the setting for it, it can make a great option for an on or off-grid property. However, it should be noted that Suneco Hydro is based in China, which can mean longer shipping times, and may potentially involve more challenges when working with customer service.

What to consider when shopping for a hydroelectric generator

Many factors go into choosing the ideal hydroelectric generator. How bulky is the generator? Is it portable? How much water does it require to run? How much power does it generate? Where can it be run? Can you set it up yourself? Depending on your needs—whether you want it for the home, a workshop, or for use when out in the backcountry—you will probably hone in on particular products.

Size

Hydropower comes in many sizes. According to the Bureau of Reclamation, for instance, the Hoover Dam generates 4 billion kilowatt-hours annually. On the far opposite end of the spectrum is pico hydro, which can generate up to 5 kW of electricity. The next most substantial type of hydro is micro hydropower, which generates up to 100 kW of electricity. (Hydropower continues up in size after that—encompassing mini hydro, which produces 100 kW to 1 MW of electricity, small hydro, and so on—but virtually any system for use on an individual scale will fall into the micro or pico category.) 

Keep your needs in mind. If you’re looking for something to use while camping, you’ll want to focus on the smallest and lightest end of the spectrum; if you want to power your house from the creek that runs through your property, you may need a sizable generator. 

Water source

While hydropower is conventionally associated with large rivers, any flow of water can potentially produce hydropower. The output could possibly offer more power than you think. Two terms are useful to know to understand how to calculate hydropower’s potential output. “Head” denotes the height gradient over which water moves from input to output; “flow” is the amount of water going through the system. These two numbers can be used to calculate the rough power output of a system.

How does the water source come in? Naturally, heavier running water over steeper terrain generates more power. If you have a substantial stream on your property, it’s very possible that you can generate a considerable amount of electricity from it. But hydropower can work even on a tiny scale. For instance, some systems are built to run off the water in your pipes. When looking for a personal hydro system, give consideration to the source of the water—and also consider seasonal factors, like whether a stream tends to dry up in the summer.

Generator type

According to the Department of Energy, “reaction” and “impulse” turbines are the two main classes of hydro turbines. Hydropower is not terribly complicated, but for the purposes of home use, you mainly need to determine what fits your particular setting.

The main difference between the two is that reaction turbines generate energy based on water pressure, while impulse turbines generate energy based on water velocity. Impulse turbines are best with high head and low flow (while reaction turbines are the inverse). Impulse turbines are more common in microhydro settings, although propeller turbines are a type of reaction turbine that can be used for microhydro.

FAQs

Q: How much do hydroelectric generators cost?

In a generator, the cost of a generator will be correlated with its power output. The most miniature, portable generators—which may produce only a few watts, can be reasonably priced. Larger generators surveyed, provided they have access to a steady water supply, may be able to power your home—and more. But these ones can cost several thousand dollars and may require supplementary equipment, like inverters, wiring, and batteries. Of course, you can always save and look for refurbished options on sites like eBay, Amazon Renewed, and others. 

Q: What size hydroelectric generator do I need?

It all depends on your needs! If you want one that provides enough power to charge your phone, one of the smallest options above might be sufficient. If you want to generate most of your home’s electricity via a hydro generator, you may need one producing 1000W or more.

Q: Can you power a house with a hydroelectric generator?

It depends on your power needs, the amount of water flow you can access, and the size of your generator. According to ABS Alaskan, the average American home without electric heat uses about 1000W consistently (less than the 1500 W put out by their Scott Hydro Turbine—meaning that device could power an average house). You can add up the wattage used by regularly running devices in your home—refrigerator, lights, washing machine, etc.—and compare them to the output of your generator.

Q: Will I need to purchase any additional equipment?

Sometimes. If you want to store power, you must purchase batteries, typically lead-acid or lithium. Both options are fairly expensive, but once purchased, they can usually last many years. Depending on the model, you may also need an inverter or other equipment to bring power from the generator to batteries or appliances. Be sure to check the specs on whichever generator you end up purchasing.

Q: What can I do with my hydro or old generator when it no longer works?

With good care, your hydro generator should last many years. Because these units tend to be specialized and each model is unique, check with the dealer or manufacturer about cleaning and maintenance instructions to ensure the machine lasts as long as possible (some, like the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine, are largely self-cleaning once set up.)

If your new hydro generator will replace your gas generator, you may be looking for ways to recycle your old machine. LoadUp is one company that can help recycle your old gas generate, salvaging as many valuable materials as possible. Some scrap companies, like Rockaway Recycling, may pay cash for old generators. Reaching out to scrap yards near you may suggest other ways to salvage usable materials from your generator.

Final thoughts on the best hydroelectric generators

If you’re looking for a serious way to generate consistent hydropower from a decent amount of flowing water on your property, check out the Scott Hydro 1500 W Water Turbine. If you’re looking for a smaller and more portable option, the WaterLily Turbine is a great choice.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hydroelectric generators for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best garden kneelers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-garden-kneelers/ Fri, 28 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559827
The best garden kneelers allow you to tend to your flowers and vegetables more easily.

Take the strain out of tending your flowers and vegetables with these handy helpers.

The post The best garden kneelers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best garden kneelers allow you to tend to your flowers and vegetables more easily.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Tomcare makes one of the best garden kneelers. TomCare Garden Kneeler
SEE IT

This multi-use kneeler bench features a sturdy steel frame, thick padding, and extra storage pockets for more comfortable gardening.
Best ergonomic Vertex makes one of the best gardening kneelers with an ergonomic design. Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench
SEE IT

Made from rust-proof and easy-to-clean plastic, this kneeler bench has an ergonomic design to make kneeling and sitting more comfortable.
Best budget Gorilla Grip makes one of the best gardening kneelers at a budget-friendly price. Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad
SEE IT

Thick, lightweight, and affordable, this kneeler pad is an inexpensive antidote to sore knees from gardening.

Gardening can be relaxing, but hours spent kneeling and hunched over can strain on your knees and back—unless you have garden kneelers, that is. These useful accompaniments provide padding between your knees and the ground to make kneeling more comfortable during long days of digging, planting, and weeding. Protect your knees and encourage better posture with the best garden kneelers ahead.

How we chose the best garden kneelers

As a home and garden writer (and someone who has pulled up my fair share of weeds), I know that the best tool in the shed is the most usable one. A garden kneeler doesn’t need to be fancy to be functional, but a worthwhile pick will always be comfortable and durable.

I looked through over 20 garden kneeler pads, seats, and knee pads to narrow down these top picks. Through extensive product research and paying mind to online reviews, I chose products that feature high-quality materials and supportive designs. To cater to a range of home gardeners, I chose kneelers that can support knees and backs through a long gardening day, so you’ll be more comfortable whether you’re a newer plant parent spending an hour in the garden or an old pro out there all weekend.

To ensure comfort, I chose kneelers with thick padding or an ergonomic shape to cushion and support the knees properly. When it comes to support, material is just as important as design. All of the picks on this list feature sturdy materials like high-density foam, steel, or high-quality plastic.

I prioritized low-compression padding and higher weight capacities to ensure the kneeler won’t sag or collapse with use. Plus, these materials are easy to clean and will last beyond a couple of planting seasons. Lastly, a garden kneeler shouldn’t empty your wallet, so we kept affordability in mind.

The best garden kneelers: Reviews & Recommendations

Garden kneelers are available in a few common types: kneeler pads, kneeler seats or benches, and knee pads. They have one main function: they prevent you from kneeling directly on hard or muddy ground. Creating a soft and stable surface, they can help prevent sore knees and backs. Beyond the garden, these kneelers also come in handy for other odd jobs, like cleaning the floor and repairing appliances.

Best overall: TomCare Garden Kneeler

Tomcare makes one of the best garden kneelers.

Tomcare

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This garden kneeler bench boasts a multi-purpose design and can be used as a kneeling pad, portable bench, and a spot to hold tools while you garden.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Seat
  • Dimensions: 10.6 inches x 21.7 inches x 18.9 inches
  • Material: Steel frame and EVA foam padding

Pros

  • Sturdy steel frame
  • Foldable design is easy to store and transport
  • 330-pound weight capacity

Cons

  • Can only be used on relatively flat surfaces

With this two-in-one kneeler from TomCare, you get a comfortable kneeler or a supportive seat in one handy product. This garden kneeler bench features a sturdy steel frame with EVA foam padding. The frame provides support for sitting and standing up from kneeling, while the thick foam padding offers a comfortable seat and keeps knees protected when used as a kneeler.

The foldable design saves storage space and makes the kneeler easy to carry around the yard. When it’s time to garden, just fold the legs out into place to hold up to 330 pounds of weight. Measuring 10.6 by 21.7 by 18.9 inches when extended, this kneeler is a suitable size for most gardeners.

To keep gardening tools within reach, this kneeler has two storage bags: one large pouch for gloves and tools and a small pouch for slimmer items. The multi-purpose design makes this kneeler an excellent choice to prevent yard work discomfort.

Best ergonomic: Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench

Vertex makes one of the best gardening kneelers with an ergonomic design.

Vertex

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a contoured seat, large cushioned kneeler pad, and a unique rocker foot, this sturdy kneeler bench is designed with ergonomics in mind.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Seat
  • Dimensions: 13 inches x 26 inches x 18 inches
  • Material: Plastic

Pros

  • Comfortable, contoured seat
  • Plastic build is corrosion- and rust-resistant
  • Ergonomic rocker foot

Cons

  • Kneeler padding is thin
  • Some users may find the rocker design unstable

Stave off gardening aches and pains with this ergonomic kneeler bench from Vertex. This kneeler is made from contoured plastic and is designed to keep gardeners comfortable when digging, weeding, and pruning.

When used as a bench, the kneeler features a large, contoured seat and a handy rocker foot. The slightly curved foot allows for a gentle rocking motion, so the bench can move with you as you work. This rocking angle reduces strain on your arms, legs, and lower back when you reach toward your garden bed.

An oversized, padded kneeling surface helps keep knees supported and off the ground when used as a kneeler. The sturdy legs also work as easy-up handles to help with standing up from kneeling.

This mid-sized kneeler bench measures 13 by 26 by 18 inches and supports up to 220 pounds. Since this kneeler is made from plastic, it’s naturally waterproof, rust-, and corrosion-resistant. The smooth finish is easy to keep clean; mud and dirt rinse right off.

Best large: Ergodyne ProFlex 385 Large Kneeling Pad

Ergodyne makes one of the best garden kneelers that's large.

Ergodyne

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Made for contractors and professionals, this kneeler pad is larger than your average garden mat and made of durable rubber foam, which provides water- and dirt-resistant padding.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Pad
  • Dimensions: 16 inches x 28 inches x 1 inch
  • Material: Foam rubber

Pros

  • Large area provides a sizeable surface for kneeling and working
  • Foam rubber is compression-resistant
  • Beveled, striped edges prevent the pad from becoming a tripping hazard

Cons

  • At 1-inch thick, this pad is thinner than some comparable options

Designed for contractors, this large kneeler pad from Ergodyne comes with a handy range of extra features not found in your tropical garden mat. A larger kneeling pad provides more space to shift around while tending to your garden, without fear of your knees slipping off the pad. It measures 16 by 28 inches and is 1-inch thick.

In addition, this water- and petroleum-resistant mat is made of closed-cell foam rubber. The sturdy foam is compression-resistant and non-conductive to protect your knees all day. The dense foam also makes the mat easy to clean when it inevitably picks up dirt and mud in the garden.

A beveled safety edge with bright warning stripes prevents this mat from becoming a tripping hazard in the garden or garage, while a built-in handle makes it more convenient to carry and store at home. The mat is large enough to cushion other parts of your body as well—such as your elbows, shoulders, or hips—when doing home or car repairs.

Best knee pads: NoCry Professional Knee Pads

No Cry makes the best gardening kneelers that are knee pads.

No Cry

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: Made for contractors and construction workers, these tough, padded knee pads will protect busy gardeners from sore knees and rough terrain.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Knee pads
  • Dimensions: Universal size, fits knees up to 22 inches in circumference
  • Material: Gel core, foam padding, PVC outer

Pros

  • Heavy-duty design prevents aching knees and scrapes from kneeling
  • Suitable for use on uneven surfaces
  • Comfortable neoprene straps with slip-buckle clips

Cons

  • Knee pads are somewhat stiff, which may lead to discomfort

Gardening knee pads are ideal for projects that involve a lot of moving around, like planting a large number of seedlings and other large landscaping projects. Once strapped on, they’re a hands-free solution to prevent sore knees. With these premium knee pads from NoCry, there’s no need to move a pad or seat around—these comfortable pads always come with you.

The knee pads feature a gel core and EVA foam padding for soft support. The outermost layer is a thick PVC cap to prevent scrapes and punctures. Adjustable neoprene straps provide a firm and secure fit, even while walking. The ergonomic design hugs the knee to prevent the pads from sliding around. Instead of securing with velcro, which can weaken over time, these pads feature quick-release slip-buckles to lock the pads in place.

These durable knee pads aren’t just for gardeners: they’re suitable for contractors and are heavy-duty enough for working on concrete, hardwood floors, and construction sites. This means the pads are more than reliable enough for any gardener to ensure that no sharp roots or rocks poke through.

Best budget: Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad

Gorilla Grip makes one of the best gardening kneelers at a budget-friendly price.

Gorilla Grips

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This kneeler pad is affordable without sacrificing quality, made from dense, 1.5-inch thick foam that provides firm, long-lasting support.

Specs

  • Kneeler type: Pad
  • Dimensions: 11 inches x 17.5 inches x 1.5 inches
  • Material: High-density foam

Pros

  • Thick 1.5-inch padding
  • Built-in handle
  • Made from ultra-durable and firm high-density foam

Cons

  • Foam has little give and may feel hard to some users

This thick and durable kneeler pad from Gorilla Grip provides affordable knee padding for avid gardeners. Made from 1.5-inch thick high-density foam, it’s an excellent pick for gardening and other household tasks.

The firm foam has little give—which may make it feel hard to some users—but the high-density material won’t compress or lose its bounce over time. Built to last through tough conditions, Gorilla Grip boasts that their kneeler won’t break down, even when used outdoors on rocks, rubble, or damp areas. The dense foam also makes this pad water-resistant, which prevents the pad from absorbing excess water and mildewing. The textured outer layer is easy to clean and dries quickly. This long-lasting design makes this kneeler even more affordable since it’s built to last for several gardening seasons.

A built-in handle makes this pad easy to carry around the garden. It’s super lightweight, thanks to its all-foam construction. Measuring 11 by 17.5 by 1.5 inches, it’s well-suited for any home gardener.

Things to consider before buying a garden kneeler

Gardening can be tough on your joints, but with a good garden kneeler, you can prevent sore knees and a strained back. The best garden kneelers are comfortable, supportive, and convenient to use, providing ample cushioning while you tend to your garden. When choosing a garden kneeler, consider the kneeler type, padding, and ease of use.

Type

Two main types are available: garden kneeler pads or garden kneeler seats. Kneeler pads are simple, inexpensive, and very lightweight basic pads made of thick cushioning material (usually foam). Benches or seats feature a padded cushion for resting your knees atop a sturdy frame that you can flip over to use as a small seat. Though less common, you can also find garden knee pads, which are protective knee coverings that strap onto each leg.

Padding

The best garden kneelers feature firm padding materials that are supportive but soft. The padding is usually made of high-density foam. High-quality padding will keep its shape and provide a stable kneeling surface while also offering some give for comfort. Padding thickness is a key feature to look for; thick padding (an inch or more) prevents painful rocks and roots from poking your knees.

Ease of use

A good garden kneeler is easy to carry and set up. Look for kneelers with a carrying handle or a simple, fold-out design, which make it simple to carry the kneeler to the garden and set up in a matter of seconds. If you’re looking for a combined kneeler and seat, make sure to consider weight capacity, which can range from 150 to over 300 pounds. Easy-to-clean and corrosion-resistant materials are ideal so you can quickly wipe off the kneeler before storing.

FAQs

Q: How much does a garden kneeler cost?

The cost of a garden kneeler depends on its form and what it’s made of. The cost ranges from about $20 for a simple pad like the Gorilla Grip Thick Kneeling Pad to $55 for a bench like the Vertex Garden Rocker Comfort Kneeler Bench.

Q: What is a garden kneeler used for?

A garden kneeler provides cushioning between your knees and the ground to make it more comfortable to kneel. They are useful for garden work but can also be used for a range of home tasks like cleaning floors and repairing cars or appliances.

Q: What are garden kneelers made of?

Most garden kneelers feature high-density foam for the right balance between padding and support. Kneeler seats often have a durable but lightweight metal or plastic frame.

Q: How do I clean my garden kneeler?

Most garden kneelers are easy to clean by wiping with a dry cloth. When needed, use a damp cloth or gentle scrubber for muddy spots.

Final thoughts on the best garden kneelers

A good garden kneeler is a worthy investment for dedicated home gardeners; these inexpensive tools can help prevent sore knees and aching backs. For most gardeners, the TomCare Garden Kneeler is a well-rounded, multi-purpose choice. This garden kneeler bench functions as a kneeler and a seat, plus it includes a couple of storage pouches to keep your tools within easy reach.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best garden kneelers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/dog-pool-keep-cool-amazon-deal/ Fri, 28 Jul 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559856
Amazon dog pool deal pattern
Jecoo

Just imagine you and your pooch chilling in this super-cheap dog pool on a super-hot day.

The post You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Amazon dog pool deal pattern
Jecoo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It’s hot outside in just about every sense of the word. Sweltering, sweaty, records-breaking, dangerously hot. It’s tough on humans, but it’s also hard on our favorite furry pals. But that doesn’t mean they want to stay inside all day. Right now, Amazon has this super-popular dog pool on sale for just $28. That’s a 30 percent discount when compared to its normal $40 price. Plus, it ships for free if you have Amazon Prime. Grab one of these pools. Then pour a drink, call your pooch, and float in a cool pool of water until mosquitos drain you of all your blood.

Jecoo Dog Pool for Large Dogs 63″x12″ $28 (Was $40)

Amazon dog pool

Jecoo

SEE IT

Even the cheapest and most basic above-ground pool meant for humans requires an annoying amount of prep and setup. This pool, however, makes it very simple. Unfold the ultra-tough PVC pool and simply fill it with the hose. The sides have stiff panels that keep it upright and won’t get completely destroyed if your dog scratches at them. It’s just 12-inches deep, so you can lounge to get covered by water, but even small breed dogs can play without having to paddle their little hearts out.

Once you’re done chilling in the pool, drain the water through the simple spout. The whole thing folds up nice and flat so that you can stick it on a shelf in the shed in-between uses rather than leaving it on the yard and murdering a big, ugly circle of grass in your lawn.

Here are more hot deals for keeping cool:

The post You need this $28 dog pool on sale at Amazon right now appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best portable fire pits of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-portable-fire-pits/ Thu, 27 Jul 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559552
The holes in the top spit small flames out during the burn on the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
Stan Horaczek

Be a modern-day Prometheus by taking a fire pit where and when you want to heat up crisp nights (or cook up dinner).

The post The best portable fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The holes in the top spit small flames out during the burn on the Solo Stove Bonfire 2.0
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire going inside Solo Stove Ranger 2.0
SEE IT

It’s extremely powerful yet controlled and compact, producing wonderful heat and light without unruly smoke.
Best design Snow Peak Pack & Carry Fireplace best designed portable fire pit Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace
SEE IT

Minimalist and modern, with a fold-flat design, it’s easy to carry and set up and can be transformed into a communal hearth/cooking centerpiece with additional accessories.
Best for backyard Yaheetech multifunctional square patio table portable fire pit with spark screen and waterproof cover Yaheetech Multifunctional Fire Pit Table
SEE IT

If you want something welcoming that matches the aesthetic of patio furniture, this is the platonic ideal for elegant al fresco entertaining.

Portable fire pits are life. Literally, human beings’ harnessing of fire as a tool—a source of warmth, cooking, and protection—is one of the things that helped us survive to become the society we are today. And while it might now be hyperbole to say fire, specifically, is life, it’s at least extremely useful and enjoyable. There’s a primal allure to a flickering flame and an aesthetic pleasure from the shadows, the crackling sounds, and—if your fuel is right—even the smell. But having an outdoor fire can be a pain. If you’re at home, you must install a dedicated, built-in fire pit. If camping, you must set up somewhere with a clear and safely built campfire space. Or do you? With one of our best portable fire pit picks, a lot of the hassle of having an outdoor fire—whether for ambiance, warmth, or cooking—is handled, leaving you to bask in the warmth of family and friends (and contained, maintained flames, of course). 

How we chose the best portable fire pits

We compared the specs and reviews of two-dozen portable fire pits before narrowing our list to the best of the best, juggling customer consensus, reviewer preference, and personal experience. Careful attention was paid to portability, style, capacity, safety, and secondary features to come to our conclusions. Considerations were made for use at home or while camping. We considered fire type (wood-burning/gas/propane), best uses (warmth/cooking/ambiance), and price. Eventually, a pecking order emerged, but you can rest assured that every pick on this list is straight fire, with every one of these products being a solid buy and an easy recommendation.

The best portable fire pits: Reviews & Recommendations

Portable fire pits contain and elevate fires, allowing you to place them in nearly any open area. Some even come with features that make grilling or containing smoke beyond easy. So embrace the ways of our ancient ancestors and fire up one of the best portable fire pits of 2023.

Best overall: Solo Stove Ranger 2.0

The Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 fire pit with a fire on gravel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15 lbs
  • Height: 12.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: non-collapsible, single form

Pros

  • Lightweight and compact
  • High-quality well-controlled flame that eliminates most smoke
  • Strong stainless steel construction
  • All-in-one design improves strength
  • Round design is stylish and silver surface is chic
  • Included carrying case makes transportation easier

Cons

  • All-in-one design makes it difficult to pack
  • Grilling or lifting requires separately-purchases accessories

The smaller brother of the Solo Stone Bonfire 2.0, our favorite smokeless fire pit, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is more portable but not less powerful. One of the first things that stands out about the Ranger is its sleek, circular design. This fire pit would fit right in at an elegant rooftop cocktail bar with its clean silver cylinder design. (And would add a similar touch of class to your backyard or car-camping set-up.) Even the flame comes out looking stylish, with the high perforations allowing small flamers to flicker out, ringing around the larger central flame. 

It’s extremely controlled yet powerful, producing wonderful heat and light without being or feeling dangerous. Firestarting is done the typical way, but the contained cylinder makes it even easier by shielding the fledgling flickers from wind and moisture. Following the included instructions is best, but even a lazy “throw some wood on top of a lit bit of kindling” can sometimes work because of the efficient design. Lighting the fire is the only time smoke is ever an issue, as the airflow traps and eliminates any puffs after that point.

Once the fire starts, you don’t want to touch the fire pit; the sides heat up as you might expect. As always with fire, this isn’t a product or practice to use around unsupervised children or pets. Once all the smoldering has subsided, however, the updates to the 2.0 design make cleaning much easier, placing the ash on a removable pan (one of many touches greatly appreciated in our full review of the Bonfire 2.0). With its combination of style, function, lightweight (15 pounds is low for this category), and efficient control of flames and smoke, the Solo Stove Ranger 2.0 is about as good as a portable fire pit gets.

Best for the backyard: Yaheetech Multifunctional Fire Pit Table

Yaheetech multifunctional square patio table portable fire pit with spark screen and waterproof cover

Yaheetech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 26 lbs
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Material: metal alloy
  • Structure: non-collapsible, single form

Pros

  • Elegant, patio-appropriate design
  • Ample fire area
  • Included iron mesh cage for both aesthetics and to prevent embers from blowing
  • During the summer, you can fill the bowl with ice and beverages (or shrimp and crab legs, veggies and dips … that’s up to you)

Cons

  • Not weatherproof, but comes with a fitted protective cover.
  • Not smokeless
  • Not compact or collapsible

When it comes to backyard fire pits, looks matter a lot. You want a fire pit that feels welcoming and matches the aesthetic of your patio furniture. Yaheetech’s 32-inch metal table is the platonic ideal for when you’re doing some elegant al fresco entertaining. Square, with a decorative rock pattern on the top, it’s an eye-catching centerpiece but also highly functional. The basin for the fire is significantly lifted, letting heat radiate out and even slightly down, warming those toes on breezy evenings, while rails prevent little ones from getting too, too close to the bottom. The mesh spark guard completes the aesthetic. 

It’s classic, cute, and fits a backyard vibe. Style and price are the main selling point of this model, as there’s no fancy smokeless airflow design or foldability features, but it is relatively light and can easily be put in a flat-bed trunk, van, or SUV for a trip to the beach or park. One warning: while it can handle fire, it’s not impervious to all the elements. It isn’t waterproof but comes with a cover that it so, after use and cooldown, protect it appropriately from the elements.

Looking to upgrade your conversation pit with one click? You can buy a $1,599 7-piece patio furniture set with matching 55,000 BTU propane fire pit—we’re not going to judge, but we are going to ask to be invited over.

Best for camping: Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit

Specs

  • Weight: 7.2 lbs
  • Height: 15 inches
  • Material: aluminum
  • Structure: collapsible / disassembled

Pros

  • Extremely light-weight and portable
  • Vertical collapsed design is easy to pack
  • Extremely large burn area
  • Smoke-eliminating mesh holds up to 125 pounds
  • Designed with leave-no-trace fires in mind

Cons

  • Any grilling needs an accessory kit that reduces portability and adds weight
  • Mesh and heat shield are a bit hard to clean
  • Mesh requires that fires be more wide than tall
  • Function over fashion, may not look great in a backyard set-up

For serious campers—specifically those who don’t need to grill—two things are extremely important: lightweight portability and environmentally sound design. The Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit is designed with campers in mind, offering a lifted, full-size fire for warmth and light that leaves little to no impact on the ground below it or the area around it. The size and weight when collapsed are impressive: about the size of a camping chair. Despite that, when assembled, the Pop-Up Fire Pit offers one of the largest burn areas of all our portable models, two feet by two feet. One drawback is that the metal mesh that holds the wood needs a pretty equal distribution of weight to avoid tearing or warping–fires must be wide more than tall.

Grilling is possible with additional accessories, but the primary function of the Fireside Outdoor Pop-Up Fire Pit is warmth and light with a minimal footprint, and it delivers in spades. The portability requires assembly, and while it isn’t the fastest—likely around 3 minutes—it’s simple and straightforward. If your main goal is roughing it, this one will make it a little less rough.

Best for grilling: Front Runner BBQ/Fire Pit

Front Runner BBQ portable fire pit for grilling

Front Runner

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 17.4 lbs
  • Height: 12.2 inches
  • Material: 3CR12 stainless steel
  • Structure: disassembled / flat-packed

Pros

  • Built-in grill is convenient and excellent at distributing heat
  • Flat-pack design makes it extra easy to pack in a vehicle
  • Sturdy design and excellent flame containment
  • Grid-lifting tools are included

Cons

  • 17-pound weight makes its portability more truck-based than backpack-based
  • Requires a good bit of maintenance as grease and food will build up on the grill surface
  • Designed for use with a specific brand of pick-up storage box and may not fit all vehicles as well with other brands

Designed for grilling and transportation with a truck, the Front Runner BBQ/Fire Pit has a rugged design with sharp corners and strong geometry. However, that angularity is also in service to its easy-to-assemble flat-packed portable form, as it is a series of interlocking metal panels that can be put together in less than a minute even by an amateur outdoors explorer. The top is already a high-quality grilling grate, which is the main selling point of this model: it cooks well without any need for pricey accessories. The stainless steel is one of the highest grades we’ve seen in this category, which should help the Front Runner hold up if it ends up jostled around in the backwoods.

One drawback is that while it packs flat, it’s still quite large and heavy—a trade-off for its durability. The panels are meant to be placed into a Wolf Pack or Wolf Pack Pro pick-up truck storage container, not a backpack, making this less ideal for trekking and more for family camping (check our camping grill guide for smaller, cheaper options).

Best propane: Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit

Bond Manufacturing best propane portable fire pit ablaze

Bond Manufacturing

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 18 lbs
  • Height: 14.65 inches
  • Material: stainless steel / metal
  • Structure: non-collapsible, locking lid

Pros

  • Propane-ready
  • Locking lid acts as carrying handle
  • No assembly required
  • Auto-ignition function makes starting fires simple

Cons

  • Need for separate propane tank increases weight and space
  • Awkward shape means it’s a carry-from-the-car kind of portable

For some of us—I’m looking at you, Hank Hill—propane is simply the best option for heating (or grilling). That’s where the Bond Manufacturing Aurora Portable Steel Propane Gas Fire Pit comes in. The gas burns clean, and stones are used for both aesthetics and to help contain the flames. The gas allows for a consistent 50,000 BTU output. The consistency of gas is one of its main benefits over wood. Wood’s heat can come and go as the fire gets stronger or weaker. Gas also means no ash, charred wood, or other debris left over when you’re done enjoying your fire. Simply turn off the gas, wait for the stones and fire pit to cool down, lock in the lid, and carry the fire pit away.

Unfortunately, the convenience of propane is undercut by the need to bring a tank of the stuff. That means an additional 20 pounds and a rather large object to take on your beach, tailgating, or camping trip. If your main purpose is backyard use, this is less of an impediment. The Aurora is sturdy but also a bit hefty, so if your campsite is a hike away, it may not make it up the mountain with you. But for close and consistent flame sources for propane pros, it’s an easy recommendation.

Best design: Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace

Snow Peak Pack & Carry Fireplace best designed portable fire pit

Snow Peak

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 12.1 lbs
  • Height: 12 inches
  • Material: stainless steel
  • Structure: collapsible / flat-pack

Pros

  • Clever and stylish collapsible design
  • High-quality stainless steel
  • Easy set-up
  • Packs flat

Cons

  • Requires additional accessories to grill
  • Somewhat small capacity

The minimalist principles and clean lines of Japanese design have done it again! The Snow Peak Pack & Carry L Fireplace is beyond slick in its balance of form and function. Its collapsible design leaves it in a nice, flat shape that, at 12 pounds, is quite easy to carry. When set up—which is a cinch—it’s got a striking modern design with sharp lines complemented by swooping legs. Additional purpose-built accessories Fireplace Grill Bridge L and Fireplace Grill L can transform this cute fireplace into a Takibi grilling solution and even the centerpiece of a packable dining table, but it will add cost and space. This spiffy fireplace/fire pit comes courtesy of Snow Peak, a Niigata, Japan-based company whose camping gear is as cool and covetable as it is useful.

The tradeoff is the relatively small fire area the Pack & Carry offers. Some pre-cut wood might be too large and require further whittling. The fire produced might be too small for a large gathering but is perfect for a solo adventure or intimate getaway.

Best value: Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit

Inno Stage smokeless best value portable fire pit

Inno Stage

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 16 lbs
  • Height: 12.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: two pieces

Pros

  • Airflow design allows for smoke reduction
  • Three sizes of the same design available for different size needs
  • Matte black finish keeps fire pit looking clean
  • Price/performance ratio is high

Cons

  • Designed for wood pellets rather than traditional firewood
  • Somewhat bulky design partially alleviated by carrying case

Sometimes you don’t want to go full force into a product category, and that’s where a value choice like the Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit comes in. This baby isn’t much of a step down from fire pits twice its price, and offers a few innovative ideas that really up its value. First of all, the airflow design eliminates a lot of smoke while the fire is going. Secondly, the two-part design makes it relatively easy to set up and store, though the bulky shape isn’t the easiest to carry. (The carrying case certainty helps.) At under $100 for the medium size, the investment is minimal.

The biggest drawback is its design is meant to be used with wood pellets or very small pieces of wood. Purchased firewood is probably too big for this baby, and scavenged firewood will have to be cut down considerably. Therefore, you’ll need to include a bag of wood pellets in the car if you plan to use the Inno Stage on any trips. At home, this is much less of a drawback, of course. Wood pellets tend to burn very evenly and efficiently and impart specific aromas (which is why they’re popular with grillmasters).

The matte black finish is probably the most clean-looking of the options for the Inno Stage, but there’s also a chrome option and a faux terra cotta option as far as colors go. For grilling, the design is such that simply buying a disposable grill and laying it over the top is likely one of the better solutions. If you want strong performance without much of an investment, the Inno Stage Portable Smokeless Fire Pit is a great entry point into the world of portable fire pits.

Best budget: UCO Flatpack Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit

Specs

  • Weight: 3.2 lbs
  • Height: 13.5 inches
  • Material: 304 stainless steel
  • Structure: collapsible / flat-pack

Pros

  • 30-second set-up
  • Extremely light
  • Folds flat for easy portability

Cons

  • Can’t handle a lot of weight on or inside it 
  • Needs a nice, flat surface for stability
  • Grilling space is not particularly large

For those who want the lowest-cost solution for a very small gathering, there’s the UCO Flatpack Portable Stainless Steel Grill and Fire Pit. As a grill, this one offers the least capacity and stability of any of our recommended models. Heavy cooking accessories such as a Dutch oven as a serious no-no, and even overloading the grill surface could result in some warping. However, a grilled dinner for one is more than doable. As a heat-and-light-only solution, the UCO Flatpack is actually really strong for its price. It’s the lightest of all our models, and it folds flat, meaning it’s very easy to carry. The assembly from flat is quick and simple, definitely taking less than a minute. Best of all, it’s a fraction of the cost of some other pits on our list. If you want features, versatility, and long-term durability, you may want to look elsewhere. But if you want a cheap, solid solution for personal use, the UCO Flatpack gives way more than it costs.

What to consider when choosing a portable fire pit

The first thing to consider when choosing a portable fire pit is how portable you need your fire pit to be. “Portable” is relative when it comes to this category and can be as simple as “is not built into a patio” to as versatile as “collapses and can easily be attached to a backpack. Many of these models are meant for transport via vehicle—RV or truck especially—and are not appropriate for camping that involves long hikes away from a car. The lighter, collapsible models are the only ones you’ll want to look at if you’re truly planning to do some wilderness camping. If your main desire is for a fire pit to be used in backyard gatherings, the style will really matter. It’ll be frustrating if your fire pit has a utilitarian design when your patio furniture is more casual and tropical. And for those who want a portable grilling solution, remember that many of these models don’t include grilling accessories in the base package, so that will add cost, weight, and space, eating into the whole “portability” factor.

Price

The next thing to consider is how much you’re willing to spend. If you want to stay under $100, there are really only two models to consider (our best value and our best budget). If you’re willing to go to $200, many more models open up.

Fuel

Lastly, fuel type is important. The vast majority of these fire pits are intended for use with commercial or scavenged firewood. A few want pellets or gas. All these fuels will need to be carried with or stored near the fire pit or found at the beach/campsite you plan to use the fire pit.

FAQs

Q: Which fire pit gives off the most heat?

Wood burns hotter but less consistently than gas. Gas will produce flames in the same place at roughly the same intensity as long as you don’t change the gas output, while fire flares up and dies down, and wood collapses, making the fire change over time. But for pure heat, wood is the way to go.

Q: Will a 50,000 BTU fire pit keep you warm?

Whether a 50,000 BTU fire pit is ample to keep you warm depends on your distance from the fire pit. These fire pits are relatively small, and you’ll need to be relatively near them to really feel the warmth. Fire heat dissipates very quickly in air, where the energy can move in any direction. While 50,000 BTUs (British Thermal Units) will keep you warm when you’re within a few feet of the fire, stretch that distance to several meters and you won’t feel it as much. Things depend on the climate and any enclosure, but in still, open air, 50,000 BTUs will be hot from within 8 feet, comfortable from about 8 to 10 feet away, and not warm from over 10 feet.

Q: How do I make my fire pit hotter?

Oxygen increases a fire’s heat output because oxygen is what the fire consumes to grow. Get air to the base of the fire, particularly using a bellows, and your fire will increase its heat output. Also, good fire design with nice dry logs that are the right size to burn is important. Check out some YouTube videos on building fires in fire pits to get a sense of what you should be looking for both in your wood and your set-up.

Q: How do you keep a fire pit burning all night?

If it’s gas, just ensure you have a big enough gas supply. If it’s wood, you want dry, seasoned wood, not wet or green (young) wood. Many of these fire pits also come with heat shields that act as a reflector, distributing the heat that would normally travel down from the fire back up toward it, which helps keep the fire active. Make sure there’s enough wood to burn through in a lattice-like pattern. When your fire starts, use smaller pieces of wood, and add in larger ones later that will take longer to consume. Also, a dry, cool, but not cold night with minimal wind helps a lot. Lastly, certain types of wood burn more slowly, chiefly oak and maple.

Q: Is it OK to leave a fire pit burning overnight?

If you’re not going to check on it, do not leave a fire pit, or a fire of any sort, burning overnight. Fire is extremely dangerous, and while these fire pits are well-made, a small defect can become a major problem overnight. Keeping an eye on your fire ensures you can cut any problems off and douse the fire before it becomes a problem.

Q: What is hotter: coals or flame?

Flame is hotter, as it has more access to oxygen that lets it reach higher temperatures—assuming the flame is coming from the same source that the coals are made from.

Q: Do you put sand in a portable fire pit?

Portable fire pits do not need sand in them.

Q: Are fire pits good for winter?

If there’s just cold and no snow, yes. However, high moisture content in the area can make it very difficult to keep a fire going.

Final thoughts on the best portable fire pits

A portable fire pit will add a touch of class to a backyard gathering or a source of heat and food on a camping trip. You can grill in the summer, cut the chill in fall, manage the cold in winter, or set the mood in spring. That cozy fire feeling can be yours anywhere, so if you’re interested in fanning the flames in your own life, grab whichever of our recommended models fits your needs.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best portable fire pits of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings https://www.popsci.com/gear/aiper-cordless-pool-cleaner-amazon-deal/ Wed, 26 Jul 2023 16:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=559181
A pool vacuum overlayed on a fancy pool
Amanda Reed

Splash into the final month of summer and keep your pool crystal clear with this AIPER cordless pool vacuum deal on Amazon.

The post Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A pool vacuum overlayed on a fancy pool
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We are in the hot throes of summer, with a splash in cooling chlorinated water the rare respite. However, your pool might look less poetic and placid with bugs and leaves occupying it—and they didn’t even pay for a pass to dive in! Suck up those freeloaders of nature with 30% off an AIPER Seagull Plus Cordless Pool Vacuum at Amazon.

AIPER Seagull Plus Cordless Pool Vacuum $279.99 (Was $399.99)

Aiper Seagull Pro Pool Vacuum next to a pool

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

This rechargeable pool vacuum is one of our favorite pool vacuums and is so decked out in high-tech features that it barely requires your help to get the job done. Equipped with four motors and a gyroscope, the Aiper Seagull Pro cleans up to 3,200 square feet in the three hours of battery power it gets from each charge. This cordless model’s internal gyroscope provides smart navigation that allows the Seagull Pro to map the floor and walls of a pool. The powerful motors offer 130GPM (gallons per minute) of suction while bottom brushes sweep out leaves, dirt, and other debris. The Seagull Pro also cleans walls and the waterline and it’s programmed to stop near a pool wall when the battery starts to drain. Plus, it only takes 1.5 hours to charge up. Essentially, all you have to do is drop it in the pool and watch it do all the work.

If you’re looking for an even cheaper option, the AIPER Cordless Robotic Pool Cleaner is 40% off—down from $299.99 to $179.99—and includes many of the same features as the Seagull Pro. It runs for 1.5 hours and has the same cordless capabilities as its Pro sibling. Nice!

Take advantage of this deal before it dries up—just like your pool when September hits.

Here are more refreshing pool, patio, and hot tub deals:

The post Get $100 off the best pool vacuum at Amazon and clean out bugs, not your savings appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best coolers for camping in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-coolers-for-camping/ Wed, 15 Mar 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=519056
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Bring these coolers on your next camping trip to keep your food (and beverages) cool and fresh.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The Best Coolers For Camping
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler
SEE IT

RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler its the sweet spot between performance, aesthetics, extra features, and price.
Best electric GOsun Chill Cooler GOSun Chill Cooler
SEE IT

GOSUN Chill Cooler can keep your perishables cold without ice—and it can even run on solar power.
Best budget East Oak Cooler East Oak 45 Quart Cooler
SEE IT

If cost is your concern, East Oka’s 45 Quart Cooler is the cream of the crop.

A well-built, long-lasting cooler for camping will keep your food and drinks cold for hours when you’re away from a power outlet, convenience store, or other modern luxuries. It needs to be rugged enough to get taken in and out of the back of a car, trekked to a campsite, and exposed to rain, snow, sunshine, bugs, and anything else you’ll find out in the wilderness. If your current camping cooler is looking a little long in the tooth, isn’t big enough for the length of your trip, it’s time for an upgrade. Here are some of the best coolers for camping in a wide range of styles for every budget.

How we chose the best coolers for camping

There are a glut of coolers available on the Internet, but the starting point for the recommendations below started with some of our other stories. The commerce team Popular Science has already covered the best coolers and cooler bags available for all uses. Many of the metrics—size, capacity, price—that went into determining the top picks in those stories were also important here. We paid attention to options from the top brands, and were able to conduct some in-person testing to supplement our research.

Coolers can get expensive very fast—we feel the price is worthwhile since this is a piece of gear that should literally last you decades—but we made sure our selections were relatively affordable. This mentality was a through-line throughout this entire story, not just something we cared about when choosing our budget pick. Overall, you’ll find camping coolers that provide the right mix of performance and value without sacrificing either.

The best coolers for camping: Reviews & Recommendations

Camping has experienced a mainstream renaissance lately, driven in part by the continuing effects of the COVID-19 pandemic and our collective desire to be out in the world but away from crowds. When outdoor trips were seen one of the few safe summertime activities, people began investing in camping gear, especially tents and water filters. People are still discovering (or rediscovering) the benefits of spending time outdoors, known in some circles as “nature therapy.” There are a lot of fancy camping gadgets, but a camping cooler is deliberately low tech—at least in most cases. Companies have put a lot of effort into creating materials that insulate your food and drinks for longer periods of time without adding too much weight or bulk. There’s always going to be a tradeoff between size and capacity vs. portability, so it’s important to strike the right balance for your specific needs. Many of the camping coolers you’ll see below are available in multiple sizes, which was done by design. We want to make sure everyone’s needs are met regardless of their situation.

Best overall: RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler

RTIC Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler

RTIC

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 27.01 x 17.28 x 16.54 inches
  • Weight: 13.4 pounds
  • Capacity: 54 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Closed-cell foam
  • Price: $219.99

Pros

  • Excellent weight to capacity ratio
  • Three inches of insulation
  • Price

Cons

  • No separate built-in compartments

If we could only recommend one camping cooler to suit everyone’s needs, RTIC’s Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler is far and away the best choice. The company considered every angle of this cooler, and engineered one of the best pieces of outdoor gear we’ve ever seen regardless of the category.

The cooler’s 52 quart capacity allows it to hold up to 60 pounds of ice or 70 cans with no ice according to RTIC, which is more than enough space to hold everything you’d need for a two day camping trip. This is one of the biggest camping coolers we’re recommending, but thanks to RTIC’s engineering, it’s also one of the lightest. Despite its three inches of closed-cell foam insulation, it weighs roughly half as much as its competition. This will make a huge difference when transporting the cooler to and from your house.

Little touches, like the T-latches that keep it securely closed, non-skid rubber feet, marine-grade nylon rope handles, and the ability to slip in an optional divider to separate food and drink make it even more appealing. We’re even happy to see RTIC offers this camping cooler in six colorways, so you’re not stuck with a plain white one. We wish RTIC included their divider with this cooler—it’s only $7 on their site—but beyond that we couldn’t find much fault with the Ultra-Light Quart Hard Cooler.

If you’re looking for a big, light, relatively inexpensive cooler for camping, boating, tailgating, or other all-day outdoor activities, don’t hesitate to pick one up.

Best electric: GOSun Chill Cooler

GOsun Chill Cooler

GOsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.5 x 16 x 19 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds
  • Capacity: 42 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Close cell polyurethane foam
  • Price: $649

Pros

  • Built-in compressor keeps items cool without ice
  • Can be run off solar power
  • Separate compartments for fridge and freezer items

Cons

  • You have to remember to charge it
  • Price

GOsun’s Chill Cooler is the most high-tech option we’re recommending, and while its price is high, it’s arguably the most efficient choice. That’s because it has a built-in refrigeration system, which continually keeps its chamber at a pre-set temperature between -4 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit. This means you won’t have to dedicate any space to ice to keep its contents cool. The cooler’s temperature is managed by a touch panel on top, which is flanked by USB-A ports and a DC cigarette lighter, so you can charge your phone and other devices on-the-go.

The Chill Cooler’s greatest strength is the ability to keep its contents cool, but its high-tech design comes with one downside: the need to keep it charged. Yes, you’ll need to plug in your cooler, which would make the Chill Cooler a no-go for camping if not for GOsun’s ingenuity. You can connect this cooler to an external battery pack or go fully off the grid by plugging it into GOsun’s Outdoor Solar Table. If you’re camping during sunny summer days, and don’t use the Chill Cooler’s cooling features continuously, you shouldn’t have too many issues with it running out of juice.

There aren’t very many electric coolers available, but GOsun’s Chill Cooler stands out in this category because of its innovative design.

Best with wheels: YETI Roadie 60

YETI Roadie 60

YETI

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 23.7 x 19.9 x 20.5 inches
  • Weight: 29 pounds
  • Capacity: 63 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Polyurethane
  • Price: $500

Pros

  • Ultra-durable
  • Highly portable given its size
  • Periscoping handle for easy manuverability

Cons

  • Price
  • Weight

YETI is arguably the best-known premium cooler brand, and it’s brought all the design chops that make its sedentary gear popular into a wheeled version. The $500 60 Quart cooler is one of the biggest—by capacity—camping coolers we’re recommending, and it’s the most expensive non-electric model, but you’re getting what you pay for.

The biggest benefit to getting a YETI cooler is its durability—they’re literally bear proof thanks to their insulation and well-made latches. If you make the investment, you should be able to keep this cooler for life. One of the biggest potential pain points for a wheeled cooler is, well, their wheels, which are going to come into contact with tough terrain very often. YETI says it uses single-piece tires, which should be able to handle prolonged exposure rocks and dirt just fine.

Portability is the main reason to get a wheeled cooler, and the Roadie 60 excels in this area. Its squat-but-deep design offers the same capacity as a traditional cooler in a more compact form. The Roadie 60’s telescoping handle will reach high enough at its maximum height to be comfortable to roll around, but will contract to the point where it’s out of sight when it’s not needed.

Yes, the YETI Roadie 60 is expensive, but if you want the highest quality rolling camping cooler around and are able to stretch your budget, you won’t find a better option.

Best large: Driftsun 75 Quart Insulated Cooler

Driftsun 75 Quart Insulated Cooler

Driftsun

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 33.5 x 18.5 x 18 inches
  • Weight: 32 pounds
  • Capacity: 75 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Rotomolded thermoplastic
  • Price: $249.99

Pros

  • Excellent ice retention
  • High capacity
  • Built-in bottle opener

Cons

  • Large size comes with added weight

If a high-capacity camping cooler is what you crave, Driftsun has you covered with its ultra-large-but-relatively-inexpensive Insulated Cooler. Its 75 quart capacity will comfortably hold dozens of cans with room to spare ice. Driftsun is also confident in this cooler’s insulation, and says it can keep ice solid for up to 10 days—more than enough time for a week-long camping trip if you’re strategic about how long you keep it open. This level of performance is also possible because of the cooler’s locking latches, which will keep it firmly shut.

This may be the largest camping cooler we recommend, but it’s not the heaviest—even amongst non-electric models. We considered portability very strongly when selecting a camping cooler in this category because nobody want to carry it around if it’s too heavy. Many of the coolers in this guide have a capacity of between 50 and 60 quarts, and while a 75 quart option may not seem like a big difference, the ability to carry around the same number of cans with ice is a big deal for long trips. Some of Driftsun’s little extras, like a built-in bottle opener make it a little nicer to use, too.

If you need a big cooler for longer trips—or ones with a larger party—Driftsun’s 75 Quart Insulated Cooler is the way to go. There’s enough space to satisfy the thirst of a big crowd without being too unwieldy to use. This camping cooler’s affordable price is just icing on the cake.

Best soft cooler: Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler

Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler

Hydro Flask

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 14.5 x 14.5 x 10.3 inches
  • Weight: 3.2 pounds
  • Capacity: 27 Qt.
  • Style: Softshell
  • Materials: Polyester
  • Price: $179.95

Pros

  • Lightweight
  • Relatively high capacity
  • Features straps and handles

Cons

  • Can’t hold as much stuff as hard shell coolers

If your idea of a camping trip is a one night stay at a campsite for two or three people, there isn’t much of a reason to pack a big hardshell cooler—Hydro Flask’s 26L Day Escape Soft Cooler will more than satisfy your needs. The soft cooler is ultra light, but the insulation Hyrdro Flask uses can keep its contents cold for up to 27 hours according to the company.

Because of the cooler’s relatively small size, you’re likely going to fill it to the brim, and Hydro Flask has accounted for this by offering side handles in addition to a strap, which can make it easier to carry for two people. This seems like a little touch, but it can make a big difference. Additionally, the Day Escape’s strap can be removed and reattached in such a way that you can carry it as a cross-body strap.

We’ve tried some of Hydro Flask’s soft coolers in the past, and one of the features that’s always struck us is the quality of their zipper. This is essential for a soft cooler, because a faulty zipper will let warm air inside, or let liquid leak out. We’re happy to say this has never been an issue for us. If you’re confident that your next camping trips will be short and sweet, and you’d like to be as unencumbered as possible while you’re exploring nature, Hydro Flask 26L Day Escape is the ideal cooler.

Best budget: East Oak 45 Quart Cooler

East Oak Cooler

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

Specs

  • Size: 28.25 x 15.75 x 18.25 inches
  • Weight: 16.32 pounds
  • Capacity: 45 Qt.
  • Style: Hardshell
  • Materials: Polyurethane Foam
  • Price: $108.99

Pros

  • Round shape
  • Secure latches
  • Price

Cons

  • No wheels

East Oak’s cooler has more going for it than its unique, circular shape. In our tests, the cooler could keep beverages cold for a couple of days when its lid was securely fastened to its base using its two latches. This performance is due to the cooler’s insulation, which is three-inches thick at its thickest point. Our second-favorite feature of this cooler was its draining port, which was conveniently located toward the bottom of the cooler and pointed at an angle. The company promises “no-tilt draining” and actually delivered.

The immediate difference you’ll notice between East Oak’s cooler and our other recommendations is its shape. In our experience, this shape made the cooler easier to move around with one person—when empty—while its handles were comfortable enough to grip for two people to move around while full. It may have a slightly lower capacity than most of our recommendations, but we found East Oak’s cooler to have enough room to keep five or six people satisfied for an afternoon. Boaters, tailgaters, and frequent campers alike will find a lot to like about this cooler.

You won’t find a better cooler than East Oak’s at its price range, and frankly it should be considered right up there with fare from better-known companies.

What to consider when shopping for the best coolers for camping

Size

A cooler’s physical size—including weight—is the first factor to think about when picking the right camping cooler. This isn’t a piece of gear you’re going to want to upgrade on a regular basis. Our recommendations run the gamut, but most of them are roughly two feet wise, and a food and a half wide and deep. A cooler in that size range will weigh roughly 15 pounds when empty. Also consider the amount of space you have in your car, which will likely be packed with a lot of other gear, and on the campsite.

Capacity

A camping cooler’s capacity is measured in quarts, and determines how much space there is inside for your food and drinks. Many companies illustrate the capacity of their cooler by saying how much ice and how many cans it can hold. These rough metrics can be a big help in figuring out which cooler is right for you, so don’t disregard them even if you plan on packing liquid in bottles and dedicating part of its space to food.

Style

Camping coolers come in all shapes and sizes, but we’ve broken them down into two styles: hardshell and softshell. We’ve elected to primarily focus on hardshell coolers in large part because this is the most traditional type. We also have an entire guide to insulated cooler bags—the official name for softshell coolers—so you’re covered if you prefer this style. Softshell coolers look like a tote bag and are a lot more portable, but they can’t hold as much stuff. The solution for multi-day camping trips with a lot of hiking to and from a central camping spot may be to get one of both.

Materials

When possible, we’ve called out the materials companies have used to make their coolers. This has the biggest impact on their ability to keep your perishables cold for extended periods of time. Naturally, coolers with thick insulation will be larger and weigh more, so keep that in mind if portability is your priority.

Price

You can spend a lot of money on a camping cooler, but we’ve made sure most of our recommendations fall under $300, so they’re accessible to the highest number of people. That said, we didn’t shy away from more expensive models if they had a differentiating feature that justified the higher cost.

FAQs

Q: How much does a cooler for camping cost?

This will depend on its size and extra features, but you should expect to pay under $300 for most camping coolers we recommend.

Q: How do I know what size cooler I need?

You can use the cooler’s size and capacity guide to help determine the size of cooler that works best for you. If you’re a frequent camper who plans on taking more people with you, opt for a larger option than you need today.

Q: Are soft or hard coolers better for camping?

This depends on the length of your trip. If you’re a single or two-person team going on a day trip, a soft cooler may work best for you thanks to its portability. If you’re part of a larger multi-person party who’s going to be away for several days, a hard cooler is the way to go.

Q: How long do camping coolers stay cold?

This depends on its materials, the amount of insulation used, and how much ice is inside. If you use a lot of ice, there’s no reason the cooler shouldn’t keep your food and drinks cool for a couple of days.

Q: Will a cooler keep things cold without ice?

This depends on the temperature of the perishables you put inside of it. The cooler’s insulation will reduce the amount of hot air that reaches your perishables, but it won’t be as effective as it would be with ice inside.

Q: Are camping coolers worth it?

Yes. If you’re going on a long outdoor trip, a camping cooler is essential for keeping beverages and perishable food from reaching unsafe temperatures.

Final thoughts on the best coolers for camping

The right camping cooler should last a lifetime, which is more than we can say for most gear produced these days regardless of the category. Advancements in materials and manufacturing, driven by demand, has allowed companies to make big investments in this space. Outdoor activities never go out of style, and the upside is you can use your camping cooler in your backyard, at a tailgate, or even extra fridge space if you’re hosting a party. These auxiliary purposes can help make larger, more expensive camping coolers a little easier to justify, especially if you live in a place where the climate is moderate or warm year-round.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best coolers for camping in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best chainsaws of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-chainsaw/ Thu, 29 Apr 2021 14:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/story/?p=284644
The best chainsaws on a rock
Stan Horaczek

Cut your project down to size with the best chainsaws for yard maintenance.

The post The best chainsaws of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best chainsaws on a rock
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Worx Nitro 40v chainsaw Worx Nitro 40V Chainsaw
SEE IT

This user-friendly chainsaw is practically maintenance-free.
Best small Black and orange cordless electric chainsaw Worx WG322 
SEE IT

Powerful chainsaws can come in small sizes—take this one from Worx.
Best budget Black, gray, and red electric chainsaw Oregon CS1500
SEE IT

Simply take this pre-assembled chainsaw out of the box to use.

A chainsaw is one of those invaluable power tools that you find yourself using more often than you might have expected. Sure, it will cut down a tree, but it can do even more to make your life easier. Trimming overgrown hedges, wayward tree branches, or landscape timbers; cleaning up storm damage; and doing demolition before a remodeling project are just a few of the times when a chainsaw could be the best tool for the job. And chainsaws are not always heavy, loud, or gas-powered. Big, powerful gas saws have their place, to be sure, particularly for long days cutting up big logs out in the woods. But there are many times when a clean, quiet electric saw would be a better choice, like when you only want to trim a few branches around the yard. Read on as we consider the qualities that go into a quality pick and see our best chainsaws for various uses.

How we chose the best chainsaws

We looked at critical reviews and user recommendations, then performed heavy research (and some heavy chores) to narrow down our list of the best chainsaws. We considered important factors—like size, weight, fuel source, max cutting diameter, and bar length—to curate a list of the top chainsaws that can cut through various shrubs and trees for ultimate usability.

The best chainsaws: Reviews & Recommendations

These top-rated chainsaws are a cut above the rest—pun intended. From cordless options to electric and gas-powered varieties, the best chainsaw is perfect for you and your backyard needs (like clearing anything standing between you and an above-ground pool). Read on to find sharp chainsaws at a smart price.

Best overall: Worx Nitro 40V Chainsaw

Worx Nitro 40v chainsaw

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 15.3 lbs
  • Bar length: 16
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 24 inches

Pros

  • Responsive throttle
  • Flexible battery system
  • Chain is easy to install and adjust
  • Self-lubricating chain
  • Relatively quiet considering its power

Cons

  • Works with two batteries, so you’ll want to charge both

Worx offers a number of very versatile tools in its Nitro series, and the chainsaw is no exception. The 16-inch bar is ideal for most typical users who don’t need to go chopping through Middle Earth-style forests. A pair of sturdy grips give both of your hands a comfortable place to rest and lots of control over the tool as you’re using it. During our testing, we chopped through tons of 3- to 4-inch sticks and some larger, full-grown trees. With two powerful batteries installed, it quickly gets up to speed, and we barely had any issues with kicking or getting stuck.

Worx has one of the most flexible battery systems on the market at the moment, and this tool relies on a pair of batteries (that charge simultaneously in one charger). The batteries give the chainsaw a nice balance, which is important when you’re wielding a tool that can quickly cause carnage when mishandled.

Installing and adjusting the chain is simple, and it self-lubricates as you run it, so it doesn’t require much in the way of maintenance. We spent several hours cutting away with this tool and ran into almost no issues, which is exactly what we’re looking for.

Best battery life: CAT 60V Max Chainsaw

CAT 60V chainsaw

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 13.02 pounds
  • Bar length: 16 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 30 inches

Pros

  • Large battery capacity adds extra cutting time
  • Efficient motor provides more power and lasts longer
  • Only requires one battery that charges quickly
  • Balanced and easy to hold

Cons

  • 16-inch bar won’t tackle the biggest trees
  • Other battery systems have more compatible devices

This single-battery model relies on a chunky 60V cell to provide the juice it needs to slice and dice through trees, shrubs, and whatever else may get in its way. During our test cuts, we hacked through everything from small branches to medium-sized tree trunks without issue.

It’s electric, so the throttle response is all but instant. As soon as you pull back the trigger, the chain quickly gets up to speed. The brushless motor inside this model promises 72.2ft of travel per second, which is on par with the most powerful 16-inch models we’ve tested.

The wide nose helps fight off kickback. We only managed to make it kick once or twice, but the Cat has a built-in safety feature that immediately cuts the engine when that happens. It’s handy and comforting. A dial adjustment system keeps the chain tight. We didn’t have any issues with the hand-tightened screw coming loose, but it’s worth checking each time you use it to ensure everything is tight.

Overall, this is a very well-balanced chainsaw that provides more uptime per charge session. That’s handy if you’re only doing longer, more sporadic cuts.

Best gas: ECHO CS-590-20 Timber Wolf

Black and orange gas chainsaw

Echo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Feel better about your ecological impact with this California Air Resources Board (CARB) compliant gas chainsaw.

Specs

  • Weight: 16.1 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: N/A
  • Bar length: 20 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 35 inches

Pros

  • Responsive throttle
  • Translucent fuel tank
  • Long-lasting, sharp chain

Cons

  • A bit on the heavy side

This saw is loaded with premium features, including a dual post chain brake to keep you safer, a clutch-driven oiler to reduce bar oil consumption, an engine air pre-cleaner to help the engine last longer, a heavy-duty toolless air filter, and removable bumper spikes for better control. It’s built with a premium vibration-dampening system to reduce user fatigue. Includes a ⅜-inch pitch, .050-gauge chain, and 20-inch bar.

Best cordless: Greenworks G-MAX 40V 16-Inch Cordless Chainsaw

Black and green cordless chainsaw

Greenworks

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: One charge warrants 90 minutes of use and 100 cuts—that’s a lot of trees to cut.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.36 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: 90 minutes
  • Bar length: 16 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 15 inches

Pros

  • Lots of run time
  • Universal battery for other Greenworks products
  • Brushless motor

Cons

  • Chain needs frequent re-tensioning

With a 90-minute runtime per charge, this cordless chainsaw will make up to 100 cuts between charges. Features of this Greenworks chainsaw include toolless chain tensioning, an automatic oiler, a push-button start, and an efficient brushless motor. The battery works with more than 50 tools in the Greenworks outdoor power equipment line.

Best small: Worx WG322 

Black and orange cordless electric chainsaw

WORX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Fast, clean cuts don’t have to come in large packages, and this compact chainsaw is proof.

Specs

  • Weight: 6.19 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: 2 hours
  • Bar length: 10 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 8 inches

Pros

  • Automatic chain tension and lubrication system
  • Separate pole attachment can cut high branches
  • Battery compatible with other Worx power tools

Cons

  • Battery drains fast
  • Best for small jobs

This cordless 20V small chainsaw includes convenient innovations such as automatic chain tensioning, automatic chain lubrication, and a battery compatible with dozens of Worx power tools. Features a 12.5-feet-per-second chain speed that cuts through branches quickly and smoothly. Weighing in at only 6.2 pounds, this Worx chainsaw works hard but won’t tire you out.

Best budget: Oregon CS1500 

Black, gray, and red electric chainsaw

Oregon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Pull this pre-assembled electric chainsaw out of the box and you’re ready to trim branches in your yard.

Specs

  • Weight: 12.6 lbs.
  • Cutting time on one charge: N/A
  • Bar length: 18 inches
  • Maximum cutting diameter: 17 inches

Pros

  • Pre-assembled
  • Little to no maintenance required
  • Lots of safety precautions in place

Cons

  • Instructions are a must-read

Electric chainsaws are not known for feature upgrades, but this Oregon chainsaw includes three significant improvements, including a chain brake for safety and an upgraded oiling system for smoother operation. The other feature of note is the PowerSharp chain that lets you sharpen the blade in only 3 seconds without removing it. This electric chainsaw comes pre-assembled and ready to start cutting right out of the box.

What to consider when buying the best chainsaws

If you’ve already stopped in your local hardware store to check availability, you may have noticed a somewhat limited range of options. Often these places carry only one or two brands, with a heavy focus on gas chainsaws. Buying a chainsaw online is a great way to see the full options. Whether you need a gas, corded electric, or battery-powered chainsaw, you’ll find an excellent range of options. Read on for what you need to know before clicking “add to cart.”

Are you looking for professional quality and power for long days in the woods?

Gas chainsaws are the tool of choice for those who regularly spend long days cutting up big logs away from the house or shop. They offer lots of power to cut through the thickest tree trunks and are limited only by the fuel tank size. Often the user needs a break before the saw runs out of gas. Engine size is expressed in cubic centimeters of displacement (CC), ranging from about 24 to 60 CC in residential models. The larger the engine, the longer the bar and chain it can power, with sizes of 14, 16, 18, and 20 inches commonly available.

Is clean and quiet operation something you value?

Corded electric chainsaws offer unlimited clean, quiet power anywhere within the length of an extension cord. Electric is also an excellent choice for indoor home improvement and DIY projects. Electric saws are significantly quieter and lighter than gas saws and offer impressive power. Plus, they require almost no maintenance other than topping off the bar oil and sharpening the chain. Most utilize either a 12 or 15-amp electric motor. Guide bars on these saws come in 10-, 12-, 14-, 16-, 18-, and 20-inch lengths. The shorter bars are convenient for detailed work in and around shrubbery or landscape trees that could be subject to accidental cuts, scuffs, and scrapes from longer bars.

Battery power offers total mobility with zero emissions

A cordless saw could be a great choice if weight is not much of an issue. The battery pack makes the saw heavier, but mobility improves. In enclosed spaces where an extension cord would cause a trip hazard, cordless would be the safer choice. Cordless chainsaws offer the benefits of clean, quiet electric saw performance without being attached to the outlet. And if you’re worried you’re going you’ll run out of powered packs during an extended job, take along a portable generator so you can swap out and recharge them.

Guide bar sizes include 4- and 6-inch mini saws, as well as more conventional 10-, 12-, 14-, 16-, 18-, and 20-inch lengths. Battery power is expressed in a combination of voltage (V) and amp hours (Ah) ratings. Voltage represents the total available power, while amp hours indicate the runtime. Often these saws are part of larger tool lineups from the same brand that use the same batteries, so it’s pretty easy to have an extra power pack available for extended work time. 

Smaller is better for detailed work in thick vegetation

With the right tools, yard maintenance, and home improvement can become much easier. For many users, the handiest cutter to use around the home is a small chainsaw—often a lightweight corded electric model. A short to mid-size bar in the 12- to 16-inch range is often adequate and, in many cases, most convenient while working around hazards like fences, house siding, landscape lighting, and plants you wish to protect from scars. And it makes a perfect complement to (if not a replacement for) a hedge trimmer.

FAQs

Q: Which brand of chainsaw is the best?

There are lots of great chainsaw brands with long histories of excellent quality. Which brand of chainsaw is the best is a subjective question that would eliminate many best-in-class brands. Some brands known for outstanding products for home users include Echo, Stihl, Oregon, Poulan Pro, Husqvarna, Remington, Greenworks, Worx, and more.

Q: What chainsaws do professionals use?

Professional loggers and others who cut wood all day, every day, go for more power, less weight, and premium parts with tougher alloys. Many manufacturers offer separate lines for residential/farm work and professional work. 

Q: How much does a chainsaw cost?

This depends on its size and features, but our recommendations cost between $108 and $419.

Final thoughts on the best chainsaws

Whether pruning a hedge, cleaning up fallen limbs, or stocking up a woodshed, a good chainsaw is an essential tool for you. The best chainsaw may not be the biggest, fastest, strongest one you can find. It could be the quiet one, the lightweight one, or the one with the lowest maintenance requirements. If you know you’ll only use it once yearly to trim the bottom of the Christmas tree, an electric saw would be perfect. But if you need to thin your 10-acre woodlot, a top-rated powerful gas saw is probably the best choice. If you enjoy working with quality power tools, and you take care of them as they require, the best chainsaw will provide many years of satisfaction.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best chainsaws of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]> The best golf balls of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-golf-balls/ Fri, 21 May 2021 18:59:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=365690
A man playing golf into a large green area with a golf stick and gloves into his hands.
Courtney Cook, Unsplash

Rounding out all you need to know when shopping for the best golf balls

The post The best golf balls of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man playing golf into a large green area with a golf stick and gloves into his hands.
Courtney Cook, Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best low-spin Titleist best golf ball ball best overall Titleist Velocity Golf Balls
SEE IT

This pick allows you to hit farther and with less spin.
Best practice balls A round yellow ball with triangle black holes into it. SKLZ Limited-Flight Practice Golf Balls
SEE IT

These regulation-size practice balls allow you to practice your swing with a limited flight capacity of 45 yards.
Best tour-performance A red with black lines box with golf balls into it. Callaway Chrome Soft
SEE IT

With fast ball speeds, low spin, and distance control, these balls will have you hitting like a pro.

Modern golf balls have come a long way since their hand-carved wooden predecessors of the 14th century. Today’s rubber and plastic models offer so many unique features that they might as well be customized to fit each individual player. So how do you know if you need TaylorMade balls or Titleist balls? Low-spin golf balls or tour-performance models? Practice golf balls or cheap balls? Finding the best golf balls for you can be nearly as challenging as the game itself. But like a good caddy, we’ve done the advance work on your behalf and present our suggestions so you can get right into the swing of things. 

The best golf balls: Reviews & Recommendations

Best low-spin: Titleist Velocity Golf Balls

Titleist best golf ball ball best overall

Titleist

SEE IT

If you’re looking for low-spin Titleist golf balls that’ll have you out-driving the rest of your foursome, the Velocity measures well ahead of the competition. Built to get every yard, this Titleist pick features a high-speed LSX core that jumps off the clubface and a cover with a tiled 350 octahedral dimple pattern that enhances flight and reduces slicing. As with most low-spin balls, the Velocity trades touch around the greens for added distance, but it’s still plenty soft enough for average golfers. Plus, matte green, orange, and pink color options add extra style with those extra yards.  

Best tour-performance: Callaway Chrome Soft

A red with black lines box with golf balls into it.

Callaway

SEE IT

There are few things more satisfying in golf than watching your wedge shot spin back toward the cup, and the Chrome can beeline for the pin with the best of them. A Dual SoftFast Core gives these Callaway golf balls an ultra-soft feel, and a stiff casing and thin, firm outer core, reinforced with graphene, provide premium touch. Still, these soft Callaway balls also offer plenty of distance thanks to a large inner core and urethane cover that are designed to reduce spin on full swings. 

Best for the average golfers: Srixon Soft Feel

A green bow with description of Srixon golf balls and soft feel lettering into it.

Srixon

SEE IT

The best golf balls for average golfers balance distance and feel, control and cost, and that’s exactly what you get with these Srixon balls. The two-piece ball generates medium spin, and the resilient core gets progressively softer as it moves inward, which allows for more yardage off the tee without giving up touch around the greens. The Soft Feel’s low-compression design also minimizes mistakes, meaning you don’t have to wander as far into the trees if you don’t catch it squarely. These balls also give your game a lift with a durable shell that features a 338 Speed Dimple Pattern, reducing drag and keeping your shot in the air longer.

Best practice balls: SKLZ Limited-Flight Practice Golf Balls

A round yellow ball with triangle black holes into it.

SKLZ

SEE IT

Sure, no practice golf balls perfectly replicate the real thing. But these limited-flight plastic trainers can definitely give you some solid reps if you can’t make it to the range. They are regulation size and fly about as well as you could expect from a plastic option, without making you walk too far to chase them—they max out at about 45 yards. The material is said to be dent-proof, but they are plastic balls that you strike with metal clubs, after all, so don’t be too surprised if they don’t last forever, or if you happen to lose them—the half-black color design has a way of disappearing in tall grass. 

Best budget: TaylorMade Distance Plus Golf Balls

A blue and white box with golf balls inside of it.

TaylorMade

SEE IT

For less than a buck a ball, these TaylorMades provide plenty of performance. The reactive core generates low spin, and the aerodynamic dimple pattern reduces resistance, maximizing yardage down the fairway. Like most cheap golf balls, this two-piece ball doesn’t have that Tour-quality touch, but if all you need is something to knock out there for your next game of skins, these TaylorMade ones are the perfect match. 

Things to consider when shopping for the best golf balls

Just as a few simple pointers can straighten out a slice, a few simple considerations can help you find the best golf balls. For starters, they are made in three main types: distance golf balls, low-spin golf balls, and tour-performance golf balls. Distance options feature a large core and thin cover that allows the ball to jump off the clubface. Low-spin balls create more accuracy by reducing sidespin on shots not hit squarely, as well as more distance by lowering trajectories and increasing roll. And performance golf balls help lower-handicap players shave strokes with multiple-layered cores that can be manipulated to hit stinging line drives off the tee and high-arcing irons from the fairway. (Swing hard and you activate the inner core, maximizing distance; swing easier and you only compress the outer core, generating more spin.)

Covers are another consideration. Surlyn is the more common shell material: It’s durable and scratch-resistant, while efficiently transferring energy during impact to increase yardage. Urethane is softer and is used on high-performance golf balls because it provides a better feel, particularly around the greens. Pay attention to a cover’s dimple patterns, as well. Some designs reduce drag, some increased height, others affect spin.

Finally, feel should factor in, which is a bit of a touchy subject because feel can refer to different things. Often, when someone talks about soft golf balls, they are talking about a low-compression golf ball that effectively squishes at impact, limiting spin and increasing yardage. Comparatively, high-compression balls hold their form, requiring faster swing speeds for the ball to really bounce off the clubface, but rewarding players who know how to shape their shots. Still, because golf ball cores have evolved greatly beyond the days of wound-up string, it’s no longer easy to make a straightforward compression comparison between one ball and another. Confusing matters more, a soft cover on a golf ball can create a soft feel off the club, meaning some measurements of softness actually have nothing to do with compression and everything to do with “touch,” which refers to a golfer’s perceived control of the ball, especially in the short game.  

Don’t worry if your head is spinning with thoughts of ball rotations, or if you don’t feel like you’ve quite gotten to the heart of which core type is right. Compare the different types of golf balls as you Read on for more ideas on how to find the best balls for you. 

Do you want to hit it farther and straighter?

To sports fans or casual golfers, spin sounds like something everyone who tees it up should aspire to. The best shooters in basketball put beautiful rotation on the ball, baseball pitchers who are on their game are said to be spinning a gem, and pros on the PGA Tour can wow galleries with backspin on the green. But spin is not actually something every golfer should look for when shopping for balls. In fact, for many golfers, low-spin balls are the way to go because they add distance, increase accuracy, and are often more durable than high-performance balls. How is this possible? Low-spin options produce the right amount of backspin to sail above the fairway without climbing so high in the sky that they lose forward momentum. What’s more, limited spin prevents a poorly struck shot from traveling too far off line—so if you hit a slice, it won’t be nearly as wicked as it would be with a high-spin golf ball. When you do hit it into the rough and brush, and maybe onto a cart path or two, low-spin balls are less likely to be damaged, since they typically have tough, hard shells. If you’re a golfer who knows how to bend a drive around a dog leg or fold a fairway metal into a stiff wind, you should opt for a higher-performing ball, but if you’re a golfer looking to add length and keep it in play, shop low-spin balls.

Is your game Tour ready?

For players who consistently score in the 70s, the right golf ball can be the difference between a number in the red and the black. Tour-performance balls feature multilayered cores that skilled players can use to their advantage. Off the tee, fast swing speeds will compress the ball to its inner core, designed to spin less than the outer core. That outer layer is activated on softer swings, when players have a short iron or wedge in hand and want a higher shot with more backspin to help the ball land softly on the green. 

The covers of tour-performance balls are typically made with urethane, designed to create a soft feel off the clubface that enables more touch. That’s a huge benefit for low-handicap players, but those who shoot in the 90s are probably better off with cheap balls that won’t damage as easily.

The Titleist Pro V1, with its patented Drop-and-Stop greenside control, is perennially revered as a standout on Tour. But other options, including Callaway golf balls, are making a serious run at the title of best balls used by the pros.  

Mid-handicappers benefit from balls that offer distance and control

The best balls for average golfers are plenty long off the tee and soft around the greens. They are also inexpensive enough that you won’t feel obligated to send out a search party every time you knock an errant drive into the trees. An average golfer should look for ones with medium compression, limiting spin on drives but not limiting it so much that the ball won’t spin backward off irons or wedges.  

Does your game need some yard work?

In an ideal world, you’d probably hit a large bucket of balls every day. But in our busy lives, getting to the range isn’t always possible. Plastic or foam training balls bring the range to your backyard, letting you work on your swing while the charcoal is lighting. The best practice balls mimic the flight of real ones reasonably well, without all of the carry. After all, there are only so many times your neighbor will tolerate you sending a shot over the fence. Training balls should also be durable, or at least as durable as you can expect from an imitation of the real thing. On average, plastic practice balls with holes are more durable than solid plastic balls or practice balls made of foam.

Looking for cheap golf balls? There’s plenty to like under $15

Even if you aren’t the kind of golfer who measures a round by how many balls you lost (rather than how many strokes you took), cheap golf balls could still be for you. You can easily get plenty of performance for half the cost of a mid-range ball. Less expensive balls won’t provide the touch and versatility of more expensive balls, but they should provide plenty of distance. Budget balls are typically two-piece balls with a low-spin core and hard shell—just what you need to help keep it in play and keep it in better condition, even when you do, inevitably, find the rough. 

FAQs

Q: What is the best golf ball in 2021?

The best option in 2021 is the golf ball that seems to top the list every year: the Titleist Pro V1. Favored by many professionals, these Titleist ones improve your distance and increase your control, which is exactly why they cost about $5 per ball. 

Q: Which golf balls are best for high handicappers?

The best balls for high handicappers are two-piece, low-spin balls. Limited spin means the ball won’t travel as severely off-course on mishits. Plus, less spin means less height, which translates to more distance. 

Q: Do softer golf balls go further?

In general, softer balls go further because low-compression cores create less spin. However, at high swing speeds, soft golf balls deform at impact, costing energy and reducing ball speed—and, therefore, yardage. 

Related: Looking for more beginner-friendly options? Have a ball looking through these

The final word on shopping for the best golf balls

The best golf balls will help maximize your game. If you’re a higher handicap player, you’ll benefit from low-spin golf balls that increase distance. If you’re a lower handicap player, you’ll depend on performance balls that provide more touch. And no matter how good you are, consider tossing a set of practice balls into your cart, because even if you play your rounds with the perfect ball, you can always find a way to get better. 

The post The best golf balls of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>